^TUiAT-'Htr^    (JkUc)       ^^^l:^!^J^^/^>*^ 


-t-rt-^i* 


e^' 


^' 


X 


WKl-H),  PARSONS  X CV  AMJANV 


'  !  /  ' 


/P 


By  section  fourteen  of  the  "  Act  to  Improve  the  Discipline 
and  Promote  the  Efficiency  of  the  Military  Forces  of  the 
State,"  passed  April  6th,  1858,  these  "  General  Regula- 
tions" are  made  part  of  the  statutes  for  the  government 
of  the  Military  Forces.    The  section  is  as  follows,  viz. : 

"  §  14.  The  Rules  and  Regulations  prepared  by  a  board  of  officers, 
under  section  one  of  title  nine  of  the  Militia  Laws,  having  received 
the  approval  of  the  Commander-in-Chief,  are  hereby  made  part  of 
the  acts  for  the  government  of  the  Military  Forces." 


ivir?5909 


GENERAL  HEAD-QUARTERS,  ) 
State  of  New-York.  ) 

Adjutant-Qexebal's  Office, 

Albany,  April  Qth,  1858. 
GENEBAL  OKDEKS,  ) 

No.  30.  ) 

The  following  General  Regulations  for  the  Military  Forces 
of  the  State  of  New-York  having  been  approved  by  the 
Commander-in-Chief,  he  commands  that  they  be  promul- 
gated, in  pursuance  of  section  one  of  title  nine  of  the 
Militia  Law,  passed  April  17,  1854;  and  they  are  hereby 
promulgated  for  the  government  of  all  concerned :  and  he 
further  commands  that  they  be  strictly  observed,  and  that 
nothing  contrary  to  the  tenor  of  these  Regulations  be  enjoined, 
in  any  part  of  the  Forces  of  the  State,  by  any  Commander 
whatsoever. 

By  order  of  the  Commander-in-Chief. 

FRED'K  TOWNSEND, 

Adjutant- General. 


I 

1858.   ) 


STATE  OF  NEW-YORK, 
Albany,  March  Isf, 

To  His  Excellency  John  A.  King, 

Commander-in-Chief  of  the  Military  Forces  of  the  State. 

Sir, — The  Board  of  Officers  constituted  by  General  Orders 
No.  7,  of  the  13th  of  January,  1855,  and  by  orders  modify- 
ing the  same,  for  the  purpose  of  preparing  "  General  Regu- 
lations" for  the  government  of  the  Military  Forces  of  the 
State,  respectfully  submit  for  your  approval,  as  the  result  of 
their  labors,  the  annexed  Regulations. 

FREDERICK  TOWNSEND, 

Adjutant- General  New -York  State  Militia, 

II.  B.  DURYEA, 

Brig.-Gen'l  ComUding  5th  Brigade  JV.  Y.  S.  M. 

W.  S.  FULLERTON, 
Mojor-GerHl  Com^ding  1th  Division  JV.  Y.  S.  M. 

Z.  T.  BENTLEY, 

Brig.-Gen'l  Com' ding  19th  Brigade  iY.  Y.  S.  M. 

R.  B.  VAN  VALKENBURGH, 
ColoTiel  Com' ding  60th  Regiment  N.  Y.  S.  M. 


GENERAL  REGULATIONS 


MILITA.IIY    FORCES 


STATE  OF  NEW-YORK. 


ARTICLE  L 

MILITARY   DISCIPLINE. 


1.  All  inferiors  are  required  to  obey  strictly,  and  to  execute 
with  alacrity  and  good  faith,  the  lawful  orders  of  the  superiors 
appointed  over  tnem. 

2.  Military  authority  is  to  be  exercised  with  firmness,  but  with 
kindness  and  justice,  to  inferiors.  Punishments  shall  be  strictly 
conformable  to  military  law. 

3.  Superiors  of  every  grade  are  forbidden  to  injure  those  under 
them  by  tyrannical  or  capricious  conduct,  or  by  abusive  language. 

ARTICLE  II. 

DUTIES    OF   THE    SOLDIER. 

4.  The  military  forces  of  the  state  are  organized  in  pursuance  of 
the  provisions  of  the  Constitution  of  the  United  States  and  of  this 
state,  for  the  defence  of  the  country  and  the  maintenance  of  public 
order.  The  citizen  soldier  will  remember  that  it  is  upon  him,  when 
the  civil  power  has  failed,  that  the  state  relies  for  the  vindication  of 
its  laws  and  institutions,  imperiled  from  whatever  cause ;  and  that  in 
becoming  the  soldier,  he  has  lost  none  of  the  characteristics  or  duties 
of  the  citizen,  but  has  assumed,  simply,  such  further  obligations  as 


GENERAL  REGULATIONS 


Precedence  of  Offlc9r$. 


imperatively  demand  of  him  a  conduct  which  shall  inspire  the  confi- 
dence and  respect  of  the  people. 

SUBORDINATION    TO    CIVIL    AUTHORITIES 

6,  Respect  and  obedience  to  the  civil  authorities  of  the  land  is  the 
duty  of  all  citizens,  and  more  particularly  of  those  who  are  armed  in 
the  public  service. 

6.  A  civil  officer,  charged  with  the  execution  of  process,  will,  on 
making  known  his  character  and  business  to  the  commanding  officer 
of  any  parade  or  camp,  be  permitted  to  pass  and  repass  all  guards 
and  sentinels,  for  the  purpose  of  executing  such  process,  at  reason- 
able times. 

ARTICLE  in. 

PRECEDENCE     AND     GRADATION    OF    OFFICERS     AND     NON-COM- 
MISSIONED   OFFICERS. 


1. 

The  Commander-in- 

Chief, 

8.  First  Lieutenant. 

2. 

Major-General, 

9.  Second  Lieutenant, 

3. 

Brigadier-General, 

10.  Sergeant- Major, 

4. 

Colonel, 

IL  Quartermaster  Sergeant, 

5. 

Lieutenant-Colonel , 

12.  First  Sergeant, 

6. 

Major, 

13.  Sergeant, 

7. 

Captoin, 

14.  Corporal, 

and  in  each  grade  by  date  of  election  or  appointment. 

8.  In  cases  whore  commissions  of  the  same  grade  and  date  inter- 
fere, a  retrospect  is  to  be  had  to  former  commissions  in  actual  service 
at  the  time  of  the  appointment,  in  the  assignment  and  exercise  of 
command,  until  the  rank  is  determined  by  lot 

9.  When  a  question  of  rank  shall  arise  under  the  last  section 
it  shall  be  settled  by  lot  in  the  presence  of  the  Commanding  Officer  of 
the  detachment,  Company,  Battalion,  Regiment,  Brigade  or  Division, 
or  of  the  Commander-in-Chief,  as  the  case  may  require. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES. 


Beepormbiliiy — Batik  and  Command. 


ARTICLE  IV. 

GENERAL   RESPONSIBILITY. 

10.  A  system  of  responsibility,  embracing  the  highest  and  lowest 
grades,  is  essential  for  the  maintenance  of  good  order;  and  every 
oflScer  is  therefore  at  all  times,  and  under  all  circumstances,  account- 
able for  the  enforcement  and  preservation  of  the  rules  and  discipline, 
according  to  the  powers  granted  him  by  his  commission. 

11.  The  principle  of  responsibility  indicated  above  will  therefore 
govern  the  several  grades  of  military  persons  in  their  respective 
duties.  For  instance,  the  non-commissioned  oflScers  of  squads 
will  be  responsible  to  the  Lieutenants,  the  Lieutenants  to  the 
Captain,  and  the  Captain  to  the  Colonel;  as  also  will  the  Sergeant 
or  Chief  of  Band,  and  the  Non-commissioned  Staflf,  be  immediately 
responsible  to  the  Adjutant,  and  the  Adjutant  to  the  Colonel  or 
Commanding  Oflficer. 

RANK    AND    COMMAND. 

12.  Whenever  different  corps  or  regiments  happen  to  join  or  do 
duty  together,  the  officer  highest  in  rank  of  the  line,  present  on  duty, 
has  the  right  to  command  the  whole,  and  give  the  orders  needful  to 
the  service. 

13.  An  officer  entrusted  with  the  command  of  a  post,  detachment, 
guard  or  separate  force,  will  not  surrender  it  to  another  officer,  unless 
regularly  relieved,  except  in  case  of  sickness  or  inability  to  perform 
his  duty,  when  the  officer  next  in  rank  of  the  line  present,  and  on 
duty,  will  succeed,  as  a  matter  of  course. 

14.  A  Detachment  is  a  body  of  troops  sent  from  the  main  body 
to  perform  a  particular  service,  and  to  be  absent  for  a  limited  time ; 
and  may  be  placed  under  command  of  an  officer  assigned  for  that 
purpose. 

15.  A  main  body  is  an  army,  or  any  body  of  troops  assembled  in 
the  field,  or  garrison  of  any  fortress  or  post. 


GENERAL  REGULATIONS 


Bucoettion  in  Command, 


16.  No  staff  commission  shall  confer  command,  except  as  expressly 
provided  for  by  law,  tactics  or  the  regulations. 

17.  Brevet  commissions  are  simply  honorary,  and  confer  no  com- 
mand or  precedence  whatever. 

18.  No  officer  shall  lose  command  by  reason  of  temporary  absence 
from  his  military  district.  But  in  case  of  emergency,  viz :  invasion, 
insurrection,  or  when  ordered  to  aid  the  civil  authority,  the  senior 
officer  of  the  line  present,  belonging  respectively  to  any  Division, 
Brigade,  Regiment  or  Company,  will  assume  the  command  thereof, 
and  issue  such  orders  as  may  be  necessary  in  obedience  to  orders  re- 
ceived by  him,  and  he  will  forthwith  transmit  notice  of  the  orders  so 
received  and  issued  by  him  to  the  regular  Commandant  of  the  Division, 
Brigade,  Regiment  or  Company. 

19.  When  orders  for  encampment,  parade  or  drill  are  issued,  re- 
quiring immediate  action,  the  same  rule  shall  be  followed  by  all 
subordinate  officers  as  is  above  given  in  respect  to  orders  in  case  of 
emergency. 

20.  In  camp  and  in  the  field,  tho  senior  officers  of  the  line,  actually 
present  and  on  duty,  with  the  respective  Divisions,  Brigades,  Regi- 
ments and  Companies,  shall  be  in  command  thereof  for  all  the 
purposes  of  duty  at  such  camp  or  in  the  field ;  but  no  officer  who 
may  come  temporarily  in  command,  in  pursuance  of  any  of  the  fore- 
going provisions,  shall  perform  any  duty  of  such  regular  com- 
mandant, not  connected  with  the  emergency  or  required  to  be 
performed  in  the  camp  or  field. 

ARTICLE  V. 

SUCCESSION   IN    COMMAND. 

21.  An  officer  who  succeeds  to  any  command  or  duty  stands  in 
regard  to  his  duties  in  tlie  same  situation  as  his  predecessor.  The 
officer  relieved  shall  turn  over  to  his  successor  all  orders  in  force  at 
tho  time,  pertaining  to  his  command  or  duty.     Officeis  who  are  pro- 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES. 


Resignation  of  Officers —  Commander'in'Chief  and  his  Staff. 

moted,  or  intend  to  remove  from  their  command,  or  have  leave  of 
absence,  shall  also  deliver  all  public  property  and  funds  in  their 
hands  to  their  respective  successors,  and  shall  take  a  receipt  therefor. 

22.  An  officer  rendered  supernumerary,  or  vsrho  shall  have  resigned, 
shall  turn  over  to  his  successor  in  command  all  the  public  property 
in  his  possession,  and  all  other  property  pertaining  to  his  command, 
for  which  he  may  be  responsible  to  the  State,  including  books,  blanks 
and  documents ;  and  the  successor  shall  give  him  duplicate  receipts 
for  the  same,  which  receipts  shall  specify  the  condition  of  the  pro- 
perty. One  of  these  receipts  shall  be  transmitted  to  the  Adjutant- 
General,  to  insure  a  correct  accountability,  the  other  retained  by  the 
officer  relieved,  for  his  own  security. 

23.  An  officer  in  a  temporary  command  shall  not,  except  in  urgent 
cases,  alter  or  annul  the  standing  orders  of  the  regular  or  permanent 
commander  without  authority  from  the  next  higher  commander. 

ARTICLE  VL 

RESIGNATION    OF   OFFICERS. 

24.  No  officer  will  be  considered  out  of  service,  on  the  tender  of  his 
resignation,  until  it  shall  have  been  duly  accepted  by  the  proper 
authority. 

25.  Resignations  shall  be  forwarded,  immediately  on  their  accept- 
ance, by  the  officer  accepting  the  same,  to  the  Adjutant-General; 
and  all  vacancies  occuring  in  Regiments,  Brigades  or  Divisions  shall 
be  immediately  reported,  to  the  Adjutant-General,  by  the  officer  in 
command. 

26.  In  time  of  war,  or  with  an  army  in  the  field,  resignations  shall 
take  effect  within  thirty  days  from  the  date  of  the  order  of  acceptance. 

ARTICLE  VIL 

THE    COMMANDER-IN-CHIEF    AND    HIS    STAFF. 

27.  The  Commander-in-Chief,  being  charged  by  the  Constitution 
of  the  State  with  the  command  of  the  military  forces  thereof,  will 

Military.  1* 


GENERAL  REGULATIONS 


Commanding  Offieert  —  Regiments. 


have  under  his  supervision  the  whole  military  establishment  in  all 
its  various  departments.  He  will  order  from  time  to  time  such 
parades,  encampments  and  drills  of  the  military  forces,  or  any  part 
thereof,  or  of  the  commissioned  officers,  as  he  may  deem  necessary 
for  improvement,  instruction  and  discipline,  or  to  meet  any  special 
exigency  of  the  state.  At  the  encampments  and  drills  of  commis- 
sioned officers,  he  will  appoint  such  competent  persons  as  instructors, 
and  will  require  such  military  service  to  be  performed,  as  he  may  seo 
fit,  irrespective  of  all  questions  of  rank. 

28.  The  Staff  of  the  Commander-in-Chief,  and  the  several  Staff 
Departments,  shall  rank  as  follows  : 

1.  Adjutant-General,  6.  Surgeon-General, 

2.  Inspector-General,  7.  Quartermaster-General, 
8.  Commissary-General,  8.  Paymaster-General, 

4.  Engineer-in-Chief,  9.  Aids  de  Camp, 

6.  Judge  Advocate-General,     10.  Military  Secretary. 

ARTICLE  VIII. 

COMMANDING    OFFICERS. 

29.  An  officer  invested  with  command  is  responsible  for  the 
discipline  of  the  troops  under  his  orders,  and  for  the  good  condition 
of  everything  entrusted  to  his  charge.  It  is  his  duty  to  see  that  the 
regulations  are  strictly  enforced,  that  the  necessary  arms,  equip- 
ments and  ammunition  are  procured  from  the  Commissary -General, 
and  kept  in  a  ])roper  state ;  that  his  command  is  properly  instructed 
and  exercised ;  that  the  required  drills,  improvement  meetings  and 
parades  are  ordered ;  and  he  will  hold  himself,  and  the  forces  subject 
to  his  control,  ready  at  all  times  for  active  service,  upon  the  shortest 
notice. 

ARTICLE  IX. 

REGIMENTS. 

80.  The  regiment  is  the  unit  of  organization  in  the  militia;  com- 
panies are  simply  subdivisions  of  that  unit. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES. 


RegimenU. 


SI.  Unanimity  and  good  understanding  amongst  the  oflScers,  as 
connected  with  the  character  and  discipline  of  a  regiment,  are  objects 
peculiarly  deserving  the  attention  of  the  commanding  officer.  His 
timely  interference  to  prevent  disputes ;  his  advice  to  the  young  and 
inexperienced ;  his  protection  of,  and  favor  to  the  deserving ;  and 
his  immediate  reprehension  of  any  conduct  likely  to  interrupt  the 
harmony  of  the  corps,  are  the  best  means  of  securing  these  desirable 
ends,  towards  the  attainment  of  which  he  has  a  right  to  demand,  and 
ought  to  receive,  the  assistance  of  every  officer.  It  is  well  known 
that  perfect  civility,  and  the  most  conciliatory  manners,  are  com- 
patible with  the  exercise  of  the  strictest  command ;  and  it  is  to  be 
observed,  that  the  commanding  officer  is  equally  responsible  for  the 
maintenance  of  discipline  and  subordination  in  his  regiment,  whether 
on  parade,  at  the  mess,  or  in  any  other  situation. 

32.  To  promote  the  attainment  of  a  knowledge  of  parade  duties, 
the  commanders  of  regiments  will,  at  their  discretion,  but  under  their 
own  eye,  direct  the  field  officers  and  captains  to  take  command  of 
the  parade,  without  regard  to  their  respective  rank. 

33.  The  battalion  companies  of  regiments  doing  duty  as  infantry, 
will  be  drawn  up  in  line  from  right  to  left,  as  follows :  First,  fifth, 
fourth,  seventh,  third,  eighth,  sixth,  second,  according  to  the  rank 
of  their  respective  captains  ;  and  after  the  companies  once  have  their 
positions  assigned,  they  will  retain  them  for  all  subsequent  forma- 
tions, until  a  change  is  directed  by  the  commanding  officer. 

34.  In  regiments  doing  duty  as  Light  Infantry,  the  order  from 
right  to  left  will  be,  first,  sixth,  fourth,  ninth,  third,  eighth,  fifth, 
tenth,  seventh,  second.  If  there  be  nine  companies,  or  a  less  number, 
the  rule  will  be  the  same  ;  the  first  and  second  captains  on  the  right 
and  left,  and  the  third  captain  with  the  right  centre  company.  All 
regiments  having  more  than  eight  companies  doing  duty  in  the  same 
arm,  will  follow  the  order  prescribed  in  this  paragraph. 

35.  Flank  Companies  doing  duty  in  the  same  arm  as  the  Battalion, 
will  be  uniformed  and  take  post,  as  Battalion  companies.  But  no 
flank  company  will  be  permitted  to  do  duty  with  the  regiment  in  any 


GENERAL  REGULATIONS 


Oompaniea  —  Officers. 


other  arm  than  that  in  which  it  is  organized,  except  by  the  special 
order  of  the  Commander-in-Chief. 

86.  The  section  of  Light  Artillery  authorized  to  be  attached  to  a 
regiment,  will  consist  of  one  First  and  one  Second  Lieutenant,  one 
ordnance  sergeant,  one  first  and  one  second  sergeant,  two  corporals, 
and  not  more  than  twenty-four  nor  less  than  fourteen  privates.  Appli- 
cations for  the  organization  of  sections  must  be  signed  by  at  least 
eighteen  persons  liable  to  military  duty  in  the  regimental  district ; 
and  must  be  consented  to  and  approved  in  the  manner  required 
for  companies.  Ordnance  sergeants  take  grade  next  before  first 
sergeants. 

37.  Every  article,  excepting  arms  and  accoutrements,  belonging 
to  the  regiment,  is  to  be  marked  with  the  number  of  the  regiment. 

Such  articles  as  belong  to  companies  are  to  be  marked  with  the 
letter  of  the  company  and  number  of  the  regiment ;  and  such  as 
belong  to  men,  with  their  individual  numbers,  and  the  letter  of  the 
company. 

88.  Sergeant  standard  bearers,  trumpet-major  and  drum-major  of 
a  regiment,  rank  as  first  sergeants. 

ARTICLE  X. 

COMPANIES OFFICERS. 

39.  Captains  or  commanders  of  companies  fill  one  of  the  most  im- 
portant situations  in  the  service,  when  they  are  viewed  in  relation  to 
the  direct  influence  they  exercise  upon  the  soldiery ;  to  them,  there- 
fore, attaches  the  high  responsibility  of  the  instruction,  good  order, 
efficiency,  and  discipline  of  their  appropriate  commands,  and  no  one 
should  bo  elected  to  that  office  unless  well  qualified,  or  willing  to 
qualify  himself,  for  the  faithful  performance  of  the  duties  of  the 
station. 

40.  It  is  expected  that  every  Commandant  of  a  company,  who  has 
been  commissioned  one  yeor,  shall  bo  capable  of  commanding  and 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES. 


Non-commissioned   Offlcer%. 


exercising  his  company  in  every  situation,  and  perfectly  acquainted 
with  its  interior  management  and  discipline.  Commandants  of  com- 
panies will  be  held  responsible  for  the  accuracy  of  the  rolls  of  the 
uniformed  members  of  their  respective  companies,  and  should  care- 
fully correct  them  before  they  issue  notices  for  company  elections. 

41.  In  case  of  a  vacancy  in  the  office  of  Captain,  or  in  his  absence, 
the  command  of  the  company  will  devolve  on  the  officer  next  in 
rank;  and  should  a  company  be  left  without  a  commissioned  officer, 
while  on  duty,  the  Commander  of  the  regiment  will  order  an  officer 
of  another  company  to  take  the  command.  Captains  will  require  their 
Lieutenants  to  assist  them  in  the  performance  of  all  company  duties ; 
the  knowledge  thus  acquired  being  essential  to  every  company  officer. 

42.  It  is  the  duty  of  Lieutenants  to  distribute  such  orders  as  the 
Commanding  Officer  may  direct,  and  to  assist  him  in  making  out  rolls, 
reports  and  returns,  in  keeping  the  books  of  the  company,  and  in  all 
duties  pertaining  to  its  welfare.  Each  Lieutenant  will  be  charged 
with  a  squad  or  squads  of  the  company  to  which  he  belongs,  for  the 
supervision  of  order,  cleanliness  and  discipline. 

NON-COMMISSIONED    OFFICERS. 

43.  It  is  of  essential  importance  to  the  service  that  the  station  and 
respectability  of  the  non-commissioned  officer  be  upheld ;  and  that 
none  but  judicious  and  well  qualified  persons  be  elected  thereto.  It 
is  enjoined  upon  all  officers  to  be  cautious  in  reproving  non-commis- 
sioned officers  in  the  presence  or  hearing  of  privates,  lest  their 
authority  be  weakened ;  and  non-commissioned  officers  are  not  to 
be  sent  to  the  guard-room  and  mixed  with  privates  during  confine- 
ment, but  be  considered  as  placed  in  arrest,  except  in  aggravated 
cases  where  escape  may  be  apprehended. 

44.  In  case  of  neglect  of  duty,  misconduct  or  inefficiency  upon 
the  part  of  any  non-commissioned  officer,  authority  is  vested  in  the 
Commandant  of  the  regiment  to  annul  his  warrant  and  reduce  him 
to  the  ranks. 


10  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 


CompanU*  —  Internal  Economy  —  Armt  —  AccoutremenU,  dbe. 

45.  Uniform  companies  may,  b)'  their  by-laws,  prescribe  the  length 
of  time  for  which  any  or  all  of  their  non-commissioned  officers  are 
elected. 

46.  Independent  of  the  particular  duties  required  of  non-commis- 
sioned officers,  when  in  the  ranks,  according  to  the  systems  of  tactical 
instruction,  it  is  also  their  duty,  on  parades  or  in  camp,  to  observe 
the  conduct  of  the  privates,  and  to  report  to  their  immediate  Com- 
mandant every  breach  of  the  regulations,  or  of  the  orders  of  the 
parade  or  camp. 

INTERNAL    ECONOMY    OF    COMPANIES. 

47.  The  Captain  will  cause  the  men  of  the  company  to  b«»  numbered, 
in  a  regular  series  including  the  non-commissioned  officers,  and 
divided  into  four  squads,  each  to  be  put  under  the  charge  of  a  non- 
commissioned officer. 

48.  As  far  as  practicable,  the  men  of  each  squad  will  be  quartered 
together. 

49.  The  utmost  attention  will  be  paid  by  commanders  of  companies 
to  the  cleanliness  of  their  men,  as  to  their  persons,  clothing,  arms, 
accoutrements  and  equipments,  and  also  as  to  their  quarters  or 
tents. 

50.  In  armories,  the  arms  should  be  placed  in  arm  racks,  stoppers 
in  the  muzzles,  the  cocks  let  down,  the  bayonets  in  their  scabbards, 
the  accoutrements  suspended  over  the  arms,  and  the  swords  ( if  any) 
hung  by  the  belts  on  pegs,  and  the  number  of  the  soldier  placed 
against  them. 

51.  Commanders  of  companies  and  squads  will  see  that  the  arms 
and  accoutrements  in  possession  of  the  men  are  kept  in  good  order, 
and  that  proper  care  be  taken  in  cleaning  them. 

52.  Commanders  of  companies  will  see  that  belts  are  properly 
fitted  to  the  body ;  and  it  is  strictly  forbidden  to  cut  them  without 
the  sanction  of  the  commander  of  the  company,  and  then  only  when 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  11 

Companies  —  Internal  Economy  —  Arms  and  Accoutrements. 

it  is  ascertained  to  be  impossible  to  make  tbera  fit  properly  without. 
Pipe  clay  or  whiting  will  be  used  to  clean  them,  if  the  belts  are 
white. 

53.  Cartridge  boxes  and  bayonet  scabbards  should  be  polished 
with  blacking — varnish  is  injurious  to  the  leather. 

54.  All  arms  and  equipments  issued  to  the  troops,  when  not  in 
use,  will  be  kept  in  proper  armories  under  the  charge  of  suitable 
persons,  and  they  will  always  be  placed  in  condition  for  immediate  use. 
The  barrel  of  the  musket  or  other  fire-arm  will  constantly  be  kept 
clean  and  free  from  rust ;  great  care  should  be  taken  in  rubbing  to 
prevent  bruising  or  bending  the  barrel ;  it  should  never  be  rubbed 
lengthwise.  After  firing,  it  will  be  necessary  to  wash  out  the  bore, 
to  wipe  it  dry,  and  then  to  pass  a  bit  of  cloth,  slightly  greased,  to 
the  bottom.  In  these  operations  a  rod  of  wood,  with  a  loop  in  one 
end,  is  to  be  used  instead  of  the  rammer,  which  is  never  to  be  thus 
employed  when  it  can  be  avoided.  The  bore  of  the  barrel  will  at  all 
times,  except  in  exercise,  be  secured  against  the  weather  by  means 
of  a  tompion.  A  rind  of  fresh  pork,  without  salt,  is  better  than  oil 
for  greasing  the  metallic  parts  of  the  musket.  Arms,  with  per- 
cussion locks,  require  to  be  handled  with  much  care  to  prevent  the 
hammer  ( cock )  from  becoming  loose,  by  which  its  direct  fall  on  the 
cone  (nipple)  would  be  rendered  uncertain ;  and  snapping  the  piece 
without  a  cap  upon  the  cone  is  prohibited,  unless  the  cone  is  covered, 
or  otherwise  protected. 

When  unloaded,  they  will  at  all  times  be  used  with  the  hammer 
down  upon  the  cone ;  but  when  loaded,  and  the  cap  or  primer  being 
on  the  cone,  the  piece  will  be  carried  half-cocked  for  safety.  When 
there  is  no  cap  on  the  cone,  the  vent  will  be  closed,  with  the  hammer 
resting  upon  it.  For  exercise  each  soldier  will  keep  provided  a  piece 
of  sole  leather  to  fit  the  cup  or  countersink  of  the  hammer. 

55.  Troops  having  arms  with  the  Maynard  lock,  will  be  careful  to 
remove  from  the  magazine  of  the  lock,  the  primer  or  tape,  when  off 
duty,  and  replace  it  in  the  boxes  to  be  provided  for  such  purpose,  to 
be  kept  in  the  cartridge  boxes. 


12  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Companie9 — Internal  Economy  —  AmmuniUon  —  Ehap$aek$  — Drums,  Se. 

56.  At  no  time,  and  under  no  pretence,  are  the  arms  to  be  left 
loaded  in  armories,  quarters  or  tents,  or  when  men  are  off  duty, 
unless  in  expectation  of  an  attack ;  and  no  person  shall,  while  on 
duty,  load  his  gun  without  orders. 

57.  No  company  or  regiment,  or  any  part  thereof,  shall,  on  any 
parade  or  occasion,  appear  with  arms  loaded  or  ball  cartridges 
in  their  boxes,  without  permission  or  orders  from  the  Commandant 
of  their  regiment  or  brigade,  except  in  cases  otherwise  provided  for 
by  law. 

58.  To  carry  out  the  foregoing  regulation.  Commandants  of  com- 
panies, before  appearing  on  parade,  are  required  to  cause  the  arms 
and  accoutrements  of  their  men  to  be  examined,  loads  to  be  drawn, 
and  cartridge  boxes  to  be  emptied. 

59.  Ammunition  will  be  frequently  exposed  to  the  dry  air,  or 
sunned. 

60.  Ammunition  issued  to  troops  will,  to  prevent  waste  or  injury, 
be  inspected  frequently ;  each  man  will  be  made  to  pay  for  the  rounds 
expended  without  orders,  or  not  in  the  way  of  duty,  or  which  may 
be  damaged  or  lost  by  his  neglect. 

61.  The  greatest  precaution  is  necessary  to  ascertain  that  no  ball 
cartridges  are  mixed  with  the  blank  cartridges  issued  to  the  men. 

62.  All  knapsacks  are  to  be  painted  black ;  those  for  the  Artillery 
will  be  marked  in  the  centre  of  the  cover  with  the  number  of  the 
regiment,  in  figures  \%  inch  in  length,  of  the  character  called  full 
face,  with  yellow  paint;  those  for  the  Infantry  and  other  corps, 
marked  in  the  same  way,  with  white  paint.  The  knapsack  straps  will 
be  black. 

63.  The  knapsacks  will  also  bo  marked  upon  the  inner  side  with  the 
letter  of  the  company,  and  the  number  of  the  soldier,  on  such  part 
as  may  be  readily  observed  at  inspections. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  13 

Cbmpanies— Internal  Economy — Drums,  Dress,  Guns,  Carriages  and  Implements. 

64.  Haversacks  will  be  marked  upon  the  flap  with  the  number 
of  the  regiment,  the  letter  of  the  company  and  number  of  the 
soldier,  in  black  letters  and  figures.  It  will  be  worn  on  the  left  side 
on  marches,  guard,  and  when  paraded  for  detached  service  —  the  can- 
teen outside  the  haversack. 

65.  The  ft-ont  of  the  drums  will  bo  marked  with  the  arms  of  the 
state,  on  a  blue  field  for  the  Infantry,  and  on  a  red  field  for  the 
Artillery.  The  letter  of  the  company  and  number  of  the  regiment, 
under  the  arms,  in  a  scroll. 

66.  The  prescribed  dress  for  officers  and  soldiers  will  be  strictly 
complied  with,  and  no  officer  will  be  justified  in  making  or  allowing 
any  alterations  therein. 

67.  Officers,  on  duty  with  troops,  will  wear  their  proper  uniform. 

68.  Soldiers  on  duty  will  wear  the  prescribed  uniform.  When  on 
fatigue  parties  they  will  wear  the  proper  fatigue  dress. 

69.  When  in  camp  or  on  parades,  if  the  weather  or  circumstances 
should  make  it  necessary  for  the  comfort  or  health  of  officers  or 
privates  on  duty,  the  Commandant,  by  special  order,  may  authorize 
the  use  of  additional  clothing. 

70.  All  field-pieces  issued  to  companies  or  regiments  should  be 
kept  clean  and  dry ;  their  vents  frequently  examined  to  see  that 
they  are  clear ;  the  elevating  screw  wiped  clean,  worked  and  oiled. 
When  tarpaulins  are  placed  over  them,  they  should  occasionally  be 
removed,  the  guns  and  carriages  brushed  off,  and,  if  damp,  allowed 
to  dry. 

71.  An  old  sponge  staff  and  head  should  be  used  for  drill.  The 
new  sponges  should  never  be  used  unless  the  gun  is  fired.  The 
implements  should  all  be  kept  under  cover,  and  should  be  examined 
and  cleaned  as  often  as  once  a  month.  The  harness  and  leather 
articles  should  be  brushed  and  greased  with  neaVsfoot  oil  as  often  as 
their  condition  requires  it;  if  they  have  a  reddish  hue,  mix  a  little 
lamp-black  with  the  oil.    First  brush  the  leather  carefully,  then  pass 

Military.  2 


14  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

JHmihUity  and  Eitpulsions. 

over  it  a  sponge  wet  with  lukewarm  water,  then  apply  the  oil  with  a 
soft  brush  before  the  leather  is  quite  dry. 

72.  The  ammunition  should  be  frequently  examined,  and  kept  dry. 
Cartridge  bags  should  be  kept  ready  for  filling;  also  port-fires,  fuzes, 
tubes  and  primers  ready  for  use. 

73.  In  camp  or  barracks,  the  company  officers  must  visit  the 
kitchen  daily  and  inspect  the  kettles,  and,  at  all  times,  carefully 
attend  to  the  messing  and  economy  of  their  respective  companies. 
The  commanding  officer  of  the  post  or  regiment  will  make  frequent 
inspections  of  the  kitchens  and  messes. 

74.  On  marches,  and  in  the  field,  the  only  mess  furniture  of  the 
soldier  will  be  one  tin  plate,  one  tin  cup,  one  knife,  fork  and  spoon 
to  each  man,  to  be  carried  by  himself  on  the  march. 

75.  Messes  will  be  prepared  by  privates  of  squads,  including  pri- 
vate musicians,  each  taking  his  tour,  unless  other  provision  is 
made  for  cooking. 

76.  No  persons  will  be  allowed  to  visit  or  remain  in  the  kitchens, 
except  such  as  may  come  on  duty,  or  be  occupied  as  cooks. 

ARTICLE  XI. 

DISABILITY    AND    EXPULSIONS. 

77.  Whenever  any  non-commissioned  officer,  musician  or  private 
shall  become  incapable  of  performing  his  duties,  in  consequence  of 
disease  or  infirmity,  and  shall  so  continue  for  the  space  of  one  yen 
or  whenever  the  surgeon  of  any  regiment  shall  furnish  the  Coni- 
mandant  thereof  with  a  certificate  of  the  permanent  disability  of 
such  person  to  perform  military  duty,  the  Commandant  of  such 
regiment  may  give  to  said  non-commissioned  officer,  musician  or 
l)rivate  a  discharge  from  further  service  in  the  company,  and 
upon  presenting  the  same  to  the  commandant  thereof,  his  name 
shall  be  stricken  from  the  rolls. 

78.  For  violation  of  the  by-laws  of  any  uniformed  company,  any 
nou-commissioued  officer,  musician  or  private,  by  a  vote  of  the  coiU' 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  16 

Absence. 

pany,  may  be  expelled  therefrom ;  and,  upon  the  action  of  the 
company  being  confirmed  in  orders  by  the  Commandant  of  the  regi- 
ment, the  name  of  such  person  shall  be  stricken  from  the  roll  of  such 
company. 

(See  Title  5,  Art.  1,  §32,  Militia  Law,  passed  1854. ) 

79.  Commandants  of  companies  shall  report  immediately  to  the 
Commandant  of  the  regiment  the  action  of  the  company  in  relation 
to  expulsions,  for  his  approval  or  disapproval. 

ARTICLE  XII. 

ABSENCE. 

80.  The  Commander-in-Chief  and  the  Commandants  of  Brigades 
may  grant  leave  of  absence  to  commissioned  officers  in  the  cases 
herein  prescribed;  and  every  officer  who  shall  be  absent  from  his 
command  twelve  months,  without  leave  of  the  commanding  officer 
of  his  brigade,  shall  be  considered  as  having  vacated  his  office,  and 
a  new  election  shall  be  held,  without  delay,  to  fill  the  vacancy  so 
created. 

[  Title  2d,  §  38,  Militia  Law  of  1854.  ] 

81.  Commandants  of  Brigades  may  grant  leave  of  absence  for  four 
months  beyond  the  time  contemplated  by  the  foregoing  regulation, 
but  in  no  case  will  such  leave  be  granted  when  a  regimental  district 
shall  be  left  without  a  commissioned  field  officer  in  command. 

82.  When  an  officer  shall  design  to  be  continuously  absent  from 
his  command  for  the  period  of  four  months,  or  longer,  at  any  one 
time,  he  shall  apply  for  leave  of  absence  to  the  Commander-in-Chief, 
if  he  be  a  general  officer,  or  upon  the  staff  of  the  Commander-in- 
Chief,  or  the  staff  of  a  division ;  and  if  he  be  not,  then  to  the  com- 
mandant of  his  brigade.  If  such  application  be  granted,  and  the 
person  so  applying  is  a  commanding  officer,  the  officer  next  in  rank 
entitled  to  such  command  shall  be  placed  in  command  ;  and  all  orders 
shall  thenceforth  be  issued  to  and  by  the  officer  so  placed  in  tempo- 


16  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Abtenee  —  Sptcifled  Duty  —  FurlougTu 

rary  command,  until  the  officer  absent  shall    report  himself  for 
duty. 

83.  No  such  leave  will  be  granted,  unless  the  Commandant  of  the 
regiment,  if  the  applicant  be  a  field  or  company  officer,  shall  consent 
tliereto ;  and  in  the  case  of  subaltern  officers,  the  Commandant  of  the 
company,  and  the  officer  next  in  rank  below  the  officer  who  may 
obtain  such  leave,  must  be  forthwith  notified  thereof  by  the  officer 
granting  such  leave. 

84.  In  no  case  will  leaves  of  absence  be  granted,  so  that  a  company 
be  left  without  one  of  its  commissioned  officers,  or  that  a  gan-isoned 
post  or  camp  be  left  without  two  commissioned  officers  and  compe- 
tent medical  attendance ;  nor  shall  leave  of  absence  be  granted  to  an 
officer  during  the  season  of  active  operations,  except  on  urgent 
necessity. 

85.  Whenever  an  officer  on  duty  is  detached  for  the  performance 
of  a  specified  duty,  that  service  being  performed,  he  will  return  to  his 
previous  station,  unless  otherwise  directed,  and  report  immediately 
to  the  Commanding  Officer. 

FURLOUGHS. 

86.  Every  Colonel  or  other  officer  commanding  a  regiment,  may 
give  furloughs  to  non-commissioned  officers,  musicians  and  privates, 
in  such  numbers  and  for  so  long  a  time  as  he  may  deem  proper,  but 
the  Commanding  Officer  of  the  force  may  prohibit  the  granting  of 
furloughs. 

87.  Soldiei*s  on  furlough  will  not  be  permitted  to  take  tlicir  arms 
or  accoutrements. 

88.  If  a  soldier  fail  to  rejoin  his  regiment,  company  or  troop  on 
the  expiration  of  his  furlough,  and  no  satisfactory  reason  be  rendered 
for  his  continued  absence,  he  shall  be  returned  for  disobedience  of 
orders,  and  in  case  of  war ,  as  a  deserter,  and  proceeded  against 
accordingly. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  17 

Form  of  Furlough  —  Chaplains  —  Religious  Services. 

FORM    OF    FURLOUGH. 

Head-Quarters,  1 

•      18         .    ) 

( , )  of  Company  (  —  ),  Captain  ( ) 

( )  Regiment,  has  leave  of  absence  from  the  ( )  day  of  ( 

instant^  at o'clock^  A.   M.,)   until  the  ( day  of 

instant,  at  —  o'clock  P.  M.  ),  he  having  received  a  furlough  for  that 
time;  at  which  last  period  he  will  rejoin  his  company,  and  report 
himself  to  these  head-quarters. 
Signature  of  officer    ) 

giving  furlough.      )  . 

ARTICLE   XIII. 

CHAPLAINS, 

89.  The  rank  of  Chaplain  in  a  regiment  shall  be  that  of  Captain. 

90.  When  required  he  will  visit  the  sick,  in  hospital  or  in  quarters, 
in  order  to  afford  religious  advice  and  instruction ;  also  to  perform 
such  other  duties  of  his  office  as  may  be  imposed  upon  him  by  his 
Commanding  Officer. 

91.  Officers  in  command  of  camps  are  recommended  to  provide 
for  the  religious  duties  of  the  Sabbath,  by  holding  services  upon  that 
day,  and  if  no  Chaplain  be  present,  by  attending  with  their  officers 
and  men  on  divine  worship,  whenever  a  neighboring  church  or  reli- 
gious congregation  may  offer  a  proper  opportunity ;  but  no  officer  or 
private  shall  be  compelled  to  attend  upon  any  place  of  worship  con- 
trary to  his  conscientious  scruples. 

92.  The  men  are  to  attend  service  with  their  side  arms,  and  they 
are  to  be  marched  with  the  utmost  regularity  to  and  from  the  church 
or  place  where  service  is  performed,  without  music. 

Military.  2* 


18  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 


Sutlers  — IHscharffm  —  Arregt9  and  Oovjlnementa. 


SUTLERS. 

93.  Sutlers  shall  be  appointed  and  may  be  removed  by  the  Com- 
mandants of  regiments  and  camps. 

94.  Officers  in  command  of  camps  or  posts  will  make  all  necessary 
orders  for  the  regulation  and  control  of  Sutlers ;  and  no  Sutler,  or 
any  other  person  acting  for  him,  shall  be  permitted  to  bring  any 
spiritous  liquor,  cards  or  gaming  materials  within  any  camp  grounds. 

ARTICLE  XIV. 

DISCHARGES. 

95.  The  Commanding  Officers  of  regiments  will  grant  all  discharges 
authorized  by  law  to  non-commissioned  officers,  musicians  and  pri- 
vates, on  the  presentation  of  a  certificate  of  the  Commanding  Officer 
of  the  company  to  which  they  belong,  showing  them  to  be  entitled 
to  such  discharge. 

96.  All  discharges  of  commissioned  officers,  with  a  view  to  their 
exemption,  under  the  law,  from  military  service,  will  be  granted  by 
the  Commander-in-Chief,  who  will  furnish  certificates  thereof,  upon 
such  returns,  to  the  Adjutant-General's  office,  by  the  Commandants 
of  divisions  and  brigades,  as  will  show  such  officers  entitled  to  a 
discharge. 

97.  The  Adjutant-General  will  provide  and  furnish  to  Command- 
ants of  divisions,  brigades,  regiments  and  companies,  all  necessary 
blanks  for  returns  and  certificates  under  this  article. 

ARTICLE  XV. 

ARRESTS    AND    CONFINEMENTS. 

98.  All  officers  have  power  to  part  and  quell  quarrels,  frays  and 
disorders,  though  the  persons  concerned  should  belong  to  another 
regiment,  troop  or  company;  and  either  to  order  officers  into  arrest, 
or  non-commissioned  officers,  or  musicians  and  privates  into  con- 
flucment,  and  immediately  acquaint  their  proper  superior  offiv^ers 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  19 

Arrests  and  Confineinenta. 

thereof;  and  whosoever  shall  refuse  to  obey  such  officer  (though  of 
an  inferior  rank),  or  shall  draw  his  sword  upon  him,  shall  be  amena- 
ble to  trial  by  court  martial. 

99.  An  arrest  is  the  suspension  of  the  military  functions  of  an 
officer,  non-commissioned  officer,  musician  or  private,  by  the  direction 
of  some  officer  having  authority  to  order  such  arrest. 

100.  A  formal  arrest  is  made  by  communicating  to  the  person 
arrested  the  order  of  the  officer  directing  the  arrest. 

101.  A  forcible  arrest  is  only  warranted  when  necessary  to  place 
the  person  arrested  under  guard  or  in  confinement,  as  authorized 
by  law. 

102.  None  but  Commanding  Officers  have  power  to  place  officers 
under  arrest,  except  for  offences  expressly  designated  in  the  first  sec- 
tion of  this  article. 

103.  Officers  will  not  be  put  in  arrest  for  light  offences.  For  these, 
the  censure  of  the  Commanding  Officer  will,  in  most  cases,  answer  the 
purposes  of  discipline. 

104.  Any  person  under  guard  or  in  confinement  may  have  such 
limits  assigned  him  as  his  Commanding  Officer  shall  direct.  Close 
confinement  will  not  be  resorted  to  unless  under  aggravated  circum- 
stances. 

105.  In  ordinary  cases,  where  inconvenience  to  the  service  would 
result  from  it,  a  Medical  Officer  will  not  be  put  in  arrest  until  the 
court  martial  for  his  trial  convenes. 

106.  The  arrest  of  an  officer,  or  confinement  of  a  soldier,  will,  as 
soon  as  practicable,  be  notified  to  his  immediate  Commander. 

107.  All  prisoners  under  guard,  without  written  charges,  will  be 
released  by  the  officer  of  the  day,  at  guard-mounting,  unless  orders 
to  the  contrary  be  given  by  the  Commanding  Officer. 

108.  On  a  march,  company  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers 
in  arrest,  when  present,  will  follow  in  the  rear  of  their  respective  com- 


20  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Courts  Martial. 

panics,  unless  otherwise  particularly  ordered.  Field  Officers,  com- 
missioned and  non-commissioned  Staff  Officers,  under  the  same  cir- 
cumstances, will  follow  in  the  rear  of  their  respective  regiments. 

109.  An  officer  under  arrest  will  not  wear  a  sword,  or  visit  officially 
his  Commanding  or  other  superior  officer,  unless  sent  for ;  and  ia  case 
of  business,  he  will  make  known  his  object  in  writing. 

110.  Individuals  placed  under  arrest  may  be  released,  without 
being  brought  before  a  court  martial,  by  the  authority  ordering  the 
arrest,  or  by  superior  authority. 

ARTICLE  XVI. 

OF    COURTS    MARTIAL    FOR    TfTE    TRIAL    OF    COMMISSIONED 
OFFICERS. 

111.  The  officer  empowered  to  order  a  court  martial,  and  wishing 
to  do  so,  will  issue  an  order,  directing  that  a  court  martial  shall  as- 
semble at  a  certain  time  and  place,  specifying  the  names  of  the 
members  of  the  court  and  the  object  for  which  it  is  organized. 

112.  A  copy  of  such  order,  and  a  copy  of  the  charges  and  si)ecifi- 
cations,  shall  in  all  cases  be  served  on  the  officer  accused,  either  per- 
sonally, or  by  leaving  the  same  with  some  person  of  suitable  age  and 
discretion  at  his  place  of  business  or  abode,  at  least  ten  days  before 
the  day  named  in  such  order  for  the  convening  of  the  court. 

113.  "No  officer  arrested  shall  be  brought  to  trial,  unless  a  copy 
of  the  cliarges  and  specifications,  certified  by  the  officer  ordering  the 
arrest,  shall  be  delivered  to  him  or  left  at  his  usual  place  of  abode 
within  three  days  after  his  arrest ;  nor,  unless  the  officer  orderinsz 
such  court  martial  shall  have  ordered  the  same  within  thirty  days 
after  receiving  notice  of  the  arrest  and  a  copy  of  the  charges  and 
specifications ;  nor  until  ten  days  after  a  copy  of  a  list  of  the  names 
of  the  officers  detailed  to  form  the  court  shall  have  been  delivered 
to  the  officer  arrested  or  left  at  his  usual  place  of  abode." 

[Militia  Laws  of  April  17, 1954,  tit.  7,  art.  1,  §  6.  ] 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  21 

Courts  Martial. 

114.  It  shall  not  be  necessary  to  designate  the  President  of  the 
court  io  the  order;  and  in  case  the  President  is  not  designated  in 
the  order,  the  highest  in  rank  has  the  right  to  preside.  In  case 
the  President  is  named  in  the  order,  and  he  shall  be  challenged 
and  set  aside  or  otherwise  prevented  from  attending,  the  court  can- 
not proceed  until  the  officer  ordering  the  court  designate  another 
officer  to  supply  the  vacancy. 

115.  "  If  the  officer  accused  shall  have  .any  cause  of  challenge  to 
any  member  of  such  court,  he  shall,  within  a  reasonable  time  after 
receiving  a  copy  of  the  charges  and  a  list  of  the  members,  deliver 
his  cause  of  challenge,  in  writing,  to  the  officer  ordering  such  court, 
■who  shall,  thereupon,  determine  as  to  the  validity  of  such  challenge  • 
and  if,  in  his  opinion,  the  causes  are  sufficient,  he  shall  appoint 
another  member  of  such  court." 

[  Militia  Laws  of  April  IT,  1854,  tit.  7,  art.  1,  §  S.  ] 

116.  Such  challenges  shall  be  submitted  on  proofs,  which  may  be 
affidavits,  duly  sworn  to,  before  any  officer  authorized  to  administer 
judicial  oaths,  or  the  oral  testimony  of  witnesses  sworn  before  the 
officer  trying  such  challenges.  No  challenge  to  the  President  of  a 
court  martial  can  be  made,  except  to  the  officer  ordering  the  court. 
The  causes  of  such  challenges  will  be  the  same  as  are  herein  provided 
in  cases  of  other  challenges. 

117.  At  the  place  and  on  the  day  appointed,  the  members  of  the 
court  will  assemble ;  but  they  cannot  proceed  to  any  business  except 
to  adjourn,  unless  the  Judge  Advocate  be  present.  If  the  Judge 
Advocate  does  not  appear,  the  President  of  the  court  may  appoint  a 
special  Judge  Advocate. 

Each  of  the  members  will  then  report  to  the  Judge  Advocate  the 
date  of  his  commission  and  his  office,  who  will  prepare  a  roster, 
according  to  rank,  previous  to  calling  the  several  members  for 
organization. 

118.  The  Judge  Advocate  will  then  read  aloud  the  order  for  hold- 
ing the  court ;  he  will  also  call  over  the  names  of  the  members,  com- 


22  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

GourU  Martial. 

mencing  witli  the  President  and  descending  to  the  youngest,  and  the 
members  will  take  their  scats  according  to  rank  on  the  right  and  left 
of  the  President.  The  Judge  Advocate  will  take  his  seat  opposite 
the  President.  Staff  rank,  when  actually  held,  will  be  as  available  as 
lineal  rank  in  military  courts. 

119.  The  Judge  Advocate  will  then  call  the  prosecutor,  if  there 
be  one,  who  will  take  his  station  on  the  left ;  and  the  accused,  who 
will  take  his  station  on  the  right  of  the  Judge  Advocate ;  who  will 
then,  standing  up,  read  again  the  order  for  assembling  the  court,  and 
administer  the  oath  prescribed  by  law  to  the  President,  who  cannot 
at  this  stage  of  the  proceedings  be  challenged. 

120.  If  the  number  of  members  present  be  below  the  minimum 
prescribed  by  law,  they  can  do  no  business  except  to  adjourn  from 
time  to  time  to  await  the  arrival  of  absent  members,  or  to  com- 
municate the  fact  to  the  officer  ordering  the  court,  in  order  that  their 
places  may  be  filled. 

121.  The  President  will  appoint,  under  his  hand  and  seal,  a  Mar- 
shal ;  and  when  all,  or  a  sufficient  number  of  members  are  present  at 
the  calling  of  the  roll  of  their  names  by  the  Judge  Advocate,  they 
may  at  once  proceed  to  organize  for  business. 

122.  Accommodation  should  be  afforded  for  the  accuser  and  the 
accused;  also,  for  any  friend  or  legal  adviser  of  the  accused  or 
prosecutor,  the  benefit  of  whose  assistance  they  may  respectively 
desire  during  the  trial.  But  the  Judge  Advocate  and  the  accused 
only,  will  bo  permitted  to  address  the  court ;  it  being  an  admitted 
maxim  in  military  courts,  that  counsel  are  not  to  interfere  in  the  pro- 
ceedings, or  to  offer  any  remarks,  or  to  discuss  or  argue  any  question. 

123.  The  Judge  Advocate  will  then  demand  of  the  accused  wh^her 
he  has  any  exceptions  or  cause  of  challenge  against  any  of  the 
members  present,  other  than  the  President,  not  known  to  him  in  time 
to  deliver  them  to  the  officer  ordering  the  court,  as  required  by  law ; 
and  if  ho  has,  ho  is  required  to  state  the  cause  of  such  challenge, 
confining  the  same  to  one  member  at  a  time.    Peremptory  challenges 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  23 

Court*  Martial. 

are  not  allowed  at  a  court  martial ;  the  party  must,  therefore,  assign 
his  cause  of  challenge,  which  is  to  be  regularly  entered  on  the  pro- 
ceedings. 

124.  The  accused  may  also  object,  at  this  stage  of  the  proceedings, 
to  the  authority  of  the  court,  for  any  cause,  to  proceed  to  trial.  And 
all  he  will  be  deemed  to  admit,  by  not  objecting,  is,  that  the  court  is 
a  legal  court.  The  privilege  of  challenges  extends  to  the  accused, 
to  the  prosecutor  and  to  the  Judge  Advocate. 

125.  Sufficient  causes  of  challenge  are : 

1 .  Having  expressed  or  formed  an  opinion  as  to  the  guilt  or  in- 
nocence of  the  accused ; 

2.  Having  been  a  member  of  a  court  which  gave  an  opinion  in 
the  case ;  or,  of  another  court  martial  in  which  the  subject-matter 
was  investigated  and  decided ; 

3.  Prejudice,  malice  or  any  like  cause,  which  would  disqualify 
a  juror  in  a  civil  case. 

And  when  a  member  of  the  court  is  challenged,  the  court  shall  be 
cleared,  and  the  member  challenged  will  retire,  and  the  court  will 
determine  the  challenge. 

126.  When  the  facts  constituting  the  cause  of  challenge  are  not 
admitted  by  the  opposite  party,  the  same  shall  be  established  by 
proof;  and  the  members  of  the  court  only,  who  are  not  challenged, 
shall  participate  in  the  trial  and  decision  of  the  challenge. 

127.  In  all  cases  where  the  vote  is  equally  divided  on  a  challenge, 
the  decision  shall  be  deemed  to  be  in  favor  of  the  party  challenging. 

128.  If,  in  consequence  of  challenges,  the  court  shall  be  reduced 
below  the  legal  number,  all  further  proceedings  in  the  case  must  be 
suspended,  and  the  matter  reported  to  the  officer  ordering  the  court ; 
who  may  order  a  new  court,  or  designate  additional  members  of  the 
same  court ;  in  which  case  the  trial  will  be  recommenced,  allowing 
the  like  privilege  of  challenge  to  any  such  new  court  or  additional 
member. 


24  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Oourt$  Martial. 

129.  "  After  the  court  shall  be  assembled,  and  after  all  challengiBS, 
if  any  are  made,  shall  have  been  determined,  the  Judge  Advocate, 
whether  commissioned  or  special,  shall  administer  to  each  member 
the  following  oath :  *  You,  ,  do  swear  that  you  will 
faithfully  discharge  the  duties  of  a  member  of  a  court  martial  now 
assembled,  according  to  the  best  of  your  ability.'  " 

[Militia  Laws  of  April  17, 1S54,  tit.  T,  art.  1,  §  9.] 

130.  After  the  members  of  the  court  have  been  sworn  by  the  Judge 
Advocate,  the  President  of  the  court  shall  administer  the  like  oath 
to  the  Judge  Advocate,  if  he  has  been  specially  appointed  as  such. 

1-81.  The  court  being  thus  regularly  constituted,  the  President  will 
order  the  Marshal  to  open  the  court,  which  may  be  done  by  procla- 
mation, as  follows: 

Hear  ye !  Hear  ye !  Hear  ye !  All  persons  having  any  business 
to  do  before  this  court  martial,  here  assembled,  lot  them  draw  near, 
give  their  attention  and  they  shall  be  heard. 

Subsequent  adjournments  may  be  proclaimed  in  the  following  form : 

Hear  ye!  Hear  ye!  Hear  yo!  All  persons  having  any  further 
business  before  this  court  martial,  here  assembled,  let  them  depart 
hence  and  return  to-morrow,  at         o'clock,  noon,  to  which 

time  the  court  stands  adjourned. 

132.  Applications  to  put  off  or  to  suspend  the  trial  may  he  urged 
before  a  court  martial  at  any  time  subsequent  to  swearing  its  mem- 
bers. But  all  applications  to  delay  the  assembling  of  a  court  martial, 
ft-om  the  absence  or  indisposition  of  a  witness,  the  illness  of  the 
parties,  or  other  cause,  must  be  made  to  the  authority  ordering  the 
court. 

183.  The  court  will  always  sit  with  open  doors,  except  while 
deliberating,  when  the  President  will  order  the  court  to  be  cleared 
for  deliberation,  or  for  any  incidental  discussion,  at  the  instance  of 
any  member  or  the  Judge  Advocate. 

184.  After  a  court  martial  has  once  assembled,  it  sits  in  pursuance 
of  law ;  and  neither  the  Commander-in-Chief  nor  the  authority  by 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  25 

Courts  Martial. 

■which  it  was  convened  can  in  any  manner  interfere  with  its  proceed- 
ings. The  court  exists  until  it  be  dissolved  by  the  authority  which 
appointed  it,  or  a  higher  authority,  after  its  decision  shall  have  been 
approved  or  disapproved  by  the  officer  ordering  it. 

But  should  the  court  deem  it  proper  to  refer  to  the  officer  ordering 
the  court,  for  instructions,  any  reply  which  he  may  make,  or  any 
consideration  which  he  may  think  proper  to  lay  before  the  court,  in 
answer  to  this  reference,  will  always  be  entitled  to  a  respectful  con- 
sideration, though  it  is  in  no  way  incumbent  on  the  court  to  be  gov- 
erned thereby. 

1 35.  The  organization  of  the  court  being  completed,  by  all  tho 
members  taking  the  oath  required,  the  Judge  Advocate  will  then 
proceed  to  read  the  charges  and  specifications  ;  and  to  ask  the  accused, 
separately,  on  each  charge  and  specification,  if  he  be  guilty  or  not 
guilty  of  the  charge  (  or  specification )  just  read, 

136.  The  charges  must  state  clearly  and  distinctly  some  military 
offence,  of  which  the  accused  is  alleged  to  be  guilty,  so  that  he  may 
know  precisely  the  offence  of  which  he  is  accused. 

137.  The  specifications  to  the  charge  must  allege  certain  specified 
acts  done  by  the  accused,  which  are  supposed  to  constitute  tho 
general  offence  named  in  the  charge. 

138.  Both  charges  and  specifications  must  be  so  distinctly  alleged 
that  neither  the  accused  nor  the  court  can  have  any  difficulty  in 
knowing  what  is  the  precise  object  of  the  investigation. 

139.  After  the  charges  and  specifications  have  been  approved  by 
the  proper  authority,  and  ordered  to  be  investigated,  neither  the 
Judge  Advocate  nor  any  other  person  is  competent  to  change  them, 
except  in  the  case  of  a  plea  in  abatement,  without  the  consent  of  such 
authority. 

140.  All  charges  shall  be  preferred  in  the  name  of  the  People  of 
the  State  of  New- York,  and  may  be  made : 

1.  On  the  relation  of  a  Commissioned  Officer; 
Military.  3 


2G  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Oimrt$  Martial. 

2.  On  the  report  of  a  Court  of  Inquiry ; 

3.  On  the  official  return  or  report  of  an  Inspecting  Officer  or 
officei  of  the  Adjutant-General's  department.  Where,  on  the  relation 
of  an  officer,  the  caption  of  the  charges  shall  contain  the  name  and 
office  of  the  relator,  who  shall  be  considered  as  the  prosecutor. 

141.  Charges,  when  made  by  a  Commissioned  Officer,  shall  be  sub- 
scribed by  him ;  and  when  made  on  the  report  of  a  court  or  officer, 
or  other  official  return,  they  shall  be  subscribed  by  the  Judge  Advo- 
cate. And  all  copies  of  charges,  served  on  the  accused,  shall  be 
certified  by  the  officer  ordering  the  arrest, 

142.  The  accused  must  be  properly  described  in  the  charges  by 
his  name  and  office;  stating  the  division,  brigade  and  regiment  to' 
which  he  belongs. 

143.  The  specifications  must  always  charge  the  accused  by  name, 
and  tlie  addition  of  his  office,  held  at  the  time  of  the  alleged  offence, 
with  having  at  such  a  time,  and  at  such  a  place,  done  certain  acta 
which  amount,  or  are  alleged  to  amount,  to  the  offence  stated  in  the 
charge. 

144.  Time  and  place  must  be  stated  in  each  specification ;  but  if  a 
doubt  exist  as  to  the  precise  time  and  place,  it  may  be  set  forth  that 
the  fact  occurred  on  or  about  such  a  time,  and  at  or  near  such  a 
place.  The  court  will  then  judge  what  latitude  of  time  and  place 
may  bo  covered  by  this  form  of  expression ;  and  when  the  offence 
charged  consists  of  language  used,  the  precise  words  should  be  stated. 

145.  Officers  and  soldiers  will  be  held  amenable  to  the  military 
law  and  tribunals  for  offences  committed  by  them  while  on  duty, 
whether  in  uniform  or  not ;  and  they  will  be  deemed  to  be  on  duty 
during  the  performance  of  any  service  which  may  be  lawfully  required 
of  them,  and  while  going  to  and  returning  from  the  performance  of 
such  service. 

14G.  Commissioned  officers  will  also  be  amenable  to  the  military 
courts  upon  charges  for  unofficcr-like  conduct,  when  such  conduct 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  27 

Courts  MariiaU 

has  reference  to,  or  connection  with  the  military  duties,  in  the  dis- 
charge of  which  the  accused,  or  the  accuser  may  be,  or  may  have 
been,engaged. 

147.  Militai-y  courts  will  also  exercise  jurisdiction,  upon  the  pro- 
per charges,  of  unofficer-like  conduct  or  disrespect  to  a  superior 
officer,  when  the  offence  is  committed  by  an  officer  while  wearing  his 
uniform  or  any  part  of  it,  though  he  may  not  be  on  duty. 

148.  No  person  shall  be  liable  to  be  tried  and  punished  by  a  court 
martial  for  any  offence  which  shall  appear  to  have  been  committed 
more  than  two  years  before  the  issuing  of  the  order  for  such  trial  j 
unless  the  person,  by  reason  of  having  absented  himself  from  the 
state,  or  some  other  impediment,  shall  not  have  been  amenable  to 
justice  within  that  period. 

149.  Where  an  officer,  in  commission,  shall  be  proceeded  against 
for  an  offence  committed  within  two  years  before  the  commencement 
of  the  proceedings,  a  discharge  or  resignation,  subsequent  to  the 
committing  of  such  offence,  shall  not  bar  such  proceedings. 

150.  When  the  charges  and  specifications  are  read  to  the  accused, 
by  the  Judge  Advocate,  and  he  is  asked  whether  he  be  guilty  or  not 
guilty,  the  accused  must  plead  thereto,  either: 

1.  Guilty;   or, 

2.  To  the  jurisdiction  ;  by  alleging  that  the  offence  with  which 
he  is  charged  is  not,  by  law,  cognizable  by  the  court ;  or,  that  he  is 
not  subject  by  law  to  be  tried  by  a  court  martial ;  or, 

3.  In  abatement ;  for  misnomer,  or  a  wrong  or  false  addition  to  his 
name;  in  which  case  he  is  bound  to  state  what  his  real  name  or 
addition  is,  and  the  court  may  then  amend  the  charges  and  specifica- 
tions to  meet  the  objection,  and  proceed  to  the  trial ;  or, 

4.  In  bar;  a  former  trial,  and  acquittal  or  conviction,  for  the 
same  offence  before  a  military  court  having  competent  jurisdiction ; 
or  any  other  plea  assigning  sufficient  reason  why  he  ought  not  to 
answer  or  be  put  on  his  trial ;  or, 


28  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 


Covrts  Martial. 


5.  He  may  demur;  by  pleading  that  if  the  facts  stated  in 
the  specification  were  true,  they  would  not  amount,  as  stated,  to  the 
oflfeuce  charged;  or, 

6.  He  may  plead  not  guilty. 

151.  fn  case  the  charges  which  have  been  served  upon  the  accused 
are  altered,  a  certified  copy  of  them,  as  so  altered,  shall  be  served 
upon  the  accused  ten  days  before  the  day  of  trial,  by  direction  of 
the  oflScer  ordering  the  court,  except  as  provided  in  paragraph  150. 

152.  The  accused  cannot  plead  in  bar  that  he  has  not  been 
furnished  with  a  correct  copy  of  the  charges  and  specifications ;  but 
in  such  case  the  court  will  adjourn,  so  as  to  admit  of  proper  service. 

153.  There  need  not  be  any  special  form  in  making  these  pleas. 
When  a  plea  other  than  guilty  or  not  guilty,  is  pleaded,  it  shall  be 
suflicient  for  the  accused  to  state  verbally,  or  in  writing,  that  he 
objects  to  being  tried  on  such  a  charge  or  such  a  specification,  for 
such  and  such  reasons,  and  that  he,  therefore,  requests  the  court  to 
dismiss  the  same  at  once.  The  plea  of  guilty  or  not  guilty  may  be 
to  the  whole  or  any  part  of  any  charge  or  specification. 

154.  The  accused  may,  in  all  cases,  introduce  evidence  to  support 
his  preliminary  pleas;  so,  also,  may  the  Judge  Advocate,  in  like 
manner,  rebut  the  allegations  of  the  pleas. 

155.  When  iho  specifications  do  not  amount  to  any  offence  cog- 
nizable by  a  military  court,  the  accused  may  either  take  advantage 
of  it  by  a  demurrer,  or  by  a  plea  to  the  jurisdiction,  or  under  tho 
plea  of  not  guilty. 

156.  Though  the  accused  may  have  made  any  or  all  of  the  pre- 
liminary pleas,  he  is  yet  at  liberty,  if  they  be  not  sustained  by  tho 
court,  or  after  a  plea  of  abatement,  if  the  charges  be  amended,  to 
plead  not  guilty. 

157.  If,  fVom  obstinacy  or  design,  the  accused  docs  not  answer  at 
all,  or  answers  foreign  to  the  purpose,  he  will  be  regarded  as  standing 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  29 


Courts  Martial. 


mute ;  and,  in  all  such  cases,  and  also  whenever  the  accused  neglects 
or  refuses  to  appear  for  trial,  the  court  will  proceed  to  trial  and 
judgment  as  if  he  had  regularly  pleaded  not  guilty. 

158.  If  the  accused  plead  guilty  to  all  the  charges  and  specifica- 
tions, the  court  will  proceed  to  determine  what  punishment  shall 
bo  awarded,  and  pronounce  sentence  thereon  accordingly.  But,  on 
motion  of  the  accused,  they  may  examine  witnesses  to  ascertain 
more  fully  the  nature  of  the  offence,  before  passing  sentence.  If  he 
plead  guilty  to  only  a  part  of  the  charges  or  specifications,  the  court 
will  proceed  with  the  trial  upon  the  residue,  and  reserve  the  sentence 
until  the  trial  is  finally  closed. 

159.  When  the  accused  pleads  not  guilty,  and  the  trial  is  ready  to 
proceed,  the  witnesses  should  be  ordered  out  of  court,  and  the  Judge 
Advocate  then  opens  the  case  by  making  a  general  statement  to  the 
court,  previous  to  the  examination  of  witnesses,  of  the  facts  which 
he  intends  to  prove,  and  the  order  in  which  he  intends  to  prove  them. 

160.  After  the  Judge  Advocate  has  opened  the  case  of  the  prose- 
cution, and  previous  to  the  examination  of  any  witnesses,  the  accused 
shall  be  permitted,  if  he  desire  it,  to  make  to  the  court  a  statement 
of  his  theory  of  the  case,  and  of  what  he  expects  to  be  able  to  prove, 
and  what  he  will  insist  upon  as  repelling  the  charges  and  specifica- 
tions, or  as  constituting  his  defence. 

161.  Reference  is  made  to  art.  4,  tit,  7,  of  Militia  Laws,  passed 
April  17,  1864,  where  the  manner  of  enforcing  the  attendance  of  wit- 
nesses and  swearing  them  will  be  found. 

162.  A  witness  may  not  only  be  subpoenaed  to  appear,  but  also  to 
bring  with  him  any  documents  in  his  possession  or  under  his  control ; 
and  any  person  present  in  court  may  be  required  to  give  evidence, 
though  not  previously  summoned.  It  shall  be  the  duty  of  all  mili- 
tary ofllcers  to  obey  all  subpoenas  issued  by  a  court  martial,  when 
duly  served  on  them ;  and  the  refusal  to  do  so,  without  suflScient 
reason,  will  be  treated  as  a  military  offence. 

Military.  3* 


30  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Cowte  Martial. 

163.  It  shall  be  the  right  of  either  party  to  insist  that  all  witnesses, 
except  the  one  under  examination,  shall  leave  the  court  during  such 
examination ;  and  if  either  party  apply  for  such  an  order,  it  will  not 
be  competent  for  the  court  to  refuse  it.  No  person  who  has  been 
present  at  the  examination  of  a  witness,  shall,  himself,  be  afterwards 
examined  as  a  witness,  unless  by  special  order  of  the  court. 

164.  It  is  also  a  matter  of  right  for  either  party  to  have  a  witness 
out  of  court,  while  a  discussion  of  a  legal  question  is  going  on  as  to 
his  testimony ;  and  either  party  is  allowed  to  take  exceptions  to  the 
competency  of  a  witness ;  but  these  must  be  stated  in  open  court 
and  recorded  in  the  proceedings,  after  which  the  court  will  decide  on 
their  validity. 

165.  The  President  must  administer  the  oath  to  the  witnesses,  and 
it  will  be  in  the  following  form,  if  on  the  Gospels :  "  You  do  solemnly 
swear,  in  the  presence  of  Almighty  God,  that,"  &c.  If  with  uplifted 
hand:  "  You  solemnly  swear,  by  the  ever-living  God,  that"  &c.  If 
the  witness  affirms :  "  You  do  solemnly,  sincerely  and  truly  declare  and 
affirm,  that  the  evidence  you  shall  give  in  the  case  now  in  hearing, 
between  the  People  of  the  State  of  New- York  and  the  accused  now 
on  trial,  shall  be  the  truth,  the  whole  truth  and  nothing  but  the  truth. 
So  help  you  God." 

166.  When  a  witness  has  been  sworn,  he  will  be  examined  in  chief 
by  the  party  calling  him ;  and  upon  such  examination  leading  ques- 
tions will  not  be  allowed  to  be  put  to  him. 

167.  Before  a  court  martial,  all  questions  to  a  witness  must  bo 
proposed  in  writing,  and  recorded  by  the  Judge  Advocate,  before 
being  propounded  to  the  witness ;  and  when  recorded,  they  cannot  be 
erased.  If  objected  to,  the  objection  must  be  recorded,  and  after 
hearing  any  pertinent  remarks  from  the  objector,  and  ft-om  the  party 
putting  the  question,  the  court  should  be  cleared  for  deliberation, 
with  closed  doors,  its  decision  recorded,  and  the  court  reopened,  the 
decision  made  known  to  the  parties,  and  the  trial  proceeded  with. 


FOR  THE  MILITAEY  FORCES.  31 

Courts  Martial. 

168.  The  examination  of  witnesses  must,  invariably,  be  in  the 
presence  of  each  member  of  the  court.  The  appearance  and  manner 
of  a  witness  add  to  or  take  away  from  the  weight  of  his  testimony ; 
and  all  evidence  whatever  should  be  recorded  in  the  proceedings,  in 
the  order  in  which  it  is  received  by  the  court. 

169.  When  a  witness,  examined  in  chief,  by  his  conduct  shows 
himself  decidedly  adverse  to  the  party  calling  him,  it  will  be  in  the 
discretion  of  the  court  to  allow  him  to  be  examined  as  if  he  w^ere 
on  cross-examination. 

170.  The  prosecution  having  closed  the  examination  of  a  wit- 
ness, the  accused  has  the  right  to  cross-examine  him,  or  he  may, 
by  the  custom  of  courts  martial,  defer  his  cross-examination  until 
all  the  prosecutor's  witnesses  have  been  examined.  The  cross- 
examination  need  not  be  confined  to  matters  alleged  in  the  accusation, 
or  to  matters  already  stated  in  the  evidence  on  behalf  of  the  prosecu- 
tion. If  the  cross-examination  of  the  witness  is  deferred  by  the 
accused,  he  shall  himself  produce  the  witness  for  cross-examination, 
and  in  case  he  shall  fail  to  do  so,  or  to  cross-examine  him  when  pro- 
duced, he  shall  be  deemed  to  have  waived  the  cross-examination. 

171.  Leading  questions  will  be  allowed  on  a  cross-examination,  in 
which  greater  latitude  will  be  given  to  parties  than  in  the  original 
examination.  The  form  of  the  cross-examination,  however,  should 
depend,  in  some  degree,  like  that  of  an  examination  in  chief,  upon 
the  bias  and  disposition  evinced  by  the  witness  under  examination ; 
and  leading  questions  should  not  be  put  to  a  witness  clearly  in  the 
interest  of  the  party  cross-examining  him. 

172.  Questions  will  not  be  allowed  to  be  put,  as  to  any  distinct 
collateral  fact,  for  the  purpose  of  discrediting  the  witness,  by  calling 
other  testimony  to  contradict  him ;  nor  should  it  be  assumed  that  the 
witness  has  made  statements  in  chief,  which  he  has  not  made ;  nor 
should  questions  be  put  which  assume  a  fact  not  in  proof,  excepting 
where  the  opinion  of  the  witness  is  competent  evidence. 


32  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Oourt«  Martial. 

173.  After  the  accused  has  closed  his  cross-examination,  the  prose- 
cutor may  reexamine  the  witness;  but  this  rel^xamination  must  be 
strictly  and  rigidly  confined  to  new  matter  elicited  by  the  cross- 
examination,  unless  by  special  permission  of  the  court. 

174.  If  a  party  examine  a  witness  as  to  anything  which  may  have 
been  said  by  the  adverse  party,  such  adverse  party  shall  have  the 
right  to  call  out  all  that  was  said  by  him  in  the  same  conversation ; 
provided,  only,  that  it  relate  to  the  subject  matter  of  the  trial. 

175.  The  party  calling  a  witness  will  not  be  allowed  to  give  general 
evidence  that  he  is  not  to  be  believed  under  oath  ;  but  may  prove  the 
facts  by  other  witnesses,  notwithstanding  the  contrary  statements  of 
any  witness  whom  he  may  have  called. 

176.  Courts  martial  should  be  cautious  in  receiving  evidence  as  to 
opinion,  exce[)t  where  matters  of  skill  and  judgment  are  involved ; 
then,  witnesses  conversant  with  a  particular  trade  or  profession,  and 
scientific  persona,  may  give  their  opinion  on  matters  of  their  profes- 
sion or  trade.  In  all  other  cases  the  witness  should  only  speak  of 
facts  within  his  own  knowledge. 

177.  Documentary  evidence,  before  it  can  be  received,  must  be 
duly  authenticated,  or  proved  to  be  genuine,  unless  admitted  to  be  so. 

178.  A  witness  may  refer  to  a  memorandum,  in  order  to  refresh 
his  memory ;  and  if  he  can  then  speak  to  the  facts  from  recollection 
of  them,  his  testimony  as  to  such  facts  shall  be  received. 

179.  A  witness  cannot  be  compelled  to  answer  any  question  which 
has  a  tendency  to  expose  him  to  any  criminal  prosecution.  In  such 
case,  the  witness  must  be  allowed  to  judge  for  himself,  and  if  he  says 
on  oath  that  he  cannot  answer  without  criminating  himself,  he  should 
not  be  compelled  to  answer. 

180.  Military  courts,  will  take  notice  of  all  laws  and  published 
rules  and  regulations  established  by  the  Commander-in-Chief,  without 
the  same  being  otherwise  proved;  and  are  governed  in  their  pro- 
ceedings, first,  by  the  written  military  laws  and  regulations,  and  next 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  33 

Cmirts  Martial. 

by  the  customs  of  war.  They  will,  therefore,  disregard  any  dis- 
cordant or  unsuitable  axioms  or  rules  of  civil  courts,  but  will  con- 
form to  the  rules  of  evidence  obtaining  in  such  courts. 

181.  After  all  the  evidence  on  the  part  of  the  prosecution  has  been 
produced,  the  accused  will  enter  upon  his  defence.  If  he  desire  it, 
a  reasonable  delay  will  be  allowed  him  to  arrange  and  prepare  his 
case.  Ho  may,  if  he  choose,  before  calling  his  witnesses,  make  a 
general  statement  to  the  court  of  the  evidence  he  proposes  to  ofFer 
and  its  bearing  upon  the  case.  In  his  defence  he  need  not  confine 
himself  to  rebutting  the  evidence  on  the  part  of  the  prosecution ;  he 
may  produce  in  evidence  any  matter  whatsoever  which  tends  to 
exculpate  himself  or  palliate  his  conduct. 

182.  In  case  the  accused  has  introduced  new  matter  in  his  defence, 
the  prosecution  may  call  witnesses  to  disprove  or  rebut  the  same. 

183.  Before  any  witness  leaves  the  court,  the  record  of  his  testimony 
should  be  read  over  to  him,  so  that,  if  erroneous,  he  may  correct  or 
explain  the  same ;  but  no  erasure  or  obliteration  will  be  admitted. 
Any  remarks  or  explanation  must  be  entered  in  the  proceedings,  in 
addition  thereto;  when  the  same  is  complete,  the  witness  should 
sign  it. 

184.  Should  the  accused,  having  closed  his  cross-examination, 
think  proper  subsequently  to  recall  a  witness  for  the  prosecution  in  his 
defence,  the  examination  will  be  held  to  be  in  chief,  and  the  witness 
subject  to  cross-examination  by  the  prosecution. 

185.  The  parties  having  closed  the  evidence  in  the  case,  if  the 
accused  has  called  witnesses  in  his  defence,  the  Judge  Advocate  will 
have  a  right  to  address  the  court,  and  to  recapitulate  and  methodize 
the  evidence  and  strengthen  the  case  by  argument,  or  show  the  weak- 
ness or  insufficiency  of  the  defence. 

186.  To  this  address,  on  the  part  of  the  prosecution,  the  court  will 
permit  the  accused  to  reply.  And  the  court  is  also  bound  to  hear 
whatever  address,  in  his  defence,  the  accused  may  think  fit  to  offer, 


84  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 


Courts  Martial. 


not  being  in  itself  contemptuous  or  disrespectful.     And  the  court 
may  also  permit  the  Judge  Advocate  to  rejoin. 

187.  If  the  accuser  be  not  an  officer,  he  cannot  appear  in  court  as 
a  prosecutor,  but  merely  as  an  informant;  and,  in  that  case,  the 
Judge  Advocate  alone  conducts  the  prosecution ;  the  informant  being 
allowed  merely  to  be  present  as  an  assistant,  but  not  allowed  to  pro- 
pose any  questions  or  make  any  observations  whatever.  He  may, 
however,  make  suggestions  to  the  Judge  Advocate ;  and  when  he  is 
a  witness,  he  must  first  be  examined,  or  else  excluded  from  the  court 
until  called  to  testify. 

188.  The  closing  address  of  the  accused  shall  be  in  writing,  and  if 
he  find  himself  unequal  to  the  task  of  reading  his  address  to  the 
court,  from  any  cause,  the  Judge  Advocate  or  any  friend  of  the  ac- 
cused, named  by  him,  may  be  allowed  to  read  it  for  him. 

189.  The  court  will  be  particularly  guarded  in  adhering  to  the 
custom  which  obtains,  of  resisting  any  attempt  on  the  part  of  counsel 
to  address  them.  A  lawyer,  as  such,  is  not  recognized  by  a  court 
martial,  though  his  presence  may  be  tolerated  as  a  friend  of  the 
accused,  to  assist  him  by  advice  in  preparing  questions  for  witnesses, 
in  taking  notes  and  shaping  his  defence. 

190.  The  Judge  Advocate  and  the  accused  having  laid  their  case 
before  the  court,  the  accused,  the  prosecutor  and  the  witnesses  will 
be  dismissed  and  the  court  closed. 

The  court  then  proceeds  to  make  up  their  finding.  Each  specifica- 
tion must  bo  separately  considered  and  each  allegation  qxhaustedt 
and  the  court  must  declare  how  far  each  is  proved. 

191.  The  Judge  Advocate  at  this  stage  of  the  proceedings  will 
simply  act  as  register,  and  to  advise  the  court  on  legal  points  when 
tiis  opinion  is  required.  He  must  carefully  abstain  from  making  any 
remark  by  which  his  judgment,  as  to  the  guilt  or  innocence,  may  be 
remark  by  which  his  judgment,  as  to  the  guilt  or  innocence  of  the 
accused,  may  be  ascertained. 

1 02.  Military  tribunals  must  uphold  dtsnph'ne  at  all  hazards.  They 
will,  however,  always  justify  the  disobedience  of  an  order  which  is 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  35 

Courts  Martial. 

dearly  shown  to  he  illegal ;  and,  also,  will  severely  punish  him  who 
issues  an  order  contrary  to  law ;  but  will  never  inflict  disgrace  on  the 
subordinate  who  obeys  it,  unless  it  be  evident  that  the  accused  well 
knew  that,  in  conforming  to  it,  he  was  violating  law. 

193.  In  a  charge  of  disobedience  of  orders,  it  is  requisite  to  show 
that  the  communication  was  an  order  from  a  superior  to  an  inferior, 
in  terms  sufficiently  explicit  to  disclose  the  intention  of  such  superior 
that  the  inferior  should,  or  not,  do  some  certain  act. 

194.  In  a  charge  of  violence,  &c,,  against  a  superior  on  duty,  it  is 
requisite  to  show  that  the  accused  is  to  be  presumed  to  have  known 
the  other  party  to  be  his  superior ;  either  by  his  uniform,  knowledge 
of  his  person,  or  in  some  other  manner. 

195.  When  there  are  distinct  and  separate  charges,  the  members 
of  the  court  will  deliberate  separately  on  each  charge  and  specifica- 
tion ;  discussing,  in  free  and  open  conversation,  the  import  of  the 
evidence,  and  allowing  its  full  weight  to  every  argument  or  presump- 
tion in  favor  of  the  accused. 

196.  The  question  of  the  guilt  or  innocence  of  the  accused  should 
be  put  by  the  Judge  Advocate  to  the  members  of  the  court,  com- 
mencing with  the  youngest :  "  From  the  evidence  given  for  and 
against  the  accused,  and  from  what  he  has  said  in  his  defence,  are 
you  of  the  opinion  that  he  is  guilty  or  not  guilty  of  the  charge  (  or 
specification  )  preferred  against  him  V 

197.  If  a  majority  of  the  members  are  for  a  conviction,  the  Judge 
Advocate  will  enter  the  decision  of  the  court,  finding  the  accused 
guilty  of  the  charge  (  or  specification  ),  or  of  such  part  of  the  charge 
(  or  specification  )  as  the  court  shall  find  him  guilty.  If  a  majority 
of  the  members  are  for  acquittal,  he  will  enter  the  decision  ac- 
cordingly. If  the  votes  are  divided  equally,  the  accused  will  be 
acquitted. 

198.  The  finding  of  the  court  need  not  be  a  general  finding  of  guilt 
or  acquittal.  The  accused  may  be  found  guilty  of  some  portions  of 
the  charge  and  acquitted  upon  others.     A  portion  of  a  specificatiou 


36  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Courts  Martial. 

may  be  found  and  the  rest  negatived ;  or,  the  entire  circumstances 
set  forth  may  be  found  to  be  proved,  and  yet  the  accused  be  declared 
to  be  without  guilt.  So  also  the  finding  may  be  special  in  regard  to 
the  facts ;  and  the  court  may  pass  upon  the  motive  with  which  an  act 
was  done,  and  find  or  negative  criminality  in  such  motive. 

199.  If  the  court  should  find  the  accused  guilty  upon  a  specification 
or  part  of  a  specification  under  a  charge,  while  they  acquit  him  of  the 
whole  charge,  the  accused  should  be  acquitted.  But  where  the  ofience 
named  in  the  charge  admits  of  lesser  degrees  of  criminality,  the  court 
may  find  the  specification  to  amount  only  to  one  of  the  lesser  degrees 
of  the  same  crime ;  and  if  the  court  convict  the  accused  upon  the  spe- 
cification, or  so  much  of  it  as  relates  to  such  lesser  ofience  and  of  the 
charge,  or  so  much  of  it  as  embraces  the  lesser  degree  of  the  crime 
charged,  the  conviction  will  be  proper.  This  will  not,  however*,  au- 
thorize the  finding  a  higher  oflTence  than  is  charged ;  and  the  court 
will  well  define  the  degi-ee  of  guilt  of  which  the  accused  is  convicted, 
whether  it  relate  to  the  whole  or  a  part  of  the  charges,  and  state 
distinctly  of  what  he  is  found  guilty  and  of  what  acquitted. 

200.  If  the  court  shall  be  of  opinion  that  the  accused  is  not  guilty 
of  the  offence  charged,  it  may  acquit  the  accused,  and  such  acquittal 
may  be  a  simple  finding  of  not  guilty ;  or  the  court  may  acquit  him 
fully,  or  fulhj  &nd  honorably ;  though  the  word  "honorably"  should 
never  be  used  in  acquiting  the  accused  of  charges  in  which  his  honor 
was  not  implicated. 

201.  If  the  court  shall  find  the  accused  guilty  of  any  or  all  the 
charges  preferred  against  him,  the  Judge  Advocate  will  proceed  to 
take  the  opinion  of  the  members  on  the  punishment  to  be  awarded, 
by  putting  to  each  member,  beginning  with  the  youngest,  this  ques- 
tion :  **  The  court  having  found  the  accused  guilty  of  such  an 
offence,  in  your  opinion  what  punishment  ought  to  be  awarded  1" 
Each  member  of  the  court  will  stato  the  sentence  which  he  thinks 
should  bo  given. 

202.  If  a  majority  of  tne  court  have  concurred  in  the  same  sen- 
tence, that  is  then  recorded  as  the  sentence  of  the  court.    If  not,  the 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  37 

Courts  Martial 

mildest  of  the  sentences  proposed  will  be  first  considered  and  put 
to  the  vote,  and,  if  not  adopted,  then  the  next  mildest,  and  so  on  until 
one  is  found  which  unites  a  majority  of  the  votes. 

203.  If  the  same  identical  act  is  alleged  against  the  accused,  under 
several  distinct  charges  or  specifications,  as  constituting  as  many 
separate  offences,  the  court  shall  be  careful  to  inflict  only  one  penalty 
upon  the  accused,  in  case  of  his  conviction,  and  the  sentence  of  the 
court  should  in  all  cases  conform  as  nearly  as  may  be  to  the  language 
of  the  statute  provided  in  such  cases. 

204.  An  officer  convicted  of  having  signed  a  false  certificate  rela- 
tive to  the  absence  or  pay  of  either  officer  or  soldier,  should  be 
sentenced  to  be  cashiered,  and  disqualified  from  holding  any  military 
office. 

An  officer  convicted  of  making  a  false  return  of  the  state  of  the 
forces  under  his  command,  or  of  the  arms,  ammunition  or  stores 
thereto  belonging,  should  be  sentenced  to  be  cashiered,  and  disquali- 
fied from  holding  any  military  office. 

An  officer  convicted  of  having  embezzled  or  wilfully  misapplied 
any  public  money  with  which  he  may  have  been  entrusted  for  any 
purpose,  should  be  sentenced  to  be  cashiered,  and  disqualified  from 
holding  any  military  office,  and  fined  in  a  sum  not  exceeding  one 
hundred  dollars ;  and  where  such  misapplication  is  not  found  to  bo 
wilful,  he  should  be  sentenced  to  pay  a  fine  not  exceeding  one  hun- 
dred dollars, 

Au  officer  convicted  of  being  found  drunk  on  duty  should  be 
sentenced  to  be  cashiered. 

205.  For  other  offences,  the  court  may  inflict  any  punishment  not 
cruel  or  unusual,  which  may  seem  required  by  the  nature  of  the 
case  tried  and  authorized  by  law ;  and  whenever  a  specific  punish- 
ment is  imposed  by  law  for  any  offence,  the  court  will  have  a  care  to 
conform  to  such  provision  of  law. 

206.  Cashiering  is  the  depriving  an  officer  of  his  commission, 
breaking  him  of  his  office,  and  taking  from  him  his  military  character. 

Military.  4 


38  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Oin*rtt  Martial 

207.  Dismissal  is  a  disgraceful  discharge,  depriving  the  officer  of 
his  military  character. 

208.  Discharging  an  officer  is  another  mode  of  depriving  an 
officer  of  his  military  character,  but  the  same  ideas  of  disgrace  do 
not  attach  to  his  sentence  as  cashiering  or  dismissal. 

209.  Suspension  from  rank  and  pay,  for  a  specified  time,  deprives 
an  officer  of  his  military  character,  and  suspends  his  functions  and 
pay  for  a  definite  time,  during  which  time  he  cannot  rise  by  seniority. 

210.  Suspension  from  command  leaves  an  officer  in  the  full  enjoy- 
ment of  all  rights  and  eligibility,  depending  on  rank,  excepting  that 
he  can  exercise  no  military  command  whatever  during  the  suspension. 

211.  Reprimand.  The  court  may  sentence  an  officer  to  be  publicly 
reprimanded  (which  is  done  in  orders),  or  to  be  privately  repri- 
manded, which  is  done  by  the  Commanding  Officer,  without  the 
presence  of  witnesses. 

212.  Admonition.  In  some  instances  of  trivial  faults,  courts  mar- 
tial may  sentence  officers  to  be  admonished,  or  to  be  privately 
admonished. 

213.  The  court  may  combine  any  of  these  punishments,  which 
are  not  inconsistent  with  one  another  or  contrary  to  law,  in  their 
sentence. 

214.  "  The  sentence  of  any  such  court  martial  shall  be  according 
to  the  nature  and  degree  of  the  offijnce,  and  according  to  military 
usage ;  but  shall  not  extend  farther  than  cashiering  the  officer  con- 
victed, and  disqualifying  him  from  holding  any  office  in  the  Militia 
of  this  state,  and  imposing  a  fine  not  exceeding  one  hundred  doUai'S." 

[Militia  Laws  of  April  17, 1S54,  Ul.  7,  arU  1,  $  11.  ] 

215.  The  sentence  recorded  must  not  give  any  intimation  of  the* 
majority  by  which  it  was  pronounced,  or  how  the  members  of  the 
court  stood  on  the  question,  and  should  avoid  all  argument  or  special 
voasous  in  its  justificatioa. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  39 

Courts  Martial. 

216.  "  Every  Judge  Advocate,  whether  commissioned  or  special,  and 
every  member  of  a  court  martial,  shall  keep  secret  the  sentence  of 
the  court,  until  the  same  shall  be  approved  or  disapproved,  according 
to  law ;  and  shall  keep  secret  the  vote  or  opinion  of  any  particular 
member  of  the  court,  unless  required  to  give  evidence  thereof  by  a 
court  of  justice." 

[  Militia  Laws  of  April  17, 1854,  tit.  7,  art.  1,  §  10.  ] 

217.  The  sentence  cannot  be  carried  into  effect  until  after  the  pro- 
ceedings shall  have  been  laid  before  the  officer  ordering  the  court 
martial,  who  is  required  by  law  to  approve  or  disapprove  of  the 
same,  within  fifteen  days  thereafter.  If  he  shall  disapprove  of  the 
same,  he  may  for  good  reasons  send  back  the  proceedings  for  revision. 

218.  In  case  the  officer  ordering  the  court  be  dead,  or  have 
resigned  or  otherwise  vacated  his  office,  these  returns  shall  be  laid 
before  the  Commanding  Officer  of  the  forces  for  the  time  being,  who 
shall  proceed  thereon  as  though  he  was  the  officer  ordering  the  court 
martial. 

219.  Proper  causes  for  revision  are  : 

1.  When  the  sentence  ( being  discretionary  )  is  such  that,  in  the 
particular  circumstances  of  the  case,  it  cannot  be  executed. 

2.  Illegality  in  the  sentence,  whether  from  being  contrary  to 
law  or  military  usage,  or  whether  from  being  found  in  consequence 
of  the  admission  of  illegal  or  the  rejection  of  legal  testimony. 

3.  Manifest  incongruity  between  the  finding  and  the  sentence. 

4.  When  the  sentence  is  such  that,  from  motives  of  public  or 
military  policy,  it  is  not  advisable  to  have  it  executed. 

220.  No  witness  can  be  examined  on  revision,  nor  can  any  illegality 
in  the  composition  or  constitution  of  the  court,  or  in  the  charges,  be 
cured.  If  the  court  be  a  legal  court,  which  has  acted  illegally,  the 
accused  cannot  be  again  tried.  If  it  be  an  illegal  court,  all  its 
proceedings  are  null  and  void,  ah  initio^  and  there  has  been  no 
trial,  and  the  accused  may  again  be  brought  to  trial  before  a  legal 
court. 


40  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Omtrta  Martial. 

221.  The  court,  on  revision,  may  amend  the  finding  and  sentence, 
or  either  of  them,  in  whole  or  in  part,  or  correct  them  in  any  way  to 
conform  to  the  provisions  of  law  or  the  justice  of  the  case,  or  they 
may  substitute  a  new  finding  or  sentence  in  place  of  the  former  ones. 
In  ca.se  of  a  new  finding  or  sentence,  the  officer  ordering  the  court 
may  send  the  proceedings  back  for  a  second  revision.  If  the  court, 
on  such  second  revision,  should  adhere  to  the  judgment  pronounced 
by  it,  the  finding  and  sentence  must  be  either  approved  or  disapproved. 
If  disapproved,  the  effect  will  be  to  nullify  the  sentence,  but  not  to 
the  extent  of  exposing  the  accused  to  a  second  trial. 

222.  After  the  record  of  the  proceedings  in  a  military  court  is 
once  made  up,  it  cannot  in  any  manner  be  altered,  but  additions  may 
be  made  to  it. 

In  conformity  to  this  rule,  the  original  finding  and  sentence  of  a 
court  martial  cannot,  on  revision,  be  expunged.  The  revised  finding 
and  sentence  should  merely  be  added  to  the  original  record.  No 
expunging,  altering  or  otherwise  amending  any  part  of  the  original 
record  will  be  tolerated. 

223.  "  The  proceedings  and  sentence  of  every  such  court  martial 
shall,  without  delay,  be  delivered  to  the  officer  ordering  the  court, 
who  shall  approve  or  disapprove  thereof  within  fifteen  days  there- 
after, and  shall  give  notice  of  his  approval  or  disapproval  to  the 
President  of  such  court  martial  and  to  the  arresting  officer,  and  ho 
may,  at  his  discretion,  publish  the  sentence,  as  approved  or  dis- 
approved, in  Orders ;  but  no  part  of  such  sentence  shall  be  executed 
until  after  the  time  allowed  for  appeal  has  expired." 

224.  "  ITo  shall  also  transmit  such  proceedings  and  sentence,  and  his 
approval  or  disapproval  thereof,  to  the  Adjutant-General,  to  be  kept 
in  his  office." 

225.  "The  right  of  appeal  to  the  Commander-in-Chief,  as  it  now 
exists  by  military  usage,  is  reserved  ;  but  no  appeal  .shall  be  received, 
unless  made  within  twenty  days  after  the  decision  appealed  from  i» 
made  known  to  the  person  ai)pcaling." 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  41 

Courts  Martial. 

226.  "  The  President  of  such  court  martial  shall  issue  his  warrant 
for  the  collection  of  all  fines  imposed  by  said  court,  directed  to  the 
sheriflf  of  the  county  in  which  the  court  was  held  (  or  in  which  the 
delinquent  resides ),  whose  duty  it  shall  be  to  collect  such  fines  in 
the  same  manner  as  he  is  authorized  to  collect  any  debt  upon  civil 
process,  together  with  lawful  costs  and  the  amount  of  fine,  to  be  paid 
into  the  state  treasury." 

[  Militia  Laws  of  AprU  17, 1854,  tit.  T,  art.  1,  §§  12, 13, 14, 15.  ] 

227.  Notice  of  every  sentence  of  a  court  martial  shall  be  officially 
communicated  to  the  person  having  been  on  trial,  by  the  officer 
ordering  the  court,  within  three  days  after  said  officer  shall  have 
finally  approved  or  disapproved  of  such  sentence.  Such  notice  shall 
be  served  on  the  person  so  tried,  either  personally  or  by  leaving  the 
same,  at  his  place  or  last  place  of  business  or  abode,  with  some  person 
of  suitable  age  and  discretion ;  or  by  inclosing  it  In  a  wrapper,  and 
depositing  it  ( postage  paid  )  in  the  post-office,  directed  to  such  per- 
son at  his  place  or  last  place  of  residence.  The  officer  ordering  the 
court  shall  also,  within  three  days  after  such  decision,  transmit  to 
the  Adjutant- General  the  proceedings  of  said  court,  with  a  statement 
showing  the  date  of  such  approval  or  disapproval,  and  the  time  and 
manner  of  giving  such  notice. 

228.  On  the  hearing  of  all  appeals,  the  officers  appealed  to  will 
include  in  their  examination  and  decision  all  challenges  of  members 
of  the  court,  made  on  the  part  of  the  accused ;  and  if,  on  the  final 
appeal,  the  officer  appealed  to  shall  set  aside  the  proceedings  of  the 
court  for  errors,  in  disallowing  such  challenges,  the  trial  and  deci- 
sion of  the  court  shall  not  be  a  bar  to  another  trial  by  a  court  martial 
legally  constituted. 

229.  The  officer  hearing  an  appeal  from  a  decision  of  a  court-mar- 
tial shall  in  all  cases  determine  the  same  according  to  the  law  and 
justice  of  the  case,  without  regarding  formal  or  technical  omissions, 
or  any  errors  or  defects  in  the  proceedings  before  the  court,  which 
could  not  affisct  the  merits. 

Military.  4* 


42  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Courts  Martial. 

230.  An  appeal  suspends  the  execution  of  tlie  sentence  until  the 
final  decision  of  such  appeal,  the  accused  meanwliile  remaining  iu 
arrest;  and  the  Adjutant-General  will  immediately  notify  the  officer 
ordering  a  court,  of  any  appeal  to  the  Commander-in-Chief  from 
the  proceedings  and  sentence  of  such  court. 

231.  The  proceedings  of  all  courts  of  inquiry  will  be  transmitted 
to  the  Adjutant-General,  in  the  same  manner  as  the  proceedings  of 
courts  martial. 


RULES     APPLICABLE     TO     REGIMENTAL    AND    CERTAIN    BRIGADE 
COURTS     MARTIAL. 

232.  So  far  as  these  rules  and  regulations  are  applicable  to  regi- 
mental courts  martial,  they  shall  be  so  applied.  Except  that  no 
other  charges  or  specifications  shall  be  necessary  for  the  trial  of  delin- 
quents and  deficiencies,  than  the  return  of  the  proper  officer  in  regard 
to  such  delinquents  or  deficiencies ;  nor  upon  any  such  trial  shall 
the  attendance  of  a  Judge  Advocate  be  necessary. 

233.  Whenever  any  appeal  shall  be  made  from  the  sentence  of  any 
court  martial  to  the  officer  ordering  the  court,  such  appeal  shall  be 
in  writing,  and  specify  distinctly  the  several  grounds  of  appeal,  and 
a  copy  of  such  appeal  shall,  without  delay,  be  served  oy  the  appellant 
upon  the  President  of  such  court  martial,  and  also  upon  the  Com- 
mandant of  the  military  district  for  which  such  court  martial  shall 
have  been  held. 

234.  The  officer  to  whom  an  appeal  shall  be  made  from  the  sentence 
of  any  court  martial,  shall,  without  delay,  by  order,  fix  a  time  and 
place  when  and  where  such  appeal  will  be  heard,  and  cause  a  copy 
of  such  order  to  be  served  at  least  ten  days  before  the  time  of  such 
hearing,  upon  the  appellant  and  the  President  of  such  court,  and  on 
the  Commandant  of  the  military  district  for  which  said  court  may 
have  been  held. 

235.  "  Whenever  the  sentence  of  any  court  martial  shall  be 
appealed  from,  the  officer  hearing  the  appeal  shall  require  the  court, 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  43 

Duties  in  Camp  and  Gart-ison. 

or  the  President  thereof,  to  furnish  him  forthwith  with  a  statement 
of  the  case,  and  of  the  evidence  touching  the  same ;  which  statement 
and  evidence  shall,  in  case  of  an  appeal  to  the  Commanding  Officer 
of  the  brigade,  be  forthwith,  on  notice  of  such  appeal,  transmitted  to 
him." 

236.  "  Such  statement  being  furnished,  the  officer  hearing  the 
appeal  may  hear  such  further  evidence,  by  affidavit  or  otherwise,  as 
the  nature  of  the  case  may  require,  and  for  that  purpose  he  shall 
have  power  to  administer  the  usual  oaths  to  witnesses  produced 
before  him,  except  in  cases  where  trials  may  have  been  had  upon 
charges  preferred." 

237.  "  The  last  two  sections  shall  extend  to  appeals  made  from  the 
order  of  an  officer  approving  the  sentence  of  a  court  martial." 

[  Militia  Laws  of  April  17, 1S54,  tit.  7,  art.  4,  §§  50,  51,  52.  ] 

238.  These  rules  and  regulations,  and  also  the  provision  of  title  7 
of  the  Militia  Laws  of  this  state,  passed  April  17,  1854,  relating  to 
regimental  and  battalion  courts  martial,  so  far  as  the  same  can  be 
made  applicable,  shall  apply  to  the  brigade  courts  martial  for  the 
trial  of  delinquencies  and  deficiencies  of  Commissioned  Officers  and 
non-commissioned  Staff  Officers,  provided  for  by  §  35  of  the  act  "  In 
relation  to  the  First  Division  and  Fifth  Brigade,"  passed  April  14, 1855 ; 
but  no  arrest  need  be  made  of  any  officer  brought  to  trial  before  said 
courts,  nor  shall  any  charges  or  specifications  be  necessary  for  the 
trial  of  such  delinquencies  and  deficiencies,  other  than  the  return  of 
the  proper  officer  in  regard  to  such  delinquencies  and  deficiencies; 
nor  shall  the  attendance  of  a  Judge  Advocate  be  necessary  upon  any 
such  brigade  court  martial. 

ARTICLE  XVII. 

DUTIES    IN    CAMP    AND    GARRISON. 

239.  The  duties  in  camp  and  garrison  are  to  be  conducted,  as  far 
as  practicable,  in  the  same  manner  and  on  the  same  principles. 


44  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Hours  of  Service  and  RoU^OaUs  —  Signals. 

240.  The  Reveille  is  the  signal  for  the  men  to  rise  and  the  sentinel 
to  leave  off  challenging. 

241.  The  Troop  is  to  sound  or  beat  at  —  o'clock  in  the  morning  for 
the  purpose  of  assembling  the  men  for  duty  and  inspection  at  guard- 
mounting. 

242.  The  Retreat  is  to  sound  or  beat  at  sunset,  for  the  purpose  of 
warning  the  oflScers  and  men  for  duty,  and  reading  the  orders  of  the 
day. 

243.  The  Tattoo  is  to  be  beat  at  —  o'clock  in  the  evening,  after 
which  no  soldier  is  to  be  out  of  his  tent  or  quarters,  unless  by  special 
leave. 

244.  Peas-vpon-a-irencher,  the  signal  for  breakfast,  is  to  sound  or 
beat  at  —  o'clock  in  the  morning. 

245.  Roast  beef,  the  signal  for  dinner,  is  to  sound  or  beat  at 
—  o'clock  ;  at  other  times  it  is  the  signal  to  draw  provisions. 

246.  The  Surgeon's  call  is  to  sound  or  beat  at  —  o'clock,  when  the 
sick,  able  to  go  out,  will  be  conducted  to  the  hospital  by  the  First 
Sergeants  of  companies,  who  will  hand  to  the  Surgeon  a  report  of  all 
the  sick  in  the  company,  other  than  in  hospital.  The  patients  who 
cannot  attend  at  the  dispensary  will  be  immediately  after,  if  not 
before,  visited  by  the  Surgeon, 

247.  The  General  is  to  beat,  only  when  the  whole  army  is  to 
march,  and  is  the  signal  to  strike  the  tents  and  prepare  for  the  march. 

248.  The  Assembly  is  the  signal  to  form  by  company. 

249.  To  the  color  is  the  signal  to  form  by  battalion. 
260.  The  March,  for  the  whole  to  move. 

251.  The  Long  roU  is  the  signal  for  getting  under  arms,  in  case  of 
alarm,  or  the  sudden  approach  of  the  enemy. 

252.  The  Parley  is  to  desire  a  conference  with  the  enemy. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  45 


Hours  0/ Service  and  Roll^CalU  — Signals'— Roll-Calls. 


HOURS    OF    SERVICE    AND    ROLL-CALLS. 

253.  In  garrison,  reveille  will  be  at  5  o'clock  in  May,  June,  July 
and  August ;  at  6  in  March,  April,  September  and  October,  and  at 
half-past  6  in  November,  December,  January  and  February;  re- 
treat at  sunset ;  the  troop^  surgeon's  call,  signals  for  breakfast  and 
dinner  at  the  hours  prescribed  by  the  Commanding  Officer,  according 
to  climate  and  season.  In  the  cavalry,  stable-calls  immediately  after 
reveille,  and  an  hour  and  a  half  before  retreat;  water-calls  at  the 
hours  directed  by  the  Commanding  Officer. 

254.  In  camp  the  Commanding  Officer  prescribes  the  hours  of 
reveille,  reports,  roll-calls,  guard-mounting,  meals,  stable-calls,  is- 
sues, fatigues,  &c. 

SIGNALS. 

255.  1,  To  go  for  fuel — 'poing  stroke  and  ten-stroke  roll. 
2.  To  go  for  water — two  strokes  and  a  flam. 

8,  For  fatigue  party— 2?tontfer'5  march. 

4.  Adjutant's  cd\\— first  part  of  the  troop. 

5.  First  Sergeant's  call — one  roll  and  four  taps. 

6.  Sergeant's  call — one  roll  and  three  taps. 

7.  Corporal's  call — one  roll  and  two  taps. 

8.  For  the  drummers  — the  drummer's  call. 

256.  The  drummer's  call  shall  be  beat  by  the  drums  of  the  police 
guard  five  minutes  before  the  time  of  beating  the  stated  calls,when 
the  drummers  will  assemble  before  the  colors  of  their  respective 
regiments,  and  as  soon  as  the  beat  begins  on  the  right,  it  will  be 
immediately  taken  up  along  the  line. 

ROLL-CALLS. 

257.  There  shall  be  daily,  at  least  three  stated  roll-calls ;  viz.,  at  re- 
veille, retreat  and  tattoo.  They  will  be  made  on  the  company  parades 
by  the  First  Sergeants,  superintended  by  a  Commissioned  Officer  of  the 
company.  The  Captains  will  report  the  absentees,  without  leave, 
to  the  Colonel  or  Commanding  Officer. 


46  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

MiUtary  Honors, 

258.  Immediately  after  reveille  roll-call  (after  stable-duty  in  the 
cavalry),  tlie  tents  or  quarters,  and  the  space  around  them,  will  be 
put  in  order  by  the  men  of  the  companies,  superintended  by  the 
chiefs  of  squads,  and  the  guard-house  or  guard-tent  by  the  guard  or 
prisoners. 

259.  The  morning  reports  of  companies,  signed  by  the  Captains 
and  First  Sergeants,  will  be  handed  to  the  Adjutant  before  eight 
o'clock  in  the  morning,  and  will  be  consolidated  by  the  Adjutant 
within  the  next  hour,  for  the  information  of  the  Colonel ;  and  if  the 
consolidation  is  to  be  sent  to  higher  authority,  it  will  be  signed  by 
the  Colonel  and  the  Adjutant. 

ARTICLE  XVIII. 

HONORS    TO    BE    PAID    BY   THE    TROOPS. 

260.  The  President  or  Vice-President  of  the  United  States,  and  the 
Commander-in-Chief  of  this  State,  are  to  be  saluted  with  the  highest 
honors;  all  standards  and  colors  dropping,  officers  and  troops  sa- 
luting, drums  beating  and  trumpets  sounding. 

261.  A  General^  commanding -in- chief ,  is  to  be  received  —  by 
cavalry,  with  sabres  presented,  trumpets  sounding  the  march,  and  all 
the  officers  saluting,  standards  dropping ;  by  infantry,  with  drums 
beating  the  march,  colors  dropping,  officers  saluting  and  arms 
presented. 

262.  A  Major- General  is  to  bo  received  —  by  cavalry,  with  sabres 
presented,  trumpets  sounding  twice  the  trumpet-flourish  and  officers 
saluting;  by  infantry,  with  three  ruffles,  colors  dropping,  officers 
saluting  and  arms  presented. 

263.  A  Brigadier- General  is  to  be  received  —  by  cavalry,  with 
sabres  presented,  trumpets  sounding  once  the  trumpet-flourish  and 
officers  saluting ;  by  infantry,  with  two  ruffies,  colors  dropping,  offi- 
cers salutirig  and  arms  presented. 

264.  An  Adjutant- General  or  Inspector- General,  if  under  the 
rank  of  a  General  officer,  is  to  be  received  at  a  review  or  inspection 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  41 

Military  Honors. 

of  the  troops  under  arms :  by  cavalry,  with  sabres  presented,  ofScera 
saluting;  by  infantry,  officers  saluting  and  arms  presented.  The 
same  honors  to  be  paid  to  any  field-officer  authorized  to  review  and 
inspect  the  troops.  When  the  inspecting  officer  is  junior  to  the  officer 
commanding  the  parade,  no  compliments  will  be  paid;  he  will  be 
received  only  with  swords  drawn  and  arms  shouldered. 

265.  All  guards  are  to  turn  out  and  present  arms  to  General  officers^ 
as  often  as  they  pass  them,  except  the  personal  guards  of  General 
officers,  which  turn  out  only  to  the  Generals  whose  guards  they  are, 
and  to  officers  of  superior  rank. 

266.  To  Commanders  of  regiments,  garrison  or  camp,  their  own 
guard  turn  out  and  present  arms  once  a  day;  after  which,  they  turn 
out  with  shouldered  arms. 

267.  To  the  Members  of  the  Cabinet,  to  the  Chief  Justice^  the  Pre- 
sident of  the  Senate  and  the  Speaker  of  the  House  of  Representatives 
of  the  United  States,  to  the  Lieutenant-Governor  of  this  State,  and  to 
Governors  of  other  States  and  Territories,  the  same  honors  will  be 
paid  as  to  a  General  commanding-in-chief. 

268.  Officers  of  the  Army  and  Navy  of  the  United  States  will  be 
received  with  the  honors  due  to  their  rank. 

269.  Officers  of  a  Foreign  Service  may  be  complimented  with  the 
honors  due  to  their  rank. 

270.  American  and  Foreign  Envoys  or  Ministers  will  be  received 
with  the  compliments  due  to  a  Major-Geueral. 

271.  The  Colors  of  a  regiment  passing  a  guard  are  to  be  saluted, 
the  trumpets  sounding  and  the  drums  beating  a  march. 

272.  "When  General  officers,  or  persons  entitled  to  salute,  pass  in 
the  rear  of  a  guard,  the  officer  is  only  to  make  his  men  stand  shoul- 
dered, and  not  to  face  his  guard  about  or  beat  his  drum. 


48  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

MUtarjf  Honon. 

273.  When  General  officers,  or  persons  entitled  to  a  salute,  pass 
guards  while  in  the  act  of  relieving,  both  guards  are  to  salute,  receiv- 
ing the  word  of  command  from  the  senior  oflScer  of  the  whole. 

274.  All  guards  are  to  be  under  arms  when  armed  parties  approach 
their  posts ;  and  to  parties  commanded  by  commissioned  officers, 
they  are  to  present  their  arms,  drums  beating  a  march  and  officers 
saluting. 

275.  No  compliments  by  guards  or  sentinels  will  be  paid  between 
retreat  and  reveille^  except  as  prescribed  for  grand  rounds. 

276.  All  guards  and  sentinels  are  to  pay  the  same  compliments  to 
the  officers  of  the  Army  and  Navy  of  the  United  States,  as  are 
directed  to  be  paid  to  the  military  officers  of  this  state,  according  to 
their  relative  ranks. 

277.  It  is  equally  the  duty  of  non-commissioned  officers  and  sol- 
diers, at  all  times  and  in  all  situations,  to  pay  the  proper  compli- 
ments to  the  officers  of  the  Army  and  Navy,  and  to  officers  of  other 
regiments,  when  in  uniform,  as  to  officers  of  their  own  particular 
regiments  and  corps. 

278.  Courtesy  among  military  men  is  indispensable  to  discipline. 
Respect  to  superiors  will  not  be  confined  to  obedience  on  duty,  but 
will  be  extended  to  all  occasions.  It  is  always  the  duty  of  the  inferior 
to  accost  or  to  offisr  first  the  customary  salutation,  and  of  the  superior 
to  return  such  complimentary  notice. 

279.  Sergeants,  with  swords  drawn,  will  salute  by  bringing  them 
to  a  present;  with  muskets,  by  bringing  the  left  hand  across  tho 
body,  so  as  to  strike  the  musket  near  the  right  shoulder.  Corporals 
out  of  the  ranks,  and  privates  not  sentries,  will  carry  their  musketa 
at  a  shoulder,  as  Sergeants,  and  salute  in  hke  maimer. 

280.  When  a  soldier  without  arms,  or  with  side-arms  only,  meets 
an  officer,  he  is  to  raise  his  hand  to  tho  right  side  of  the  visor  of  his 
cap,  palm  to  the  ft-ont,  elbow  raised  as  high  as  tho  shoulder,  looking 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  49 

Salutes, 

at  the  same  time  in  a  respectful  and  soldier-like  manner  at  the  officer, 
who  will  return  the  compliment  thus  offered. 

281.  A  non-commissioned  officer  or  soldier  being  seated,  and  with- 
out particular  occupation,  will  rise  on  the  approach  of  an  officer 
and  make  the  customary  salutation.  If  standing,  he  will  turn  toward 
the  officer  for  the  same  purpose.  If  the  parties  remain  in  the  same 
place  or  on  the  same  ground,  such  comiilimeuts  need  not  be  repeated. 

SALUTES. 

282.  The  National  salute  is  determined  by  the  number  of  States 
composing  the  Union,  at  the  rate  of  one  gun  for  each  State. 

283.  The  President  of  the  United  States  and  Governor  of  this  State, 
will  receive  a  salute  of  twenty-one  guns. 

284.  The  Vice-President  is  to  receive  a  salute  of  seventeen  guns. 

285.  The  Heads  of  the  great  Executive  Departments  of  the  National 
Government,  the  General  Commanding  the  Army  of  the  United 
States,  the  Lieutenant-  G&vernor  of  this  State,  and  the  Governors  of 
other  States  and  Territories,  fifteen  guns. 

286.  A  Major-  General,  thirteen  guns. 

287.  A  Brigadier- General,  eleven  guns. 

288.  Foreign  Ships  of  Wa/r  will  be  saluted  in  return  for  a  similar 
compliment,  gun  for  gun,  on  notice  being  officially  received  of  such 
intention.  If  there  be  several  posts  in  sight  of,  or  within  six  miles 
of  each  other,  the  principal  only  shall  reciprocate  compliments  with 
ships  passing. 

289.  Officers  of  the  Army  and  Navy  will  be  saluted  according  to 
rank. 

290.  Foreign  Officers,  invited  to  visit  a  fort,  post  or  camp,  may  be 
saluted  according  to  their  relative  rank. 

291.  Envoys  and  Ministers  of  the  United  States  and  foreign  powers 
are  to  be  saluted  with  thirteen  guns. 

Military.  5 


60  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Ikc<»^  of  Honor — Fwnerai  Honors. 

292.  A  General  officer  will  be  saluted  but  once  in  a  year  at  each 
post,  and  only  when  notice  of  his  intention  to  visit  the  post  has  been 
given. 

293.  Salutes  to  individuals  are  to  be  fired  on  their  arrival  only. 

294.  A  National  salute  will  be  fired  at  meridian  on  the  anniversary 
of  the  Independence  of  the  United  States,  at  each  military  post  and 
camp  provided  with  artilleiy  and  ammunition. 

ESCORTS    OP    HONOR. 

295.  Escorts  of  honor  may  be  composed  of  cavalry  or  infantry,  or 
both,  according  to  circumstances.  They  are  guards  of  honor  for  the 
purpose  of  receiving  and  escorting  personages  of  high  rank,  civil  or 
military.  The  troops  for  this  purpose  will  be  selected  for  their  sol- 
dierly appearance  and  superior  discipline. 

296.  The  escort  will  be  dra^^^l  up  in  line,  the  centre  opposite  to 
the  place  where  the  personage  presents  himself,  with  an  interval 
between  the  wings  to  receive  him  and  his  retinue.  On  his  appear- 
ance, he  will  be  received  with  the  honors  due  to  his  rank.  When  he 
has  taken  his  place  in  the  line,  the  whole  will  be  wheeled  into 
platoons  or  companies,  as  the  case  may  be,  and  take  up  the  march. 
The  same  ceremony  will  be  observed,  and  the  same  honors  paid,  on 
his  leaving  the  escort. 

297.  When  the  position  of  the  escort  is  at  a  considerable  distance 
from  the  point  where  he  is  expected  to  be  received,  as,  for  instance, 
whore  a  court  yard  or  wharf  intervenes,  a  double  line  of  sentinels 
will  be  posted  from  that  point  to  the  escort,  facing  inward,  and  the 
sentinels  will  successively  salute  as  he  passes 

298.  An  officer  will  bo  appointed  to  attend  him,  to  bear  such  com- 
munications as  he  may  have  to  make  to  the  Commander  of  the  escort. 

FUNERAL   HONORS. 

299.  On  the  receipt  of  official  intelligence  of  the  death  of  the 
President  of  ike  United  States,  or  the  Governor  of  this  state^  the 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  51 

Fwneral  Honors. 

Commanding  officer  of  every  regiment  provided  with  artillery  and 
ammunition,  shall,  on  the  following  day,  cause  a  gun  to  be  fired  at 
every  half  hour,  beginning  at  sunrise  and  ending  at  sunset. 

300.  On  the  day  of  the  interment  of  a  General  commanding-in- 
chief,  a  gun  will  be  fired  at  every  half  hour,  until  the  procession 
moves,  beginning  at  sunrise. 

301.  The  funeral  escort  of  a  General  commanding-in-chief  shall 
consist  of  a  regiment  of  infantry,  a  squadron  of  cavalry,  and  six 
pieces  of  artillery. 

302.  That  of  a  Major-  General,  a  regiment  of  infantry,  a  squadron 
of  cavalry,  and  four  pieces  of  artillery. 

303.  That  of  a  Brigadier- General,  a  regiment  of  infantry,  on© 
company  of  cavalry,  and  two  pieces  of  artillery. 

304.  That  of  a  Colonel,  a  regiment. 

305.  That  of  a  Lieutenant- Colonel^  six  companies. 
806.  That  of  a  Major,  four  companies. 

307.  That  of  a  Captain,  one  company. 

308.  That  of  a  Subaltern,  half  a  company. 

309.  The  funeral  escort  shall  always  be  commanded  by  an  officer 
of  the  same  rank  with  the  deceased ;  or  if  none  such  be  present,  by 
one  of  the  next  inferior  grade. 

310.  The  funeral  escort  of  a  non-commissioned  staff  officer,  shall 
consist  of  sixteen  rank  and  file,  commanded  by  a  Sergeant. 

311.  That  of  a  Sergeant,  of  fourteen  rank  and  file,  commanded 
by  a  Sergeant. 

312.  That  of  a  Corporal,  of  twelve  rank  and  file,  commanded  by 
a  Corporal ;  and, 

313.  That  of  a  private,  of  eight  rank  and  file,  commanded  by  a 
Corporal. 


52  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Ihmeral  Honors. 

814,  The  escort  will  be  formed  in  two  ranks,  opposite  to  the  quar- 
ters or  tent  of  the  deceased,  with  shouldered  arms  and  bayonets 
unfixed ;  the  artillery  and  cavalry  on  the  right  of  the  infantry. 

815.  On  the  appearance  of  the  corpse,  the  officer  commanding  the 
escort  will  command, 

Present  —  Arms! 

when  the  honors  due  to  the  deceased  will  be  paid  by  the  drums  and 
trumpets.  The  music  will  then  play  an  appropriate  air,  and  the 
coffin  will  then  be  taken  to  the  right,  where  it  will  be  halted.  The 
music  will  take  post  on  the  left.     The  Commander  will  next  order, 

1.  Shoulder — Arms  !  2.  By  company  {or platoon) ,  left  wheel.  3.  March  ! 
4:.  Reverse — Arms!  5.  Column,  forward.  6.  Guide,  right.  7.  March! 

The  arms  will  be  reversed  at  the  order,  by  bringing  the  firelock 
under  the  left  arm,  butt  to  the  front,  barrel  downward,  left  hand  sus- 
taining tlie  lock,  the  right  steadying  the  firelock  behind  the  back ; 
swords  are  reversed  in  a  similar  manner  under  the  right  arm.  The 
officers  in  the  usual  positions,  as  in  any  other  column,  left  in  front. 
The  band  and  field  music  will  precede  the  column. 

316,  The  column  will  be  marched  in  slow  time  to  solemn  music, 
and,  on  reaching  the  grave,  the  column  will  take  such  a  direction  that 
the  guides  shall  be  next  to  the  grave.  When  the  centre  of  the  column 
is  opposite  to  the  grave,  the  Commander  will  order, 

1,  Column.    2,  Halt!     3.  Right  into  line,  wheel.    4.  March! 

The  coffin  is  then  brought  along  the  front,  to  the  opposite  side  of  the 
giave,  and  the  Commander  then  orders, 

1.  Shoulder — Arms!    2.  Present — Arms! 

And  when  the  coffin  reaches  the  grave  he  adds, 

1.  Shoulder — Arms!     2.  Rest  on  —  Arms 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  53 

Funeral  Honors. 

The  rest  on  arms  is  done  by  placing  the  muzzle  on  the  left  foot, 
both  hands  on  the  but,  the  head  on  the  hands  or  bowed,  right  knee 
bent. 

817.  After  the  funeral  service  is  performed,  and  the  coffin  is  lowered 
into  the  grave,  the  Commander  will  order, 

1.  Attention  I    2.  Shoulder  —  Arms!    3.  Load  at  will.    4.  Load! 

when  three  rounds  of  small  arms  will  be  fired  by  the  escort,  taking 
caro  to  elevate  the  pieces. 

318.  This  being  done,  the  Commander  will  order, 

1.  By  company  {or  platoon),  right  wheel.     2.  March!     3.  Column 
forward.    4.   Guide  left.     6.  Quick — March! 

The  music  will  not  begin  to  play  until  the  escort  is  clear  of  the 
inclosure. 

319.  When  the  distance  to  the  place  of  interment  is  considerable, 
the  escort  may  march  in  common  time  and  in  column  of  route,  after 
leaving  the  residence  or  quarters  of  the  deceased,  and  until  it 
approaches  the  burial  ground. 

320.  The  pall-bearers,  six  in  number,  will  be  selected  from  the 
grade  of  the  deceased,  or  from  the  grade  or  grades  next  above  or 
below  it, 

321.  At  the  funeral  of  an  officer,  as  many  in  commission  of  the 
division,  brigade  or  regiment,  according  to  the  rank  of  the  deceased, 
as  can  conveniently  attend  the  same,  will  join  in  procession,  in  uniform 
and  with  side-arms.  The  funeral  of  a  non-commissioned  officer  or 
private  will  be  attended,  in  like-manner,  by  the  non-commissioned 
officers  or  privates  of  the  regiment  or  company,  according  to  the  rank 
of  the  deceased,  with  side-arms  only. 

322.  Persons  joining  in  the  procession  follow  the  coffin  in  the  in- 
verse order  of  their  rank. 

Military.  5* 


54  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Inspection  of  the  Troops. 

323.  The  usual  badge  of  military  mourning  is  a  piece  of  black 
crape  around  the  left  arm,  above  the  elbow,  and  also  upon  the  sword- 
hilt  ;  and  will  be  worn  when  in  full  or  in  undress. 

324.  The  drums  of  a  funeral  escort  will  be  covered  with  black  crape 
or  thin  black  serge. 

325.  Funeral  honors  will  be  paid  to  deceased  officers,  without  mili- 
tary rank,  according  to  their  assimilated  grades. 

ARTICLE  XIX. 

INSPECTION    OF   THE    TROOPS. 

326.  The  inspection  of  troops,  as  a  division,  regiment  or  other  body 
composing  a  garrison  or  command,  not  less  than  a  company,  will 
generally  be  preceded  by  a  review. 

327.  There  will  be  certain  periodical  inspections,  to  wit  : 

1.  At  the  annual  parade  or  encampments. 

2.  Biennially,  by  the  Inspector-General  or  by  any  other  officer 
ordered  for  such  duty  by  the  Commander-in-Chief. 

3.  At  other  parades  specially  ordered  for  inspection. 

328.  Besides  these  inspections,  frequent  visits  will  be  made  by  the 
Commanding  Officer,  Company  and  Medical  Officers,  while  in  camp  or 
garrison,  to  the  men's  quarters,  the  hospital,  guard-house,  &c. 

FORM    OF    INSPECTION. 

829.  The  present  example  embraces  a  battalion  of  infantry.  The 
Inspecting  Officer  and  the  Field  and  Staflf  Officers  will  be  on  foot. 

330.  The  battalion  being  in  the  order  of  battle,  the  Colonel  will 
cause  it  to  break  into  open  column  of  companies,  right  in  front.  He 
will  next  order  the  ranks  to  be  opened,  when  the  color-rank  and  color- 
guard,  under  the  direction  of  the  Adjutant,  will  take  post  ten  paces 
in  front,  and  the  band  ten  paces  in  rear  of  the  coIumD. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  55 

Inspection  of  the  Troops. 

331.  The  Colonel,  seeing  the  ranks  aligned,  will  command, 

1.  Officers  and  Sergeants^  to  the  front  of  your  companies.     2.  March  ! 

The  officers  will  form  themselves  in  one  rank,  eight  paces,  and  the 
non-commissioned  officers  in  one  rank,  six  paces  in  advance,  along 
the  whole  fronts  of  their  respective  companies,  from  right  to  left,  iu 
the  order  of  seniority ;  the  pioneers  and  music  of  each  company,  in 
one  rank,  two  paces  behind  the  non-commissioned  officers. 

332.  The  Colonel  will  next  command, 

Field  and  Staff,  to  the  front  —  March! 

The  commissioned  officers  thus  designated  will  form  themselves  in 
one  rank,  on  a  line  equal  to  the  front  of  the  column,  six  paces  in 
front  of  the  colors,  from  right  to  left,  in  the  order  of  seniority ;  and 
the  non-commissioned  staff,  in  a  similar  manner,  two  paces  in  rear 
of  the  preceding  rank.  The  Colonel,  seeing  the  movement  executed, 
will  take  post  on  the  right  of  the  Lieutenant-Colonel  and  wait  the 
approach  of  the  Inspecting  Officer.  But  such  of  the  Field  Officers  as 
may  be  superior  in  rank  to  the  Inspector  will  not  take  post  in  front 
of  the  battalion. 

333.  The  Inspector  will  commence  in  front.  After  inspecting  the 
dress  and  general  appearance  of  the  field  and  commissioned  staff 
under  arms,  the  Inspector,  accompanied  by  these  officers,  will  pass 
down  the  open  column,  looking  at  every  rank  in  front  and  rear. 

334.  The  Colonel  will  now  command, 

1.  Order  arms.    2.  Rest  ! 

when  the  Inspector  will  proceed  to  make  a  minute  inspection  of  the 
several  ranks  or  divisions,  in  succession,  commencing  in  front. 

835.  As  the  Inspector  approaches  the  non-commissioned  staff, 
color-rank,  the  color-guard  and  the  band,  the  Adjutant  will  give  the 
necessary  orders  for  the  inspection  of  arms,  boxes  and  knapsacks. 
The  colors  will  be  planted  firm  in  the  ground,  to  enable  the  color- 
bearers  to  display  the   contents  of  their  knapsacks.     The   non- 


66  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Inspection  of  the  Troops. 

commissioned  staff  may  be  dismissed  as  soon  as  inspected ;  but  the 
color-rank  and  color-guard  will  remain  until  the  colors  are  to  bo 
escorted  to  the  place  from  which  they  were  taken. 

336.  As  the  Inspector  successively  approaches  the  companies,  th» 
Captains  will  command, 

1.  Attention.     2.  Company.     3.  Inspection  —  Arms! 

The  Inspecting  Officer  will  then  go  through  the  whole  company  and 
minutely  inspect  the  arms,  accoutrements  and  dress  of  each  soldier. 
After  this  is  done,  the  Captain  will  command, 

Open  —  Boxes! 

when  the  ammunition  and  the  boxes  will  be  examined, 

337.  The  Captain  will  then  command, 

1.  Shoulder  —  Arms  !  6.  To  the  rear,  open  order. 

2.  Close  order.  7.  March! 

3.  March!  8.  Front  rank  —  About  —  Face! 

4.  Order — Arms!  9.   Unsling  —  Knapsacks. 

5.  Stack  —  Arms!  10.  Open  —  Knapsacks, 

838.  The  Sergeants  will  face  inward  at  the  2d  command,  and  close 
upon  the  centre  at  the  3d,  and  stack  their  arms  at  the  5th  command ; 
at  the  6th  command  they  face  outward,  and  resume  their  positions  at 
the  7th.  When  the  ranks  are  closed,  preparatory  to  take  arms,  the 
Sergeants  will  also  close  upon  the  centre,  and,  at  the  word,  take  their 
arms  and  resume  their  places. 

339.  The  knapsacks  will  bo  placed  at  the  feet  of  the  men,  the  flaps 
ft-om  them,  with  the  great-coats  on  the  flaps,  and  the  knapsacks 
leaning  on  the  great-coats.  In  this  position  the  Inspector  will 
examine  their  contents,  or  so  many  of  them  as  he  may  think 
necessary,  commencing  with  the  non-commissioned  officers,  the  men 
standing  at  attention. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  51 

JnspeeUon  of  Vu  Troops. 

340.  When  the  Inspector  has  passed  through  the  company^  tho 
Captain  will  command, 

Repack  —  Knapsacks  / 

when  each  soldier  will  repack  and  buckle  up  his  knapsack,  leaving 
it  on  the  ground,  the  number  upward,  turned  from  him,  and  then 
stand  at  rest. 

341.  The  Captain  will  then  command, 

1.  Attention.     2.  Company.     3.  Sling  —  Knapsacks. 

At  the  word  sling,  each  soldier  will  take  his  knapsack,  holding  it  by 
the  inner  straps  and  stand  erect ;  at  the  last  word  he  will  replace  it 
on  his  back.     The  Captain  will  continue, 

4.  Front  rank — About  —  Face!       8.  Shoulder — Arms! 

5.  Close  order.  9.  Officers  and  Sergeants,  to 
G.  March  !  your  posts. 

7.  Take  —  Arms!  10.  March  I 

nnd  will  cause  the  company  to  file  off  to  their  tents  or  quarters, 
except  the  company  that  is  to  refiscort  the  colors,  which  will  await 
the  further  orders  of  the  Colonel. 

342.  In  an  extensive  column,  some  of  the  rearmost  companies 
may,  after  the  inspection  of  dress  and  general  appearance,  be  per- 
mitted to  stack  arms  until  just  before  the  Inspector  approaches  them, 
when  they  will  be  directed  to  take  arms  and  resume  their  position. 

343.  The  inspection  of  the  troops  being  ended,  the  field  and  staff 
will  next  accompany  the  Inspector  to  the  hospital,  magazine,  arsenal, 
quarters,  sutler's  shop,  guard-house  and  such  other  places  as  he  may 
think  proper  to  inspect.  The  Captains  and  subalterns  repair  to  their 
companies  and  sections  to  await  the  Inspector. 

844.  The  hospital  being  at  all  times  an  object  of  particular  interest, 
it  will  be  critically  and  minutely  inspected. 


68  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

345.  The  men  will  be  formed  in  the  company  quarters  in  front  of 
their  respective  bunks,  and  on  the  entrance  of  the  Inspector  the  word 
Attention!  will  be  given  by  the  senior  non-commissioned  officer 
present,  when  the  whole  will  salute  with  the  hand,  without  uncovering. 

346.  The  Inspector,  attended  by  the  Company  Officers,  will  examine 
the  general  arrangement  of  the  interior  of  the  quarters,  the  bunks, 
bedding,  cooking  and  table  utensils,  and  such  other  objects  as  may 
present  themselves ;  and  afterwards  the  exterior. 

347.  The  inspection  of  cavalry  and  artillery  will  conform  to  the 
principles  laid  down  in  the  foregoing  paragraphs,  regard  being  had  to 
the  system  of  instruction  for  those  arms  of  service  respectively. 

ARTICLE  XX. 

MUSTERS. 

348.  Musters  will  be  made  by  the  Inspecting  Officer  present, 
and  in  the  absence  of  such  officer  the  muster  will  be  made  by  an 
officer  specially  designated  by  the  Commander  of  the  forces  on  duty. 

349.  When  one  Inspecting  Officer  cannot  muster  all  the  troops 
himself  on  the  day  specified,  the  Commanding  Officer  will  designate 
such  other  competent  officers  as  may  be  necessary,  to  assist  him. 

360.  All  stated  musters  of  the  troops  shall  be  preceded  by  a 
minute  and  careful  inspection  in  the  prescribed  mode;  and  if  the 
command  be  more  than  a  company,  by  a  review,  before  inspectioD. 

861.  The  Mustering  Officer  having  inspected  the  companies  in 
succession,  bcgiiming  on  the  right,  returns  to  the  first  company  to 
muster  it.  The  company  being  at  ordered  arms,  with  open  ranks,  as 
when  inspected,  the  Captain  will,  as  the  Mustering  Officer  approaches, 
command, 

1.  Attention.  3.  Shoulder — Arms! 

2.  Company.  i.  Support  —  Arms  I 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  69 


Forms  of  Parade. 


The  Mustering  Officer  will  then  call  over  the  names  on  the  roll,  and 
each  man,  as  his  name  is  called,  will  distinctly  answer,  Here !  and 
bring  his  piece  to  a  carry  and  to  an  order. 

352.  After  each  company  is  mustered,  the  Captain  will  order  it  to 
be  marched  to  the  company  parade,  and  there  dismissed  to  quarters 
to  await  the  Inspector's  visit. 

353.  After  mustering  the  companies,  the  Mustering  Officer,  attended 
by  the  Company  Commanders,  will  visit  the  guard  and  hospital,  to 
verify  the  presence  of  the  men  reported  there. 

354.  The  muster  rolls  will  be  made  on  the  printed  forms  furnished 
from  the  Adjutant-General's  office  and  according  to  the  directions 
given  on  them.  On  the  muster-roll,  companies  are  designated  by  the 
name  of  the  Captain,  whether  present  or  absent. 

355.  One  copy  of  each  muster-roll  will  be  transmitted  by  the 
Mustering  Officer  to  the  Adjutant-General's  office  within  thirty  days 
after  the  muster. 


ARTICLE  XXI. 

FORMS    OF    PARADE, 

356.  On  all  parades  of  ceremony,  such  as  reviews,  guard-mount- 
ing, at  troop  or  retreat  parades,  instead  of  the  word  ^'Eest,^'  which 
allows  the  men  to  move  or  change  the  position  of  their  bodies,  the 
command  will  be  "  Parade — Rest  !"  At  the  last  word  of  this  com- 
mand, the  soldier  will  carry  the  right  foot  six  Inches  in  rear  of  the 
left  heel,  the  left  knee  slightly  bent,  the  body  upright  upon  the  right 
leg ;  the  musket  resting  against  the  hollow  of  the  right  shoulder,  the 
hands  crossed  in  front,  the  backs  of  them  outward,  and  the  left  hand 
uppermost.  At  the  word  "  Attention  !"  the  soldier  will  resume  the 
correct  position  at  ordered  arms.  In  the  positions  here  indicated,  the 
soldier  will  remain  silent  and  motionless  ;  and  it  is  particularly  en- 
joined upon  all  officers  to  cause  the  commands  above  given,  on  the 
part  of  the  soldier,  to  be  executed  with  great  briskness  and  spirit. 


60  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Drew  Parade 

357.  Officers  on  all  duties  under  arms  are  to  have  their  swords 
drawn,  without  waiting  for  any  words  of  command  for  that  purpose. 

I.  DRESS  PARADE. 

358.  There  will  be,  daily,  when  troops  are  on  duty,  at  least  one 
dress  parade,  at  troop  or  retreat,  or  both,  as  the  commanding  officer 
may  direct. 

359.  A  signal  will  be  beat  or  sounded,  half  an  hour  before  troop  or 
retreat,  for  the  music  to  assemble  on  the  regimental  parade,  and  each 
company  to  turn  out  under  arms  on  its  own  parade,  for  roll-call  and 
inspection  by  its  own  officers. 

360.  Ten  minutes  after  that  signal,  the  Adjutant's  call  will  be  given, 
when  the  Captains  will  march  their  companies  ( the  band  playing  )  to 
the  regimental  parade,  where  they  take  their  positions  in  the  order  of 
battle.  When  the  line  is  formed,  the  Captain  of  the  first  company,  on 
notice  from  the  Adjutant,  steps  one  pace  to  the  front,  and  gives  to  his 
company  the  command,  "  Order  —  Arms  !  Parade  —  Rest  !"  which  is 
repeated  by  each  Captain  in  succession  to  the  left.  The  Adjutant  take.s 
post  two  paces  on  the  right  of  the  line ;  the  Sergeant-major  two  paces 
on  the  left.  The  music  will  be  formed  in  two  ranks  on  the  right  of 
the  Adjutant.  The  Pioneers,  or  Sappers  and  Miners,  four  paces  on 
the  right  of  the  music.  The  Colonel  or  senior  officer  present  wiJl 
take  the  command  of  the  parade,  and  will  take  post  at  a  suitable 
distance  in  front,  opposite  the  centre,  facing  the  line,  when  the  music 
begins  to  beat  off,  and  at  the  same  time  the  Lieutenant-Colonel  and 
Major  will  take  their  positions  in  order  of  battle. 

301.  When  the  companies  have  ordered  arms,  the  Adjutant  will 
order  the  music  to  heat  off,  when  it  will  commence  on  the  right,  beat 
in  front  of  the  lines  to  the  left,  and  back  to  its  place  on  the  right. 

362.  When  the  music  has  ceased,  the  Adjutant  will  step  two  pace* 
to  the  front,  face  to  the  left,  and  command, 

1.  Attention!  4.  Prepare  to  open  ranks ! 

2.  Battalion.  6.  To  the  rear,  open  order  f 
8.  SJioulde^'  —  Arms!  6.  March! 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  61 

Dreis  Parade. 

At  the  sixth  command,  the  ranks  will  be  opened  according  to  the 

system  laid  down  in  the  Infantry  Tactics,  the  Commissioned  Officers 

marching  to  the  front,  the  Company  Officers  four  paces,  Field  Officers 

six  paces,  opposite  to  their  positions  in  the  order  of  battle,  where  they 

will  halt  and  dress.    The  Adjutant,  seeing  the  ranks  aligned,  will 

command 

Front ! 

and  march  along  the  front  to  the  centre,  face  to  the  right,  and  pass 

the  line  of  Company  Officers  eight  or  ten  paces,  where  he  will  come  to 

the  right-about,  and  command, 

Present — Arms! 

when  arms  will  be  presented,  officers  saluting. 

363.  Seeing  this  executed,  he  will  face  about  to  the  Commanding 
Officer,  salute,  and  report,  "^iV,  the  parade  is  formed.''  The  Adjutant 
will  then,  on  intimation  to  that  eflfect,  take  his  station  three  paces  on  the 
left  of  the  Commanding  Officer,  one  pace  retired,  passing  round  his  rear. 

364.  The  Commanding  Officer,  having  acknowledged  the  salute  of 
the  line  by  touching  his  hat,  will,  after  the  Adjutant  has  taken  his 
post,  draw  his  sword,  and  command, 

1.  Battalion.    2.  Shoulder — Arms! 
and  add  such  exercises  as  he  may  think  proper,  concluding  with 

Order — Arms  ! 
then  return  his  sword,  and  direct  the  Adjutant  to  receive  the  reports. 

365.  The  Adjutant  will  now  pass  round  the  right  of  the  Command- 
ing Officer,  advance  upon  the  line,  halt  midway  between  him  and  tho 
line  of  Company  Officers,  and  command, 

1.  First  Sergeants,  to  the  front  and  centre.  2.  March  ! 

At  the  first  command,  they  Avill  shoulder  arms  as  Sergeants,  march 
two  paces  to  the  front,  and  face  inward.  At  the  second  command, 
they  will  march  to  the  centre  and  halt.  The  Adjutant  will  then 
order, 

1.  Front  —  Face!    2.  Report. 

Military.  6 


62  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Dreas  Parade. 

At  the  last  word,  each,  in  succession,  beginning  on  the  right,  will 
salute  by  bringing  the  left  hand  smartly  across  the  breast  to  the 
right  shoulder,  and  report  the  result  of  the  roll-call  previously  made 
on  the  company  parade. 

366.  The  Adjutant  again  commands, 

1 .  First  Sergeants,  outward  —  Face  !     2.  To  your  posts  —  March  ! 

when  they  will  resume  their  places  and  order  arms.  The  Adjutant 
will  now  face  to  the  Commanding  Officer,  salute,  report  absent  officers 
and  give  the  result  of  the  First  Sergeants'  reports.  The  Command- 
ing Officer  will  next  direct  the  orders  to  be  read,  when  the  Adjutant 
will  face  about  and  announce, 

Attention  to  Orders. 

He  will  then  read  the  orders. 

367.  The  orders  having  been  read,  the  Adjutant  will  face  to  the 
Commanding  Officer,  salute  and  report;  when,  on  an  intimation  from 
the  Commander,  he  will  face  again  to  the  line  and  announce, 

Parade  is  dismissed. 

All  the  officers  will  now  return  their  swords,  face  inward,  and  close 
on  the  Adjutant,  he  having  taken  position  in  their  line,  the  Field 
Officers  on  the  flanks.    The  Adjutant  commands, 

1 .  Front  —  Face  !    2.  Forward — March  ! 

when  they  will  march  forward,  dressing  on  the  centre,  the  music 
playing,  and  when  within  six  paces  of  the  Commander,  the  A(\jutant 
will  give  the  word, 

Halt/ 

The  officers  will  then  salute  the  Commanding  Officer  by  raising  the 
hand  to  the  cap,  and  there  remain  until  he  shall  have  communicated 
to  them  such  instructions  as  ho  may  have  to  give  or  intimates  that 
the  ceremony  is  finished.  As  the  officers  disperse,  the  First  Ser- 
geants will  close  the  ranks  of  their  respective  companies  and  march 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  63 

Review  of  Battalion. 

them  to  the  company  parades,  where  they  will  be  dismissed,  the  band 
continuing  to  play  until  the  companies  clear  the  regimental  parade. 

368.  All  Field  and  Company  Officers  and  men  will  be  present  at 
dress  parades,  unless  especially  excused,  or  on  some  duty  incompati- 
ble with  such  attendance. 

369.  A  dress  parade,  once  a  day,  will  not  be  dispensed  with,  except 
on  extraordinary  and  urgent  occasions,  by  troops  on  duty, 

II.    REVIEW    OF    A    BATTALION    OF    INFANTRY. 

370.  Preparatory  to  a  review,  the  Adjutant  will  cause  a  camp- 
color  to  be  placed  80  paces,  or  more  or  less,  according  to  the  length 
of  the  line,  in  front  of  and  opposite  to  where  the  centre  of  the  bat- 
talion will  rest,  where  the  Reviewing  Officer  is  supposed  to  take  his 
station ;  and,  although  he  may  choose  to  quit  that  position,  still  the 
color  is  to  be  considered  as  the  point  to  which  all  the  movements  and 
formations  are  relative. 

371.  The  Adjutant  will  also  cause  points  to  be  marked,  at  suitable 
distances,  for  the  wheelings  of  the  divisions;  so  that  their  right 
flanks,  in  marching  past,  shall  only  be  about  four  paces  from  the 
camp-color,  where  it  is  supposed  the  Reviewing  Officer  places  himself 
to  receive  the  salute. 

372.  The  battalion  being  formed  in  the  order  of  battle,  at  shoul- 
dered arms,  the  Colonel  will  command, 

1.  Battalion,  prepare  for  review  /        3.  March! 

2.  To  the  rear,  open  order. 

At  the  word  March,  the  Field  and  Staflf  Officers  dismount ;  the  Com- 
pany Officers  and  color- rank  advance  four  paces  in  front  of  the  front 
rank,  and  place  themselves  opposite  to  their  respective  places,  in  the 
order  of  battle.  The  color-guard  replace  the  color-rank.  The  Staff 
Officers  place  themselves,  according  to  rank,  three  paces  on  the  right 
of  the  rank  of  Company  Officers,  and  one  pace  from  each  other ;  the 
music  takes  post  as  at  parade  ;  the  Pioneers,  or  Sappers  and  Miners, 


64  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Review  o/  Battalion. 

on  the  right  of  the  music.  The  non-commissioned  staff  take  post 
one  pace  from  each  other  and  three  paces  on  the  right  of  the  front 
rank  of  the  battalion. 

373.  When  the  ranks  are  aligned,  the  Colonel  will  command, 

Front ! 

and  place  himself  eight  paces,  and  the  Lieutenant-Colonel  and  Major 
will  place  themselves  two  paces  in  front  of  the  rank  of  Company 
Officers  and  opposite  to  their  respective  places,  in  the  order  of  battle, 
all  facing  to  the  front. 

374.  When  the  Reviewing  Officer  presents  himself  before  the 
centre,  and  is  fifty  or  sixty  paces  distant,  the  Colonel  will  face 
about  and  command. 

Present  —  Arms  ! 

and  resume  his  front.  The  men  present  arms,  and  the  officers  salute, 
so  as  to  drop  their  swords  with  the  last  motion  of  the  firelock.  The 
non-commissioned  staff  salute  by  bringing  the  sword  to  a  poise,  the 
hilt  resting  on  the  breast,  the  blade  in  front  of  the  face,  inclining  a 
little  outward.  The  music  will  play  and  all  the  drums  beat  accord- 
ing to  the  rank  of  the  Reviewing  Officer.  The  colors  only  salute  such 
persons  as,  from  their  rank,  and  by  regulation  (see  Article  XVIII) 
are  entitled  to  that  honor.  If  the  Reviewing  Officer  be  junior  in  rank 
to  the  Commandant  of  the  parade,  no  compliment  will  be  paid  to  him, 
but  ho  will  be  received  with  arms  carried,  and  the  officers  will  not 
salute  as  the  column  passes  in  review. 

376.  The  Reviewing  Officer  having  halted  and  acknowledged  the 
salute  of  the  lino  by  touching  or  raising  his  cap  or  hat,  the  Colonel 
will  face  about  and  command, 

Shoulder — Arms  ! 

when  the  men  shoulder  their  pieces ;  the  officers  and  non-commis- 
sioned staff  recover  their  swords  with  the  last  motion  and  the  Colonel 
faces  to  the  front. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  65 


Review  of  Battalion. 


376.  The  Reviewing  Officer  will  then  go  toward  the  right,  the 
whole  remaining  perfectly  steady,  without  paying  any  further 
compliment,  while  he  passes  along  the  front  of  the  battalion  and 
proceeds  round  the  left  flank  and  along  the  rear  of  the  file-closers  to 
the  right.  While  the  Reviewing  Officer  is  going  round  the  battalion, 
the  band  will  play,  and  will  cease  when  he  has  returned  to  the  right 
flank  of  the  troops.  If  the  Reviewing  Officer  be  accompanied  by  a 
staflf  or  attendants,  they  will,  in  passing  from  the  right  along  the 
front  of  the  regiment,  be  formed  in  ranks  four  paces  in  the  rear  and 
to  the  right  of  the  Reviewing  Officer. 

377.  When  the  Reviewing  Officer  turns  off  to  place  himself  by  tho 
camp-color,  in  front,  the  Colonel  will  face  to  the  line  and  command, 

1.  Close  order.    2.  March  ! 

At  the  first  command  the  Field  and  Company  Officers  will  face  to 
the  right-about,  and  at  the  second  command  all  persons,  except  the 
Colonel,  will  resume  their  places  in  the  order  of  battle ;  the  Field  and 
Staflf  Officers  mount. 

378.  The  Reviewing  Officer  having  taken  his  position  near  the  camp- 
color,  the  Colonel  will  command, 

1.  By  company,  right  whed.  4.   Column,  forward. 

2.  Quick  —  MarchI  5.   Guide  right. 

3.  Pass  in  review.  6.  March  I 

The  battalion,  in  column  of  companies,  right  in  front,  will  then,  in 
common  time  and  at  shouldered  arms,  be  put  in  motion;  the  Colonel 
four  paces  in  front  of  the  Captain  of  the  leading  company ;  the  Lieu- 
tenant-Colonel on  a  line  with  the  leading  company ;  the  Major  on  a 
line  with  the  rear  company ;  the  Adjutant  on  a  line  with  the  second 
company ;  the  Sergeant-Major  on  a  line  with  the  company  next  pre- 
ceding the  rear,  each  six  paces  from  the  flank  ( left )  opposite  to  the 
Reviewing  Officer ;  the  Staff  Officers  in  one  rank,  according  to  the  order 
of  precedency,  from  the  right,  four  paces  in  rear  of  the  column ;  the 
music,  preceded  by  the  principal  Musician,  six  paces  before  the 

Military.  6* 


66  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Beview  of  Battalion. 

Colonel ;  the  Pioneers,  or  Sappers  and  Miners,  preceded  by  the  Ser- 
geant, four  paces  before  the  principal  Musician ;  the  Quartermaster- 
Sergeant  two  paces  from  the  side,  opposite  to  the  guides  and  in  line 
with  the  pioneers. 

379.  All  other  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  will  march 
past  in  the  places  prescribed  for  them  in  the  march  of  an  open 
column.  The  guides  and  soldiers  will  keep  their  heads  steady  to  the 
front  in  passing  in  review. 

380.  The  color- bearer  will  remain  in  the  ranks  while  passing  and 
saluting. 

381.  The  music  will  begin  to  play  at  the  command  to  march,  and 
after  passing  the  Reviewing  Officer,  wheel  to  the  left  out  of  the 
column,  and  take  a  position  opposite  and  facing  him,  and  will  con- 
tinue to  play  until  the  rear  of  the  column  shall  have  passed  him, 
when  it  will  cease  and  follow  in  the  rear  of  the  battalion,  unless  the 
battalion  is  to  pass  in  quick  time  also,  in  which  case  it  will  keep  its 
position. 

382.  The  officers  will  salute  the  Reviewing  Officer,  if  he  be  superior 
to  the  officer  in  command,  when  they  arrive  within  six  paces  of  him, 
and  recover  their  swords  when  six  paces  past  him.  All  officers,  in 
saluting,  will  cast  their  eyes  toward  the  Reviewing  Officer. 

383.  The  Colonel,  when  he  has  saluted  at  the  head  of  the  bat- 
talion, will  place  himself  near  the  Reviewing  Officer,  and  will  remain 
there  until  the  rear  has  passed,  when  he  will  rcjom  the  battalion. 

384.  The  colors  will  salute  the  Reviewing  Officer,  if  entitled  to  it, 
when  witliin  six  paces  of  him,  and  be  raised  when  they  have  passed 
by  him  an  equal  distance.  The  drums  will  beat  a  march  or  niffle, 
according  to  the  rank  of  the  Reviewing  Officer,  at  the  same  time  that 
the  colors  salute. 

385.  When  the  column  has  passed  the  Reviewing  Officer,  the 
Colonel  will  direct  it  to  the  ground  it  marched  from,  and  command. 

Guide  left, 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORGES.  67 

Revievk  of  Tux>  or  More  Battalions. 

in  time  for  the  guides  to  cover.     The  column  having  arrived  on  its 
ground,  the  Colonel  will  command, 

1.  Column.     2.  Halt!     3.  Left,  into  line — Wheel.    4.  MaechI 

When  the  line  is  formed  in  order  of  battle,  the  ranks  will  be  opened, 
the  officers  taking  post  in  front,  and  the  review  will  terminate  by  the 
whole  saluting  as  at  the  begimiing. 

386.  If,  however,  instructions  have  been  previously  given  to 
march  the  troops  past  in  quick  time  also,  the  Colonel  will,  instead  of 
changing  the  guides,  halting  the  column  and  wheeling  it  into  line,  as 
above  directed,  give  the  command, 

1.  Quick  time.    2.  March  I 

In  passing  the  Reviewing  Officer  again,  no  salute  will  be  offered  by 
either  officers  or  men.  The  music  will  have  kept  its  position  oppo- 
site the  Reviewing  Officer,  and,  at  the  last  command,  will  commence 
playing,  and  as  the  column  approaches  will  place  itself  in  front  of 
and  march  off  with  the  column,  and  continue  to  play  until  the  bat- 
talion is  halted  on  its  original  ground  of  formation.  The  review  will 
terminate  in  the  same  manner  as  prescribed  above. 

387.  The  Colonel  will  afterward  cause  the  troops  to  perform  such 
exercises  and  manoeuvres  as  the  Reviewing  Officer  may  direct. 

388.  When  two  or  more  battalions  are  to  be  reviewed,  they  will  be 
formed  in  parade  order,  with  proper  intervals,  and  will  also  perform 
the  same  movements  that  are  laid  down  for  a  single  battalion- 
observing  the  additional  directions  that  are  given  for  such  move- 
ments when  applied  to  the  line.  The  Brigadier-General  and  his 
Staff,  on  foot,  will  place  themselves  opposite  the  centre  of  the  brigade ; 
the  Brigadier-General  two  paces  in  front  of  the  rank  of  Colonels; 
his  Aid,  two  paces  on  his  right,  and  one  retired;  and  the  other 
Brigade  Staff  Officers,  those  having  the  rank  of  Field  Officers,  in  the 
rank  of  Lieutenant-Colonels  and  Majors ;  and  those  below  that  rank 
in  the  rank  of  Company  Officers. 


G8  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Review  of  Two  or  More  Battaliom* 

389.  In  passing  in  review,  a  Major-General  will  be  four  paces  in 
front  of  the  Colonel  of  the  leading  battalion  of  his  division;  and 
the  Brigadier-General  will  be  on  the  right  of  the  Colonels  of  the 
leading  battalions  of  their  brigades ;  Staff  Officers  on  the  left  of  their 
Generals. 

390.  When  the  line  exceeds  two  battalions,  the  Reviewing  Officer 
may  cause  them  to  march  past  in  quick  time  only.  In  such  cases 
the  mounted  officers  only  will  salute. 

391.  A  number  of  companies  less  than  a  battalion  will  be  reviewed 
as  a  battalion,  and  a  single  company  as  if  it  were  with  the  battalion. 
When  required,  the  companies  may  pass  in  column  of  platoons. 

392.  If  several  brigades  are  to  be  reviewed  together,  or  in  one  line, 
this  further  difference  will  be  observed:  the  Reviewing  Personage, 
joined  by  the  General  of  the  division,  on  the  right  of  his  division, 
will  proceed  down  the  line,  parallel  to  its  front,  and  when  near  the 
Brigadier-Generals  respectively,  will  be  saluted  by  their  brigades 
in  succession.  The  music  of  each,  after  the  prescribed  salute,  will 
play  while  the  Reviewing  Personage  is  in  front  or  in  rear  of  it,  and 
only  then. 

393.  In  marching  in  review,  with  several  battalions  in  common 
time,  the  music  of  each  succeeding  battalion  will  commence  to  play 
when  tnc  music  of  the  preceding  one  has  ceased,  in  order  to  follow 
its  battalion.  When  marching  in  quick  time,  the  bands  of  the  regi- 
ments will  remain  with  the  column;  and  the  music  will  begin  to 
play  when  the  rear  company  of  the  preceding  battalion  has  passed 
the  Reviewing  Officer.    (  See  par.  1648,  et  seq. ) 

894.  When  several  battalions  pass  successively  in  review,  the  officer 
commanding  the  whole  will  alone  join  the  Reviewing  Officer,  and  will 
place  himself  on  his  right, 

895.  The  battalions  will  take,  in  marching,  intervals  between  them 
of  forty  paces.    In  line,  the  intervals  are  twenty-two  paces. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  69 

Guard-Mounting. 

396.  The  Reviewing  Officer  or  Personage  will  acknowledge  the 
salute  by  raising  or  taking  off  his  cap  or  hat,  when  the  Commander 
of  the  troops  salutes  him;  and,  also,  when  the  colors  pass.  The 
remainder  of  the  time  occupied  by  the  passage  of  the  troops,  he  will 
be  covered.  The  Staff,  or  attendants  of  any  Reviewing  Officer  will 
be  posted,  in  one  or  more  ranks,  four  paces  in  the  rear,  and  to  the 
left  of  such  officer. 

397.  The  review  of  Cavalry  and  Artillery  will  be  conducted  on 
similar  principles,  and  according  to  the  systems  of  instruction  for 
those  arms  of  service. 

III.    GUARD-MOUNTING. 

398.  Camp  and  garrison  guards  will  be  relieved  every  twenty-four 
hours,  and  oftener  if  the  Commanding  Officer  shall  so  direct.  The 
guards  at  outposts  will,  ordinarily,  be  relieved  in  the  same  manner ; 
but  this  must  depend  on  their  distances  from  camp,  or  other  circum- 
stances, which  may  sometimes  require  their  continuing  on  duty 
several  days.  In  such  cases,  they  must  be  previously  warned,  to 
provide  themselves  accordingly. 

399.  At  the  first  call  for  guard-mounting,  the  men  warned  for 
duty  turn  out  on  their  company  parades  for  inspection  by  the  First 
Sergeants ;  and,  at  the  second  call,  repair  to  the  regimental  or 
garrison  parade,  conducted  by  the  First  Sergeants.  Each,  detach- 
ment, as  it  arrives,  will,  under  the  direction  of  the  Adjutant,  take 
post  on  the  left  of  the  one  that  preceded  it,  in  open  order,  arms 
shouldered  and  bayonets  fixed ;  the  supernumeraries  five  paces  in  the 
rear  of  the  men  of  their  respective  Companies ;  the  First  Sergeants 
in  rear  of  them.  The  Sergeant-Major  will  dress  the  ranks,  count  the 
files,  verify  the  details,  and  when  the  guard  is  formed,  report  to  the 
Adjutant,  and  take  post  two  paces  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank. 

400.  The  Adjutant  then  commands  Frmt !  when  the  officer  of  the 
guard  takes  post  twelve  paces  in  front  of  the  centre ;  the  Sergeants, 
in  one  rank,  four  paces  in  the  rear  of  the  officers  ;  and  the  Corporals, 
in  one  rank,  four  paces  in  the  rear  of  the  Sergeants,  all  facing  to  th© 
front.     The  Adjutant  then  assigns  their  places  in  the  guard. 


10  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 


dhiard'Mounting. 

401.  The  Adjutant  will  then  command, 

1.  Officers  and  Non-commissioned    2.  About  —  Face! 

Officers.  3.  Inspect  your  guards  —  Mabch  ! 

The  Non-commissioned  Officers  then  take  their  posts.  The  Com- 
mander of  the  guard  then  commands, 

1.   Order — Arms  I     2.  Inspection  —  Arms  I 

and  inspects  his  guard.  When  there  is  no  Commissioned  Officer  on 
the  guard,  the  Adjutant  will  inspect  it.  During  inspection  the  band 
will  play. 

402.  The  inspection  ended,  the  officer  of  the  guard  takes  post  as 
though  the  guard  were  a  company  of  a  battalion,  in  open  order,  under 
review ;  at  the  same  time,  also,  the  officers  of  the  day  will  take  post 
in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  guard ;  the  old  officer  of  the  day  tliree 
paces  on  the  right  of  the  new  officer  of  the  day,  one  pace  retired, 

403.  The  Adjutant  will  now  command, 

1.  Parade— Rest  \    2.  Troop  — Beat  off/ 

when  the  music,  beginning  on  the  right,  will  beat  down  the  line  in 
front  of  the  officer  of  the  guard  to  the  left,  and  back  to  its  place  on 
the  right,  where  it  will  cease  to  play. 

404.  The  Adjutant  then  commands, 

1.  MterUionI    2.  Shoulder— Ar^s  I    3.  Close  order  — UarcbI 

At  the  word  "  Close  order,"  the  officer  will  face  about ;  at  "  March," 
resume  his  post  in  line.    The  Adjutant  then  commands, 

Present — Arms  1 

at  which  he  will  face  to  the  new  officer  of  the  day,  salute,  and  report, 
"  Sir,  the  guard  is  formed."  The  new  officer  of  the  day,  after  acknow- 
ledging the  salute,  will  direct  the  Adjutant  to  march  the  guard  in 
review,  or  by  flank,  to  its  post.  But  if  the  Adjutant  be  senior  to  the 
officer  of  the  day,  he  will  report  without  saluting  with  the  sword  then, 
wr  when  marching  the  guard  in  review. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  71 

Guard-MounUng. 

405.  In  review,  the  guard  march  past  the  officer  of  the  day,  accord- 
ing to  the  order  of  review,  conducted  by  the  Adjutant,  marching  on 
the  left  of  the  first  division ;  the  Sergeant-Major  on  the  left  of  the 
last  division. 

406.  When  the  column  has  passed  the  officer  of  the  day,  the  officer 
of  the  guard  marches  it  to  its  post,  the  Adjutant  and  Sergeant-Major 
retiring.  The  music,  which  has  wheeled  out  of  the  column,  and 
taken  post  opposite  to  the  officer  of  the  day,  will  cease,  and  the  old 
officer  of  the  day  salute,  and  give  the  old  or  standing  orders  to  the 
new  officer  of  the  day.  The  supernumeraries,  at  the  same  time,  will 
be  marched  by  the  First  Sergeants  to  their  respective  company 
parades,  and  dismissed. 

407.  In  bad  weather  or  at  night,  or  after  fatiguing  marches,  the 
ceremony  of  turning  off  may  be  dispensed  with,  but  not  the  inspection. 

408.  Grand  guards  and  other  brigade  guards  are  organized  and 
mounted  on  the  brigade  parade  by  the  Staff  Officers  of  the  parade, 
under  the  direction  of  the  Field  Officer  of  the  day  of  the  brigade, 
according  to  the  principles  here  prescribed  for  the  police  guard  of  a 
regiment.  The  detail  of  each  regiment  is  assembled  on  the  regimental 
parade,  verified  by  the  Adjutant,  and  marched  to  the  brigade  parade 
by  the  senior  officer  of  the  detail.  After  inspection  and  review,  the 
officer  of  the  day  directs  the  several  guards  to  their  respective  posts. 

409.  The  officer  of  the  old  guard,  having  his  guard  paraded,  on 
the  approach  of  the  new  guard,  commands, 

Present — Abms  I 

410.  The  new  guard  will  march,  in  quick  time,  past  the  old  guard, 
at  shouldered  arms^  officers  saluting,  and  take  post  four  paces  on  its 
right,  where,  being  aligned  with  it,  its  commander  will  order, 

Present — Abms  I 

The  two  officers  will  then  approach  each  other  and  salute.     They 
will  then  return  to  their  respective  guards,  and  command, 
1.  Shoulder— A^TA^l    2.   Order— Arms  I 


72  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Ouard-MovmUng. 

411.  The  officer  of  the  new  guard  will  now  direct  the  detail  for 
the  advanced  guard  to  be  formed  and  marched  to  its  post,  the  list  of 
the  guard  made  and  divided  into  three  reliefs,  experienced  soldiers 
placed  over  the  arms  of  the  guard  and  at  the  remote  and  responsible 
posts,  and  the  young  soldiers  in  posts  near  the  guard  for  instruction 
in  their  duties,  and  will  himself  proceed  to  take  possession  of  the 
guard-house  or  guard-tent,  and  the  articles  and  prisoners  in  charge 
of  the  guard. 

412.  During  the  time  of  relieving  the  sentinels  and  of  calling  in 
the  small  posts,  the  old  conmiander  will  give  to  the  new  all  the  in- 
formation and  instruction  relating  to  his  post. 

413.  The  first  relief  having  been  designated  and  ordered  two  paces 
to  the  front,  the  Corporal  of  the  new  guard  will  take  charge  of  it, 
and  go  to  relieve  the  sentinels,  accompanied  by  the  Corporal  of  the 
old  guard,  who  will  take  command  of  the  old  sentinels,  when  the 
whole  are  relieved. 

414.  If  the  sentinels  are  numerous,  the  Sergeants  are  to  be  em- 
ployed, as  well  as  the  Corporals,  in  relieving  them. 

415.  The  relief,  with  arms  at  a  support,  in  two  ranks,  will  march 
by  a  flank,  conducted  by  the  Corporal  on  the  side  of  the  leading 
front-rank  man ;  and  the  men  will  be  numbered  alternately  in  the 
front  and  rear  rank,  the  man  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank  being 
No.  1.  Should  an  officer  approach,  the  Corjwral  will  command, 
Carry  armSj  and  resume  the  support  arms  when  the  officer  is  passed. 

416.  The  sentinels  at  the  guard-house  or  guard-tent  will  be  the 
first  relieved  and  left  beliind ;  the  others  are  relieved  in  succession. 

417.  When  a  sentinel  sees  the  relief  approaching,  he  will  halt  and 

face  to  it,  with  his  arms  at  a  shoulder.    At  six  paces,  the  Corporal 

will  command, 

1.  Relief  I    2.  Halt! 

when  the  relief  will  halt  and  carry  arms.  The  Corporal  will  then 
add,  "No.  1,"  or  "No.  2,"  or  "No.  3,"  according  to  the  number  of 
the  post, 

^rWM  —  PORTl 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  13 

Ouard-Mowntf/ng. 

The  two  sentinels  will,  with  arms  at  port^  then  approach  each  other, 
when  the  old  sentinel,  under  the  correction  of  the  Corporal,  will 
whisper  the  instructions  to  the  new  sentinel.  This  done,  the  two 
sentinels  will  shoulder  arms,  and  the  old  sentinel  will  pass,  in  quick 
time,  to  his  place  in  rear  of  the  relief.  The  Corporal  will  then  com- 
mand, 

1.  Support — Arms!     2.  Forward.     S.March! 

and  the  relief  proceeds  in  the  same  manner  until  the  whole  are  re- 
lieved. 

418.  The  detachments  and  sentinels  from  the  old  guard  having 
come  in,  it  will  he  marched,  at  shouldered  arms^  along  the  front  of  the 
new  guard,  in  quick  time,  the  new  guard  standing  at  presented  arms  ; 
officers  saluting,  and  the  music  of  both  guards  beating,  except  at  the 
outposts. 

419.  On  arriving  at  the  regimental  or  garrison  parade,  the  Com- 
mander of  the  old  guard  will  send  the  detachments  composing  it,  under 
charge  of  the  non-commissioned  officers,  to  their  respective  regiments. 
Before  the  men  are  dismissed,  their  pieces  will  be  drawn  or  discharged 
at  a  target.  On  rejoining  their  companions,  the  chiefs  of  squads  will 
examine  the  arms,  &c.,  of  their  men,  and  cause  the  whole  to  be  put 
away  in  good  order. 

420.  When  the  old  guard  has  marched  off  fifty  paces,  the  officer 
of  the  new  guard  will  order  his  men  to  stack  their  arms,  or  place 
them  in  the  arm-racks. 

421.  The  Commander  of  the  guard  will  then  make  himself 
acquainted  with  all  the  instructions  for  his  post,  visit  the  sentinels, 
and  question  them  and  the  non-commissioned  officers  relative  to  the 
instructions  they  may  have  received  from  other  persons  of  the  old 
guard. 

Military.  7 


V4  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 


Guards. 


ARTICLE  XXIL 

GUARDS. 

422.  Sentinels  will  be  relieved  every  two  hours,  unless  the  state 
of  the  weather  or  other  causes  should  make  it  necessary  or  proper 
that  it  be  done  at  shorter  or  longer  intervals. 

423.  Each  relief,  before  mounting,  is  inspected  by  the  Commander 
of  the  guard  or  of  its  post.  The  Corporal  reports  to  him,  and  pre- 
sents the  old  relief  on  its  return. 

424.  The  countersign  or  watchword  is  given  to  such  i)ersons  as  are 
entitled  to  pass  during  the  night,  and  to  officers,  non-commissioned 
officers,  and  sentinels  of  the  guard.  Interior  guards  receive  the  coun- 
tersign only  when  ordered  by  the  Commander  of  the  troops. 

425.  The  parole  is  imparted  to  such  officers  only  as  have  a  right 
to  visit  the  guards  and  to  make  the  grand  rounds,  and  to  officers 
commanding  guards. 

426.  As  soon  as  the  new  guard  has  been  marched  oflf,  the  officer  of 
the  day  will  repair  to  the  offic<»  of  the  Commanding  Officer  and  report 
for  orders. 

427.  The  officer  of  the  day  must  see  that  the  officer  of  the  guard  is 
furnished  with  the  parole  and  countersign  before  retreat. 

428.  The  officer  of  the  day  visits  the  guards  during  the  day,  at 
such  times  as  he  may  deem  necessary,  and  makes  his  rounds  at  night, 
at  least  once  after  twelve  o'clock. 

429.  Upon  being  relieved,  the  officer  of  the  day  will  make  such 
remarks  in  the  report  of  the  officer  of  the  guard  as  circumstances 
require,  and  present  the  same  at  head-quarters. 

430.  Commanders  of  guards  leaving  their  posts  to  visit  their  senti- 
nels, or  on  other  duty,  are  to  mention  their  intention,  and  the  pro- 
bable time  of  their  absence|  to  the  next  in  command. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  75 

O'uards. 

431.  Tlie  officers  are  to  remain  constantly  at  their  guards,  except 
while  visiting  their  sentinels,  or  necessarily  engaged  elsewhere  on 
their  proper  duty. 

432.  Neither  officers  nor  soldiers  are  to  take  off  their  clothing  or 
accoutrements  while  they  are  on  guard. 

433.  The  officer  of  the  guard  must  see  that  the  countersign  is  duly 
communicated  to  the  sentinels  a  little  before  twilight. 

434.  When  a  fire  breaks  out,  or  any  alarm  is  raised  in  a  garrison, 
all  guards  are  to  be  immediately  under  arms. 

435.  Inexperienced  officers  are  put  on  guard  as  supernumeraries, 
for  the  purpose  of  instruction. 

436.  Sentinels  will  not  take  orders  or  allow  themselves  to  be 
relieved,  except  by  an  officer  or  non-commissioned  officer  of  their 
guard  or  party,  the  officer  of  the  day  or  the  Commanding  Officer ;  in 
which  case  the  orders  will  be  immediately  notified  to  the  Commander 
of  the  guard  by  the  officer  giving  them. 

437.  Sentinels  will  report  every  breach  of  orders  or  regulations 
they  are  instructed  to  enforce. 

■  438.  Sentinels  must  keep  themselves  on  the  alert,  observing  every- 
thing that  takes  place  within  sight  and  hearing  of  their  post.  They 
will  carry  their  arms  habitually  at  support,  or  on  either  shoulder, 
but  will  never  quit  them.  In  wet  weather,  if  there  be  no  sentry-box, 
they  will  secure  arms. 

439-  No  sentinel  shall  quit  his  post  or  hold  conversation  not  neces- 
sary to  the  proper  discharge  of  his  duty. 

440.  All  persons,  of  whatever  rank  in  the  service,  are  required  to 
observe  respect  toward  sentinels. 

441.  In  case  of  disorder,  a  sentinel  must  call  out,  The  guard!  and 
if  a  fire  takes  place,  he  must  cry  "  FireP''  adding  the  number  of  his 
post.  If,  in  either  case,  the  danger  be  great,  he  must  discharge  his 
firelock  before  calling  out. 


76  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Chtardt. 

442.  It  is  the  duty  of  a  sentinel  to  repeat  all  calls  made  from  posts 
more  distant  from  the  main  body  of  the  guard  than  his  own,  and  no 
sentinel  will  be  posted  so  distant  as  not  to  be  heard  by  the  guard, 
either  directly  or  through  other  sentinels. 

443.  Sentinels  will  present  arms  to  General  and  Field  Officers,  to 
the  officer  of  the  day,  and  to  the  Commanding  Officer  of  the  post. 
To  all  other  officers  they  will  carry  arms. 

444.  When  a  sentinel,  in  his  sentry-box,  sees  an  officer  approach- 
ing, he  will  stand  at  attention^  and,  as  the  officer  passes,  will  salute 
him,  by  bringing  the  left  hand  briskly  to  the  musket,  as  high  as  the 
right  shoulder. 

445.  The  sentinel,  at  any  post  of  the  guard,  when  he  sees  any 
body  of  troops,  or  an  officer  entitled  to  compliment,  approach,  must 
call,  "  Turn  out  the  guard  P'  and  announce  who  approaches. 

446.  Guards  do  not  turn  out,  as  a  matter  of  compliment,  after 
sunset;  but  sentinels  will,  when  officers  in  uniform  approach,  pay 
them  proper  attention,  by  facing  to  the  proper  front  and  standing 
steady  at  shouldered  arms.  This  will  be  observed  until  the  evening  is 
so  far  advanced  that  the  sentinels  begin  challenging. 

447.  After  retreat  (or  the  hour  appointed  by  the  Commanding 
Officer),  until  broad  daylight,  a  sentinel  challenges  every  person  who 
approaches  him,  taking,  at  the  same  time,  the  position  of  arms  port. 
He  will  suffer  no  person  to  come  nearer  than  within  reach  of  his 
bayonet,  until  the  person  has  given  the  countersign. 

448.  A  sentinel,  in  challenging,  will  call  out  "  Who  comes  there  V* 
If  answered  "  Friend,  with  the  countersign"  and  he  be  instructed  to 
pass  persons  with  the  countersign,  he  will  reply :  "  Advance,  friend, 
with  the  countersign."  If  answered  "  JFVieruf*,"  he  will  reply : 
**  Hcdt,  friends!  Advance,  one,  with  the  countersign."  If  answered 
"Relief,"  ''Patrol,"  or  ''Grand  rounds,"  he  will  reply:  "Hahf 
Advance,  Sergeant  {or  Corporal),  voith  the  countersign,"  and  satisfy 
himself  that  the  party  is  what  it  represents  itself  to  be.  If  he  have 
no  authority  to  pass  persons  with  the  covmtersign,  if  the  wrong 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES. 


Guards — Grand  Rounds. 


countersign  be  given,  or  if  tlie  persons  have  not  the  countersign,  he 
will  cause  them  to  stand,  and  call,   "  Corporal  of  the  guard  T^ 

449.  In  the  daytime,  when  the  sentinel  before  the  guard  sees  the 
officer  of  the  day  approach,  he  will  call,  "  Turn  out  the  guard!  Offi- 
cer of  the  dayT'  The  guard  will  be  paraded,  and  salute  with  pre- 
sented arms. 

450.  When  any  person  approaches  a  post  of  the  guard  at  night, 
the  sentinel  before  the  post,  after  challenging,  causes  him  to  halt, 
until  examined  by  a  non-commissioned  officer  of  the  guard.  If  it 
be  the  officer  of  the  day,  or  any  other  officer  entitled  to  inspect  the 
guard  and  to  make  the  rounds,  the  Non-commissioned  Officer  will 
call,  "  Turn  out  the  guard  P^  when  the  guard  will  be  paraded  at 
shouldered  arms,  and  the  officer  of  the  guard,  if  he  thinks  necessary, 
may  demand  the  countersign  and  parole. 

451.  The  officer  of  the  day,  wishing  to  make  the  rounds,  will  take 
an  escort  of  a  non-commissioned  officer  and  two  men.  When  the 
rounds  are  challenged  by  a  sentinel,  the  sergeant  will  answer: 
"  Grand  rounds  P^  and  the  sentinel  will  reply:  "  Halt,  grand  rounds! 
Advance,  Sergeant,  with  the  countersign  !^*  Upon  which  the  Sergeant 
advances  and  gives  the  countersign.  The  sentinel  will  then  cry : 
**  Advance,  rounds!^''  and  stand  at  a  shoulder  till  they  have  passed. 

452.  When  the  sentinel  before  the  guard  challenges,  and  is  answered 
"Grand  rounds,^'  he  will  reply,  "Halt,  grand  rounds!  Turn 
out  the  guard;  grand  rounds .'"  Upon  which  the  guard  will  be  drawn 
up  at  shouldered  arms.  The  officer  commanding  the  guard  will  then 
order  a  Sergeant  and  two  men  to  advance ;  when  within  ten  paces, 
the  Sergeant  challenges.  The  Sergeant  of  the  grand  rounds  answers, 
*' Grand  rounds!"  The  Sergeant  of  the  guard  replies,  "Advance, 
Sergeant,  with  the  countersign .'"  The  Sergeant  of  the  rounds  advances 
alone,  gives  the  countersign,  and  returns  to  his  round.  The  Sergeant 
of  the  guard  calls  to  his  officer,  "  The  countersign  is  righl  /"  on  which 
the  officer  of  the  guard  calls,  "Advance,  rounds!"  The  officer  of 
the  rounds  then  advances  alone,  the  guard  standing  at  shouldered 
arms.     The  officer  of  the  rounds  passes  along  in  front  of  the  guard 

Military.  7* 


78 


GENERAL  REGULATIONS 


Forma  of  G-uard  Report. 


to  the  officer,  who  keeps  his  post  on  the  right,  and  gives  him  the 
parole.  He  then  examines  the  guard,  orders  back  his  escort,  and, 
taking  a  new  one,  proceeds  in  the  same  manner  to  other  guards. 

453.  All  material  instructions  given  to  a  sentinel  on  post,  by  persons 
entitled  to  make  grand  rounds,  ought  to  be  promptly  notified  to  the 
Commander  of  the  guard. 

454.  Any  General  Officer,  or  the  Commander  of  a  post  or  garrison, 
may  visit  the  guards  of  his  command,  and  go  to  the  grand  rounds, 
and  be  received  in  the  same  manner  as  prescribed  for  the  officer  of 
the  day. 

FORM  OF  GUARD  REPORT. 


Report  of  a  Guard  mounted  at  — 

-,  on 

the 

and  relieved  on  the  — . 

Parole. 

a 
a 

c 
B 
a 

3 

1 

a 

i 

s 

1 

si 

> 

1 

1 
1 

< 

Articles  in 
Charge. 

IsL^ 

Ck>unter8ign. 

- 

- 

Received  the 

going  articl 

A.  B- 

Lieut.  Is 

Regimen 

Detail. 

__ 

LIST  OF  THE  GUARD. 


Reliefs,  and  when  posted. 

Where 
posted. 

l8t  Relief. 

From  —  to  —  and  — 

to—. 

2d  Relief. 
From  —  to  — 
and  —  to  — . 

8d  Relief. 
From  —  to  — 
and  —  to  — . 

Remarks. 

No. 

Name. 

Co. 

Rt 

Name. 

Co. 

Rt 

Name. 

Co. 

Rt. 

G'd  House 
Magazine. 
Q'r  Store. 

1 
2 
8 

CD. 
E.  F. 
G.  H. 

A. 
B. 
C. 

1st 
4th 
6lh 

I.J. 
K.  L. 
M.  N. 

D. 
E. 
F. 

8.1 
2d 
5th 

0   P. 

n. 

G. 
H. 
I. 

8th 
9th 
10th 

1 
9 
3 

Sergea 
Corpoi 
Corpor 

nt-W 

any 

al  Y 

^V.. 
.X., 

z. 

Co.  A., 
Co.  B., 
Co.  C., 

Ret 

jimei 

« 

it. 
< 

Serg'tQ'd. 
Corp'l    " 

FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES. 


19 


Orders  and  Correspondence. 


LIST    OF    PRISONERS. 


c 

Confined. 

No. 

Names. 

A 

Charges. 

Sentences. 

When. 

By  whom. 

1 

2 

8 

4 

6 

Remarks. 


A.  B.  C, 

Lieut.  1st  Regt.  N.  Y.  S.  M. 
Commanding  th.e  Guard. 

ARTICLE  XXIIL 

ORDERS    AND    CORRESPONDENCE. 

455.  All  orders  emanating  from  the  Commander-in-Chief  will  be 
styled  orders  from  general  head-quarters. 

456.  The  orders  of  Commanders  of  armies,  divisions,  brigades  and 
regiments,  are  denominated  orders  of  such  army,  division,  &c.,  and 
all  orders  are  either  general  or  special.  Orders  are  numbered,  general 
and  special,  in  separate  series,  each  beginning  with  the  year. 

457.  General  orders  provide  for  the  organization,  discipline, 
instruction  and  movement  of  the  troops ;  announce  the  hours  for  roll- 
calls  and  duties ;  the  number  and  kind  of  guard,  and  the  time  when 
they  shall  be  relieved;  police  regulations,  and  the  prohibitions 
required  by  circumstances  and  localities ;  returns  to  be  made,  and 
their  forms;  laws  and  regulations  for  the  forces;  promotions  and 
appointments ;  eulogies  or  censures  to  corps  or  individuals,  and, 
generally,  whatever  it  may  be  important  to  make  known  to  the  whole 
command. 

458.  Special  orders  are  such  as  do  not  concern  the  troops  generally, 
and  need  not  be  published  to  the  whole  command ;  such  as  relate 


80  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Orders  <md  Oorrespondencs. 

to  the  march  of  some  particular  corps,  the  establishment  of  some  post, 
the  detaching  of  individuals,  the  granting  requests,  &c.,  &c. 

459.  A  general  order,  and  an  important  special  order,  must  be 
read  and  approved  by  the  officer  whose  order  it  is  before  it  is  issued 
by  the  staff  officer. 

460.  An  order  will  state,  at  the  head,  the  source,  place  and  date, 
and  at  the  foot,  the  name  of  the  commander  who  gives  it ;  as  for  ex- 
ample : 

Ckneral  Head- Quarters State  of  New -York,  ) 

Adjutant- General 8  Office,  V 

Albany,  —  January,  18 — .  ) 
General  ( or  special )  Orders,  ) 
No.  1.  j 

By  order  of  the  Commander-in-Chief, 
A.  B., 
Adjutant-  GeneraL 

For  a  Division : 

Head- Quarters,  1st  Division  N.   Y.  S.  M.,  ) 
New- York,  —  January,  1854.  J 

General  ( or  special )  Orders,  ) 
No.  6.  f 

By  order  of  Maj.  Gen.  C.  W  S., 
R.  B., 

Division  Inspector. 

For  a  Brigade : 

Head- Quarters,  —  Brigade,  —  Division  N.  Y.  S.  Jf.,  ) 

,  —  January,  18 — .  j 

General  ( or  special )  Orders,  ) 
No.  3.  j 

By  order  of  Brig.  Gen.  J.  W., 
J.  D., 

Brigade  Inspector. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  81 

Orders  and  Correspondence. 

For  a  Regiment : 

Head- Quarters,  —  Regiment  N.  Y.  S.  M..  ) 
—  January,  18 — .  ) 

General  ( or  special )  Orders,  ) 
Ko.  2.  ]■ 

By  order  of  Col,  J.  M., 
I.  R., 

jldjutant. 

461.  A  similar  form  will  "be  observed  in  tlie  orders  of  a  command, 
consisting  of  more  than  one  company.  A  company  order  will  omit 
the  words  "  Head- Quarters,"  and  in  lieu  of  them  will  give  the  letter 
of  the  company  and  the  number  of  the  regiment  to  which  it  belongs, 
as  follows : 

For  a  Company : 

[  ],  Company,  —  Regiment  N.  Y.  S,  M.,  ) 

, ,18-.  j 


Company  Orders, 

No.  — . 


By  order  of  Captain.  ■ 


0.  B.,  Sergeant. 


462.  It  is  important  that  the  place  at  which  the  order  is  issued 
should  be  very  particularly  mentioned. 

463.  Orders  may  be  put  in  the  form  of  letters,  but  generally  in 
the  strict  military  form,  through  the  office  of  the  Adjutant-General, 
or  officer  of  the  Adjutant-General's  department  connected  with  the 
command. 

464.  Orders  are  ordinarily  transmitted  through  all  the  intermediate 
commanders  in  the  order  of  rank.  When  an  intermediate  commander 
is  omitted,  the  officer  who  gives  the  order  shall  inform  him,  and  he 
who  receives  it  shall  report  it  to  his  immediate  superior. 

465.  Orders  for  any  body  of  troops  will  be  addressed  to  the  Com- 
mander, and  will  be  opened  and  executed  by  the  Commander  present, 
and  published  or  distributed  by  him  when  necessary. 


82  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Orders  and  Corre«pondenc«. 

466.  Orders  from  tlie  general  head-quarters  will  be  sent  from  the 
Adjutant-General's  office  to  the  head-quarters  of  each  division  and 
brigade  to  be  affected  thereby.  Printed  general  orders,  of  general 
interest  and  importance,  will  be  sent  to  all  Commandants  of  divisions, 
brigades  and  regiments.  Such  orders  as  may  affect  any  portion  of 
the  troops  in  a  brigade  will  be  sent  from  brigade  to  regimental  head- 
quarter?,  and  will  be  distributed  to  companies  by  the  Commanders 
of  regiments. 

467.  All  orders  or  copies  of  orders,  to  which  the  signature  of  the 
officer  issuing  the  same  may  be  printed,  when  transmitted  through 
the  channel  recognized  by  military  usage,  will  be  deemed  suffi- 
ciently authentic.  Orders  and  communications  may  be  transmitted 
by  mail,  except  in  cases  otherwise  provided  by  law,  if  properly 
directed  and  postage  paid.  Officers  receiving  written  or  printed 
orders  by  mail,  shall  immediately  acknowledge  their  receipt  to  the 
officer  issuing  them. 

468.  Commanding  officers,  intending  to  be  temporarily  absent  from 
their  commands,  will  make  arrangements  for  the  opening  of  orders 
and  official  letters  and  communications  which  may  be  received  in 
their  absence,  to  the  end  that  those  requiring  immediate  attention 
may  be  transmitted  to  the  officer  next  in  command,  or,  if  time  will 
permit,  to  themselves ;  and  they  will  alfio  make  provision  for  such 
transmission. 

469.  All  written  or  printed  orders  will  be  recorded  or  filed  by  the 
officer  issuing  and  receiving  the  same,  and  will  be  kept  with  the 
head-quarters  of  each  division,  brigade  and  regiment,  and  with  each 
company,  and  will  be  regularly  turned  over  by  the  Commander,  when 
relieved,  to  liis  successor. 

470.  If  general  orders  are  not  received  in  regular  succession,  Com- 
manding officers  will  report  the  missing  numbers  to  the  proper  head- 
quarters. 

471.  The  orderly  hours  being  fixed  at  each  head-quarters,  the  staff 
officers  and  chiefs  of  the  special  services  either  attend  in  person,  or 


FOE  THE  MILITARY  FOECES.  83 

Orders  and  Correspondence. 

send  their  assistants  to  obtain  the  orders  of  the  day ;  and  the  First 
Sergeants  of  companies  repair  for  that  purpose  to  the  regimental  or 
garrison  head-quarters. 

472.  During  marches  and  active  operations,  and  when  the  regular 
orderly  hours  cannot  be  observed,  all  orders  will  be  either  sent 
direct  to  the  troops,  or  the  respective  Commanders  of  regiments 
or  corps  will  be  informed  when  to  send  to  head-quarters  for  them. 
Under  the  same  circumstances,  orders  will  be  read  to  the  troops 
during  a  halt,  without  waiting  for  the  regular  parades. 

473.  Orders  to  any  officer  to  make  a  tour  of  travel  on  duty,  as  for 
the  inspection  of  troops,  &c.,  shall  designate  the  troops  and  places  he 
shall  visit,  and  the  order  in  which  he  shall  visit  them,  and  the  route 
of  travel. 

474.  Copies  of  all  orders  of  the  Commanders  of  brigades,  regi- 
ments, «&c.,  will  be  forwarded  at  their  dates,  or  as  soon  thereafter  as 
practicable,  in  separate  series,  on  full  sheets  of  letter  paper,  or  as 
printed,  to  the  next  superior  in  command.  ^See  also  paragraph  732.) 

475.  Written  communications  from  a  Commander  to  those  under 
his  command  may  be  made  by  his  staff  officer  or  by  the  Commander 
himself. 

476.  In  signing  an  official  communication,  the  writer  shall  annex 
to  his  name  his  rank  and  corps.  When  he  writes  by  order,  he  shall 
state  by  whose  order. 

477.  Official  communications  intended  for  the  Commander-in- 
Chief  will  be  addressed  to  the  Adjutant-General,  and  transmitted  to 
him  at  general  head-quarters. 

478.  Communications  from  the  Commandants  of  divisions  and 
brigades,  and  the  chiefs  of  the  staff  departments,  shall  be  made  direct 
to  the  Adjutant-General. 

479.  Communications  from  officers  in  a  regiment  will  be  sent  to 
the  Commandant  of  a  regiment  for  his  action  and  transmission  to  the 


84  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Order  BookB. 

Commandant  of  the  brigade,  if  intended  for  such  Commandant  of 
brigade  or  a  superior  officer.  If  the  communication  be  intended  for 
an  officer  superior  to  the  Brigadier- General,  he  will  transmit  the  same 
to  the  officer  for  whom  it  was  intended,  with  his  approval  or  dis- 
approval, if  required.  Each  officer  through  whose  hands  communi- 
cations are  required  to  pass  will  use  due  diligence  in  making  such 
transmission. 

48d.  In  transmitting  rolls  and  returns,  a  letter  is  to  accompany 
them ;  and  when  more  than  one  roll  or  return  are  transmitted  at  a 
time,  they  will  be  enumerated  in  the  same  letter,  and  the  whole 
placed  under  one  envelope.  On  all  official  letters  and  packages  will 
be  endorsed  the  words  "  Official  business." 

481.  No  communication,  within  the  competency  of  an  intermediate 
Commander  to  decide  upon,  should  be  forwarded  for  action  of  the 
liigher  authority,  except  by  way  of  appeal. 

482.  Communications,  in  which  the  interest  of  the  service  or  of  an 
officer  are  concerned,  will  be  accompanied  by  the  expression  of  an 
opinion  or  remark,  endorsed  upon  them,  by  the  Commander,  who 
forwards  them  to  a  higher  authority. 

483.  In  communicating  information,  based  upon  reports,  in  detaU^ 
received  from  juniors.  Commanders,  as  a  general  rule,  should  em- 
body in  their  own  report,  by  way  of  extract,  all  that  may  be  of 
interest  to  the  higher  authority,  rather  than  transmit  the  same  infor- 
mation spread  out  in  divers  papers  and  statements. 

ARTICLE  XXIV. 

ORDER    BOOKS. 

484.  Each  Commandant  of  division,  brigade,  regiment  and  com- 
pany will  enter  in  an  order  book,  or  file  and  preserve,  all  general 
and  special  orders  from  general  head-quarters,  and  all  other  orders 
relating  to  his  division,  brigade,  regiment  or  company,  emanating  from 
a  superior  authority. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCiiS.  85 

Rosters. 

485.  Each  of  such  Commandants  will  also  keep  an  order  book,  in 
which  shall  be  entered  all  orders  made  by  himself. 

486.  Commandants  of  divisions,  brigades  and  regiments  may 
require  their  order  books  to  be  kept  by  their  respective  chiefs  of  the 
staff,  or  other  staff  officer. 

ROSTERS. 

487.  The  Commandant  of  each  division,  and  each  Division  Inspec- 
tor, shall  keep  a  roster  of  all  the  commissioned  officers  in  his  division. 

488.  Each  Commandant  of  Brigade,  and  Brigade  Inspector,  shall 
keep  a  roster  of  the  commissioned  officers  in  the  brigade  and  non- 
commissioned staff  officers  of  the  regiments. 

489.  The  Commandant  of  each  regiment,  and  the  Adjutant  thereof, 
shall  keep  a  roster  of  the  officers,  non-commissioned  officers,  musicians 
and  privates  belonging  to  such  regiment. 

490.  Each  Commandant  of  a  company,  and  First  Sergeant,  shall 
keep  a  roster  of  the  officers,  non-commissioned  officers,  musicians  and 
privates  of  the  company. 

491.  The  Superior  Officer  of  Engineers  in  each  brigade,  and  the 
Engineer  Officer  of  each  regiment,  shall  keep  a  roster  of  the  officers 
and  men  belonging  to  the  corps  in  such  brigade  or  regiment. 

492.  The  Superior  Officer  of  the  Quarter-Master  department  in  each 
brigade,  and  the  Quarter-Master  of  each  regiment,  shall  keep  a  roster 
of  the  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  in  such  brigade  or 
regiment,  belonging  to  or  assigned  to  duty  in  the  department. 

493.  Such  rosters  shall  contain  the  name,  office,  date  of  rank  or 
grade,  or  time  of  enlistment,  and  the  place  of  residence  of  each  officer, 
non-commissioned  officer,  musician  and  private,  required  to  be  entered . 
thereon. 

494.  The  necessary  blank  books  and  forms  of  rosters,  required  by 
the  foregoing  regulations,  will  be  furnished  by  the  Adjutant-General ; 
and  all  such  books  and  rosters  will  be  carefully  preserved  by  every 

Military.  8 


86  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Paradety  tfc 

officer,  and  transmitted  to  his  successor  in  office,  with  the  other  pro- 
perty belonging  to  the  state. 

495.  To  insure  the  accuracy  of  such  rosters,  the  Commandant  of 
each  brigade  shall  annually,  on  or  before  the  first  day  of  June,  and 
oftener  if  required,  transmit  to  his  Major-General  a  correct  return  of 
the  names,  rank  and  residence  of  all  officers  in  the  brigade.  Like 
returns  shall  be  made,  by  each  Commandant  of  a  regiment,  of  his 
officers  and  non-commissioned  staff  officers,  to  his  Brigadier-General. 

496.  Like  returns  shall  be  made,  by  each  Commandant  of  a  com- 
pany, of  his  officers,  non-commissioned  officers,  musicians  and 
uniformed  privates,  to  the  Commandant  of  the  regiment. 

497.  Like  returns,  for  the  making  and  correcting  of  the  roster,  shall 
be  made  by  each  Regimental  Engineer  Officer  and  Quarter-Master, 
to  the  Brigade  Engineer  and  Quarter-Master  respectively. 

498.  It  will  be  the  duty  of  any  officer  who  may  be  required  by  a 
superior  in  command,  or  in  his  department  or  corps,  to  furnish  such 
superior  with  any  returns  or  information  necessary  for  the  making 
or  coiTection  of  the  roster,  or  which  may  relate  to  the  service  or 
department. 

PARADES,    ETC. 

499.  The  order  of  troops  at  parades,  at  camps  for  instruction  and 
In  battle,  will  be  as  follows  : 

1.  The  regiments  in  a  brigade,  if  of  the  same  arm,  shall  take 
precedence  according  to  number,  the  first  or  lowest  number  taking 
the  right.  Regiments  parading  together,  not  belonging  to  the  same 
brigade,  or  not  on  duty  as  part  of  a  brigade,  will  observe  the  same 
rule. 

2.  Brigades  and  divisions  take  precedence  according  to  the  same 
numerical  order. 

8.  The  arrangement  of  regiments  of  different  arms,  in  their 
respective  brigades,  will  be:  first,  the  light  infantry;  second,  the 
hifantry;  third,  the  riflemen;  fourth,  the  foot  artillery;  flflh,  the 
light  or  horse  artillery;  and  sixth,  the  cavalry. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  87 

:.  .  .  -as 

Parades,  40. 

600.  Regiments  organized  as  riflemen,  armed  with  muskets  or 
with  rifles  with  bayonets,  and  uniformed  alike  throughout  the  bat- 
talion, will  be  deemed  light  infantry.  Regiments  of  infantry  having 
the  same  uniformity  of  dress  in  all  the  battalion  companies,  and 
doing  duty  as  light  infantry  by  the  order  of  the  Commander-in-Chief, 
will  also  be  deemed  light  infantry. 

501.  Regiments  organized  as  artillery,  having  the  same  uniform 
throughout  the  regiment,  and  doing  duty  as  infantry  or  light  infantry 
by  order  of  the  Commander-in-Chief,  will  rank  as  of  the  arm  in  which 
they  do  duty. 

502.  The  Sappers  and  Miners,  or  Pioneers,  attached  to  a  regiment, 
will  take  post  on  its  right ;  but  in  parades  by  brigade  or  division, 
the  whole  Engineer  force  on  duty  may  be  concentrated  on  the  right 
or  in  the  centre,  or  any  other  part  of  the  brigade  or  division,  by 
order  of  the  Commandant  of  the  brigade  or  division. 

503.  The  troops  of  artillery  in  a  brigade  or  division  may  be  placed 
together  in  the  centre  of  the  brigade  or  division,  or  at  any  other  point 
which  may  be  directed  by  the  Commanding  Officer. 

504.  The  riflemen  or  cavalry  of  a  brigade  or  division  may  also  be 
united  according  to  the  arm,  and  formed  on  the  right  or  left  of  the 
brigade  or  division,  by  order  of  the  Commanding  Officer. 

505.  On  parade  and  in  the  order  of  battle,  the  posts  of  flank  com- 
panies of  regiments,  not  doing  duty  as  battalion  companies  or  formed 
together  for  division  or  brigade  purposes,  will  be  on  the  left  of  the 
battalion  companies,  in  the  order  following ;  1st.  The  riflemen ;  2d. 
The  foot  artillery ;  3d.  The  light  or  horse  artillery ;  4th.  The  cavalry. 
Where  the  flank  companies  are  of  the  same  arm,  that  commanded  by 
the  senior  officer  will  take  the  right  of  the  two.  A  section  of  light 
artillery  will  take  post  as  if  it  was  a  company. 

506.  The  order  of  parade  prescribed  in  this  article  will  not  be 
understood  to  prevent  the  Commanding  Officer  from  making  any 
disposition  of  the  forces  under  his  command,  which  he  may  deem 
necessary  or  proper,  for  any  purpose  connected  with  the  instructioa 


88  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Parades^  4-c. 

or  practice  of  his  command  or  service  in  the  field,  for  manoeuvre, 
the  flank  companies  which  are  not  doing  duty  as  battalion  companios 
will  ordinarily  be  detached. 

607.  No  officer  inferior  in  rank  to  the  Commandant  of  the  regiment 
or  other  force  on  parade,  will  give  directions  to  or  interfere  with  the 
Adjutant  or  other  officer  engaged  in  the  forming  of  the  parade. 
This,  however,  will  not  prevent  a  superior  officer  of  the  Adjutant- 
General's  department,  from  giving  such  instruction  to  the  Adjutant 
or  other  officer  forming  the  parade,  as  the  occasion  may  require. 

608.  All  officers  ordering  parades  will  immediately  transmit  a 
copy  of  such  orders  to  the  next  superior  in  command. 

609.  For  parade  as  well  as  for  manoeuvre,  the  battalion  companies 
and  flank  companies  doing  duty  as  battalion  companies  will  always 
be  equalized. 

610.  Parades  and  meetings  of  the  uniformed  forces  of  the  state  may, 
unless  as  otherwise  provided  by  law,  be  ordered  at  any  time  of  day  or 
night,  according  to  the  exigency  of  the  case,  and  the  troops  will  be  held 
to  duty  wherever  they  may  be  lawfully  ordered,  subject,  however,  to 
the  accountability  of  the  officer  making  such  orders  for  an  arbitrary 
or  improper  exercise  of  his  powers. 

611.  In  route  marches  in  vicinity  of  an  enemy,  the  band  and 
field  mlisic  are  in  rear  of  the  column.  On  occasions  of  ceremony,  as 
when  entering  a  town,  or  when  troops  require  to  be  revived  by 
music  during  a  fatiguing  march,  the  band  and  field  music  may  bo 
ordered  to  the  front.  In  passing  a  defile  to  the  front  in  presence  of 
an  enemy,  the  band  and  field  music  are  in  rear  of  the  column.  In 
passing  a  defile  in  retreat,  the  band  and  field  music  wheel  into 
column  first  after  the  pioneers,  and  pass  through  at  the  head  of  the 
column. 

612.  When  a  battalion  is  in  lino  of  battle  for  review,  it  is  customary 
for  the  Adjutant  to  present  it  to  the  Colonel  or  Commander  of  the 
review,  who  is  in  front.  The  Adjutant  then  retires,  on  an  intimation 
fi'oni  his  Commanding  Officer,  to  his  post  on  the  right.     The  Colonel 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  89 

Parades,  ^-e. 

or  officer  in  command  then  commands  as  in  paragraph  372,  dismounts 
and  goes  to  the  right  of  the  battalion  to  observe  if  the  ranks  are  pro- 
perly aligned.  He  then  commands  as  in  paragraph  373,  and  passes 
down  the  front  to  his  position.  The  Commanding  Officer  may,  how- 
ever, take  his  place  in  rear  of  his  battalion,  in  which  case  it  will  not 
be  presented  to  him,  and  when  he  commands  as  in  paragraph  372, 
he  goes  to  the  right  to  witness  the  alignment,  and  after  giving  the 
command  Front !  passes  down  the  battalion  to  his  place,  as  prescribed 
in  paragraph  373. 

513,  Commanding  officers  of  regiments  will  have  especial  care  to 
see  that  the  bands,  the  field  music,  the  Engineers  or  Pioneers,  and 
the  colors  and  standards,  are  at  all  times  properly  posted. 

514.  For  posting  the  music  at  Reviews  and  Dress  Parades,  the 
Infantry  will  refer  to  the  proper  regulations.  The  Cavalry  will  refer 
to  \st  Vol.  Cavalry  Tactics  (  promulgated  by  the  War  Department  of 
the  United  States,  February  10,  1841 ),  p.  18,  ^c.  The  Artillery  will 
refer  to  Instructions  for  Field  Artillery  ( promulgated  by  the  War 
Department,  March  6,  1845  ),p,  146. 

515,  For  posting  music,  colors  and  standards  in  line  of  battle, 
reference  will  be  made  to  \st  Vol.  Scoffs  Tactics,  pp.  14-16 ;  Is^  Vol. 
Hardee's  Tactics.,  pp.  9,  10 ;  \st  Vol.  Cavalry  Tactics,  pp.  5,  ^c. 

516.  For  posting  music  in  column  of  manoeuvre  and  en  route, 
reference  will  be  made  to  \st  Vol.  Scott's  Tactics,  p.  189;  1st  Vol. 
Hardee's  Tactics,  p.  217. 

617.  For  reception  of  color  and  standard,  reference  will  be  made 
to  2d  Vol.  Scotfs  Tactics,  pp.  5-7 ;  2d  Vol.  Hardee's  Tactics,  pp.  5-7 ; 
1st  Vol.  Cavalry  Tactics,  pp.  8-11. 

518.  For  posting  music  at  Inspections,  and  manner  of  Inspection, 
the  Infantry  will  refer  to  article  "  Inspection  of  Troops,"  in  these 
regulations.  The  Cavalry  will  refer  to  1st  Vol.  Cavalry  Tactics,  pp. 
22-25.  The  Artillery  will  refer  to  Instruction  for  Field  ArtilUry, 
pp.  146-149. 

Military.  8* 


90  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Instruction. 

519.  For  posting  Pioneers,  reference  will  be  made  to  \st  Vol.  Scotfs 
Tactics,  pp.  14,  15,  194,  For  posting  music  and  Pioneers  in  square, 
reference  will  be  made  to  2d  Vol.  ScoWs  Tactics,  p.  166;  2d  Vol. 
Hardee's  Tactics,  p.  182.  For  the  posting  of  music,  pioneers,  &c., 
attention  is  likewise  called  to  a  close  examination  of  the  explanation 
of  the  various  evolutions  attached  to  each  diagram  of  manceuvres  in 
Scott's  Tactics.  The  manual  of  arms  for  sergeants,  corporals,  for 
relieving  sentinels,  of  the  sword  or  sabre  for  oflBicers,  for  color  salute, 
will  be  found  in  Ist  Vol.  Scoifs  Tactics,  pp.  179-189;  1st  Vol.  Hardee's 
Tactics,  pp.  214-216. 

520.  For  the  various  signals  and  calls,  reference  will  be  made  to 
these  regulations;  Is^  Vol.  Scott's  Tactics,  pp.  190,  191;  Isi  Vol. 
Hardee's  Tactics,  pp.  217.  3fc. ;  1st  Vol.  Cavalry  Tactics,  pp.  82,  83 ; 
Instructions  for  Field  Artillery,  p.  164,  ^c. 

ARTICLE  XXV. 

INSTRUCTION. 

521.  All  manoeuvres  and  forms  of  parade,  not  prescribed  in  the 
books  of  tactics  adopted  by  the  United  States,  or  in  these  regulations, 
are  expressly  prohibited. 

522.  Each  General  Officer  and  Colonel  will  be  held  responsible  to 
his  next  superior,  and  also  directly  to  the  Commander-in-Chief,  for 
the  instruction  of  his  division,  brigade  or  regiment. 

523.  The  Commander-in-Chief  will  annually,  by  orders,  to  be 
issued  through  the  Adjutant-General,  announce  a  course  of  military 
instruction,  to  be  pursued  in  each  division,  brigade  and  regiment, 
agreeably  to  the  prescribed  systems  of  tactics  for  the  several  arms 
of  the  service. 

524.  In  the  orders  for  such  course,  no  more  manoeuvres  will  be 
designated  to  be  practiced  than  can  bo  thoroughly  acquired,  with 
ordinary  diligence,  during  the  year;  and  care  will  be  taken  to  make 
the  course  progressive,  and,  as  nearly  as  maybe,  uniform  throughout 
the  state.    Reference  will  also  be  had,  as  far  as  practicable,  to  the 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  91 

Instruction. 

previous  practice  and  advancement  of  tlie  command  for  which  tlie 
course  is  prescribed,  and  at  proper  periods  the  practice  of  the  earlier 
lessons  will  be  resumed. 

'525.  The  prescribing  of  a  course  of  instruction  from  the  general 
head-quarters  is  not  to  be  understood  to  relieve  Commanding  Officers 
from  the  duties  or  responsibility  of  discipline  and  instruction  in  their 
commands.  Although  the  designated  manoeuvres  will  be  required 
to  be  practiced,  other  exercises  may  be  added,  at  the  discretion  of 
Commandants ;  and  the  directions  for  instruction  applicable  to  Com- 
manders, contained  in  the  books  of  tactics,  will  be  regarded  by  them. 

526.  Nor  will  the  prescribing  or  practice  of  any  course  of  instruc- 
tion relieve  the  officers,  non-commissioned  officers  or  privates  from 
the  necessity  of  a  diligent  personal  study  of  the  books  of  tactics.  It 
is  only  by  this  study,  and  the  superior  intelligence  and  aptitude  of 
the  rank  and  file,  that  the  volunteer  forces  of  the  state  can  expect  to 
attain  in  any  considerable  measure  the  efficiency  which,  in  regular 
forces,  is  the  result  of  continuous  and  systematic  training. 

527.  Each  Comniandant  of  a  regiment  will,  between  the  first  and 
fifteenth  days  of  November  in  each  year,  return  to  the  Commandant 
of  his  brigade  a  statement  in  writing,  subscribed  by  him,  of  the  par- 
ticular manoeuvres  and  exercises  practiced  in  his  regiment  during 
the  year;  and  each  Commandant  of  brigade  will  transmit  such 
returns,  together  with  a  report  of  the  evolutions  practiced  in  his 
brigade  during  such  year,  under  his  own  directions,  to  the  Adjutant- 
General,  on  or  before  the  first  day  of  December  in  each  year. 

528.  A  similar  report  will  be  made  by  the  Commandant  of  each 
division,  in  respect  to  his  division  parades  and  meetings,  as  is  above 
required  of  the  Commandant  of  brigade. 

529.  Suitable  blanks  and  forms  will  be  prepared  and  furnished  by 
the  Adjutant-General,  for  the  making  of  the  reports  and  returns 
required  by  this  article. 

530.  It  will  be  the  duty  of  the  Adjutant-General  to  examine  such 
returns  and  reports,  and  annually,  before  the  first  day  of  January,  to 


92  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

InstntcUon. 

issue  the  orders  herein  required,  prescribing  the  course  of  instruction 
and  exercise,  during  the  year  ensuing,  in  each  regiment,  brigade  aiid 
division. 

531.  The  orders  for  instruction  in  brigades  and  regiments  will  be 
transmitted  to  the  Commandant  of  the  brigade,  and  by  him  each 
Regimental  Commander  will,  on  or  before  the  fifteenth  day  of 
January  in  each  year,  be  furnished  with  the  orders  which  relate  to 
the  brigade  and  to  his  regiment. 

532.  The  Adjutant-General  will  also  transmit  copies  of  the  orders, 
sent  to  the  Commandant  of  each  brigade,  to  the  Brigade  Inspector 
therein ;  and  the  Commandant  of  Brigade  will  cause  to  be  executed, 
for  the  inspection  of  the  Brigade  Inspector,  the  manoeuvres  and  exer- 
cises therein  prescribed,  at  the  annual  inspection  parade  of  such  brigade 
or  regiment ;  and  the  Brigade  Inspector  will  report  to  the  Commander- 
in-Chief,  in  his  annual  inspection  returns,  whether  the  exercises  and 
manoeuvres,  required  by  such  orders  to  be  practiced  in  the  brigade  and 
by  the  regiments  thereof,  have  been  so  practiced,  and  the  proficiency 
exhibited  therein  by  the  troops. 

533.  It  will  bo  the  duty  of  Commandants,  to  whom  such  orders  for 
instruction  shall  be  communicated,  to  promulgate  such  orders,  and 
to  instruct  and  practice  their  several  commands  in  the  manoeuvres 
and  exercises  designated  therein,  during  the  year  for  which  such 
orders  are  issued. 

534.  Each  Commandant  of  Division  will  call  together  the  General 
and  Field  Officers,  Division  Staff,  and  Brigade  Inspectors  in  his 
division,  once  in  each  year,  and  for  a  period  not  exceeding  two  con- 
secutive days,  at  some  place  in  his  division  district,  for  theoretic 
instruction  in  the  evolutions  of  the  Line.  It  will  be  the  duty  of  the 
officers  named  to  attend  upon  such  call,  and,  when  assembled,  to  study 
and  illustrate  by  diagrams,  the  principles  and  details  of  practice  laid 
down  in  the  books  of  tactics  for  such  evolutions. 

535.  The  Commandant  of  each  brigade  will  call  together,  at  some 
place  in  the  brigade  district,  the  Field  Officers  and  Brigade  Staff 
Oflficers  in  his  brigade  for  theoretic  instruction,  for  a  period  of  not 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  93 

Instruction, 

less  than  two  consecutive  days  in  each  year.  Such  Commandant 
shall  also,  at  least  twice  in  each  year,  require  the  attendance  of  all 
Commissioned  officers  of  the  brigade,  residing  in  any  city  of  the  state, 
at  meetings  to  be  held  in  such  city,  for  instruction  and  drill. 

536.  Commandants  of  regiments  will  call  together  their  commis- 
sioned and  non-commissioned  officers,  for  improvement  and  instruc- 
tion, at  least  twice  in  each  year.  Non-commissioned  officers  will  be 
specially  instructed  in  their  duties ;  and  particular  care  will  be  takeu 
fully  to  explain  to  the  non-commissioned  staff,  the  color  bearer,  the 
chief  musician,  and  the  general  and  company  guides,  the  positions 
which  they  will  occupy  in  the  manoeuvres,  and  the  service  required 
of  them  in  their  several  stations. 

637.  At  such  meetings  the  Commandant  may  require  any  military 
service  from  any  officer  or  non-commissioned  officer,  without  regard 
to  rank  or  grade. 

538.  Each  Brigadier-General  is  the  principal  instructor  in  his 
brigade.  Colonels  will  be  the  principal  instructors  of  their  regiments, 
when  the  Brigadier-General  does  not  act  as  such. 

539.  The  Brigadier-General,  or  other  officer  acting  as  principal 
instructor  at  brigade  meetings  for  instruction  and  improvement  of 
officers  and  non-commissioned  officers,  will  frequently  substitute 
Field  Officers  and  senior  Captains  as  instructors.  The  substitute 
will  always  be  superintended  by  the  principal  instructor  or  other  officer 
designated  to  act  as  such. 

540.  The  same  rule  of  substitution  will  prevail  in  the  instruction 
of  regiments,  squadrons,  companies  and  squads. 

541.  An  officer  acting  as  principal  instructor  should  from  time  to 
time  change  the  officer  in  charge  of  the  subdivisions,  as  well  as  the 
substituted  instructors.  The  opportunities  thus  afforded  are  of 
great  service  to  junior  officers,  as  well  by  increasing  the  range  of 
ordinary  practice,  as  also  by  enabling  them  to  acquire  the  method 
of  command,  and  the  ease,  accuracy  and  promptitude  indispensable 
in  the  giving  of  orders  in  the  field. 


94  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

— » 

Instruction. 

642.  The  principal  instructor  will  designate  the  order  of  the  exer- 
cises and  the  metliod  of  performance,  point  out  and  correct  any  error 
or  mistake  which  may  occur,  and,  if  acting  without  a  substitute,  ho 
will  give  the  commands  to  the  troops. 

543.  If  there  be  a  substituted  instructor,  he  will  give  the  commands 
to  the  troops,  and  also  rectify  all  faults  of  detail  in  the  execution  of 
the  manoeuvres.  He  will  also  direct  what  exercises  are  to  be  prac- 
ticed, unless  such  direction  is  given  by  the  principal  instructor.  If 
the  manoeuvres  are  executed  in  parts,  or  with  pauses,  at  such  pauses, 
or  when  the  particular  movement  is  concluded,  the  principal  instruc- 
tor may  direct  attention  to  such  errors  as  have  escaped  the  attention 
of  the  substitute. 

544.  It  is  the  first  duty  of  an  instructor  to  explain  fully  what  he 
proposes  to  teach ;  and  this  duty  will  not  be  omitted,  unless  where 
the  movement  proposed  has  already  been  introduced  or  is  presumed 
to  be  understood.  Such  explanations  may  be  made  either  by  the 
principal  instructor  or  substituted  instructor. 

545.  At  drills  and  parades,  the  explanations  will  be  in  as  few 
words  and  concise  a  form  as  possible;  but  at  a  course  of  theoretic 
instruction,  they  will  be  full,  and  accompanied  with  a  reference  to 
the  books  of  tactics,  which  will  be  carefully  examined,  and  the 
instructor  will  point  out  the  essential  features  and  peculiarities  of 
each  manoeuvre,  and  especially  those  particulars  upon  which  the 
accuracy  of  execution  depends;  also  its  principles,  uses  and  analogies 
to  other  movements. 

546.  The  movements  introduced  will  bo  at  first  executed  slowly, 
and  frequently  in  parts,  or  with  pauses,  in  order  that  the  principles 
and  mechanism  may  be  better  understood  ;  and  the  principal  instruc- 
tor will  aim  to  inspire  confidence  and  self-command  in  substitutes, 
and  especially  in  young  officers  who  may  be  called  upon  to  exercise 
a  new  position  in  the  presence  of  superior  officers.  To  the  attain- 
ment of  this  end,  he  will  be  careful  to  avoid  all  expressions  or  conduct 
which  may  tend  to  disconcert  or  embarrass  them  in  the  discharge  of 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  95 

Instrtiction. 

their  duties,  or  unnecessarily  lessen  them  in  the  esteem  of  their 
fellows. 

547.  An  officer  ordering  an  encampment,  parade  for  exercise,  drill 
or  improvement  meeting,  may  announce  in  orders  the  course  of 
instruction  and  practice  to  be  pursued  thereat,  subject,  however,  to 
his  responsibility  to  cause  to  be  executed  in  his  command  the  orders 
relative  to  instruction  issued  from  the  general  head-quarters ;  and 
all  officers  who  may  be  in  command,  at  such  encampment,  parade, 
drill  or  meeting,  will  cause  such  orders  to  be  strictly  observed  and 
obeyed. 

548.  An  officer  ordering  drills  or  improvement  meetings  of  officers 
or  non-commissioned  officers  may  designate,  in  orders,  the  officers 
who  are  to  act  as  principal  or  substituted  instructors  at  the  same . 
and  the  superior  officer  present  at  such  drills  or  meetings  shall  see 
that  such  orders  are  carried  into  execution. 

649.  The  sappers  and  miners  will  be  instructed  and  practiced  in 
the  drill  of  the  light  infantry,  and  also  of  the  artillery.  Staff  Officers 
of  divisions  and  brigades  will  be  instructed  in  all  the  arms,  and 
Regimental  Staff  Officers  in  the  arm  of  the  regiment. 

550.  The  Lieutenant-Colonel  of  each  regiment  will  select  two  or 
more  persons  from  the  sappers  and  miners,  or  from  the  corporals  in 
the  line,  to  act  as  markers  in  the  exercises  of  the  regiment.  They 
will  be  carefully  instructed  by  the  Lieutenant-Colonel  in  the  duties 
required  of  them  in  the  practice  of  the  school  of  the  battalion  ( in  the 
cavalry,  of  the  squadron  and  regiment),  and  they  will  be  under  the 
special  direction  of  the  Lieutenant-Colonel  during  the  manoeuvres. 

551.  Brigade  Inspectors  may  be  required  by  their  Brigadier-Gene- 
rals to  superintend  the  exercises  and  manoeuvres,  and  introduce  the 
system  of  tactics  and  discipline  at  brigade  drills  and  other  meetings 
for  instruction  of  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers ;  and  such 
Inspectors  may  act  thereat,  according  to  their  instructions,  either  as 
principal  or  substituted  instructors. 


96  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Instruction. 

552.  Brigade  Inspectors  will  act  as  instructors,  only  when  put  on 
duty  for  that  purpose,  as  provided  in  these  regulations  or  by  law. 

553.  Brigade  Inspectors,  in  introducing  the  system  of  tactics  and 
discipline  pursuant  to  law,  as  drill  officers,  will  carefully  avoid  any 
assumption  of  general  command,  and  strictly  observe  these  regulations 
as  to  the  method  of  exercising  their  functions. 

554.  A  Brigade  Inspector  acting  as  drill  officer,  pursuant  to  the 
provision  of  law,  at  encampments  or  parades,  has  the  powers  of  a 
substituted  instructor.  His  functions  extend  to  the  practice  of  a 
regiment  or  less  body  of  troops ;  and  during  such  practice  the  Briga- 
dier-General, or  the  Commandant  of  the  regiment  or  less  force, 
if  a  field  officer,  will  act  as  principal  instructor.  The  Brigade  Inspec- 
tor will  give  notice  of  his  intention  to  act  as  drill  officer  to  the  Com- 
manding Officer  present,  who  will  give  the  necessary  directions  to  the 
troops. 

555.  When  the  regiment  is  formed  ready  for  exercise,  the  Com- 
manding Officer  will  give  notice  to  the  Brigade  Inspector,  who  will 
then,  in  the  presence  and  under  the  supervision  of  the  officer  acting 
as  principal  instructor,  instruct  and  practice  the  troops  in  the 
manoeuvres  prescribed  from  general  head-quarters,  or  ordered  by  the 
officer  ordering  the  encampment  or  parade,  or  if  none  shall  have  been 
so  prescribed  or  ordered,  then  such  manoeuvres  as  the  officer  acting 
as  principal  instructor  shall  direct.  The  Brigade  Inspector  will  give 
the  commands  for  the  execution  of  the  manoeuvres,  and  they  will  be 
obeyed  in  the  same  manner  as  if  issued  by  the  Commandant.  The 
exercises  will  be  terminated  by  order  of  the  Commanding  Officer, 
upon  consultation  with  the  Brigade  Inspector. 

556.  In  correcting  the  errors  and  inaccuracies  of  officers  and  non- 
commissioned officers,  care  will  bo  taken,  as  far  as  may  be,  not  to 
impair  their  authority  or  relax  discipline.  To  this  end,  it  is  desirable 
that  they  should  bo  separately  instructed ;  and  also,  when  circum- 
stances will  permit;  that  they  should  bo  separated  ft-om  the  men 
when  instruction  is  required  to  be  imparted  to  them  in  the  presence 
of  their  commands. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  97 


Instruction. 


557.  For  the  purpose  of  facilitating  instruction  and  practice  in  tlie 
school  of  the  battalion,  the  Commanding  Officer  or  instructor  may- 
desire  to  explain  the  manoeuvre  to  the  officers  and  guides  before 
attempting  it,  or  he  may  desire  to  correct  mistakes  which  have  already- 
occurred.  To  this  end  he  may  call  them  together  in  front  of  the  bat- 
talion, in  the  manner  prescribed  in  the  following  paragraphs. 

558.  The  battalion  having  been  brought  into  line,  and  at  ordered 
arms,  the  Commandant  or  instructor  will,  after  ordering  "  Farade — 
Rest"  command, 

1.  Officers,  Color  and  Guides. 

2.  To  the  front  and  centre. 

3.  March! 

At  the  second  command,  the  officers  acting  as  Captains  and  First 
Lieutenants  of  companies  will  advance  four  paces  to  the  front ;  the 
First  and  Second  Sergeants  of  companies  and  General  Guides  will 
shoulder  arras,  as  Sergeants,  and  advance  two  paces  in  front,  the  whole 
facing  inwards ;  the  Color  Bearer  will  also  advance  two  paces,  and 
remain  faced  to  the  front.  At  the  third  command,  the  officers  and 
non-commissioned  officers  will  march  to  the  centre,  the  rank  of  non- 
commissioned officers  forming  upon  the  Color  Bearer,  with  the  Gene- 
ral Guides  on  its  flanks.  The  Adjutant  will  place  himself  in  the 
centre  of  the  rank  of  officers,  and  command, 

1.  Front— Face  I 

2.  Forward  —  March  I 

3.  Halt. 

At  the  first  command,  the  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  will 
face  to  the  front  and  be  aligned  by  the  centre ;  at  the  second,  the  two 
ranks  will  advance  twelve  paces,  and  at  the  third  will  halt,  and  the 
Lieutenant-Colonel  and  Major  will  take  post  on  the  right  and  left  of 
the  rank  of  officers. 

After  communicating  the  instructions,  the  Commanding  Officer 
or  instructor  will  command, 

1.  Officers,  Color  and  Guides. 

2.  About — Face! 

3.  To  your  posts  —  March  ! 
Military.  9 


98  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Camp9for  Tnsifuction  —  Camp». 

At  the  first  order  tlie  Field  Officers  will  retake  their  proper  positions ; 
at  the  second,  the  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  will  face  to 
the  rear,  and  at  the  third  they  will  advance  twelve  paces  and  halt,  by- 
command  of  the  Adjutant ;  the  Color  Bearer  will  take  his  post,  and  the 
officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  will  face  outward,  and  resume 
their  several  places  in  the  line.  If  there  be  no  Adjutant,  the  officer 
on  the  right  of  the  rank  of  officers  will  give  the  commands  herein  pre- 
scribed for  the  Adjutant. 

559.  The  officers  only,  or  the  non-commissioned  officers,  may  be 
brought  to  the  centre  by  the  same  method,  by  confining  the  order  to 
those  who  are  required. 

560.  When  the  designated  officers  shall  be  called  to  the  centre, 
the  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  remaining  with  the  com- 
panies will  see  that  perfect  order  and  silence  are  preserved  in  the 
ranks. 

The  same  method  may  be  used  in  the  cavalry  and  artillery,  to 
bring  the  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  to  the  front  and 
centre,  for  the  same  purposes. 

ARTICLE  XXVL 

CAMPS    FOR   INSTRUCTION CAMPS. 

6G1.  All  encampments  of  the  military  forces  of  this  state,  for  mar- 
tial exercise,  improvement  and  discipline,  will  be  called  Camps  for 
Instruction,  and  are  embraced  under  the  provisions  of  this  article. 

562.  Tlie  site  of  the  camp  will  be  selected  by  the  officer  ordering 
the  encampment,  who  will  examine  it  witlx  a  view  to  its  fitness  as  to 
size,  location,  healthiness  and  convenience  of  access  and  water. 
The  General  will  also  determine  whether  the  regiments  are  to  encamp 
separately  or  together. 

663.  A  camping  party  will  be  detailed  to  prepare  the  camp.  Tlie 
party  will  consist  of  the  officers  and  men  of  the  Engineer  Department, 
aud  the  officers  of  the  Quartermaster's  Department,  and  a  Corporal 
and  two  men  from  each  company.     This  party  may  be  put  on  duty 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  99 

Camps  for  Instruction —  Camps. 

preceding  the  encampment,  and  at  such,  time  as  the  oflBicer  ordering 
the  encampment  shall  direct. 

564.  The  Chief  Quartemiaeter  will  receive  his  directions  from  the 
General,  and  call  on  the  regiments  for  their  camping  parties  ;  and  it 
will  be  the  duty  of  the  Commandants  of  regiments  to  see  that  they 
are  furnished. 

565.  The  Engineer  Corps,  on  duty,  will  be  charged  with  the 
laying  out  the  camp,  and  guarding  it  until  taken  possession  of  by 
the  troops.  They  will  designate,  by  stakes  or  other  marks  upon  the 
ground,  the  lines  of  streets,  sites  of  tents,  and  all  other  details. 
They  will  act  under  the  direction  of  the  officer  ordering  the 
encampment. 

566.  The  Quartermasters  and  their  assistants  will  be  charged  with 
the  custody  and  conveyance  of  the  tents,  camp  equipage,  &c.  They 
will  preserve  the  property  in  their  charge,  and  deliver  it  to  the  troops 
at  the  time  and  in  the  quantity  required.  They  will  also  pitch  the 
tents  of  the  Generals  and  Field  and  Staflf,  Non-Commissioned  Staff? 
Guards,  Engineers,  Musicians,  and  those  required  for  the  use  of  the 
Quartermaster  and  Medical  department,  and  also  prepare  the  sinks 
for  the  officers  and  men.  In  this  duty  they  will  be  assisted  by  the 
men  of  the  Engineer  Corps.  The  Quartermaster's  men  will  also  aid 
in  guarding  the  camp  at  night,  under  the  orders  of  the  Officers  of 
Engineers. 

567  The  baggage  train,  under  the  immediate  charge  of  the  Quar- 
termaster-Sergeant and  his  assistants,  may  proceed  to  the  camp  in 
advan'-e  of  the  troops  or  with  them,  as  may  be  directed  by  the  Com- 
manding Officer. 

668.  When  the  troops  arrive  at  the  camp,  the  men  not  detailed  for 
guards,  or  fatigue  or  working  parties,  will  immediately  pitch  the  com- 
pany tents,  including  those  of  the  company  officers. 

569.  If  the  Commanding  Officer  shall  so  elect,  the  pitching  of  all 
the  tents  may  be  delayed  until  the  arrival  of  the  troops  ;  and  fatigut^ 
and  working  parties  may  then  be  detailed,  under  the  direction  of  the 


100        .  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Camps  for  Jnttntction  —  Camps. 

Engineers  and  Quartermasters,  to  perform  the  labors  required  of  the 
camping  party,  and  also  to  procure  the  necessary  supplies,  and  put 
the  camp  in  order. 

570.  On  reaching  the  ground  the  troops  form  on  the  color  front, 
cavalry  regiments  in  the  rear  of  their  camp.  The  number  of  men  to  be 
furnished  as  guards,  orderlies  and  fatigue  and  working  parties,  and 
other  details  of  duty  in  camp,  are  then  announced  by  the  Brigadier- 
General,  or  other  commanding  oflScer,  and  promulgated  to  the  Field 
Officers  and  troops.  The  Adjutant  and  Captains  form  in  front  of  each 
regiment,  the  First  Sergeants  taking  post  behind  their  Captains  to 
receive  the  orders.  The  Adjutant  then  makes  the  details,  and  the 
First  Sergeants  warn  the  men.  The  Regimental  Officer  of  the  day 
sends  the  guards  to  their  posts.  The  colors  are  then  planted  and 
arms  stacked  on  the  color  line ;  and  the  fatigue  and  working  parties 
are  formed  by  the  Regimental  Officer  of  the  day  in  rear  of  the  arms, 
and  turned  over  to  the  proper  officers. 

671.  All  the  dispositions,  after  the  troops  arrive  on  the  ground, 
will  be  made  with  the  utmost  promptness,  in  order  that  the  troops 
may  be  established  in  camp  as  rapidly  as  possible. 

572,  After  the  troops  are  established  in  camp,  no  non-commissioned 
officer  or  soldier  is  to  quit  the  camp  without  a  furlough,  pass  or 
order,  except  to  procure  water  or  other  necessaries.  [  See  par.  648,  &c.] 
Furloughs  are  granted  by  the  Commanding  Officer  of  the  regiment,  and 
will  bo  signed  by  him.  Passes  may  be  issued  by  the  Commandants  of 
companies,  and  must  be  signed  by  the  Commander  of  the  regiment, 
or  by  the  Adjutant  under  the  authority  of  such  Commander.  Every 
such  furlough  or  pass  will  state  the  name  of  the  person  to  whom  it  is 
given,  and  the  length  of  time  for  which  he  may  be  absent ;  and  no 
such  furlough  or  pass  will  be  issued  contrary  to  the  directions  of  the 
Commandant  of  the  camp.  An  order  to  any  body  of  troops  to  pass 
the  guard  can  only  be  made  by  the  Commanding  Officer  of  the  camp, 
or  by  his  authority. 

573.  No  officer  belonging  to  the  force  encamped  is  to  jmiss  out  of 
the  camp,  or  sleep  in  any  house  upon  the  camp  grounds,  unless  bj 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  101 

CampB  for  Instruction  —  Camps. 

ihe  order  or  permission  of  the  Commandant  of  the  camp.  All  leaves 
of  absence  will  state  the  period  for  which  they  are  granted.  The 
issuing  of  any  leave  of  absence  or  furlough  will  be  promptly  notified 
by  the  officer  granting  the  same,  through  the  proper  channel  of  com- 
munication, to  the  immediate  Commandant  of  the  person  to  whom 
the  same  is  given.  Every  person  receiving  such  leave  of  absence  or 
furlough,  will,  before  leaving  the  camp,  report  to  his  immediate 
Commandant,  and  also  to  the  proper  Staff  Officer  of  the  day,  in  order 
that  his  absence  may  be  duly  noted ;  and  upon  his  return  to  camp 
he  will  again  report  to  the  officer  issuing  such  leave  of  absence  or 
furlough,  and  also  to  such  Staff  Officer  and  to  his  immediate  Com- 
mander. 

574.  Arms  will  not  be  loaded  in  camps  for  instruction,  by  sentinels 
or  others,  without  the  special  order  of  the  Commanding  Officer  of  the 
camp. 

575.  The  sale  of  spiritous  liquors  upon  any  camp  ground  is 
strictly  prohibited;  also  all  gaming,  and  the  bringing  within  the 
camp  grounds  of  cards  or  other  gaming  materials. 

576.  The  troops  are  to  be  encamped  in  the  order  of  battle.  The 
tents  will  be  arranged  in  ranks  and  files ;  and  the  terms  rank  and  file, 
front,  rear,  flank,  right  and  left,  have  the  same  meaning  when  applied 
to  camps  as  to  the  order  of  battle. 

577.  The  front  of  the  camp  is  usually  equal  to  the  front  of  the 
troops  when  drawn  up  in  lines  according  to  their  established  forma- 
tion. The  number  of  ranks  of  tents  varies  with  the  strength  of  the 
companies  and  size  of  the  tents. 

578.  Generals  will  take  post  at  the  centre  of  their  commands,  in 
the  interval  between  regiments  or  brigades,  and  on  the  best  ground 
on  or  near  the  line  of  tents  of  Field  Officers.  The  Staffs  of  General 
Officers  will  encamp  near  them. 

579.  Every  officer  in  camp  will  provide  himself  with  stationery  and 
writing  materials ;  Engineers  and  Surgeons  with  the  materials,  instru- 

MlLlTARY.  9* 


102  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Jitfantry  Camps. 

ments  and  medicines  necessary  for  the  discharge  of  their  respective 
duties. 

580.  Each  Commandant  of  a  company,  in  camp,  will  see  that  his 
company  is  provided  with  one  axe,  one  spade  or  shovel,  one  hammer 
or  mallet,  and  four  pails  (one  to  each  squad),  all  of  which  are  to  be 
kept  under  the  special  charge  of  the  First  Sergeant  of  the  company, 
subject  to  the  control  of  the  Quartermaster  of  the  regiment. 

581.  Such  deviations  from  the  directions  for  encampments,  herein 
contained,  as  the  nature  of  the  ground  or  other  special  circumstances 
may  render  necessary,  will  be  made  by  order  of  the  Commanding 
Officer. 

INFANTRY    CAMPS. 

582.  In  an  Infantry  camp  the  front  will  be  about  two-fifths,  in 
paces,  of  the  number  of  men  encamped.  Thus  a  regiment  of  five 
hundred  men,  in  two  ranks,  will  occupy  a  space  of  about  two  hun- 
dred paces.  The  front  of  any  regiment,  of  greater  or  less  numl)€rs, 
may  be  ascertained  upon  the  same  principle.  The  intervals  between 
regiments  will  be  twenty-two  paces, 

583.  A  main  street  will  be  run  through  the  centre  of  the  camp  of 
each  regiment  from  its  front  to  the  tent  of  the  Colonel.  The  main 
street  will  be  fifteen  paces  wide.  The  residue  of  the  front  of  the 
camp  is  divided  into  streets  for  the  companies.  Each  company  has 
its  tents  in  two  files,  facing  inwards  on  a  street.  All  the  streets  are 
perpendicular  to  the  color  line.  The  width  of  the  company  streets 
will  be  equal,  and  depends  on  the  front  of  the  camp,  but  should  not 
be  less  than  five  paces,  exclusive  of  the  space  occupied  by  the  tents  ; 
and  if  it  is  desirable  to  make  the  streets  of  less  width,  the  companies 
will  encamp  in  single  files  —  a  division  occupying  a  street.  The 
intervals  bcitween  the  ranks  of  tents  is  two  paces,  and  between  the 
files  of  tents  of  adjacent  companies,  two  paces. 

584.  The  color  line  and  regimental  parade  is  ten  paces  in  front  of 
the  front  rank  of  tents.  The  kitchens  are  twenty  paces  behind  the 
rear  rank  of  company  tents.     The  Non-Commissioned  Staflf  and  Sut- 


Camp  for  liistruction.  piatei 


■  !■■■■■■   ■  ■■  BK  BE  a 

■  BB  BB  BB  B   E  BE  BE  UJ  LI 

E  BE  BE  BE  B   E  BE  Bi^  LJ-.'  U 

B  BE  BE  BE  B   E  BE  BE  U-:  U 

i  BB  BE  BE  B.'V'B  BB  BE  BE  Si 


B   ■   ■   M 


H   ■ 


OFFICERS    KIIXHCNS 


x    ;■:    ;f:    :■;        ;■;    :i:    ;«:    if; 


■      MCN* 


1^ 

is 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  103 


Infantry  Camps. 


lers,  twenty  paces  in  rear  of  the  kitchens;  the  Company  officers, 
twenty  paces  farther  in  rear ;  and  the  Field  and  Staff,  twenty  paces 
in  rear  of  the  Company  officers. 

585.  The  Sergeants  of  companies  are  located  in  the  first  rank  of 
company  tents ;  the  Corporals  with  the  men ;  the  color  gnard  with 
the  color  company,  in  the  first  rank,  next  to  the  main  street.  The 
men  of  the  Engineer  Corps  and  the  Musicians  encamp  on  the  line  of 
the  non-commissioned  staff.  The  Police  Guard  are  on  the  same  line, 
and  on  the  left  of  the  main  street,  the  tents  facing  to  the  front,  the 
stacks  of  arms  in  front  of  the  tents.  The  Company  officers'  tents  are 
on  the  sides  of  the  streets,  in  rear  of  the  respective  companies ;  the 
Captain's  tent  on  the  right ;  the  Colonel's  tent  will  be  in  the  centre 
of  the  main  street,  on  the  line  of  the  Field  and  Staff;  the  Lieutenant- 
Colonel's,  in  the  centre  of  the  right  wing ;  the  Major's,  in  the  centre 
of  the  left  wing ;  the  Adjutant's,  equi-distant  between  the  Colonel's 
and  Lieutenant-Colonel's ;  the  Engineer's  and  Surgeon's  on  the  right 
of  the  Lieutenant-Colonel's,  and  half  way  between  it  and  the  flank  ; 
the  Quartermaster's  and  Paymaster's  half  way  between  the  Colonel's 
and  Major's ;  the  Chaplain's  and  Assistant-Surgeon's  on  the  left  of 
the  Major's,  and  half  way  between  it  and  the  flank.  The  tents  of  all 
the  Commissioned  Officers  will  face  to  the  front ;  also  those  of  the 
Non-Commissioned  Staff",  Sutlers,  Musicians  and  Engineers. 

586.  The  Officers'  kitchens  and  attendants  are  twenty  paces  in  rear 
of  the  line  of  Field  and  Staff;  the  horses  of  the  Staff  Officers  and  of 
the  baggage  train  twenty  paces  farther  to  the  rear;  the  wagons 
parked  on  the  same  line,  and  the  men  of  the  train  camped  near 
them. 

587.  Mess  tents,  if  used,  and  also  the  kitchens  for  the  companies, 
may  be  placed  on  the  line  of  officers'  kitchens,  if  the  Commandant  of 
the  camp  shall  so  direct ;  and  in  that  event  the  line  of  non-commis- 
sioned staff  will  be  twenty  paces  in  rear  of  the  company  tents. 

588.  The  sinks  are  fifty  paces  in  rear  of  the  baggage  train ;  those 
of  the  officers  near  the  main  street ;  those  of  the  men  near  the  same 
line,  in  rear  of  the  wings  or  on  the  flanks,  or  one  of  them.     The  sinka 


104  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 


Cavalry  Camps. 


are  concealed  by  bushes,  boards  or  tents ;  and  at  least  every  day  a 
portion  of  the  earth,  dug  out  for  the  sinks,  should  be  thrown  back 
into  them  to  cover  the  filth. 

689.  The  advanced  post  of  the  Police  Guard  is  about  two  hundred 
paces  in  front  of  the  color  line,  and  opposite  the  centre  of  the  regi- 
ment or  on  the  best  ground ;  the  prisoners'  tent  about  four  paces  in 
rear  of  the  tents  of  the  advanced  post. 

590.  If  the  troops  encamp  in  two  lines,  the  advanced  posts  of  the 
Police  Guard  of  the  regiments,  in  the  second  line,  will  be  two  hundred 
paces  in  rear  of  the  line  of  the  Field  and  Staff  of  such  regiment. 

591.  Regiments  doing  duty  as  Infantry,  Light  Infantry  or  Riflemen, 
w^ill  encamp  in  the  manner  herein  prescribed  for  the  Infantry. 

592.  Flank  companies  doing  duty  as  Infantry,  Light  Infantry  or 
Riflemen,  will  encamp  on  the  flanks  or  with  the  regiment,  as  their 
place  may  be  in  the  order  of  battle,  and  in  the  manner  prescribed  for 
the  Infantry, 

CAVALRY    CAMPS. 

593.  Flank  Cavalry  companies,  attached  to  foot  regiments,  will 
encamp  on  the  same  line  as  the  regiment,  in  their  position  in  order 
of  battle,  and  in  the  same  maimer  as  the  Infantry,  except  as  otherwise 
directed.  The  front  of  tlie  company  will  be  equal  to  its  front  when 
formed  in  line ;  the  company  tents  will  face  inward,  and  be  arranged 
on  both  sides  of  the  company  street,  as  in  the  Infantry  ;  but  allowing 
sufficient  distance  between  the  ranks  of  tents  for  the  forage  of  the 
horses.  The  horses  are  picketed  in  two  lines  facing  to  the  tents; 
the  pickets  are  firmly  fastened  in  the  ground,  at  from  tliree  to  six 
paces  from  the  tents.  Each  horse  picketed,  requires  about  two  paces, 
and  the  depth  of  tlie  files  of  tents  will  depend  on  the  number  of 
horses.  The  tents  of  the  stable  attendants  are  in  the  rear  of  the  com- 
pany tents. 

594.  The  company  kitchen  will  be  twenty  paces  in  rear  of  tho 
attendants'  tents,  or  on  a  line  with  the  kitchens  of  the  battalion  com- 
panies, if  those  are  placed  on  the  line  of  officers'  kitchens. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  105 

Artillery  Camps. 

595.  The  non-commissioned  officers  occupy  th.e  tents  of  the  front 
rank.  The  horses  of  the  officers,  and  the  teamsters  and  wagons,  will 
be  on  the  line  of  the  baggage  train.  The  officers'  kitchens  and  the 
sinks  are  on  a  line  with  those  of  the  battalion. 

596.  The  tents  of  Company  Officers  are  on  the  prolongation  of  the 
files  of  the  company  tents,  and  on  the  line  of  the  tents  of  the  Company 
Officers  of  the  battalion  if  practicable  ;  the  tent  of  the  Captain  on  the 
right.  The  parade  ground  will  be  in  front,  on  a  line  with  the  regi- 
mental parade. 

597.  If  the  company  street  is  not  twenty  paces  wide  after  deduct- 
.*ng  the  space  occupied  by  the  tents,  the  company  will  encamp 
in  a  single  file  on  the  left  side  of  the  street,  the  tents  opening  to  the 
fight,  and  the  horses  will  be  picketed  on  one  line  on  the  right  of  the 
tents,  facing  to  the  left.  The  Lieutenants'  tents  will  be  twenty  paces 
In  rear  of  the  file  of  company  tents ;  the  Captains,  twenty  paces  in 
rear  of  the  Lieutenants.  The  stable  guard  and  the  attendants  upon 
the  horses  will,  in  this  case,  have  a  separate  file  of  tents  on  the  right 
of  the  company  street.  The  tents  of  this  file  will  face  to  the  left,  and 
those  of  the  stable  guard  will  occupy  the  front  rank  of  this  file. 
The  company  kitchen  will  be  in  the  rear  of  this  file,  unless  located, 
is  above  provided,  on  the  line  of  officers'  kitchens. 

698.  A  squadron  of  Cavalry  may  be  encamped  as  a  company,  each 
company  occupying  a  file  of  tents  on  a  side  of  the  street.  Regiments 
of  Cavalry,  or  any  less  force,  not  attached  to  a  foot  regiment,  or  en- 
camping therewith,  will  encamp  according  to  the  directions  for  camps 
of  Cavalry  contained  under  the  .article  entitled  * '  Troops  in  Campaign. ' ' 

ARTILLERY    CAMPS. 

599.  Flank  companies  of  Artillery  attached  to  foot  regiments  will 
encamp  on  the  same  line  as  the  regiment  in  their  position  in  the 
order  of  battle,  and  after  the  same  manner  as  the  Infantry,  unless  as 
otherwise  provided.  The  company  street  will  be  of  the  width  of  the 
front  of  the  company,  when  in  line,  with  the  prescribed  intervals.  For 
a  battery  of  two  sections,  or  a  less  number  of  pieces,  the  tents  wiH  be 


106  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

QfflcerH  and  Dutie*  of  the  Day. 

placed  on  the  sides  of  the  street.  If  there  be  more  than  two  sections, 
each  section  will  occupy  a  file  of  tents,  and  a  central  file  of  tents 
will  be  added,  facing  to  the  right.  The  horses  will  he  picketed  as 
directed  in  Cavalry  companies ;  and  if  the  number  of  horses  makes 
it  necessary,  the  files  of  tents  will  be  so  arranged  as  to  allow  the  horses 
to  be  picketed  both  on  the  right  and  left  of  the  tents. 

600.  The  Park  is  opposite  to  the  centre  of  the  street  or  streets,  forty 
paces  in  rear  of  the  Officers'  tents.  Sentinels  for  the  Park  are 
furnished  by  the  Artillery,  and,  when  necessary,  by  the  other  troops* 
The  carriages  in  files,  four  paces  apart ;  distance  between  ranks  of 
carriages  sufficient  for  the  horses  when  harnessed  to  them.  The 
harness  is  in  the  tents  of  the  men.  The  Park  Guard  is  twenty-five 
paces  in  rear  of  the  Park.  The  camp  in  other  respects  is  the  same  as 
for  flank  companies  of  Cavalry. 

601.  Sections  of  Light  Artillery  attached  to  foot  regiments  will 
encamp  as  above  directed.  Batteries  of  Artillery  encamping  by  them- 
selves will  observe  the  directions  for  camps  of  Artillery,  under  the 
article  entitled  "  Troops  in  Campaign."  Artillery,  attached  to  Cavalry 
regiments,  conform  to  the  general  arrangements  for  the  Cavalry. 


OFFICERS    AND    DUTIES    OF    THE    DAY. 

602.  The  daily  duties  must  be  announced  in  orders,  and  the  officers 
to  perform  them  are  to  be  appointed  or  detailed  as  herein  provided. 

603.  Such  orders  should  be  written  or  printed,  and  will  be  issued 
on  or  before  the  evening  preceding  the  duty,  if  practicable. 

604.  The  parde  and  countersign  will  be  communicated  from  the 
head-quarters  of  the  Officer  in  principal  command  to  the  Officer  of  the 
day  in  time  to  be  given  to  the  Officers  of  guards  before  retreat. 

605.  The  number  and  rank  of  the  officers  for  daily  duty  are  to  be 
regulated  by  the  strength  or  circumstances  of  the  camp;  and  the 
officers  appointed  or  detailed  are  to  remain  in  camp  during  their  tours 
of  duty. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  107 

Officers  and  Duties  of  the  Day. 

606.  Beside  the  officers  detailed  for  guard  duty,  the  officers  for 
daily  duty  in  large  camps,  will  be  as  follows  :  A  General  Officer  of  the 
day  for  each  division ;  a  Field  Officer  of  the  day  for  each  brigade ;  a 
Captain  of  the  day  for  each  regiment ;  and  such  General  and  Eegi- 
mental  Staff  Officers  of  the  day  as  may  be  necessary  to  attend  to  the 
various  details. 

607.  In  camps  of  one  regiment,  or  less,  the  officers  will  be  as  follows  : 
Officer  of  the  day,  Adjutant  of  the  day,  and  Officer  of  police  guard. 

608.  The  General  of  the  day  is  to  superintend  the  regularity  and 
discipline  of  the  camp  of  the  division,  visit  the  guards  and  out- 
posts, call  out  and  inspect  the  guards  as  often  and  at  such  times  as 
he  thinks  proper ;  to  receive  all  reports  of  guards,  and  make  immediate 
communication  of  any  extraordinary  circumstance  to  his  Commanding 
Officer  and  to  the  General  Commanding-in-Chief. 

609.  The  Field  Officer  of  the  day  has  the  immediate  superintendence 
of  the  camp  of  the  brigade  ;  he  is  to  be  present  at  the  mounting  and 
dismounting  of  the  brigade  guards  ;  he  is  to  call  them  out  to  inspect 
them ;  to  order  such  patrols  from  them  as  he  may  judge  necessary  to 
insure  the  regularity  and  order  of  the  camp ;  to  see  that  the  proper 
posts  are  established ;  that  the  guard  are  vigilant,  that  none  are 
absent,  and  that  their  arms  and  accoutrements  are  in  order ;  that  the 
officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  are  acquainted  with  their  duty, 
and  that  the  sentinels  are  properly  posted,  and  have  received  proper 
orders. 

610.  TJie  Captain  or  Officer  of  the  day  of  each  regiment,  and  in  camps 
of  less  than  a  regiment,  is  charged  with  the  order  and  cleanliness  of  the 
camp  ;  he  has  the  calls  beaten  by  the  drummer  of  the  police  guard  ; 
he  attends  the  parading  of  the  guards,  and  orders  the  roll  to  be  called 
frequently  and  at  unexpected  periods,  and  reports  everything  extra- 
ordinary to  the  Commander  of  the  regiment  or  camp ;  he  is  to  visit 
the  hospital  at  various  hours,  and  make  a  report  of  its  state  to  the 
Commander  of  the  regiment  or  camp.  He  will  satisfy  himself 
frequently  during  the  night  of  the  vigilance  of  the  police  guard  and 
its  post  or  posts ;  and  prescribes  patrols  and  rounds  to  be  made  by 


108  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Officers  and  Dutie»  of  the  Day. 

the  Officer  of  the  guard.  He  will  give  attention  to  the  condition  of 
the  sinks,  the  regulation  of  camp  fires,  the  removal  of  rubbish,  &c. ; 
and  for  these  purposes  a  fatigue  will  be  furnished  him  when  necessary. 

611.  TU  General  Staff  Officer  of  the  day,  at  the  head-quarters  of  the 
Commanding  Officer,  attends,  under  the  direction  of  such  Command- 
ant, to  the  making  and  keeping  of  the  rosters  required  to  be  kept  at 
the  head-quarters,  to  the  issue  and  service  of  orders,  to  the  receipt 
and  consolidation  of  reports  and  returns,  to  the  requisition  for 
and  inspection  of  guards  ordered  from  those  head-quarters,  and  the 
mounting  of  such  guards ;  to  the  entry  of  the  names  of  all  persons 
who  receive  leave  of  absence  from  the  principal  head-quarters,  noting 
the  time  of  absence  and  return ;  to  the  timely  communication  of  the 
countersign  and  parole  to  officers  entitled  thereto  ;  and,  generally,  to 
the  discharge  of  all  duties  devolving  upon  officers  of  the  Adjutant- 
General's  department,  in  camp  or  in  the  field. 

612.  llie  Staff  Officer  of  the  day,  of  the  division  or  brigade,  is  to 
attend  to  all  the  duties,  in  his  division  or  brigade,  required  of  the 
General  Staff  Officer  of  the  day  at  the  chief  head-quarters ;  and  will 
also  attend  for  orders  at  the  head-quarters  of  the  Commandant  next 
superior  to  his  General,  and  deliver  there  at  the  proper  times  all 
required  returns  and  reports. 

613.  The  Staff  Officer  or  Adjutant  of  the  day  of  a  regiment,  or  camp 
of  less  than  a  regiment,  is  appointed  to  relieve  the  Adjutant,  or  act  as 
Adjutant,  when  necessary ;  and  he  will,  while  so  acting,  perform  any 
duty  which  may  be  required  of  him  which  would  otherwise  devolve 
upon  the  Adjutant,  Under  the  supervision  of  the  Commandant  of  the 
regiment,  the  Adjutant,  or  the  Adjutant  of  the  day,  will  see  that  the 
required  returns  and  reports  are  duly  and  promptly  made  to  him, 
and  by  him  to  the  Commandant  of  the  regiment  or  smaller  force,  and 
also  to  the  brigade  head-quarters,  in  a  large  camp ;  that  the  proper 
orders  are  issued  and  communicated ;  that  the  necessary  rosters  are 
kept,  and  that  the  details  for  guard  and  other  duty  are  regularly  made, 
and  notice  thereof  given  ;  and  that  the  requisitions  from  superior  head- 
quarters are  complied  with  accurately,  and  in  proper  time.     He  will 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  109 


Officers  of  Guards. 


also  keep  a  record  of  all  leaves  of  absence,  furloughs  and  passes  given 
to  officers  and  men  belonging  to  the  regiment,  and  of  their  return  to 
duty,  and  period  of  absence.  He  will  attend  for  orders  at  the  proper 
head- quarters. 

614.  The  Officer  of  the  day  in  each  division,  brigade  and  regiment 
will  be  appointed  by  the  Commandant  thereof,  and  the  names  of 
those  appointed  will  be  announced  in  orders.  The  rules  of  the  roster 
will,  as  far  as  may  be,  govern  in  making  such  selections. 

615.  The  selection  for  Field  Officers  of  the  day  will  be  made  from  the 
roster  of  Lieutenant- Colonels  and  Majors,  and,  when  necessary.  Cap- 
tains may  be  put  on  the  roster  for  this  service. 

616.  The  Staff  Officer  of  the  day  will  be  usually  the  officer  of  the 
Adjutant-General's  department  belonging  to  the  command;  but,  in 
case  of  a  vacancy,  or  to  relieve  that  officer,  the  Commanding  officer 
of  the  division,  brigade  or  regiment  may  select  a  StaflF  Officer  of  the 
day  from  any  other  department  of  the  Staff,  except  the  Medical  de- 
partment, or  from  the  Lieutenants  of  the  line  not  in  command  of 
companies  or  detailed  for  other  duty. 

617.  Besides  the  Staff  Officers  of  the  day  above  referred  to,  there 
will  be  always  on  duty,  in  camp,  the  Staff  Officers  ( other  than  those 
of  the  Adjutant-General's  department)  attached  to  the  force  en- 
camped, who  will  discharge  the  several  duties  devolving  upon  officers 
of  their  respective  departments.  The  same  course  will  be  pursued 
to  provide  for  the  absence,  or  inability  to  act,  of  an  officer  in  any  of 
the  Staff  departments,  as  is  indicated  in  respect  to  the  Staff  Officer  of 
the  day. 

OFFICERS    OF    GUARDS. 

618.  The  Officers  of  Guards  are  detailed  according  to  the  rules  of 
the  roster,  subject,  however,  to  the  right  of  selection  in  special  cases. 
The  detail  for  Officers  of  brigade  guards  will  be  made  at  brigade  head- 
quarters— for  regimental  guards,  at  regimental  head-quarters. 

Military.  10 


no  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Citmp    Guardn. 

619.  Officers  of  Guards  make  report  of  their  tour  of  service,  inclu- 
ding the  reports  from  all  posts,  and  send  it,  after  the  guard  is  marched 
off,  to  the  Officer  of  the  day. 

620.  Officers  of  Guards  will  also  keep  lists  of  the  names  of  all 
officers,  non-commissioned  officers  and  soldiers  who  pass  the  guard 
under  leaves  of  absence,  furloughs  and  passes ;  and  upon  such  lists 
will  be  stated  the  time  of  going  and  returning  of  each  person.  The 
lists  will  be  appended  to  the  reports  of  the  Officers  of  Guards,  and 
delivered  therewith  to  the  Officer  of  the  daj. 

621.  It  is  the  duty  of  officers  on  all  guards  to  inspect  all  reliefs  of 
sentinels,  both  when  they  go  on  and  come  off  their  posts ;  to  call  the 
rolls  frequently,  and  by  every  means  in  their  power  to  keep  the  men 
under  their  command  in  the  most  perfect  state  of  vigilance  and 
preparation.  They  will  be  responsible  for  the  security  of  the  pri- 
soners and  property  committed  to  their  charge ;  and  it  will  be  their 
duty  to  suppress  all  riots  and  disorders,  and  in  case  of  fire  to  give  the 
alarm,  and  be  instrumental  in  extinguishing  it.  They  are  also  watch- 
fully to  superintend  the  conduct  of  the  non-commissioned  officers, 
taking  care  that  they  are  correct  in  the  performance  of  their  duty, 
that  they  maintain  a  proper  authority,  and  prevent  any  species  of 
irregularity  among  the  men.  They  must  particularly  ascertain  that 
the  non-commissioned  officers  are  well  informed  with  respect  to  the 
orders  they  are  to  deliver  to  the  several  sentinels ;  and  they  must 
frequently  visit  the  sentinels,  to  be  assured  that  they  know  their  duty 
and  have  received  the  proper  instructiona. 

CAMP    GUARDS. 

622.  A  guard,  to  be  called  the  Grand  Guard,  will  be  posted  at 
every  encampment  for  instruction  when  the  encampment  consists  of 
more  than  one  regiment. 

623.  The  numbers  and  positions  of  the  Grand  Guard  are  regulated 
»y  the  Commandants  of  brigades;  in  detached. corps  by  the  Com- 
manding Officer.  They  will  be  formed  of  detachments  from  the  regi- 
ments, according  to  their  strength,  and  will  be  of  such  force  as  th« 
nature  of  the  duty  may  require. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  lU 

Camp    Ouarda. 

624.  Tke  Grand  Guard  of  a  brigade  will  be  usually  commanded  by 
a  Captain ;  and,  under  the  supervision  of  the  Generals  of  division  and 
brigade,  the  Grand  Guards  are  specially  under  the  direction  of  the 
Field  Officer  of  the  day  in  each  brigade. 

625.  The  Grand  Guard  will  be  posted  at  the  principal  access  to 
the  camp ;  and  posts  may  be  established  in  the  rear  and  on  the  flanks, 
at  suitable  distances,  so  as  to  command  the  approaches  to  the  camp. 
Between  these  posts  and  the  main  guard  a  line  of  sentinels  may  be 
thrown,  outside  of  the  sentinels  of  the  Police  Guards,  so  as  to  form  a 
second  line  around  the  camp.  The  posts  may  be  commanded  by  a 
commissioned  or  non-commissioned  officer,  as  their  strength  or  im- 
portance may  demand. 

626.  The  distance  at  which  the  Grand  Guard  and  its  posts  should 
be  placed  from  the  lines  of  sentinels  of  the  Police  Guard  will  dei)end 
on  the  situation  of  the  ground  and  the  intention  of  the  Commanding 
Officer. 

627.  The  Commander  of  a  Grand  Guard  receives  detailed  instruc- 
tions from  the  General  and  Field  Officer  of  the  day  of  the  brigade, 
and  he  instructs  the  Commanders  of  the  small  posts  as  to  their 
duties. 

628.  The  General  of  Division,  if  he  thinks  proper,  changes  tho 
stations  and  orders  of  the  Grand  Guard,  and  establishes  posts  to  con- 
nect the  brigades  or  protect  the  exterior  flanks. 

629.  Staff  Officers  sent  from  division  head-quarters  to  inspect  the 
posts  of  Grand  Guards  give  them  orders  only  in  urgent  cases,  and  in 
the  absence  of  the  Field  Officer  of  the  day  of  the  brigade. 

630.  The  Commander  of  the  Grand  Guard  reports  to  the  General  of 
brigade,  and  Field  Officer  of  the  day  of  the  brigade,  all  matters  of 
importance  or  requiring  attention. 

631.  Such  subaltern  and  non-commissioned  officers  will  be  detailed 
for  duty  on  the  Grand  Guard  as  its  force  and  number  of  posts  may 
require. 


112  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Camp   Oxtard*. 

632.  From  the  Grand  Guard  will  be  detailed,  ordinarily,  the  Order- 
lies and  Sentinels  for  general  officers,  at  the  camps  for  instruction. 
A  Major-  General  will  be  furnished  with  two  Sergeants  as  orderlies, 
and  two  Sentinels  at  his  marquee,  by  his  own  division,  ea<;h 
brigade  furnishing  them  by  turns.  A  Brigadier- General  will  be 
furnished  with  one  Sergeant  as  an  orderly,  and  one  Sentinel  at  his 
marquee,  by  his  own  brigade.  Generals  may  make  selections  of  non- 
commissioned officers,  other  than  First  or  Second  Sergeants  of  compa- 
nies, for  Orderlies,  and  continue  them  on  duty  for  such  period  as  they 
may  determine,  and  they  may  increase  the  number  of  their  Orderlies 
or  Sentinels  as  occasion  may  require,  or  they  may  order  a  separate 
detail  for  the  same. 

633.  In  each  regiment  is  detailed  every  day  a  Pdice  Guard,  to  con- 
sist of  two  Sergeants,  three  Corporals,  two  Drummers  and  men  enough 
to  furnish  the  required  Sentinels  and  Patrols.  The  men  are  taken 
from  all  the  companies,  from  each  in  proportion  to  its  strength. 

634.  The  Police  Guard  is  commanded  by  a  Lieutenant,  under  the 
supervision  of  the  Officer  of  the  day  of  the  regiment,  and  furnishes  ten 
Sentinels  at  the  camp,  viz. :  one  over  the  arms  of  the  Guard ;  one  at 
the  Colonel's  tent ;  two  on  the  color  front,  one  being  opposite  each 
wing ;  two,  twenty  paces  in  rear  of  the  sinks,  one  opposite  each  wing ; 
two  on  each  flank,  between  it  and  the  next  regiment.  If  it  is  a  flank 
regiment,  one  additional  Sentinel  may  be  posted  on  the  outer  flank, 
and  if  tlie  regiment  is  encamped  alone,  on  each  flank. 

635.  An  advanced  post  is  detached  from  the  Police  Guard,  com- 
posed of  a  Sergeant,  a  Corporal,  a  Drummer,  and  nine  men  to  furnish 
Sentin«^l8  and  a  Guard  over  the  prisoners.  It  furnishes  three  Sentinels, 
two  a  few  paces  in  front  of  the  post,  opposite  the  right  and  left  wing 
of  the  regiment,  posted  so  as  to  see  as  far  as  possible  to  the  front,  and 
one  over  the  arms  and  prisoners. 

636.  In  the  cavalry,  dismount<?d  men  are  employed  in  preference 
on  the  Police  Guard.  The  mounted  men  on  duty  are  sent  in  succes- 
sion, a  part  at  a  time,  to  groom  their  horses.  The  advanced  post  is 
always  formed  of  mounted  men. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  113 

Camp   Gwxrdi. 

637.  Where  a  Grand  Guard  is  posted,  at  brigade  or  division 
encampments,  the  advanced  posts  of  regiments  may  be  dispensed 
with,  in  which  case  the  duties  required  of  the  advanced  post  will  be 
discharged  by  the  Grand  Guard. 

638.  When  a  regiment  is  encamped  alone,  or  whenever  it  may  be 
deemed  necessary,  the  camp  may  be  covered  at  night  with  small  out 
posts,  forming  a  double  chain  of  Sentinels.  These  posts  are  under 
the  orders  of  the  Commander  of  the  Police  Guard,  and  are  visited  by 
his  patrols  and  rounds. 

639.  The  Sentinels  on  the  color  front  have  orders  not  to  permit  the 
colors  to  be  moved  unless  by  the  Color  Bearer  or  Sergeant  of  the 
Guard ;  nor  will  they  permit  any  person  to  take  arms  from  the  stacks* 
except  by  order  of  some  officer  or  a  non-commissioned  officer  of  the 
guard.  The  Sentinel  at  the  Colonel's  tent  has  orders  to  warn  him, 
day  or  night,  of  any  unusual  movement  in  or  about  the  camp.  The 
Sentinel  over  the  arms,  at  the  advanced  post,  guards  the  prisoners 
and  keeps  sight  of  them,  and  suffers  no  one  to  converse  with  them 
without  permission. 

640.  The  Sentinels  on  the  front,  flanks  and  rear,  see  that  no  person 
during  the  day  enters  or  leaves  the  camp,  but  at  a  post  of  the 
guard,  unless  such  person  be  the  Commanding  Officer  of  the  regi- 
ment, brigade,  division  or  camp,  or  the  Officer  of  the  day  or  Officer 
of  the  guard,  or  is  passed  over  the  chain  by  one  of  these  officers.  At 
night  they  prevent  all  persons  from  entering  or  quitting  the  camp, 
except  at  the  advanced  post.  They  report  to  the  Officer  of  the  guard, 
at  any  time,  suspicious  persons  prowling  about  the  camp;  and  at 
night  they  arrest  every  one  who  attempts  to  enter  or  leave  the  camp 
surreptitiously  or  forcibly  ;or,except  by  the  advanced  post  after  being 
warned  so  to  do.  Arrested  persons  are  sent  to  the  Officer  of  the 
guard,  who  sends  them,  if  necessary,  to  the  Officer  of  the  day. 

641.  The  Sentinels  in  front  of  the  advanced  post  have  orders  to 
permit  no  person  to  pass  Uxe  line  without  reporting  at  the  advanced 
post,  and  to  warn  the  post  of  the  approach  of  any  officer  or  body  of 

MlLlTATY.  10* 


114  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 


Camp  Guards. 


troops.     The  Sergeant  notifies  the  Officer  of  the  guard  of  the  approach 
of  an  officer  entitled  to  compliment,  or  of  a  body  of  troops. 

642.  No  non-commissioned  officer  or  soldier  is  to  quit  his  guard 
without  leave,  which  is  to  be  granted  only  on  particular  occasions 
and  to  very  few  at  a  time.  If  water  or  other  necessaries  are  wanted 
for  the  guard,  they  must  be  sent  for,  at  a  time  when  the  sentinels  are 
not  relieving,  by  a  non-commissioned  officer. 

643.  During  the  day  the  reliefs  off  post  may  be  allowed  to  rest 
themselves  as  much  as  may  consist  with  duty.  But  during  the  night 
no  man  will  be  suffered  to  sleep,  unless  it  be  expressly  permitted 
by  the  Officer  of  the  day  ;  and  the  guard  must  be  always  ready  to  fall 
in  at  the  least  alarm,  with  arms  in  hand. 

644.  If  any  one  is  to  be  passed  out  of  the  camp  at  night,  the  Officer 
of  the  guard  will  send  liim  under  escort  to  the  advanced  post  of  the 
camp,  and  the  officer  or  non-commissioned  officer  on  duty  there  will 
have  him  passed  over  the  chain. 

645.  At  retreat  the  advanced  post  takes  arms.  The  Officers  of 
guards  have  the  rolls  of  their  guards  called  and  inspect  arms,  and 
visit  the  posts  for  the  same  purpose.  A  Sergeant  of  the  guard  folds, 
or  lowers,  the  colors.  The  Sergeant  of  the  Police  Guard  sees  that  the 
sutlers'  stores  are  closed  and  the  men  leave  them,  and  that  the 
kitchen  fires  are  put  out  at  the  appointed  hour. 

646.  After  the  countersign  is  given  to  the  guard,  should  one  of  the 
guard  desert,  or  the  countersign  be  otherwise  lost,  the  Commander 
on  the  spot  will  substitute  another,  notify  his  guard  and  sentinels, 
and  report  the  case  at  once  to  the  proper  superior,  that  notice  may  be 
immediately  transmitted  to  the  other  guards  and  head-quarters. 

647.  At  reveille  the  Camp  Guards  take  arms ;  the  Officers  of 
guards  inspect  them  and  the  several  posts  ;  the  colors  are  replanted 
or  hoisted. 

648.  If  water  is  required  to  be  brought  into  camp  by  the  men,  the 
drummer  of  the  Police  Guard  will  beat  the  necessary  signal,  at  the 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  115 

Camp    Cruards. 

hours  prescribed  for  water  calls,  on  wliicli  a  man  from  eacli  squad 
in  which  water  is  wanted  will  immediately  parade  before  the  tent 
of  the  Police  Guard,  where  the  Officer  of  the  Police  Guard  will  form 
them,  and  send  them  off  under  the  care  of  a  non-commissioned  officer 
of  the  guard,  who  will  be  answerable  for  the  good  order  and  return 
of  the  party.  If  water  is  wanted  at  other  than  the  regular  hours, 
application  will  be  made  to  the  Officer  of  the  day  or  of  the  Police 
Guard,  either  of  whom  may  cause  the  call  to  be  beaten  and  dispatch 
a  party  or  person  for  the  required  supply.  Wood  and  other  neces- 
saries may  be  sent  for  and  brought  into  camp  in  the  same  manner. 
Except  in  case  of  necessity,  not  more  than  one  detachment  is  to  be 
absent  at  a  time. 

649.  Every  such  party,  or  any  person,  sent  for  the  same  purpose, 
not  conducted  by  a  non-commissioned  officer  of  the  guard,  must  have 
the  written  direction  or  permission  of  the  Commandant  of  the  regi- 
ment, or  Olficer  of  the  day  or  of  the  Police  Guard,  without  which  he 
is  not  to  be  permitted  to  pass  the  chain. 

650.  For  convenience,  a  post  may  be  established  in  the  day  time,  and 
continued  until  one  hour  after  retreat,  on  the  flank  or  rear,  for  the 
passage  in  or  out  of  the  camp  of  sutlers  and  camp  attendants,  and 
provisions  and  other  necessaries.  An  officer  or  non-commissioned 
officer  of  the  guard  will  be  in  attendance  at  such  post. 

651.  Passes  may  be  given  to  sutlers  and  camp  attendants  by  the 
Commandants  of  regiments,  brigades,  divisions  and  the  Commandant 
of  the  camp.  The  Commandant  of  the  camp  may  regulate  the 
admission  of  sutlers,  camp  attendants,  and  all  other  persons  to  the 
camp. 

652.  Besides  the  Grand  Guard  and  Police  Guard,  there  shall  be  such 
other  guards  in  camp  as  may  be  necessary  for  protection  of  the  maga- 
zine, supplies,  &c.,  and  for  preservation  of  order  at  the  hospitals. 

653.  In  each  company  of  Cavalry  and  Light  Artillery  there  is  a 
Stable  Guard,  under  the  charge  of  a  corporal.  The  Stable  Guard 
tour  begins  at  retreat,  and  ends  at  morning  stable  call.     The  Stable 


116  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Detail*  for  Duty. 

Guard  should  be  large  enough  to  relieve  the  men  on  post  e-vjery  two 
hours ;  and  the  number  of  posts  will  be  fixed  by  the  Captain.  They 
sleep  in  their  tents  (unless  tents  are  specially  provided  for  the  guard), 
and  are  called  by  the  corporal  when  wanted.  At  retreat,  the  guard 
close  the  company  street  or  streets  with  cords,  or  use  other  precau- 
tions to  prevent  the  escape  of  loose  horses. 

654.  The  number  of  the  officers,  non-commissioned  officers  and  men, 
upon  guard,  may  be  increased  or  diminished  according  to  circum- 
stances ;  but  all  guards,  except  those  which  are  honorary,  should 
ordinarily  be  of  force  proportioned  to  the  number  of  sentinels  required, 
allowing  three  reliefs  to  each  post. 

DETAILS  FOR  DUTY. 

655.  The  duties  performed  by  detail  are  of  three  classes.  Tlie  first 
class  comprises:  1st.  Grand  Guards  and  out  posts;  2d.  Interior 
Guards,  as  of  magazine,  hospitals,  &c. ;  3d.  Orderlies ;  4th.  Police 
Guards.  Detachments  and  working  parties  are  in  the  second  class. 
In  the  third  class  are  all  fatigues  without  arms,  in  or  out  of  camp.  In 
the  Cavalry,  Stable  Guards  form  a  distinct  roster  and  count  before 
fatigue. 

656.  The  rosters  are  distinct  for  each  class  of  duties.  Officers  are 
named  on  them  in  the  order  of  rank,  and  the  details  are  taken  in 
succession,  in  the  order  of  the  roster,  beginning  at  the  head. 

657.  It  will  be  understood  that  the  Commanding  officer  of  the  camp 
may  depart  from  the  order  of  the  roster  in  making  selections  of 
officers  for  duty,  if,  in  his  opinion,  the  circumstances  should  require 
such  departure. 

658.  Commandants  of  regiments,  whether  so  permanently  or  tem- 
porarily, are  exempt  from  detail. 

659.  The  roster  of  Lieutenant-Colonels  and  Majors  is  kept  at 
division  and  brigade  head-quarters.  They  may  be  detailed  for  duties 
of  the  first  and  second  classes  when  the  importance  of  the  guards  and 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  117 

Details  for  Duty. 

detachments  require  it.     If  the  officer  whose  tour  it  would  he  is  Field 
Officer  of  the  day,  his  tour  shall  pass. 

660.  The  Captains  form  one  roster,  and  are  exempt  from  fatigues, 
except  to  superintend  issues.  If  a  Captain  should  be  Officer  of  the 
day,  his  tour  for  any  other  duty  shall  pass.  This  roster  is  kept  at 
brigade  and  regimental  head-quarters. 

661.  LieiTtenants  form  one  roster,  and  First  and  Second  Lieutenants 
are  entered  on  it  alternately  —  the  senior  First  Lieutenant  being  the 
first,  and  the  senior  Second  Lieutenant  the  next,  &c. ;  but  a  requi- 
sition for  officers  of  one  of  these  grades  will  be  answered  by  a  detail 
of  officers  of  the  particular  grade  designated.  The  roster  is  kept  at 
brigade  and  regimental  head- quarters. 

662.  In  the  company.  Sergeants,  Corporals  and  Privates  form  sepa- 
rate rosters  for  service  and  camp,  which  are  kept  at  regimental  head- 
quarters, and  by  the  First  Sergeants  of  companies. 

663.  Officers,  non-commissioned  officers  and  soldiers  take  duties  of 
the  first  class  in  the  order  stated,  viz. :  the  first  for  the  detail,  takes 
the  Grand  Guards ;  the  next,  the  Interior  Guards ;  the  last,  the 
Police  Guard ;  and  the  same  rule  in  regard  to  the  details  and  duties 
of  the  second  class.  In  the  details  for  the  third  class  the  senior  officer 
takes  the  largest  party.  The  partv  first  for  detail  takes  the  service 
out  of  camp. 

664.  When  the  officer,  whose  tour  it  is,  is  not  able  to  take  it,  or  is 
not  present  at  the  hour  of  marching,  the  next  after  him  takes  it. 
When  a  guard  has  passed  the  chain  of  sentinels,  or  an  Interior  Guard 
has  reached  its  post,  the  officer  whose  tour  it  was  cannot  then  take  it. 
He  takes  the  tour  of  the  officer  who  has  taken  his.  When  an  officer 
is  prevented  by  sickness  from  taking  his  tour,  it  passes.  These  rules 
ajjply  equally  to  non-commissioned  officers  and  soldiers. 

665.  Duties  of  the  first  and  second  class  are  credited  on  the  roster 
when  the  guards  or  detachments  have  passed  the  chain  of  sentinels, 
or  an  Interior  Guard  has  reached  its  post ;  fatigue  duties  when  the 
party  has  passed  the  chain  or  begun  the  duties  in  camp. 


118  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Returns  and  Reports. 

QQQ.  Every  officer,  non-commissioned  officer  or  soldier,  on  duty,  of 
the  first  class,  or  who  is  of  the  next  detail  for  such  duty,  takes,  when 
relieved,  the  duty  of  the  second  or  third  class  that  has  fallen  to  him 
during  that  time,  unless  he  has  marched  for  detachment  of  more  than 
twenty-four  hours. 

667.  All  the  foregoing  rules  for  camps  of  instruction  will  apply,  n« 
far  as  they  can  be  made  applicable,  when  no  other  special  direction  is 
given,  to  duty  in  Garrison,  and  to  all  other  services  of  the  troops. 

ARTCLE  XXVII. 

RETURNS    AND    REPORTS. 

668.  The  Commandants  of  regiments  will  make  to  the  Adjutant- 
General,  in  accordance  with  the  blanks  funiished  by  him,  a  yearly 
special  return  of  their  respective  regiments,  on  or  before  the  first 
day  of  May  in  each  year,  setting  forth  the  names  of  the  Field  and 
Staflf  and  Non-Commissioned  Staff  of  their  respective  regiments; 
the  names  of  the  Captains  and  Lieutenants  of  the  flank  companies 
attached  to  the  same ;  the  character  of  the  arm,  whether  of  Light 
Artillery,  Cavalry,  Artillery  or  Rifles ;  also  the  names  of  the  Captains 
and  Lieutenants  of  the  battalion  companies  of  such  regiment,  and 
the  total  number  of  Non-Commissioned  Officers,  Musicians  and  Pri- 
vates of  every  company  of  such  regiment,  under  the  respective  Utter 
of  such  company;  and  the  number  of  Sappers  and  Miners  of  such 
regiment;  also  the  number  and  kind  of  ordnance,  arms,  accoutre- 
ments, musical  instruments  and  colors  owned  by  the  state,  in  posses- 
sion of  each  of  said  companies  respectively,  or  in  possession  of  such 
regiment ;  and  the  number  of  Musicians  attached  to  the  band  thereof. 

669.  To  enable  the  Commandants  of  regiments  to  make  the  special 
return  required  by  the  preceding  section,  the  Commandants  of  com- 
panies shall,  on  or  before  the  first  day  of  April  in  each  year,  in 
accordance  with  the  blanks  furnished  by  tlie  Adjutant-General,  make 
to  the  Regimental  Commandants  a  similar  return  of  their  respective 
companies,  setting  forth  the  letter  of  the  company,  the  names  of  tlie 
Company  Officers,  the  number  of  Non-Commissioned  Officers,  Musi- 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  119 

lieiuma  and  Reports. 

cians  and  Privates,  and  the  number  and  kinds  of  ordnance,  arms, 
musical  instruments,  guidons  and  accoutrements  owned  by  the  state 
and  in  possession  of  such  company. 

670.  The  Inspectors  of  each  brigade  shall,  within  thirty  days  after 
the  annual  inspection  of  their  respective  brigades,  transmit  to  the 
Adjutant-General,  in  accordance  with  the  blanks  furnished  by  him, 
a  return  of  such  inspection.  They  shall  also,  at  the  same  time, 
transmit  to  the  Adjutant-General  a  statement  of  the  number  of  parades^ 
reviews  and  inspections  of  the  several  regiments,  in  their  respective 
brigades,  and  whether  they  were  attended  by  the  Commanding  OflBcer 
of  the  Division,  and  the  Division  Staff,  armed  and  equipped  and 
uniformed  according  to  law  and  regulation,  and  also  by  the  Command- 
ing Officer  of  Brigade,  with  the  Brigade  Staff,  armed  and  equipped 
according  to  law  and  regulation ;  and  may  report  such  other  informa- 
tion as  they  may  deem  calculated  to  enure  to  the  benefit  of  their 
brigades, 

671.  To  enable  the  Inspectors  of  Brigade  to  make  such  annual 
return  and  statement,  the  Commandants  of  companies,  at  the  annual 
inspection,  shall  furnish  the  Brigade  Inspector  with  a  return  in  accord- 
ance with  the  blank  prepared  by  the  Adjutant-General,  which  shall 
show : 

1.  The  number  of  Commissioned,  Non-Commissioned  Officers, 
Musicians  and  Privates  of  their  respective  companies  present  on 
parade,  designating  the  number  of  each. 

2.  The  number  thereof  absent  from  parade. 

3.  The  uniforms,  ordnance,  arms,  musical  instruments,  guidons 
and  equipments  inspected. 

4.  The  number  of  uniforms  belonging  to  such  company. 

5.  The  ordnance,  arms,  musical  instruments,  guidons  and  equip- 
ments in  the  possession  of  such  company. 

672.  The  Commandants  of  regiments  in  each  brigade  also  shall, 
within  twenty  days  after  the  annual  inspection,  furnish  their  respec- 
tive Brigade  Inspectors  with  a  return  of  the  Field  and  Staff  Of&cera, 
and  Non-Commissioned  Staff  Officers,  Musicians  and  Sappers  and 


120  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Return*  and  ReporU. 

Miners  of  their  respective  regiments,  present  and  absent,  armed  and 
equipped  and  uniformed  according  to  law  and  regulation. 

673.  Officers  making  inspections  will  have  special  care  to  return 
all  deviations  from  the  regulations  prescribing  the  uniform. 

674.  In  those  Brigade  Districts  or  any  part  thereof  where  the  enrol- 
ment of  the  ununiformed  Militia  is  required  by  law  to  be  made  by 
tlie  military  authorities,  the  Brigade  Inspectors  thereof  shall,  on  or 
before  the  first  day  of  December  in  each  year,  report  to  the  Adjutant- 
General  tlie  whole  number  of  such  ununiformed  Militia,  enrolled  as 
aforesaid ;  and  to  enable  the  Inspectors  to  make  such  report,  every 
Commanding  Oflicer  of  each  Company  District  where  the  enrolment 
is  so  made  shall,  on  or  before  the  first  day  of  November  in  each  year, 
return  the  whole  number  of  able-bodied  white  male  citizens,  between 
the  ages  of  eighteen  and  forty-five  years,  residing  within  his  district, 
enrolled  in  pursuance  of  law,  to  the  Commandant  of  his  regiment, 
who  shall,  on  or  before  the  tenth  day  of  November  in  each  year,  con- 
solidate such  returns  from  the  various  Company  Commandants  of  his 
regiment,  and  transmit  the  same  to  the  Inspector  of  the  Brigade. 

675.  The  Clerk  of  the  Board  of  Supervisors  of  each  county  in 
which  the  Assessors  shall  make  the  enrolment,  or  any  part  thereof, 
will  be  required  by  the  Adjutant-General,  each  year,  carefully  to 
ascertain,  from  the  corrected  assessment  and  military  rolls,  the  whole 
number  of  persons  enrolled  as  liable  to  perform  military  duty,  includ- 
ing all  members  of  volunteer  companies,  and  all  members  of  fire 
companies;  and  to  report  the  same  to  the  Adjutant-General  ou  cs: 
before  the  first  day  of  December  in  each  year. 

676.  Commanding  Officers  may  at  any  time  require  reports  to  be 
made  to  them,  by  subordinate  officers,  as  to  the  state  of  their  respec- 
tive commands,  the  condition  of  their  arms  and  equipments,  and  of 
all  other  facts  necessary  to  give  them  information  respecting  the  effi- 
ciency of  the  forces  within  their  respective  districts,  or  in  relation  to 
any  other  matter  incident  to  the  command. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  121 

Organization. 
ARTICLE  XXVIII. 

ORGANIZATIOX. 

677.  No  person  who  is  at  the  time  a  member  of  a  military  company- 
will  be  sufFered  to  join  any  other  company;  and  company  officers  are 
strictly  prohibited  from  entering  or  continuing  the  name  of  any  such 
person  upon  the  company  roll,  or  suffering  such  person  to  participate 
in  any  company  meeting,  or  otherwise  in  any  way  to  act  as  a  member 
of  such  other  company. 

678.  No  person  being  a  member  of  any  military  company  shall  be 
permitted  to  parade  or  drill  with  any  other  company,  without  the 
consent  of  his  Captain ;  and  if  such  other  company  shall  belong  to  a 
different  regiment,  without  permission,  also,  of  his  Colonel. 

679.  No  officer  shall  accept  or  retain  as  a  member  of  his  com- 
pany or  regiment,  brigade  or  division,  or  suffer  to  parade  or  drill 
with  his  company  or  regiment,  brigade  or  dirision,  any  person  who 
is  not  a  citizen  of  the  United  States,  and  a  resident  of  his  military 
district,  city  or  village,  and  who  is  not  permitted  by  the  provisions  of 
law  to  join  or  be  retained  as  such  member. 

680.  Commandants  of  regiments  and  companies  are  required  to 
strike  from  their  rolls  the  names  of  all  persons  who  have  been 
received  or  retained  as  members  of  such  regiments  or  companies 
contrary  to  the  provisions  of  law  and  of  these  regulations ;  and  they 
are  strictly  forbidden  to  grant  to  any  such  person  a  certificate  of 
service,  or  of  exemption  or  discharge  from  military  service. 

681.  No  certificate  of  service  or  of  exemption  for  service  shall  be 
issued  to  any  honorary  member  of  any  company,  or  to  any  person 
who  does  not  do  active  duty  as  a  regular  member  of  the  company ; 
nor  shall  any  commutation  or  payment  of  any  sum  of  money  by 
any  such  person,  for  any  purpose  whatever,  be  received  in  lieu  of 
actual  duty,  except  as  allowed  by  law. 

682.  No  person  shall  be  considered  a  member  of  a  company,  who 
does  not  enlist  for  actual  service  therein,  and  whose  name  is  not  duly 
entered  on  the  rolls  as  such,  and  who  may  not  be  duly  returned,  for 

Military.  11 


122  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Organization. 

absence  from  drills  and  parades  required  by  law,  to  the  proper  court- 
martial  or  court  of  appeals. 

683.  No  certificate  of  service  or  exemption,  or  discharge  fVom 
military  duty,  shall  be  issued  to  any  person  for  or  by  reason  of  ser- 
vice in  any  office  or  station  not  created  by  law,  and  all  officers  are 
prohibited  from  issuing  such  certificates. 

684.  No  person  shall  be  appointed  or  elected  to  any  office  not  created 
by  law,  in  the  military  forces  of  the  state. 

685.  Transfers  of  men  from  one  company  to  another  in  the  same 
regiment  can  only  be  made,  by  the  Commander  of  the  regiment, 
upon  the  written  consents  of  the  Commandants  of  both  companies. 

686.  Discharges  of  non-commissiored  officers,  musicians  and  pri- 
vates from  a  regiment,  can  only  be  made  by  the  Colonel  or  permanent 
Commander  in  accordance  with  forms  to  be  transmitted  from  the 
Adjutant-General's  Department. 

687.  Transfers  of  companies  and  regiments  are  made  only  by  order 
of  the  Commander-in-Chief.  Such  transfers  will  carry  with  them  all 
commissioned  officers  as  well  as  non-commissioned  officers  and  men ; 
but  where  the  transfer  is  from  one  regiment  to  another,  new  com- 
missions in  the  regiment  to  which  the  transfer  is  made  will  be  issued 
to  all  commissioned  officers  with  the  same  rank  which  they  held  in 
the  regiment  from  which  they  were  transferred. 

688.  Any  person  holding  a  military  office,  who  shall  accept  any 
other  military  office  to  which  he  shall  be  legally  appointed  or  elected, 
shall  be  deemed  to  have  vacated  the  office  held  by  him  at  the  time 
of  such  acceptance. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  123 

ElecUona. 

»-—  .  -  —  ■ 

ARTICLE  XXIX. 

ELECTIONS. 

689.  No  election  for  officers  shall  be  held  on  Sunday,  nor  on  days 
appointed  by  law  for  any  general,  state  or  town  election,  nor  on 
days  appointed  for  company  or  regimental  drills  or  parades. 

690.  Arms  shall  not  be  worn  at  elections  for  officers. 

691.  All  returns  for  commissions  shall  be  made  by  the  Commanding 
Officers  of  divisions  or  brigades  to  the  Adjutant-General ;  and  in  case 
of  elections,  such  returns  shall  be  made  as  soon  as  practicable  after 
the  expiration  of  ten  days  from  the  day  of  election,  or  the  final 
decision  of  the  appeal,  where  any  has  been  made ;  and  such  returns 
shall  be  printed,  or  written  at  full  length  and  in  a  plain  and  legible 
hand,  specifying  name  and  residence  and  cause  of  vacancy,  and  the 
the  date  of  election,  and  the  letter  of  the  company,  if  a  company 
officer. 

692.  Commandants  of  brigades  will  not  approve  of  the  election  to 
a  military  office  of  any  person  who  is  ineligible,  whether  the  pro- 
ceedings at  such  election  have  been  appealed  from  or  not.  The 
election  or  appointment  of  an  ineligible  person  is  entirely  void,  and 
he  is  not  entitled  to  be  commissioned.  An  appeal  lies  to  the  Com- 
mander-in-Chief, from  the  approval  or  disapproval  of  the  Brigadier- 
General,  as  to  the  eligibility  of  any  person  claiming  to  be  elected. 

693.  To  be  eligible  to  election  or  appointment  to  office  in  the 
military  forces  of  this  state,  the  person  must  be  a  white  male  citizen  of 
the  United  States,  of  the  age  of  eighteen  years  or  upwards,  and  a  resi- 
dent of  the  proper  military  district,  city  or  village,  agreeably  to  law. 
No  person  is  eligible  to  military  office  who  is  under  a  sentence  of  dis- 
ability or  incapacity  to  hold  office  or  command,  or  of  suspension  from 
command,  in  the  Military  forces  of  the  state. 


124  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Appeals. 

ARTICLE  XXX. 

APPEALS. 

694.  AH  appeals  froia  election,  or  otherwise,  shall  be  in  writing, 
subscribed  by  the  person  appealing,  and  shall  brieflj  set  forth  the 
grounds  of  appeal.  On  appeals  to  the  Commander-in-Chief,  state- 
ments of  fact  and  arguments  connected  with  the  appeals  will  also  be 
submitted  in  writing. 

695.  Every  appeal  to  the  Commander-in-Chief,  from  the  election 
of  a  Brigadier-General,  shall  be  made  within  twenty  days  after  said 
election ;  and  a  copy  thereof  shall  be  served  on  the  oflScer  presiding 
at  such  election,  and  on  the  person  declared  elected,  within  ten  days 
after  such  election. 

696.  Every  appeal  from  the  proceedings  at  any  election,  other  than 
that  of  a  Brigadier-General,  shall  be  made  to  the  Commanding  Officer 
of  the  brigade,  and  a  copy  thereof  served  on  the  officer  who  presided 
at  the  election,  and  on  the  person  declared  elected,  within  ten  days 
after  the  day  of  holding  such  election ;  and  the  Commanding  Officer  of 
brigade,  on  receiving  such  appeal,  shall  forthwith  issue  his  orders, 
appointing  the  time  and  place  for  the  hearing  thereof,  which  time 
shall  not  extend  beyond  fifteen  days  after  the  issuing  of  such  order  j 
and  within  four  days  after  the  hearing  the  appeal  shall  determine 
the  same. 

697.  The  Commanding  Officer  of  any  brigade,  after  having  heard 
and  determined  any  appeal,  shall  immediately  make  the  same  known 
by  an  order  to  be  by  liim  issued,  a  copy  of  which  said  order  shall  be 
forwarded  to  the  person  appealing,  to  the  officer  who  presided  at  the 
election,  and  to  the  person  who  was  declared  elected. 

698.  Every  appeal  to  the  Commander-in-Chief,  from  the  decision 
of  the  Commanding  Officer  of  a  brigade,  upon  any  appeal  from  an 
election,  sliall  Ix;  made  within  twenty  days  after  the  decision  appealed 
from  is  uuule  known  to  the  person  appealing,  and  a  copy  of  the  appeal 
shall  be  served,  by  the  person  appealing,  on  the  officer  making  the 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  125 

Offices  Vacated  hy  Beniaval. 

decision,  and  on  the  adverse  party,  witliin  ten  days  after  such  order 
appealed  from  shall  have  been  received  by  him. 

699.  Persons  whose  elections  shall  be  appealed  from  shall  be 
allowed  ten  days,  after  the  final  determination  of  the  appeal,  in  which 
to  signify  their  acceptance ;  and  no  new  election  shall  be  ordered, 
after  the  decision  of  any  api)eal  by  the  Commanding  Officer  of  brigade, 
until  the  time  for  an  appeal  to  the  Commander-in-Chief  shall  have 
expired,  or  until  ten  days  after  such  appeal,  if  made,  shall  have  been 
finally  determined. 

700.  No  appeal  from  the  proceedings  of  any  election  for  Commis- 
sioned Officers  shall  be  allowed,  unless  the  person  making  the  same 
shall  have  been  qualified  to  vote  at  such  election,  or  shall  have  been 
voted  for  as  a  candidate  thereat. 

701.  On  appeals  from  the  proceedings  or  sentence  of  any  court 
martial,  the  appellant  shall  serve  a  copy  of  his  appeal  upon  the  Judge- 
Advocate,  within  five  days  after  the  making  of  such  appeal.  He 
shall,  also,  within  the  same  time,  serve  a  written  notice  of  his  appeal 
upon  the  President  of  the  court,  and  upon  the  prosecutor,  if  there  be 
one.  In  order  that  an  appeal  shall  be  operative,  a  copy  and  notice 
must  be  served  as  above  provided.  No  appeal  will  be  entertained 
at  general  Head-Quarters  unless  upon  proof  of  the  service  herein 
required.  The  Judge- Advocate,  if  he  deem  it  advisable,  may,  within 
ten  days  after  the  required  service,  reply  to  the  appeal,  {See  par.  225  ) 

ARTICLE  XXXI 

OFFICES    VACATED    BY    REMOVAL, 

702.  Commissioned  Officers  will  be  considered  as  having  removed 
out  of  the  bounds  of  their  commands  and  vacated  their  oflSces  ( unless 
otherwise  provided  by  law),  under  the  following  circumstances,  viz  : 
Major-Generals  and  their  Staffs,  on  removing  beyond  the  bounds  of 
their  respective  divisions ;  Brigadier-Generals  and  their  Staffs,  on  re- 
movmg  beyond  the  bounds  of  their  brigades ;  Field  Officers  and 
Regimental  Staff,  on  removing  beyond  the  bounds  of  their  regiment ; 

Military.  11* 


126  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Boards  of  Auditors. 

Company  OflScers,  on  removing  beyond  the  bounds  of  their  company, 
except  when  tlie  company  is  made  up  from  the  different  districts,  and 
then,  upon  removing  from  the  regimental  district.  It  is  the  duty  of 
officers  charged  with  ordering  elections  and  making  appointments  to 
attend  promptly  to  the  filling  of  any  vacancies  occasioned  by  such 
removals.  The  removal  here  contemplated  is  a  permanent  change  of 
residence.  {See  ^'- Miscellaneous"  at  end  of  volume.) 

ARTICLE  XXXII. 

BOARDS    OF    AUDITORS. 

703.  The  Colonel  of  each  regiment  shall  be  the  Secretary  of  the 
Board  of  Auditors  of  the  regimental  district,  whereof  Commandants 
of  brigades  are  the  Presidents,  unless  the  Board  shall  designate 
some  other  member.  In  other  regimental  districts  the  Lieutenant- 
Colonel  shall  be  the  Secretary  of  the  Board.  It  shall  be  the  duty 
of  such  Secretary  to  enter  at  large,  in  the  book  to  be  kept  by  tlie 
Commandants  of  regiments  for  that  purpose,  the  proceedings  of  each 
meeting  of  said  Board,  and  note  the  action  taken  upon  each  account, 
or  claim  presented  thereat,  and  enter  in  such  book,  item  by  item,  said 
account  or  claim,  and  the  disposition  made  thereof.  If  the  Secre- 
tary be  absent  from  any  such  meeting,  the  officer  next  in  rank  present 
shall  act  as  such  Secretary. 

704.  Such  book  shall  be  open  at  all  reasonable  times  for  inspection 
by  the  Brigadier-General,  Oflicers  of  the  regiment,  and  the  Inspecting 
Officers. 

705.  Timely  notice  of  the  meetings  of  the  Board  shall  be  given  to 
all  the  members  thereof. 

706.  Warrants  issued  by  such  Boards  for  the  payment  of  money 
shall  be  signed,  where  Commandants  of  brigades  are  the  Presidents 
of  such  Boards,  by  the  majority  of  the  members  prcsant  at  any  meet- 
ing thereof  at  which  the  account  was  audited,  and  countersigned  by 
the  Commandniit  of  the  brigade,  and  in  cases  where  the  Colonels  are 
Presidents  of  such  Boards,  by  the  President  and  Secretary  thereof,  and 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  127 

Arsenals,  Armories^  Arms,  dta. 

shall  specify  upon  tlieir  face  the  nature  of  the  account  for  the  payment 
of  which  they  are  drawn,  and  he  made  payable  to  the  order  of  the 
person  to  whom  the  money  is  due,  or  to  some  person  authorized  to 
receive  the  same.  The  Secretary  of  the  Board  shall  keep  and  file  the 
several  accounts  so  passed. 

707.  No  account  shall  be  audited  or  allowed  by  any  Board  of 
Auditors  unless  the  particular  items  are  given,  and  it  is  duly  verified 
by  affidavit,  in  the  form  prescribed  by  law  for  accounts  presented  to 
Boards  of  Supervisors. 

708.  Before  the  first  day  of  December,  in  each  year,  the  President 
of  each  of  said  Boards  shall  transmit  to  the  Adjutant- General  a 
statement,  subscribed  by  him,  of  the  amount  of  moneys  received 
in  the  regimental  district  for  commutations  and  fines,  and  the 
amount  expended  in  said  regiment,  stating  specifically  the  amount  of 
each  account  or  claim  audited  by  the  Board,  and  when  such  account 
was  audited,  and  to  whom,  and  the  nature  thereof. 

709.  On  or  before  the  first  days  of  May  and  January,  in  each  year, 
the  Commandants  of  each  brigade  district,  excepting  those  included 
within  the  first  division  district,  shall  transmit  to  the  Adjutant- Gene- 
ral's department  the  report  of  the  various  county  treasurers,  required 
to  be  made  to  them  in  pursuance  of  §  40  of  art.  3  of  tit.  5  of  Militia 
Laws. 

ARTICLE  XXXIIL 

ARSENALS,    ARMORIES,    ARMS,    ETC. 

710.  The  term  "  armory  "  will  be  understood  to  apply  to  any  place 
where  the  arms  or  military  property  of  this  state,  issued  to  troops, 
are  kept  by  authority  of  law,  when  not  in  the  immediate  use  of  the 
troops. 

711.  The  Commandant  of  each  regiment  and  company  will  see  that 
there  is  kept  in  the  armory  of  his  regiment  or  company,  affixed  in  a 
conspicuous  position,  a  correct  written  statement  of  all  the  arms, 
equipments  and  property  of  the  state  which  have  been  issued  to  the 
regiment  or  company. 


128  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Flags,  Oolon,  Standards,  Guidons  —  NaMotml  Flag. 

712.  A  like  statement  will  be  kept,  in  each,  arsenal  of  the  state,  of 
all  the  arms,  equipments  and  military  property  therein,  to  be  entered 
in  a  book  to  be  provided  for  that  purpose,  and  to  be  corrected  from 
time  to  time,  so  as  always  to  show  a  true  account  of  such  arms,  &c., 
by  the  keeper  of  such  arsenal. 

713.  Such  statements  will  l>e  subscribed  by  the  Commandant  of  the 
regiment  or  company,  or  the  keeper  of  such  arsenal  ( as  the  case  may 
be),  and  will  be  exhibited  upon  the  requisition  of  any  Inspecting 
Officer,  or  other  officer  or  person  authorized  to  examine  such  armory  or 
arsenal,  together  with  the  arms,  equipments  and  property  deposited 
in  such  armory  or  arsenal. 

714.  The  keepers  of  all  arsenals  and  armories  are  expressly  forbidden 
to  loan  or  hire  out  any  arms  or  property  of  the  state,  deposited  therein 
or  in  their  custody,  to  any  person  whatever ;  or  to  suffer  such  arms 
to  be  taken  from  the  arsenal  or  armory  except  by  the  order  of  the 
proper  officer. 

715.  All  officers  are  prohibited  from  loaning  to  or  suffering  to  be 
used  by  any  i)erson,  not  belonging  to  their  commands,  any  arms, 
ammunition  or  equipments  furnished  by  the  state  for  the  use  of  the 
military  forces. 

716.  The  keepers  of  the  several  arsenals,  and  the  armorers  or 
keepers  of  all  armories,  will  observe  the  directions  contained  in  these 
regulations  ( see  article  Companies )  for  the  keeping,  preservation  and 
cleaning  of  ordnance,  arms  and  equipments,  and  the  care  of  ammu- 
nition. 

ARTICLE  XXXIV. 

FLAGS,    COLORS,    STANDARDS,    GUIDONS NATIONAL    FLAG. 

717.  The  national  flag  is  made  of  bunting,  thirty-six  feet  fly,  and 
twenty  feet  hoist,  in  thirteen  horizontal  stripes  of  equal  breadth, 
alternately  red  and  white,  beginning  with  the  red.  In  the  upper 
quarter,  next  the  staff,  is  the  Union  composed  of  a  number  of  white 
stars,  equal  to  the  number  of  States,  on  a  blue  field,  one-third  the 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  129 

Colors  of  Artillery,  Infantry  and  Rifle  Regiments  —  Camp  Colors, 

length  of  the  flag,  extending  to  the  lower  edge  of  the  fourth  red  stripe 
from  the  top.  The  storm  flag  is  twenty  feet  hy  ten  feet.  The  state 
flag  is  made  of  white  bunting,  twelve  feet  fly  by  ten  feet  hoist, 
bearing  in  the  centre  the  arms  of  the  State  of  New- York. 

COLORS   OF    ARTILLERY    REGIMENTS. 

718.  Each  regiment  of  Artillery  shall  have  two  colors.  The  first,  or 
the  national  color,  of  stars  and  stripes,  as  described  for  the  national 
flag,  and  may  be  either  of  silk  or  bunting,  with  red  cord  and  tassels. 
The  second  or  regimental  color,  to  be  of  yellow  silk,  with  the  arms 
of  the  State  of  New- York  embroidered  in  silk  on  the  centre,  over  two 
cannon  crossing,  with  the  number  of  the  regiment  above  and  the 
letters  N.  Y.  S.  M.  below  their  intersection.  The  cannons  regimental 
number  and  letters  to  be  in  gold  embroidery,  fringe  gold  or  yellow 
silk  four  inches  deep.  Each  color  to  be  six  feet  six  inches  fly,  and  six 
feet  deep  on  the  pike.  The  pike,  including  the  eagle  and  ferule,  to 
be  nine  feet  ten  inches  in  length.  Cords  and  tassels,  red  and  yellow 
silk  intermixed. 

COLORS    OF    INFANTRY    AND    RIFLE    REGIMENTS. 

719.  Each  regiment  of  infantry  or  rifles  shall  have  two  colors. 
The  first,  or  the  national  color,  of  stars  and  stripes,  as  described  for 
the  national  flag,  and  may  be  either  of  silk  or  bunting,  with  red  cord 
and  tassels.  The  second,  or  regimental  color,  to  be  of  blue  silk,  with 
the  arms  of  the  State  of  New-Nork  embroidered  in  silk  on  the  centre. 
The  number  and  name  of  the  regiment,  and  the  letters  N,  Y.  S.  M.,  in 
gold  embroidery  underneath  the  arms.  The  size  of  each  color  to  be  six 
feet  six  inches  fly,  and  six  feet  deep  on  the  pike.  The  length  of  the 
pike,  including  the  eagle  and  ferule,  to  be  nine  feet  ten  inches.  The 
fringe  gold  or  yellow  silk,  four  inches  deep ;  cord  and  tassels,  blue 
and  white  silk  intermixed. 

CAMP    COLORS. 

720.  The  camp  colors  are  of  silk  or  bunting,  eighteen  inches  square ; 
white  for  infantry  or  rifles,  and  red  for  artillery,  with  the  number  of 
the  regiment  on  them.     The  pole  eight  feet  long. 


130  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 


General  Officert. 


STANDARDS  AND  GUIDONS  OF  MOUNTED  REGIMENTS. 

721.  Each  regiment  will  have  a  silken  standard,  and  each  company 
a  silken  guidon.  The  standard  to  bear  the  arms  of  the  State  of  New- 
York,  embroidered  in  silk  on  a  blue  ground,  with  the  number  and 
name  of  the  regiment,  and  the  letters  N.  Y.  S.  M.  in  gold  embroidery 
underneath  the  arms.  The  flag  of  the  standard  to  be  two  feet  five 
inches  wide,  and  two  feet  three  inches  on  the  lance,  and  to  be  edged 
with  gold  or  yellow  silk  fringe. 

722.  The  flag  of  the  guidon  is  swallow-tailed,  three  feet  five  inches 
from  the  lance  to  the  end  of  the  swallow-tail ;  fifteen  inches  to  the  fork 
of  the  swallow-tail,  and  two  feet  three  inches  on  the  lance.  To  be  half 
red  and  half  white,  dividing  at  the  fork,  the  red  above.  On  the  red, 
the  letters  N.  Y.  S.  M.  in  white;  and  on  the  white,  the  letter  of  the 
company  in  red.  The  lance  of  the  standards  and  guidons  to  be  nine 
feet  long,  including  spear  and  ferule. 

723.  Every  pike-pole  or  staff  to  which  the  flags,  standards,  guidons 
or  colors  above  provided  are  to  be  attached,  will  be  surmounted  with 
a  gilt  eagle. 

ARTICLE  XXXV. 

GENERAL  OFFICERS. 

724.  To  the  General  Officers  entrusted  with  the  command  of  divi- 
sions and  brigades,  the  Commander-in-Chief  will  look,  not  only  for 
the  discipline  of  the  uniformed  forces  therein,  and  their  constant 
preparation  for  active  service,  but  likewise,  in  case  of  insurrection, 
invasion,  call  in  aid  of  the  civil  authorities,  or  other  emergency,  for 
the  immediate  and  most  advantageous  disposal  of  every  force  placed 
under  their  control 

726.  With  a  view  to  these  objects,  it  is  necessary  that  officers  in 
these  important  commands  should  be  well  instructed  in  their  duties, 
and  that  they  should  carefully  select  comi>etent  Staff  Officers  to  aid 
them  in  the  staff  departments  and  upon  the  field. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  131 

Oeneral  Officers. 

726.  General  Officers  in  command  will  be  expected  to  render  them- 
selves competent  to  manoeuvre  their  commands  in  the  evolutions  of 
the  Line,  and  to  instruct  their  officers  in  the  duties  of  their  stations 
and  the  tactics  of  the  arm  to  which  they  belong.  They  will  also  be 
expected  to  understand  the  details  of  duty  in  camp  and  on  marches, 
and  the  method  of  handling  troops  in  the  field,  so  as  to  develop  the 
highest  efficiency  of  the  various  arms. 

727.  As  part  of  their  duty,  they  will  make  themselves  acquainted 
with  the  force  and  range  of  artillery  and  small  arms,  the  principles 
applicable  to  the  construction  of  field  fortifications  and  defensive 
works,  the  composition  and  duties  of  guards,  outposts,  pickets  and 
light  troops,  and  the  quantity  of  military  stores  required  for  the  use 
of  the  troops  when  on  duty. 

728.  Officers  in  command  of  division  and  brigade  districts  will  also 
keep  themselves  well  informed  of  the  number  and  description  of  the 
uniformed  forces  of  the  militia  in  their  respective  districts,  so  as  to 
be  able  to  afford  to  the  Commander-in-Chief  promptly,  at  any  time,  a 
correct  statement  of  the  strength,  discipline,  equipment  and  prepara- 
tion for  immediate  service,  of  any  corps  in  their  command. 

729.  General  Officers,  in  command  of  districts  on  the  frontiers  and 
sea  coast,  will  also  obtain  an  accurate  military  knowledge  of  the 
features  of  the  country  in  their  respective  districts ;  of  its  means  of 
defence  and  assailable  points;  of  all  fortified  places  therein,  and 
positions  which  may  be  advantageously  fortified  or  strengthened; 
and  of  every  particular  which  may  increase  the  power  of  acting 
against  an  enemy. 

730.  Brigadier-Generals,  on  disbanding  any  company  in  their 
respective  brigades,  will  report  the  fact  to  the  Adjutant-General's 
office,  specifying  in  such  report  the  letter  of  the  company  and  the 
number  of  the  regiment,  and  the  names  of  the  officers  of  such 
company. 

731.  Commandants  of  brigades,  before  they  approve  of  the  organi- 
zation of  companies,  will  cause  them  to  be  inspected  and  mustered 


132  GENERAL  REGULATIOXS 


GenercU  Staff. 


by  the  Brigade  Inspector  of  the  brigade,  or  other  oflBcer  to  be  desig- 
nated by  the  Brigadier-General.  The  muster  roll  will  show  the  age, 
residence  and  nativity  of  each  volunteer,  and  whether  he  is  a  citizen 
or  belongs  to  any  other  military  organization-  Such  muster  roll  will 
be  appended  to  the  application  for  organization,  and  transmitted  to 
the  Adjutant-General. 

732.  General  Officers  in  command  will  transmit  to  the  Adjutant- 
General  copies  of  all  general  orders,  issued  by  them  respectively, 
within  five  days  after  such  issue.     {See  paragraph  474.) 

733.  Notice  of  all  encampments  for  instruction  and  annual  parades, 
by  brigade  or  regiment,  of  the  uniformed  military  forces  of  the  state, 
shall  be  given  by  the  officer  ordering  the  same  to  the  Commandant 
of  the  division,  at  least  fifteen  days  prior  to  such  encampment  or 
parade. 

ARTICLE  XXXVI. 

GENERAL    STAFF. 

734.  The  General  Staff  comprises  all  the  officers  concerned  in  regu- 
lating the  details  of  the  service  and  furnishing  the  forces  with  tho 
means  necessary  for  their  subsistence,  comfort,  mobility  and  action. 
These  officers  act  in  the  name  of  tho  Commanders  under  whom  they 
are  placed,  or  perform  their  functions  according  to  the  rules  and 
regulations  for  the  government  of  their  respective  departments. 

735.  The  General  Staff  is : 

1.  The  Adjutant-General's  Department. 

2.  The  Inspector-General. 

3.  The  Commissary-General's  Department. 

4.  The  Department  of  Engineers. 

B,  The  Judge- Advocate's  Department. 

6.  The  Medical  Department. 

7.  The  Quartermaster's  Department. 

8.  The  Pay  Department. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  133 


Theory  of  the  Staff — Summary  of  its  Duties. 


THEORY  OF  THE  STAFF SUMMARY  OF  ITS  DUTIES. 

736.  The  General  Staff  may  be  considered  the  central  point  of 
military  administration. 

737.  It  is  the  source  whence  proceed  all  general  orders  for  the 
forces,  the  orders  of  detail,  of  instruction,  of  movement;  and  whence 
issue  the  general  regulations  for  the  service. 

738.  The  source  likewise  of  all  general  measures  relative  to  the 
construction  of  fortifications. 

739.  For  providing  and  distributing  all  ttie  various  articles  under 
the  denomination  of  ordnance,  ordnance  stores,  small  arms  and  mill, 
tary  equipments. 

740.  For  providing  medical  supplies. 

741.  For  the  supply  of  quarters,  of  fuel,  and  the  transportation 
required  for  the  forces ;  and  finally 

742.  For  all  supplies  requisite  for  the  use  of  the  military  service 
and  the  land  defence. 

743.  The  officers  of  the  General  Staff  accordingly  embrace  that 
Class  of  commissioned  officers  who  are  appointed  to  perform  such 
duties  pursuant  to  the  laws  and  regulations  governing  the  military 
service,  and  devolving  on  each  respectively  according  to  their  rank 
and  the  nature  of  their  appointments. 

744.  Staff  Officers,  as  such,  are  the  organs  through  which  their 
respective  Commanders  or  Chiefs  communicate  orders  and  instruc- 
tions, either  verbally  or  in  writing;  and  a  Staff  Officer  will  add  " by 
order  of,"  or  "  by  command  of,"  such  a  one,  or  premise  "  I  am  com- 
manded or  instructed  by,"  &c.  These  forms  may  be  dispensed  with 
if  the  person  to  whom  the  order  is  addressed  be  junior  to  the  Staff 
Officer,  and  always  in  mere  matters  of  course,  as  on  parades.  This 
paragraph  is  applicable  to  Chiefs  of  Staffs  and  to  their  assistants,  also 
%o  Aids-de-Camp  and  Adjutants.     The  ofl&cers  of  the  administrative  or 

Military.  12 


134  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Theory  cf  the  Sinff —  Summary  of  tig  Dutiea. 

disbursing  departments  of  the  Staff,  as  such,  are  not  contemplated 
by  it. 

745.  The  duties  of  a  Chief  of  Staff,  including  always  his  assistants, 
whatever  may  be  the  corps  to  which  he  is  attached,  are  active  and 
sedentary. 

746.  Active  duties  consist  principally  in  establishing  camps,  visiting 
guards  and  posts,  inspecting  troops,  inspecting  guards  and  detach- 
ments, forming  parades  and  lines  of  battle,  the  conduct  or  control  of 
deserters  and  prisoners  (from  the  enemy),  making  reconnoissances, 
and  in  general  the  performance  of  such  other  active  duties  as  may 
be  specially  assigned. 

747.  Sedentary  duties,  or  the  business  of  the  bureau,  as  pub- 
lishing orders  in  writing,  making  up  written  instructions  and  the 
transmission  of  them,  reception  of  reports  and  returns,  disposing  of 
them,  forming  tables  showing  the  state  and  position  of  the  corps  or 
its  several  parts,  regulating  details  of  service,  corresponding  with  the 
corps,  detachments,  or  individual  officers  serving  under  the  orders 
of  the  same  Commander,  corresponding  with  the  administrative  or 
disbursing  departments  relative  to  the  wants  of  the  troops,  and  finally, 
the  methodical  arrangement  and  care  of  the  records  and  papers  of 
his  office. 

748.  A  Staff  Officer,  charged  with  a  particular  expedition  or  recon- 
noissance,  accompanied  by  a  detachment,  the  Commandant  of  which 
may  or  may  not  be  his  superior,  will,  without  assuming  the  command, 
have  a  right  to  require  that  the  latter  should  make  all  proper  dis- 
positions of  the  detachment  to  protect  hira  in  his  opemtions ;  and  the 
Commandant  of  the  detachment  shall  refer  to  the  Staff  Officer  for  the 
route  of  march  and  the  periods  of  halting  and  of  marching,  no  matter 
which  of  them  be  the  superior. 

749.  All  Staff  Officers  draw  their  swords  and  salute  at  review,  both 
when  the  battalion  is  brought  to  a  present,  and  when  passing  the 
Koviewing  Officer. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  135 

Theory  of  the  Staff— Summary  of  its  Duties. 

750.  StafF  Officers,  when  not  otherwise  engaged  in  the  duties  of 
their  departments,  will  attend  dress  parade  and  take  post  and  salute 
as  at  review  with  the  exception  of  the  Adjutant  whose  post  is  already- 
assigned. 

751.  In  columns  of  manoeuvre  and  en  route,  the  Adjutant  is  the 
only  officer  of  the  regimental  staff,  and  the  officers  acting  as  Assist- 
ant Adjutants-General,  and  the  Aides-de-Camp,  are  the  only  officers 
of  the  division  and  brigade  staffs  who  draw  their  swords. 

752.  With  the  exception  of  the  Adjutant,  whose  place  is  prescribed, 
the  StafF  Officers  of  a  division,  brigade  or  regiment  in  column,  en 
route,  are  near  their  respective  Commanders,  unless  their  duties 
should  require  their  attendance  elsewhere ;  Medical  officers  may  be 
required  with  the  sick  or  their  supplies ;  Officers  of  Engineers  with 
their  corps,  and  of  the  Quartermaster's  department  with  their  trains. 
The  senior  StafF  Officers  in  each  department  should  be  habitually 
Avith  the  Commander  of  a  column  en  route,  or  of  manoeuvre. 

753.  In  a  column  of  manoeuvre  for  instruction,  StafF  Officers,  when 
required,  will  act  as  aids  and  assistants  in  the  manoeuvres ;  and  when 
not  so  required,  will  accompany  their  respective  Commanders,  or  take 
such  other  positions  as  may  be  assigned  them. 

754.  StafF  Officers,  on  parades  in  the  streets  of  a  city  or  town  and 
other  occasions  of  ceremony,  where  no  other  position  is  assigned  to 
them,  will  take  post  according  to  the  order  of  precedence  of  their 
departments ;  division  and  brigade  staffs,  in  one  or  more  ranks,  two 
paces  in  rear  of  their  Generals ;  the  aids  de-camp  on  the  left  of  the 
front  rank;  regimental  staffs  (with  the  exception  of  the  Adjutant 
and  Engineer),  in  the  rear  of  the  regiment,  in  one  rank,  the  chaplain 
on  the  left ;  the  Engineer  officer  will  be  in  charge  of  his  corps. 

755.  The  Staff  Officers  of  divisions,  brigades  and  regiments, 
although  arranged  in  departments  and  liable  to  be  detached  for  duty 
in  such  departments,  are  considered  as  officers  of  their  respective 
divisions,  brigades  and  regiments.  Regimental  Staff  Officers  arp 
therefore  entitled  to  vote  at  elections  for  field  officers  c/  regimen*is. 


136  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Adjutant'General*«  Department  —  Adjtitant-Oeneral. 
ARTICLE  XXXVIL 

THE    adjutant-general's    DEPARTMENT. 

1.  Adjutant- General. 

756.  The  Adjutant-General  is  the  Cliief  of  the  Staff  of  the  Com- 
mander-in-Chief. 

757.  He  accompanies  the  Commander-in-Chief  in  all  his  reviews 
and  inspections.  Everything  relating  to  the  effective  state  of  the 
troops,  to  formation,  instruction  and  discipline,  and  to  ordinary  or 
extraordinary  and  official  returns  relative  to  these  different  matters, 
falls  within  the  department  over  which  the  Adjutant-General  presides. 

758.  He  is  the  regular  channel  through  which  Commanders  of  corps 
and  Chiefs  of  departments  communicate  with  the  Commander-in- 
Chief  ;  and  all  orders,  special  instructions  and  general  regulations, 
issued  by  the  Commander-in-Chief  relative  to  the  organization, 
discipline  or  instruction  of  the  militia,  are  prepared,  addressed  to  the 
Commanders  of  corps,  and  published  by  the  Adjutant- General 
conformably  to  the  direction  of  the  Commander-in-Cliief. 

759.  It  is  the  duty  of  the  Adjutant-General,  on  or  before  the  fifteenth 
day  of  January  in  each  year,  to  report  in  writing,  to  the  Commander- 
in-Chief,  the  state  of  the  militia,  as  to  its  strength  in  officers,  non- 
commissioned officers,  musicians  and  privates ;  the  number  of 
companies,  regiments,  brigades  and  divisions  of  the  same,  and  the 
total  strengtli  of  each ;  and  the  strength  of  eacli  arm,  as  organized ; 
and  also  so  as  to  show  whether  each  corps  is  doing  duty  in  the  arm 
in  which  it  is  organized.  He  will  report,  also,  the  number,  character 
and  quality  of  the  arms,  accoutrements  and  other  property  of  the  state 
in  the  possession  of  tlie  militia,  describing  the  same  under  the  head 
of  the  respective  division,  brigade,  regiment  and  company. 

760.  He  shall  also  report,  in  connection  therewith,  the  amount  of 
commutation  tax  and  fines  collected  in  each  regimental  district  of 
the  state,  and  how  the  same  has  been  expended,  as  shall  appear  from 
the  returns  of  the  Regimental  Boards  of  Auditors  and  from  the  reports 
of  the  Treasurers  of  the  various  counties  of  the  state ;  and  may  make, 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  137 

Adjutant-OeneraPs  Department — Adjutant'General. 

generally,  such  recommendations  and  suggestions  as  lie  may  deem 
calculated  to  enure  to  the  benefit  of  the  service. 

761.  It  is  the  duty  of  the  Adjutant-General,  under  the  laws  of  the 
United  States,  to  make  a  return  of  the  militia,  uniformed  and  ununi- 
formed,  and  of  their  arms  and  equipments,  to  the  President  of  the 
United  States  on  or  before  the  first  Monday  of  January  in  each  year. 

762.  The  Adjutant-General  is  charged  with  the  duty  of  prescribing 
the  annual  course  of  military  instruction  for  the  military  forces  of  the 
state,  and  supervising  the  execution  of  the  same.  He  will  scrutinize 
all  the  reports  and  returns  required  to  be  made  to  him  in  respect 
thereto,  and  make  a  statement  of  all  delinquent  oflBicers  to  the  Com- 
mander-in-Chief. Should  he  deem  it  desirable,  he  will  give  his  per- 
sonal attendance  and  services  at  parades  and  encampments,  to  advance 
the  improvement  of  the  troops  in  tactics  and  discipline,  on  which 
occasions  he  will  act  as  principal  Instructor. 

763.  To  the  Adjutant- General  will  be  sent,  and  in  his  office  will  be 
deposited,  all  bonds  for  the  issue  of  arms,  munitions  of  war  or  other 
property  of  the  state ;  all  reports  and  returns  of  heads  of  Staff  depart- 
ments and  Inspecting  Officers ;  all  returns  of  elections  and  appointments 
to  office ;  the  proceedings  of  all  Courts  of  Inquiry,  Courts  Martial  and 
Military  Boards ;  applications  for  the  organization  of  companies ; 
applications  and  communications  from  officers,  and  all  other  writings 
and  papers  which  are  required  to  be  transmitted  to  the  Commander- 
in-Chief,  or  to  be  returned  to  or  preserved  at  general  head- quarters. 

764.  The  Adjutant-General  will  prepare  and  distribute  all  the  proper 
blanks  to  be  used  by  officers  of  the  Line  or  in  his  own  department. 

765.  It  is  the  duty  of  the  Adjutant- General  to  prepare  and  transmit 
to  the  various  Commissioned  Officers  of  the  service  their  proper 
commissions,  and  in  a  book,  which  shall  be  the  roster  of  the  militia, 
to  register  the  same,  and  to  note  therein,  as  they  occur,  all  changes 
by  promotions,  resignations,  removals,  cashiering  and  deaths ;  by  con- 
solidations and  disbanding  of  subdivisions  of  the  forces,  or  from*  any 
other  cause. 

Military.  12* 


138  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Adjutant-Generars  Department  —  Adjutant'Generai- 

766.  The  Adjutant-General,  in  a  book  to  be  provided  for  that 
purpose,  shall  preserve  in  his  department  a  record  of  all  the  ordnance, 
arms,  accoutrements  and  munitions  of  war  issued  under  the  orders 
of  the  Commander-in-Chief  to  the  troops,  specifying  in  each  case  the 
number  and  date  of  tne  order  of  issue,  the  number  and  character  of 
the  arms,  &c.,  issued,  the  name  of  the  officer  or  person  to  whom 
issued,  the  letter  of  the  company,  the  number  of  the  regiment,  brigade 
or  division  for  which  issued,  the  number,  date  and  penalty  of  the 
bond  for  issue,  and  the  name  and  title  of  the  bondsmen. 

767.  The  Adjutant-General,  before  filing  any  bond  for  the  issue  of 
arms,  &c.,  will  require,  in  every  instance,  that  there  be  a  prox)er 
surety  or  sureties  thereto,  and  that  the  approval  thereof  by  the 
General  of  the  Brigade  in  which  the  arms,  &c.,  are  required,  or  by 
the  Commissary- General,  is  endorsed  thereon,  and  that  such  surety 
or  sureties  have  properly  justified. 

7G8.  The  Adjutant-General  shall  also,  in  a  book  to  be  kept  in  his 
department,  preserve  a  record  of  all  the  ordnance,  arms,  accoutrements, 
munitions  of  war  and  other  military  property  belonging  to  the  state 
in  the  various  arsenals  of  the  state,  and  shall  keep  the  same  current 
by  corrections  from  the  monthly  returns  of  the  Commissary-General. 

769.  The  Adjutant-General  will,  from  time  to  time,  as  the  occasion 
arises,  issue  the  proper  orders  for  the  return  of  ordnance,  arms  or 
military  stores,  or  for  the  prosecution  of  bonds  given  as  security  for 
the  same,  where  it  shall  appear  from  the  records  in  his  office  tliat  such 
property  is  liable  to  injury  or  loss,  or  is  not  properly  secured,  or 
where  it  is  no  longer  required  for  tlie  purpose  for  which  it  was  issued. 

770.  Upon  the  reception,  by  the  Adjutant-General,  of  the  receipt 
provided  for  in  }  22  of  these  Regulations,  he  shlill  forthwith  note  the 
same  upon  the  bond  given  for  the  safe  keeping  of  the  property 
surrendered  under  said  section,  and  direct  the  successor  receiving  said 
property  to  file  his  bond,  with  sufficient  sureties,  approved  as  pro- 
vided by  law,  in  the  office  of  the  Adjutant-General  within  twenty  days 
thoreufter. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  139 


Inspectors  of  Divisions,  Brigades,  and  Adjutants  of  Regiments. 


2.  Inspectors  of  Divisions,  Brigades  and  Adjutants  of  Regiments. 

'ill.  The  Division  and  Brigade  Inspectors  are  the  chiefs  of  the 
Division  and  Brigade  Staffs,  and  they  act  as  Assistant  Adjutant-Gene- 
rals of  the  respective  divisions  and  brigades  in  which  they  serve.  As 
such,  they  form  tlie  division  or  brigade  hne;  transcribe,  issue  and 
serve  orders,  and  keep  the  order-books  and  other  necessary  books, 
when  required ;  inspect  and  form  guards ;  prepare  and  keep  the  neces- 
sary rosters,  and  regulate  the  duties  depending  upon  the  roster,  under 
the  direction  of  their  respective  Generals.  In  manoeuvres,  they  are 
specially  charged  with  the  duty  of  posting  the  markers,  and  marking 
the  alignments  in  evolutions  of  the  Line,  and  in  this  duty  they  will  be 
assisted  by  the  other  officers  of  the  Staff,  They  will  also  perform 
such  other  duties  as  devolve  upon  Assistant  Adjutant-Generals, 
according  to  military  usage. 

772.  Division  and  Brigade  Inspectors  make  such  inspections  and 
inspection  returns  as  are  provided  for  by  law  or  required  by  regula- 
tion, or  as  may  be  ordered,  from  time  to  time,  by  the  Commander- 
in-Chief,  the  Commandants  of  the  divisions  or  brigades  to  which  they 
are  attached,  or  the  Adjutant-General  or  Inspector-General. 

773.  As  the  duty  is  devolved  on  the  Adjutant- General,  by  the  laws 
of  the  United  States,  to  make  a  return  of  the  Militia,  with  their  arms, 
accoutrements  and  ammunition,  to  the  President  of  the  United  States, 
on  or  before  the  1st  Monday  of  January  in  each  year,  the  several 
Brigade  Inspectors  will  be  prompt  in  making  full  returns  at  the 
earliest  practicable  day,  on  or  before  the  first  day  of  December  in 
each  year,  to  enable  him  to  comply  with  the  provisions  of  said  laws. 

774.  In  case  of  the  absence  of  the  proper  Inspector  of  the  Brigade 
(or  other  Brigade  Inspector  specially  assigned),  from  an  encampment 
or  annual  parade  for  inspection,  the  Division  Inspector,  if  present, 
shall  act  as  Inspector  of  the  Brigade,  and  if  he  be  not  present,  it  shall 
be  the  duty  of  the  Commanding  Officer  to  designate  some  officer  to 
perform  the  duties  of  Brigade  Inspector. 


140  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

In»pection$—  Generally. 

775.  The  Adjutants  of  regiments  are  chiefs  of  the  Regimental  Staffs, 
and  perform  within  their  regiments  the  duties  required  of  them,  hy 
the  books  of  tactics  and  these  regulations,  in  all  parades  and  manoeu- 
vres, and  in  the  forming  of  guards,  &c.  They  will  also  attend 
to  such  duties  in  the  regiment  as  are  imposed  upon  officers  of  the 
Adjutant- General's  department  attached  to  divisions  and  brigades; 
and  do  such  other  service  as  may  be  ordered  by  the  Commandant  of 
the  regiment,  or  a  superior  officer  in  the  department,  consistent  with 
the  nature  of  the  office. 

INSPECTIONS GENERALLY. 

776.  It  is  through  the  Inspecting  Officers  that  the  Commander-in- 
Chief  is  to  be  made  acquainted  with  the  actual  state  and  condition  of 
the  forces,  and,  more  especially,  the  character  and  proficiency  of  the 
officers. 

777.  It  being  an  object  of  the  highest  importance  to  the  efficiency 
of  the  service  that  the  Inspecting  Officer  should  make  a  complete 
and  thorough  examination  of  the  uniform,  arms,  equipments,  num- 
bers and  discipline  of  the  forces,  Commanding  Officers  will  see  that 
he  has  every  facility  for  such  examination  afforded  to  him. 

778.  The  Inspecting  Officer  should  have  an  intimate  acquaintance 
with  the  regulations  and  rules  of  the  service,  especially  those  relating 
to  his  own  functions ;  and  an  accurate  and  familiar  knowledge  of 
tactics.  He  should  conduct  liimself  with  firmness,  discretion  and 
independence ;  but  while  rigidly  scrutinizing  all  matters  directed  to 
be  inspected,  it  is  indispensable  also  that  he  have  a  sensitive  regard 
to  the  rights  of  others.  He  will  not,  therefore,  assume  to  himself,  a 
command  of  the  forces  inspected,  or  censure  any  officer  or  soldier 
upon  the  field ;  but  will  make  a  fearless,  frank  and  impartial  report 
of  the  results  of  the  inspection  to  the  officer  by  whom  it  was  ordered, 
or  to  whom  returns  are  required  to  be  made. 

It  is  obvious,  from  the  nature  of  the  duties  required  of  the  Inspect- 
ing Officer,  that  the  office  is  one  of  peculiar  delicacy  and  resjionsibility ; 
and  Officers  in  command,  and  Inspecting  Officers,  are  expected  to 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  141 

TJie  In»pector- General. 

manifest  those  qualities  of  courtesy  and  forbearance  wMch  should 
always  characterize  the  officer  and  gentleman. 

ARTICLE  XXXVIII. 

OF  THE    INSPECTOR-GENERAL. 

779.  It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  Inspector-General  to  visit,  at  least 
once  in  every  two  yeare,  each  regimental  district  in  the  state.  He  shall 
critically  inspect,  as  often  as  he  may  deem  necessary,  every  branch 
connected  with  the  military  service,  including  armories,  arsenals  and 
military  store-houses ;  and  he  shall  also  attend  to  the  organization 
of  the  militia,  and  report  to  general  head-quarters  the  improvement 
in  discipline  and  tactical  instruction  of  the  uniformed  forces. 

780.  Commandants  of  regiments  and  companies  shall  furnish  to 
the  Inspector-General,  such  information  as  he  may  require  as  to 
the  number  and  kind  of  arms,  equipments  and  military  property  of  the 
state  issued  to  their  respective  regiments  and  companies  ;  and,  at  the 
conclusion  of  the  inspection  of  any  armory,  arsenal  or  military  store- 
house, if  he  find  the  property  which  ought  to  be  kept  therein,  or  any 
part  of  it,  missing,  injured,  unfit  for  use  or  deficient  in  any  respect, 
he  shall  forthwith  report  the  facts  in  respect  thereto  to  the  Com- 
mander-in-Chief. 

781.  It  shall  be  his  duty,  after  the  first  day  of  November  in  each 
year,  to  inspect  the  tents  and  camp  equipage  belonging  to  the  state, 
and  report  any  deficiency  therein,  to  the  Commander-in-Chief,  on  or 
before  the  first  day  of  January  thereafter. 

782.  In  his  annual  report  he  shall  state  what  General  and  Field 
Officers  have  been  in  command  of  parades  or  encampments,  what 
changes  of  General  or  Field  Officers  have  been  made,  and  what  degree 
of  improvement  has  been  attained  by  both  officers  and  men,  and 
whether  the  general  regulations  have  been  observed,  together  with 
such  suggestions  as  he  may  see  fit  to  make. 

783.  To  the  Inspector-General  will  be  referred,  by  order  of  the 
Commander-in-Chief,  such  matters  as  require  an  examination  at  a 


142  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

TJie  Inspector- General, 

distance  from  the  general  head-quarters,  for  the  information  of  the 
Commander-in-Chief ;  and  it  will  be  the  duty  of  the  Inspector-Gene- 
ral, upon  such  reference,  to  report  upon  the  qualifications  of  persons 
named  to  the  Commander-in-Chief,  for  appointment  to  military  office, 
and  also  upon  the  possession  of  the  necessary  requisites  by  the  appli- 
cants for  the  organization  of  companies. 

784  The  Division  and  Brigade  Inspectors,  whenever  required  by  the 
Inspector-General,  shall  report  to  liim  the  condition  of  their  respective 
divisions  or  brigades- 

785.  To  ascertain  whether  the  troops  have  been  properly  instructed 
in  the  exercises  and  evolutions  of  the  field,  the  Inspector- General  will 
cause  them  to  be  exercised  in  the  manoeuvres  required  to  be  practiced 
during  the  year,  as  prescribed  by  regulations ;  and  he  will  give  his 
instructions,  as  to  the  exercises,  to  the  Commanding  Officer,  who  will 
issue  all  necessary  orders  and  directions  to  the  troops  for  their  exe- 
cution. 

786.  The  Inspector-General  shall,  at  least  once  in  every  two  years, 
examine  the  book  of  proceedings  of  the  Board  of  Auditors  of  each 
regiment,  and  the  accounts  filed  with  the  Secretary  of  such  Board 
during  the  two  years  previous,  or  since  the  last  examination  made  by 
the  Inspector-General ;  and  he  shall  carefully  compare  the  book  of 
proceedings  with  the  accounts.  He  shall  also  examine  the  warranto 
drawn  by  the  Board  of  Auditors,  in  the  possession  of  the  County 
Treasurer  ;  and  he  shall  specially  report  to  the  Commander-in-Chief 
whether  the  proceedings  of  the  Board  of  Auditors  are  regularly  and 
properly  entered ;  and  whether  the  warrants  are  in  due  form ;  and 
whether  any  military  funds  have  been  drawn  from  the  county  trea- 
sury for  improper  purposes,  or  by  persons  not  entitled  thereto  ;  and 
the  amount  paid  into  the  county  treasury  for  commutations  and  fines 
during  the  two  years  previous,  or  since  the  last  preceding  report  of 
the  Inspector-General. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  143 

The  Commisssary-General. 
ARTICLE  XXXIX. 

OF    THE    commissary-general's    DEPARTMENT. 

787.  The  duties  of  the  Commissary-General,  as  defined  by  law, 
embrace  in  part  the  duties  of  the  ordnance  department,  and  in  part 
those  of  the  Quartermaster's  department,  as  such  duties  are  pre- 
scribed by  the  regulations  for  the  army  of  the  United  States. 

788.  He  is  specially  charged  with  the  preservation,  issue  and  trans- 
portation of  the  arms,  equipments  and  other  military  property 
belonging  to  this  state. 

789.  It  is  his  duty,  by  authority  of  the  Commander-in-Chief,  to 
issue  arms,  equipments,  camp  equipage  and  ammunition,  from  the 
several  arsenals  and  armories  under  his  charge,  and  to  make  monthly 
reports,  of  all  issues  made  by  him,  to  the  general  head- quarters. 

790.  The  Commissary-General  shall  take  receipts  for  arms,  equip- 
ments and  property  issued  by  him  ;  and  officers  to  whom  the  same 
shall  be  delivered  are  enjoined  to  execute  and  promptly  transmit 
the  proper  receipts  to  the  Commissary-General. 

791.  The  Commissary-General  will  transmit  to  the  Commander-in- 
Chief  duplicates  of  his  statements  of  accounts,  as  audited  from  time 
to  time  by  the  Comptroller  of  the  state,  within  ten  days  after  they 
shall  have  been  thus  audited.  He  shall  also  transmit  to  the  Com- 
mander-in-Chief statements  of  the  sales  of  old  arms  and  military 
stores,  and  of  the  sums  received  therefor,  within  ten  days  after  any 
such  sales, 

792.  It  is  also  his  duty,  when  ordered  by  the  Commander-in-Chief, 
to  cause  prosecutions  to  be  instituted  upon  bonds  given  for  arms  or 
other  military  property,  whenever  there  shall  be  a  refusal  or  neglect 
to  obey  the  order  for  the  return  of  the  same ;  and  he  shall  report  all 
prosecutions,  commenced  by  him  upon  any  such  bond,  to  the  Com- 
mLander-in-Chief. 

793.  He  may  also  employ  counsel  or  attorneys  to  conduct  such 
prosecutions,  in  the  name  of  the  people  of  this  state,  and  may  com- 
promise the  claim  upon  such  bonds,  or  discontinue  the  prosecution 
thereof,  with  the  consent  of  the  Commander-in-Chief. 


144  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

The  Commisaory- General. 

794.  He  shall  also  take  the  proi)er  measures  to  recover  the  posses- 
sion or  the  value  of  arms,  or  other  military  property  of  this  state,  in 
the  hands  of  any  person  or  persons  who  shall  not  have  given  bonds 
for  the  same. 

795.  No  arms  or  equipments  shall  be  issued  to  any  officer,  i)er8on 
or  body  of  men,  not  belonging  to  the  uniformed  and  organized 
militia  of  this  state,  unless, 

1.  In  cases  of  invasion  or  insurrection,  or  imminent  danger 
thereof. 

2.  To  arm  a  guard  for  the  protection  of  a  jail  or  prison,  or  to 
arrest,  detain  or  have  in  safe  keeping  a  prisoner  or  prisoners,  or  to 
enforce  the  judgment  or  decree  of  a  court. 

3.  In  cases  of  riot  or  resistance  to  process,  or  apprehension  of 
imminent  danger  thereof. 

796.  All  applications  from  others  than  tne  organized  militia,  made 
in  pursuance  of  any  law,  for  arms  or  military  equipage,  shall  be 
made  to  the  Commander-in-Chief,  and  shall  specify  the  particular 
exigency  or  cause  of  such  application,  and  the  purpose  for  which, 
and  the  person  for  whom,  the  same  are  required ;  and  such  appli- 
cation shall  be  verified  on  oath  of  the  person  making  the 


797.  Arms  and  equipage  issued  or  loaned  to  any  person  or  persons, 
other  than  the  uniformed  and  organized  militia,  shall  be  returned,  to 
the  arsenal  or  place  from  whence  they  were  issued,  within  ninety- 
days  from  such  issue,  unless  otherwise  specially  ordered  by  the  Com- 
mander-in-Chief, for  additional  periods  of  ninety  days  each. 

798.  The  Commissary-General  shall  keep  a  correct  roster  of  all 
officers  of  the  Quartermaster's  department,  attached  to  divisions, 
brigades  and  regiments,  and  may  correspond  with  thom  and  require 
the  performance  by  thom  of  such  duties  connected  with  his  office, 
within  the  commands  to  wlxich  they  are  attached,  as  are  imposed  by 
these  regulations. 

799.  The  Commissary-General  shall  also  keep  in  his  office  a  book 
containing  a  correct  roster  of  the  several  Commandants  of  divisions. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  146 

The  Commissary-General. 

brigades,  regiments  and  uniformed  companies  of  the  militia  of  tMs 
state,  and  in  the  same  shall  note  the  quantity  and  kind  of  arms  and 
equipments  issued  to  each  officer,  when  they  were  issued,  and  where 
they  are  deposited  or  kept ;  and  the  Commandants  of  brigades  shall, 
from  time  to  time,  as  changes  shall  take  place  in  the  command  of 
regiments  and  companies  in  their  brigades,  report  the  same  to  the 
Commissary-General,  with  the  name,  rank  and  residence  of  the  person 
who  shall  be  elected  or  appointed  to  fill  any  vacancy,  as  Commandant 
of  a  regiment  or  company. 

800.  If  any  change  in  command  shall  take  place  in  any  regiment  oi 
company  furnished  with  arms  or  equipments  belonging  to  this  state, 
the  Commissary-General  shall  immediately  require  a  renewal  of  the 
bond  given  therefor ;  and,  unless  a  new  bond  shall  be  given,  approved 
according  to  law,  for  such  arms  or  equipments,  within  ninety  days 
thereafter,  he  shall  order  the  return  thereof  forthwith  to  such  arsenal 
or  officer  as  he  may  designate.  But  this  paragraph  shall  not  apply  to 
cases  where  a  city  or  incorporated  village  of  this  state  shall  have 
become  surety  for  such  arms  or  equipments. 

801.  The  Commissary-General  shall  also,  in  like  manner,  require 
bonds  given  for  arms  or  equipments  to  be  renewed  whenever  the 
surety  thereto  shall  die  or  become  insolvent,  or  remove  out  of  the 
state,  and  shall  forthwith  give  notice  to  the  Commander-in-Chief  of 
the  making  of  such  requirement. 

802.  All  commissioned  officers  to  whom  any  arms  or  military  pro- 
perty of  this  state  shall  be  issued,  or  who  shall  come  into  command 
of  any  regiment  or  company  to  which  the  same  may  have  been 
issued,  or  otherwise  in  the  possession  thereof,  shall  make  reports  to 
the  Commissary-General,  in  respect  thereto,  at  such  times  and  in  such 
manner  as  he  shall  require. 

803.  The  officers  to  whom  tents  and  camp  equipage  shall  be  issued 
for  any  encampment,  or  for  other  special  purpose,  shall,  unless  other- 
wise ordered,  at  the  close  of  the  encampment  or  special  service  for 
which  they  were  issued,  deliver  the  same  to  the  officer  and  at  the 

Military.  13 


146  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

The  CommUaary-General. 

place  designated  by  the  Commissary-General ;  and  unless  otherwise 
8i)ecially  ordered,  such  tents  and  camp  equipage  shall  be  returned  to 
the  Commissary-General  forthwith,  at  the  close  of  such  encampment. 

804.  In  case  of  invasion  or  insurrection,  or  whenever  the  military 
forces  are  called  to  aid  the  civil  authority,  the  Commissary-General  is 
authorized  to  issue,  upon  the  requisition  of  the  Commandant  of  the 
military  forces  on  duty,  such  arms,  equipments  and  ammvmition  as 
may  be  required  by  such  Commandant  for  the  use  of  the  military 
forces  so  on  duty  during  such  emergency.  The  Commissary-General 
will  take  a  receipt  for  the  property  of  the  state  so  issued,  and  imme- 
diately report  such  issue  to  the  Commander-in-Chief ;  and  he  will 
require  the  arms  and  equipments  so  issued,  and  such  of  the 
ammunition  issued  as  shall  not  have  been  required  for  use  by  the 
troops,  to  be  returned  to  him  immediately  upon  the  ceasing  of 
the  exigency  upon  which  they  were  issued.  It  will  be  the  duty  of 
the  Commandant  of  the  troops  to  see  that  such  return  is  promptly 
and  accurately  made. 

805.  The  Commissary-General  is  also  authorized  to  issue  ammu- 
nition for  the  practice  of  the  troops  under  these  limitations  : 

1.  To  the  Artillery,  annually,  for  practice,  three  kegs  of  gun- 
powder and  twenty  balls  for  each  gun,  for  batteries  of  four  pieces  or 
less  ;  and  two  kegs  of  powder  and  fifteen  balls  for  every  gun  exceeding 
four,  in  batteries  of  more  than  four  guns.  Where  cartridges  are 
made  up  for  Artillery,  the  cost  of  making  will  be  deducted  —  the 
cartridges  furnished  will  be  about  forty  for  six  pounder  guns.  The 
Commandants  of  companies  will  make  the  requisitions  upon  the 
Commissary-General  for  ammunition  for  the  Artillery. 

2.  To  the  Infantry  and  Riflemen,  annually,  for  practice,  twenty 
rounds  of  blank  cartridge,  or  ten  rounds  of  ball  cartridge,  or  ten  of 
blank  and  five  of  ball,  for  each  man.  The  requisitions  for  ammuni- 
tion for  the  Infantry  and  Rifles  will  be  made  by  the  Commandants  of 
regiments  upon  the  Commissary-General,  and  will  specify  the  number 
of  men,  duly  uniformed  and  equipped,  belonging  to  and  doing  duty 
iu  such  regiment. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  147 

Engineerti'  Departm-ent. 

3.  If  more  ammunition  is  required  for  use  or  practice  by  the  troojis 
than  is  above  authorized  to  be  issued  by  the  Commissary-General, 
application  must  be  made  to  the  Commander-in-Chief. 

806.  The  Commissary-G-eneral  will  see  that  no  issue  or  loan  of 
arms,  equipments,  ammunition  or  other  military  property  of  the  state, 
is  made  from  any  arsenal,  armory  or  storehouse  in  his  charge,  except 
as  provided  in  the  two  preceding  sections,  without  the  special  order 
of  the  Commander-in-Chief. 

807.  To  a  section  of  light  artillery,  when  duly  organized  and 
uniformed,  will  be  issued  by  order  of  the  Commander-in-Chief,  two 
pieces  of  artillery,  with  the  other  proper  arms  and  equipments,  upon 
the  giving  of  the  required  security. 

ARTICLE  XL. 

DEPARTMENT  OF  ENGINEERS. 

808.  This  department  consists  of  the  Engineer-in- Chief,  Division 
Engineers,  Brigade  Engineers,  Regimental  Engineers,  and  one  Sergeant 
and  nine  Sappers  and  Miners  to  each  regiment. 

809.  The  duties  of  this  department  comprise  reconnoitering  and 
surveying  for  military  purposes ;  the  planning,  laying  out  and  super- 
intending works  for  attack  and  defence  of  places ;  for  the  passage  of 
rivers ;  for  the  movements  and  operations  of  armies  in  the  field ;  the 
laying  out  of  camp  grounds ;  the  collection,  arrangement  and  pre- 
servation of  all  reports,  memoirs,  plans  and  drawings  relating  to  these 
specific  duties,  or  any  other  duties  which  may  be  assigned  to  them. 

810.  It  is  recommended  that  all  appointments  of  Division,  Brigade 
or  Regimental  Engineers  be  made  from  those  only  who  are  practical 
Engineers  or  otherwise  competent  to  perform  all  the  duties  which 
may  be  imposed  upon  or  expected  of  them. 

811.  The  Engineer  intrusted  with  the  laying  out  of  any  camp  or 
the  construction  of  any  works,  where  the  same  is  practicable,  shall 
make  a  plan  or  diagram  thereof,  embracing  a  topographical  view  of 


148  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Engineers''  Department. 

the  surrounding  country,  whicli  plan  or  diagram  shall  be  delivered 
to  the  Commanding  Officer,  if  of  a  camp,  previous  to  such  encamp- 
ment, or  otherwise  as  soon  as  it  can  be  completed ;  and  shall,  within 
thirty  days  thereafter,  make  a  copy  of  such  plan  or  diagram,  with 
explanatory  notes,  and  forward  the  same  to  the  Engineer-in-Chief,  at 
his  place  of  residence. 

812.  The  Sappers  and  Miners,  attached  to  the  command  in  which 
the  service  is  required,  shall  be  under  the  direction  of  the  senior 
Engineer  in  charge,  subject,  however,  to  the  orders  of  the  Commanding 
Officer. 

813.  Officers  and  men  in  the  Engineer  department  may  be  required 
to  do  duty  previous  and  preparatory  to  encampments  for  discipline 
and  instruction ;  and  also  to  attend  meetmgs  for  instruction  and 
improvement,  in  the  various  duties  of  their  department ;  as  well  as 
at  the  parades,  encampments  and  drills  provided  by  law,  when  so 
ordered  by  the  Commandant  of  the  brigade  or  force  to  wliich  they 
are  attached,  or  the  Officer  of  Engineers  of  the  brigade  or  regiment  to 
which  they  belong.  These  duties  are  in  addition  to  other  duties 
which  may  be  required  in  active  service. 

814.  The  superior  Officer  of  Engineers,  serving  with  an  army,  corpg, 
division,  brigade  or  smaller  body,  will  receive  his  orders  from  the 
Commandant  thereof,  and  will  communicate  to  him  any  orders  he 
may  receive  from  a  superior  officer  in  his  own  department.  If  the 
Engineer  Officer  be  acting  under  orders  from  his  department,  issued 
by  authority  of  a  Commanding  Officer,  on  duty,  superior  in  rank  to 
that  of  the  Commandant  of  the  force  with  which  such  Engineer  is 
serving,  it  will  be  the  duty  of  such  Commandant  to  make  such 
dispositions  of  his  forces,  to  aid  the  Engineer  Officer  in  the  performance 
of  the  duty  required  of  him,  as  may  be  necessary. 

815.  An  Officer  of  Engineers,  directed  to  superintend  any  works  to 
be  constructed  by  troops,  will  point  out  what  is  to  be  done  and  how 
.it  is  to  bo  done,  and  will  maintain  such  a  supervision  as  will  enable 
him  to  see  that  it  is  done  correctly.     It  will  be  the  duty  of  the  officer 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  149 

Engineers''  Department. 

having  charge  of  the  detachment  to  execute  the  work  accordingly. 
The  command  of  the  troops  will  be  with  the  Officer  of  the  Line,  unless 
otherwise  specially  ordered,  according  to  the  nature  of  the  case.  The 
detail  of  troops,  for  works  to  be  carried  on  under  the  superintendence 
of  Officers  of  Engineers,  will  be  furnished  on  the  requisition  of  the 
senior  Engineer,  addressed  to  the  Officer  in  command  of  the  troops. 
The  requisition  will  specify  the  number  of  men  required  for  labor, 
the  time  and  place  of  assembling  for  service,  and  the  duration  of  such 
service. 

816.  When  connected  with  a  force  in  the  field,  Engineers  engaged 
in  surveys  and  reconnoissances  will  report  their  operations  therein, 
and  also  the  execution  of  all  other  duties,  to  their  immediate  superior 
of  the  department  at  the  head-quarters  of  the  force,  and  such  superior 
will  report  directly  to  the  Commanding  officer. 

817.  The  Chief  of  the  Corps  of  Engineers,  or  any  superior  officer  of 
said  corps,  may  require  from  a  junior  officer  thereof  reports  of  any 
particular  service  upon  which  such  junior  may  be  or  may  have  been 
engaged. 

818.  Orders  for  the  Engineers  may  be  transmitted  from  general 
head-quarters,  by  the  Chief  of  the  department,  to  any  subordinate 
officer  therein,  by  direction  of  the  Commander-in-Chief. 

819.  The  Officers  and  men  of  the  Engineer  Corps  require,  for  the 
proper  discharge  of  their  duties,  a  careful  course  of  instruction  in  the 
general  principles  of  engineering,  as  applied  to  the  military  service, 
in  the  construction  of  fortified  places,  field  works,  bridges  and  roads  ; 
the  attack  and  defence  of  military  posts,  towns,  villages,  &c. ;  and 
also,  as  a  special  duty  required  of  them  in  peace,  the  proper  and 
practical  laying  out  of  camps  of  instruction  and  discipline,  including 
any  particular  duties,  connected  therewith,  that  may  be  required  of 
them.  The  superior  Officer  of  Engineers,  in  each  brigade  and  regi- 
ment, will  be  responsible  for  the  instruction  of  Ms  corps  and  its 
efficiency. 

MiLITART.  13* 


150  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

The  Jvdge-Advocate. 

820.  The  men  of  the  Engineer  Corps  should  be  selected  with  a 
reference  to  their  intelligence,  activity  and  skill  in  the  arts  connected 
with  the  duties  of  the  corps. 

821.  The  tools  and  implements  of  each  regimental  corps  of  Sappers 
and  Miners  will  be,  four  axes,  two  saws  and  two  pickaxes.  The 
Commandants  of  regiments  will  see  that  provision  is  made  for  the 
furnishing  of  the  Engineer  Corps  with  these  tools  and  implements,  and 
that  they  are  kept  in  a  safe  place,  at  all  times  ready  for  immediate  use. 

822.  The  Engineer-in-Chief,  on  or  before  the  15th  day  of  December, 
in  each  year,  shall  report  to  the  Commander-in-Chief  the  operations 
of  his  department  for  the  preceding  year,  together  with  such  suggestions 
relative  to  its  affairs  as  he  may  deem  expedient ;  to  which  he  shall 
append  all  the  maps,  plans,  diagrams,  profiles,  projections,  or  other 
sketches,  which  may  have  been  forwarded  to  him,  by  the  various  officers 
of  his  department,  during  the  year.  Should  he  vacate  his  office  by 
resignation,  or  otherwise,  previous  to  his  annual  report,  he  will 
deliver  all  maps,  plans,  sketches,  diagrams,  &c.,  as  shall  then  be  on 
file  in  his  department,  together  with  all  books,  papers  and  other 
property  pertaining  to  such  office,  and  a  record  of  all  the  official 
transactions  of  his  department,  to  his  successor,  if  he  shall  have  been 
appointed,  who  is  required  to  make  such  annual  report.  If  no 
successor  shall  have  been  appointed,  then  he  shall  forward  the  same 
to  the  Adjutant-doncrarb  department. 

ARTICLE  XLI. 

THE    judge-advocate's    DEPARTMENT. 

823.  The  duties  of  the  Judge- Advocate  are  so  intimately  connected 
with  the  administration  of  justice  as  to  require,  on  the  part  of  the 
person  filling  such  office,  intelligence,  experience,  impartiality  and 
firmness.  Therefore,  it  is  recommended  that  no  person  be  appointed 
to  this  office  whose  education  has  not  fully  qualified  him  to  discharge 
these  high  and  important  duties. 

824.  Whenever  a  Judge-Advocate  shall  receive  his  commission,  he 
is  roqiiired,  without  delay,  to  make  himself  acquainted,  by  diligent 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  151 

TJie  Judge-Advocate. 

study,  with  the  settled  principles  of  judicial  procedure,  the"  military 
laws  and  regulations  governing  the  service,  and  the  customs  which 
have  been  established  therein. 

825.  He  is  to  direct  all  prosecutions  provided  for ;  and  his  conduct 
will  be  the  subject  of  scrutiny  and  observation  by  those  to  whom 
the  law  has  committed  the  revision  of  the  proceedings  of  military 
courts. 

826.  He  is  to  furnish  the  accused  with  a  copy  of  the  charges  and 
specifications  which  are  to  be  exhibited  against  him,  a  copy  of  the 
order  constituting  and  convening  the  court,  together  with  a  detail  of 
the  members,  and  notice  of  the  time  and  place  where  the  court  will 
meet  for  the  trial,  when  required  so  to  do  by  the  officer  ordering  the 
court. 

827.  He  will  correct  and  arrange  the  testimony  that  may  be  required, 
and  present  the  evidence  before  the  court  in  a  succinct  and  connected 
manner. 

828.  He  wiU  counsel  the  court  as  to  the  form  of  its  proceedings 
and  the  nature  and  limits  of  its  authority. 

829.  He  will  admonish  the  accused,  and  guard  him  in  the  exercise 
of  his  legal  rights. 

830.  As  the  Law  Officer  of  the  court,  he  must  on  no  account  inti- 
mate his  opinion  as  to  the  guilt  or  innocence  of  the  accused. 

831.  He  may  point  out  in  what  manner  the  evidence  applies  to  the 
facts  in  issue ;  but  this  should  be  done  in  an  address  delivered  in 
open  court,  so  that  the  accused  may  have  an  opportunity  to  reply. 

832.  He  is  to  have  the  preparation,  care  and  disposition  of  the  re- 
cords, and  the  custody  and  safe  keeping  of  all  papers  connected  with 
the  trial. 

833.  It  is  his  duty,  previous  to  the  ordering  of  a  court  martial, 
when  required  so  to  do,  to  prepare  and  correct  the  charges  and  specifi- 
cations against  all  persons  to  be  tried,  stating  the  offence  in  an  accurate 


152  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Tha  Judge-Advoeate. 

and  specific  manner,  carefully  giving  the  dates  and  places ;  and  while 
all  superfluous  matter  should  be  excluded,  the  specifications  must  be 
made  to  support  the  charge. 

834.  The  Judge- Advocate  will  take  down  the  proceedings  of  the 
court  in  writing.  In  this  record  he  must  inscribe  the  order  consti- 
tuting the  court,  the  time  of  its  assembly,  the  names  of  members 
present,  the  introduction  of  the  accused,  the  fact  that  he  was  asked  if 
he  had  any  objection  to  any  of  the  members,  his  answer  thereto,  and 
the  action  of  the  court  thereon  ( if  any ),  the  fact  that  the  members  of 
the  court  were  sworn  in  his  presence,  that  the  accusation  was  read  to 
him,  the  plea  to  each  specification  and  charge,  the  action  of  the  court 
on  the  special  pleas,  the  introduction  of  each  witness,  and  the  fact 
that  he  was  sworn.  All  the  evidence  must  be  recorded  as  given  ;  and 
any  incidental  questions  raised,  and  the  decision  of  the  court  thereon, 
must  appear,  and  the  finding  and  sentence  of  the  court  must  also  be 
recorded. 

835.  After  the  adjournment  of  a  court-martial,  at  the  close  of  the 
business  of  each  day,  and  before  the  next  meeting  of  the  court,  the 
Judge- Advocate  shall  make  a  fair  copy  of  the  proceedings,  which  he 
shall  continue  thus  regularly  to  engross  till  the  conclusion  of  the 
trial,  when  the  whole  shall  be  read  over  by  him  to  the  court,  before 
the  members  proceed  to  deliberate  and  form  their  opinions. 

836.  The  record,  duly  authenticated  by  the  signature  of  the  Presi- 
dent and  Judge-Advocate,  he  will  transmit  without  delay  to  the 
Officer  ordering  the  court. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES. 


153 


The  Judge-Advocaie. 


MANNER   OF   SITTING   AT   A  COURT   MARTIAL.=* 


837.  The  following  form  will  hereafter  be  observed  in  recording 
the  proceedings  of  courts  martial  of  the  militia  of  this  state. 

Proceedings  of  a  court  martial  held  at  in  the 

county  of  in  the  State  of  New- York,  by  virtue  of  tho 

following  order,  viz : 

[  Here  insert  a  copy  of  the  order  instituting  the  court.  ] 


*  This  diagram  is  prepared  for  a  court  martial,  for  the  trial  of  General  Officers, 
and  composed  of  five  members. 


154  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

The  JudgO'AdDOcate. 

Albany,  jlprU 
The  court  met  pursuant  to  the  above  order. 
Present : 

1.  General  of  the  Brigade,  President. 

2.  Colonel  of  the  Regiment,  )j^^^^^ 

3.  Colonel                           of  the  Regiment,  f 
Colonel  Judge  Advocate. 

Marshal. 

The  court  then  proceeded  to  the  trial  of  Colonel  A.  B.,  of  the 
regiment  brigade  division  of  the  militia 


of  this  state,  who,  being  called  into  court,  and  having  heard  the  order 
read,  was  asked  if  he  had  any  objection  to  any  of  the  members  named 
in  the  order,  to  which  he  replied  in  the  ( affirmative  or  negative.  )* 

The  court  was  then  duly  sworn,  in  the  presence  of  the  accused, 
who  was  arraigned  on  the  following  charges  and  specifications,  viz : 

[  Here  insert  the  charges  and  si>ecifications.  ] 
To  which  the  accused  pleaded,  as  follows : 
Not  guilty,  to  the  first  specification. 
Not  guilty,  to  the  second  specification. 
Not  guilty,  to  the  charge. 

All  persons  required  to  give  evidence  were  directed  to  withdraw, 
and  remain  in  waiting  until  called  for. 

Lieut.  A.  B. ,  of  the regiment,  a  witness  for  the  prosecution, 

being  duly  sworn,  says^:  That  on  the day  of 

&c.,  &c. 

Question  by  the  Judge  Advocate ? 

Answer . 

Question  by  the  accused ? 

Answer . 


*  [  If  any  member  of  the  court  be  challenged,  state  which  one,  and  the  groanda 
thereof,  and  proceedings,  and  dispoaitiou  of  the  challenge.  ] 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  155 

The  Judge-Advocate. 

Question  "by  the  court ? 

Answer . 

The  prosecution  was  here  closed  and  the  accused  produced  the 
following  evidence : 

Capt.  C.  D.,  of  the regiment,  a  witness  for  the  defence,  being 

duly  sworn,  says  :  That  on  the day  of ,  &c.,  &c. 

Question  by  the  accused ? 

Answer . 

Question  by  the  Judge  Advocate ? 

Answer     ■ . 

Question  by  the  court ? 

Answer . 

The  accused  having  no  further  testimony  to  offer,  requested  to  be 

indulged  with days  to  prepare  his  final  defence.     The  court 

granted  his  request,  and  adjourned  to  meet  again  at  o'clock, 

A.  M.,  on  the day  of ,  18    . 

SECOND  DAY. 

Wednesday^ 

The  court  met  pursuant  to  adjournment. 

Present  : 

[  Here  insert  the  names  of  those  who  are  present.  J 

The  proceedings  having  been  read  over  to  the  court  by  the  Judge- 
Advocate,  the  accused,  A.  B.,  made  the  following  address  in  hia 
defence : 

[  Here  insert  the  defence,  or,  if  it  be  too  long,  it  may  be  marked 
and  annexed.  ] 

The  court  then  closed,  and  proceeded  to  deliberate  on  tne  testimony 
adduced,  and  pronounced  the  following 


156  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

TVie  Judge-Advocate. 
SENTENCE. 

The  court  having  maturely  weighed  and  considered  the  evidence  in 
support  of  the  charges  against  the  accused,  Colonel  A.  B.,  of  the  — 

regiment  of ,  and  also  his  defence,  and  the  evidence  adduced  iu 

support  of  it,  is  of  opinion  and  finds  that,  &c.,  and  does  therefore,  &.c. 
Signed, 

,  President. 

[Here  insert  the  number  of  days'  service  for  each  member  and  offi- 
cer of  the  coui-t,  certified  by  the  president  of  the  court.] 

838.  All  officers,  to  whom  an  allowance  is  to  be  made  from  the 
treasury  fbr  services  rendered  in  attending  courts  martial  or  courts 
of  inquiry,  are  directed  to  observe  the  following  regulations :  The 
bills  of  all  the  members  of  the  court,  and  also  of  the  Judge- Advo- 
cate and  Marshal,  must  be  made  out  by  the  Judge-Advocate,  in 
terms  of  days'  service,  and,  where  it  is  practicable,  on  the  same 
paper,  and  be  certified  by  the  presiding  officer.  The  order  appoint- 
ing the  court,  or  a  certified  copy  thereof,  must  be  attached  to  the 
bill,  together  with  a  receipt,  or  an  order  on  the  treasurer,  signed  by 
all  the  persons  interested.  Directions  to  whom  the  money  is  to  be 
transmitted  must  in  all  cases  be  given.  The  bill  will  be  inclosed  by 
the  Judge- Advocate  to  the  Adjutant-General. 

839.  No  charge  being  allowed  for  mileage  or  travel,  the  bills  should 
embrace  the  time  actually  employed  on  duty,  at  the  rate  of  two  dol- 
lars for  each  day  so  employed. 

840.  Each  Division  and  Brigade  Judge-Advocate  shall  annually, 
on  the  first  day  of  December  in  each  year,  make  a  report  to  the  Judge- 
Advocate-Qeneral  of  all  courts  martial  (other  than  Regimental  and 
Brigade  Courts  for  the  trial  of  delinquencies,  &c.)  ordered  by  the 
Commandants  of  their  respective  districts,  the  names  of  the  members 
composing  the  same,  the  names  of  the  persons  accused,  the  nature  of 
ihfS  charges  preferred  against  them,  and  the  result  of  the  trial. 

841.  The  Judge- Advocate-General  shall,  on  the  fifteenth  day  of 
December  in  each  year,  make  his  annual  report  to  the  Commander- 
in-Chief,  through  the  Adjutant-General's  department,  of  all  courts 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  157 


The  Medical  Department. 


martial  ordered  and  held  within  the  state,  which  may  have  been 
reported  to  him,  or  at  which  he  shall  have  acted  as  Judge- Advocate, 
stating  by  whom  such  military  courts  were  ordered,  when  and  where 
held,  the  names  of  the  person  or  persons  accused,  the  nature  of  the 
charges  preferred,  and  the  result  of  the  trial,  accompanied  with  such 
suggestions  and  recommendations  as  to  him  may  seem  fit  and  proper 
ill  regard  to  the  nature  and  character  of  the  proceedings,  and  whether 
any,  and  (if  any)  what  legislation  or  further  regulations  may  be 
necessary  to  a  full  and  fair  administration  of  justice. 

ARTICLE  XLII. 

THE    MEDICAL    DEPARTMENT. 

842.  The  health  an  i  lives  of  the  officers  and  soldiers  are  too  impor- 
tant to  be  committed  to  those  unskilled  in  their  profession.  In  the 
appointment  or  promotion,  therefore,  of  any  person  in  the  Medical 
Staff,  the  appointing  power  will  rigidly  scan  the  pretensions  of  such 
person,  taking  into  consideration  his  physical  qualifications  and 
moral  habits,  as  well  as  his  professional  acquirements  and  education. 

843.  The  Surgeon- General  Is  charged  with  the  administrative 
details  of  the  Medical  department,  and  general  oversight  and  charge 
of  all  the  officers  belonging  to  it ;  and  will  issue  the  necessary  instruc- 
tions, from  time  to  time,  relating  to  their  professional  duties. 

844.  He  may  also  require,  from  time  to  time,  reports  from  Medical 
Directors,  Surgeons  of  divisions,  brigades  and  regiments,  relative  to 
the  condition  of  the  forces  in  service  under  their  charge,  with  such 
remarks  as  may  be  necessary  to  explain  the  nature  of  the  disease  or 
injury  claiming  their  attention,  and  the  probable  cause  thereof,  and 
the  treatment  adopted. 

845.  He  will,  as  often  as  required,  or  as  often  as  he  shall  deem 
necessary,  make  such  report  to  the  Commander-in-Chief  as  will 
explain  the  condition  of  the  department  under  his  charge,  with 
suggestions  of  such  improvements  in  practice  and  police,  clothing, 
subsistence,  &c.,  of  the  forces,  as  may  seem  to  be  required  for  the 

MlLITABY.  14 


168  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

The  Medical  Department. 

preservation  of  health,  the  comfort  and  recovery  of  the  sick,  and  the 
good  of  the  public  service. 

846.  The  senior  Medical  Officer,  on  duty  with  any  corps  in  the 
field  or  any  encampment  or  annual  parade  or  other  service,  unless 
othenvise  specially  ordered  by  the  Commandant  of  such  forces,  will 
be,  ex  officio,  the  Medical  Director ;  and  will  have  the  general  control 
of  the  Medical  Officers,  and  the  supervision  of  the  hospitals  under  their 
charge. 

847.  The  senior  Medical  Officer,  when  on  duty  as  specified  in  the 
preceding  section,  will,  with  the  approbation  of  the  Commanding 
Officer,  select  a  suitable  site  for  the  erection  of  a  hospital  or  hospital 
tent ;  and  upon  him  will  devolve  the  responsibility  for  order,  regu- 
larity and  cleanliness,  the  diet  and  care  of  the  patients,  and  the 
general  conduct  and  economy  of  the  whole  establishment. 

848.  The  Medical  Director  will  inspect  the  hospitals  under  his 
charge,  ascertain  the  manner  in  which  each  subordinate  performs  his 
duty,  see  that  the  necessary  supplies  are  provided  for  the  sick,  that 
they  are  of  good  quality  and  properly  expended,  and  enforce  the 
general  rules  and  regulations  given  for  the  government  and  direction 
of  the  Surgeons  and  Assistant  Surgeons. 

849.  Commanding  Officers  are  enjoined  to  furnish  such  military 
assistance  as  may  be  necessary  for  the  attainment  of  these  objects ; 
and  all  Commissioned  Officers,  and  others,  placed  in  the  hospital,  are 
commanded  to  yield  the  most  implicit  obedience  to  the  instructions 
they  may  receive  from  the  Medical  Director,  and  to  enforce  in  every 
instance  the  observance  of  the  hospital  regulations. 

850.  The  Surgeons  of  regiments  will  obey  the  instructions  of  the 
Medical  Director,  be  responsible  for  the  order  and  neatness  of  the 
hospital,  for  the  manner  in  which  the  Assistant  Surgeon  and  Attendants 
perform  their  respective  duties,  and  for  the  comfort  and  convenience 
of  those  sick  in  quarters. 

851.  They  will  receive  written  morning  reports,  of  any  wno  are  sick, 
from  the  Orderly  Sergeant  of  each  company,  who  will  see  that  those 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  159 

The  Medical  Department. 

reported  present  themselves  at  the  place  appointed  by  the  Surgeon, 
and  be  present  himself  at  their  examination, 

852.  They  will  immediately  report  all  cases  of  feigned  sickness  to 
the  Commanding  Officers  of  companies,  prescribe  for  those  who  are 
able  to  remain  in  quarters,  and  send  those  whose  cases  may  require 
other  accommodations  where  the  same  may  be  obtained. 

853.  They  will  at  all  times  be  within  call  in  case  of  accident,  and 
have  the  necessary  medicines,  instruments  and  di-essings  ready  at 
hand  to  attend  to  the  sick  and  wounded. 

854.  The  Assistant  Surgeons  will  accompany  the  Surgeon  in  his 
morning  visits,  make  out  the  proper  entry  in  a  prescription  book, 
attend  to  the  preparation  and  distribution  of  the  medicine,  see  that 
the  diary  of  the  weather  and  other  noticeable  incidents  be  properly 
kept,  assist  in  making  out  the  proper  reports  and  returns,  see  that 
the  nurses  are  attentive  to  the  sick  and  regularly  administer  the 
medicine  prescribed,  and  that  all  regulations  are  strictly  attended  to. 

855.  When  medical  or  surgical  aid  may  be  required  at  any  encamp- 
ment, annual  parade,  or  upon  other  service,  and  no  competent 
Surgeon  or  Assistant  Surgeon  of  the  military  forces  is  on  duty,  or  in 
case  the  Commanding  Officer  deem  it  necessary,  he  may  appoint  any 
physician  to  discharge  such  duties  as  are  required  of  a  Surgeon  or 
Medical  Director. 

856.  Whenever  cases  arise,  making  it  advisable,  in  the  opinion  of 
the  Commanding  Officer,  that  any  sick  or  wounded  should  be  removed 
to  safer  or  more  comfortable  quarters,  he  shall  direct  such  removal. 

857.  Surgeons  and  Assistant  Surgeons,  and  Physicians  acting  as 
such,  will  attend  all  Officers,  Non-commissioned  officers.  Musicians, 
Privates  and  other  persons  who  may  be  on  duty  or  connected  with  the 
command  in  which  the  service  is  required. 

858.  No  certificate  of  a  private  physician  or  surgeon,  as  to  the  sick- 
ness or  inability  of  any  Officer,  Non-commissioned  Officer,  Musician  or 
Private  of  any  of  the  military  forces  in  this  state,  shall  excuse  such 


160  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

QuartermasUr'a  DepartmtnU, 

person  from  the  performance  of  military  duty  or  exempt  him  from 
enrolment  therefor  ;  but  the  certificate  of  the  commissioned  Surgeon 
of  the  forces  will  be  presumptive  evidence  of  the  facts  stated  therein. 

ARTICLE  XLIII. 
rmaster's  depa 

859.  The  objects  of  this  department  are,  to  insure  an  efficient  system 
of  supply  for  the  troops,  and  to  give  facility  and  effect  to  the  move- 
ments and  operations  of  a  force  in  service. 

860.  This  department  will  have  charge,  at  encampments,  in  the 
field  and  on  marches,  of  all  tents  and  camp  equipage  and  baggage 
trains ;  of  all  laborers  and  persons  serving  in  camp  or  with  the 
trains ;  of  the  transportation  of  the  troops  and  military  stores,  and 
the  providing  of  quarters,  forage,  fuel,  straw  and  stationery  for  service 
in  camp,  garrison  and  in  the  field. 

861.  The  Quartermaster-General  is  the  head  of  this  department; 
but,  for  certain  purposes  herein  prescribed,  the  officers  of  this  depart- 
ment will  act  under  the  directions  of  the  Commissary-General,  and 
perform  such  duties,  witliin  the  divisions,  brigades  and  regiments 
with  which  they  respectively  serve,  as  he  may  be  authorized  to 
require  of  them. 

862.  Except  when  otherwise  herein  provided,  officers  of  the  Quar- 
termaster's department  will  be  subject  to  the  orders  of  the  Com- 
mandants upon  whose  staffs  they  respectively  serve. 

863.  In  all  matters  connected  with  the  discharge  of  thoir  duty,  while 
serving  with  troops  in  camp  or  in  the  field,  and  preparatory  thereto, 
and  for  instruction  in  their  duties.  Quartermaster's  will  obey  the 
direction  of  the  senior  officer  of  the  department  present  on  duty,  wlio 
will  himself  act  under  the  orders  of  the  Commanding  Officer  of  the 
force  or  camp. 

864.  In  the  procuring,  distribution  and  disposal  of  fuel,  straw  and 
forage  for  encampments  for  instruction  (excepting  encampmenta 
ordered  by  the  Commander-in-Chief),  the  Regimental  Quartermasters 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  161 

Quariermcuter^a  Department, 

. ■ 

will  act  for  tlieir  respective  regiments,  and  under  the  directions  of 
the  Commandants  thereof. 

865.  All  expenses  incurred  by  the  Quartermaster's  department,  in 
the  discharge  of  their  duties  at  any  encampment  or  annual  parade 
required  by  law,  not  properly  chargeable  to  the  Commissary-General's 
department,  shall  be  paid  by  the  regiment,  for  whose  benefit  the  same 
were  incurred,  out  of  the  regimental  funds,  as  part  of  the  incidental 
expenses  of  such  encampment  or  parade ;  and  all  moneys  received 
by  a  Quartermaster,  from  the  sale  of  any  articles  purchased  with 
the  regimental  fund,  not  used  at  such  parade  or  encampment,  shall 
be  paid  by  him  forthwith  to  the  proper  county  treasurer,  to  the  credit 
of  the  regimental  fund  of  the  regiment  for  whose  use  such  articles 
were  purchased. 

866.  Regimental  Quartermasters  shall  receive,  distribute  and 
safely  keep  all  tents  and  camp  equipage  furnished  to  their  respective 
regiments  for  encampment,  subject  to  the  control  and  responsibility 
of  the  officer  to  whom  the  same  were  issued ;  and  shall  cause  the 
same  to  be  promptly  returned  to  the  place  designated  by  the  Commis- 
sary-General, and  pursuant  to  his  order.  Brigade  and  Division 
Quartermasters  shall  perform  the  like  duties  at  brigade  and  division 
encampments. 

867.  Quartermasters  will  carefully  examine  all  tents  and  camp 
equipage  which  they  may  so  receive,  before  using  the  same,  and  supply 
any  deficiency  in  tent  poles,  pins  or  cords  required  for  the  use  thereof, 
and  may  also  cause  any  necessary  repairs  to  be  made  to  such  tents  ; 
and  the  charges  proper  therefor  shall  be  paid  by  the  Commissary- 
General,  upon  the  certificate  of  the  Commanding  Officer  of  the  camp 
or  force.  All  articles  supplied  pursuant  to  this  paragraph  sliall 
belong  to  the  state,  and  shall  be  returned  to  the  Commissary-General 
with  the  camp  equipage  received  from  him. 

868.  The  officers  of  the  Quartermaster's  department,  serving  on 
regimental  staffs,  will  annually  inspect  the  regimental  and  company 
armories  in  the  regimental  district,  and  the  arms  and  equipments 

Military.  14* 


162  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Quartermagter'e  Department. 

issued  to  the  regiment  or  any  company  therein  ;  and,  on  or  before  the 
first  day  of  November  in  each  year,  make,  subscribe  and  forward  to 
the  Commissary -General  a  report  of  the  condition  and  quantity  of 
such  arms  and  equipments,  stating  the  place  or  places  where  the 
same  are  kept,  and  whether  such  place  or  places  are  proper  and  safe 
armories ;  the  name  and  residence  of  the  armorer  or  armorers  ;  the 
name  of  the  officer  to  whom  such  arms  or  equipments  were  issued, 
and  whether  he  is  still  in  command,  and,  if  not,  the  name,  rank  and 
residence  of  his  successor ;  and  particularly  whether  any  of  the  arms 
or  equipments  originally  issued  by  the  Commissary-General  are 
missing  or  injured,  and,  if  so,  the  description  and  quantity  of  the 
property  so  missing  or  injured ;  and  also  whether  there  are  any  arms 
or  other  military  property  of  the  state,  in  his  regimental  district, 
which  are  in  the  possession  of  any  person  or  body  other  than  the 
regularly  organized  Militia  belonging  to  such  regiment. 

869.  In  case  of  a  vacancy  in  the  office,  or  disability  of  the  Quarter- 
master of  any  regiment,  the  Commandant  of  the  regiment  shall  designate 
some  competent  officer  to  perform  the  duty  above  required  of  the 
Regimental  Quartermaster ;  and  such  Commandant  shall  be  respon- 
sible for  its  performance. 

870.  The  Third  Sergeant  of  each  company,  or  other  Sergeant  desig- 
nated by  the  Commandant  of  the  company,  shall  be  charged  with  the 
duties  of  a  Sub-Quartermaster  Sergeant,  in  camps  for  instruction  and 
for  other  service,  when  required  by  the  Commanding  Officer,  and 
the  Sub-Quartormasti»r  Sergeant  in  each  company  shall  take  care  of 
the  baggage  of  such  company,  and  of  the  transportation  and  proper 
distribution  thereof,  subject  to  the  orders  of  the  Quartermaster  of  the 
regiment. 

871.  In  camps  for  instruction,  and  upon  other  service  wlien 
required,  the  Quartermaster  Sergeant  of  the  regiment,  or  other  non- 
commissioned officer  acting  as  such,  shall  have  the  immediate  control 
over  the  Sub-Quartermaster  Sergeants,  and  the  particular  care  and 
custody  of  the  baggage  and  baggage  trains  of  the  regiment,  subject  to 
the  direction  of  the  Quartermaster  or  acting  Quartermaster  of  the 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  163 

Paymaster's  Department — Special  Services- 
regiment.     He  will  be  responsible  for  the  distribution  of  tlie  baggage 
among  the  respective  companies. 

872.  Tlie  Quartermaster  Sergeant  and  Sub- Quartermaster  Ser- 
geants shall  be  instructed  by  the  Quartermaster  in  their  respective 
duties,  and  may  be  required  to  attend  meetings  for  that  purpose,  and 
may  be  put  on  duty  previously  and  preparatory  to  a  parade  or  encamp- 
ment, or  other  service  of  troops,  and  held  to  duty  after  such  parade, 
encampment  or  other  service  is  terminated,  for  the  discharge  of  the 
duties  cast  upon  them,  as  connected  with  the  department. 

ARTICLE  XLIV. 
paymaster's  department. 

873.  When  the  militia  are  called  into  service  in  time  of  war,  the 
officers  of  the  pay  department,  on  duty  with  the  troops,  shall  observe 
the  regulations  for  the  government  of  the  pay  department  of  the 
United  States  army. 

874.  Officers  of  the  pay  department,  at  encampments,  parades  or 
while  the  troops  are  on  special  service,  may  be  required  by  the  Com- 
manding officers  of  the  force  with  which  they  serve  to  perform  duty 
in  the  Quartermaster's  department,  and  they  may  also  be  charged 
with  providing  and  distributing  provisions  and  other  duties  of  com- 
missaries of  subsistence  in  the  United  States  army,  and  may  be 
required  to  act  as  the  fiscal  agents  of  the  corps  in  which  they  serve. 

ARTICLE  XLV. 
special  services. 

875.  The  military  forces  of  the  state  may  be  required  to  aid 
the  civil  authorities,  "  in  case  of  breach  of  the  peace,  tumult,  riot, 
or  resistance  to  process  of  this  state,  or  apprehension  of  imminent 
danger  of  the  same."  The  following  regulations  are  designed  to 
guide  Commanding  Officers  in  the  performance  of  the  delicate  and 
highly  responsible  duties  devolving  upon  them  at  such  times ;  and 
also  to  determine  and  define  their  powers  while  so  acting,  as  far  as 
the  Commander-in-Chief  is  authorized  so  to  do. 


164  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Special  Services. 

876.  The  military  officers,  while  acting  in  aid  of  the  civil  authori- 
ties, will  themselves  retain  the  command  of  the  troops,  and  enforce 
the  most  exact  subordination  and  discipline.  Thej*  will  impress  upon 
their  commands  the  necessity  of  coolness  and  self  possession,  and 
enjoin,  absolutely,  the  rule  that  no  man  shall  fire  without  orders 
from  his  proper  military  sujierior. 

877.  They  may  cause  the  troops  to  arrest  all  rioters  and  other 
persons  found  in  open  resistance  to  the  civil  authorities,  and  are 
empowered  and  required  to  overcome  such  resistance,  and  secure  and 
keep  the  peace,  by  the  use,  if  necessary,  of  their  arms  and  all  the 
power  which  they  possess.  But  they  are  not  authorized  to  punish 
any  person  for  an  offence,  however  amenable  he  may  be  to  punish- 
ment, and  they  will  always  endeavor,  by  a  firm  and  judicious  conduct, 
and  the  moral  ft)rce  of  their  presence,  to  establish  the  public  order, 
if  possible,  without  a  resort  to  arms.  To  have  accomplished  this 
result,  will  be  the  best  evidence  of  their  skill  and  the  excellence  of 
their  measures. 

878.  The  officer  in  command  of  military  forces  will,  upon  a  call  of 
the  civil  authorities,  cause  the  troops  to  be  supplied  with  the  required 
ammunition.  For  this  purpose  he  will  make  a  requisition  upon  the 
Commissary-General,  or  other  officer  in  charge  of  any  arsenal  or 
other  place  where  ammunition  of  the  state  is  deposited ;  and  it  will 
be  the  duty  of  the  officer  upon  whom  such  requisitiou  is  made  imme- 
diately to  comply  therewith. 

879.  If  ammunition  cannot  be  procured  in  time  by  this  method,  it 
may  be  purchased ;  and  in  either  event  the  cost  of  the  same  will  be 
a  charge  against  the  city,  or  county,  or  state,  according  to  the  source 
from  whence  the  call  to  service  emanated. 

880.  But  the  furnishing  of  the  requisite  ammunition  will  not  be  a 
condition  of  obedience  to  their  Commanding  Officer,  on  the  part  of 
the  troops,  who  may  be  held  to  duty,  although,  for  any  reason,  the 
ammunition  is  not  procured. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  1C5 

Special  Sermicea. 

881.  The  military  Commander  will  ordinarily  look  to  the  officer 
who  has  called  to  his  aid  the  military  force,  for  directions,  as  to  when 
the  force  shall  be  used.  If,  however,  after  a  lawful  call  into  service, 
no  instructions  arc  given  to  him,  by  reason  of  the  sickness,  absence, 
inability  or  death  of  such  officer,  or  for  any  other  cause ;  or  if  there 
shall  be  a  conflict  of  jurisdiction  between  public  officers  authorized 
to  call  to  their  aid  the  military  force,  and  who  shall  make  such  call; 
or  if  contradictory,  inconsistent  or  unlawful  directions  shall  be  given 
by  such  officer  or  officers,  the  military  Commander  will,  if  the  occa- 
sion shall  require  the  use  of  a  military  force,  himself  so  direct  the 
troops,  as  to  secure  the  public  peace  and  the  due  observance  of  law, 
agreeably  to  the  call  made  upon  him  by  the  civil  authority. 

882.  The  civil  officer  making  the  call,  communicates  directly  with 
the  superior  officer  in  the  chief  command  of  the  military  force.  He 
does  not  interfere  otherwise  with  the  force  or  its  conduct.  Subordi- 
nate military  officers  look  to  their  military  superior  for  their  orders. 

883.  The  instructions  of  the  civil  officer  are  given  in  general  terms, 
directing  the  military  officer  to  accomplish  a  particular  purpose,  as 
to  disperse  rioters,  or  clear  a  place,  or  defend  a  building,  and  the 
mode  and  means  by  which  the  specified  purpose  is  to  be  attained, 
are  directed  by  the  military  Commander. 

684.  The  troops,  when  ordered  to  disperse  a  tumult  or  riotous 
assemblage,  will,  unless  special  exigencies  should  intervene,  observe 
the  following  method  of  proceeding :  On  approaching  the  place  where 
the  mob  is  congregated,  or  the  riot  is  progressing,  the  military  officer 
ill  command  will  request  the  civil  officer  to  give  notice,  in  a  loud 
tone  of  voice,  requiring  all  persons  so  assembled  to  disperse  forth- 
with. Unless  such  notice  is  given  by  the  civil  officer,  the  military 
officer  will  himself  cause  such  notice  to  be  given.  After  waiting  for 
a  suitable  time,  to  allow  the  mob  or  rioters  to  disperse,  the  troops 
will  advance  and  attempt  to  clear  the  place  or  disperse  the  rioters. 
In  this  eflfort  they  will  obtain,  if  possible,  the  active  aid  of  the  civil 
force,  and  especially  the  personal  presence  and  authority  of  the 
magistracy.    If  the  troops  shall  then  be  attacked  or  resisted,  so  as  to 


166  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Special  Services. 

be  unable  otherwise  to  clear  the  ground  or  disperse  the  rioters,  they 
may  fire,  or  use  any  other  means  necessary  to  attain  the  end  designed, 
but  in  no  case  will  they  fire  without  the  orders  of  their  pro^jer 
military  Commander. 

885.  The  order  to  fire  will  be  communicated  to  the  troops  by  the 
superior  military  officer  in  command  on  the  spot.  It  is  impossible  to 
specify,  in  advance,  the  particulars  or  nature  of  each  case  of  resist- 
ance or  attack,  by  rioters  or  persons  engaged  in  a  breach  of  the  peace, 
which  will  justify  the  troops  in  taking  life.  The  Commander  must 
himself  examine  the  scene  of  disorder,  and  then,  in  view  of  all  the 
circumstances,  exercise  a  sound  discretion  as  to  the  measure  of 
force  demanded.  His  honest  and  reasonable  judgment,  in  a  case  of 
apparent  necessity,  is  all  that  is  required  by  the  law ;  and  his  lawful 
command  will  be  a  sufficient  protection  to  all  who  are  subject  to  his 
orders.  The  statute  law  and  general  rule  applicable  to  the  subject, 
are  given  in  the  following  sections. 

886.  By  the  laws  of  the  land,  homicide  or  the  taking  of  human 
life,  is  justifiable,  when  necessarily  committed  by  public  officers,  and 
those  acting  under  their  command,  in  their  aid  and  assistance,  in 
overcoming  resistance  to  the  execution  of  legal  process,  or  to  the 
discharge  of  any  other  legal  duty ;  and  it  is  also  justifiable,  when 
necessarily  committed  by  any  person  in  attempting,  by  lawful  ways 
and  means,  to  apprehend  any  person  fbr  any  felony  committed,  or  in 
lawfully  suppressing  any  riot,  or  in  lawfully  keeping  and  preserving 
the  peace. 

887.  It  will  bo  an  axiom  for  the  guidance  of  military  Commanders, 
acting  in  aid  of  the  civil  authorities,  to  use  no  uimccessary  violence, 
but  to  employ  as  much  force,  and  of  such  a  kind,  as  will  suffice  to 
accomplish  the  object  for  which  their  services  have  been  required. 

888.  The  rule  of  law  is,  that  all  persons  who,  by  their  presence,  give 
countenance  to  a  riot,  are  principals,  whether  they  engage  in  acts  of 
violence  or  not,  especially  after  notice  given  to  disi>erse.  Yet  it  often 
happens  that  a  largo  proportion  of  a  mob  arc,  in  the  first  instance, 
mere  spectators  or  idlers,  not  meaning  to  aid  in  a  breach  of  the 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  167 

Special  Servicea. 

peace.  For  this  reason  officers  are  enjoined,  unless  the  exigencies 
of  the  case  should  render  it  impracticable,  or,  as  otherwise  provided, 
to  give  the  required  notice  and  opportunity  to  disperse,  before  pro- 
ceeding to  extremities,  to  the  end  that  all  those  who  are  well  disposed 
may  retire  in  safety ;  and,  as  far  as  practicable,  in  every  case  of 
firing,  pains  will  be  taken  to  make  the  fire  efiective  only  as  against 
those  who  are  actually  engaged  in  the  riot. 

889.  To  guard  against  danger  to  innocent  persons  at  a  distance, 
the  troops  will  be  instructed  not  to  fire  over  the  mob  or  in  the  air. 
If  the  mob  are  close  to  the  troops,  to  avoid  the  effect  of  the  rising  of 
the  shot  at  short  distance,  the  aim  should  be  taken  not  higher  than 
the  centre  of  the  body. 

890.  Experience  having  shown  the  evil  results  of  firing  with  blank 
cartridge,  in  the  first  instance,  to  suppress  a  riot,  such  firing  is  pro- 
hibited. 

891.  Officers  in  command  of  troops  in  the  circumstances  contem- 
plated, will  be  cautious  not  to  weaken  their  main  force  too  much  by 
detachments ;  and  always  to  have  on  hand  a  sufficient  body  to  act 
with  energy  and  decided  effect,  when  their  services  shall  be  seriously 
required 

892.  Cavalry  being  comparatively  powerless  when  not  in  active 
motion,  this  force  should  not  be  exposed  in  a  riot,  except  when  it  can 
charge.  The  charge  should  be  at  a  brisk  trot  or  gallop,  with  the 
horses  well  in  hand.  If  the  ground  is  much  broken,  cavalry  cannot 
be  used  to  advantage. 

893.  When  the  design  is  to  clear  a  street  or  place  by  a  charge  of 
cavalry,  provision  should  be  made  for  the  return  of  the  cavalry  or  its 
support,  and  the  immediate  occupation  of  the  street  or  place,  by 
troops  of  the  other  arms. 

894.  Although  it  is  desirable  that  the  first  fire  of  the  troops  should 
be  as  effective  as  possible,  it  is  of  paramount  importance  that  they 
always  have  the  opportunity  of  checking  a  sudden  onset  by  a  renewal 
of  the  fire.    Therefore,  if  the  fire  is  delivered  while  in  line,  it  will  be 


168  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Special  Scrvicca. 

by  rank,  wing  or  company;  and  particular  care  will  be  taken  to  see 
that  the  fire  of  the  alternate  rank,  wing  or  company,  is  not  delivered 
until  the  rank,  wing  or  company,  first  firing,  has  reloaded.  The 
fire  by  rank  is  preferable,  as  completely  protecting  the  front.  The  fire 
in  column  will  be  specially  provided  for  in  the  regulations  following. 

895.  The  Commander  of  the  military  force,  will  be  cautious  not  to 
allow  any  persons  to  become  intermingled  with  the  troops,  or  to  close 
upon  them,  so  as  to  interfere  with  the  manoeuvres;  also  not  to 
advance  into  any  riotous  or  tumultuous  assemblage  by  a  fiank  move- 
ment, and  especially  to  guard  the  command  against  being  entangled 
with  or  disarmed  by  rioters  while  marching,  or  waiting  for  orders  to 
march,  to  the  scene  of  disturbance. 

896.  Artillery  placed  at  the  heads  of  columns,  or  in  commanding 
positions,  is  most  effective  for  the  clearing  of  streets,  and  will  be 
used  if  other  means  shall  fail.  While  the  guns  are  being  conducted 
to  their  position,  for  opening  the  fire,  it  will  generally  be  desirable 
to  mask  them  with  infantry  or  cavalry.  Case  shot,  canister  and 
grape,  by  reason  of  their  shorter  range  and  greater  execution,  will  be 
employed  in  preference  to  round  shot,  unless  the  object  is  to  destroy 
barricades  or  buildings.  The  artillery  should  always  be  supported 
by  an  adequate  force  of  the  other  arms. 

897.  Light  troops  may  be  employed  advantageously  to  make 
arrests,  to  enter  houses,  and  to  guard  the  fianks  of  columns.  The 
sappers  and  miners  will  parade  with  their  implements  (which  maybe 
of  service  in  forcing  entrances  and  destroying  obstructions )  as  well 
as  their  arms. 

898.  The  troops  arc  authorized  to  defend  from  attack  or  aggression 
their  persons,  their  arms,  and  any  place  or  building  in  which  they 
may  be  stationed.  In  case  of  any  sudden  onset  on  the  troops,  or  any 
place  or  building  occupied  by  them,  or  other  urgent  circumstances 
requiring  instant  attack  or  resistance,  the  notice  and  other  measures 
preliminary  to  the  action  of  the  troops  may  be  dispensed  with.  The 
order  to  fire,  in  this  case,  will  be  given  by  the  military  Commandant 
on  the  spot.    But  it  is  not  for  every  slight  attack  that  the  troops 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  169 

street  Mring  —  LigM  Infantry. 

will  be  authorized  to  fire.  There  must  appear  to  be  a  necessity  for 
for  so  doing,  and  that  other  less  dangerous  measures  will  not  suflSce 
to  secure  the  safety  of  the  troops. 

899.  The  foregoing  rules  apply  more  especially  to  disturbances  in 
which  there  is  no  armed  or  organized  force  opposing  the  constituted 
authorities.  When  an  insurrection  exists,  or  armed  assemblages  are 
to  be  met,  such  measures  of  attack  or  defence  will  be  resorted  to  as 
the  nature  of  the  case  may  reauire. 


STREET    FIRING LIGHT   INFANTRY. 

900.  A  battalion  of  light  infantry  may  be  formed,  for  street  firing, 
into  column,  at  half  distance,  by  division,  company  or  platoon,  accord- 
ing to  the  width  of  the  place  to  be  occupied.  The  present  example 
will  suppose  a  battalion  of  eight  companies  in  column  by  company, 
right  in  front.  By  a  suitable  change  of  commands  the  example  can 
be  made  applicable  to  a  formation  by  division  or  platoon,  and  the 
principles  will  apply  equally  to  a  column  of  any  number  of  sub- 
divisions. 

901.  Preparatory  to  the  movement,  the  companies  must  be  care- 
fully equalized  and  numbered,  in  odd  and  even  files,  from  the  right 
of  companies.*  If  there  be  more  odd  than  even  files,  the  surplus  men 
will  be  thrown  into  the  rank  of  file  closers.  The  men  of  the  odd  and 
even  files  will  be  charged  to  bear  in  mind  their  respective  numbers,  as 
the  accuracy  of  the  movement  is  dependent  upon  such  remembrance. 

902.  The  Colonel,  having  first  caused  arms  to  be  loaded  and 
shouldered,  and  wishing  to  conduct  a  fire  advancing,  the  column  will 
be  halted  at  the  point  where  the  movement  is  to  commence^  and  the 
Colonel  will  command, 

1.  As  Light  Infantry.  2.  Street  firing  advancing. 

3.  By  the  left,  double  files.        4.  March  J 
6.  Commence  firing. 


♦  See  1  Hardee's  Tactics,  «  Company,"  §  5. 
Military.  15 


110  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

street  Firing  — LigM  Infantry, 

At  the  second  command  the  Captain  of  the  first  or  leading  company 
will  caution  his  company  to  stand  fast,  and  both  the  Captain  and 
First  Sergeant  will  take  their  proper  posts  for  firings.  At  the  fourth 
command,  the  first  company  will  stand  fast,  and  all  the  other  com- 
panies ( except  the  eighth  or  rear  company )  will  form  double  files, 
by  the  left.  To  execute  this  movement,  the  front  rank  men  of  each 
of  the  even  files  will  stand  fast ;  the  rear  rank  men  of  such  files  will 
each  step  back  so  as  to  allow  the  front  rank  men  of  the  odd  files 
to  step  in  front  of  them,  leaving  the  proper  intervals  between  the 
ranks ;  the  front  rank  men  of  the  odd  files  will,  by  an  oblique  step 
to  the  left  and  rear,  place  themselves  in  rear  of  the  front  rank  men 
of  the  even  files,  in  the  spaces  just  made  by  the  movement  of  the 
rear  rank  men  of  those  files ;  at  the  same  moment,  the  rear  rank 
men  of  the  odd  files  will  step  obliquely  to  the  left  and  rear,  so  as  to 
place  themselves  at  proper  distances  behind  the  rear  rank  men  of 
the  even  files.  The  Captain  of  each  company  (excepting  the  first 
and  eighth ),  will  place  himself  in  front  of  one  of  the  even  files,  near 
the  centre ;  and  the  first  and  second  sergeants  will  step  in  front  of  the 
even  files  on  the  right  and  left,  respectively,  of  the  company.  The 
file  closers  will  close  to  rank  distance,  and  throw  themselves  in  the 
rear  of  the  nearest  even  files.  The  intervals  which  were  occupied  by 
the  odd  files  will  be  carefully  preserved. 

903.  At  the  fifth  command,  the  Captain  of  the  first  company  will 
command, 

1 .  First  company.  2.  Ready. 

8.  Aim.  4.  Fire. 

Immediately  after  firing,  and  without  waiting  for  any  order,  the  com- 
pany will  shoulder  arms,  and  the  Captain  will  promptly  command, 

\.  First  company.     2.  By  the  right,  dovhle files.     3.  March! 

This  movement  will  be  executed  with  the  utmost  rapidity ;  the  fVont 
rank  men  of  the  odd  files  will  stand  fast ;  the  rear  rank  men  of  those 
files  will  step  backward  so  as  to  allow  the  front  rank  men  of  the  even 
files  to  occupy  their  places ;  the  front  rank  men  of  the  even  files  will 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  lYl 

Street  Mring  —  Light  Infantry. 

step  obliquely  to  the  right  and  rear,  so  as  to  place  themselves  between 
the  front  and  rear  ranks  of  the  odd  files ;  and  the  rear  rank  men  of 
the  even  files  will,  by  a  similar  step,  throw  themselves  at  the  proper 
distance  in  the  rear  of  the  rear  rank  men  of  the  odd  files.  The  Captain 
will  post  himself  in  rear  of  a  central  odd  file ;  the  first  and  second 
sergeants  in  rear  of  the  right  and  left  odd  files ;  the  file  closers  will 
close  upon  the  rear  of  the  nearest  odd  files.  The  intervals  which 
were  occupied  by  the  even  files  will  be  preserved 

904.  As  soon  as  the  first  company  has  fired,  the  Captain  of  the 
second  company  will  command, 

1.  Second  company.    2.  Forward,  adding    8.  March  ! 

at  the  instant  the  first  company  has  doubled  files.  The  second  com- 
pany will  pass,  in  quick  time,  through  the  intervals  in  the  first 
company;  and  when  the  company  has  passed  through,  the  Captain 
will  step  into  the  interval  on  the  right  of  his  central  file,  and  allow 
his  company  to  pass  him,  and  command, 

1.  Second  company.  2.  Halt  ! 

The  second  command  will  be  given  when  the  company  has  reached 
half  distance  in  advance  of  the  first  company;  and  the  company 
will,  at  the  moment  of  halting,  undouble  files.  To  do  this,  the  men 
of  the  odd  files,  at  the  second  command,  will  promptly  step  obliquely 
to  the  right  and  front,  into  their  places  in  line.  The  rear  rank  men 
of  the  even  files  will  close  upon  the  front  rank.  The  first  and  second 
Sergeants  will  quickly  take  their  posts  for  the  firings,  and  the  captain 
will  promptly  cause  the  company  to  fire  and  form  double  files  by 
the  right,  as  prescribed  for  the  first  company,  changing  the  com- 
mands to  conform  to  the  number  of  the  company. 

905.  As  soon  as  the  second  company  has  passed  through  the  inter- 
vals in  the  first  company,  the  Captain  of  the  first  company  will  cause 
his  company  to  load  and  shoulder  arms. 

906.  The  third  company  will  follow  the  advance  of  the  second 
company,  until  it  enters  and  occupies  the  intervals  in  the  first  com- 


172  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

street  Firing  —  Light  Infantry. 

pany,  when  it  will  halt;  companies  in  rear  of  the  third  company, 
will  advance  and  halt  with  that  company.  The  third  company 
and  the  companies  in  its  rear,  will  carefully  preserve  the  intervals 
which  are  to  be  occupied  by  their  odd  files,  respectively. 

907.  When  the  second  company  has  delivered  its  fire,  the  Captain 
of  the  third  company  will  immediately  put  his  company  in  march, 
and  pass  through  the  intervals  in  the  first  and  second  companies,  and 
when  he  has  passed  through  the  second  company,  and  advanced  to 
half  distance,  he  will  cause  his  company  to  halt,  undouble  files,  and 
fire  ;  and  again  to  double  files,  by  the  right,  as  directed  for  the  first 
and  second  companies.  The  second  company,  when  the  third  has 
passed  through,  will  load  and  shoulder  arms,  and  the  third  will  do 
the  same  when  it  is  passed  by  the  fourth.  The  fourth  company,  and 
all  others  in  its  rear,  will  follow  the  directions  given  for  the  third 
company,  and  those  preceding. 

908.  It  will  be  observed  that  in  advancing  to  fire,  the  companies 
doubled  on  the  left  file,  will  at  each  halt,  rest  in  the  intervals  of  the 
companies  doubled  on  the  right  file,  through  which  they  pass. 

909.  The  captain  of  the  first  company,  immediately  after  the 
seventh  company  passes  through  the  intervals  of  his  company,  will 
command, 

1.  First  Company »  2.   Undouhle  files. 

8.  March.  4.  By  the  hft^  double  files. 

6.  March. 

At  the  third  command  the  company  will  undouble  files,  by  the  men 
of  the  even  files  stepping  obliquely  to  the  left  and  front  into  their 
places  in  line,  the  rear  rank  men  of  the  odd  files  will  retake  their 
proper  positions.  At  the  fifth  command  the  files  will  be  doubled  by 
the  left,  as  before  directed ;  and  the  company  Avill  follow  the  seventh 
company,  at  half  distance,  and  execute  all  the  movements  above 
directed,  for  the  other  companies  in  advancing,  and  firing,  and  after 
firing. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  173 

Street  Firing  —  Light  Infantry. 

910.  The  second  company  when  it  is  passed  by  the  first,  and  each 
other  company  as  it  finds  itself,  in  turn,  the  rearmost  of  the  column 
engaged  in  the  firing,  will  promptly  execute  the  movements  directed 
for  the  first  company  in  the  preceding  paragraph ;  and  the  firing  will 
be  continued  without  interruption  until  ordered  to  cease. 

911.  The  eighth  (or  rear)  company  will  not  double  its  files,  nor 
will  it  take  part  in  the  firings.  At  the  command,  "  Street  firing 
advancing,"  its  chief  will  order  it  to  face  by  the  rear  rank,  and  will 
march  it  the  distance  of  its  front,  to  the  rear  ( to  allow  the  engineers 
and  music  to  enter  the  column),  and  there  halt.  At  each  advance  of 
the  column  in  firing,  this  company  will  face  about,  and  advance  with 
the  column ;  keeping  however  at  such  a  distance  from  the  company 
next  preceding  as  not  to  interfere  with  its  movements ;  and  at  each 
halt  of  the  column,  it  will  also  halt,  and  face  to  the  rear.  It  will  not 
fire  unless  the  rear  of  the  column  is  assailed,  and  then  it  will  fire  by 
rank. 

To  Cease  Firing. 

912.  If  the  Colonel  wishes  to  cause  the  firing  to  cease,  he  will  give 
the  signal  or  command,  to  cease  firing,  immediately  after  the  fire  of 
a  company  has  been  delivered. 

913.  At  such  command  or  signal,  the  company  which  would  have 
fired  next  in  succession  ( that  is,  the  leading  company,  doubled  on  the 
left  file),  will  halt  in  the  intervals  of  the  company  which  has  just 
fired.  The  other  companies,  doubled  on  the  left  file,  will  halt  with 
the  leading  company,  so  as  to  occupy  the  intervals  of  the  companies 
doubled  on  the  right  file,  as  far  as  such  companies  extend  down  the 
column.  The  company  which  has  last  fired  will  immediately  load. 
The  column  will  then  be  in  a  position  to  renew  the  fire  or  to  form 
square 

To  Resume  the  Firing. 

914.  If,  after  the  formation  directed  in  the  last  paragraph,  the 
Colonel  desires  to  recommence  the  firing,  he  will  give  the  command  to 

Military.  16* 


lU  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Street  Firing  —  Light  Infantry. 

commence  firing ,  at  which  the  companies  doubled  on  the  left  file  will 
at  once  advance,  and  renew  the  fire  according  to  the  method  before 
prescribed. 

To  Advance  or  Retreat,  after  Firing. 

915.  If,  after  the  column  has  ceased  firing,  the  Colonel  shall  desire 
to  put  it  in  motion,  without  firing,  he  may  march  it  in  advance,  or 
retreat  in  the  formation  directed  to  be  assumed,  after  firing,  for  a 
distance  not  to  exceed  thirty  paces. 

916.  Where  one  company  occupies  the  intervals  of  another,  the  two 
companies  will  be  regarded  for  this  movement,  and  also  for  the 
formation  of  square,  as  one  company,  and  will  be  commanded  by 
the  senior  officer. 

917.  If  the  Colonel  wishes  to  march  the  column  for  a  greater  aistanco 
than  thirty  paces,  he  will  first  cause  the  companies  which  do  not 
occupy  the  intervals  of  other  companies  to  undouble  files 

To  Undouble  the  Companies. 

918.  The  movement  by  which  the  companies  standing  doubled  on 
the  right  file,  in  the  intervals  of  the  companies  doubled  on  the  left 
file,  are  returned  to  the  column  without  passing  to  its  rear,  is  called 
the  undoubling  of  companies. 

919.  If,  after  the  firing  has  ceased,  the  Colonel  wishes  to  undouble 
the  companies,  he  will  command : 

1.  To  the  front — Undouble  Companies.    2.  Forward — March 

At  the  first  command,  the  Captains  of  the  companies  doubled  on  the 
left  file  will  caution  their  companies  to  stand  fast,  and  the  Captains 
of  the  companies  doubled  on  the  right  file  will  caution  their  com- 
panies that  they  are  to  advance.  At  the  command,  March,  the 
companies  doubled  on  the  right  file  will  advance;  and  when  the 
leading  company,  doubled  on  that  file,  has  passed  to  half  distance 
beyond  the  leading  company  doubled  on  the  left  file,  its  Captain  will 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  11 5 

Street  Firing  — Light  Infantry. 

cause  it  to  halt  and  undouble  files,  and  double  them  again  by  the 
left.  The  other  companies  doubled  on  the  right  files  will  mark  time, 
while  the  preceding  company  doubles  on  the  left  files ;  and  when  the 
movement  is  completed,  those  companies  will  advance  through  the 
intervals  of  the  company  which  has  just  doubled  files  by  the  left ; 
and  the  company,  now  leading,  will  itself  halt  at  half  distance  beyond 
the  company  which  has  just  doubled,  and  execute  the  movements 
prescribed  for  that  company.  And  so,  in  turn,  all  the  companies 
doubled  on  the  right  file,  as  they  have  reached  half  distance  in 
advance  of  each  other,  will  undouble  files,  and  again  double  them  by 
the  left. 

920.  If  there  should  not  be  space  enough  to  undouble  the  com- 
panies to  the  front,  the  Colonel  will  command  : 

1.  To  the  rear — Undouble  companies.    3.  Column  forward. 

2.  Battalion,  about  Face  !  4.  March  ! 

At  the  first  command,  the  Captains  of  the  companies  doubled  on  the 
right  file  will  caution  them  to  stand  fast.  At  the  second  command, 
the  companies  doubled  on  the  left  file  will  face  to  the  rear.  At  the 
fourth  command,  the  eighth  company',  and  the  companies  which  have 
faced  about,  will  march,  in  common  time,  to  the  rear.  As  soon  as 
the  first  company,  doubled  on  the  right  file  (at  the  head  of  the 
column  ),  has  its  intervals  opened,  its  Captain  Avill  promptly  cause  it 
to  undouble  files,  and  double  them  again  by  the  left,  face  about,  and 
follow  the  companies  doubled  on  the  left  file.  When  this  company 
has  passed  through  the  intervals  of  the  second  company  doubled  on 
the  right  file,  the  Captain  of  the  second  company  will  cause  it  to 
execute  what  is  prescribed  for  the  first  company  doubled  on  the  right 
file.  The  other  companies  doubled  on  the  right  file  ( if  there  be  any ) 
will,  each  in  its  turn,  execute  the  same  movement.  When  all  the 
companies  which  were  doubled  on  the  right  file  have  thus  entered  the 
column,  the  Colonel  will  cause  it  to  halt;  the  companies,  before 
halting,  will  close  to  their  proper  distance,  and  the  Colonel  will  cause 
the  column  to  face  to  the  front. 


176  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Street  Faring  — Light  Infantry. 

921.  When  the  companies  are  undoubled,  if  the  Colonel  does  not 
intend  to  resume  the  firing  immediately,  he  will  cause  the  files  to  be 
undoubled. 

922.  If  the  Colonel  intends  to  recommence  the  firing,  the  music, 
and  engineers  and  eighth  company  will  retain  the  positions  assumed 
for  the  firing.  If  he  does  not  so  intend,  the  Colonel  will  order  the 
eighth  company  to  face  by  the  front  rank;  when  the  music  and 
engineers  take  their  posts  in  column,  and  the  eighth  company  faces 
by  the  front  rank  and  closes  to  half  distance. 

To  Fire  in  Retreat. 

923.  The  fire  in  retreat  will  be  conducted  on  the  same  general 
principles  as  the  fire  advancing,  but  with  the  exceptions  following. 
The  Colonel  will  command, 

1.  As  light  infantry.  4.  March  ! 

2.  Street  firing  in  retreat.  6.  Commence  firing. 

3.  By  the  left  double  files. 

At  the  second  command,  the  Captain  of  the  leading  company  will 
caution  his  company  to  stand  fast,  and  he  and  his  First  Sergeant  will 
take  their  posts  for  the  firings.  At  the  fourth  command,  all  the 
companies,  except  the  first  and  eighth,  will  double  files,  as  prescribed 
for  the  fire  advancing ;  and  the  Captains  will  throw  themselves  in  rear 
of  the  central  files  of  their  respective  companies.  The  First  and  Second 
Sergeants  and  file  closers  of  such  companies  will  step  in  rear  of  the 
nearest  even  files  of  their  companies.  At  the  fifth  command,  the  Cap- 
tain of  the  first  or  leading  company  will  give  the  proper  commands  to 
cause  his  company  to  fire,  and  to  double  files  by  the  right,  as  above 
directed  for  firing  advancing,  adding,  after  tlie  files  have  been  doubled, 

1.  First — Company.  2.  About  —  Face! 

and  will  place  himself  so  as  to  lead  the  centre  file  ( the  guides  and 
file  closers  placing  themselves  so  as  to  lead  the  nearest  files  of  the 
company),  and  immediately  command, 

Forward — March  1 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  177 

Street  Firing  —  Light  Infantry. 

and  pass  with  his  company  through  the  intervals  in  the  files  of  the 
companies,  towards  the  rear  of  the  column,  and  cause  the  company 
to  halt  at  its  proper  distance  in  rear  of  the  last  company  which  is 
doubled  on  the  left  file,  face  to  the  front,  undouble  files,  double  files 
again  by  the  left,  and  load.  He  will  then  take  his  position  in  rear 
of  the  centre  file  of  his  company. 

924.  The  Captain  of  the  second  company,  when  the  first  has  passed 
through  his  company  towards  the  rear,  will  command, 

1.  Second  company.  6.  Fire  ! 

2.  Undouhle  JUes.  7.  By  the  right  double  jHes. 

3.  March!  8.  March! 

4.  Ready!  9.  About  —  Face! 

5.  Aim!  10.  Forward  —  March! 

and  will  conduct  his  company  towards  the  rear  of  the  column,  in  the 
manner  prescribed  for  the  first  company,  and  there  form  as  directed 
for  the  first  company,  at  its  proper  distance  in  rear  of  that  company, 
and  load. 

925.  The  other  companies  will  successively,  after  the  company  next 
preceding  them  has  fired  and  passed  through  them,  execute  what  has 
been  prescribed  for  the  second  company. 

926.  The  companies  will  shoulder  arms  after  firing,  without  waiting 
for  any  order  so  to  do,  and  all  the  movements  will  be  in  quick  time. 

927.  In  the  fire  in  retreat,  the  eighth  (or  rear)  company  will,  at 
the  command,  "  Street  firing  in  retreat,"  face  by  the  rear  rank  and 
advance,  double  its  front  and  halt.  The  music  and  engineers  will 
take  their  position  in  the  interval  thus  made.  This  company  will 
march  in  retreat,  after  each  company  has  fired,  half  of  its  front  and 
halt.  The  company  will  take  no  part  in  the  movements  of  the 
column  for  firing,  and  will  itself  fire  only  as  directed  for  the  eighth 
company  in  the  fire  advancing. 

928.  Upon  the  order  or  signal  to  cease  firing,  the  companies  which 
have  fired  and  are  passing  to  the  rear  will  continue  their  march 


178  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Street  Firing  —  Infantry. 

through  the  intervals,  and  form  in  the  rear  of  the  column,  as  above 
directed.  The  Colonel  may  resume  the  firing  from  this  position ; 
but  if  he  desire  to  form  a  square,  or  to  march  or  form  into  line, 
he  will  first  cause  the  files  to  be  undoubled. 


INFANTRY. 

929.  A  battalion  doing  duty  as  infantry,  may  be  formed,  for  street 
firing,  at  full  or  half  distance,  into  divisions,  companies  or  platoons, 
according  to  the  width  of  the  place,  leaving  suflSclent  space  on  the 
flanks  to  allow  the  subdivisions,  after  delivering  their  fire,  to  file  to 
the  rear.  The  present  example  will  suppose  a  battalion  formed  in 
column  by  company,  at  half  distance,  right  in  front. 

930.  The  Colonel  having  caused  arms  to  be  loaded,  will  halt  the 
column  at  the  place  where  the  movement  is  to  commence. 

931.  If  the  front  of  the  column  does  not  fill  the  whole  width  of  the 
place,  and  the  flanks  should  be  exposed  to  attack,  one  or  more  com- 
panies may  be  detailed  to  clear  the  flanks  of  the  column,  which  being 
done,  they  will  form,  by  platoon  or  section,  near  the  flanks  of  the 
first  and  rear  companies  ;  the  flankers  in  advance  will  face  to  the 
front,  and  those  in  the  rear,  to  the  rear,  and  throw  as  many  files  into 
line,  on  the  flanks  of  those  companies,  as  may  be  necessary  to  close 
the  street  or  cover  the  battalion. 

932.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  Colonel  will  command, 

1.  As  infantry.  3.  Commence  firing. 

2.  Street  firing  advancing. 

At  the  second  command,  the  Captains  and  First  Sergeants  will  take 
their  proper  posts  for  the  firings.  At  the  third  command,  the  Captain 
of  the  first  company  will  immediately  command, 

1.  First  company.  8.  Aim! 

2.  Ready!  4.  Fire! 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  179 

Street  Firing  —  Infantry, 

On  the  delivery  of  the  fire,  the  company  will  instantly,  and  without 
waiting  for  any  order  for  that  purpose,  shoulder  arms  and  face  to  the 
right ;  and  the  Captain  will  command, 

1.  By  file  right  2.  Quick — March! 

The  Captain  will  conduct  the  company,  in  quick  time,  along  the  right 
flank  towards  the  rear  of  the  column,  and  cause  it  to  halt  opposite 
to  the  centre  of  the  column,  face  outward,  load  and  shoulder  arms. 

933.  Immediately  after  the  first  company  delivers  its  fire,  the  Cap- 
tain of  the  second  company  will  command. 


1.  Second  company.  2.  Forward ,  adding  March 


when  the  first  company  has  nearly  cleared  the  front  of  the  second 
company ;  and  when  his  company  has  advanced  once  its  front,  the 
Captain  will  cause  it  to  halt,  and  command, 

1.  Ready!  2.  Aim!  3.  Fire! 

Immediately  after  firing,  the  company  will  instantly,  and  without 
any  order,  shoulder  arms  and  face  to  the  left  j  and  the  Captain  will 
command, 

1.  By  file  left.  2.  QmiVA;— March! 

and  conduct  the  company  along  the  left  flank  of  the  column  towards 
the  rear,  and  cause  it  to  halt  at  or  near  the  then  centre  of  the  column, 
face  outward,  load  and  shoulder  arms. 

934.  When  the  company  next  to  the  eighth  (or  rear)  company  in 
the  column  shall  have  passed  the  left  flank  of  the  first  company, 
the  Captain  of  the  first  company  will  order  that  company  to  face  to 
the  left  and  to  file  left,  and  will  conduct  the  company  into  the  column. 
If  the  column  be  at  a  halt,  when  he  shall  have  taken  his  position  in 
column,  he  will  halt  the  company,  face  it  to  the  front,  and  dress  it  by 
the  left ;  and  if  the  company  be  not  at  its  proper  distance,  he  will  take 
the  distance  when  the  column  resumes  its  march.  If  the  column  is 
on  the  march  when  the  company  enters  it,  the  Captain,  when  the  left 


180  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Street  Firing  —  Infantry. 

guide  of  his  company  is  nearly  on  a  line  with  the  left  guide  of  the 
preceding  company,  will  command, 

1.  First —  Company.  2.  By  the  right  flank. 

and  when  opposite  such  guide, 

3.  March  ! 
adding,  after  the  company  has  faced  to  the  front, 

Guide  left, 
and  cause  it  to  take  the  step  of  the  column. 

935.  When  the  rear  of  the  column  ( excepting  the  eighth  or  rear 
company)  has  passed  the  right  flank  of  the  second  company,  the 
Captain  of  the  second  company  will  cause  his  company  to  face  to  the 
right  and  file  to  the  right,  into  the  column.  If  the  column  is  at  a  halt,^ 
he  will  halt  the  company  when  it  shall  have  reached  its  position  in  the 
column,  and  face  it  to  the  front ;  and  the  company  will  take  its  proper 
distance  (  if  not  already  at  that  distance )  when  the  column  is  again 
put  in  motion,  as  directed  for  the  first  company.  If  the  column  is 
advancing  when  the  company  enters  the  column,  the  Captain  will,  at 
the  proper  time,  cause  the  company  to  march  by  the  left  flank,  the 
company  taking  the  proper  distance,  the  guide  by  the  left,  and  the 
step  of  the  column. 

936.  The  other  companies,  except  the  eiglith  ( or  rear )  company, 
will  follow  the  advance  of  the  second  company,  and  successively 
execute  what  is  herein  prescribed  for  the  second  company ;  with  this 
exception,  that  all  the  odd  companies  will,  immediately  after  firing^ 
face  to  the  right,  and  be  conducted  along  the  right  flank  of  the  column, 
and  otherwise  conform  to  the  directions  given  for  the  first  company 
after  the  firing,  and  for  coming  into  column.  All  the  comi)anie8  in 
the  column  will  advance  at  each  advance  of  the  leading  company ; 
but  the  eighth  (or  rear)  company  will  observe  the  particular  direc- 
tions for  the  same,  hereinafter  contained. 

937.  The  Captains  of  odd  companies  will  be  particularly  careful 
to  caution  their  companies  that,  after  firing,  the  company  will,  without 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  181 

Street  Firing  —  Infantry. 

waiting  for  orders,  shoulder  arms  and  face  to  the  right ;  and  the 
Captains  of  even  companies  will  caution  their  companies  that,  after 
firing,  they  will  also  instantly  shoulder  arms  and  face  to  the  left. 

938.  At  the  command  for  street  firing,  the  eighth  (  or  rear  )  com- 
pany in  the  column  will  face  by  the  rear  rank,  and  march  the 
distance  of  its  front  and  halt.  As  the  column  advances  after  each 
successive  fire,  it  will  face  about  and  follow  the  columu,  keeping, 
however,  at  such  distance  from  the  company  next  in  advance  of  it, 
as  to  allow  the  companies  which  have  fired  to  enter  the  column  at 
their  proper  distances.  Whenever  the  column  halts,  the  rear  com- 
pany will  also  halt  and  face  to  the  rear.  It  will  take  no  part  in  the 
firing  unless  the  rear  of  the  column  is  attacked,  and  then  it  will  fire 
by  platoon,  or,  if  it  is  flanked,  alternately  with  the  flankers. 

939.  Where  flankers  are  thrown  out,  those  at  the  head  of  the 
column  will  continue  to  advance  abreast  with  the  leading  company, 
and  in  case  of  any  attack  upon  the  head  of  the  column  after  a  fire, 
and  before  the  next  company  is  uncovered,  they  will  cover  it  by  their 
fire.  The  flankers  in  the  rear  will  conform  their  movements  to  those 
of  the  rear  company. 

940.  The  fire  in  retreat  will  be  conducted  in  a  manner  similar  to 
the  fire  advancing,  except  that  the  command  will  be  for  firing  in 
retreat,  and  the  fire  will  be  delivered  by  each  company,  without 
advancing,  as  soon  as  its  front  is  cleared  by  the  preceding  company  ; 
and  after  the  delivery  of  its  fire,  each  company  will  march,  by  the 
flank,  directly  to  the  rear  of  the  column,  enter  it  at  the  proper  distance 
in  rear  of  the  company  next  to  the  eighth  ( or  rear )  company,  coun- 
termarch, and  load. 

941.  In  firing  in  retreat,  the  eighth  ( or  rear )  company  of  the  column, 
at  the  command  to  fire  in  retreat,  will  face  by  the  rear  rank,  march 
double  the  distance  of  its  front,  and  halt.  As  each  company  delivers 
its  fire,  the  eighth  company  will  advance  a  distance  equal  to  half  the 
front  of  the  company,  and  halt.  It  will  not  fire  unless  the  rear  of 
the  column  should  be  attacked.  The  flankers  at  the  head  of  the 
column  will,  as  each  company  retires  after  delivering  its  fire,  protect 

MiLITAST  ]6 


182  GENEKAL  REGULATIONS 

Street  Firing  —  Posts  of  Music,  Engineers,  C(c. 

it,  if  necessary,  by  their  fire;  and  when  the  next  company  is 
uncovered,  will  march  in  retreat  to  the  flanks  of  such  company, 
halt,  and  face  to  the  front.  The  fire  of  the  flankers,  in  every  case, 
will  be  by  rank,  and  the  men  who  fire  will  immediately  reload. 

942.  The  Colonel  will  cause  the  firing  to  cease  by  the  proper  com- 
mand or  signal ;  and  if  the  column  has  been  firing  advancing,  and 
he  shall  desire  to  bring  the  companies  on  the  flanks  into  column, 
he  will  put  the  column  in  march,  and  the  companies  on  the  flanks 
will  enter  it  in  the  manner  above  directed.  The  flankers  may,  or 
may  not,  enter  the  column  as  the  Colonel  shall  direct. 

943.  If  the  fire  has  been  in  retreat^  on  the  command  to  cease  firing, 
the  companies  which  have  fired  will  pass  to  the  rear  and  enter  the 
column,  as  above  directed  ;  and  if  necessary  the  eighth  company  will 
take  further  distance  to  allow  them  to  do  so. 

944.  If  the  column  is  formed  at  full  distance,  the  second  company, 
and  those  following  it,  in  the  fire  advancing,  will  advance  a  distance 
equal  to  double  the  front  of  the  company ;  and  in  the  fire  in  retreat 
the  eighth  (or  rear )  company  will  take  at  each  fire  the  distance  of 
its  full  front. 

POSTS    OF   MUSIC,   ENGINEERS,    AC. 

945.  At  the  command  for  street  firing,  in  advance  or  retreat, 
whether  as  light  infantry  or  infantry,  the  engineers  or  pioneers  and 
music,  will  promptly  place  themselves  between  the  eighth  (or  rear ) 
company,  and  the  company  next  preceding  it  in  the  column. 

946.  They  will  form  compactly  in  ranks ;  the  engineers  or  pioneers 
directly  behind  the  seventh  company  (or  company  next  to  the  rear 
company),  and  the  music  between  them  and  the  eighth  (or  rear) 
company. 

947.  The  engineers  and  music  will  conform  their  movements  to 
those  of  the  eighth  (or  rear  )  company,  and  be  careful  to  preserve 
sufficient  space,  in  the  column,  for  the  companies  which  are  to  outer 
it  after  firing. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  183 


To  Form  the  Battalion  after  Street  Firing. 


TO    FORM   THE    BATTALION    AFTER   STREET    FIRING. 

948.  If,  after  the  execution  of  any  of  the  foregoing  movements  for 
street  firing,  the  Colonel  shall  find  any  of  the  companies  out  of  their 
proper  positions,  and  shall  desire  to  resume  the  original  formation  of 
his  battalion,  he  may  form  his  battalion  into  line  parallel  to  the  left 
flank  of  the  column,  as  follows :  The  Colonel  will  first  cause  the 
column  to  take  full  distance,  and  will  then  cause  the  color  company 
to  wheel  to  the  left  into  line,  and  be  aligned  by  the  right  against  two 
markers  who  will  be  placed  before  it,  two  paces  from  the  left  flank 
of  the  column.  After  the  color  company  is  established,  the  Colonel 
will  command, 

1.  Form  hattalion.  2.  March! 

■when  each  company,  conducted  by  its  chief,  will  march  by  the  flank 
to  the  position  originally  occupied  by  it  in  line.  The  companies  will 
form  successively,  on  the  principle  of  successive  formations,  each 
allowing  the  company  whose  post  is  nearer  to  the  color  to  precede  it 
and  be  first  established.  The  companies  of  the  right  wing  will  march 
by  the  left  flank,  and  those  which  are  to  be  in  the  left  wing,  by  the 
right  flank  of  companies.  The  companies  in  the  right  wing  will  dress 
by  the  left,  throwing  out  their  right  guides ;  those  of  the  left  wing 
will  dress  by  the  right,  throwing  out  the  left  guides;  the  guides  will 
all  face  towards  the  centre;  and  when  the  movement  is  completed, 
the  Colonel  will  command, 

Guides — Posts! 

and  all  the  officers  and  guides  will  take  their  proper  posts  in  line. 
This  movement  will  be  executed  in  quick  time. 


TO    REFORM   THE    COLUMN    AFTER   STREET    FIRING. 

949.  If  only  a  few  of  the  companies  in  column  are  out  of  their 
places,  the  Colonel  may,  without  forming  into  line,  cause  such 
companies  to  resume  the  position  originally  occupied  by  them.  If 
tills  is  desired,  upon  an  intimation  of  the  Colonel,  each  Captain  whoso 


184  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

To  Reform  the  Column  after  Street  Firing. 

comj)any  is  to  change  its  place  will  conduct  it  by  its  right  flank  to  its 
original  post  in  the  column,  and  cause  it  to  countermarch ;  and  when 
the  companies  are  posted,  if  they  are  not  at  proper  distance,  the 
Colonel  will  cause  the  column  to  take  distance,  or  close  it,  as  may  b« 
desired,  and  dress  by  the  left,  or  right,  as  the  column  maybe  right  or 
left  in  front. 

950.  Or  if  a  considerable  number  of  the  companies  be  out  of  their 
places,  and  the  Colonel  shall  not  desire  to  form  line,  he  may  continue 
the  movement  for  street  firing  ( but  without  firing )  until  the  first 
company  shall  be  on  the  right  of  the  column.  To  do  this  he  will, 
if  the  firing  has  been  advancing,  after  the  firing  has  ceased,  command, 

1.  First  company  to  the  front.        3.  Column  forward. 

2.  Advance  without  firing.  4.  March! 

At  the  last  command,  the  companies  will  continue  to  execute  the 
movements  for  the  fire  advancing  (  except  the  firing  and  loading  ), 
and  when  the  first  company  has  reached  its  proper  position  in  the 
front  of  the  column,  it  will  march  forward,  followed  by  the  other 
companies  in  the  column ;  and  the  Captains  and  First  Sergeants  will 
take  their  proper  position  in  column. 

951.  In  the  infantry,  the  companies  on  the  flanks  will  take  their 
position  in  the  column  as  it  passes  them. 

952.  In  the  light  infantry,  the  first  company,  when  it  arrives  at  the 
head  of  the  column  (after  passing  through  the  companies  doubled  on 
the  right  file ),  will  at  once  undouble  its  files  marching ;  and  the 
companies  following  it  will  do  the  same  as  soon  as  they  have  pas.sed 
through  the  companies  doubled  on  the  right  file. 

953.  In  the  firing  in  retreat,  the  Colonel,  to  accomplish  the  same 
result  will,  after  the  fire  has  ceased,  command, 

1.  First  company  to  the  front. 

2.  By  company^  from  the  rights  in  retreat.        8.  March  ! 

At  the  command  March  !  the  companies  on  the  right  of  the  column 
will  successively  execute  the  movements  for  street  firing  in  retreat 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  185 

To  March  in  Column^  prepared  for  Street  Firing  or  to  Form  Square. 

(except  firing  and  loading),  until  the  first  company  has  regained  its 
proper  position  at  the  head  of  the  column.  The  eighth  company  will 
take  distance,  so  as  to  allow  the  companies  marching  to  the  rear 
to  enter  the  column.  The  movement  will  cease  as  soon  as  the  first 
company  has  reached  the  front  of  the  column.  The  Captains  and 
Sergeants  will  take  their  places  in  column.  In  the  light  infantry,  the 
files  will  be  undoubled. 

954.  When  these  movements  are  completed,  if  the  Colonel  shall  so 
intend,  he  will  order  the  eighth  company  to  face  by  the  front  rank ; 
when  the  music  and  engineers  will  take  their  places  in  column,  and 
the  eighth  company  will  face  by  the  front  rank  and  close  to  its  pro- 
per distance. 


TO  MARCH  IN  COLUMN,  PREPARED  FOR  STREET  FIRING  OR 
PREPARED  TO  FORM  SQUARE. 

955.  If  a  battalion  is  to  be  conducted  through  a  dense  crowd,  near 
to  the  place  of  riot  or  disorder,  it  may  be  marched  in  column  at  half 
distance  or  in  square. 

956.  The  column  at  half  distance  will,  under  these  circumstances, 
be  formed  according  to  the  principles  given  for  columns  prepared  to 
form  square  {see  2  ScoWs  Tactics,  ^  1482,  and  following ;  1  Har- 
dee^  §  817,  and  following),  except  that  the  formation  will  usually  be 
by  company,  instead  of  division. 

957.  The  file  closers  of  the  rear  company,  passing  by  the  nearest 
flank,  will  throw  themselves  two  paces  before  the  front  rank,  opposite 
to  their  respective  places,  in  line  of  battle,  and  face  towards  the  head 
of  the  column.  The  field  music  will  form  compactly  in  ranks,  two 
paces  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  the  second  company  (or  division). 
The  corps  of  engineers  will  be  placed  behind  the  centre  of  the 
color  company.  In  no  case  must  there  be  an  elongation  of  the 
column ;  and  if  the  music  cannot  be  placed  as  above  directed  with- 
out increasing  the  distance  between  companies,  it  may  be  divided 
and  placed  behind  the  other  companies. 

MlLITAKT.  16* 


180  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

'-  •  

Street  Firing. 

958.  The  column  will  then  be  in  a  condition  to  form  square  or  to 
commence  the  movement  for  street  firing.  In  case  the  column  is 
ordered  to  commence  street  firing,  the  music  and  engineers  will 
pass  rapidly  by  the  flank  of  the  column  and  place  themselves  com- 
pactly in  ranks  between  the  rear  company  and  the  company  next  in 
advance  of  it  in  the  column ;  the  engineers  leading,  and  the  whole 
faced  to  the  front. 


PROM    COLUMN    FOR    STREET    FIRING,    AS    LIGHT    INFANTRY 
ADVANCING,    TO    FORM    SQUARE. 

959.  If  the  Colonel  shall  desire  to  form  square  while  the  column  is 
firing,  advancing  as  light  infantry  in  a  column  by  company,  he  will 
first  cause  the  fire  to  cease  ;  and  when  the  column  has  assumed  the 
formation  directed  after  firing  {vide  ^  913),  he  will  command, 

1.  Form  Square.  ^^        3.  March  ! 

2.  Right  and  left  into  line,  wheel. 

At  the  first  command,  the  Captains  of  companies  formed  on  the  even 
files,  which  do  not  occupy  the  intervals  of  other  companies,  will 
promptly  cause  the  files  to  be  undoubled.  At  the  second  command, 
the  Captain  in  front  of  the  two  companies  formed  together  in  double 
files  at  the  head  of  the  column  ( and  which  will  constitute  the  first 
front  of  the  square)  will  caution  those  companies  to  stand  fast,  and 
place  himself  in  the  front  rank,  in  the  centre  of  the  two  companies 
(the  centre  file  stepping  back  so  as  to  allow  him  to  take  his  place ), 
and  cause  the  companies  to  dress  by  the  centre.  He  will  then,  if  he 
be  the  senior  officer  of  the  two  companies,  exchange  i)laces  with  the 
other  Captain,  now  in  the  rear.  The  Captains  of  all  the  other  com- 
panies, except  the  eighth  (or  rear)  company,  will  caution  their  com- 
mands to  wheel  by  platoon  to  the  right  and  left,  into  line.  The 
Captain  of  the  eighth  (or  rear)  company  will  cause  his  company  to 
face  to  the  front,  if  not  already  so  faced,  and  command, 

1.  Eighth  Company ,  forward.  2.   Guide  left ^ 

and  place  himself  two  paces  outside  of  the  left  flank. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  187 

Street  Firing. 

960.  At  the  command,  March  !  the  companies,  except  those  in  the 
first  front,  and  the  eighth  (or  rear)  company,  will  wheel  by  platoon 
to  the  right  and  left  into  line,  and  dress  towards  the  flank  resting  on 
the  first  front.  In  the  companies  in  which  the  intervals  are  occupied 
by  other  companies,  the  right  platoons  of  both  companies  will  wheel, 
as  one  platoon,  to  the  right;  and  the  left  platoons,  in  the  same  man- 
ner, to  the  left.  The  Captains  of  the  companies  formed  on  the  odd 
files  will  command  the  platoons  wheeling  to  the  right ;  and  the  Cap- 
tains of  the  companies  formed  on  the  even  files,  the  platoons  wheel- 
ing to  the  left.  In  the  companies  which  have  undoubled  files,  the 
Captains  will  command  the  platoons  wheeling  to  the  right ;  and  the 
First  Lieutenants  the  platoons  wheeling  to  the  left.  The  field  and  staff 
officers,  engineers  and  music  will  enter  the  square.  The  eighth  com- 
pany will  advance  and  close  the  square,  and  then  face  to  the  rear. 
The  right  and  left  files  of  the  first  and  fourth  fronts  will  face  to  the 
right  and  left,  outward.  When  the  movement  is  completed  the 
Colonel  will  command, 

Guides  —  Posts  ! 
and  the  chief  of  the  fourth  front  and  the  guides  will  enter  the  square. 

961.  The  senior  Captain  in  the  first  front  will  command  that  front; 
the  Lieutenant-Colonel  will  command  the  second  front ;  the  Major 
the  third  front ;  and  if  either  be  absent,  the  senior  Captain  in  the 
front  will  command.  The  Captain  of  the  eighth  company  will 
command  the  fourth  front.  The  Commanders  of  fronts  will  take 
post  four  paces  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  their  respective  fronts.  The 
music  and  engineers  are  near  to  the  fourth  front 

962.  The  square  thus  formed  will  present  a  four-rank  formation 
on  its  first  front  and  a  portion  of  the  second  and  third  fronts  ( if 
several  of  the  companies  shall  have  fired  before  the  formation  of 
square),  and  the  residue  of  the  square  will  be  in  two  ranks.  The 
parts  of  the  second  and  third  fronts,  which  are  in  two  ranks,  will  be 
aligned  on  the  front  ranks  of  the  portions,  in  four  ranks.  The  fire  of 
the  portions  of  the  square  in  four  ranks  will  be  given  as  directed  for 
the  square  in  four  ranks,  as  hereafter  prescribed. 


188  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

street  Firing. 

963.  In  the  particulars  in  which  no  other  direction  is  given,  this 
formation  of  square  will  be  conformed  to  the  principles,  given  in  the 
books  of  tactics  and  herein,  for  the  formation  of  squares  ;  and  such 
square  may  advance  or  retreat,  or  be  formed  into  column  or  reduced, 
in  the  same  manner  as  other  squares. 

TO    FORM    SQUARE    FROM    COLUMN,    AS    LIGHT    INFANTRY. 

964.  If  the  column  has  not  been  engaged  in  firing,  or  if  the  com- 
panies have  been  undoubled,  the  files  will  be  undoubled,  and  the 
square  will  be  formed  as  directed  for  the  infantry. 

965.  If  the  column  has  hecn  firing  in  retreat,  the  companies  which 
have  fired  will  take  their  places  in  the  rear  of  the  column,  before  the 
movement  to  form  square  is  commenced. 

TO  FORM  SQUARE  FROM  A  COLUMN  OF  INFANTRY. 

966.  If  the  column  is  acting  as  infantry,  it  will  be  closed  to 
half  distance,  if  not  already  in  that  position ;  the  Colonel  will  give 
the  proper  commands  for  the  formation  of  square ;  and  if  the  coluraQ 
be  formed  by  company,  the  platoons  of  all  the  companies,  except  the 
first  and  last,  will  wheel  outward,  as  prescribed  for  companies 
when  the  column  is  formed  by  division. 

967.  At  the  command  to  form  square,  the  companies  which  have 
fired,  if  the  column  is  engaged  in  firing,  will  pass  rapidly  to  the  rear, 
and  enter  the  column  in  their  proper  places. 

968.  The  leading  and  rear  companies  will  form  the  first  and  fourth 
fronts  of  the  square,  the  rear  company  advancing  so  as  to  close  the 
square,  and  facing  by  the  rear  rank ;  if  there  arc  any  companies  on  the 
flanks  which  have  not  been  brought  into  column,  they  will  enter  the 
square  and  be  posted  in  close  order  by  platoon  or  section,  as  a  reseiTc, 
in  the  rear  of  the  first  and  fourth  fronts  of  the  square.  In  all  other 
respects  the  movement  will  conform  to  the  ordinary  formation  of 
square.  A  square  formed  from  a  column  by  company  will  be  reduced, 
in  the  same  manner  as  in  squares  formed  from  a  column  of  divisions, 
by  commands  suited  to  the  case. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  189 

Street  Firing.  , 

969.  If  a  square  is  to  be  formed  from  a  column,  for  street  firing, 
the  music  and  engineers  will  enter  the  square,  and  form  compactly 
in  ranks  near  to  the  fourth  front,  and  next  to  the  flankers,  if 
any  are  formed  in  rear  of  that  front.  When  the  square  moves, 
they  will  face  and  move  with  it. 

THE    SQUARE    IN    FOUR   RANKS. 

970.  A  battalion  doing  duty  as  infantry  or  light  infantry  may 
form  a  square  in  four  ranks,  in  the  manner  directed  in  the  Lighi 
Infantry  tactics.  ( See  2  Hardee^ s  Tactics,  ^  910,  ^-c. ) 

971.  It  is  proposed  to  use  the  square  in  four  ranks,  marching,  for  the 
purpose  of  entering  a  compact  mass  or  crowd  of  persons,  when  neces- 
sary, during  a  riot  or  public  disturbance ;  and  the  directions  herein 
given,  in  regard  to  that  formation,  have  reference  to  such  service. 

972.  A  square  in  four  ranks  may  be  formed  from  a  column  by 
division  or  company,  according  to  the  directions  contained  in  2  Har- 
dee's Tactics,  ^^  911,  955.  Tho  propriety  of  forming  it  by  division 
or  company  will  depend  on  the  number  of  men  in  each  company, 
and  the  width  of  the  street  or  place  to  be  entered. 

973.  The  formation  of  square  in  four  ranks,  as  directed  in  this 
article,  will  give  an  efficiency  of  fire,  a  security  from  attack  on  the 
fianks  and  rear,  and  a  solidity  and  force,  combined  with  mobility, 
which  peculiarly  commend  it  for  the  service  contemplated,  and  espe- 
cially so,  when  the  troops  are  called  to  act  in  dark  and  crowded 
streets  in  the  night  time. 

TO   MARCH   IN    SQUARE. 

974.  The  square,  whether  in  two  or  four  ranks,  may,  for  the  pur- 
pose contemplated  by  these  regulations,  march,  in  advance  or  retreat, 
in  common  time,  to  any  distance. 

975.  The  command  for  the  march  in  square  will  indicate  the  front 
by  which  it  is  to  move,  and  the  battalion  will  conform  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed in  2  Hardee's  Tactics,  %  854,  et  seq.,  except  as  herein  other- 


190  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Street  fHring, 

wise  directed.  In  moving  by  the  first  or  fourth  fronts,  the  reverse 
front  will  face  about,  and  the  second  and  third  fronts  face  towards 
the  leading  front  and  march  by  the  flank ;  the  reserves,  &c.,  con- 
forming to  the  movement. 

976.  The  utmost  care  will  always  be  had,  in  these  movements,  to 
prevent  an  elongation  in  the  fronts  of  tlie  square  which  are  marching 
by  the  flank.  At  every  halt  each  front  will  instantly  face  outward, 
and  any  interval  caused  in  marching  will  be  promptly  closed.  The 
Captains  on  the  several  fronts  are  specially  charged  with  this  duty. 

977.  While  marching  in  square,  the  Commandant  of  the  battalion 
will  carefully  watch  the  several  fronts,  and.  upon  the  appearance  of 
any  wavering  or  opening  in  the  ranks,  he  will  halt  the  square  or 
cause  it  to  mark  time.  If  the  Commandant  does  not  desire  to  face 
the  fronts  of  the  square  outward,  and  intends  to  resume  his  march 
when  steadiness  is  restored  or  the  intervals  are  closed,  he  will,  instead 
of  ordering  a  halt,  command, 

1.  Battalion.  2.  Mark  Time.  3.  March  ! 

At  this  command  the  battalion  will  mark  time,  and  all  intervals  will 
be  instantly  closed  and  the  ranks  aligned,  without  waiting  for  distinct 
commands  for  the  purpose ;  and  when  the  Colonel  shall  wish  to  resume 
the  march  he  will  command, 

1.  Battalion.  2.  Forward — March! 

and  the  march  will  be  resumed  in  common  time. 

978.  The  square  being  in  march,  if  the  Colonel  shall  desire  to 
quicken  the  march,  to  gain  a  particular  point,  he  may  order  it 
to  march  in  quick  time;  but  the  quick  march  will  not  be  continued 
to  exceed  the  distance  of  thirty  paces. 

979.  Each  Commandant  of  a  front  of  the  square  will  promptly 
repeat  all  orders  given  by  the  Colonel,  in  order  that  tliey  may  be 
dlstirctly  understood  in  every  part  of  the  square. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  191 


Street  Firing. 


TO    FIRE    IN    SQUARE. 

980.  The  fire,  in  squares  in  the  two-rank  formation,  whether  of 
infantry  or  light  infantry,  may  be  by  file  or  by  rank. 

981.  The  fire  hyjile  will  be  conducted  according  to  the  prescribed 
method. 

982.  The  fire  by  ranJc  is  to  be  conformed  to  the  system  prescribed 
in  the  light  infantry  tactics. 

983.  The  fire,  in  squares  in  the  four-rank  formation,  is  also  by  file 
or  by  rank,  but  in  both  these  fires  the  first  and  second  ranks  only 
lake  part.  The  third  and  fourth  ranks  stand  at  support,  or  shoul- 
dered arms. 

984.  To  prevent  confusion  in  the  commands,  when  the  square  is  in 
four  ranks,  and  the  fire  is  to  be  by  rank,  the  command  will  be 
addressed  to  the  Jirst  and  second  ranks,  instead  of  the  front  and 
rear  rank. 

985.  To  increase  the  fire  of  the  square  in  four  ranks,  for  the 
special  purposes  contemplated  by  this  article,  the  third  and  fourth 
ranks  will  be  allowed  to  participate  in  the  fire,  by  loading  for  the 
second  rank,  as  provided  in  the  following  paragraphs. 

986.  The^re  with  three  ranks,  as  it  will  be  called  by  way  of  dis- 
tinction, will  be  conducted  according  to  the  principles  laid  down  in 
1  Scott's  Tactics^  ^  291,  et  seq.,  for  firing  by  two  ranks  in  the  three- 
rank  formations,  but  with  some  alterations  of  detail.  The  command 
given  will  be  to  fire  with  three  ranks.  The  first  rank  will  fire  and 
load  continuously ;  the  second  rank  will  fire  and  exchange  muskets 
with  the  third  rank,  as  particularly  described  in  the  next  paragraph  ; 
the  third  rank  loads  for  the  second  rank ;  the  fourth  rank  ordinarily 
remains  at  shouldered  or  support  arms.  The  reserved  fire  of  the 
fourth  rank  will  thus  be  held  ready  to  meet  sudden  emergencies ; 
and  may  also  be  useful  to  repulse  an  attack  from  the  roofs  or  windows 
of  buildings,  without  withdrawing  the  proper  fire  of  the  fronts  of  the 
square.     If,  however,  an  additional  fire  shall  be  demanded,  by  reason 


192  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 


street  Firing. 


of  one  of  the  fronts  of  the  square  being  fiercely  assailed,  the  fourth 
rank  may  also  exchange  muskets  with  the  third  rauk,  as  subse- 
quently described;  but  this  exchange  of  muskets,  by  the  fourth 
rank,  will  only  be  for  a  short  period,  and  will  be  discontinued  as 
soon  as  the  particular  emergency  shall  cease. 

987.  In  the  fire  with  three  ranks,  each  man  of  the  second  rank,  after 
having  fired,  will  pass  his  piece,  with  the  right  hand,  to  the  third 
rank  man  of  his  file;  the  latter  will  take  it  with  the  left  baud,  aud 
pass  his  own  with  the  right  hand  to  the  second  rank  man,  who  will 
receive  it  with  the  right  hand,  fire  it,  reload  and  fire  the  same  piece  the 
second  time,  when  he  will  repass  it  to  the  third  rank  man,  and  thus 
in  continuation,  so  that  the  second  rank  will  always  fire  twice  in 
succession  the  same  piece  before  passing  it  to  the  third  rank  man, 
except  the  first  time. 

988.  In  the  fire  with  four  ranks,  as  it  will  be  called,  the  first  rank 
man  of  each  file  fires  and  loads  continuously ;  the  second  rank  man 
fires,  and  passes  his  musket,  with  the  right  hand,  to  the  third 
rank  man,  who  receives  it  with  his  left  hand,  and  passes  his  own 
musket  with  his  right  hand  to  the  second  rank  man,  who  receives 
it  with  his  right  liand;  the  third  rank  man  instantly  exchanges 
muskets,  in  the  same  manner,  with  the  fourth  rank  man,  who  at 
once  commences  loading ;  the  second  rank  man  fires  the  piece  which 
he  has  received  from  the  third  rank  man,  and  instantly  exchanges,  in 
the  manner  before  indicated,  with  the  third  rank  man,  and  the  third 
rank  man  loads.  The  second  rank  man  then  fires  and  loads,  and 
again  fires  the  piece  which  ho  has  loaded ;  and  the  process  of 
exchange,  and  firing  and  loading,  above  detailed,  is  again  gone 
through  with ;  the  second  rank  man  always  loading  his  piece  after 
each  third  fire. 

989.  In  the  fire  with  four  ranks,  at  the  command,  Ready  !  the  third 
and  fourth  ranks  order  arms,  and  during  the  fire,  as  often  as  they 
have  reloaded  (or  have  a  loaded  musket  ready  to  exchange),  they 
resume  the  position  of  order  arms.  In  the  fire  with  three  ranks,  the 
third  rank  men  also  order  arms  in  the  manner  above  directed. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  198 

Street  Firing. 

990.  The  fire  with  three  ranks,  and  also  with  four  ranks,  will  be 
conducted  upon  the  principles  of  the  fire  by  file.  The  fire  will  com- 
mence on  the  right  of  the  front  of  the  square. 

991.  The  men  of  tho  second  rank  will  be  especially  warned  against 
passing  to  the  rear  pieces  which  have  not  been  discharged;  and 
before  passing  them,  the  second  rank  men  will  half-cock  the  pieces, 
and  notice  whether  smoke  issues  from  the  tube.  If  it  does  not,  they 
will  always  pick,  if  necessary,  and  recap  the  piece  (unless  provided 
with  the  Maynard  primer),  and  fire  it.  And  if,  in  loading,  any  man 
shall  find  that  the  piese  has  not  been  discharged,  he  will  always  pick. 

992.  The  third  and  fourth  rank  men  will  have  particular  care,  in 
passing  loaded  muskets,  to  see  that  the  muzzles  are  kept  elevated, 
acd  that  the  pieces  are  at  half-cock. 

993.  The  command  to  fire  will  be  addressed  to  the  particular  front 
by  which  the  fire  is  to  be  made ;  or  to  two  or  more  fronts,  naming 
them,  if  the  fire  is  )equired  to  be  made  by  more  than  one  front. 

994.  The  men  of  the  outer  files  of  the  first  and  fourth  fronts 
(who  will  have  faced  outward)  will  fire  alternately.  If  there  be  four 
ranks,  the  first  and  third  rank  men  in  the  files  will  begin  the  fire, 
and  when  they  have  reloaded  the  second  and  fourth  rank  men  will 
fire.     The  fire  may  be  direct  or  oblique,  as  may  be  required. 

995.  When  an  angle  of  the  square  is  attacked,  it  will  be  protected 
by  the  oblique  fire  of  the  fronts  of  the  square  by  which  the  angle  is 
formed,  the  left  front  using  the  right  oblique  and  the  right  front,  the 
left  oblique  fire. 

996.  The  Colonel  will  have  near  him,  at  all  times  during  the  firing, 
a  drummer  or  bugler,  to  give  the  signal  to  cease  firing.  At  the  signal 
to  cease  firing,  all  the  commissioned  officers  will  instantly  command. 

Cease — Firing. 

997.  The  signal  to  cease  firing  will  indicate  that  the  whole  square 
is  to  cease  firing.  When  it  is  intended  that  only  a  portion  of  the 
square  shall  cease  or  change  its  fire,  and  that  the  residue  shall  con- 

MlLITABT.  17 


194  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Remarks  —  Troops  in  Campaign  —  Organization  of  an  Army  in  the  FHeld. 

tinue  to  fire,  the  signal  to  cease  firing  need  not  be  given,  and  the 
command  to  cease  firing  will  be  communicated  or  addressed  specially 
to  the  portion  concerned. 

KEMARKS    ON    STREET    FIRING, 

998.  Either  of  the  systems  of  street  firing  herein  given,  although 
designated  to  be  respectively  for  the  infantry  and  light  infantry,  may 
be  practiced  by  regiments  doing  duty  in  either  arm,  whether  organ- 
ized as  infantry,  artillery  or  riflemen. 

999.  Neither  of  the  systems  of  street  firing  in  column,  herein  pre- 
scribed, can  be  safely  used  at  night  in  a  place  so  dark  that  the  troops 
cannot  readily  distinguish  each  other.  Officers,  under  those  circum- 
stances, are  recommended  to  assume  the  formation  in  square. 

1000.  The  peculiar  formations  and  firings  prescribed  in  this  article 
form  no  part  of  the  general  system  of  tactics.  They  will  be  only 
practiced  with  a  view  to  proficiency  in  the  special  service,  under  the 
laws  of  this  state,  to  which  they  have  reference. 


ARTICLE  XLVI. 

TROOPS    IN    CAMPAIGN. 

1001.  The  following  article,  from  the  United  States  Army  Regula- 
tions, relating  to  troops  in  campaign,  is  published  for  the  informa- 
tion of  the  military  forces  of  the  state,  and  also  for  their  government, 
as  far  as  the  same  can  be  made  applicable,  upon  occasions  of  war, 
invasion  or  insurrection. 

ORGANIZATION    OF    AN    ARMY    IN    THE    FIELD. 

1002.  The  formation  by  divisions  is  the  basis  of  the  organization 
ftnd  administration  of  armies  in  the  field. 

1003.  A  division  consists  usually  of  two  or  three  brigades,  either 
of  infantry  or  cavalry,  and  troops  of  other  corps  in  the  necessary 
proi>ortion. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  195 

War  ( Organization  of  an  Army  in  the  Feld )  Service. 

1004.  A  brigade  is  formed  of  two  or  more  regiments.  The  first 
number  takes  the  right. 

1005.  Mixed  brigades  are  sometimes  formed  of  infantry  and  light 
cavalry,  especially  for  the  advanced  guards, 

1006.  As  the  troops  arrive  at  the  rendezvous,  the  General  command- 
ing in  chief  will  organize  them  into  brigades  and  divisions. 

1007.  The  light  cavalry  is  employed  as  flankers  and  partisans,  and 
generally  for  all  service  out  of  the  line, 

1008.  Heavy  cavalry  belongs  to  the  reserve,  and  is  covered,  when 
necessary,  in  marches,  camps  or  bivouacs,  by  light  troops  or  infantry 
of  the  line. 

1009.  The  arrangement  of  the  troops,  on  parade  and  in  order  of 
battle,  is  :  1st,  the  light  infantry ;  2d,  infantry  of  the  line ;  3d,  light 
cavalry ;  4th,  cavalry  of  the  line ;  5th,  heavy  cavalry.  The  troops  of 
the  artillery  and  engineers  are  in  the  centre  of  the  brigades,  divisions 
or  corps  to  which  they  are  attached ;  marines  take  the  left  of  other 
infantry ;  volunteers  and  militia  take  the  left  of  regular  troops  of  the 
same  arm,  and,  among  themselves,  regiments  of  volunteers  or  militia 
of  the  same  arm  take  place  by  lot.  This  arrangement  is  varied  by 
the  General  commanding  in  chief,  as  the  circumstances  of  war  render 
expedient. 

1010.  Brigades  in  divisions,  and  divisions  in  the  army,  are  numbered 
from  right  to  left ;  but  in  reports  of  military  operations,  brigades  and 
divisions  are  designated  by  the  name  of  the  General  commanding 
them. 

1011.  The  order  of  regiments  in  brigades,  and  of  brigades  in  divi- 
sions, may  be  changed  by  the  Commander  of  the  division  for  impor- 
tant reasons,  such  as  the  weakness  of  some  corps,  or  to  relieve  one 
from  marching  too  long  at  the  rear  of  the  column.  Such  changes 
must  be  reported  to  the  General  commanding  in  chief. 

1012.  The  General  commanding  in  chief  assigns  the  Generals  of 
divisions  and  oi  brigades  to  their  respective  commands  when  the 
assignment  is  not  made  by  the  Department  of  War. 


196  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

War  (^Organization  of  an  Army  in  the  Field^  Service. 

1013.  The  General  of  brigade  inspects  his  troops  in  detail,  by  com- 
panies, when  he  takes  command,  and  at  the  opening  of  the  campaign, 
and  as  often  as  may  be  necessary  to  ascertain  exactly  their  condition. 
The  General  of  division  makes  similar  inspections  when  he  thinks 
proper.  At  these  inspections  the  Generals  examine  the  arms,  clothing, 
equipments,  harness,  horses,  &c.,  direct  the  necessary  repairs,  and 
designate  the  men  and  horses  to  remain  in  dep6t  or  march  with  the 
train. 

1014.  Reports  of  inspections  are  made  by  the  General  of  brigade  to 
the  General  of  division,  and  by  the  General  of  division  to  the  General 
commanding  in  chief. 

1015.  During  marches  and  all  active  oi)erations,  Generals  of  brigade 
keep  themselves  exactly  informed,  by  reports  of  corps  and  by  their 
inspections,  of  the  actual  strength  of  the  regiments,  so  as  always, 
and  especially  after  an  engagement,  to  make  accurate  returns  to  the 
General  of  division. 

1016.  Staff  officers,  and  officers  of  engineers,  ordnance  and  artillery, 
according  to  the  nature  of  the  service,  are  assigned  to  the  head-quarters 
of  armies  and  divisions,  and  detached  brigades,  by  order  of  the  Gene- 
ral commanding  in  chief,  when  the  distribution  of  these  officers  has 
not  been  regulated  by  the  War  Department.  The  necessary  staff  will 
bo  assigned  to  Commanders  of  brigades. 

1017.  When  an  engineer  or  other  officer  is  charged  with  directing 
an  expedition  or  making  a  reconnoissance,  without  having  command 
of  the  escort,  the  Commander  of  the  escort  shall  consult  him  on  all 
the  arrangements  necessary  to  secure  the  success  of  the  operation. 

1018.  Staff  officers,  and  Commanders  of  engineers,  ordnance  and 
artillery,  report  to  their  immediate  Commanders  the  state  of  the  sup- 
plies, and  whatever  concerns  the  service  under  their  direction,  and 
receive  their  orders,  and  communicate  to  them  those  they  receive 
from  their  superiors  in  their  own  corps. 

1019.  The  senior  officer  of  engineers,  of  ordnance,  and  the  depart- 
ments of  the  general  staff  serving  at  the  chief  head-quarters  in  the 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  ]97 

War  (^Contributions  —  Orderlies')  Service. 

field,  will  transmit  to  the  bureau  of  his  department  at  Washington, 
at  the  close  of  the  campaign,  and  at  such  other  times  as  the  Com- 
mander in  the  field  may  approve,  a  full  report  of  the  operations  of  his 
department,  and  whatever  information  to  improve  its  service  he  may 
be  able  to  furnish. 

1020.  The  report  of  the  Officer  of  engineers  will  embrace  plans  of 
military  works  executed  during  the  campaign,  and,  in  case  of  siege,  a 
journal  of  the  attack  or  defence. 

CONTRIBUTIONS. 

1021.  When  the  wants  of  the  army  absolutely  require  it,  and  in 
other  cases,  under  special  instructions  from  the  War  Department,  the 
Greneral  commanding  the  army  may  levy  contributions  in  money  or 
kind  on  the  enemy's  country  occupied  by  the  troops.  No  other  Com- 
mander can  levy  such  contributions  without  written  authority  from 
the  General  commanding  in  chief. 

ORDERLIES,  ^ 

1022.  At  the  opening  of  a  campaign,  the  Commander  of  an  army 
determines  and  announces  in  orders  the  number  of  orderlies,  mounted 
or  foot,  for  the  Generals,  and  the  corps  or  reghnents  by  which  they 
are  to  be  supplied,  and  the  periods  at  which  they  shall  be  relieved. 

1023.  In  marches,  the  mounted  orderlies  follow  the  Generals,  and 
perform  the  duty  of  escorts,  or  march  with  orderlies  on  foot  at  the 
head  of  the  division  or  brigade. 

1024.  The  staff  officer  who  distributes  the  orderlies  to  their  posts 
sends  with  them  a  note  of  the  time  and  place  of  departure ;  those 
relieved  receive  a  like  note  from  the  staff  officer  at  the  head-quarters. 

1025.  Mounted  soldiers  are  employed  to  carry  dispatches  only  in 
special  and  urgent  cases. 

1026.  The  precise  time  when  the  dispatch  is  sent  off,  and  the  rate 
at  which  it  is  to  be  conveyed,  are  to  be  written  clearly  on  the  covers 
of  all  letters  transmitted  by  a  mounted  orderly,  and  the  necessary 

Military.  17* 


198  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

War  (_ Depots  — Camps')  Service. 

instructions  to  him,  and  the  rate  of  travel  going  and  returning,  are  to 
be  distinctly  explained  to  him. 

dep6ts. 

1027.  The  grand  dep6ts  of  an  army  are  established  where  the  military 
operations  would  not  expose  them  to  be  broken  up.  Smaller  depots 
are  organized  for  the  divisions  and  the  several  arms.  They  are  com- 
manded by  officers  temporarily  disabled  for  field  service,  or  by  other 
officers  when  necessary,  and  comprise,  as  much  as  possible,  the  hos- 
pitals and  dep6ts  for  convalescents.  When  conveniently  placed, 
they  serve  as  points  for  the  halting  and  assembling  of  detachments. 
They  receive  the  disabled  from  the  corps  on  the  march;  and  the 
officers  in  command  of  the  dep6ts  send  with  the  detachments  to  the 
army  those  at  the  depdts  who  have  become  fit  for  service. 

CAMPS. 

1028.  Camp  is  the  place  where  troops  are  established  in  tents,  in 
huts,  or  in  bivouac.  Cantonments  are  the  inhabited  places  which 
troops  occupy  for  shelter  when  not  put  in  barracks.  The  camping- 
party  is  a  detachment  detailed  to  prepare  a  camp. 

1029.  Reconnoissances  should  precede  the  establishment  of  the  camp. 
For  a  camp  of  troops  on  the  march,  it  is  only  necessary  to  look  to 
the  health  and  comfort  of  the  troops,  the  facility  of  the  communica- 
tions, the  conveinence  of  wood  and  water,  and  the  resources  in  pro- 
visions and  forage.  The  ground  for  an  intrenched  camp,  or  a  camp  to 
cover  a  country,  or  one  designed  to  deceive  the  enemy  as  to  the 
strength  of  the  army,  must  be  selected,  and  the  camp  arranged  for  the 
object  in  view. 

1030.  The  camping-party  of  a  regiment  consists  of  the  Regimental 
Quartermaster  and  Quartermaster-Sergeant,  and  a  Corporal  and  two 
men  per  company.  The  General  decides  whether  the  regiments  camp 
separately  or  together,  and  whether  the  police  guard  shall  accompany 
the  camping-party,  or  a  larger  escort  shall  be  sent. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  199 


War  (_  Camps')  Service. 


1031.  Neither  baggage  nor  led  horses  are  permitted  to  move  with 
the  camping-party. 

1032.  When  the  General  can  send  in  advance  to  prepare  the  camp, 
he  gives  his  instructions  to  the  Chief  of  the  Quartermaster's  Depart- 
ment, who  calls  on  the  regiments  for  their  camping-parties,  and  is 
accompained,  if  necessary,  by  an  Engineer  to  propose  the  defences 
and  communications. 

1033.  The  watering-places  are  examined,  and  signals  placed  at  those 
that  are  dangerous.  Any  work  required  to  make  them  of  easier  access 
is  done  by  the  police  guard  or  Quartermaster's  men.  Sentinels,  to  be 
relieved  by  the  guards  of  the  regiment,  when  they  come  up,  are  placed 
by  the  camping-party  over  the  water,  if  it  is  scarce,  and  over  the 
houses  and  stores  of  provisions  and  forage  in  the  vicinity. 

1034.  If  the  camping-party  does  not  precede  the  regiment,  the 
Quartermaster  attends  to  these  things  as  soon  as  the  regiment  reaches 
the  camp. 

1035.  On  reaching  the  ground,  the  infantry  form  on  the  color  front ; 
the  cavalry  in  rear  of  its  camp. 

1036.  The  Generals  establish  the  troops  in  camp  as  rapidly  as  pos- 
sible, particularly  after  long,  fatiguing  marches. 

1037.  The  number  of  men  to  be  furnished  for  guards,,  pickets  and 
orderlies  ;  the  fatigue  parties  to  be  sent  for  supplies ;  the  work  to  be 
done,  and  the  strength  of  the  working  parties ;  the  time  and  place 
for  issues;  the  hour  of  marching,  &c.,  are  then  announced  by  the 
Brigadier-Generals  to  the  Colonels,  and  by  them  to  the  Field  officers  ; 
the  Adjutant  and  Captains,  formed  in  front  of  the  regiment,  the 
First  Sergeants  taking  post  behind  their  Captains.  The  Adjutant 
then  makes  the  details,  and  the  First  Sergeants  warn  the  men.  The 
regimental  officer  of  the  day  forms  the  picket,  and  sends  the  guards 
to  their  posts.  The  colors  are  then  planted  at  the  centre  of  the  color 
line,  and  the  arms  are  stacked  on  the  line ;  the  fatigue  parties  to  pro- 
cure siipplies,  and  the  working  parties,  form  in  rear  of  the  arms ;  the 
men  not  on  detail  pitch  the  tents. 


200  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

,  I  ,  .      I  War  (^Camp  of  Infantry)  Service. 

1038.  If  the  camp  is  near  the  enemy,  the  picket  remains  under  anna 
until  the  return  of  the  fatigue  parties,  and,  if  necessary,  is  reinforced 
by  details  from  each  company. 

1039.  In  the  cavalry,  each  troop  moves  a  little  in  rear  of  the  point 
at  which  its  horses  are  to  be  secured,  and  forms  in  one  rank ;  the  men 
then  dismount ;  a  detail  is  made  to  hold  the  horses ;  the  rest  stack 
their  arms  and  fix  the  picket  rope  ;  after  the  horses  are  attended  to, 
the  tents  are  pitched,  and  each  horseman  places  his  carbine  at  the 
side  from  the  weather,  and  hangs  his  sabre  and  bridle  on  it. 

1040.  The  standard  is  then  carried  to  the  tent  of  the  Colonel.         j 

1041.  The  terms  front,  flank,  right,  left,  file,  and  rank,  have  thi 
same  meaning  when  applied  to  camps  as  to  the  order  of  battle. 

1042.  The  front  of  the  camp  is  usually  equal  to  the  front  of  the 
troops.  The  tents  are  arranged  in  ranks  and  files.  The  number  of 
ranks  varies  with  the  strength  of  the  companies  and  the  size  of  the 
tents. 

1043.  No  officer  will  be  allowed  to  occupy  a  house,  although  vacant 
and  on  the  ground  of  his  camp,  except  by  permission  of  the  com^ 
mauder  of  the  brigade,  who  shall  report  it  to  the  commander  of  the 
division. 

1044.  The  staff  officer  charged  with  establishing  the  camp  will  design 
nate  the  place  for  the  shambles.     The  offal  will  be  buried. 

OAMP  OF  INFANTRY. 

1045.  Each  company  has  its  tents  in  two  files,  facing  on  a  street 
perpendicular  to  the  color  line.  The  width  of  the  street  depends  on 
the  front  of  the  camp,  but  should  not  be  less  than  five  paces.*  The 
interval  between  the  ranks  of  tents  is  two  paces ;  between  the  files  of 
tents  of  adjacent  companies,  two  paces ;  between  regiments,  twenty;- 
two  paces. 

*  The  pace  Is  thirty  inches,  or  two  and  one-half  feoU 


I'l;ih 

Camp  or  a  U(^<jiiiuMil  of  liiraulry. 


^ AitvrlJlii'il  iiiiriril 
'  Prison  ITS 


S 


.lAv/.s-  Sink. 


Colnr  Ihif  »  «  ^^'Uk'^lfA^^'"^. 


Kilrlii'Tis  %. 

■        ■        ■-■  ■■        ■■         n  ^ 

ri.r.s  Policp  &uaril        SuIIit  ii   r  s 

■  xxaa  ■  ■ 

/'oiiijitiin/  Offirrrs 
A'Sn"      M  <>M       L.I'  ''  yl'O'       M  Sur'i         ?■ 


Iliiiiiiiiiir  Trnin 

^         ^        %         %        X'^3^        ^        %  T        »      ,^ 


Ofturrs  Suik. 

HIH/>ilirs 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  201 

War  (^Camp  of  Infantry)  Service. 

1046.  Tlie  color  line  is  ten  paces  in  front  of  the  front  rank  of  tente. 
The  kitchens  are  twenty  paces  behind  the  rear  rank  of  company  tents  ; 
the  non-commissioned  staff  and  sutler,  twenty  paces  in  rear  of  the 
kitchens  ;  the  company  officers,  twenty  paces  farther  in  rear ;  and  the 
field  and  staff,  twenty  paces  in  rear  of  the  company  officers. 

1047.  The  company  officers  are  in  rear  of  their  respective  companies ; 
the  Captains  on  the  right. 

1048.  The  Colonel  and  Lieutenant-Colonel  are  near  the  centre  of  the 
line  of  field  and  staff;  the  Adjutant,  a  Major  and  Surgeon,  on  the 
right ;  the  Quartermaster,  a  Major  and  Assistant  Surgeon,  on  the  left.* 

1049.  The  police  guard  is  at  the  centre  of  the  line  of  the  non-com- 
missioned staff,  the  tents  facing  to  the  front,  the  stacks  of  arms  on 
the  left. 

1050.  The  advanced  post  of  the  police  guard  is  about  two  hundred 
paces  in  front  of  the  color  line,  and  opposite  the  centre  of  the  regi- 
ment, or  on  the  best  ground ;  the  prisoners'  tent  about  four  paces  in 
rear.  In  a  regiment  of  the  second  line,  the  advanced  post  of  the 
police  guard  is  two  hundred  paces  in  rear  of  the  line  of  its  field  and 
staff. 

1051.  The  horses  of  the  staff  officers  and  of  the  baggage  train  are 
twenty-five  paces  in  rear  of  the  tents  of  the  field  and  staff;  the  wagons 
are  parked  on  the  same  line,  and  the  men  of  the  train  camped  near 
them. 

1052.  The  sinks  of  the  men  are  one  hundred  and  fifty  paces  in  front 
of  the  color  line ;  those  of  the  officers  one  hundred  paces  in  rear  of 
the  train.  Both  are  concealed  by  bushes.  When  convenient,  the 
sinks  of  the  men  may  be  placed  in  rear  or  on  a  flank.  A  portion  of 
the  earth  dug  out  for  sinks  to  be  thrown  back  occasionally. 

1053.  The  front  of  the  camp  of  a  regiment  of  one  thousand  men  in 
two  ranks  will  be  four  hundred  paces,  or  one-fifth  less  paces  than 

*  In  regiments  in  which  there  is  but  one  Major,  the  camp  will  be  conformed  to 
that  prescribed  for  the  infantry  in  the  article  "  Camps  for  Instruction." 


202  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 


War  (  Camp  of  Cavalry )  Service. 


the  number  of  files,  if  the  camp  is  to  have  the  same  front  as  the 
troops  in  order  of  battle.  But  the  front  may  be  reduced  to  one 
hundred  and  ninety  paces  by  narrowing  the  company  streets  to  five 
paces ;  and  if  it  be  desirable  to  reduce  the  front  still  more,  the  tents 
of  companies  may  be  pitched  in  single  file,  those  of  a  division  facing 
on  the  same  street 

CAMP  OF  CAVALRY. 

1054.  In  the  cavalry,  each  company  has  one  file  of  tents ;  the  tents 
opening  on  the  street  facing  the  left  of  the  camp. 

1055.  The  horses  of  each  company  are  placed  in  a  single  file,  facing 
the  opening  of  the  tents,  and  are  fastened  to  pickets  planted  firmly 
in  the  ground,  from  three  to  six  paces  from  the  tents  of  the  troops. 

1056.  The  interval  between  the  file  of  tents  should  be  such,  that 
the  regiment  being  broken  into  column  of  companies  [  as  indicated  in 
plate  ],  each  company  should  be  on  the  extension  of  the  line  on  wliich 
the  horses  are  to  be  picketed. 

1057.  The  streets  separating  the  squadrons  are  wider  than  those 
between  the  companies  by  the  interval  separating  squadrons  in  line ; 
these  intervals  are  kept  free  from  any  obstruction  throughout  the 
ciimp. 

1058.  The  horses  of  the  rear  rank  are  placed  on  the  left  of  those  of 
their  file-leaders. 

1059.  The  horses  of  the  Lieutenants  are  placed  on  tlie  right  of  their 
platoons ;  those  of  the  Captains  on  the  right  of  the  company. 

1060.  Each  horse  occupies  a  space  of  about  two  paces.  The  number 
of  horses  in  the  company  fixes  the  depth  of  the  camp,  and  the  distance 
between  the  files  of  tents ;  the  forage  is  placed  between  the  tents. 

1061.  The  kitchens  are  twenty  paces  in  front  of  each  file  of  tents. 

1062.  The  non-commissioned  officers  are  in  the  tents  of  the  front 
rank.  Camp-followers,  teamsters,  &c. ,  are  in  the  rear  rank.  The 
police  guard  in  the  rear  rank,  neai-  the  centre  of  the  regiment. 


Vhne  3 


13Vpacfs         20 


I  I  ■ 


m  -  '  ■   ■' 


•     ■•■•■•'■* 


t-^  •        a9a333Z33r>33> 


•  ■•■•■ 


/    -■  ^   t§     .'    ^ 


^   v/  V^   N  "^  ^ 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  203 

War  (^Camp  of  Artillery^  Service. 

1063.  The  tents  of  tlie  Lieutenants  are  thirty  paces  in  rear  of  the 
file  of  their  company ;  the  tents  of  the  Captains  thirty  paces  in  rear 
of  the  Lieutenants. 

1064,  The  Colonel's  tent  thirty  paces  in  rear  of  the  Captains',  near 
the  centre  of  the  regiment ;  the  Lieutenant-Colonel  on  his  right ; 
the  Adjutant  on  his  left ;  the  Majors  on  the  same  line,  opposite  the 
second  company  on  the  right  and  left ;  the  Surgeon  on  the  left  of  the 
Adjutant.* 

1065,  The  field  and  staff  have  their  horses  on  the  left  of  their  tents, 
on  the  same  line  with  the  company  horses  ;  sick  horses  are  placed  in 
one  line  on  the  riglit  or  left  of  the  camp.  The  men  who  attend  them 
have  a  separate  file  of  tents ;  the  forges  and  wagons  in  rear  of  this 
file.  The  horses  of  the  train  and  of  camp-followers  are  in  one  or 
more  files  extending  to  the  rear,  behind  the  right  or  left  squadron. 
The  advanced  post  of  the  police  guard  is  two  hundred  paces  in  front, 
opposite  the  centre  of  the  regiment ;  the  horses  in  one  or  two  files. 

1066.  The  sinks  for  the  men  are  one  hundred  and  fifty  paces  in 
front,  those  for  officers  one  hundred  paces  in  rear  of  the  camp. 

CAMP  OF  ARTILLERY. 

1067.  The  artillery  is  encamped  near  the  troops  to  which  it  is  attached, 
so  as  to  be  protected  from  attack,  and  to  contribute  to  the  defence  of 
the  camp.  Sentinels  for  the  park  are  famished  by  the  artillery,  and, 
when  necessary,  by  the  other  troops. 

1068,  For  a  battery  of  six  pieces  the  tents  are  in  three  files  :  one  for 
each  section ;  distance  between  the  ranks  of  tents  fifteen  paces  ;  tents 
opening  to  the  front.  The  horses  of  each  section  are  picketed  in  one 
file,  ten  paces  to  the  left  of  the  file  of  tents.  In  the  horse  artillery,  or 
if  the  number  of  horses  makes  it  necessary,  the  horses  are  in  two  files 
on  the  right  and  left  of  the  file  of  tents.     The  kitchens  are  twenty- 

*  When  there  is  but  one  Major  to  a  regiment,  the  post  of  the  Colonel  will  be  in 
the  centre  of  the  regiment,  on  the  lino  of  the  field  and  staff;  and  that  of  the  Lieu- 
tenant-Colonel in  the  right  wing,  in  place  of  the  senior  Major. 


204  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 


War  (_ Bivouacs')  Service. 


five  paces  in  front  of  the  front  rank  of  tents.  The  tents  of  the  officers 
are  in  the  outside  files  of  company  tents,  twenty-five  paces  in  rear 
of  the  rear  rank ;  the  Captain  on  the  right,  the  Lieutenants  on  the  left. 

1069.  The  park  is  opposite  the  centre  of  the  camp,  forty  paces  in  rear 
of  the  officers'  tents.  The  carriages  in  files,  four  paces  apart ;  distance 
between  ranks  of  carriages  sufficient  for  the  horses  when  harnessed 
to  them ;  the  park  guard  is  twenty-five  paces  in  rear  of  the  park. 
The  sinks  for  the  men  one  hundred  and  fifty  paces  in  front ;  for  the 
officers  one  hundred  paces  in  rear.  The  harness  is  in  the  tents  of 
the  men. 

BIVOUACS. 

1070.  A  regiment  of  cavalry  being  in  order  of  battle,  in  rear  of  the 
ground  to  be  occupied,  the  Colonel  breaks  it  by  platoons  to  the  right. 
The  horses  of  each  platoon  are  placed  in  a  single  row,  and  fastened 
as  prescribed  for  camps ;  near  the  enemy,  they  remain  saddled  all 
jiight,  with  slackened  girths.  The  arms  are  at  first  stacked  in  rear 
of  each  row  of  horses ;  the  sabres,  with  the  bridles  hung  on  them, 
are  placed  against  the  stacks. 

1071.  The  forage  is  placed  on  the  right  of  each  row  of  horses.  Two 
stable-guards  for  each  platoon  watch  the  horses. 

1072.  A  fire  for  each  platoon  is  made  near  the  color  line,  twentjr 
paces  to  the  left  of  the  row  of  horses.  A  shelter  is  made  for  the  men 
around  the  fire,  if  possible,  and  each  man  then  stands  his  arms  and 
bridle  against  the  shelter. 

1073.  The  fires  and  shelter  for  the  officers  are  placed  in  rear  of  the 
line  of  those  for  the  men. 

1074.  The  interval  between  the  squadrons  must  be  without  obstruc- 
tion throughout  the  whole  depth  of  the  bivouac. 

1075.  The  interval  between  the  shelters  should  be  such  that  the 
platoons  can  take  up  a  Une  of  battle  freely  to  the  front  or  rear. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  205 


War  (  Contonments  )  Service. 


1076.  The  distance  from  the  enemy  decides  the  manner  in  which 
the  horses  are  to  be  fed  and  led  to  water.  Wlien  it  is  permitted  to 
unsaddle,  the  saddles  are  placed  in  the  rear  of  the  horses. 

1077.  In  infantry,  the  fires  are  made  in  rear  of  the  color  line,  on  the 
ground  that  would  be  occupied  by  the  tents  in  camp.  The  companies 
are  placed  around  them,  and,  if  possible,  construct  shelters.  When 
liable  to  surprise,  the  infantry  should  stand  to  arms  at  day  break, 
and  the  cavalry  mount  until  the  return  of  the  reconnoitring  parties. 
If  the  arms  are  to  be  taken  apart  to  clean,  it  must  be  done  by  detach- 
ments, successively. 

CANTONMENTS. 

1078.  The  cavalry  should  be  placed  under  shelter*  whenever  the 
distance  from  the  enemy,  and  from  the  ground  where  the  troops  are 
to  form  for  battle,  permit  it.  Taverns  and  farm-houses,  with  large 
stables  and  free  access,  are  selected  for  quartering  them. 

1079.  The  Colonel  indicates  the  place  of  assembling  in  case  of  alarm. 
It  should  generally  be  outside  the  cantonment ;  the  egress  from  it 
should  be  free  ;  the  retreat  upon  the  other  positions  secure,  and  roads 
leading  to  it  on  the  side  of  the  enemy  obstructed. 

1080.  The  necessary  orders  being  given,  as  in  establishing  a  camp, 
the  picket  and  grand  guards  are  posted.  A  sentinel  may  be  placed 
on  a  steeple  or  high  house,  and  then  the  troops  are  marched  to  the 
quarters.     The  men  sleep  in  the  stables,  if  it  is  thought  necessary. 

1081.  The  above  applies  in  the  main  to  infantry.  Near  the  enemy, 
companies  or  platoons  should  be  collected,  as  much  as  possible,  in 
the  same  houses.  If  companies  must  be  separated,  they  should  be 
divided  by  platoons  or  squads.     All  take  arms  at  day  break. 

1082.  When  cavalry  and  infantry  canton  together,  the  latter  furnish 
the  guards  by  night,  and  the  former  by  day. 

1083.  Troops,  cantoned  in  presence  of  the  enemy,  should  be  covered 
6y  advanced  guards  and  natural  or  artificial  obstacles.  Cantonments 
taken  during  a  cessation  of  hostilities  should  be  established  in  rear 

Military.  18 


206  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

War  Service, 

of  a  line  of  defence,  and  in  front  of  the  point  on  which  the  troops 
would  concentrate  to  receive  an  attack.  The  General  commanding 
in  chief  assigns  the  limits  of  their  cantonments  to  the  divisons,  the 
commanders  of  divisions  to  brigades,  and  the  commanders  of  brigades 
post  their  regiments.  Tlie  position  of  each  corps,  in  case  of  attack,  is 
carefully  pointed  out  by  the  Generals. 

HEAD-QUARTERS. 

1084.  Generals  take  post  at  the  centre  of  their  commands,  on  the 
main  channels  of  communication.  If  troops  bivouac  in  presence  of 
the  enemy,  the  Generals  bivouac  with  them. 

MILITARY  EXERCISES. 

1085.  When  troops  remain  in  camp  or  cantonment  many  days,  the 
Colonels  require  them  to  be  exercised  in  the  school  of  the  battalion 
and  squadron.  Regiments  and  brigades  encamped  by  division  are 
not  united  for  drills  withoiit  the  permission  of  the  General  of  division. 
The  troops  must  not  be  exercised  at  the  firings  without  the  authority 
of  the  General  commanding  in  chief.  The  practice  of  the  drums 
must  never  begin  with  the  "general,"  or  the  "march  of  the  regi- 
ment ;"  nor  the  trumpets  with  the  sound  "  to  horse."  The  hour  for 
practice  is  always  announced. 

ORDERS. 

1086.  In  the  field,  verbal  orders  and  important  sealed  orders  are 
carried  by  officers,  and,  if  possible,  by  staff  oflicers.  "When  orders 
are  carried  by  orderlies,  the  place  and  time  of  departure  will  be 
marked  on  them,  and  place  and  time  of  delivery  on  the  receipt. 

DISPATCHES. 

1087.  Dispatches,  particularly  for  distant  corps^  should  be  intrusted 
only  to  officers  to  whom  their  contents  can  be  confided.  In  a  country 
occupied  by  the  enemy  the  bearer  of  dispatches  should  be  accom- 
panied by  at  least  two  of  the  best  mounted  men  ;  should  avoid  towns 
and  villages,  and  the  main  roads ;  rest  as  little  as  possible,  and  only 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  207 

War  Service. 

at  out-of-the-way  places.  Wliere  there  is  danger,  he  should  send  one 
of  the  men  in  advance,  and  be  always  ready  to  destroy  his  dispatches. 
He  should  be  adroit  in  answering  questions  about  the  army,  and  not 
to  be  intimidated  by  threats 

WATCHWORDS. 

1088.  The  parole  and  countersign  are  issued  daily  from  the  principal 
head- quarters  of  the  command.  The  countersign  is  given  to  the 
sentinels  and  non-commissioned  officers  of  guards ;  the  parole  to  the 
commissioned  officers  of  guards.  The  parole  is  usually  the  name  of 
a  general,  the  countersign  of  a  battle. 

1089.  When  the  parole  and  countersign  cannot  be  communicated 
daily  to  a  post  or  detachment  which  ought  to  use  the  same  as  the  main 
body,  a  series  of  words  may  be  sent  for  some  days  in  advance. 

1090.  If  the  countersign  is  lost,  or  one  of  the  guard  deserts  with  it, 
the  Commander  on  the  spot  will  substitute  another,  and  report  the 
case  at  once  to  the  proper  superior,  that  immediate  notice  may  be 
given  to  head-quarters. 

ISSUES, 

1091.  At  what  time  and  for  what  period  issues  are  made,  must  depend 
on  circumstances,  and  be  regulated  in  orders.  When  an  army  is  not 
moving,  rations  are  generally  issued  for  four  days  at  a  time.  Issues 
to  the  companies  of  a  regiment,  and  the  fatigues  to  receive  them,  are 
superintended  by  an  officer  detailed  from  the  regiment.  Issues  are 
made  from  one  end  of  the  line  to  the  other,  beginning  on  the  right 
and  left  alternately.  An  issue  commenced  to  one  regiment  will  not 
be  interrupted  for  another  entitled  to  precedence  if  it  had  been  in  place. 

THE  ROSTER,  OR  DETAILS  FOR  SERVICE. 

1092.  The  duties  performed  by  detail  are  of  three  classes.  The  first 
class  comprises  :  1st,  grand  guards  and  outposts  ;  2d,  interior  guards, 
as  of  magazine,  hospital,  &c. ;  3d,  orderlies ;  4th,  police  gua^-ds. 


208  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

War  (_The  Roster,  or  Details  for  Service)  Service. 

The  secmd  class  comprises  :  1st,  detachments  to  protect  laborers  on 
military  works,  as  field-works,  communicatious,  &c, ;  2d,  working 
parties  on  such  works  ;  3d,  detachments  to  protect  fatigues. 

The  third  cUiss  are  all  fatigues,  without  arms,  in  or  out  of  camp. 

In  the  cavalry,  stable  guards  form  a  separate  roster,  and  count 
before  fatigue. 

1093.  The  rosters  are  distinct  for  each  class.  Officers  are  named  on 
them  in  the  order  of  rank.  The  details  are  taken  in  succession  in 
the  order  of  the  roster,  beginning  at  the  head. 

1094.  Lieutenants  form  one  roster,  and  first  and  second  Lieutenants 
are  entered  on  it  alternately.  The  senior  first  Lieutenant  is  the  first 
on  the  roster ;  the  senior  second  Lieutenant  is  the  second,  &c.  The 
Captains  form  one  roster,  and  are  exempt  from  fatigues,  except  to 
superintend  issues.  A  Captain  commanding  a  battalion  temporarily 
is  exempt  from  detail,  and  duty  falling  to  him  passes.  Lieutenant- 
Colonels  and  Majors  are  on  one  roster.  They  may  be  detailed  for 
duties  of  the  first  and  second  classes,  when  the  importance  of  the 
guards  and  detachments  requires  it.  Their  roster  is  kept  at  division 
and  brigade  head-quarters.  In  the  company,  sergeants,  corporals 
and  privates  form  distinct  rosters. 

1095.  Officers,  non-commissioned  officers  and  soldiers  take  duties 
of  the  first  class  in  the  order  stated,  viz.,  the  first,  for  the  detail,  takes 
the  grand  guards  ;  the  next,  the  interior  guards  ;  the  last,  the  police 
guard ;  and  the  same  rule  in  regard  to  the  details  and  duties  of  the 
second  class.  In  the  details  for  the  third  class,  the  senior  officer 
takes  the  largest  party.  The  party  first  for  detail  takes  the  service 
out  of  camp. 

1096.  When  the  officer  whose  tour  it  is,  is  not  able  to  take  it,  or  is 
not  present  at  the  hour  of  marching,  the  next  after  him  takes  it. 
When  a  guard  has  passed  the  chain  of  sentinels,  or  an  interior  guard 
lias  reached  its  post,  the  officer  whose  tour  it  was  cannot  then  take 
it.  He  takes  the  tour  of  the  officer  who  has  taken  his.  When  an 
officer  is  prevented  by  sickness  from  taking  his  tour,  it  passes.  These 
rules  apply  equally  to  non-commissioned  officers  and  soldiers. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  209 

War  (  Police  Guard )  Service. 

1097.  Duties  of  the  first  and  second  classes  are  credited  on  tlie  roster 
when  the  guards  or  detachments  have  passed  the  chain  of  sentinels, 
or  an  interior  guard  has  reached  its  post ;  fatigue  duties  when  the 
parties  have  passed  the  chain  or  begun  the  duties  in  camp. 

1098.  Every  officer,  non-commissioned  officer  or  soldier,  on  duty  of 
the  first  class,  or  who  is  of  the  next  detail  for  such  duty,  takes,  when 
relieved,  the  duty  of  the  second  or  third  class  that  has  fallen  to  him 
during  that  time,  unless  he  has  marched  for  detachment  more  than 
twenty-four  hours. 

1099.  Soldiers  march  with  knapsacks  on  all  duties  of  the  first  class ; 
and  with  arms  and  equipments  complete  on  all  working  parties  out 
of  the  camp,  unless  otherwise  ordered.  In  the  cavalry,  horses  are 
packed  for  all  mounted  service. 

1100.  In  the  cavalry,  dismounted  men,  and  those  whose  horses  are 
not  in  order,  are  preferred  for  the  detail  for  dismounted  service. 
Those  who  are  mounted  are  never  employed  on  those  services  if  the 
number  of  the  other  class  are  sufficient. 

1101.  Every  non-commissioned  officer  and  soldier  in  the  cavalry, 
detailed  for  dismounted  service,  mast,  before  he  marches,  take  to  the 
First  Sergeant  of  the  troop,  or  Sergeant  of  his  squad,  his  horse  equip- 
ments and  his  valise  ready  packed.  In  case  of  alarm,  the  First 
Sergeant  sees  that  the  horses  of  these  men  are  equipped  and  led  to 
the  rendezvous. 

1102.  These  rules  in  regard  to  the  roster  apply  also  to  service  in 
garrison. 

POLICE  GUARD. 

1103.  In  each  regiment  a  police  guard  is  detailed  every  day,  consist- 
ing of  two  sergeants,  three  corporals,  two  drummers,  and  men  enough 
to  furnish  the  required  sentinels  and  patrols.  The  men  are  taken 
from  all  the  companies,  from  each  in  proportion  to  its  strength. 
The  guard  is  commanded  by  a  Lieutenant,  under  the  supervision  of 
a  Captain,  as  regimental  officer  of  the  day.     It  furnishes  ten  sentinels 

Military.  18* 


210  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

War  (  Police  Guard )  Service. 

at  the  camp :  one  over  the  arms  of  the  guard ;  one  at  the  Colonel's 
tent ;  three  on  the  color  front,  one  of  them  over  the  colors ;  three, 
fifty  paces  in  rear  of  the  field  officers'  tents  ;  and  one  on  each  flank, 
Lotween  it  and  the  next  regiment.  If  it  is  a  flank  regiment,  ont 
more  sentinel  is  posted  on  the  outer  flank. 

1104.  An  advanced  post  is  detached  from  the  police  guard,  com- 
posed of  a  sergeant,  a  corporal,  a  drummer,  and  nine  men  to  fumislx 
sentinels  and  the  guard  over  the  prisoners.  The  men  are  the  first 
of  the  guard  roster  from  each  company.  The  men  of  the  advanced 
post  must  not  leave  it  under  any  pretext.  Their  meals  are  sent  to 
the  post.  The  advanced  post  furnishes  three  sentinels :  two  a  few 
paces  in  front  of  the  post,  opposite  the  right  and  left  wing  of  the 
regiment,  posted  so  as  to  see  as  far  as  possible  to  the  front,  and  one 
over  the  arms. 

1105.  In  the  cavalry,  dismounted  men  are  employed  in  preference 
on  the  police  guard.  The  mounted  men  on  guard  are  sent  in  succes- 
sion, a  part  at  a  time,  to  groom  their  horses.  The  advanced  post  is 
always  formed  of  mounted  men. 

1106.  In  each  company  a  corporal  has  charge  of  the  stable  guard. 
His  tour  begins  at  retreat,  and  ends  at  morning  stable-call.  Tlie 
stable  guard  is  large  enough  to  relieve  the  men  on  post  every  two 
hours.  They  sleep  in  their  tents,  and  are  called  by  the  corporal  when 
wanted.  At  retreat  he  closes  the  streets  of  the  camp  with  cords,  or 
uses  other  precautions  to  prevent  the  escape  of  loose  horses. 

1107.  The  officer  of  the  day  is  charged  with  the  order  and  cleanli- 
ness of  the  camp ;  a  fatigue  is  furnished  to  him  when  the  number  of 
prisoners  is  insufficient  to  clean  the  camp.  He  has  the  calls  beaten 
by  the  drummer  of  the  guard. 

1108.  The  police  guard  and  the  advanced  post  pay  the  same  honors 
as  other  guards.     They  take  arms  when  an  armed  body  approaches. 

1109.  The  sentinel  over  the  colors  has  orders  not  to  permit  them  to 
be  moved  except  in  presence  of  an  escort ;  to  let  no  one  touch  them 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  211 

War  (  Police  Guard )  Service^ 

but  the  color-bearer,  or  the  sergeant  of  the  police  guard  when  he  is 
accompanied  by  two  armed  men. 

1110.  The  sentinels  on  the  color  front  permit  no  soldier  to  take 
arms  from  the  stacks,  except  by  order  of  some  officer,  or  a  non-com- 
missioned officer  of  the  gu^xd.  The  sentinel  at  the  Colonel's  tent  has 
orders  to  warn  him,  day  or  night,  of  any  unusual  movement  in  or 
about  the  camp. 

1111.  The  sentinels  on  the  front,  flanks  and  rear,  see  that  no  soldier 
leaves  camp  with  horse  or  arms  unless  conducted  by  a  non-commis- 
sioned officer.  They  prevent  non-commissioned  officers  and  soldiers 
from  passing  out  at  night,  except  to  go  to  the  sinks,  and  mark  if  they 
return.  They  arrest,  at  any  time,  suspicious  persons  prowling  about 
the  camp,  and  at  night,  every  one  who  attempts  to  enter,  even  the 
soldiers  of  other  corps.  Arrested  persons  are  sent  to  the  officer  of  the 
guard,  who  sends  them,  if  necessary,  to  the  officer  of  the  day. 

1112.  The  sentinels  on  the  front  of  the  advanced  post  have  orders 
to  permit  neither  non-commissioned  officers  nor  soldiers  to  pass  the 
line,  without  reporting  at  the  advanced  post ;  to  warn  the  advanced 
post  of  the  approach  of  any  armed  body,  and  to  arrest  all  suspicious 
persons.  The  sergeant  sends  persons  so  arrested  to  the  officer  of  the 
guard,  and  warns  him  of  the  approach  of  any  armed  body. 

1113.  The  sentinel  over  the  arms  at  the  advanced  post  guards  the 
prisoners  and  keeps  sight  of  them,  and  suffers  no  one  to  converse  with 
them  without  permission.  They  are  only  permitted  to  go  to  the  sinks 
one  at  a  time,  and  under  a  sentinel. 

1114.  If  any  one  is  to  be  passed  out  of  camp  at  night,  the  officer  of 
the  guard  sends  him  under  escort  to  the  advanced  post,  and  the 
sergeant  of  the  post  has  him  passed  over  the  chain. 

1115.  At  retreat,  the  officer  of  the  guard  has  the  roll  of  his  guard 
called,  and  inspects  arms,  to  see  that  they  are  loaded  and  in  order ; 
and  visits  the  advanced  posts  for  the  same  purpose.  The  sergeant  oi 
the  police  guard,  accompanied  by  two  armed  soldiers,  folds  the  colors 
and  lays  them  on  the  trestle  in  rear  of  the  arms.     He  sees  that  the 


212  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 


War  (^Police  Guard")  Service. 

sutlers'  stores  are  then  closed,  and  the  men  leave  them,  and  that  the 
kitchen  fires  are  put  out  at  the  appointed  hour. 

1116.  The  officer  o£  the  day  satisfies  himself  frequently  during  the 
night,  of  the  vigilance  of  the  police  guard  and  advanced  post.  He 
prescribes  patrols  and  rounds  to  be  made  by  the  officer  and  non-com- 
missioned officers  of  the  guard.  The  officer  of  the  guard  orders  them 
when  he  thinks  necessary.     He  visits  the  sentinels  fre-quently. 

1117.  At  reveille,  the  police  guard  takes  arms ;  the  officer  of  the 
guard  inspects  it  and  the  advanced  post.  The  sergeant  replants  the 
colors  in  place.  At  retreat  and  reveille  the  advanced  post  takes  arms ; 
the  sergeant  makes  his  report  to  the  officer  of  the  guard  when  he  visits 
the  post. 

1118.  When  necessary,  the  camp  is  covered  at  night  with  small 
outposts,  forming  a  double  chain  of  sentinels.  These  posts  are  under 
the  orders  of  the  commander  of  the  police  guard,  and  are  visited  by 
his  patrols  and  rounds. 

1119.  The  officer  of  the  guard  makes  his  report  of  his  tour  of  service, 
including  tlie  advanced  post,  and  sends  it,  after  the  guard  is  marched 
off,  to  the  officer  of  the  day. 

1120.  When  the  regiment  marches,  the  men  of  the  police  guard 
return  to  their  companies,  except  those  of  the  advanced  post.  In  tlie 
cavalry,  at  the  sound  "boot  and  saddle,"  the  officer  of  the  guard 
sends  one-half  the  men  to  saddle  and  pack;  when  the  regiment 
assembles,  all  the  men  join  it. 

1121.  When  the  camping-party  precedes  the  regiment,  and  the  new 
police  guard  marches  with  the  camping-party,  the  guard,  on  reaching 
the  camp,  forms  in  line  thirty  paces  in  front  of  the  c<»ntre  of  the 
ground  marked  for  the  regiment.  Tlie  officer  of  the  guard  furnishes 
the  sentinels  required  by  the  commander  of  the  camping-party.  The 
advanced  post  takes  its  station. 

1122.  The  advanced  post  of  the  old  police  guard  takes  charge  of  the 
prisoners  on  the  march,  and  marches,  bayonets  fixed,  at  the  centra 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  21  a 

War  (  The  Picket )  Service. 

of  the  regiment.     On  reaching  camp,  it  turns  over  the  prisoners  to 
the  new  advanced  post. 

THE  PICKET. 

1123.  The  detail  for  the  picket  is  made  daily,  after  the  details  for 
duty  of  the  first  class,  and  from  the  next  for  detail  on  the  roster  of 
that  class.  It  is  designed  to  furnish  detachments  and  guards  un- 
expectedly called  for  in  the  twenty-four  hours ;  it  counts  as  a  tour 
of  the  first  class  to  those  who  have  marched  on  detachment  or  guard, 
or  who  have  passed  the  night  in  bivouac. 

1124.  The  officers,  non-commissioned  officers  and  soldiers  of  the 
picket  are  at  ill  times  dressed  and  equipped ;  the  horses  are  saddled, 
and  knapsacks  and  valises  ready  to  be  put  on. 

1125.  Detachments  and  guards  from  the  picket  are  taken  from  the 
head  of  the  picket-roll  in  each  company.  The  picket  of  a  regiment 
is  composed  of  a  Lieutenant,  two  sergeants,  four  corporals,  a  drummer, 
and  about  forty  privates.  For  a  smaller  force,  the  picket  is  in  pro- 
portion to  the  strength  of  the  detachment. 

1126.  Officers  and  men  of  the  picket  who  march  on  detachment  or 
guard  before  retreat  will  be  replaced. 

1127.  The  picket  is  assembled  by  the  Adjutant  at  guard-mounting ; 
it  is  posted  twelve  paces  in  rear  of  the  guard,  and  is  inspected  by  its 
own  commander.  When  the  guard  has  marched  in  review,  the  com- 
mandant of  the  picket  marches  it  to  the  left  of  the  police  guard,  where 
it  stacks  its  arms,  and  is  dismissed  ;  the  arms  are  under  charge  of  the 
sentinel  of  the  police  guard. 

1128.  The  picket  is  only  assembled  by  the  orders  of  the  Colonel  or 
officer  of  the  day.     It  forms  on  the  left  of  the  police  guard. 

1129.  The  officer  of  the  day  requires  the  roll  of  the  picket  to  be 
called  frequently  during  the  day  ;  the  call  is  sounded  from  the  police 
guard.  At  roll-calls  and  inspections,  infantry  pickets  assemble  with 
knapsacks  on,  cavalry  on  foot.     The  picket  is  assembled  at  retreat ; 


214  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

War  (  Grand  Guards  and  other  Outposts )  Service. 

tlie  officer  lias  the  roll  called,  and  inspects  the  arms.     The  picket 
sleep  in  their  tents,  but  without  undressing. 

1130.  The  picket  does  not  assemble  at  night,  except  in  cases  of 
alarm,  or  when  the  whole  or  a  part  is  to  march ;  then  the  officer  of 
the  daj  calls  the  officers,  the  latter  the  non-commissioned  officers, 
and  these  the  men,  for  which  purpose  each  ascertains  the  tents  of 
those  he  is  to  call ;  thej  ai-e  assembled  without  beat  of  drum  or  other 
noise.     At  night,  cavalry  pickets  assemble  mounted. 

1131.  Pickets  rejoin  their  companies  whenever  the  regiment  is  under 
arms  for  review^  drill,  march  or  battle. 


GRAND  GUARDS  AND  OTHER  OUTPOSTS. 

1132.  Grand  guards  are  the  advanced  posts  of  a  camp  or  cantonment, 
and  should  cover  the  approaches  to  it.  Their  number,  strength,  and 
position  are  regulated  by  the  Commanders  of  brigades ;  in  detached 
corps,  by  the  Commanding  Officer.  When  it  can  be,  the  grand  guards 
of  cavalry  and  infantry  are  combined,  the  cavalry  furnishing  the 
advanced  sentinels.  When  the  cavalry  is  weak,  the  grand  guards  are 
infantry,  but  furnished  with  a  few  cavalry  soldiers,  to  get  and  carry 
intelligence  of  the  enemy. 

1133.  The  strength  of  the  grand  guard  of  a  brigade  will  depend  on 
its  object  and  the  strength  of  the  regiments,  the  nature  of  tlie  country, 
the  position  of  the  enemy,  and  the  disposition  of  the  inhabitants.  It 
is  usually  commanded  by  a  Captain. 

1134.  Under  the  supervision  of  the  Generals  of  division  and  brigade, 
tlie  grand  guards  are  specially  under  the  direction  of  a  field  officer  of 
the  day  in  each  brigade.  In  cage  of  necessity.  Captains  may  be  added 
to  the  roster  of  Lieutenant- Colonels  and  Majors  for  this  detail. 

113.5.  Staff  officers,  sent  from  division  head-quarters  to  inspect  the 
X>osts  of  grand  giiards,  give  them  orders  only  in  urgent  cases,  and  in 
the  absence  of  the  field  officer  of  the  day  of  the  brigade. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  215 

War  {Grand  Guards,  and  other  Outposts  y  Service. 

1136.  Grand  guards  usually  mount  at  the  same  time  as  the  othei 
guards,  but  may  mount  before  day  break  if  the  General  of  brigade 
thinks  it  necessary  to  double  the  outposts  at  that  time.  In  this  ease 
they  assemble  and  march  without  noise,  and  during  their  march  throw 
out  scouts  ;  this  precaution  should  always  be  taken  in  the  first  posting 
of  a  grand  guard.  The  doubling  of  guards  weakens  the  corps  and 
fatigues  the  men,  and  should  seldom  be  resorted  to,  and  never  when 
preparing  to  march  or  fight. 

1137.  A  grand  guard  is  conducted  to  its  post,  in  the  first  instance^ 
by  the  field  officer  of  the  day,  guided  by  a  staff  officer  who  accom- 
panied the  General  in  his  reconnoissance.  After  the  post  has  been 
established,  the  Commander  sends  to  the  field  officer  of  the  day,  when 
necessary,  a  soldier  of  the  guard  to  guide  the  relieving  guard  to  the 
post.  He  also  sends  to  him  in  the  evening  a  corporal  or  trusty  man 
of  the  guard  for  the  note  containing  the  parole  and  countersign,  and 
sends  them  before  dark  to  the  detached  posts.  He  will  not  suffer  his 
guard  to  be  relieved  except  by  a  guard  of  the  brigade,  or  by  special 
orders. 

1138.  If  there  is  no  pass  to  be  observed  or  defended,  the  grand 
guards  are  placed  near  the  centre  of  the  ground  they  are  to  observe, 
on  sheltered,  and,  if  possible,  high  ground,  the  better  to  coaaceal  their 
strength  and  observe  the  enemy ;  they  ought  not  to  be  placed  near 
tlie  edge  of  a  wood.  When,  during  the  day,  they  are  placed  very 
near  or  in  sight  of  the  enemy,  they  fall  back  at  night  on  posts  selected 
farther  to  the  rear. 

1139.  In  broken  or  mountainous  countries,  and  particularly  if  the 
inhabitants  are  ill-disposed,  intermediate  posts  must  be  established 
when  it  is  necessary  to  post  the  grand  guard  distant  from  the  camp. 

1140.  Grand  guards  are  chiefly  to  watch  the  enemy  in  front ;  their 
flanks  are  protected  by  each  other,  and  the  camp  must  furnish  posts 
to  protect  their  rear  and  secure  their  retreat. 

1141.  Grand  guards  are  seldom  intrenched,  and  never  without  the 
orders  of  the  General,  except  by  a  barricade  or  ditch  when  exposed 
in  a  plain  to  attacks  of  cavalry. 


216  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

War  (  Grand  Guards  and  other  Outposts )  Service. 

1142.  The  General  of  division,  if  he  thinks  proper,  changes  the 
stations  and  orders  of  these  guards,  and  establishes  posts  to  connect 
the  brigades  or  protect  the  exterior  flanks. 

1143.  After  a  grand  guard  is  posted,  the  first  care  of  the  commander 
and  of  the  field  officer  of  the  day  is  to  get  news  of  the  enemy ;  then 
to  reconnoitre  his  position,  and  the  roads,  bridges,  fords  and  defiles. 
This  rcconnoissance  determines  the  force  and  position  of  the  small 
posts  and  their  sentinels  day  and  night.  These  posts,  according  to 
tlieir  importance,  are  commanded  by  oflicers  or  non-commissioned 
officers ;  the  cavalry  posts  may  be  relieved  every  four  or  eight  hours. 

1144.  The  commander  of  a  grand  guard  receives  detailed  instmctiona 
from  the  General  and  field  officer  of  the  day  of  the  brigade,  and 
instructs  the  commanders  of  the  small  posts  as  to  their  duties  and 
the  arrangements  for  defence  or  retreat.  The  commanders  of  grand 
guards  may,  in  urgent  cases,  change  the  positions  of  the  small  posts. 
If  the  small  posts  are  to  change  their  positions  at  night,  they  wait 
until  the  grand  guard  have  got  into  position  and  darkness  hides  their 
movements  from  the  enemy  ;  then  march  silently  and  rapidly  under 
the  charge  of  an  officer. 

1145.  In  detached  corps,  small  posts  of  picked  men  are  at  night  sent 
forward  on  the  roads  by  which  the  enemy  may  attack  or  turn  the 
position.  They  watch  the  forks  of  the  roads,  keep  silence,  conceal 
themselves,  light  no  fires,  and  often  change  place.  Tliey  announce 
the  approach  of  the  enemy  by  signals  agreed  uj^on,  and  retreat,  by 
routes  examined  during  the  day,  to  places  selected,  and  rejoin  the 
guard  at  day  break. 

1146.  Grand  guards  have  special  orders  in  each  case,  and  the  follow- 
ing in  all  cases :  to  inform  the  nearest  posts  and  the  field  officer  of  the 
day,  or  the  General  of  brigade,  of  the  march  and  movements  of  the 
enemy,  and  of  the  attacks  they  receive  or  fear ;  to  examine  every 
person  passing  near  the  post,  particularly  those  coming  from  without ; 
to  arrest  suspicious  persons,  and  all  soldiers  and  camp-followers  who 
try  to  pass  out  without  permission,  and  to  send  to  the  General,  unless 
othei-wise  directed,  all  country  people  who  come  in. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  211 

War  (^Grand  Guards  and  other  Outposts')  Service. 

1147.  All  out-guards  stand  to  arms  at  night  on  the  approach  of 
patrols,  rounds  or  other  parties;  the  sentinel  over  the  arms  has 
orders  to  call  them  out. 

1148.  Advanced  posts  will  not  take  arms  for  inspection  or  ceremony 
when  it  would  expose  them  to  the  view  of  the  enemy. 

1149.  Grand  guards  are  often  charged  with  the  care  and  working 
of  telegraphic  signals. 

1150.  The  sentinels  and  vedettes  are  placed  on  points  from  which 
they  can  see  farthest,  taking  care  not  to  break  their  connection  with 
each  other  or  with  their  posts.  They  are  concealed  from  the  enemy 
as  much  as  possible  by  walls,  or  trees,  or  elevated  gi-ound.  It  is 
generally  even  of  more  advantage  not  to  be  seen  than  to  see  far. 
They  should  not  be  placed  near  covers,  where  the  enemy  may 
capture  them. 

1151.  A  sentinel  should  be  always  ready  to  fire  ;  vedettes  carry  their 
pistols  or  carbines  in  their  hands.  A  sentinel  must  be  sure  of  the 
presence  of  an  enemy  before  he  fires ;  once  satisfied  of  that,  he  must 
fire,  though  all  defence  on  his  part  be  useless,  as  the  safety  of  the 
post  may  depend  on  it.  Sentinels  fire  on  all  persons  deserting  to 
the  enemy. 

11 52.  If  the  post  must  be  where  a  sentinel  on  it  cannot  communicate 
with  the  guard,  a  corporal  and  three  men  are  detached  for  it,  or  the 
sentinels  are  doubled,  that  one  may  communicate  with  the  guard. 
During  the  day  the  communication  may  be  made  by  signals,  such  as 
raising  a  cap  or  handkerchief.  At  night  sentinels  are  placed  on  low 
ground,  the  better  to  see  objects  against  the  sky. 

1153.  To  lessen  the  duty  of  rounds,  and  keep  more  men  on  the  alert 
at  night,  sentinels  are  relieved  every  hour.  To  prevent  sentinels  from 
being  surprised,  it  is  sometimes  well  to  precede  the  countersign  by 
signals,  such  as  striking  the  musket  with  the  hand,  striking  the 
hands  together,  &c. 

1154.  On  the  approach  of  any  one  at  night,  the  sentinel  orders : 
"HaltT'     If  the  order  is  not  obeyed  after  once  repeated,  he  fires. 

Military.  19 


218  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

War  (^Grand  Guards  and  other  Outposts')  Service. 

If  obeyed,  he  calls  :  "  IVho  goes  thereV^  If  answered :  "  Rounds  "  or 
"  Patrol,^^  he  says :  "  Advance  ttrith  the  countersign.^^  If  more  than  one 
advance  at  the  same  time,  or  the  person  who  advances  fails  to  give 
the  countersign  or  signal  agreed  on,  the  sentinel  fires,  and  falls  back 
on  his  guard.  The  sentinel  over  the  arms,  as  soon  as  his  hail  is 
answered,  turns  out  the  guard,  and  the  corporal  goes  to  reconnoitre. 
When  it  is  desirable  to  hide  the  position  of  the  sentinel  from  the 
enemy,  the  hail  is  replaced  by  signals  ;  the  sentinel  gives  the  signal, 
and  those  approaching  the  counter  signal. 

1155.  With  raw  troops,  or  when  the  light  troops  of  the  enemy  are 
numerous  or  active,  and  when  the  country  is  broken  or  wooded,  the 
night  stormy  or  dark,  sentinels  should  be  doubled.  In  this  case, 
while  one  watches,  the  other,  called  a  flying  sentinel,  moves  about, 
examining  the  paths  and  hollows. 

1156.  The  commandants  of  grand  guards  visit  the  sentinels  often ; 
change  their  positions  when  necessary ;  make  them  repeat  their 
orders ;  teach  them  under  what  circumstances  and  at  what  signals 
to  retire,  and  particularly  not  to  fall  back  directly  on  their  guard,  if 
pursued,  but  to  lead  the  enemy  in  a  circuit. 

1157.  At  night,  half  the  men  of  the  grand  guard  oflf  post  watch 
under  arms,  while  the  rest  lie  down,  arms  by  their  side.  The  horses 
are  always  bridled ;  the  horsemen  hold  the  reins,  and  must  not  sleep. 

1158.  When  a  grand  guard  of  cavalry  is  so  placed  as  not  to  be  liable 
to  a  sudden  attack  from  the  enemy,  the  Gknieral  may  permit  the  horses 
to  be  fed  during  the  night,  unbridling  for  this  purpose  a  few  at  a 
time,  the  horsemen  being  vigilant  to  prevent  them  from  escaping. 

1159.  An  hour  before  break  of  day,  infantry  grand  guards  stand  to 
arni.s,  and  cavalry  mount.  At  the  advanced  posts,  some  of  the 
infantry  are  all  night  under  arms,  some  of  the  cavalry  on  horseback. 

1160.  The  commander  of  a  grand  guard  regulates  the  numbers,  the 
hours,  and  the  march  of  patrols  and  rounds,  according  to  the  strength 
of  his  troop  and  the  necessity  for  precaution ;  and,  accompanied  by 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  219 

War  (  Grand  Guards  and  other  Outposts )  Service, 

those  who  are  to  command  the  patrols  and  rounds  during  the  night, 
he  will  reconnoitre  all  the  routes  they  are  to  follow. 

1161.  Patrols  and  rounds  march  slowly,  in  silence,  and  with  great 
•  precaution ;  halt  frequently  to  listen  and  examine  the  ground.     The 

rounds  consist  of  an  officer  or  non-commissioned  officer,  and  two  or 
three  men. 

1162.  Towards  break  of  day  the  patrols  ought  to  be  more  frequent, 
and  sent  to  greater  distances.  They  examine  the  hollow- ways  and 
ground  likely  to  conceal  an  enemy,  but  with  great  caution,  to  avoid 
being  cut  oflf,  or  engaged  in  an  unequal  combat ;  if  they  meet  the 
enemy,  they  fire  and  attempt  to  stop  his  march.  While  the  patrols 
are  out,  the  posts  are  under  arms. 

1163.  Cavalry  patrols  should  examine  the  country  to  a  greater  dis- 
tance than  infantry,  and  report  to  the  infantry  guard  everything  they 
observe.  The  morning  patrols  and  scouts  do  not  return  until  broad 
daylight ;  and  when  they  return,  the  night  sentinels  are  withdrawn, 
and  the  posts  for  the  day  resumed. 

1164.  When  patrols  are  sent  beyond  the  advanced  posts,  the  posts 
and  sentinels  should  be  warned. 

1165.  On  their  return,  commanders  of  patrols  report  in  regard  to  the 
ground,  and  everything  they  have  observed  of  the  movements  of  the 
enemy,  or  of  his  posts,  and  the  commandant  of  the  grand  guard 
reports  to  the  field  officer  of  the  day. 

1166.  The  fires  of  grand  guards  should  be  hidden  by  a  wall  or  ditch, 
or  other  screen.  To  deceive  the  enemy,  fires  are  sometimes  made  on 
ground  not  occupied.  Fires  are  not  permitted  to  small  posts  liable 
to  surprise. 

1167.  The  horses  of  cavalry  guards  are  watered  or  fed  by  detach- 
ments ;  during  which  the  rest  are  ready  to  mount. 

1168.  If  a  body  of  troops  attempt  to  enter  the  camp  at  night,  unless 
their  arrival  has  been  announced,  or  the  commander  is  known  to,  or 
is  the  bearer  of  a  written  order  to  the  commander  of  the  grand  guard, 


220  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

War  {Intrenched  Posts')  Service. 

he  stops  tliem,  and  sends  the  commander  under  escort  to  the  field 
officer  of  tlie  day,  and  warns  the  posts  near  him. 

1169.  Bearers  of  flags  are  not  permitted  to  pass  the  outer  chain  of 
sentinels ;  their  faces  are  turned  from  the  post  or  army ;  if  necessary, 
their  eyes  are  bandaged ;  a  non-commissioned  officer  stays  with  them 
to  prevent  indiscretion  of  the  sentinels. 

1170.  The  commandant  of  the  grand  guard  receipts  for  dispatches, 
and  sends  them  to  the  field  officer  of  the  day  or  General  of  brigade, 
and  dismisses  the  bearer ;  but  if  he  has  discovered  what  ought  to  be 
concealed  from  the  enemy,  he  is  detained  as  long  as  necessary. 

1171.  Deserters  are  disarmed  at  the  advanced  posts,  and  sent  to  the 
commander  of  the  grand  guard,  who  gets  from  them  all  the  informa- 
tion he  can  concerning  his  post.  If  many  come  at  night,  they  are 
received  cautiously ,  a  few  at  a  time.  They  are  sent  in  the  morning  to 
the  field  officer  of  the  day,  or  to  the  nearest  post  or  camp,  to  be  con- 
ducted to  the  General  of  the  brigade.  All  suspected  persons  are 
searched  by  the  commanders  of  the  posts. 

1172.  When  an  enemy  advances  to  attack,  unless  he  is  in  too  great 
force,  or  the  grand  guard  is  to  defend  an  intrenched  post  or  a  defile, 
it  will  take  the  positions  and  execute  the  movements  to  check  the 
enemy,  acting  as  skirmishers,  or  fighting  in  close  or  open  order,  as 
may  be  best.  The  guard  joins  its  corps  when  in  line,  or  when  a  suffi- 
cient number  of  troops  have  reached  the  ground  it  defends. 

INTRENCHED  POSTS. 

1173.  Unless  the  army  be  acting  on  the  defensive,  no  post  should 
be  intrenched,  except  to  cover  the  weak  parts  of  the  line,  or  at  points 
which  the  enemy  cannot  avoid,  or  in  mountain  warfare,  or  to  close  a 
defile,  or  cover  winter  quarters. 

1174.  Posts  connected  with  the  operations  of  an  army  are  intrenched 
only  by  order  of  the  General  commanding  in  chief  or  a  (Jeneral  of 
division. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  221 

War  {Detachments)  Service. 

1175.  Any  intrenchment  that  requires  artillery  is  considered  as  a 
post,  and  a  guard  or  garrison  and  commander  are  assigned  to  it. 

1176.  The  General  who  establishes  an  intrenched  post  gives  to  its 
commander  detailed  instructions  in  regard  to  its  defence,  and  the 
circumstances  under  which  the  defence  should  cease. 

1177.  The  commander  reconnoitres  his  post ;  distributes  the  troops ; 
posts  the  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers ;  forms  a  reserve ; 
gives  orders  for  all  contingencies  he  can  foresee ;  supposes  an  attack, 
and  arranges  his  troops  for  defence,  so  as  to  prepare  them  for  attack, 
day  or  night. 

1178.  In  dark  weather  he  redoubles  his  vigilance,  and  changes  the 
hours  and  direction  of  the  rounds  and  patrols.  He  permits  no  flags 
of  truce,  deserters  or  strangers  to  enter.  If  a  flag  ought  to  pass  his 
post,  he  bandages  his  eyes.  He  refuses  admittance  to  a  relief  or  any 
other  party  until  he  has  carefully  examined  them.  In  case  of  an  attack, 
he  does  not  wait  for  orders  or  hold  a  council.  Having  defended  his 
post  to  the  last  extremity,  or  till  the  purpose  of  defence,  according  to 
his  instructions,  is  answered,  he  may  then  spike  his  guns  and  rejoin 
the  army  under  cover  of  night,  or  by  cutting  his  way  through  the 
enemy. 

DETACHMENTS. 

1179.  When  a  detachment  is  to  be  formed  from  the  different  regi- 
ments of  a  brigade,  the  Assistant  Adjutant-General  of  the  brigade 
assembles  it,  and  turns  it  over  to  the  commander. 

1180.  When  a  detachment  is  to  be  formed  from  diflferent  brigades, 
the  Assistant  Adjutant- General  in  each  forms  the  contingent  of  the 
brigade,  and  sends  it  to  the  place  of  assembling. 

1181.  Detachments  are  generally  formed  by  taking  battalions,  squad- 
rons, companies,  platoons  in  turn,  according  to  the  roster  for  such 
detail. 

1182.  When  the  detachment  is  to  consist  of  men  from  every  com^ 
pany  or  troop,  the  first  on  the  roster  for  guard  are  taken. 

Military.  19* 


222  GENERAL  KEGULATIOXS 

War  (^Rcconnoissances)  Service. 

1183.  Officers,  non-commissioned  officers  and  soldiers,  whose  tour 
it  is  to  go  on  detachment,  if  employed  otlierwise  at  the  time,  are 
relieved  from  the  duty  they  are  on,  if  they  can  reach  camp  in  time  to 
march  with  the  detachment. 

1184.  When  detachments  meet,  the  command  is  regulated  while 
they  serve  together  as  if  they  formed  one  detachment.  But  the  senior 
officer  cannot  prevent  the  commander  of  any  detachment  from  moving 
when  he  thinks  proper,  to  execute  the  orders  he  has  received. 

1185.  On  the  return  of  a  detachment,  the  commander  reports  to  the 
head- quarters  from  which  he  received  his  orders. 

RECONNOISSANCES. 

1186.  Near  an  enemy,  daily  reconnoissances  are  made  to  observe 
the  ground  in  front,  and  to  discover  whether  the  advanced  guards 
of  the  enemy  have  been  increased  or  put  in  motion,  or  any  other  sign 
of  his  preparation  for  march  or  action. 

1187.  They  are  made  by  small  parties  of  cavalry  and  infantry,  from 
the  brigade,  under  direction  of  the  General  of  division  or  the  General 
of  a  separate  brigade,  and  to  less  distance  by  the  patrols  of  the  grand 
guard,  and  are  not  repeated  at  the  same  hour  or  by  the  same  route. 
On  the  plain,  reconnoissances  are  made  by  cavalry ;  among  mountains, 
by  infantry,  with  a  few  horsemen  to  carry  intelligence. 

1188.  Reconnoitring  parties  observe  the  following  precautions  :  to 
leave  small  posts,  or  sentinels  at  intervals,  to  transmit  intelligence  to 
the  advanced  posts  of  the  army,  unless  the  return  to  it  be  by  a  dif- 
ferent route ;  to  march  with  caution,  to  avoid  fighting ;  and  see,  if 
possible,  without  being  seen ;  to  keep  an  advanced  guard ;  to  send 
well  mounted  men  ahead  of  the  advanced  guard,  and  on  the  flank  of 
the  party  ;  to  instruct  the  scouts  that  no  two  should  enter  a  defile  or 
mount  a  hill  together,  but  to  go  one  at  a  time,  while  one  watches  to 
carry  the  news  if  the  other  is  taken. 

1189.  Before  day  break  the  advanced  guard  and  scouts  are  drawn 
closer  J  the  party  then  march  slowly  and  silently,  stop  frequently  to 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  223 

War  (^Partisans  and  Flankers')  Service. 

listen,  and  keep  the  horses  that  neigh  in  the  rear.  The  party  should 
enter  no  wood,  defile,  village  or  inclosure  nntil  it  has  been  fully 
examined  by  the  scouts. 

1190.  Special  reconnoissances  are  made  under  the  instruction  of  the 
General  in  command,  by  such  officers  and  with  such  force  as  he  may 
direct 

1191.  Offensive  or  forced  reconnoissances  are  to  ascertain  with  cer- 
tainty points  in  the  enemy's  position,  or  his  strength.  They  are 
sometimes  preludes  to  real  actions,  and  sometimes  only  demonstra- 
tions. They  drive  in  his  outposts,  and  sometimes  engage  special 
corps  of  his  line.  They  are  only  made  by  the  order  of  the  Greneral 
commanding  in  chief,  or  the  commander  of  an  isolated  corps. 

1192.  In  all  reports  of  reconnoissances,  the  officer  making  them 
shall  distinguish  expressly  what  he  has  seen  from  the  accounts  he 
has  not  been  able  to  verify  personally. 

1193.  In  special  and  offensive  reconnoissances,  the  report  must  be 
accompanied  by  a  field-sketch  of  the  localities,  the  dispositions  and 
defences  of  the  enemy. 

PARTISANS  AND  FLANKERS. 

1194.  The  operations  of  partisan  corps  depend  on  the  nature  and 
theatre  of  the  war ;  they  enter  into  the  general  plan  of  operations,  and 
are  conducted  under  the  orders  of  the  General  commanding  in  chief. 

1195.  The  composition  and  strength  of  partisan  corps  and  detach- 
ments of  flankers  depend  on  the  object,  the  difficulties,  the  distance, 
and  the  probable  time  of  the  expedition. 

1196.  The  purpose  of  these  isolated  corps  is  to  reconnoitre  at  a  dis- 
tance on  the  flanks  of  the  army,  to  protect  its  operations,  to  deceive 
the  enemy,  to  interrupt  his  communications,  to  intercept  his  couriers 
and  his  correspondence,  to  threaten  or  destroy  his  magazines,  to  carry 
off  his  posts  and  his  convoys,  or,  at  all  events,  to  retard  his  march 
by  making  him  detach  largely  for  their  protection. 


224  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

-    ■-  ■  ^ 

War  (  Partisans  and  Flankers )  Service. 

1197.  While  these  corps  fatigue  the  enemy  and  embarrass  his  opera- 
tions, they  endeavor  to  inspire  confidence  and  secure  the  good  will 
of  the  inhabitants  in  a  friendly  country,  and  to  hold  them  in  check 
in  an  enemy's  country. 

1198.  They  move  actively,  appear  unexpectedly  on  different  points 
in  such  a  manner  as  to  make  it  impossible  to  estimate  their  force,  or 
to  tell  whether  they  are  irregular  forces  or  an  advanced  guard. 

1199.  These  operations  require  vigilance,  secrecy,  energy  and 
promptness.  The  partisan  commander  must  frequently  supply  by 
stratagem  and  audacity  what  he  wants  in  numbers. 

1200.  These  detachments  are  sometimes  composed  of  different  arms, 
but  the  service  belongs  more  particularly  to  the  light  cavalry,  which 
can  move  to  a  distance  by  rapid  marches,  surprise  the  enemy,  attack 
unexpectedly,  and  retire  as  promptly. 

1201.  Stormy  weather,  fogs,  extreme  heat,  and  the  night  above  all, 
are  favorable  to  the  success  of  ambuscades;  when  the  enemy  are 
careless,  the  break  of  day  is  the  best  time.  A  partisan  commander 
should  communicate  to  his  second  in  command  his  secret  orders,  the 
direction  and  object  of  the  expedition,  and  the  different  points  of 
junction  with  the  army. 

1202.  Guides  of  the  country  and  spies  are  often  necessary  to  the 
partisan.  They  are  examined  separately,  and  confronted  if  their 
accounts  differ.  When  there  is  but  one  guide,  he  marches  with  the 
advanced  guard,  guarded  by  two  men,  and  bound  if  necessary. 
Peddlers  and  smugglers  are  specially  suitable  for  spies. 

1203.  A  fit  time  to  attack  a  convoy  is  at  a  halt,  or  when  they  begin 
to  park,  or  when  they  are  watering,  or  passing  a  wood  or  a  defile ;  at 
a  bend  of  the  road,  a  bridge,  or  steep  ascent. 

1204.  The  attacking  party  may  be  principally  cavalry,  with  some 
infantry.  The  first  object  is  to  disperse  the  escort.  A  part  of  the 
detachment  attacks  the  main  body  of  the  escort,  another  the  wagons, 
and  a  tliird  is  in  reserve ;  skirmishers  line  the  road,  and  try  to  cut 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  225 

War  (^Marches)  Seivice. 

the  traces,  and  to  seize  the  front  and  rear  wagons,  and  turn  them 
across  the  road,  to  prevent  the  train  from  advancing  or  retreating. 

1205,  If  the  convoy  is  parked,  the  cavalry  surrounds  it,  assails  the 
escort,  and  tries  to  draw  it  away  from  the  train.  The  infantry  then 
engage  the  troops  remaining  at  the  park,  slip  under  the  wagons,  and 
get  into  the  park.  When  the  cavalry  is  alone  and  the  enemy  are 
shaken,  they  dismount  a  portion  of  the  men  to  supply  the  want  of 
infantry. 

1206.  If  it  is  a  large  convoy,  the  principal  attack  is  made  on  the 
centre ;  the  most  valuable  wagons  are  also  selected,  and  additional 
horses  are  put  to  thera  if  the  attack  is  successfal  Those  that  cannot 
be  carried  off  are  burned. 


MARCHES. 

1207.  The  object  of  the  movement  and  the  nature  of  the  ground 
determine  the  order  of  march,  the  kind  of  troops  in  each  column,  and 
the  number  of  columns. 

1208.  The  force  is  divided  into  as  many  columns  as  circumstances 
permit,  without  weakening  any  one  too  much.  They  ought  to  pre- 
serve their  communications,  and  be  within  supporting  distance  of 
each  other.  The  Commander  of  each  column  ought  to  know  the 
strength  and  direction  of  the  others. 

1209.  The  advance  and  rear  guards  are  usually  light  troops  ;  their 
eterength  and  composition  depend  on  the  nature  of  the  ground  and 
the  position  of  the  enemy.  They  serve  to  cover  the  movements  of 
the  army,  and  to  hold  the  enemy  in  check  until  the  General  has  time 
to  make  his  arrangements. 

1210.  The  advance  guard  is  not  always  at  the  head  of  the  column ; 
in  a  march  to  a  flank,  it  takes  such  positions  as  cover  the  movement. 
Sappers  are  attached  to  the  advanced  guard  if  required. 

1211.  The  "  general^''''  sounded  one  hour  before  the  time  of  marching, 
is  the  signal  to  strike  tents,  to  load  the  wagons,  and  pack  horses,  and 


226  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

-  * 

War  (^Marches)  Service. 

send  them  to  the  place  of  assembling.  The  fires  are  then  put  out, 
and  care  taken  to  avoid  burning  straw,  &c.,  or  giving  to  the  enemy 
any  other  indication  of  the  movement. 

1212.  The  "  march"  will  be  beat  in  the  infantry,  and  the  "  advance  '* 
sounded  in  the  cavalry,  in  succession,  as  each  is  to  take  its  place  in 
the  column, 

1213.  When  an  army  should  form  suddenly  to  meet  the  enemy, 
the  "  long  roll "  is  beat,  and  "  to  horse  "  sounded.  The  troops  form 
rapidly  in  front  of  their  camp- 

1214.  Batteries  of  artillery  and  their  caissons  move  with  the  corj)a 
to  which  they  are  attached ;  the  field  train  and  ambulances  march  at 
the  rear  of  the  column ;  and  the  baggage  with  the  rear  guard. 

1215.  Cavalry  and  infantry  do  not  march  together,  unless  the  proxi- 
mity of  the  enemy  makes  it  necessary. 

1216.  In  cavalry  marches,  when  distant  from  the  enemy,  each  regi- 
ment, and,  if  possible,  each  squadron,  forms  a  separate  column,  in 
order  to  keep  up  the  same  gait  fi-om  front  to  rear,  and  to  trot,  when 
desirable,  on  good  ground.  In  such  cases,  the  cavalry  may  leave  the 
camp  later,  and  can  give  more  rest  to  the  horses,  and  more  attention 
to  the  shoeing  and  harness.  Horses  are  not  bridled  until  the  time 
to  start. 

1217.  When  necessary,  the  orders  specify  the  rations. the  men  are 
to  carry  in  their  haversacks.  The  field  officers  and  Captains  make 
Inspections  frequently  during  the  march ;  at  halts  they  examine  the 
knapsacks,  valises  and  haversacks,  and  throw  away  all  articles  not 
authorized.  The  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  of  cavalry 
companies  attend  personally  to  the  packs  and  girths. 

1218.  When  it  can  be  avoided,  troops  should  not  be  assembled  on 
high  roads  or  other  places  where  they  interrupt  the  communication, 

1219.  Generals  of  division  and  commanders  of  detached  corps  send 
a  staff  officer  to  the  rendezvous,  in  advance,  to  receive  the  troops, 
wbo,  on  arriving,  take  their  place  in  the  order  of  battle,  and  form  in 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  227 

VYar  {Marches')  Service. 

close  column,  unless  otherwise  ordered.    Artillery,  or  trains  halted 
on  the  roads,  form  in  file  on  one  side. 

1220.  The  execution  of  marching  orders  must  not  he  delayed.  If 
the  Commander  is  not  at  the  head  of  his  troops  when  they  are  to 
march,  the  next  in  rank  puts  the  column  in  motion. 

1221.  If  possible,  each  column  is  preceded  by  a  detachment  of 
sappers,  to  remove  obstacles  to  the  march,  aided,  when  necessary,  by 
infantry,  or  the  people  of  the  country.  The  detachment  is  divided 
into  two  sections :  one  stops  to  remove  the  first  obstacle,  the  other 
moves  on  to  the  next. 

1222.  In  night  marches,  and  at  bad  places,  and  at  cross-roads,  when 
necessary,  intelligent  non-commissioned  officers  are  posted  to  show 
the  way,  and  are  relieved  by  the  regiments  ag  they  come  up. 

1223.  On  the  march  no  one  shall  fire  a  gun,  or  cry  "AcrZt"  or 
"  march' ^  without  orders. 

1224.  Soldiers  are  not  to  stop  for  water ;  the  canteens  should  be 
filled  before  starting. 

1225.  It  is  better  to  avoid  villages ;  but  if  the  route  lies  through 
them,  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  are  to  be  vigilant  to 
prevent  straggling.     Halts  should  not  take  place  at  villages. 

1226.  Besides  the  rear  guard,  the  General  sometimes  takes  a  detach- 
ment from  the  last  regiment,  and  adds  to  it  non-commissioned  officers 
from  each  regiment,  to  examine  all  villages  and  hiding  places  on  the 
route,  to  bring  up  stragglers  and  seize  marauders. 

1227.  In  night  marches,  the  sergeant-major  of  each  regiment  remains 
at  the  rear  with  a  drummer,  to  give  notice  when  darkness  or  difficulty 
stops  the  march.  In  cavalry,  a  trumpet  is  placed  in  rear  of  each 
squadron,  and  the  signal  repeated  to  the  head  of  the  regiment. 

1228.  The  General  and  field  officers  frequently  stop,  or  send  officers 
to  the  rear,  to  see  that  the  troops  march  in  the  prescribed  order,  and 
keep  their  distances.    To  quicken  the  march,  the  General  warns  the 


228  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

War  (^Marches)  Service. 

Colonels,  and  may  order  a  signal  to  be  beat.    It  is  repeated  in  all 
the  regiments. 

1229.  In  approaching  a  defile  the  Colonels  are  warned ;  they  close 
their  regiments  as  they  gome  up ;  each  regiment  passes  separately,  at 
an  accelerated  pace,  and  in  as  close  order  as  possible.  The  leading 
regiment  having  passed,  and  left  room  enough  for  the  -whole  column 
in  close  order,  then  halts,  and  moves  again  as  soon  as  the  last  regiment 
is  through.  In  the  cavalry,  each  squadron,  before  quickening  the 
pace  to  rejoin  the  column,  takes  its  original  order  of  march. 

1230.  When  the  distance  from  the  enemy  permits,  each  regiment, 
after  closing  up  in  front  and  rear  of  the  defile,  stacks  arms. 

1231.  Halts  to  rest  and  re-form  the  troops  are  frequent  during  the 
day,  depending  on  the  object  and  length  of  the  march.  They  are 
made  in  preference  after  the  passage  of  defiles. 

1232.  No  honors  are  paid  by  troops  on  the  march  or  at  halts. 

1233.  The  sick  march  with  the  wagons. 

1234.  Led  horses  of  officers,  and  the  horses  of  dismounted  men, 
follow  their  regiment.  The  baggage  wagons  never  march  in  the 
column.  When  the  General  orders  the  field  train  and  ambulances 
to  take  place  in  the  column,  he  designates  the  position  they  shall  take- 

1235.  If  two  corps  meet  on  the  same  road,  they  pass  to  the  right, 
and  both  continue  their  march,  if  the  road  is  wide  enough;  if  it  ia 
not,  the  first  in  the  order  of  battle  takes  the  road,  the  other  halts. 

1236.  A  corps  in  march  must  not  be  cut  by  another.  If  two  corps 
meet  at  cross-roads,  that  which  arrives  last  lialts  if  the  other  is  in 
motion.  A  corps  in  march  passes  a  corps  at  a  halt,  if  it  has  pre- 
cedence in  the  order  of  battle,  or  if  the  halted  corps  is  not  ready  to 
move  at  once. 

1237.  A  column  that  halts  to  let  another  column  pass  resumes  the 
march  in  advance  of  tlie  train  of  this  column.  If  a  column  has  to  pass 
a  train,  ^he  train  must  halt,  if  necessary,  till  the  column  passes.     The 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  229 

War  (^Battles')  Service. 

column  which  has  precedence  must  yield  it  if  the  commander,  on 
seeing  the  orders  of  the  other,  finds  it  for  the  interest  of  the  service 

BATTLES. 

1238.  Dispositions  for  battle  depend  on  the  number,  kind  and  quality 
of  the  troops  opposed,  on  the  ground,  and  on  the  objects  of  the  war ; 
but  the  following  rules  are  to  be  observed  generally  : 

1239.  In  attacking,  the  advanced  guard  endeavors  to  capture  the 
enemy's  outposts,  or  cut  them  off  from  the  main  body.  Having  done 
so,  or  driven  them  in,  it  occupies,  in  advancing,  all  the  points  that 
can  cover  or  facilitate  the  march  of  the  army,  or  secure  its  retreat, 
such  as  bridges,  defiles,  woods,  and  heights ;  it  then  makes  attacks, 
to  occupy  the  enemy,  without  risking  too  much,  and  to  deceive  them 
as  to  the  march  and  projects  of  the  army. 

1240.  When  the  enemy  is  hidden  by  a  curtain  of  advanced  troops, 
the  commandant  of  the  advanced  guard  sends  scouts,  under  intelligent 
officers,  to  the  right  and  left,  to  ascertain  his  position  and  movements. 
If  he  does  not  succeed  in  this  way,  he  tries  to  unmask  the  ememy  by 
demonstrations  ;  threatens  to  cut  off  the  advance  from  the  main  body ; 
makes  false  attacks ;  partial  and  impetuous  charges  in  echelon ;  and 
if  all  fail,  he  makes  a  real  attack  to  accomplish  the  object. 

1241.  Detachments  left  by  the  advanced  guard  to  hold  points  in 
the  rear  rejoin  it  when  other  troops  come  up.  If  the  army  takes  a 
position,  and  the  advanced  guard  is  separated  from  it  by  defiles  or 
heights,  the  communication  is  secured  by  troops  drawn  from  the 
main  body. 

1242.  At  proper  distance  from  the  enemy,  the  troops  are  formed  for 
the  attack  in  several  lines ;  if  only  two  can  be  formed,  some  battalions 
in  column  are  placed  behind  the  wings  of  the  second  line.  The  lines 
may  be  formed  of  troops  in  column  or  in  order  of  battle,  according 
to  the  ground  and  plan  of  attack. 

1243.  The  advanced  guard  may  be  put  in  the  line  or  on  the  wings, 
or  other  position,  to  aid  the  pursuit  or  cover  the  retreat. 

Military.  20 


230  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 


War  (^Battles)  Service. 

1244.  The  reserve  is  formed  of  the  best  troops  of  foot  and  horse,  to 
complete  a  victory  or  make  good  a  retreat.  It  is  placed  in  the  rear 
of  the  centre,  or  chief  point  of  attack  or  defence. 

1246.  The  cavalry  should  be  distributed  in  echelon  on  the  wings 
and  at  the  centre,  on  favorable  ground. 

1246.  It  should  be  instructed  not  to  take  th  >  gallop  until  within 
charging  distance  ;  never  to  receive  a  charge  at  a  halt,  but  to  meet  it, 
or,  if  not  strong  enough,  to  retire  manoeuvring ;  and  in  order  to  be 
ready  for  the  pursuit,  and  prepared  against  a  reverse,  or  the  attacks 
of  the  reserve,  not  to  engage  all  its  squadrons  at  once,  but  to  reserve 
one-third,  in  column  or  in  echelon,  abreast  of  or  in  the  rear  of  one 
of  the  wings;  this  arrangement  is  better  than  a  second  line  with 
intervals. 

1247.  In  the  attack,  the  artillery  is  employed  to  silence  the  batteries 
that  protect  the  position.  In  the  defence,  it  is  better  to  direct  its  fire 
on  the  advancing  troops.  In  either  case,  as  many  pieces  are  united 
as  possible,  the  fire  of  artillery  being  formidable  in  proportion  to  its 
concentration. 

1248.  In  battles  and  military  operations  it  is  better  to  assume  the 
offensive,  and  put  the  enemy  on  the  defensive ;  but  to  be  safe  in 
doing  so  requires*&,  larger  force  than  the  enemy,  or  better  troops,  and 
favorable  ground.  When  obliged  to  act  on  the  defensive,  tlio  advan- 
tage of  position  and  of  making  the  attack  may  sometimes  be  secured 
by  forming  in  rear  of  the  ground  on  which  we  are  to  figlit,  and 
advancing  at  the  moment  of  action.  In  mountain  warfare  the  assail- 
ant lias  always  the  disadvantage ;  and  even  in  offensive  warfare  in 
the  open  field,  it  may  frequently  be  very  important,  when  the  artillery 
is  well  posted,  and  any  advantage  of  ground  may  be  secured,  to  await 
the  enemy  and  compel  him  to  attack. 

1249.  The  attack  should  be  made  with  a  superior  force  on  the  decisive 
point  of  the  enemy's  position,  by  masking  this  by  false  attacks  and 
demonstrations  on  other  points,  and  by  concealing  the  troops  intended 
for  it  by  the  ground,  or  by  other  troops  in  their  front. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  231 

War  (  Battles  )  Service. 

1250.  Besides  the  arrangements  which  depend  on  the  supposea  piau 
of  the  enemy,  the  wings  must  be  protected  by  the  ground,  or  sup- 
ported by  troops  in  echelon;  if  the  attack  of  the  enemy  is  repulsed, 
the  ofFensire  must  at  once  be  taken,  to  inspire  the  troops,  to  disconcert 
the  enemy,  and  often  to  decide  the  action.  In  thus  taking  the  offen- 
sive, a  close  column  should  be  pushed  rapidly  on  the  wing  or  flank 
of  the  enemy.  The  divisions  of  this  column  form  in  line  of  battle 
successively,  and  each  division  moves  to  the  front  as  soon  as  formed, 
in  order,  by  a  rapid  attack  in  echelon,  to  prevent  the  enemy  from 
changing  front  or  bringing  up  his  reserves.  In  all  arrangements, 
especially  in  those  for  attack,  it  is  most  important  to  conceal  the 
design  until  the  moment  of  execution,  and  then  to  execute  it  with  the 
greatest  rapidity.  The  night,  therefore,  is  preferred  for  the  movement 
of  troops  on  the  flank  or  rear  of  the  enemy,  otherwise  it  is  necessary 
to  mask  their  march  by  a  giand  movement  in  front,  or  by  taking  a 
wide  circuit. 

1251.  In  making  an  attack,  the  communications  to  the  rear  and  for 
retreat  must  be  secured,  and  the  General  must  give  beforehand  all 
necessary  orders  to  provide  for  that  event. 

1252.  When  u  success  is  gained,  the  light  troops  should  pursue  the 
enemy  promptly  and  rapidly,  The  other  troops  will  restore  order  in 
their  columns,  then  advance  from  position  to  position,  always  prepared 
for  an  attack  or  to  support  the  troops  engaged. 

1253.  Before  the  action,  the  Generals  indicate  the  places  where  they 
will  be ;  if  they  change  position,  they  give  notice  of  it,  or  leave  a 
staff  officer  to  show  where  they  have  gone. 

1254.  During  the  fight  the  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers 
keep  the  men  in  the  ranks,  and  enforce  obedience  if  necessary. 
Soldiers  must  not  be  permitted  to  leave  the  ranks  to  strip  or  rob  the 
dead,  nor  to  assist  the  wounded,  unless  by  express  permission,  which 
is  only  to  be  given  after  the  action  is  decided.  The  highest  interest 
and  duty  is  to  win  the  victory,  which  only  can  insure  proper  car© 
of  the  wounded. 


232  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

War  (  Battles  )  Service. 

1255.  Before  the  action,  the  Quartermaster  of  the  division  makes  all 
the  necessary  arrangements  for  the  transportation  of  the  wounded. 
He  establishes  the  ambulance  dep6ts  in  the  rear,  and  gives  his  assist- 
ants the  necessary  instruction  for  the  service  of  the  ambulance  wagons 
and  other  means  of  removing  the  wounded 

1256.  The  ambulance  dep&t,  to  which  the  wounded  are  carried  or 
directed  for  immediate  treatment,  is  generally  established  at  the  most 
convenient  building  nearest  the  field  of  battle.  A  red  flag  marks  its 
place,  or  the  way  to  it,  to  the  conductors  of  the  ambulances  and  to 
the  wounded  who  can  walk. 

1257.  The  active  ambulances  follow  the  troops  engaged  to  succor 
the  wounded  and  remove  them  to  the  dep6ts ;  for  this  purpose  the 
conductors  should  always  have  the  necessary  assistants,  that  tho 
soldiers  may  have  no  excuse  to  leave  the  ranks  for  that  object. 

1258.  The  medical  director  of  the  division,  after  consultation  with 
the  Quartermaster-General,  distributes  the  medical  officers  and  hospi- 
tal attendants  at  his  disposal  to  the  dep6ts  and  active  ambulances. 
He  will  send  officers  and  attendants,  when  practicable,  to  the  active 
ambulances,  to  relieve  the  wounded  who  require  treatment  before 
being  removed  from  the  ground.  He  will  see  that  the  dep6ts  and 
ambulances  are  provided  with  the  necessary  apparatus,  medicines 
and  stores.  lie  will  take  post  and  render  his  professional  services  at 
the  principal  dep6t. 

1259.  If  the  enemy  endanger  tho  dep6t,  the  Quartermaster  takes  the 
orders  of  the  General  to  remove  it  or  to  strengthen  its  guard. 

1260.  Tho  wounded  in  the  dep6ts  and  the  sick  are  removed,  as 
soon  as  possible,  to  the  hospitals  that  have  been  established  by  tho 
Quartermaster-General  of  the  army  on  the  flanks  or  rear  of  the  army. 

1261.  After  an  action,  tho  officers  of  ordnance  collect  the  munitions 
of  M'ar  left  on  the  field,  and  make  a  return  of  them  to  tho  General. 
The  Quartermaster's  department  collects  the  rest  of  the  public  pro- 
perty captured,  and  makes  the  returns  to  head-quarters. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  233 


War  (  Prisoners  of  War  )  Service. 


1262.  Written  reports  for  the  General  commanding  in  chief  are  made 
"by  Commandants  of  regiments,  batteries  and  separate  squadrons,  and 
by  all  Commanders  of  a  higher  grade,  each  ia  what  concerns  his  own 
command,  and  to  his  immediate  Commander. 

1263.  When  an  officer  or  soldier  deserves  mention  for  conduct  in 
action,  a  special  report  shall  be  made  in  his  case,  and  the  General 
commanding  in  chief  decides  whether  to  mention  him  in  his  report  to 
the  government  and  in  his  orders.  But  he  shall  not  be  mentioned 
in  the  report  until  he  has  been  mentioned  in  the  orders  to  the  army. 
These  special  reports  are  examined  with  care  by  the  intermediate 
Commanders,  to  verify  the  facts  and  secure  commendation  and  rewards 
to  the  meritorious  only, 

1264.  The  report  of  battles,  which  must  frequently  be  made  before 
these  special  reports  of  persons  are  scrutinized,  is  confined  to  general 
praise  or  blame,  and  an  account  of  the  oi>erations. 

PRISONERS  OP  "WAR. 

1265.  Prisoners  of  war  will  be  disarmed  and  sent  to  the  rear,  and 
reported  as  soon  as  practicable  to  the  head-quarters.  The  return 
of  prisoners  from  the  Head-quarters  of  the  Army  to  the  War  Depart- 
ment will  specify  the  number,  rank  and  corps. 

1266.  The  private  property  of  prisoners  will  be  duly  respected,  and 
each  shall  be  treated  with  the  regard  due  to  his  rank.  They  are  to 
obey  the  necessary  orders  given  them.  They  receive  for  subsistence 
one  ration  each,  without  regard  to  rank ;  and  the  wounded  are  to  be 
treated  with  the  same  care  as  tl>e  wounded  of  the  army.  Other 
allowances  to  them  will  depend  on  conventions  with  the  enemy. 
Prisoners'  horses  will  be  taken  for  the  army. 

1267.  Exchanges  of  prisoners  and  release  of  oflSicers  on  parole  depend 
on  the  orders  of  the  Geneial  commanding  in  chief,  under  the  instruc- 
tions of  government. 

Military.  20* 


234  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 


War  (  Convoys  and  their  Escorts )  Service. 


CONVOYS  AND  THEIR  ESCORTS. 

1268.  The  strength  and  composition  of  the  escort  of  a  convoy  depend 
on  the  country,  the  nature  and  value  of  the  convoy,  and  the  dangers 
it  may  incur.  A  larger  escort  is  required  for  a  convoy  of  powder, 
that  the  defence  may  not  be  near  the  train. 

1269.  Cavalry  is  employed  in  escorts  chiefly  to  reconnoitre ;  the  pro- 
portion is  larger  as  the  country  is  more  open. 

1270.  Pioneers  or  working  parties  are  attached  to  convoys,  to  mend 
roads,  remove  obstacles  and  erect  defences.  The  convoys  should 
always  be  provided  with  spare  wheels,  poles,  axes,  &c. 

1271.  The  Commandant  of  the  escort  should  receive  detailed  instruc- 
fions  in  writing. 

1272.  As  far  as  the  defence  permits,  the  Commander  of  the  escort 
shall  refer  to  the  officer  in  charge  of  the  convoy  for  the  hours  of 
departure,  the  halts,  the  parking  and  order  of  the  train,  and  the  pre- 
cautions against  accidents. 

1273.  Officers  who  accompany  the  convoy,  but  do  not  belong  to  the 
escort,  shall  exercise  no  authority  in  it  except  by  consent  of  the 
Commander.  If  the^c  officers  are  junior  to  the  Commander,  he  may 
assign  them  to  duty  if  the  defence  requires  it. 

1274.  Large  convoys  are  formed  into  divisions,  each  with  a  con- 
ductor. The  distance  between  the  wagons  is  four  paces.  A  small 
party  of  infantry  is  attached  to  each  division. 

1275.  Generally,  munitions  of  war  are  at  the  head  of  the  convoy, 
subsistence  next,  and  then  other  military  stores ;  the  sutler  last.  But 
always  that  part  of  Wio  convoy  which  is  most  important  to  the  army 
shall  be  where  it  is  most  secure  from  danger. 

1276.  The  Commandant  should  send  out  reconnoitring  parties,  and 
never  put  the  convoy  in  motion  until  tlicir  reports  have  been  received. 
He  always  forms  an  advance  and  rear  guard,  and  keeps  the  main 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  235 

War  (  Convoys  and  their  Escorts )  Service. 

body  under  his  immediate  order  at  the  most  important  point,  with 
small  guards  or  posts  at  other  points. 

1277.  In  an  open  country  the  main  body  marches  by  the  side  of  the 
road,  opposite  the  centre  of  the  convoy ;  in  other  cases  at  the  head 
or  rear  of  the  column,  as  the  one  or  the  other  is  more  exposed. 

1278.  The  advance  guard  precedes  the  convoy  far  enough  to  remove 
all  obstacles  to  its  advance.  It  examines  the  woods,  defiles  and 
villages,  and  by  mounted  men  gives  information  to  the  Commander, 
and  receives  his  orders.    It  reconnoitres  places  for  halts  and  parks. 

1279.  If  the  head  of  the  column  is  threatened,  the  advanced  guard 
seizes  the  defiles  and  places  which  the  enemy  might  occupy,  and  holds 
them  until  the  main  body  advances  to  the  front  and  relieves  it ;  the 
main  body  holds  the  positions  imtil  the  head  of  the  convoy  arrives, 
and  then  leaves  detachments  which  are  relieved  by  the  parties  march- 
ing with  the  divisions ;  the  posts  are  not  abandoned  until  the  whole 
convoy  has  passed  and  the  position  is  no  longer  important. 

1280.  When  the  rear  is  threatened,  like  measures  are  taken ;  the 
rear  guard  defends  the  ground  and  retards  the  enemy  by  breaking 
the  bridges  and  blocking  the  road. 

1281.  If  the  flanks  are  threatened,  and  the  ground  is  broken,  and 
many  defiles  are  to  be  passed,  the  defence  of  the  convoy  becomes 
more  diflScult ;  the  advance  and  rear  guards  must  be  reduced,  the 
flanks  strengthened,  and  positions  which  will  cover  the  march  of  the 
convoy  must  be  occupied  by  the  main  body  of  the  troops  before  the 
head  of  the  convoy  reaches  them,  and  until  it  has  passed. 

1282.  If  the  convoy  is  large,  and  has  to  pass  places  that  the  force 
and  position  of  the  enemy  make  dangerous,  the  loss  of  the  whole 
convoy  must  not  be  risked  ;  it  must  pass  by  divisions,  which  reunite 
after  the  passage.  In  this  case  the  greater  part  of  the  troops  guard 
the  first  division ;  they  seize  the  important  points,  and  cover  them 
with  light  troops,  or,  if  necessary,  with  small  posts,  and  hold  them 
until  all  the  divisions  have  passed. 


236  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

War  (  Convoys  and  their  Escorts )  Service. 

1283.  If  there  is  artillery  in  the  convoy,  the  Commander  of  the 
escort  uses  it  for  the  defence. 

1284.  To  move  faster  and  make  the  defence  easier,,  the  wagons  move 
in  double  file  whenever  the  road  allows  it.  If  a  wagon  breaks,  it  is 
at  once  removed  from  the  road ;  when  repaired,  it  takes  the  rear ; 
when  it  cannot  be  repaired,  its  load  and  horses  are  distributed  to  some 
of  the  other  wagons  kept  in  the  rear  for  that  purpose. 

1285.  Convoys  by  water  are  escorted  on  the  same  principles.  Each 
boat  has  a  small  infantry  guard ;  one  portion  of  the  escort  precedes 
or  follows"  the  convoy  in  boats.  The  cavalry  march  opposite  the 
convoy;  the  advance  and  rear  guard  move  by  land,  and  all  are  con- 
nected by  flankers  with  the  convoy.  Where  a  river  runs  through  a 
narrow  valley,  the  body  of  the  infantry  moves  by  land  to  prevent  the 
enemy  from  occupying  the  heights  and  disturbing  the  convoy. 

1286.  Convoys  halt  every  hour  to  let  the  horses  take  breath  and 
the  wagons  close  up.  Long  halts  are  made  but  seldom,  and  only  in 
places  that  have  been  reconnoitred  and  found  favorable  for  defence. 
At  night  the  park  is  arranged  for  defence,  and  in  preference  at  a  dis- 
tance from  inhabited  places,  if  in  an  enemy's  country. 

1287.  The  wagons  are  usually  parked  in  ranks,  axle  against  axle, 
the  poles  in  the  same  direction,  and  with  sufficient  space  between  the 
ranks  for  the  horses.  If  an  attack  is  feared,  they  are  parked  in 
square,  the  hind  wheels  outside  and  the  horses  inside. 

1288.  On  the  appearance  of  the  enemy  during  the  march,  the  Com- 
mander closes  up  the  wagons  and  continues  his  march  in  order :  he 
avoids  fighting ;  but  if  the  enemy  seizes  a  position  that  commands 
his  road,  he  attacks  vigorously  with  the  mass  of  his  force,  but  is  not 
to  continue  the  pursuit  far  from  the  convoy.  Tlie  convoy  halts,  and 
resumes  the  march  when  the  position  is  carried. 

1289.  When  the  enemy  is  too  strong  to  be  attacked,  the  convoy  is 
parked  in  square  if  there  is  room ;  if  not,  closed  up  in  double  file ;  at 
the  front  and  rear  the  road  is  blocked  by  wagons  across  it.  The 
drivers  are  dismounted  at  the  heads  of  the  horses.    They  are  not 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  237 

War  {Baggage  Trains')  Service. 

permitted  to  make  their  escape.  The  light  troops  keep  the  enemy  at 
a  distance  as  long  as  possible,  and  are  supported  when  necessary,  but 
prudently,  as  the  troops  must  be  kept  in  hand  to  resist  the  main 
attack. 

1290.  If  a  wagon  takes  fire  in  the  park,  remove  it  if  possible ;  if  not, 
remove  first  the  ammunition  wagons,  then  those  to  leeward  of  the  fire. 

1291.  When  a  whole  convoy  cannot  be  saved,  the  most  valuable 
part  may  sometimes  be  by  abandoning  the  rest.  If  all  efforts  fail, 
and  there  is  no  hope  of  succor,  the  convoy  must  be  set  on  fire  and 
the  horses  killed  that  cannot  be  saved  j  the  escort  may  then  cut  its 
way  through. 

1292.  If  the  convoy  is  of  prisoners  of  war,  every  effort  should  be 
made  to  reach  a  village  or  strong  building  where  they  may  be  con- 
fined ;  if  forced  to  fight  in  the  field,  the  prisoners  must  be  secured 
and  made  to  lie  down  until  the  action  is  over. 

BAGGAGE  TRAINS. 

1293.  The  baggage  train  of  general  head-quarters  and  the  trains 
of  the  several  divisions  are  each  under  the  charge  of  an  officer  of  the 
Quartermaster's  department.  These  officers  command  and  conduct 
the  trains  under  the  orders  they  receive  from  their  respective  head- 
quarters. When  the  trains  of  different  divisions  march  together,  or 
the  train  of  a  division  marches  with  the  train  of  general  head-quarters, 
the  senior  Quartermaster  directs  the  whole. 

1294.  The  Regimental  Quartermaster  has  charge  of  the  wagons^ 
horses,  equipments,  and  all  means  of  transport  employed  in  the  service 
of  the  regiment.  Under  the  orders  of  the  Colonel,  he  assembles  them 
for  the  march,  and  maintains  the  order  and  police  of  the  train  in  park 
and  on  the  march.  On  marches,  the  regimental  trains  are  under  the 
orders  of  the  Quartermaster  of  the  division.  When  the  march  is  by 
brigade,  the  senior  Regimental  Quartermaster  in  the  brigade,  or  the 
Quartermaster  of  the  brigade,  has  the  direction  of  the  whole.  The 
necessary  wagon-masters,  or  non-commissioned  officers  to  act  as  such, 
are  employed  with  the  several  trains. 


238  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

War  (^  Baggage  Trains)  Service. 

1295.  None  but  the  authorized  wagons  are  allowed  to  march  with 
the  train.  The  wagons  of  the  several  head-quarters,  the  regimental 
wagons,  and  the  wagons  of  sutlers  authorized  by  orders  from  head- 
quarters to  march  with  the  train,  are  all  to  be  conspicuously  marked. 

1296.  When  the  train  of  head-quarters  is  to  have  a  guard,  the 
strength  of  the  guard  is  regulated  by  the  General.  Generals  of 
brigade  guard  their  trains  by  the  men  attached  to  the  train  of  the 
first  regiment  of  their  brigades.  The  regimental  trains  are  loaded 
unloaded  and  guarded,  as  far  as  practicable,  by  convalescents  and 
men  not  effective  in  the  ranks ;  in  the  cavalry,  by  dismounted  men. 
When  the  guard  of  a  train  is  the  escort  for  its  defence,  the  regulations 
in  regard  to  convoys  and  escorts  take  effect. 

1297.  Habitually  each  division  is  followed  by  its  train,  the  regimental 
trains  uniting  at  the  brigade  rendezvous.  When  otherwise,  the  order 
for  the  movement  of  the  divisions,  brigades  and  regiments  contains 
the  necessary  directions  in  regard  to  the  assembling  and  marching  of 
the  respective  trains.  The  several  trains  march  in  an  order  analogous 
to  the  rank  of  the  Generals,  and  the  order  of  battle  of  the  troops  to 
which  they  belong.  Trains  are  not  allowed  in  any  case  to  be  in  the 
midst  of  the  troops,  or  to  impede  the  march  of  the  troops. 

1298.  The  wagon-masters,  under  the  orders  of  the  officers  of  the 
Quartermaster's  department,  exercise  the  necessary  restraints  over 
the  teamsters  and  servants  who  leave  their  teams,  or  do  not  properly 
conduct  them ;  or  who  ill-treat  their  horses,  or  who  attempt  to  pillage, 
or  run  away  in  case  of  attack. 

1299.  The  General  commanding  the  army,  and  the  Generals  of  divi- 
sion, will  not  permit  any  general  or  staff  officer,  or  regiment  under 
their  orders,  or  any  person  whatsoever,  attached  to  their  command,  to 
have  more  than  the  authorized  amount  of  the  means  of  transportation. 
For  this  purpose  they  will  themselves  make,  and  cause  to  be  made, 
frequent  reviews  and  inspections  of  the  trains.  They  will  see  that  no 
trooper  is  employed  to  lead  a  private  horse,  no  soldier  to  drive  a 
private  vehicle,  and  that  no  trooper  is  put  on  foot  to  lend  his  horse 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  239 

War  (^General  Police')  Service, 

to  an  officer.  They  will  not  permit  the  wagons  of  the  artillery  or  of 
the  train  to  be  loaded  with  anything  foreign  to  their  proper  service, 
nor  any  public  horse,  for  any  occasion,  to  be  harnessed  to  a  private 
carriage. 

1300.  The  officers  of  the  Quartermaster's  department,  the  wagon- 
masters,  and  all  conductors  of  trains,  are  charged  with  watching 
that  the  regulations  respecting  transportation  allowances  are  strictly 
observed 

GENERAL  POLICE. 

1301.  When  necessary,  the  General-in-Chief  or  General  of  division 
may  appoint  a  provost  marshal  to  take  charge  of  prisoners,  with  a 
suitable  guard,  or  other  police  force. 

1302.  Private  servants,  not  soldiers,  will  not  be  allowed  to  wear  the 
uniform  of  any  corps  of  the  army,  but  each  will  be  required  to  carry 
with  him  a  certificate  from  the  officer  who  employs  him,  verified,  for 
regimental  officers,  by  the  signature  of  the  Colonel ;  for  other  officers 
under  the  rank  of  Colonel,  by  the  chief  of  their  corps  or  department. 

1303.  Laundresses  permitted  to  follow  the  army  will  be  furnished 
with  certificates,  signed  as  in  the  preceding  paragraph,  and  no  woman 
of  bad  character  will  be  allowed  to  follow  the  army.  Other  persons 
with  the  army,  not  officers  or  soldiers,  such  as  guides  of  the  country, 
interpreters,  &c.,  will  carry  about  them  similiar  certificates  from  the 
head-quarters  that  employs  them. 

1304.  Deserters  from  the  enemy,  after  being  examined,  will  be 
secured  for  some  days,  as  they  may  be  spies  in  disguise ;  as  oppor- 
tunities offer,  they  will  be  sent  to  the  rear ;  after  which,  if  they  are 
found  lurking  about  the  army,  or  attempting  to  return  to  the  enemy, 
they  will  be  treated  with  severity. 

1305.  The  arms  and  accoutrements  of  deserters  will  be  turned  over 
to  the  Ordnance  department,  and  their  horses  to  the  corps  in  want 
of  them,  after  being  branded  with  the  letters  "  U.  S."  The  com- 
pensation to  be  accorded  to  deserters,  for  such  objects,  will  be  accord- 


240  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 


War  (^Safeguards)  Service. 


\\\g  to  appraisement,  made  under  the  direction  of  the  Quartermaster's 
departtnent.  The  enlistment  of  deserters,  without  express  permission 
from  general  head-quarters,  is  prohibited. 

1306.  It  is  forbidden  to  purchase  horses  without  ascertaining  the 
riglit  of  the  party  to  sell.  Stolen  horses  shall  be  restored.  Estrays, 
in  the  enemy's  country,  when  the  owner  is  not  discovered,  are  taken 
fur  the  army. 

1307.  Plundering  and  marauding,  at  all  times  disgi-aceful  to  soldiers, 
when  committed  on  the  persons  or  property  of  those  whom  it  is  the 
duty  of  the  army  to  protect,  become  crimes  of  such  enormity  as  to 
admit  of  no  remission  of  the  awful  punishment  which  the  military 
law  awards  against  ofiences  of  this  nature. 

SAFEGUARDS. 

1308.  Safeguards  are  protections  granted  to  persons  or  property  iu 
foreign  parts  by  the  Commanding  General,  or  by  other  Commanders 
within  the  limits  of  their  command. 

1309.  Safeguards  are  usually  given  to  protect  hospitals,  public 
establishments,  establishments  of  religion,  charity  or  instruction, 
museums,  depositories  of  the  arts,  mills,  post-offices,  and  other  insti- 
tutions of  public  benefit ;  also  to  individuals  whom  it  may  be  tho 
interest  of  the  army  to  respect. 

1310.  A  safeguard  may  consist  of  one  or  more  men  of  fidelity  and 
firmness,  generally  non-effective  non-commissioned  officers,  furnished 
with  a  paper  setting  out  clearly  the  protection  and  exemptions  it  is 
intended  to  secure,  signed  by  the  Commander  giving  it,  and  his  staff 
officer ;  or  it  may  consist  of  such  paper,  delivered  to  the  party  whose 
person,  family,  house  and  property  it  is  designed  to  protect.  These 
safeguards  must  be  numbered  and  registered. 

1311.  The  men  left  as  safeguards  by  one  corps  may  bo  replaced  by 
another.  They  are  withdrawn  when  the  country  is  evacuated ;  but 
if  not,  they  have  orders  to  await  the  arrival  of  the  enemy's  troops, 
and  apply  to  the  Commander  for  a  safe-conduct  to  the  outposts. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  241 

Sieges, 

1312.  Form  of  a  safeguard : 
By  authority  of . 

A  safeguard  is  hereby  granted  to  [  A.  B ,  or  the  house  and 

family  of  A,  B ,  or  to  the  college,  mills  or  property ;  statiug 

precisely  the  place,  nature  and  description  of  the  person,  property 
or  buildings].  All  officers  and  soldiers  belonging  to  the  army  of  the 
United  States  are  therefore  commanded  to  respect  this  safeguard,  and 
to  afford,  if  necessary,  protection  to  [the  person,  family  or  property 

of ,  as  the  case  may  be]. 

Given  at  head-quarters,  the  —  day  of . 

A.  B ,  Major-General  commanding  in  chief. 

By  command  of  the  General. 

C.  D ,  Adjutant-General. 

bbih  Article  of  the  Rules  and  Abides  of  War. 
"  Whosoevej:  belonging  to  the  armies  of  the  United  States,  employed 
in  foreign  parts,  shall  force  a  safeguard,  shall  suffer  death. 

SIEGES. 

1313.  In  the  following  regulations  the  besieging  force  is  supposed 
lo  be  two  divisions  of  infantry  and  a  brigade  of  cavalry.  The  samo 
principles  govern  in  other  cases. 

1314.  The  Brigadier-Generals  of  infantry  serve,  in  turn,  as  Generals 
of  the  trenches ;  one  or  more  of  them  are  detailed  daily,  according  to 
the  front  and  number  of  attacks ;  they  superintend  the  operations, 
and  dispose  the  guards  of  the  trenches  to  repulse  sorties  and  protect 
the  works.  Officers  of  the  general  staff  are  assigned  to  them  to 
transmit  their  orders  and  attend  to  the  details  of  service. 

1315.  The  Colonels  and  Lieutenant-Colonels  of  infantry  alternate  for 
duty  in  the  trenches ;  one  or  more  are  detailed  daily ;  they  superintend 
the  service  of  the  guards  and  workmen  in  the  part  of  the  work  to  which 
the  General  of  the  trenches  assigns  them,  being  posted  with  troops  of 
their  own  regiments  in  preference.  The  Commandant  of  the  siege 
may  place  the  Colonels  on  the  roster  with  the  Brigadier-Generals. 

Military.  21 


242  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 


Sieges- 


1316.  The  Commandants  of  engineers  and  artillery  accompany  the 
first  troops  before  the  place  to  examine  the  works  and  the  approaches. 
When  the  engineers  have  completed  the  reconnoissance  of  the  works, 
and  of  each  front  as  far  as  practicable,  the  Commandant  of  engineers 
makes  a  plan  of  the  works  as  exact  and  detailed  as  possible,  and, 
under  the  instructions  of  the  General  commanding  the  siege,  draws 
up  the  general  plan  of  the  siege,  and  discusses  it  with  the  Commandant 
of  artillery  in  regard  to  the  best  employment  of  that  arm.  These 
officers  then  submit  their  joint  or  separate  opinions  to  the  General, 
who  decides  on  the  plan  of  tlie  siege,  and  gives  the  orders  for  the 
execution.  The  Commandant  of  engineers  directs  the  construction 
of  all  the  works  of  siege,  under  the  authority  of  the  General,  and  lays 
before  him  every  day  a  report  of  his  operations,  and  a  plan  showing 
the  progress  of  the  attack.  The  Commandant  of  artillery  also  makes 
daily  reports  to  the  General  of  all  that  relates  to  his  branch  of  the 
service. 

1317.  The  Quartermaster-General  establishes  the  hospitals,  and 
organizes  the  means  for  transporting  the  wounded  to  them. 

1318.  The  Commanding  General  appoints  a  field  officer  of  the 
trenches,  who  is  aided  by  one  or  two  Captains  or  Lieutenants. 

1319.  The  field  officer  of  the  trenches  is  charged  with  all  the  details 
relative  to  the  assembling  of  the  guards  and  the  workmen.  He  distri- 
butes the  guards  on  the  different  points  of  the  attack,  agreeably  to  the 
orders  c^  the  General  of  the  trenches,  and  fomis  the  detachments  of 
workmen  for  the  engineers  and  artillery ;  that  he  may  be  prepared 
for  this  distribution,  ho  receives  every  day  from  the  Adjutant-General 
a  statement  of  the  details  for  the  next  day. 

1820.  On  the  arrival  of  the  General  of  the  trenches,  the  field  officer 
of  the  trenches  gives  him  all  the  information  necessary  to  enable  him 
to  station  the  troops,  attends  him  in  his  visit  to  the  trenches,  and 
takes  his  orders  on  the  changes  to  be  made  in  the  position  of  the 
troops.    The  execution  is  intrusted  to  the  Commandants  of  the  troops. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  243 

Sieges^ 

1321.  The  field  oflSw^r  of  the  trenches  sees  that  men  aud  litters  are 
always  readj^  to  bring  off  the  wounded.  One  or  more  companies  of 
the  guards  of  the  trenches  are  put  under  his  immediate  orders  for  tlie 
preservation  of  order  and  police  in  the  trenches. 

1322.  The  divisions,  brigades,  regiments  and  battalions  arc  encamped 
during  the  siege  in  the  order  of  battle.  The  service  of  camp  is  con- 
ducted as  heretofore  prescribed. 

1323.  The  infantry  has  two  kinds  of  siege- service :  the  guard  of  the 
trenches  and  the  work  of  the  trenches. 

1824.  The  guards  of  the  trenches  mount  every  day  by  battalions,  in 
such  order  of  detail  that  all  the  troops  may  take  an  equal  share,  and 
no  part  of  the  line  be  left  too  weak.  If  only  one  battalion  is  required, 
each  division  furnishes  it  alternately;  if  two  are  required,  each  divi- 
sion gives  one ;  if  three,  one  division  furnishes  two,  the  other  one 
alternately.  The  two  battalions  of  the  same  division  are  not  taken 
from  the  same  brigade, 

1325,  The  detail  for  work  of  the  trenches  is  by  company,  from  all 
the  regiments  at  one  time,  or  in  turn,  and  continues  generally  twelve 
hours.  The  detail  from  any  regiment  should  never  be  less  than  a 
company.  If  only  half  a  company  would  be  needed  from  all  the 
regiments  at  a  time,  every  other  regiment  furnishes  a  full  company 
alternately. 

1326,  The  battalions  for  guard  are  detailed  at  least  twelve  hours  in 
advance ;  they  furnish  no  other  details  during  this  tour.  If  the  whole 
regiment  is  called  out,  it  leaves  a  sufficient  police  guard  in  camp, 

1327,  Twenty-four  hours,  or  twelve  at  least,  before  mounting  guard 
in  the  trenches,  the  battalions  detailed  for  guard  do  not  furnish  work- 
men ;  and  the  companies  of  these  bat  talions  whose  tour  it  would  have 
been  to  work  in  the  trenches,  do  not  go  there  for  twenty-four  hours 
after  guard,  if  possible,  or  at  the  least  twelve. 

1328,  The  workmen  who  are  required  for  other  work  than  that  of  the 
trenches  are  taken  from  the  roster  for  fatigue  from  the  battalions  and 
companies  not  employed  in  the  trenches. 


244  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 


Sieges. 


1329.  The  battalions  first  for  detail  for  guard  of  the  trenches,  and 
the  companies  first  for  detail  for  work  in  the  trenches,  furnish  no 
other  details,  and  are  held  on  picket,  ready  to  march  at  the  call  of  the 
field  officer  of  the  trenches. 

1830.  Materials  for  the  siege,  such  as  fascines,  gabions,  hurdles 
pickets,  &c.,  are  furnished  by  the  different  corps,  in  the  proportiou 
ordered  by  the  General. 

133L  Guards  and  workmen  going  to  the  trenches  march  without 
beat  of  drum  or  music. 

1332.  At  all  times,  and  especially  on  the  day  the  trenches  are  opened 
everything  is  avoided  likely  to  attract  the  attention  of  the  enemy. 
With  this  view  the  General  may  vary  the  hour  of  relieving  guards. 

1333.  The  chiefs  of  engineers  and  artillery  make  requisitions  for 
workmen  in  advance,  that  the  details  may  be  made  in  time  to  prevent 
any  delay  in  the  work.  They  should  exceed  the  number  strictly 
required,  that  there  may  be  a  reserve  for  unforeseen  wants.  If  this 
reserve  is  found  insufficient,  the  General  directs  the  field  officer  of  the 
trenches  to  call  on  the  picket. 

1334.  Before  the  guards  and  workmen  march,  the  field  officer  of  the 
trenches  arranges  them  so  that  each  detachment  can  reach  its  ground 
without  confusion.  The  troops  are  posted  in  the  trenches  according 
to  the  position  of  their  regiments  in  the  order  of  battle,  and,  as  far  as 
possible,  the  companies  of  workmen  in  like  order.  The  reserves  of 
workmen  are  placed  at  the  dep6t  of  the  trenches,  or  the  nearest  suit- 
able place  to  the  works. 

1335.  The  workmen  leave  their  knapsacks  and  swords  in  camp,  and 
march  with  their  firearms  and  cartridge-boxes,  which  they  place  near 
them  while  at  work.  They  always  carry  their  overcoats,  to  cover 
them  in  resting  or  when  wounded. 

1336.  The  guards  always  enter  the  trenches  with  arms  trailed^  R-nd 
the  workmen  also,  unless  they  carry  materials  or  tools,  when  the  arms 
are  in  the  sling. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  245 

Sieges. 

1337.  The  guards  and  detachments  of  workmen  send  a  corporal  to 
the  openings  of  the  trenches  to  guide  the  relief.  They  march  out  of 
the  trenches  by  the  flank,  with  trailed  arms, 

1338.  Sand-bags,  forming  loopholes,  are  placed  at  intervals  on  the 
parapet  to  cover  the  sentinels ;  they  are  more  numerous  than  the 
sentinels,  so  that  the  enemy  may  not  know  where  the  sentinels  are 
placed, 

1339.  When  detachments  arc  placed  at  night  in  advance  of  the 
trenches,  to  cover  the  workmen,  the  men  sit  or  lie  down,  with  their 
firearms  in  their  hands,  to  hide  themselves  better  from  the  enemy : 
the  sentinels  put  their  ears  to  the  ground  frequently,  that  they  may 
hear  troops  coming  out  of  the  place.  To  prevent  mistakes,  the  work- 
men are  told  what  troops  cover  them. 

1340.  No  honors  are  paid  in  the  trenches.  When  the  General  com- 
manding the  siege  visits  them,  the  guards  place  themselves  in  rear 
of  the  banquette,  and  rest  on  their  arms.  The  colors  are  never  carried 
to  the  trei-iches  unless  the  whole  regiment  marches  to  repulse  a  sortie 
or  make  an  assault.  Even  in  this  case  they  are  not  displayed  until 
the  General  commanding  the  siege  gives  a  formal  order. 

1341.  The  materials  of  ilie  siege  of  all  kinds,  together  with  the  tools, 
are  collected  in  part  at  the  dcp6ts  of  the  trenches,  and  in  part  at  the 
openings  of  the  trenches,  or  in  such  other  place  as  has  been  appointed 
for  the  convenience  of  the  service  by  the  field  officer  of  the  trenches, 
on  the  advice  of  the  chiefs  of  artillery  and  engineers.  They  are  in 
charge  of  officers  of  engineers  and  of  artillery,  with  guards  or  non- 
commissioned officers  of  both  corps.  But  if  these  corps  cannot  furnish 
them,  the  chiefs  apply  for  assistance  from  the  infantry. 

1342.  The  workmen,  in  going  to  the  trenches,  carry  such  tools  and 
materials  as  are  required  by  the  artillery  and  engineers.  In  this  case, 
the  field  officer  of  the  trenches  has  notice  and  superintends  it. 

1343.  Tl>e  soldiers  sent  to  tlie  trendies  go  with  their  cartridge- 
boxes  filled.     Cartridges,  when  needed,  are  sent  to  the  trenches  on 

MiMTAEY.  21* 


246  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Sieges. 

the  requisition  of  Commanders  of  battalions,  approved  by  the  General 
of  the  trenches. 

1344.  In  the  case  of  a  sortie,  the  guards  move  rapidly  to  the  places 
that  have  been  designated  by  the  General  of  the  trenches,  and  wliich 
afford  the  best  defence  for  the  head  of  the  works,  the  batteries,  the 
communications,  or  the  flanks,  or  best  enable  them  to  take  the  sortie 
itself  in  flank  or  reverse.  Having  lined  the  banquette  to  fire  on  the 
enemy,  the  troops  form  on  the  reverse  of  the  trench  to  receive  him. 
The  workmen  take  arms,  retain  their  positions,  or  retire  with  their 
tools  as  ordered.  The  officers  commanding  the  detachments  of  work- 
men see  that  their  movements  are  made  promptly  and  in  good  order, 
so  as  to  avoid  all  confusion  in  the  communications. 

1345.  The  troops  that  advance  beyond  the  trenches  to  repulse  the 
sortie  must  not  follow  in  pursuit.  The  General  takes  care  that  they 
return  to  the  trenches  before  the  retreat  of  the  sortie  allows  the  artil- 
lery of  the  place  to  open  on  them.  When  the  workmen  return,  the 
officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  of  the  detachments  call  the  roll 
without  interrupting  the  work,  which  is  immediately  resumed. 

134G.  When  it  is  necessary  to  dismount  cavalry  and  send  them  to 
the  trenches,  they  should  be  employed  as  near  their  camp  as  possible, 
and  posted  between  the  detachments  of  infantry. 

1347.  Men  belonging  to  the  cavalry  may,  in  assaults,  be  employed  in 
carrying  fascines  and  other  materials  to  fill  ditches  and  make  passages. 

1348.  The  general  officers  of  cavalry  are  more  particularly  employed 
in  the  service  of  posts  and  detachments  placed  in  observation  to  pro- 
tect the  siege.  They  and  the  field  officers  of  this  arm  are  employed 
in  the  command  of  escorts  to  convoys,  of  whatever  arms  the  escorts 
may  be  composed.  When  these  duties  arc  not  suflficient  to  employ 
them,  they  take  their  share  of  the  duty  of  the  trenches. 

1349.  The  officers  of  engineers  and  artillery  of  the  trenches  make 
to  the  General  of  the  trenches  a  return  of  all  losses  in  their  troops, 
and  such  other  reports  on  the  work  as  he  requires,  in  addition  to  the 
reports  direct  to  their  respective  chiefs  on  the  details  of  the  service 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  247 


Sieges. 


1350.  At  the  end  of  each  tour,  the  field  officer  of  the  trenches  draws 
tip  a  report  for  the  twenty-four  hours  to  the  General  of  the  trenches. 
The  General  of  the  trenches  reports  to  the  General  commanding 
the  siege. 

1351.  The  Commanders  of  the  several  corps  in  the  trenches  report, 
when  relieved,  to  their  respective  head-quarters  the  losses  during  the 
tour,  and  the  conduct  of  the  officers  and  men. 

1352.  However  practicable  the  breach  may  appear,  or  however 
ruined  the  works  in  rear  of  it,  the  heads  of  columns  must  always  be 
supplied  with  ladders  to  get  over  unexpected  obstacles. 

1353.  The  General  commanding  the  siege  designates  picked  com- 
panies to- protect  property  and  persons,  and  prevent  pillage  and  vio- 
lence, from  the  moment  the  place  is  carried.  The  officers  exert 
themselves  to  restrain  the  men. 

1354.  The  General  designates  the  places  requiring  particular  pro- 
tection, such  as  churches,  asylums,  hospitals,  colleges,  schools  and 
magazines.  The  order  for  their  protection  should  remind  the  soldiers, 
at  the  time,  of  the  penalty  of  disobeying  it. 

1355.  Whether  the  place  be  taken  by  assault  or  by  capitulation,  the 
provisions  and  military  stores,  and  the  public  funds,  are  reserved  for 
the  use  of  the  army. 

1356.  The  Commander  of  engineers  will  keep  a  journal  of  the  siege, 
showing  the  operations  of  each  day  in  detail,  the  force  employed  on 
the  work,  the  kind  and  quantity  of  materials  used  in  them,  &c.  He 
will  also  mark  on  a  plan  of  the  ground  the  daily  progress  of  the  works, 
and  make  the  necessary  drawings  explanatory  of  their  construction. 

1357.  The  Commander  of  the  artillery  will  keep  a  daily  journal  of 
the  operations  under  his  direction,  showing :  the  number  and  kind 
of  pieces  in  battery,  the  force  employed  in  serving  them,  the  kind 
and  quantity  of  ammunition  expended,  the  number  of  rounds  fired 
from  each  piece  of  ordnance,  the  effect  of  the  fire,  and  all  other 
particulars  relative  to  his  branch  of  the  service. 


248  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Defence  of  ForUfied  Places. 

1358.  These  journals  and  drawings  will  be  sent,  after  the  siege, 
with  the  report  of  the  General,  to  the  War  Department, 


DEFENCE  OF  FORTIFIED  PLACES. 

1359.  In  war,  every  Commander  of  a  fortified  place  shall  always 
hold  himself  prepared  with  his  plan  of  defence,  as  if  at  any  time 
liable  to  attack.  He  arranges  this  plan  according  to  the  probable 
mode  of  attack ;  determines  the  posts  of  the  trooi^s  in  the  several 
parts  of  the  works,  the  rtliefs,  the  reserves,  and  the  details  of  service 
in  all  the  corps.  He  draws  up  instructions  for  a  case  of  attack,  and 
exercises  the  garrison  according  to  his  plan  of  defence.  In  sea-coast 
works,  he  provides  the  instructions  for  the  different  batteries  on  tlio 
approach  of  ships, 

1360.  In  framing  his  plan,  he  studies  the  works  and  the  exterior 
within  the  radius  of  attack  and  investment,  the  strength  of  the  garri- 
son, the  artillery,  the  munitions  of  war,  subsistence  and  supplies  of 
all  kinds,  and  takes  immediate  measures  to  procure  whatever  is  defi- 
cient of  troops  or  supplies,  either  by  requisition  on  the  government 
or  from  the  means  put  at  his  disposal. 

1361.  On  the  approach  of  an  enemy,  he  removes  all  houses  and 
other  objects,  within  or  without  the  place,  that  cover  the  approaches, 
or  interrupt  the  fire  of  the  guns  or  the  movements  of  the  troops.  He 
assures  himself  personally  that  all  j)osterns,  outlets,  embrasures,  &c., 
are  in  a  proi>er  state  of  security, 

13G2.  He  shall  be  furnished  by  the  Department  of  War  with  a  i)lan 
of  the  works,  showing  all  the  details  of  the  fortifications  and  of  the 
exterior  within  tlie  radius  of  attack ;  with  a  map  of  the  environs  within 
the  radius  of  investment;  with  a  map  of  the  vicinity,  including  the 
neighboring  works,  roads,  water-channels,  coasts,  &c. ;  with  a  memoir 
cxi)laining  the  situation  and  defence  of  the  place,  and  the  relations 
and  bearings  of  the  several  works  on  each  other,  and  on  the  approaches 
by  land  and  water;  all  which  he  carefully  preserves,  and  comnmni- 
catcs  onlv  to  the  council  of  defence. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  249 

Defence  of  Fortified  Places. 

1363.  He  consults  his  next  in  rank,  and  the  senior  officer  of  the 
engineers  and  of  the  artillery,  either  separately  or  as  a  council  of 
defence.  In  the  latter  case  he  designates  an  officer  to  act  as  secretary 
to  the  council,  and  to  record  their  proceedings  and  their  joint  or 
separate  opinions,  which  are  to  he  kept  secret  during  the  siege.  The 
members  may  record  their  opinions  under  their  own  signature.  In 
all  cases,  the  Commander  decides  on  his  own  responsibilit3\ 

1864.  The  Commander  of  the  place,  and  the  chiefs  of  engineers  and 
of  artillery,  shall  keep  journals  of  the  defence,  in  which  shall  he 
entered,  in  order  of  date,  without  blank  or  interlineation,  the  orders 
given  or  received,  the  manner  in  which  they  are  executed,  their 
results,  and  every  event  and  circumstance  of  importance  in  the  pro- 
gress of  the  defence.  These  journals  and  the  proceedings  of  the 
council  of  defence  shall  be  sent,  after  the  siege,  to  the  Department 
of  War. 

1365.  There  shall  be  kept  in  the  office  of  the  Commandant  of  the 
place,  to  be  sent,  after  the  siege,  to  the  Department  of  War,  a  map  of 
the  environs,  a  plan  of  the  fortifications,  and  a  special  plan  of  the 
front  of  attack,  on  which  the  chief  engineer  will  trace,  in  succession, 
the  positions  occupied,  and  the  works  executed  by  the  enemy  from 
the  investment ;  and  also  the  works  of  counter  approach  or  defence, 
and  the  successive  positions  of  the  artillery  and  other  troops  of  the 
garrison  during  the  progress  of  the  siege. 

1366.  The  Commander  shall  defend,  in  succession,  the  advanced 
works,  the  covered  way  and  outworks,  the  body  of  the  work,  and  the 
interior  intrenchments.  He  will  not  be  content  with  clearing  away 
the  foot  of  the  breaches,  and  defending  them  by  abattis,  mines,  and 
all  the  means  used  in  sieges;  but  he  shall  begin  in  good  time,  behind 
the  bastions  or  front  of  attack,  the  necessary  intrenchments  to  resist 
assaults  on  the  main  work. 

1367.  He  shall  use  his  means  of  defence  in  such  manner  as  always 
to  have  a  reserve  of  fresh  troops,  chosen  from  his  best  soldiers,  to 
resist  assaults,  retake  the  outworks,  and  especially  to  resist  the 


250  GENERAL  REGULATIOXS 

Uniform  aaid  Dress. 

assaults  on  the  body  of  th«  place;  and  a  reserve  of  provisions  for  the 
last  period  of  the  siege,  and  of  ammunition  for  the  last  attacks. 

1368.  He  must,  in  every  case,  compel  the  besieging  force  to  approach 
by  the  slow  and  successive  works  of  siege,  and  must  sustain  at  least 
one  assault  on  a  practicable  breach  in  the  body  of  the  place. 

1369.  When  the  Commander  thinks  that  the  end  of  the  defence  has 
come,  he  shall  still  consult  the  council  of  defence  on  the  means  that 
may  remain  to  prolong  the  siege.  But  in  all  cases  he  alone  will 
decide  on  the  time,  manner  and  terms  of  the  surrender.  In  the 
capitulation,  he  shall  not  seek  or  accept  better  terms  for  himself  than 
for  the  garrison,  but  shall  share  their  fate,  and  exert  his  best  endeavors 
for  the  care  of  the  troops,  and  especially  of  the  sick  and  wounded. 

1370.  No  Commander,  in  the  field,  shall  withdraw  troops  or  supplies 
from  any  fortified  place,  or  exercise  any  authority  over  its  Com- 
mandant, unless  it  has  been  put  subject  to  his  orders  by  competent 
authority. 

ARTICLE  XLVII. 

UNIFORM    AND    DRESS  OF  THE    MILITARY  FORCES  OF    THE    STATE 
OF    NEW-YORK. 

COAT   FOR   A   COMMISSIONED   OFFICER. 

1371.  All  officers  shall  wear  a  frock  coat  of  dark  blue  cloth,  the 
waist  to  extend  to  tlie  top  of  the  hip,  and  the  skirt  to  within  one 
incli  of  the  bend  of  the  knee;  single  breasted  for  Captaina  and 
Lieutenants ;  double  breasted  for  all  other  grades. 

1372.  For  a  Major -General. — Two  rows  of  buttons  on  the  breast, 
nine  in  each  row,  placed  by  threes ;  the  distance  between  each  row, 
five  and  one-half  inches  at  top,  and  three  and  one-half  inches  at 
bottom ;  stand-up  collar,  to  rise  no  higher  than  to  permit  the  cliin 
to  turn  freely  over  it,  to  hook  in  front  at  the  bottom,  and  slope  tlience 
up  and  backward  at  an  angle  of  thirty  degrees  on  each  side ;  cuffs 
two  and  one-half  inches  deep,  to  go  around  the  sleeves  parallel  with 
the  lower  edge,  and  to  button  with  tliree  small  buttons  at  the  under 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  251 

Uniform  and  Dress. 

seam ;  pockets  in  the  folds  of  the  skirts,  with  one  bntton  at  the  hip, 
and  one  at  the  end  of  each  pocket,  making  four  buttons  on  the  back 
and  skirt  of  the  coat ;  the  hip  button  to  range  with  the  lowest  but- 
tons on  the  breast ;  collar  and  cuffs  to  be  of  dark  blue  velvet ;  lining 
of  the  coat,  black. 

1373.  For  a  Brigadier  -General. — The  same  as  for  a  Major- General, 
except  that  there  will  be  only  eight  buttons  in  each  row  on  the  breast, 
placed  in  paii-s. 

1374.  For  a  Colonel. — The  same  as  for  a  Major-General,  except  that 
there  will  be  only  seven  buttons  in  each  row  on  the  breast,  placed  at 
equal  distances ;  collar  and  cufis  of  the  same  color  and  material  as 
the  coat. 

1375.  For  a  Lieutenant -Colonel. — The  same  as  for  a  Colonel. 

1376.  For  a  Major. — The  same  as  for  a  Colonel. 

1377.  For  a  Captain. — The  same  as  for  a  Colonel,  except  that  there 
will  be  only  one  row  of  nine  buttons  on  the  breast,  placed  at  equal 
distances. 

1378.  For  a  First  Lieutenant. — The  same  as  for  a  Captain. 

1379.  For  a  Second  Lieutenant. — The  same  as  for  a  Captain. 

1380.  For  a  Chaplain. — The  same  as  for  a  Captain. 

FOR   JCON-COMMISSIOJfED   OFFICERS,   MUSICIANS   AND    PRIVATES. 

1381.  The  uniform  coat  for  all  non-commissioned  officers,  musi- 
cians and  privates  shall  be  a  single  breasted  frock  of  dark  blue  cloth, 
with  a  skirt  extending  to  within  four  inches  of  the  bend  of  the  knee. 

1382.  For  a  Sergeant -Major  and  Quartermaster- Sergeant  of  AHillery. 
— One  row  of  nine  buttons  on  the  breast,  placed  at  equal  distances  ; 
stand-up  collar,  to  rise  no  higher  than  to  pennit  the  chin  to  turn 
freely  over  it,  to  hook  in  front  at  the  bottom,  and  slope  thence  up  and 
backward  at  an  angle  of  thirty  degrees  on  each  side ;  cuffs  pointed 
iMjcording  to  pattern,  and  to  button  with  two  small  buttons  at  tbo 


252  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Uniform  and  Dress 

under  seam ;  collar  and  cuflfs  edged  with  a  cord  or  welt  of  scarlet 
cloth ;  on  each  shoulder  a  metallic  scale  according  to  pattern,  with 
the  number  of  the  regiment  in  white  metal,  figures  one  inch  long, 
within  the  crescent ;  narrow  lining  for  skirt  of  the  coat  of  same 
material  and  color  as  the  coat ;  pockets  in  the  folds  of  the  skirts, 
with  one  button  at  the  hip  to  range  with  the  lowest  buttons  on  the 
breast ;  no  buttons  at  the  ends  of  the  pockets. 

1383.  For  a  Sergeant  -Major  and  Quartermaster- Sergeant  of  Infaniry. 
— The  same  as  for  artillery,  except  that  the  edging  will  be  of  light  or 
sky  blue  cloth. 

1384.  For  a  Sergeant  -Major  and  Quartermaster- Sergeant  of  Riflemen. 
— Same  as  for  the  artillery,  except  that  the  edging  will  be  of  medium 
or  emerald  green  cloth. 

1385.  For  a  Sergeant  -Major  and  Quartermaster- Sergeant  of  Cavalry. 
— The  same  as  for  the  artillery,  except  that  the  edging  will  be  of 
orange  cloth. 

138G.  For  a  Sergeant  of  Artillery,  Infantry,  Riflemen  and  Cavalry. — 
The  same  as  for  the  Sergeant-Major  of  those  corps  respectively  ; 
except  that  there  will  be  upon  the  scales,  instead  of  the  number  of 
the  regiment,  the  letter  of  the  company,  in  white  metal,  one  inch 
long. 

1387.  For  a  Sergeant  of  Light  Artillery. — The  same  as  for  the  artil- 
lery. 

1388.  For  a  Sergeant  of  Engineer  Sddiers. — The  same  as  for  the  ser- 
geant of  artillery,  except  that  the  edging  will  be  of  yellow  cloth,  and 
that  upon  the  scales  will  be  the  number  of  the  regiment ;  on  both 
sides  of  the  collar,  near  the  front,  a  castle  of  yellow  metal  one  and 
five-eighths  inches,  by  one  and  one-fourth  inches  high. 

1389.  For  an  Ordnance  Sergeant. — The  same  as  for  a  sergeant  of 
engineer  soldiers,  except  that  the  collar  and  cuffs  will  be  edged  with 
crimson  instead  of  yellow,  and  that  on  the  collar,  on  both  sides,  near 
the  front,  there  will  be  a  shell  and  flame  of  yellow  metal  two  inches 
long. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  253 

Uniform  and  Dress. 

1390.  For  a  Cot'poral  of  .Artillery,  Infantry,  Riflemen,  Cavalry,  Light 
Artillery  and  Engineer  Soldiers. — The  same  as  for  a  sergeant  of  those 
corps  respectively. 

1391.  For  a  Private  of  Artillery,  Infantry,  Riflemen,  Cavalry,  Light 
Artillery  and  Engineer  Soldiers. — The  same  as  for  a  corporal  of  those 
arms  respectively. 

1392.  For  a  Musician  of  Artillery,  Infantry,  Riflemen,  Cavalry  and 
Light  Artillery. — The  same  as  for  a  private  of  those  corps  respectively, 
with  the  addition  of  a  facing  according  to  pattern,  and  corresponding 
in  color  with  the  edging  on  the  collar  and  cufls. 

1393.  For  a  Principal  or  Chief  Musician. — The  same  as  for  a  musi- 
cian of  his  regiment. 

1394.  For  a  Chief  Bugler. — The  same  as  for  a  principal  or  chief 
musician. 

1395.  On  all  occasions  of  duty,  except  fatigue,  and  when  out  of 
quarters,  the  coat  shall  be  buttoned  and  hooked  at  the  collar. 

BUTTONS. 

1396.  For  General  Officers  and  Officers  of  the  Staff,  except  Engi- 
neers.— Gilt,  convex ;  device,  a  spread  eagle,  with  thirteen  stars  over 
the  head  of  the  eagle,  and  upon  its  breast,  on  a  shield,  the  arras  of 
the  state  impaling  those  of  the  United  States,  with  the  motto  "  Excel- 
sior" below  the  eagle,  according  to  the  pattern  in  the  office  of  the 
Adjutant-General ;  large  size,  seven-eighths  of  an  inch  in  exterior 
diameter ;  small  size,  one-half  inch. 

1397.  For  Officers  of  the  Engineers. — Gilt,  nine-tenths  of  an  inch  in 
exterior  diameter,  slightly  convex ;  a  raised  bright  rim,  one-thirtieth 
of  an  inch  wide ;  device,  an  eagle  holding  in  his  beak  a  scroll,  with 
the  word  "Essayons,"  a  bastion  with  embrasures  in  the  distance  sur- 
rounded by  water,  with  a  rising  sun ;  the  figures  to  be  of  dead  gold 
upon  a  bright  field.  Small  buttons  of  the  same  form  and  device, 
and  fifty- five-hundredth  s  of  an  inch  in  exterior  diameter. 

Military.  22 


264  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Uniform  and  Dress. 

1398.  For  all  Field  and  Line  Officers. — Donble  gilt,  convex ;  the 
arms  of  the  State  of  New- York  impaling  those  of  the  United  States 
(the  arms  of  the  state  on  the  dexter  side,  those  of  the  United  States  on 
the  sinister  side),  surmounted  by  the  crest  of  the  state,  with  thirteen 
stars  over  the  head  of  the  eagle  of  the  crest.  Motto,  "  Excelsior." 
According  to  pattern  in  the  Adjutant-General's  office;  large  size, 
seven-eighths  of  an  inch  in  exterior  diameter;  small  size,  one-half 
inch. 

1399.  Chaplains  may  wear  the  button  of  the  general  staff,  or  of 
the  line,  at  their  option. 

1400.  For  all  Non- Commissioned  Officers,  Musicians  and  Privates, 
except  Engineers. — Yellow,  to  correspond  with  those  for  the  officers 
( 1398  ) ;  for  Engineer  soldiers,  yellow,  similar  to  those  for  engmeer 
officers  (1397). 

TKOUgERS. 

1401.  The  uniform  trousers,  for  officers,  non-commissioned  officers, 
musicians  and  privates,  will  be  of  cloth  throughout  the  year ;  made 
loose,  and  spread  well  over  the  boot;  of  white  and  light  blue  mixed, 
commonly  called  sky  blue  mixture,  for  regimental  officers,  non-com- 
missioned officers,  musicians  and  privates ;  and  of  dark  blue  cloth 
for  all  other  officers. 

1402.  For  General  Officers. — ^Plain,  without  stripe,  welt  or  cord 
down  the  outer  seam. 

1403.  For  Officers  of  the  General  Staff,  Aids-de-Camp  and  Engineers. 
— With  a  buff  welt,  oue-eighth  of  an  inch  in  diameter,  let  iuto  the 
outer  seam. 

1404.  For  Chaplains. — A  welt  of  black  yelvet,  of  the  same  size,  and 

let  iuto  the  outer  seam. 

1405.  jFbr  Regimental  Officers. — With  a  welt  let  into  the  outer  seam, 
one-eighth  of  an  inch  in  diameter,  of  the  following  colors  :  For  jlrtil- 
Icry,  scarlet ;  Infantry,  dark  blue ;  i?»/kn»m,  medium  or  emerald  green ; 
Cavalry,  orange. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES. 


Unifarm.  and  Dress, 


1406.  For  oil  Non  -  Commissioned  Officers,  Musicians  and  Privates. — 
With  welt,  as  for  officers,  of  the  following  colors :  For  Artillery,  scarlet ; 
Infantry,  dark  blue ;  Riflemen,  medium  or  emerald  green ;  Cavalry, 
orange ;  Engineers^  yellow ;   Ordnance,  crimson. 

CAP. 

1407.  For  all  Officers,  Non  -  Commissioned  Officers,  Musicians  and  Pri- 
vates.— Dark  blue  cloth,  with  a  stiff  felt  body,  according  to  pattern  ; 
crown  of  four  upright  pieces ;  height  in  front  from  five  and  three- 
fourths  to  six  and  one-fourth  inches  along  the  front  seam ;  length 
behind  from  eight  to  eight  and  one-half  inches  along  the  back  seam  ; 
back  part  of  hat,  along  the  back  seam,  to  be  slightly  convex  out- 
wards, so  that  when  the  hat  is  viewed  sideways  there  shall  appear 
a  slight  curve  { convexity  outwards )  along  the  back  seam,  from  tip 
to  lower  edge  of  hat ;  the  lower  edge  to  be  bent  sharply  inwards,  so 
as  to  grasp  snugly  the  back  of  the  head ;  tip  from  five  and  one-half 
to  six  inches  in  diameter,  and  inclining  downward  slightly  from  rear 
to  front  when  the  cap  is  worn  ( the  dimensions  given  to  vary  with 
the  circumference  of  the  head ) ;  vizor  of  strong  neat's  leather,  to  pro- 
ject at  the  middle  two  and  one-eighth  inches  from  the  front  of  the 
hat,  black  on  the  upper  and  green  on  the  under  sides,  to  be  put  on 
at  right  angles  with  the  front  of  the  cap,  or,  in  other  words,  to  be 
horizontal  when  the  cap  is  worn ;  strap  of  strong  black  leather,  fasten- 
ing under  the  chin  by  a  yellow  m^tal  buckle  and  leather  slide,  and 
attached  to  the  cap  with  small  buttons  similar  to  those  upon  the 
coat 

1408.  For  all  Officers. — On  the  caps  of  all  officers  will  be  worn 
the  arms  of  the  state,  impaling  those  of  the  United  States,  with  motto 
and  crest  of  state,  all  to  be  executed  in  metal,  extra  gilt,  and  to  be 
one  and  three-quarter  inches  high,  and  one  and  one-quarter  inches 
broad,  to  be  attached  to  the  front  of  the  cap,  near  the  top  and  just 
below  the  base  of  the  pompon.  The  caps  of  officers  will  also  have 
a  band,  two  inches  wide,  from  the  lower  edge  of  the  cap,  and  pointed 
in  front  according  to  pattern,  of  material,  color,  and  with  oi'rameut 
as  follows : 


256  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Uniform  and  Dress. 

1409.  For  General  Officers. — Band  of  dark  blue  velvet,  with  a  gold 
embroidered  wreath  in  front,  encircling  the  letters  "  N.  g.  "  in  old 
English  characters,  in  silver. 

1410.  For  all  Staff  Officers^  except  Engineers. — Band  of  the  same 
material  and  color  as  the  cap,  welted  at  the  edges ;  the  same  orna- 
ment in  front  as  for  general  officers. 

1411.  Fcrr  Officers  of  the  Engineers. — The  same  as  for  the  general 
staff,  except  the  ornament  in  front,  which  will  be  a  gold  embroidered 
wreath  of  laurel  and  palm  encircling  a  silver  turreted  castle. 

1412.  Far  Officers  of  ArtUkry  and  Light  Artillery. — The  same  as  for 
general  staff",  except  the  ornament  in  front,  which  will  be  gold  embroi- 
dered cross  cannon,  with  the  number  of  the  regiment,  in  silver,  above 
their  intersection. 

1413.  For  Officers  of  Infantry. — The  same  as  for  the  general  stafl^ 
except  the  ornament  in  front,  which  will  be  a  gold  embroidered  bugle, 
with  the  number  of  the  regiment,  in  silver,  within  the  bend. 

1414.  For  Officers  of  Riflemen. — The  same  as  for  the  general  staff, 
except  the  ornament  in  front,  which  will  be  a  trumpet,  perpendicu- 
lar, embroidered  in  gold,  with  the  number  of  the  regiment,  in  silver, 
within  the  bend. 

1415.  For  Officers  of  Cavalry. — Tlie  same  as  for  the  general  staff, 
except  the  ornament  in  front,  which  will  be  two  sabres  crossed  (edges 
upward),  embroidered  in  gold,  with  the  number  of  the  regiment,  in 
silver,  in  the  upper  angle. 

1416.  For  Engineer  Soldiers. — Bands  of  the  same  material,  color  and 
shape  as  for  officers,  edged  with  yellow,  and,  instead  of  the  number, 
a  turreted  castle,  in  yellow  metal,  in  front,  and  the  impaled  arras, 
as  for  officers,  on  the  front  of  the  cap,  below  the  pompon. 

1417.  For  Non- Commissioned  Officers ^  Musicians  and  Privates  of 
Artillery,  Infantry,  Riflemen,  Light  Artillery  and  Cavalry. — Bands  of 
black  patent  leather,  one  inch  wide  from  the  lower  edge  of  the 
cap,   and  extending  around  the  cap  at  the  same  width.    On  the 


Plate  5 


JohnE .  Oavit  .:,v,  AHjcny  N  1 


"t  U„t  for.  I ;./,  i„ni.  fimrrrsy"-'"'"'" 


>/ 


Huttims  /»  Itffli'frs  nf  FttqiuefTs  .ni.f  for  thf  Supptrs  ,in./ .  UmfTf 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  257 

Uniform  and  Dress. 

front  of  the  cap,  below  the  base  of  the  pompon,  will  be  placed  the 
number  of  the  regiment  in  silver  embroidery  or  white  metal,  the 
figure  or  figures  to  be  one  inch  long;  below  the  number  of  the  regi- 
ment, and  extending  to  the  upper  edge  of  the  patent  leather  band, 
will  be  placed  in  one  continuous  plate  of  metal,  extra  gilt,  the  arms 
of  the  state  impaling  those  of  the  United  States  ( the  arms  of  the 
state  upon  the  dexter  side,  and  those  of  the  United  States  on  the 
sinister  side  ),  surmounted  by  the  crest  of  the  state  {  comprising  the 
demi-globe  and  eagle  ),  and  underneath  all  the  motto  "  Excelsior," 
according  to  the  pattern  in  the  Adjutant-General's  office. 

CAP   COVER. 

1418.  For  Officers  and  Men  (to  be  worn  in  bad  weather). — Black, 
of  suitable  water-proof  material,  with  a  cape  extending  below  the 
cap  ten  inches,  coming  well  forward  and  tying  under  the  chin; 
according  to  pattern. 


1419.  The  pompon  will  be  worn  by  all  officers  whenever  the 
epaulettes  are  worn,  and  by  the  non-commissioned  officers,  musicians 
and  privates,  on  all  duty  under  arms,  except  when  the  cap  cover  is 
put  on,  and  will  be  placed  in  the  cap  so  as  to  project  forward  at  an 
angle  of  about  thirty  degrees. 

1420.  For  a  Major- General. — A  gold  embroidered  net  sphere,  two 
and  one-quarter  inches  in  diameter  ( the  sphere  to  be  of  bright  gold, 
and  the  net  of  dead  gold ),  attached  at  the  base  to  a  gold  netted  cir- 
cular ring,  two-thirds  of  an  inch  in  diameter  by  two-thirds  of  an 
inch  deep. 

1421.  For  a  Brigadier- General. — The  same  as  for  a  Major-General, 
except  that  the  body  of  the  sphere  will  be  of  bright  silver,  and  the 
net  covering  of  dead  gold. 

1422.  For  all  other  Officers^  and  for  all  Non  ■  Commissioned  Officers, 
Musicians  and  Privates. — A  worsted  pompon ;  spherical,  two  and  one- 
fourth  inches  in  diameter,  and  as  follows  : 

Military.  22* 


258  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Uniform  and  Dress. 

1423.  For  Commissioned  Officers. — The  pompon  to  be  permanently 
attached  at  the  base  to  a  gold  netted  circular  ring,  two-thirds  of  an 
inch  in  diameter  by  two-thirds  of  an  inch  deep,  and  to  be  of  the 
following  colors : 

1424.  For  the  Adjutant  -  General '«  Department. — Lower  two- thirds, 
buflF ;  upper  third,  white. 

1425.  For  the  Inspector -General. — Lower  two-thirds,  buflf;  upper 
third,  scarlet. 

1426.  For  the  Commissary -GeneraVs  Department. — Crimson. 

1427.  For  the  Department  of  Engineers. — Lower  two-thirds,  buff; 
upper  third,  black. 

1428.  For  th£  Judge -Advocate -GeneraVs  Department.— 'WYdiQ. 

1429.  For  the  Quartermaster '»  Department. — Lower  two-thirds,  buff; 
upper  third,  light  or  sky  blue. 

1430.  For  the  Medical  Department. — Lower  two-thirds,  buff;  upper 
third,  medium  or  emerald  green. 

1431.  For  the  Pay  Department.— luovf ex  two-thirds,  buff;  upper 
third,  dark  olive  green. 

1432.  For  Aids-de- Camp.— -RxxfS. 

1433.  For  the  ArtiUery. —Sc&rlet. 

1434.  For  the  Infantry. — Light  or  sky  blue. 

1435-  For  the  Riflemen. — Medium  or  emerald  green. 

1436.  For  the  Cavalry. — Orange. 

1437.  For  Chaplains.— Bl&ck. 

1438.  For  Non- Commissioned  Officers^  Musicians  and  Privates. — The 
pompon  to  be  permanently  attached  at  the  base  to  a  yellow  metal 
circular  ring,  two-thirds  of  an  inch  in  diameter  by  two-thirds  of  an 
inch  deep,  and  to  be  of  the  following  colors:  For  ArtiUery^  scarlet; 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  259 

r  

Uniform,  and  Dress. 

Infantry,  light  or  sky  blue ;  Riflemen,  medium  or  emerald  green ; 
Cavalry,  orange ;  Engineers,  yellow ;   Ordnance,  crimson. 

CRAVAT    OR    STOCK. 

1439.  For  aU  Officers,  Non- Commissioned  Officers,  Musicians  and  Pri- 
vates.— Black ;  when  a  cravat  is  worn,  the  tie  not  to  be  visible  at  the 
opening  of  the  collar. 

SPURS. 

1440.  For  all  Mounted  Officers  and  Mounted  Men. — Yellow  metal  or 
gilt. 


1441.  For  General  Officers,  and  Officers  of  the  Staff  and  Cavalry. — 
Buff  or  white. 

1442.  For  Officers  of  Artillery,  Infantry  and  Riflemen. — ^White. 

1443.  For  Non -Commissioned  Officers  and  Privates. — White. 


1444.  JFbr  Ckneral  Officers  and  Officers  ranking  as  suck. — Buff  silk 
net,  with  silk  bullion  fringe  ends ;  sash  to  go  twice  around  the  waist, 
and  to  tie  behind  the  left  hip ;  pendant  part  not  to  extend  more  than 
eighteen  inches  below  the  tie. 

1445.  For  all  other  Officers,  except  the  Medical  Department. — Crimson 
silk  net,  with  silk  bullion  ends  ;  to  go  around  the  waist  and  tie,  as  for 
general  officers. 

1446.  For  Officers  of  the  Medical  Department. — Medium  or  emerald 
green  silk  net,  with  silk  bullion  fringe  ends ;  to  go  around  the  waist 
and  tie,  as  for  general  officers. 

1447.  For  all  Sergeant -Majors,  Quartermaster- Sergeants,  Ordnance 
Sergeants,  First  Sergeants,  Principal  or  Chief  Musicians  and  Chief 
Buglers. — Red  worsted  sash,  with  worsted  bullion  fringe  ends ;  to  go 
twice  around  the  waist,  and  to  tie  behind  the  left  hip ;  pendant  part 
not  to  extend  more  than  eighteen  inches  below  the  tie. 


260  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

-, 

Uniform  and  Dress. 

1448.  The  saah  will  be  worn  (over  the  coat)  on  all  occasions  of 
duty  of  every  description,  except  stable  and  fatigue. 

1449.  The  sash  will  be  worn  by  "  Officers  of  the  Day  "  across  the 
body,  scarf  fashion,  from  the  right  shoulder  to  the  left  side,  instead 
of  around  the  waist,  tying  behind  the  left  hip  as  prescribed. 

SWORD   BELT. 

1450.  For  aU  Officers  and  Non  -  Commissioned  Officers. — A  waist  belt 
of  black  leather,  plain,  patent  or  enameled;  not  less  than  one  and 
one-half  inches,  nor  more  than  two  inches  wide ;  to  be  worn  over 
the  sash ;  the  sword  to  be  suspended  from  it  by  slings  of  the  same 
material  as  the  belt,  with  a  hook  attached  to  the  belt,  upon  which 
the  sword  may  be  hung. 

SWORD   BELT-PLATE. 

1451.  For  all  Officers^  Non  -  Commissioned  Officers,  Musicians  and  Pri- 
vates.— Gilt,  rectangular,  two  inches  wide,  with  a  raised  bright  rim ; 
a  silver  wreath  of  laurel  and  palm  encircling  the  letters  "N.  §."  in 
old  English  characters,  in  silver,  according  to  pattern. 

BWORD   A5D  SCABBARD. 

1452.  For  General  Officers. — Straight  sword,  gilt  hilt,  bras»  or  steel 
scabbard. 

1453.  For  all  Staff  Officers  ( except  the  Medical  Department  and  Chap- 
lains), and  for  Field  Officers  of  AriiUcry,  Infantry,  Riflemen,  and  for  all 
Officers  of  Light  Artillery. — The  sword  of  the  pattern  adopted  by  tho 
War  Department  of  the  United  States,  April  9,  1850. 

1454.  For  the  Medical  Department. — Small  sword  and  scabbard  now 
in  use  in  tho  Medical  Department  of  the  United  States  army. 

1455.  For  Chaplains. — Straight  small  sword,  black  scabbard,  gilt 
mountings. 

1456.  For  Cavalry  Officers. — Sabre  and  scabbard  now  in  use  in 
United  States  Cavalry. 


Plate  4. 


JohnE&aviUScAUirxny.  K  i 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  261 


Badges  to  Distinguish  Rank, 

1457.  For  the  Officers  of  the  Artillery^  Infantry  and  Riflemen,  except 
Field  Officers. — The  sword  of  the  pattern  adopted  by  the  War  Depart- 
ment of  the  United  States,  April  9,  1850. 

1458.  The  sword  and  sword  belt  will  be  worn  upon  all  occasions  of 
duty,  without  exception. 

1459.  When  on  foot,  the  sabre  will  be  suspended  from  the  hook 
attached  to  the  belt. 

1460.  When  not  on  military  duty,  officers  may  wear  swords  of 
honor,  or  the  prescribed  sword,  with  a  scabbard,  gilt,  or  of  leather 
with  gilt  mountings. 

SWOED-KNOT. 

1461.  For  General  Officers. — Gold  cord,  with  acorn  end. 

1462.  For  all  other  Officers. — Gold  lace  strap  with  gold  bullion 
tassel. 

BADGES   TO  DISTINGUISH   RANK. 
EPAULETTES. 

1463.  For  Major -Generals. — Gold,  with  solid  crescent ;  device,  two 
silver  embroidered  stars,  one  of  one  and  one-half  inches  in  diameter, 
one  of  one  and  one-fourth  inches  in  diameter,  placed  on  the  strap  in  a 
row,  longitudinally,  and  equidistant ;  dead  and  bright  gold  bullion, 
one-half  inch  in  diameter  and  three  and  one-half  inches  long. 

1464.  For  a  Brigadier -General. — The  same  as  for  a  Major- General, 
except  that,  instead  of  two,  there  shall  be  one  star  (omitting  the 
smallest ),  placed  upon  the  strap,  and  not  within  the  crescent. 

1465.  For  a  Colonel. — The  same  as  for  a  Brigadier- General,  substi- 
tuting a  silver  embroidered  spread  eagle  for  the  star  upon  the  strap  ; 
and  within  the  crescent,  for  the  Medical  Department — a  laurel  wreath 
embroidered  in  gold,  and  the  letters  "  ^.  |9."  in  old  English  cha- 
racters, in  silver,  within  the  wreath ;  Pay  Department — same  as  the 
Medical  Department,  with  the  letters  "p.  30,"  in  old  English  cha- 
racters ;  Department  of  Engineers — a  turreted  castle  of  silver ;  Regi^ 


262  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Badges  to  Distinguish  Rank, 

mental  Officers — the  number  of  the  regiment  embroidered  in  gold, 
within  a  circlet  of  embroidered  silver,  one  and  three- fourths  inches  in 
diameter,  upon  cloth  of  the  following  colors :  For  Artillery^  scarlet ; 
Infantry^  light  or  sky  blue ;  Riflemen^  medium  or  emerald  green ; 
Cavalry,  orange. 

1466.  For  a  Lieutenant  -  ColoncL — The  same  as  for  a  Colonel,  accord- 
ing to  corps,  but  substituting  for  the  eagle  a  silver  embroidered  leaf. 

1467.  For  a  Major. — The  same  as  for  a  Colonel,  according  to  corps, 
omittmg  the  eagle. 

1468.  For  a  Captain. — The  same  as  for  a  Colonel,  according  to 
corps,  except  that  the  bullion  will  be  only  one- fourth  of  an  inch  in 
diameter,  and  two  and  one-half  inches  long ;  and  substituting  for  the 
eagle  two  silver  embroidered  bars. 

1469.  For  a  First  Lieutenant. — The  same  as  for  a  Colonel,  according 
to  corps,  except  that  the  bullion  will  be  only  one-eighth  of  an  inch 
in  diameter  and  two  and  one-half  inches  long,  and  substituting  for 
the  eagle  one  silver  embroidered  bar. 

1470.  For  a  Second  Lieutenant. — The  same  as  for  a  First  Lieutenant, 
omitting  the  bar. 

1471.  All  officers  having  military  rank  will  wear  one  epaulette  on 
each  shoulder. 

1472.  The  epaulette  may  be  dispensed  with  when  not  on  duty,  and 
on  certain  duties  oflf  parade,  to  wit :  at  drills,  at  inspections  of  bar- 
racks and  hospitals,  on  courts  of  inquiry  and  boards,  at  inspection  of 
articles  and  necessaries,  on  working  parties  and  fatigue  duties,  and 
upon  the  march,  except  when  in  war  there  is  immediate  expectation 
of  meeting  the  enemy,  and  also  when  the  overcoat  is  worn, 

SHOULDER   STRAPS. 

1473.  For  Major -Generals. — Dark  blue  cloth,  one  and  three-eighths 
Inches  wide  by  four  inches  long,  bordered  with  an  embroidery  of 
gold  one- fourth  of  an  inch  wide;  two  silver  embroidered  stars  of  five 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  263 

Badges  to  Distinguish  Rank. 

rays  ;  the  centre  of  eacli  star  to  be  one  inch  from  the  outer  edge  of  the 
gold  embroidery  on  the  ends  of  the  strap ;  both  stars  of  the  same  size. 

1474.  For  a  Brigadier' General. — The  same  as  for  a  Major-General, 
except  that  there  will  be  one  star  instead  of  two ;  the  centre  of  the 
star  to  be  equidistant  from  the  outer  edge  of  the  embroidery  on  the 
ends  of  the  strap. 

1475.  For  a  Colonel. — The  same  size  as  for  a  Major-General,  and 
bordered  in  like  manner  with  an  embroidery  of  gold ;  a  silver  embroi- 
dered spread  eagle  on  the  centre  of  the  strap,  two  inches  between  the 
tips  of  the  wings,  having  in  the  right  talon  an  olive  branch  and  in 
the  left  a  bundle  of  arrows ;  an  escutcheon  on  the  breast  as  repre- 
sented in  the  arms  of  the  United  States  ;  cloth  of  the  strap  as  follows : 
For  Staff  Officers,  dark  blue;  Artillery,  scarlet;  Infantry,  light  or 
sky  blue ;  Riflemen,  medium  or  emerald  green ;  Cavalry,  orange. 

1476.  For  a  Lieutenant  -Colonel. — ^The  same  as  for  a  Colonel,  accord- 
ing to  corps,  omitting  the  eagle,  and  introducing  a  silver  embroidered 
leaf  at  each  end,  each  leaf  extending  seven-eighths  of  an  inch  from 
the  end  border  of  the  strap. 

1477.  For  a  Major, — The  same  as  for  a  Colonel,  according  to  corps, 
omitting  the  eagle,  and  introducing  a  gold  embroidered  leaf  at  each 
end,  each  leaf  extending  seven-eighths  of  an  inch  from  the  end  bor- 
der of  the  strap. 

1478.  For  a  Captain. — Tlie  same  as  for  a  Colonel,  according  to 
corps,  omitting  the  eagle,  and  introducing  at  each  end  two  gold 
embroidered  bars  of  the  same  width  as  the  border,  placed  parallel  to 
the  ends  of  the  strap ;  the  distance  between  them  and  from  the  border 
equal  to  the  width  of  the  border. 

1479.  For  a  First  Lieutenant. — The  same  as  for  a  Colonel,  accord- 
ing to  corps,  omitting  the  eagle  and  introducing  at  each  end  one  gold 
embroidered  bar  of  the  same  width  as  the  border,  placed  parallel  to 
the  ends  of  the  strap,  at  a  distance  from  the  border  equal  to  its  width. 

1480.  For  a  Second  Lieutenant. — The  same  as  for  a  Colonel,  accord- 
ing to  corps,  omitting  the  eagle. 


2G4  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Undress  Uniform, 

1481.  The  shoulder  strap  will  be  worn  whenever  the  epaulette  is 
not. 

CHKVBOUS. 

1482.  The  rank  of  non-commissioned  officers  will  be  marked  by 
chevrons  upon  both  sleeves  of  the  uniform  coat  and  overcoat,  above 
the  elbow,  of  silk  or  worsted  binding  one-half  an  inch  wide,  same 
color  as  the  edging  on  the  coat,  points  down,  as  follows : 

1483.  For  a  Sergeant  -Major. — Three  bars  and  an  arc,  in  stLk. 

1484.  For  a  Quartermaster-Sergeant. — Three  bars  and  a  tie,  in  silk. 

1485.  For  an  Ordnance  Sergeant. — Three  bars  and  a  star,  in  silk. 

1486.  For  a  First  Sergeant. — Three  bars  and  a  lozenge,  in  worsted. 

1487.  For  a  Sergeant. — Three  bars,  in  worsted. 

1488.  For  a  Corporal. — Two  bars,  in  worsted. 

UNDRESS   UNIFORM. 
rOR   OPPICERS,   NON-COMMISSIONED    OFFICERS,   *C. 

1489.  Fatigue  Cap. — All  officers  may  wear,  off  duty,  and  for  drills 
and  improvement  meetings  when  ordered  by  the  Commanding  Officer, 
in  lieu  of  the  uniform  cap,  a  cap  of  dark  blue  cloth,  of  a  shape  and 
style  similar  to  the  uniform  cap ;  to  be  about  five  inches  high  ;  the 
body  of  haircloth  or  other  flexible  material ;  band  two  inches  wide, 
of  the  same  material  and  color  as  the  cap,  and  of  equal  width 
throughout;  vizor  as  for  uniform  cap;  chin  strap  of  black  leather, 
fastened  to  the  cap  with  small  buttons,  same  as  on  the  sleeve  of  the 
uniform  coat ;  the  whole  according  to  pattern  in  the  Adjutant-Gene- 
ral's office.  Ornaments  only  on  the  band,  and  those  the  same  as  on 
the  band  of  the  uniform  cap. 

1490.  Fatigue  Jacket. — Non-commissioned  officers,  musicians  and 
privates  (except  the  cavalry  and  the  light  artillery)  may  wear,  when 
off  duty,  or  on  fatigue  duty,  and  also  at  drills  and  improvement 
meetings,  when  ordered  by  the  Commanding  Officer,  in  lieu  of 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  265 

Undress  Uniform. 

the  uniform  coat,  a  jacket  of  cadet  gray  cloth,  single  breasted,  with 
standing  collar;  to  be  cut  long  in  the  waist;  polka  style  skirt,  to 
extend  from  five  to  six  inches,  according  to  height,  below  the  waist ; 
opened  behind,  with  two  buttons,  large  size,  same  as  worn  upon  the 
uniform  frock  coat,  to  be  placed  on  a  line  with  the  lowest  button  in 
front,  two  inches  apart  at  the  commencement  of  the  opening  of  skirt ; 
three  pointed  flaps  on  waist,  seven  inches  long,  two  and  a  half  inches 
deep  at  the  points,  narrow  part  one  and  three-quarter  inches  ;  flaps  to 
be  three  and  a  half  inches  from  the  front  of  the  jacket ;  nine  buttons 
on  the  front  of  the  jacket,  large  size,  of  the  same  kind  as  those  on  the 
uniform  coat;  collar  of  black  cloth,  from  one  and  three-quarters  to 
two  inches  high ;  the  front  cut  as  for  the  uniform  coat,  and  to  meet  at 
bottom  and  fasten  with  a  hook  and  eye ;  cuffs  of  black  cloth,  two  and 
a  half  inches  deep,  small  at  hand,  to  fasten  with  two  small  buttons, 
similar  to  those  upon  the  cuffs  of  the  uniform  coat,  one  in  cuff  and 
one  above  ;  shoulder  straps  of  gray  cloth,  sewed  into  the  sleeve  head, 
pointed  at  top  and  secured  with  one  small  button  ;  the  strap  two  and 
one-quarter  inches  wide  at  bottom  and  one  and  one-quarter  at  top, 
the  upper  point  to  extend  to  the  collar  seam  ;  the  flaps  and  shoulder 
straps  to  be  corded  or  edged  with  black.  On  the  breast  of  the  jacket 
for  musicians,  on  either  side  of  the  buttons  and  button  holes,  and 
extending  horizontally  across  the  breast,  will  be  placed  stripes  of 
black,  flat  braid,  one-half  of  an  inch  in  width,  terminating  in  pointed 
ends,  six  inches  from  the  buttons  and  holes  on  either  breast,  at  top 
of  jacket,  and  three  inches  at  the  bottom. 

1491.  Fatigue  Cap  for  Non-Commissioned  Officers,  Musicians  and 
Privates,  except  Cavalry  and  the  Light  Artillery. — Non-commissioned 
officers  and  privates  may  wear,  under  the  same  circumstances  in 
which  the  jacket  is  allowed  to  be  worn,  a  fatigue  cap  of  cadet  gray 
cloth,  of  a  shape  and  style  similar  to  the  uniform  cap  ;  the  body  of 
haircloth  or  other  flexible  material ;  the  cap  to  be  about  five  inches 
high  ;  the  vizor  as  for  the  uniform  cap;  the  band  to  be  of  black  cloth, 
two  inches  and  one-quarter  wide,  and  of  equal  width  throughout ;  a 
chin  strap  of  black  leather,  fastened  with  small  buttons  of  the  arm 
or  corps ;  the  whole  according  to  pattern  in  the  Adjutant-General's 

Military.  23 


260  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Undress  Uniform. 

office.  On  the  band  in  front  of  cap,  so  as  to  show  above  the  chin  strap, 
the  number  of  the  regiment,  in  silver  or  white  metal  figures,  one  inch 
long ;  and  one  inch  from  the  top  of  the  cap,  upon  a  circlet  of  cloth 
not  more  than  one  and  three-quarter  inches  in  diameter,  of  the  colors 
of  the  arm  in  which  the  regiment  or  company  is  organized,  will  be 
placed  the  letter  of  the  company,  in  silver  or  white  metal,  three- 
quarters  of  an  inch  long. 

1492.  Cavalry  arid  Light  AriiUery  Jacket. — ^The  fatigue  jacket 
for  non-commissioned  officers,  musicians  and  privates  of  cavalry  and 
light  artillery  will  ba  of  the  same  style  as  the  gray  fatigue  jacket, 
but  will  be  made  of  dark  blue  cloth,  with  cnfFs  and  collar  of  the 
same  material  as  the  coat ;  the  edging,  however,(and  the  braids,  of 
the  Musicians)^ov  the  Cawalry,  will  becrf  (Munge,  and  for  the  Light 
Artillery^  of  scarlet. 

1493.  The  Fatigue  Cap  for  Non -Commissioned  Officers,  Musi- 
cians and  Privates  of  Cavalry  and  Light  Artillery  will  be  of  the 
same  style  as  the  gray  fatigue  cap,  except  that  it  will  be  of  dark 
blue  cloth,  and  the  band  of  the  same  material  and  color  as  the  cap, 
Avith  the  number  of  the  regiment  on  the  band ;  the  letter  of  the  com- 
pany on  a  circlet  of  orange  cloth  for  Cavalry,  and  on  a  circlet  of 
scarlet  cloth  for  Light  Artillery, 

OVERCOAT. 

1494.  For  Commissioned  Officers. — A  ''  doaJc  coat"  of  dark  blue 
cloth,  closing  by  means  of  four  frog  buttons  of  black  silk  and  loops 
of  black  silk  cord  down  the  breast,  and  at  the  throat  by  a  long  loop 
a  echeUe,  without  tassel  or  plate,  on  the  left  side,  and  a  black  silk  frog 
button  on  the  right;  cord  for  the  loops  flftecn-hundredths  of  an  inch 
in  diameter;  back,  a  single  piece,  slit  up  from  the  bottom,  from  fifteen 
to  seventeen  inches,  according  to  the  height  of  the  wearer,  and  closing 
at  will,  by  buttons,  and  button  holes  cut  in  a  concealed  flap;  collar 
of  the  same  color  and  material  as  the  coat,  rounded  at  the  ed,^cs,  and 
to  stand  or  fall;  when  standing  to  be  about  five  inches  high;  sleeves 
loose,  of  a  single  piece,  and  round  at  the  bottom,  without  cuflf  or  slit; 
lining,  woolen ;  around  the  front  and  lower  border,  the  edges  of  the 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  267 

Undress  Unifornu 

pockets,  the  edges  of  the  sleeves,  collar  and  slit  in  the  back,  a  flat 
braid  of  black  silk  one-half  an  inch  wide;  and  around  each  frog 
button  on  the  breast  a  knot  two  and  one-quarter  inches  in  diameter, 
of  black,  silk  cord  seven-hundredths  of  an  inch  in  diameter,  arranged 
according  to  drawing;  cape  of  the  same  color  and  material  as  the  coat, 
removable  at  the  pleasure  of  the  wearer,  and  reaching  to  the  cufF  of 
the  coat  sleeve  when  the  arm  is  extended ;  coat  to  extend  down  the 
leg  from  six  to  eight  inches  below  the  knee,  according  to  height, 

1495.  To  indicate  Rank. — For  all  officers  below  the  rank  of  gene- 
ral officers  there  will  be  on  both  sleeves,  near  the  lower  edge,  rows 
of  black  silk  braid,  one-half  of  an  inch  apart ;  such  braid  to  be  one- 
third  of  an  inch  in  width,  and  extending  around  the  sleeve. 

1496.  For  a  Colonel. — Six  rows. 

1497.  For  a  Lieutenant  -Colonel. — Five  rows 

1498.  For  a  Major. — Four  rows. 

1499.  For  a  Captain. — Three  rows. 

1500.  For  a  First  Lieutenant. — Two  rows. 

1501.  For  a  Second  Lieutenant. — One  row. 

1502.  For  a  Brigadier  -  General. — Two  lines  of  black  silk  braid, 
one  inch  in  width,  and  one-half  inch  apart,  extending  from  the  edge 
of  the  sleeve,  and  running  up  the  sleeve,  parallel  with  the  seam,  a 
distance  of  eight  inches,  upon  the  upper  side  of  the  sleeve,  and  ter- 
minating with  pointed  ends. 

1503.  For  a  Major  -General. — The  same  as  for  a  Brigadier-Gene- 
ral, except  there  shall  be  three  lines  of  braid. 

1504.  For  Non -Commissioned  Officers,  Mtisicians  and  Privates  of 
Cavalry  and  Light  Artillery. — Of  blue  gray  mixture;  stand-up 
collar ;  double  breasted ;  cape  to  reach  down  to  the  cuff  of  the  coat 
when  the  arm  is  extended,  and  to  button  all  the  way  up;  buttons  the 
same  as  upon  the  unifoitn  frock  coat;  large  size  for  coat  body, 
small  size  for  cape. 


208  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Horse  fhcrniture. 

1505.  All  other  Non- Commissioned  Officers,  Musicians  and  Pri- 
vates.— Of  blue  gray  mixture;  stand-up  collar ;  single  breasted ;  cape 
to  reach  down  to  the  elbows  when  the  arm  is  extended,  and  to  button 
all  the  way  up ;  buttons  the  same  as  upon  the  uniform  frock  coat. 

HORSE    FURNITURE. 
FOR  GENERAL  OFFICERS  AND  THE  GENERAL  STAFF. 

1506.  Housing  for  General  Officers. — To  be  worn  over  the  saddle; 
of  dark  blue  cloth,  trimmed  with  two  rows  of  gold  lace,  the  outer 
row  one  inch  and  five-eighths  wide,  the  iniier  row  two  inches  and 
one-fourth ;  to  be  made  full,  so  as  to  cover  the  horse's  haunches  and 
fore-hands,  and  to  bear  on  each  flank  corner  the  following  ornaments, 
distinctive  of  rank,  to  wit:  'For  Major -Generals,  a  gold  embroi- 
dered spread  eagle  and  two  stars;  for  Brigadier -Generals,  a  gold 
embroidered  spread  eagle  and  one  star. 

1507.  Saddle- Cloth  for  Officers  of  the  Staff  of  the  Commander-in- 
Chief,  and  of  Divisions  and  Brigades. — Dark  blue  cloth,  of  suflS- 
cient  length  to  cover  the  saddle  and  holsters,  and  one  foot  teu  inches 
in  depth,  with  an  edging  of  gold  lace  one  inch  wide. 

1508.  Surcingle. — Blue  web. 

1509.  Bridle. — Black  leather ;  bent  branch  bit.  with  gilt  bosses  j 
the  fVont  and  roses  yellow. 

1510.  C6Z/ar.— Yellow. 

1511.  Holsters. — Black  leather,  with  gilt  mountings. 

1512.  Stirrups. — Gilt  or  yellow  metal. 

f  OR   FIELD  AND  REGIMENTAL  STAFF  OFFICERS  OF  ARTILLERY,  INFANTRY 
AND    RIFLEMEN. 

1513.  Saddle -Cloth. —Dark  blue  cloth,  two  feet  ten  inches  in  length 
and  one  foot  ten  inches  indo]>ili.  wiih  gold  lace  five-eighths  of  au 
inch  in  width;  scarlet  edging  for  tlie  Artillery;  medium  or  emerald 
green  for  the  Riflemen  ;  light  or  sky  blue  for  the  Infantry. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  269 

Horse  Furniture. 

1514.  Bridle. — Black  leather ;  gilt  bits  and  mountings ;  front  and 
roses,  for  Artillery^  scarlet;  for  Infantry,  light  or  sky  bine;  for 
Riflemen,  medium  or  emerald  green. 

1515.  Stirrups. — Yellow. 

1516.  Collar, — For  Ariillery^  scarlet-  for  Infantry,  light  or  sky 
blue  ^  for  Riflemen,  medium  or  emeraM  gi^eeu. 

1517.  Holsters. — Black  leather,  with  gilt  mountings  and  black 
leather  cover. 

FOR  COMMISSIONED  OFPICERS  OF  CAVAL^RY. 

1518.  Saddle -Cloth. — Dark  blue  cloth,  with  border  one  and  one- 
half  inches  wide-,  gold  lace  for  Field  and  Regimental  Staff  Officers, 
and  orange  colored  cloth  for  Company  Officers  /  this  border  to  be  set 
back  one-quarter  of  an  inch  from  the  edge,  which  will  be  bound  with 
patent  leather.  The  saddle  cover  to  be  pointed  in  the  flanks,  and  to 
extend  eleven  inches  behind  the  cantle,  having  thirty  inches  depth 
from  the  back  seam  to  the  flank  points. 

1519.  Girths. — Indigo  blue  worsted  webbing,  three  inches  and 
one-half  wide,  three  feet  nine  inches  long. 

1520.  Surcingles. — Indigo  blue  worsted  v/ebbing,  three  inches  and 
one-half  wide ;  five  feet  webbing,  two  feet  strap. 

1521.  Stirrup  Leathers. — Black,  one  inch  and  three-eighths  wide, 
with  oval  brass  buckles. 

1522.  Stirrups. — Brass,  and  of  same  pattern  as  furnished  the  first 
regiment  of  United  States  dragoons  in  1834. 

1523.  Breast  Strap. — Same  as  that  heretofore  famished  the  Uni- 
ted States  dragoons,  and  attached  in  the  same  manner. 

1524.  Breastplate. — Plain  brass  heart. 

1525.  Crupper. — To  buckle  'nto  rings  on  «ach  side-bar,  as  in  th« 
United  States  army. 

MiLITART.  23* 


270  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Horse  Furniture^ 

1526.  Holsters. — Black  leather ;  the  pipes  to  have  plain  brass  tips, 
extending  up  two  inches  and  a  half,  to  be  attached  to  the  saddle  and 
breast  strap,  as  in  the  army. 

1527.  Holster  Covers. — Black  leather,  extending  two  inches  below 
the  shoulder  of  the  holster  pipe,  terminated  by  a  leather  strap  one 
inch  wide,  strongly  sewed  to  the  cover;  the  strap  to  button  to  a  brass 
knob  firmly  riveted  to  the  holster. 

1528.  Saddle  Blanket.— V\a.m  dark  blue 

1529.  Valise. — Dark  blue  cloth,  bound  with  patent  leather ;  water- 
proof; five  inches  and  one-half  in  diameter ;  eighteen  inches  long; 
attached  to  saddle  by  three  straps,  the  middle  one  to  pass  through  the 
mortice  of  the  cantle,  and  suspend  the  valise  effectually  from  the 
horse's  back. 

1530.  Spurs. — Brass,  the  leather  strap  to  be  three-fourths  of  an 
inch  wide. 

1531.  Bridle. — With  an  S  6tY,  with  strenghtening  cross-bar  con- 
necting the  lower  extremities  of  the  branches;  mouth-piece  of  three 
patterns,  as  prescribed  in  the  Cavalry  Tactics ;  branches  all  medium  ; 
material  of  bit,  steel,  thickly  plated  with  brass;  cwrft,  leather  strap 
five-eighths  of  an  inch  wide,  with  brass  buckle;  headstall,  single 
check-pieces,  one  inch  wide,  with  brass  wire  buckles  on  each  end, 
buckled  to  bit  and  upi>er  part  of  headstall ;  throat  strap,  five-eighths 
of  an  inch  wide,  with  brass  buckles  on  each  side ;  frontpiece,  single 
plain  strap  one  and  one-quarter  inches  wide,  a  brass  circular  plate 
one  and  one-half  inches  in  diameter  on  each  extremity,  with  beaded 
edge;  reins,  leather,  seven-eighths  of  an  inch  wide;  curb  rein  five 
feet  six  inches  long,  snaffle  rein  four  feet  six  inches  long,  both 
buckled  to  the  bit ;  curb  rein  provided  with  a  strong  leather  slide ; 
buckles,  brass  wire,  with  oval  top  and  strong  tongue. 

1532.  Saddle. — Qrimsley's;  stirrup  leathers  to  pass  through  sta- 
ples let  into  the  lower  edge  of  the  side  bars ;  girths  to  buckle  to 
straps  strongly  nailed  and  riveted  to  side  bars ;  morticed  holes  in 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  271 

Horse  Furniture. 

pommel  and  cantle  for  cloak  and  valise  straps ;  iron  rings  and  staples 
on  the  cantle  end  of  side  bars  for  attaching  shoe  pouch  and  crupper ; 
the  tree  to  be  protected  and  strenghtened  by  a  covering  of  raw  hide ; 
quilted  seat,  sewed  down  and  stitched,  as  in  the  army ;  leather  skirts 
to  protect  the  blanket  on  which  the  trooper  rides  in  service,  and  the 
trousers  of  the  rider,  and  small  under  skirts  to  protect  the  sides  of 
the  horse  from  the  girth  buckles. 

FOR    NON-COMMISSIONED    OFFICERS,    MUSICIANS    AND    PRIVATES    IN   THE 
CAVALRY. 

1533.  The  same  as  described  for  commissioned  officers  of  these 
arms,  except  as  follows : 

1534.  Breastplate. — Plain  brass  heart, 

1535.  Holsters. — Black  leather,  attached  to  the  saddle  and  brcast 
strap,  as  in  the  United  States  army. 

1536.  Holster  Covers. — Black  leather,  extending  two  inches  below 
the  shoulder  of  holster  pipe,  terminated  by  a  leather  strap  one  inch 
wide,  strongly  sewed  to  the  cover ;  the  strap  to  button  to  a  brass  knob, 
firmly  riveted  to  the  holster  and  pouch. 

1537.  Valise. — Dark  blue  cloth ;  water-proof;  five  inches  and  one- 
half  diameter;  eighteen  inches  long;  attached  to  saddle  by  three 
straps,  the  middle  one  to  pass  through  the  mortice  of  the  cantle,  and 
suspend  the  valise  effectually  from  the  horse's  back ;  a  brass  circular 
plate,  one  inch  and  one-half  diameter,  with  beaded  edge,  on  each  end 
of  the  valise. 

1538.  Bridle. — Same  as  for  commissioned  officers. 


FOR  THE  LIGHT  ARTILLERY. 

1539.  The  same  as  for  cavalry,  except  that  the  border  of  the  saddle- 
cloth for  officers  will  be  of  scarlet  cloth. 


272  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 


Uniform  Generally. 


UNIFORM    GENKRALLT. 

1540.  The  belts,  cartridge  boxes  and  other  equipments,  not  herein 
specially  enumerated,  shall  be  of  the  pattern  and  material  furnished 
by  the  Commissary-General,  when  so  furnished  by  him  pursuant  to 
law ;  or  they  may  be  such  as  are  approved  of  by  the  regimental  officers, 
and  worn  by  the  directions  of  the  Commandants  of  regiments ;  pro- 
vided that  uniformity  be  observed  throughout  each  regiment. 

1541.  Major-Generals  or  Brigadier-Generals,  in  their  respective 
divisions  or  brigades,  on  application,  may  by  order  authorize  plain 
white  linen  or  cotton  pantaloons,  for  the  company  officers,  non- 
commissioned officers  and  privates  of  any  particular  corps,  in  place 
of  those  directed  by  this  order.  Such  order  must,  however,  include 
the  whole  of  any  such  corps  which  ordinarily  parades  together  in 
one  body ;  and  if  it  extend  to  a  regiment  it  may  also  include  the 
field  and  staff  officers  of  the  same. 

1542.  No  ornament  indicative  of  rank  or  grade  shall  be  worn, 
other  than  as  prescribed  in  the  foregoing  regulations. 

1543.  General  and  staff  officers,  and  the  officers  and  soldiers  of  the 
engineers,  are  required  to  uniform  and  equip  in  strict  accordance 
with  the  foregoing  regulations. 

1544.  Officers  of  regiments,  and  the  companies  doing  duty  as  bat- 
talion companies  in  regiments,  are  required  to  uniform  and  equip  as 
prescribed  in  the  foregoing  regulations,  unless  the  regiment  to  which 
they  belong  is  already  uniformed  and  equipped  in  a  regimental 
uniform,  or  has  heretofore  adopted  a  regimental  uniform  which  has 
been  approved  by  the  Commandor-in  Chief,  or  shall  hereafter  adopt 
a  regimental  uniform  which  shall  be  approved  of  by  the  Commander- 
in-Chief,  pursuant  to  these  regulations. 

1545.  All  the  battalion  companies  in  ft  regiment,  and  companies 
doing  duty  aa  battalion  companies  by  order  of  the  Commander-in- 
Chief,  shall  be  uniformed  and  equipped  alike,  and  in  the  uniform 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  273 

Uniform  Generally. 

and  equipments   prescribed  in  these  regulations,   or  those  worn, 
adopted  and  authorized  pursuant  to  the  preceding  paragraph. 

1546.  All  flank  companieg  of  regiments,  doing  duty  as  artillery, 
cavalry  or  riflemen,  which  shall  hereafter  be  organized,  or  which 
shall  hereafter  uniform  or  equip  anew,  or  shall  change  their^niform 
or  equipments,  or  shall  be  ordered  by  the  Commander-in-Chief  so  to 
do,  shall  uniform  and  equip  in  strict  conformity  with  the  uniform 
prescribed  herein  for  those  arms  respectively. 

1547.  All  field  and  line  officers,  and  non-commissioned  officers, 
musicians  and  privates  in  regiments,  irrespective  of  any  special 
orders  heretofore  issued,  are  hereby  required  to  wear  the  buttons 
herein  prescribed,  and  upon  the  cap  the  number  of  the  regiment ; 
and  all  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  are  required  to  wear 
the  badges  of  rank  and  grade  herein  prescribed.  This  paragraph 
will  apply  as  well  to  regiments  and  companies  which  are  already 
uniformed,  as  to  those  which  shall  hereafter  uniform. 

1548.  No  regimental  uniform  will  hereafter  be  approved  of,  by  the 
Commander-in-Chief,  in  which  the  color  of  the  trimmings  peculiar 
to  one  arm  of  the  service  shall  be  authorized  to  be  worn  by  a  regi- 
ment or  company  organized  in  another  arm. 

1549.  Within  six  months  after  the  issue  of  these  regulations,  the 
Commandants  of  regiments,  which  have  not  already  a  regimental 
uniform,  will  convene  the  commissioned  officers  of  their  respective 
regiments  { except  the  staff),  and  determine,  by  a  majority  thereof, 
upon  a  uniform  for  such  regiments  in  general  conformity  with  these 
regulations,  and  within  thirty  days  thereafter  will  transmit  a  full 
description  thereof  to  the  Adjutant-General,  to  the  end  that  an  order 
may  be  made  by  the  Commander-in-Chief  for  the  uniform  of  such 
regiment ;  otherwise  the  regiment  will  be  deemed  to  have  elected  to 
take  the  uniform,  as  particularly  described  in  the  above  regulations, 
for  the  arm  in  which  the  regiment  is  organized.  In  case  the  uniform 
is  intended  to  apply  only  to  the  battalion  companies,  the  officers  of 
those  companies  will  determine  upon  the  uniform  by  a  majority 
vote. 


214:  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Uniform  Generally. 

1550.  The  following  restrictions  are  imposed  upon  the  regiments, 
in  adopting  regimental  uniforms,  and  sueh  uniforms  will  not  be 
approved  by  the  Commander-in-Chief  unless  they  conform  hereto. 

L  The  uniform  coat  must  in  aU  cases  be  of  dark  blue  cloth,  for 
all  arms ;  except  that  for  regiments  which  are  ordered  to  do  duty  as 
light  infantry,  by  the  Commander-in-Chief,  the  frock  coat  may  be  of 
cadet  gray  cloth,  the  coat  to  be  in  the  same  style,  as  prescribed 
for  the  other  arms,  with  edging  of  black  cloth;  and  also  with  the 
exception  that  in  regiments  organized  as  riflemen  the  coat  may  be 
of  dark  green  cloth,  with  an  edging  of  emerald  green  cloth. 

%  Where  the  cadet  gray  coat  is  allowed  to  be  worn,  by  order 
of  the  Commander-in-Chief,  the  trousers  will  be  of  cloth  of  the  same 
color  and  description  as  the  coat,  with  a  welt  of  black  cloth ;  and 
tlie  cap  will  be  of  the  prescribed  shape,  and  of  black  cloth,  or  beaver, 
or  felt,  with  the  prescribed  ornaments,  and  with  a  black  pompon ; 
and  where  the  dark  green  cloth  coat  is  allowed  to  be  worn,  by  order 
of  the  Commander-in-Chief,  the  trousers  will  be  of  dark  green  cloth, 
with  a  welt  of  emerald  green  cloth ;  and  the  cap,  of  the  prescribed 
shape,  of  dark  green  clotli,  or  black  beaver  or  felt,  with  the  ornamenta 
and  pompon  above  prescribed  for  riflemen. 

3.  In  all  cases  the  plate  on  the  front  of  the  cap  will  be  strictly 
as  above  prescribed  by  these  regulations. 

4.  Regiments  organized  as  infantry  may  adopt  a  white  edging  for 
the  coat  and  trousers,  and  a  white  pompon. 

5.  Stripes  upon  the  trousers  will  be  allowed  in  lieu  of  the  welt, 
but  under  the  limitations  contained  in  paragragh  fifteen  hundred  and 
forty-eight ;  and  such  stripes  may  be  of  white  when  the  white  pom- 
pon is  worn,  and  black  when  the  regiment  has  the  gray  uniform. 

6.  Horse-hair  plumes  may  be  adopted  by  regiments  doing  duty 
as  cavalry  or  light  artillery. 

7.  Bear  skin  caps  may  be  worn  by  regiments  doing  duty  as 
infantry. 

8.  The  fatigue  jacket  of  the  cavalry  and  light  artillery  will  !)« 
allowed  to  be  worn,  by  regiments  doing  duty  in  those  arms,  as  a  full 
dress. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  275 


Uniform  Generally. 


9.  Worsted  epaulettes  may  be  worn,  in  place  of  the  scales,  by 
foot  soldiers ;  sucli  epaulettes  to  be  scarlet  for  the  artillery  ;  light  or 
sky  blue,  or  whitCy  for  the  infantry ;  emerald  green  for  the  riflemen  ; 
yellow  for  the  engineers  ;  crimson  for  the  ordnance  ;  and  ilacJc  for  regi- 
ments doing  duty  as  light  infantry,  and  equipped  in  the  gray  uniform. 

1551.  The  order  for  a  regimental  uniform  may  include  the  field 
officers,  and  all  officers,  non-commissioned  officers,  musicians  and 
privates  of  battalion  companies,  and  companies  doing  duty  as  batta- 
lion companies  by  order  of  the  Commander-in-Chief. 

1552.  All  officers  and  battalion  companies,  and  companies  doing 
duty  as  battalion  companies,  in  regiments  for  which  a  regimental 
uniform  shall  not  have  been  prescribed,  or  shall  not  be  prescribed 
by  the  Commander-in-Chief,  pursuant  to  the  preceding  paragraphs 
( and  which  are  not  now  uniformed  agreeably  to  the  regulations  as  to 
uniform,  adopted  by  this  state,  by  general  orders  No.  461,  in  1851 ), 
shall  equip  in  the  uniform  herein  prescribed,  within  one  year  from 
the  date  of  the  issue  of  these  regulations. 

1553.  In  regiments  for  which  a  regimental  uniform  shall  be  pre- 
scribed, the  officers  and  companies,  which  are  affected  by  the  adoption 
of  such  uniform,  shall  uniform  and  equip  themselves,  agi-eeably  to 
such  uniform,  in  six  months  after  its  approval  by  the  Commander- 
in-Chief. 

1554.  All  battalion  companies,  and  companies  doing  duty  as  batta- 
lion companies,  hereafter  coming  into  a  regiment,  shall  strictly  equip 
agreeably  to  the  uniform  of  such  regiment. 

1555.  All  orders  regulating  uniforms  and  equipments,  inconsistent 
with  those  regulations,  are  hereby  countermanded  and  rescinded  ; 
but  no  person  already  in  uniform,  agreeably  to  the  general  orders 
(  No.  461 ),  dated  September  6,  1851,  establishing  a  uniform  for  this 
state,  will  be  required  to  change  his  uniform  ( unless  in  pursuance 
of  an  order  establishing  a  regimental  uniform ),  until  a  new  uniform 
is  required  by  him,  except  as  prescribed  in  paragraph  fifteen  hundrtd 
and  forty-seven,  and,  also,  except  that  tlie  general  and  staff  officers 


276  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Manual  of  Arms. 

are  required  at  once  to  conform  to  these  regulations  as  to  the  prescribed 
buttons,  cap  ornaments  and  pompon. 

1556.  No  discharge  from  service,  exemption  or  any  privilege  what- 
soever, shall  be  given  or  allowed  to  any  person,  for  military  service, 
who  shall  not  strictly  comply  with  the  foregoing  regulations  as  to 
uniform. 

INSTRUCTION    TO    THE    INFANTRY    FOR    ARMS  WITH    PERCUSSION 

CAPS. 
^  Supplement  to  the  Manual  of  Arms  —  Infantry  Tactics. 

1557.  Percussion  caps  will  be  carried  in  a  pouch,  attached  to  the 
waist-belt,  by  loops,  in  a  manner  to  admit  of  its  being  moved  upon 
the  belt. 

1558.  Whenever,  in  the  Manual  of  ArmSy  or  in  Scott^s  Tactics,  the 
words  "little  linger  toucliing  the  feather  spring "  occur,  the  words 
*'  little  finger  just  above  the  lock  "  should  be  substituted.  The  terms 
"  handle"  and  "  small  of  the  stock"  mean  the  same  thing. 

1559.  Load  in  Ten  Times  (being  at  Shoulder  Arms). 

1.  Load. 
one  time  and  two  motions. 

First  motion. — Drop  the  piece  by  a  quick  extension  of  the  left  arm  ; 
seize  it,  with  the  right  hand,  above  and  near  the  lower  band ;  and,  at 
the  same  time,  carry  the  right  foot  forward,  the  heel  against  the 
hollow  of  the  left  foot. 

Second  motion. — Drop  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  along  the  left 
thigh ;  seize  it,  with  the  left  hand  above  the  right,  and  with  the  left 
hand  let  it  descend  to  the  ground  without  shook,  the  piece  touching 
the  left  thigh,  and  the  muzzle  opposite  the  centre  of  the  body  ;  carry 
the  right  hand  quickly  to  the  cartridge-box  and  open  it. 

2.  Handle — Cartridge. 

ONE   TIME   AND   ONE   MOTION. 

Seize  a  cartridge  with  the  thumb  and  the  next  two  fingers,  and 
place  it  between  the  teeth. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  211 

Manual  of  Arms. 
3.  Tear  —  Cartridge. 

ONE   TIME   AND   ONE   MOTION. 

Tear  the  paper  down  to  the  powder,  hold  the  cartridge  upright 
between  the  thumb  and  two  next  fingers,  near  the  top ;  in  this  posi- 
tion place  it  in  front  of  and  near  the  muzzle,  the  back  of  the  hand 
to  the  front. 

4.  Charge — Cartridge. 

ONE    TIME    AND    ONE   MOTION. 

Fix  the  eye  on  the  muzzle ;  turn  quickly  the  back  of  the  right 
hand  towards  the  body,  in  order  to  discharge  the  powder  into  the 
barrel ;  raise  the  elbow  to  the  height  of  the  wrist,  shake  the  cartridge, 
force  it  into  the  muzzle,  and  leave  the  hand  reversed,  the  fingers 
closed,  but  not  clenched. 

5.  Draw  —  Rammer. 

ONE   TIME   AND   THREE   MOTIONS. 

First  motion. — Drop,  quickly,  the  right  elbow,  and  seize  the  rammer 
between  the  thumb  and  fore-finger  bent,  the  other  fingers  shut ;  draw 
it  smartly ;  extending  the  arm,  seize  the  rammer  again  at  the  middle, 
between  the  thumb  and  fore-finger,  the  hand  reversed,  the  palm  to 
the  front,  the  nails  up,  the  eyes  following  the  movement  of  the  hand  ; 
clear  the  rammer  from  the  pipes  by  again  extending  the  arm. 

Second  motion. — Turn,  rapidly,  the  rammer  between  the  bayonet 
and  the  face,  closing  the  fingers,  the  rammers  of  the  rear  rank  grazing 
the  right  shoulders  of  the  men  of  the  same  file  in  front,  respectively, 
the  rammer  parallel  to  the  bayonet,  the  arm  extended,  the  butt  of  the 
rammer  opposite  to  the  muzzle,  but  not  yet  inserted,  the  eyes  fixed 
on  the  muzzle. 

Third  motion. — Insert  the  butt  of  the  rammer  and  force  it  down  as 
low  as  the  hand. 

6.  Ram  —  Cartridge. 

ONE    TIME    AND    ONE    MOTION. 

Extend  the  arm  to  its  full  length  to  seize  the  rammer  between  the 
right  thumb  extended  and  the  fore-finger  bent,  the  other  fingers 

MlUTARY.  24 


278  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Ma/Ttual  of  Arms. 

closed ;  with  force  ram  home  twice,  and  seize  the  rammer  at  the 
little  end,  between  the  thumb  and  fore-finger  bent,  the  other  fingers 
closed,  the  right  elbow  touching  the  body.* 

7.  Return  —  Rammer. 

OITB   TIMK    AND   THREE    MOTIONS. 

First  motion. — Draw,  briskly,  the  rammer ;  reseize  it  at  the  middle 
between  the  thumb  and  fore-finger,  the  liand  reversed,  the  palm  to 
the  front,  the  nails  up,  the  eyes  following  the  movement  of  the  hand ; 
clear  the  rammer  from  the  barrel  by  extending  the  arm. 

Second  motion. — Turn,  rapidly,  the  rammer  between  the  bayonet  and 
the  face,  closing  the  fingers,  the  rammers  of  the  rear  rank  grazing  the 
right  shoulders  of  the  men  in  the  same  file  in  front,  respectively,  the 
rammer  parallel  to  the  bayonet,  the  arm  extended,  the  little  end  of 
the  rammer  opposite  to  the  first  pipe,  but  not  yet  inserted,  the  eyes 
fixed  on  that  pipe. 

Third  motion. — Insert  the  little  end,  and  with  the  thumb,  which 
will  follow  the  movement,  force  it  as  low  as  the  middle  band  ;  raise 
quickly  the  hand,  a  little  bent,  place  the  little  finger  on  the  butt  of 
the  rammer  and  force  it  down  ;  lower  the  left  hand  on  the  barrel,  to 
the  extent  of  tlie  arm,  without  depressing  the  shoulder. 

8.  Cast  —  About.! 

ONE   time    and   two   MOTIONS. 

First  motion. — With  the  left  hand  bring  up  the  piece  vertically 
against  the  left  shoulder,  seize  it  smartly  with  the  right  hand  at  the 
handle,  and  slide  the  left  hand  down  as  low  as  the  chin. 

Second  motion. — Make  a  half  face  to  the  right  on  the  left  heel,  bring 
the  left  toe  to  the  front,  place  at  the  same  time  the  right  foot  behind 


*  If  the  Minie  ball  be  used,  the  ramming  will  be  done  gently,  sufiBcicntly  to 
send  the  ball  home. 

t  If  the  priming  attachment  is  iMcd,  the  command  will  be  load  in  eight  times  ; 
the  commands  cast  about  and  prime  are  omitted,  and  the  eighth  command  will  be 
thoulder  arms,  and  will  be  executed  in  the  same  maoner  as  fh>in  ^he  ix>sit!on  of 
fix  bayonet. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  279 

Manual  of  Arms. 

and  at  right  angles  with  the  left,  the  hollow  of  the  right  foot  against 
the  left  heel ;  carry  the  piece  opposite  to  the  right  shoulder ;  bring 
down  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  into  the  left,  which  will  seize  it 
at  the  tail  band,  the  thumb  extended  on  the  stock,  the  butt  under 
the  right  fore-arm,  the  handle  against  the  body,  and  about  two  inches 
under  the  right  breast,  the  muzzle  at  the  height  of  the  eye,  the  left 
elbow  supported  against  the  side,  the  right  hand  grasping  the  handle 

9-  Prime.* 

OlfB   TIME    AND  ONE   MOTION. 

Place  the  thumb  of  the  right  hand  on  the  hammer  ( the  fingers 
remaining  under  and  against  the  guard ),  and  half-cock  the  piece ; 
brush  off  the  old  cap,  and  with  the  thumb  and  first  two  fingers  of 
the  right  hand  take  a  cap  from  the  pouch,  place  it  firmly  on  the  cone 
by  pushing  it  down  with  the  thumb,  and  seize  the  piece  at  the 
handle. 

10.  Shoulder — Arms. 

ONE   TIME    AND   TWO   MOTIONS. 

t^rst  motion. — Face  to  the  front  by  turning  on  the  left  heel ;  bring  up 
the  right  by  the  side  of  the  left  heel ;  at  the  same  time  bring  the  piece 
briskly  with  the  right  hand  to  the  left  shoulder,  and  place  the  left 
hand  under  the  butt. 

Second  motion. — Let  fall  smartly  the  right  hand  into  its  position  at 
Shoulder  Arms. 

1560.  Ready  (from  the  position  of  Shoulder  Arms). 

ONE   TIME   AND   FOUR   MOTIONS. 

First  motion. — Turn  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  the  lock  to  the 
front ;  seize  it  at  the  handle,  with  the  right  hand,  and  turn  the  left  toe 


*  If  the  priming  attachment  is  used,  the  command  will  be  load  in  eight  times  ; 
the  commands  cast  about  and  prime  are  omitted,  and  the  eighth  command  will  be 
shoulder  arms,  and  will  be  executed  in  the  same  manner  as  from  the  position  of 
Jix  bayonet. 


280  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Manual  of  Arms. 

a  little  to  the  front ;  at  the  same  time  place  the  hollow  of  the  right  foot 
against  the  heel  of  the  left. 

Second  motion. — Bring  the  piece,  with  the  right  hand,  to  the  middle 
of  the  body ;  place  the  left  hand,  the  little  finger  just  above  the  lock, 
the  thumb  extended  on  the  stock  at  the  height  of  the  chin,  the  counter- 
plate  (or  S)  almost  turned  toward  the  body,  the  rammer  obliquely  to 
the  left  and  front. 

Third  motion. — Place  the  thumb  on  the  head  of  the  hammer,  the 
fingers  under  and  on  the  guard,  the  elbow  at  the  height  of  the  hand. 

Fourth  motion. — Close  the  right  elbow  smartly  to  the  body  in 
cocking ;  seize  the  piece  at  the  handle,  let  it  descend  along  the  body 
in  the  left  hand  to  the  tail  band,  which  will  remain  at  the  height  of 
the  shoulder. 

1561.  Ready  (from  the  position  of  Prime).* 

ONE   TIME    AND    ONE    MOTION. 

Place  the  thumb  of  the  right  hand  on  the  hammer  (the  fingers 
remaining  under  and  against  the  guard),  cock  the  piece  and  seize  the 
handle  with  the  right  hand. 

jlim. 

ONE   TIME    AND   ONE   MOTION. 

Raise  the  butt  to  the  shoulder  ;  drop,  smartly,  the  muzzle,  the  left 
hand  remaining  at  the  tail  band  ;  support  the  butt  against  the  right 
shoulder,  the  left  elbow  a  little  down ;  shut  the  left  eye,  direct  the 
right  along  the  barrel,  drop  the  head  upon  the  butt  to  catch  the 
object,  and  place  the  fore-finger  on  the  trigger.     The  rear  rank  will, 


*  If  priming  attachment  is  used,  Readt  from  poaitictn  of  prime  'wHl  be  omitted, 
and  Ready /rom  the.  position  of  return  rammer  substituted,  as  follows: 

First  Motion.— Unite  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  along  the  left  side,  the  left 
hand  af.  the  height  of  the  eyes,  the  fore  arm  touching  the  piece ;  seize  the  piece 
with  the  right  hand  at  the  small  of  the  stock,  at  the  same  time  make  a  half  face  to 
the  right,  turning  on  the  left  heel,  and  i)lace  the  hollow  of  the  right  foot  against  the 
heel  of  the  loft. 

Second,  Third  and  Fourth  Motions.— Witt  be  the  same  as  the  second,  third 
and  fourth  motions  of  Reapt  from  the  position  of  shoulder  arms. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  281 

Manual  of  Arms. 

at  the  same  time,  carry  the  right  foot  about  eight  inches  towards  the 
left  heel  of  the  man  next  on  the  right. 

Fire. 

ONE  TIME  AND  ONE  MOTION. 

Apply  the  fore-finger  with  force  to  the  trigger,  without  further 
lowering  or  turning  the  head,  and  remain  in  that  position 

1562L  Load  ( from  the  position  of  Fire. ) 

ONE  TIME  AND  TWO  MOTIONS. 

First  motion. — Bring  back  the  piece  quickly  with  both  hands,  depress 
the  butt  strongly  by  extending  the  right  arm,  and  carry  it,  with  the 
arm  thus  extended,  to  the  left  side,  the  barrel  to  the  front  and  opposite 
to  the  left  shoulder,  the  left  hand  at  the  height  of  the  chin,  the  back 
of  the  hand  to  the  front,  the  left  fore-arm  touching  the  stock ;  at  the 
same  time  face  to  the  front  and  carry  the  right  foot  forward,  the  heel 
against  the  hollow  of  the  left  foot. 

Second  motion. — Let  go  the  handle  with  the  right  hand,  let  the  piece 
descend  through  the  left  to  the  ground,  without  shock,  and  take  the 
position  of  the  second  motion  of  Load,  when  loading  in  ten  times. 

1563.  Shoulder  Arms  •{  from  the  Fin ). 

ONE  TIME    AND  TWO  MOTIONS. 

JEtrst  motion. — ^Bring  back  the  piece  with  both  hands,  face  to  the 
front ;  carry  the  piece  against  the  left  shoulder  and  place  the  left 
hand  under  the  butt. 

Second  motion. — Let  fall,  smartly,  the  right  hand  into  its  position  at 
Shoulder  Arms. 

1564.  After  the  words  Ready  and  Aim  are  given,  if  it  is  desired  to 
bring  the  musket  to  the  shoulder  without  firing,  the  order  will  be  as 
follows : 

Recover  —  Arms. 

ONE   TIME   AND   ONE   MOTION, 

Withdraw  the  finger  from  the  trigger,  throw  up  smartly  the  muazle, 
and  retake  the  position  of  the  fourth  motion  of  Ready. 
Military.  24* 


282  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Manual  of  Arms. 

1565.  Shoulder — Arms  {from  the  Reccwer).* 

OXE   TIME    AND   ONE    MOTION. 

At  the  word  Shoulder,  bring  the  piece  to  the  middle  of  the  body, 
the  left  thumb  at  the  height  of  the  chin,  the  little  finger  just  above 
the  lock ;  next  place  the  right  thumb  on  the  head  of  the  hammer, 
support  the  fore-finger  on  the  trigger,  sustain  at  the  same  time  the 
hammer  carefully  in  its  descent  to  the  position  of  half-cock,  then 
seize  the  handle  of  the  piece  with  the  right  hand.  At  the  word  j2rms, 
carry  the  piece  smartly  to  the  shoulder,  and  take  the  position  of 
Shoulder  Arms. 

LOAD   IN  /FOUR   TIMES.f 

1566.  Load. — One.  Execute  the  first  time  of  loading,  handle  car- 
tridge, tear  cartridge,  charge  cartridge  ;  Two.  Draw  rammer,  enter  it  as 
far  as  the  hand,  and  ram  twice ;  Three.  Return  rammer,  cast  about, 
and  prime ;  Four.  Execute  the  tenth  time  of  loading. 

1567.  If  the  soldier  be  at  the  Ready,  from  Shoulder  Arms,  the  same 
commands  and  means  will  be  used,  in  returning  from  this  position  to 
that  of  Shoulder  Arms,  as  were  prescribed  in  coming  to  the  latter 
from  the  Recover;  but  if  he  be  at  the  Ready,  from  the  position  of 
Prime,  when  the  command  Shoulder  Arms  is  given,  he  will,  at 
the  word  Shoulder,  support  the  piece  firmly  with  the  left  hand,  half- 
cock,  as  has  been  explained,  and  seize  the  piece  at  the  handle  witli 
the  right  hand.  At  the  word  Arms,  face  to  the  front  and  complete 
the  time. 


♦  If  the  priming  attachment  is  used,  the  priming  paper  or  tape  will  be  torn  close 
off  at  the  orifice  from  which  it  appears,  and  the  hammer  allowed  gently  to  fall  upon 
the  cone. 

t  If  the  priming  attachment  is  used,  the  command  will  be  load  in  maeB  timks  • 
one  and  ttco  will  bo  executed  as  al>ove  provided  ;  three  will  be,  return  rammer  and 
shoulder  arms,  as  from  the  position  of  fix  bayonets 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  283 


Manual  of  Arms. 


MANUAL  OF  ARMS    FOR  THE    LIGHT    INFANTRY,  WHEN  THE  LONG 
BARREL    MUSKET    OR    RIFLE  MUSKET    IS    USED. 

Principles  of  Shouldered  Arms. 

1568.  The  piece  in  the  right  hand,  the  right  arm  slightly  bent,  the 
barrel  nearly  vertical  and  resting  in  the  hollow  of  the  shoulder,  the 
guard  to  the  front,  the  arm  hanging  nearly  at  its  full  length  near  the 
body;  the  thumb  and  fore-finger  embracing  the  guard,  the  remaining 
fingers  closed  together,  and  grasping  the  swell  of  the  stock  just  under 
the  cock,  which  rests  on  the  little  finger. 

1569.  Recruits  are  frequently  seen  with  natural  defects  in  the  con- 
formation of  the  shoulders,  breast  and  hips.  These  the  instructor 
will  labor  to  correct  in  the  lessons  without  arms,  and  afterwards,  by 
steady  endeavors,  so  that  the  appearance  of  the  pieces,  in  the  same 
line,  may  be  uniform,  and  this  without  constraint  to  the  men  in  their 
positions. 

1570.  The  instructor  will  have  occasion  to  remark  that  recruits,  on 
first  bearing  arms,  are  liable  to  derange  their  position  by  lowering  the 
right  shoulder  and  the  right  hand,  or  by  sinking  the  hip  and  spreading 
out  the  elbows. 

1571.  He  will  be  careful  to  correct  all  these  faults  by  continually 
rectifying  the  position ;  he  will  sometimes  take  away  the  piece  to 
replace  it  the  better;  he  will  avoid  fatiguing  the  recruits  too  much  in 
the  beginning,  but  labor  by  degrees  to  render  this  position  so  natural 
and  easy  that  they  may  remain  in  it  a  long  time  without  fatigue. 

1572.  Finally,  the  instructor  will  take  great  care  that  the  piece,  at 
a  shoulder,  be  not  carried  too  high  nor  too  low :  if  too  high,  the  right 
elbow  would  spread  out,  the  soldier  would  occupy  too  much  space  in 
his  rank,  and  the  piece  be  made  to  waver;  if  too  low,  the  files  would 
be  too  much  closed,  the  soldier  would  not  have  the  necessary  space  to 
handle  his  piece  with  facility,  the  right  arm  would  become  too  much 
fatigued,  and  would  draw  down  the  shoulder. 


284  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 


Manual  of  Arms. 


.573.  The  manual  of  arms  will  be  taught  to  four  men,  placed,  at 
first,  in  one  rank,  elbow  to  elbow,  and  afterwards  in  two  ranks. 

1574.  Each  command  will  be  executed  in  one  time  (or  pause),  but 
this  time  will  be  divided  into  motions,  the  better  to  make  known  the 
mechanism. 

1575.  The  rate  (or  swiftness)  of  each  motion,  in  the  manual  of  arms, 
with  the  exceptions  herein  indicated,  is  fixed  at  the  ninetieth  part  of 
a  minute;  but,  in  order  not  to  fatigue  the  attention,  the  instructor 
will,  at  first,  look  more  particularly  to  the  execution  of  the  motions, 
without  requiring  a  nice  observance  of  the  cadence,  to  which  he  will 
bring  the  recruits  progressively,  and  after  they  shall  have  become  a 
little  familiarized  with  the  handling  of  the  piece. 

1576.  As  the  motions  relative  to  the  cartridge,  to  the  rammer,  and 
to  the  fixing  and  unfixing  of  the  bayonet,  cannot  be  executed  at  the 
rate  prescribed,  nor  even  with  a  uniform  swiftness,  they  will  not  be 
subjected  to  that  cadence.  The  instructor  will,  however,  labor  to 
cause  these  motions  to  be  executed  with  promptness,  and,  above  all, 
with  regularity. 

1577.  The  last  syllable  of  the  command  will  decide  the  brisk  exe- 
cution of  the  first  motion  of  each  time  (or  pause).  The  commands 
two^  three  and  four  will  decide  the  brisk  execution  of  the  other  mo- 
tions. As  soon  as  the  recruits  shall  well  comprehend  the  positions 
of  the  several  motions  of  a  time,  they  will  be  taught  to  execute  the 
time  without  resting  on  its  different  motions ;  the  mechanism  of  the 
time  will  nevertheless  be  observed,  as  well  to  give  a  perfect  use  of 
the  piece,  as  to  avoid  the  sinking  of,  or  slurring  over,  either  of  the 
motions. 

1578.  The  manual  of  arms  will  be  taught  in  the  following  progres- 
sion.    The  instructor  will  command  : 

Supp<yrt  —Arms. 

ONE    TIME    AND    THREE    MOTIONS. 

1579.  First  motion.— -Bring  the  piece,  with  the  right  hand,  perpen- 
dicularly to  the  front  and  between  the  eyes,  the  barrel  to  the  rear ; 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  285 

Manual  of  Arms. 

seize  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  at  the  lower  band,  raise  this  hand 
as  high  as  the  chin,  and  seize  the  piece  at  the  same  time  with  the 
right  hand,  four  inches  below  the  cock. 

Second  motion.  —  Turn  the  piece  with  the  right  hand,  the  barrel  to 
the  front ;  carry  the  piece  to  the  left  shoulder,  and  pass  the  fore-arm, 
extended  on  the  breast,  between  the  right  hand  and  the  cock ;  sup- 
port the  cock  against  the  left  fore-arm,  the  left  hand  resting  on  the 
right  breast. 

Third  motion.  —  Drop  the  right  hand  by  the  side. 

1580.  When  the  instructor  may  wish  to  give  repose  in  this  position, 
he  will  command : 

Rest 

1581.  At  this  command,  the  recruits  will  bring  up  smartly  the 
right  hand  to  the  handle  of  the  piece  (small  of  the  stock),  when  they 
will  not  be  required  to  preserve  silence  or  steadiness  of  position. 

1582.  When  the  instructor  may  wish  the  recruits  to  pass  from  this 
position  to  that  of  silence  and  steadiness,  he  will  command : 

1.  Attention.  2.  Squad. 

1583.  At  the  second  word,  the  recruits  will  resume  the  position  of 
the  third  motion  of  Support  Arms. 

Shoulder  —  Arms. 

ONE    TIME    AND   THREE    MOTIONS. 

1584.  First  motion. —  Grasp  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  under 
and  against  the  left  fore-arm  ;  seize  it  with  the  left  hand  at  the  lower 
band,  the  thumb  extended;  detach  the  piece  slightly  from  the 
shoulder,  the  left  fore-arm  along  the  stock. 

Second  motion. —  Carry  the  piece  vertically  to  the  right  shoulder 
with  both  hands,  the  rammer  to  the  front ;  change  the  position  of  the 
right  hand  so  as  to  embrace  the  guard  with  the  thumb  and  fore-finger; 
slip  the  left  hand  to  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  the  fingers  extended 
and  joined,  the  right  arm  nearly  straight. 

Third  motion. —  Drop  the  left  hand  quickly  by  the  side. 


28C  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Manual  of  Arms, 
Present  —  Ar  ms. 

ONE    TIME    AND    TWO    MOTIONS. 

1585.  First  Ttwtion.  —  With  the  right  liand  bring  the  piece  erect 
before  the  centre  of  the  body,  the  rammer  to  the  front ;  at  the  same 
time  seize  the  piece  with  the  loft  hand  half-way  between  the  lower 
band  and  the  lock-plate,  the  little  finger  touching  the  plate,  the 
thumb  extended  along  the  barrel  and  against  the  stock,  the  fore-arm 
horizontal  and  resting  against  the  body,  the  band  as  high  as  the 
elbow. 

Second  motion. — Grasp  the  small  of  the  stock  with  the  right 
hand  below  and  against  the  guard. 

Shoulder  —  Arms, 

ONE   TIME    AND   TWO    MOTIONS. 

1586.  First  motion. —  Bring  the  piece  to  the  right  shoulder,  at  the 
same  time  change  the  position  of  the  right  hand  so  as  to  embrace 
the  guard  with  the  thumb  and  fore-finger ;  slip  up  the  left  hand  to 
the  height  of  the  shoulder,  the  fingers  extended  and  joined,  the  right 
arm  nearly  straight. 

Second  motion. —  Drop  the  left  hand  quickly  by  the  side. 

Order — Arms. 

ONE  TIME  AND  TWO   MOTIONS. 

1587.  First  wo^tow.— Seize  the  piece  briskly  with  the  left  hand 
just  above  the  lower  band,  and  detach  it  slightly  from  the  shoulder 
with  the  right  band ;  loosen  the  grasp  of  the  right  hand,  lower  the 
piece  with  the  left,  reseize  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  above  the 
left  hand  and  between  the  lower  and  middle  band,  the  little  finaor 
in  rear  of  the  barrel,  the  butt  about  four  inches  from  the  ground,  tbr 
right  hand  supported  against  the  hip,  drop  the  left  hand  by  the  sicK". 

Second  motion. — Let  the  piece  slip  through  the  right  hand  to  the 
ground  by  opening  slightly  the  fingers,  and  take  the  position  about  to 
be  described. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  287 

Manual  of  Arms. 
POSITION  OF  ORDER  ARMS. 

1588.  The  hand  low,  the  barrel  between  the  thumb  and  fore-finger 
extended  along  the  stock;  the  other  fingers  extended  and  joined,- 
the  muzzle  about  two  inches  from  the  right  shoulder;  the  rammer 
in  front ;  the  toe  (or  beak)  of  the  butt  against  and  in  a  line  with  the 
toe  of  the  right  foot,  the  barrel  perpendicular. 

1589.  When  the  instructor  may  wish  to  give  repose  in  this  position, 
he  will  command : 

Rest. 

1590.  At  this  command,  the  recruits  will  not  be  required  to  preseiTe 
silence  or  steadiness. 

1591.  When  the  instructor  may  wish  the  recruits  to  pass  from  this 
position  to  that  of  silence  and  steadiness,  he  will  command: 

1.  Attention.  2.  Sq,uad. 

1592.  At  the  second  word,  the  recruits  will  resume  the  position  of 
order  arms. 

Shoulder  —  Arms. 

ONE  TIME  AND  TWO  MOTIONS. 

1593.  First  motion.  —  Raise  the  piece  vertically  with  the  right  hand 
to  the  height  of  the  right  breast,  and  opposite  the  shoulder,  the  elbow 
close  to  the  body  ;  seize  the  piece,  with  the  left  hand  below  the  right, 
and  drop  quickly  the  right  hand  to  grasp  the  piece  at  the  swell  of 
the  stock,  the  thumb  and  fore-finger  embracing  the  guard  ;  press  the 
piece  against  the  shoulder  with  the  left  hand,  the  right  arm  nearly 
straight. 

Second  motion.  Drop  the  left  hand  quickly  by  the  side. 

1594.  Load  in  Nine  Times. 

1.  Load.* 

ONE    TIME    AND    TWO    MOTIONS. 

First  motion. —  Grasp  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  at  the  height 
of  the  shoulder,  quit  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  and  carry  it 

*  Whenever  the  loadings  and  firings  are  to  be  executed,  the  instractor  will  cans© 
the  cartridge  boxea  to  be  brought  to  the  front. 


288  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Manual  of  Arms. 

with  the  left  hand  across  the  body,  so  that  the  butt  shall  be  to  the 
left  of  the  body  and  within  three  inches  of  the  ground ;  seize  the 
piece,  with  the  right  hand  above  the  left. 

Second  motion. —  Let  the  piece  slip  through  the  hands  to  the 
ground,  without  shock,  so  that  it  shall  rest  against  the  left  thigh,  the 
barrel  to  the  front,  inclining  to  the  right,  the  rammer  obliquely  to 
the  left  and  rear,  the  muzzle  three  inches  from  the  centre  of  the 
breast ;  and  place  the  left  hand  above  the  right,  the  thumb  upon  the 
rammer  pipe,  and  carry  the  right  hand  to  the  cartridge  box. 

2.  Handle  —  Cartridge. 

ONE   TIME    AND    ONE    MOTION. 

1595.  Seize  the  cartridge  with  the  thumb  and  next  two  fingers,  and 
place  it  between  the  teeth. 

3.  Tear  —  Cartridge. 

ONE   TIME    AND   ONE    MOTION. 

1596.  Tear  the  paper  to  the  powder,  hold  the  cartridge  upright 
between  the  thumb  and  first  two  fingers,  near  the  top ;  in  this  position 
place  it  in  front  of  and  near  the  muzzle,  the  back  of  the  hand  to  the 
front 

4.  Charge — Cartridge. 

ONE   time    and    one    MOTION. 

1597.  Empty  the  powder  into  the  barrel;  disengage  the  ball  from 
the  paper  with  the  right  hand,  and  the  thumb  and  first  two  fingers  of 
the  left ;  insert  it  into  the  bore,  the  pointed  end  uppermost,  and  press 
it  down  with  the  right  thumb ;  seize  the  head  of  the  rammer  with  the 
thumb  and  fore-finger  of  the  right  hand,  the  other  fingers  closed, 
the  elbows  near  the  body. 

5.  Di'aie — Rammer. 

ONE   TIME    AND   THREE    MOTIONS. 

1598.  First  motion. — Half  draw  the  rammer  by  extending  the  right 
arm ;  steady  it  in  this  position  with  the  left  thumb ;  grasp  the  rammer 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  289 

Manual  of  Arms, 

near  the  muzzle  with  the  right  hand,  the  little  finger  uppermost,  the 
nails  to  the  front,  the  thumb  extended  along  the  rammer. 

Second  motion. — Clear  the  rammer  from  the  pipes  by  again  extend- 
ing the  arm ;  the  rammer  in  the  prolongation  of  the  pipes. 

Third  motion. — Turn  the  rammer,  the  little  end  of  the  rammer 
passing  near  the  left  shoulder ;  place  the  head  of  the  rammer  on  the 
ball,  the  back  of  the  hand  to  the  front. 

6.  Ram  —  Cartridge. 

ONE   TIME    AND   ONE    MOTION. 

1599.  Insert  the  rammer  as  far  as  the  right  hand,  and  steady  it  in- 
this  position  with  the  thumb  of  the  left  hand ;  seize  the  rammer  at 
the  small  end  with  the  thumb  and  fore-finger  of  the  right  hand,  the 
back  of  the  hand  to  the  front ;  press  the  ball  home,  the  elbows  near 
the  body. 

7.  Return  —  Rammer. 

ONE    TIME    AND    THREE   MOTIONS. 

1600,  First  motion. — Draw  the  rammer  half  way  out,  and  steady 
it  in  this  position  with  the  left  thumb ;  grasp  it  near  the  muzzle  with 
the  right  hand,  the  little  finger  uppermost,  the  nails  to  the  front,  the 
thumb  along  the  rammer ;  clear  the  rammer  from  the  bore  by  extend- 
ing the  arm,  the  nails  to  the  front,  the  rammer  in  the  prolongation 
of  the  bore. 

Second  motion. — Turn  the  rammer,  the  head  of  the  rammer  pass- 
ing near  the  left  shoulder,  and  insert  it  in  the  pipes  until  the  right 
hand  reaches  the  muzzle,  the  nails  to  the  front. 

Third  motion. — Force  the  rammer  home  by  placing  the  little  finger 
of  the  right  hand  on  the  head  of  the  rammer ;  pass  the  left  hand 
down  the  barrel  to  the  extent  of  the  arm,  without  depressing  the 
shoulder. 

Military.  25 


200  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Manual  of  Arms. 

8.  PrimeM 

ONE    TIME    AND   TWO    MOTIONS. 

1601.  First  motion. — With  the  left  hand  raise  the  piece  till  the  hand 
is  as  high  as  the  eye ;  grasp  the  small  of  the  stock  with  the  right 
hand  ;  half  face  to  the  right ;  place,  at  the  same  time,  the  right  foot 
behind  and  at  right  angles  with  the  left ;  the  hollow  of  the  right  foot 
against  the  left  heel.  Slip  the  left  hand  down  to  the  lower  band,  tho 
thumb  along  the  stock,  the  left  elbow  against  the  body ;  bring  tho 
piece  to  the  right  side,  the  butt  below  the  right  fore-arm,  the  small 
of  the  stock  against  the  body,  and  two  inches  below  the  right  breast, 
the  barrel  upwards,  the  muzzle  on  a  level  with  the  eye. 

Second  motion.  —  Half  cock  with  the  thumb  of  the  right  hand,  the 
fingers  supported  against  the  guard  and  the  small  of  the  stock ;  remove 
the  old  cap  with  one  of  the  fingers  of  the  right  hand,  and  with  the 
thumb  and  fore-flnger  of  the  same  hand  take  a  cap  from  the  pouch, 


*  If  the  priming  attachment  be  used,  the  command  will  be,  load  in  eight  times, 
and  the  eighth  command  will  be,  shoulder  arjtis,  and  executed  from  the  position 
of  return  rammer,  as  follows : 

First  motion. — Raise  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  along  the  left  side,  the  lefl 
hand  at  the  height  of  the  eyes,  the  fore  arm  touching  the  piece,  and  seize  the  piece 
with  the  right  hand  at  the  small  of  the  stock. 

Second  motion. — Carry  the  piece  vertically  across  the  body,  and  place  it  against 
the  right  shoulder,  tho  left  hand  at  that  shoulder ;  change  the  position  of  the  right 
hand,  and  seize  the  swell  of  the  stock,  the  thumb  and  fore-finger  embracing  the 
guard,  tho  right  arm  nearly  extended. 

Third  motion — Drop  briskly  the  lefl  hand  by  the  side. 

If  it  be  desired  to  pass  from  the  position  of  return  rammer  directly  to  the  com- 
mand RKADT,  the  eighth  command  of  shoulder  arms  is  to  be  omitted,  and  the 
command  rkady  will  be  executed  as  follows : 

First  motion.— llaiae  tho  piece,  with  the  left  hand,  along  the  lefl  side,  the  left 
hand  at  the  height  of  the  eyes,  tho  fore-arm  touching  the  piece;  seize  the  piece 
with  tho  right  hand,  at  the  small  of  the  stock,  at  the  same  time  make  a  half  face 
to  the  right,  turning  on  the  left  heel,  and  place  the  hollow  of  the  right  foot  against 
the  heel  of  the  left ;  at  the  same  time  pass  the  piece  across  the  bo<ly,  and  place  It 
against  the  right  shoulder,  the  cock  at  the  height  of  the  hip. 

Second  and  third  ytwtions.— The  same  as  the  second  and  third  motions  of  bkadt 
from  shoulder  arms  (No.  1608}. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  291 

Manual  of  Arma. 

place  it  on  the  nipple,  and  press  it  down  with  the  thumb ;  seize  the 
small  of  the  stock  with  the  right  hand. 

9.  Shoulder — Arms. 

ONE  TIME  AND   TWO  MOTIONS. 

1602.  First  motion. — Bring  the  piece  to  the  right  shoulder  and  sup- 
port it  there  with  the  left  hand,  face  to  the  front ;  bring  the  right  heel 
to  the  side  of  and  on  a  line  with  the  left ;  grasp  the  piece  with  the 
right  hand,  as  indicated  in  the  position  of  shoulder  arms. 

Second  motion.  —  Drop  the  left  hand  quickly  by  the  side. 

Ready. 

ONE  TIME  AND  THREE  MOTIONS. 

1603.  First  motion.  — Raise  the  piece  vertically  with  the  right  hand, 
so  that  the  cock  shall  be  at  the  height  of  the  hip,  at  the  same  time 
making  a  half  face  to  the  right  on  the  left  heel ;  carry  the  right  foot 
to  the  rear,  and  place  it  at  right  angles  to  the  left,  the  hollow  of  it 
opposite  to  and  against  the  left  heel ;  grasp  the  piece  with  the  left 
hand  at  the  lower  band. 

Second  motion.  —  Bring  down  the  piece  with  both  hands,  the  barrel 
upwards,  the  left  thumb  extended  along  the  stock,  the  butt  below  the 
right  fore-arm,  the  small  of  the  stock  against  the  body  and  two  inches 
below  the  right  breast,  the  muzzle  as  high  as  the  eye,  the  left  elbow 
against  the  side ;  place  at  the  same  time  the  right  thumb  on  the  head 
of  the  cock,  the  other  fingers  under  and  against  the  guard. 

Third  motion.  Cock,  and  seize  the  piece  at  the  small  of  the  stock 
without  deranging  the  position  of  the  butt. 

Aim. 

ONE    TIME    AND    ONE    MOTION. 

1604.  Raise  the  piece  with  both  hands,  and  support  the  butt  against 
the  right  shoulder;  the  left  elbow  down,  the  right  as  high  as  the 
shoulder ;  incline  the  head  upon  the  butt,  so  that  the  right  eye  may 
perceive  quickly  the  notch  of  the  hausse,  the  front  sight,  and  the 
object  aimed  at ;  the  left  eye  closed,  the  right  thumb  extended  along 
the  stock,  the  fore-finger  on  the  trigger. 


292  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Manual  of  Arms. 

1605.  When  recruits  are  formed  in  two  ranks  to  execute  the  firings, 
the  front  rank  men  will  raise  a  little  less  the  right  elbow,  in  order  to 
facilitate  the  aim  of  the  rear  rank  men. 

1G06.  The  rear  rank  men,  in  aiming,  will  each  carry  the  right  foot 
about  eight  inches  to  the  right,  and  towards  the  left  heel  of  the  man 
next  on  the  right,  inclining  the  upper  part  of  the  body  forward. 

Fire. 

ONE  TIME  AND  ONE  MOTION. 

1607.  Press  the  fore-finger  against  the  trigger,  fire,  without  lowering 
or  turning  the  head,  and  remain  in  this  position. 

1608.  Instructors  will  be  careful  to  observe,  when  the  men  fire,  that 
they  aim  at  some  distinct  object,  and  that  the  barrel  be  so  directed 
that  the  line  of  fire,  and  the  line  of  sight  be  in  the  same  vertical  plane. 
They  will  often  cause  the  firing  to  be  executed  on  ground  of  different 
inclinations,  in  order  to  accustom  the  men  to  fire  at  objects  either 
above  or  below  them. 

Load. 

ONE   TIME  AND  ONE  MOTION. 

1609.  Bring  down  the  piece  with  both  hands ;  at  the  same  time  face 
to  the  front  and  take  the  position  of  load^  as  indicated  No.  1594. 
Each  rear  rank  man  will  bring  his  right  foot  by  the  side  of  the  left. 

1610.  The  men  being  in  this  position,  the  instructor  will  cause  the 
loading  to  be  continued  by  the  commands  and  means  prescribed  No. 
1694,  and  following. 

1611.  If,  after  firing,  the  instructor  should  not  wish  the  recmits  to 
reload,  he  will  command : 

Shoulder —  Arms. 

ONE  TIME  AND  ONE  MOTION. 

1612.  Throw  up  the  piece  briskly  with  the  left  hand  and  resume  the 
position  of  shoulder  arms  ;  at  the  same  time  face  to  the  front,  turning 
on  the  left  heel,  and  bring  the  right  heel  on  a  line  with  the  left. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  293 

Manual  of  Arms, 

1613.  To  accustom  the  recruits  to  -vrait  for  the  command  fire,  the 
instructor,  when  they  are  in  the  position  of  aim,  will  command  : 

Recover  —  Arms. 

ONE    TIME    AND   ONE    MOTION. 

1614.  At  the  first  part  of  the  command,  withdraw  the  finger  from 
the  trigger;  at  the  command  arms^  retake  the  position  of  the  third 
motion  of  ready. 

1615.  The  recruits  being  in  ihe  position  of  the  third  motion  of 
ready,  if  the  instructor  should  wish  to  bring  them  to  a  shoulder,  ho 
will  command 

Shoulder — Arms. 

ONE  TIME  AND  ONE  MOTION. 

1616.  At  the  command  shoulder^  place  the  thumb  upon  the  cock, 
the  fore-finger  on  the  trigger,  half-cock,*  and  seize  the  small  of  the 
stock  with  the  right  hand.  At  the  command  arms,  bring  up  the  piece 
briskly  to  the  right  shoulder,  and  retake  the  position  of  shoulder  arms. 

1617.  The  recruits  being  at  shoulder  arms,  when  the  instructor  shall 
wish  to  fix  bayonets,  he  will  command : 

Fix —  Bayonet. 

ONE    TIME    AND   THREE   MOTIONS. 

1618-  First  motion. — Grasp  the  piece,  with  the  left  hand,  at  the 
height  of  the  shoulder;  quit  the  piece  with  the  right  hand,  and 
carry  it  with  the  left  hand  across  the  body,  so  that  the  butt  shall  bo 
to  the  left  of  the  body,  and  within  three  inches  of  the  ground ;  seize 
the  piece,  with  the  right  hand  above  the  left. 

Second  motion, — Let  the  piece  slip  through  the  hands  to  the  ground 
without  shock,  so  that  it  shall  rest  against  the  left  thigh ;  the  barrel 
to  the  front,  inclining  to  tlie  right,  the  rammer  obliquely  to  the  left 
and  rear;  the  muzzle  three  inches  from  the  centre  of  the  breast; 


*  If  the  priming  attachment  is  used,  tear  oflF  the  priming  tape  or  paper  close  to  thd 
orifice  from  whence  it  appears,  and  let  the  hammer  gently  down  upon  the  cone. 
Military.  25* 


294  GENERAL  REGULATIOXS 

Manual  of  Arms. 

quit  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  and  seize  it  again  with  that  hand 
near  the  muzzle ;  and  carry  the  right  hand  to  the  bayonet,  and  seize 
it  by  the  socket  and  shank,  so  that  the  lower  ( now  upper )  end  of  the 
socket  shall  extend  about  an  inch  above  the  heel  of  the  palm. 

Tliird  motion. — Draw  the  bayonet  from  the  scabbard,  and  fix  it  on 
the  extremity  of  the  barrel;  seize  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  tho 
arm  extended,  and  place  the  little  finger  of  the  right  hand  upon  the 
head  of  the  rammer. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

ONE    TIME    AND   THREE    MOTIONS, 

1619,  First  motion. — Raise  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  till  the 
hand  is  as  high  as  the  eye,  the  left  arm  against  the  piece,  and  seize 
the  piece  with  the  right  hand  at  the  small  of  the  stock. 

Second  motion. — Carry  the  piece  vertically  across  the  body,  and 
place  it  against  the  right  shoulder ;  change  the  position  of  the  right 
hand  and  seize  the  swell  of  the  stock,  the  thumb  and  fore-finger 
embracing  the  guard,  the  right  arm  nearly  extended. 

Third  motion. — Drop  briskly  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 

Charge  —  Bayonet. 

ONE  TIME  AND  TWO  MOTIONS. 

1620,  First  motion. — Raise  the  piece  slightly  with  tho  right  hand, 
and  make  a  half  face  to  the  right  on  the  left  heel ;  place  the  hollow 
of  the  right  foot  opposite  to  and  three  inches  from  the  left  heel, 
the  feet  square ;  seize  the  piece  at  the  same  time  with  the  left  hand,  a 
little  above  the  lower  band. 

Second  mx)tion. — Bring  down  the  piece  with  both  hands,  the  barrel 
uppermost,  the  left  elbow  against  the  body;  seize  the  small  of  the 
stock,  at  the  same  time,  with  the  right  hand,  which  will  be  supported 
against  the  hip ;  the  point  of  the  bayonet  as  high  as  the  eye. 

Shoulder  —  Arms. 

ONE  TIME  AND  TWO  MOTIONS. 

1621,  First  motion. — Throw  up  the  piece  briskly  with  the  left  hand 
in  facing  to  the  front ;  place  it  against  the  right  shoulder,  the  rammer 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  295 

Manual  of  Arms. 

to  the  front ;  turn  the  right  hand  so  as  to  embrace  the  guard,  slide 
the  left  hand  to  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  extend  the  right  arm 
nearly  to  its  length,  letting  the  piece  slip  through  the  left  hand. 
Second  motion. — Drop  the  left  hand  smartly  by  the  side. 

Trail  —  Arms. 

ONE  TIME  AND  TWO  MOTIONS. 

1622.  First  motion. — Seize  the  piece  briskly  with  the  left  hand, 
near  the  middle  band,  and  detach  it  slightly  from  the  shoulder  with 
the  right  hand;  loosen  the  grasp  of  the  right  hand,  lower  the  piece 
with  the  left,  reseize  the  piece  with  the  right  hand,  above  the  lower 
band,  the  little  finger  in  rear  of  the  barrel,  the  butt  about  four 
inches  from  the  ground,  the  right  hand  supported  against  the  hip; 
drop  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 

Second  motion. — Incline  the  muzzle  slightly  to  the  front,  the  butt 
to  the  rear  and  about  four  inches  from  the  ground.  The  right  hand, 
supported  at  the  hip,  will  so  hold  the  piece  that  the  rear  rank  men 
may  not  touch  with  their  bayonets  the  men  in  the  front  rank. 

Shoulder  —  Arms. 

1623.  At  the  command  shoulder,  bring  the  piece  perpendicularl}' 
in  the  right  hand,  the  little  finger  in  rear  of  the  barrel ;  at  the  com- 
mand arms,  raise  the  piece  vertically  with  the  right  hand  to  the 
height  of  the  right  breast,  and  opposite  the  shoulder,  the  elbow  close 
to  the  body  ;  seize  the  piece,  with  the  left  hand  below  the  right,  and 
drop  quickly  the  right  hand  to  grasp  the  piece  at  the  swell  of  the 
stock,  the  thumb  and  fore-finger  embracing  the  guard;  press  the 
piece  against  the  shoulder  with  the  left  hand,  the  right  arm  nearly 
straight,  and  drop  the  left  hand  smartly  by  the  side. 

Unfix  —  Bayonet. 

ONE  TIME  AND   THREE   MOTIONS. 

1624.  First  and  second  motions. — The  same  as  the  first  and  second 
motions  of  fix  bayonet,  except  that  the  right  hand  will  be  carried  to 
the  bayonet,  and  will  seize  it  at  the  socket  and  shank,  so  that  the 
lower  end  of  the  socket  may  be  about  an  inch  below  the  heel  of  the 


296  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Manual  of  Arms. 

palm,  and  that  in  wresting  off  the  bayonet  the  thumb  may  be 
extended  on  the  blade.  If  the  bayonet  have  a  clasp,  the  clasp  will 
be  turned  before  positioning  the  hand  to  wrest  oflf  the  bayonet. 

Third  motion. — Wrest  off  the  bayonet,  return  it  to  the  scabbard, 
place  immediately  the  right  little  finger  upon  the  head  of  the  ram- 
mer, lower  the  left  hand  along  the  barrel,  in  extending  the  arm, 
without  depressing  the  shoulder. 

Shoulder  —  Arms. 

ONE  TIME  AND  THREE  MOTIONS. 

1625.  First  motion. — The  same  as  the  first  motion  ttamfix  bayonet 
{  No.  1619 ). 

Second  motion. — The  same  as  the  second  motion  from  fix  bayonet 
(No.  1619). 

Third  motion. — The  same  as  the  third  motion  Irom  fix  bayonet 
(No.  1619). 

Secure  —  Arms. 

ONE   TIME  AND  THREE   MOTIONS, 

1626.  First  motion. — Bring  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  perpen 
dicularly  to  the  front  and  between  the  eyes,  the  barrel  to  the  rear ; 
seize  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  at  the  lower  band  and  raise  it  as 
high  as  the  chin,  and  at  the  same  time  with  the  right  hand  seize  the 
piece  at  the  small  of  the  stock. 

Second  motion. — Turn  the  piece  with  both  hands,  the  barrel  to  the 
front;  bring  it  opposite  the  left  shoulder,  the  butt  against  the  hip, 
the  left  hand  at  the  lower  band,  the  thumb  as  high  as  the  chin  and 
extended  on  the  rammer;  the  piece  erect  and  detached  from  the 
bhoulder,  the  left  fore-arm  against  the  piece. 

Third  motion. — Reverse  the  piece,  pass  it  under  the  left  arm,  the 
left  hand  remaining  at  the  lower  band,  the  thumb  on  the  rammer  to 
prevent  i^  from  sliding  out,  the  littel,  finger  resting  against  tlie  hip, 
the  right  hand  falling  at  the  same  time  by  the  side. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  297 

Manual  of  Arms, 
Shoulder  —  Arms. 

ONE    TIME    AND    THREE    MOTIONS. 

1627.  First  'motion.  —  Raise  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  and  seize 
it  with  the  right  hand  at  the  small  of  the  stock ;  the  piece  erect  and 
detached  from  the  shoulder,  the  butt  against  the  hip,  the  left  fore-arra 
along  the  piece. 

Second  motion. — Carry  the  piece  rertically  to  the  right  shoulder 
with  both  hands,  the  rammer  to  the  front;  change  the  position  of  the 
right  hand  so  as  to  embrace  the  guard  with  the  thumb  and  fore-finger, 
slip  the  left  hand  to  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  the  fingers  extended 
and  joined,  the  right  arm  nearly  straight. 

Third  motion. — Drop  the  left  hand  quickly  by  the  side. 

Right  shoulder  shift  —  Arms. 

ONE  TIME  AND  TWO  MOTIONS. 

1628.  First  motion. — Detach  the  piece  perpendicularly  from  the 
shoulder  with  the  right  hand,  and  seize  it  with  the  left,  so  that  the 
little  finger  of  that  hand  shall  touch  the  lock  plate ;  raise  the  piece 
the  left  hand  at  the  height  of  tite  shoulder  and  four  inches  from  it ; 
place,  at  the  same  time,  the  right  hand  on  the  butt,  the  beak  between 
the  first  two  fingers,  the  other  two  fingers  under  the  butt  plate. 

Second  motion. — Quit  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  raise  and  place 
the  piece  on  the  right  shoulder  with  the  right  hand,  the  lock  plate 
upwards ;  let  fall,  at  the  same  time,  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 

Shoulder.  —  Arms. 

ONE  TIME  AND  TWO  MOTIONS. 

1629.  First  motion. — Raise  the  piece  perpendicularly  by  extending 
the  right  arm  to  its  full  length,  the  rammer  to  the  front ;  at  the  same 
time  seize  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  so  that  the  little  finger  of  that 
hand  shall  touch  the  lock  plate. 

Second  motion. — Quit  the  butt  with  the  right  hand,  which  will 
immediately  embrace  the  guard ;  lower  the  piece  to  the  position  of 
shoulder  arms,  slide  up  the  left  hand  to  the  height  of  the  shoulder 
the  fingers  extended  and  closed.     Drop  the  hft  hand  by  the  side. 


298  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Manual  of  Arms. 

1630.  The  men  being  at  support  arms,  the  instructor  will  sometimes 
cause  pieces  to  be  brought  to  the  right  shoulder.  To  this  eflfect,  ho 
will  command : 

Right  shoulder  shift  —  Arms. 

ONE  TIME  AND  TWO  MOTIONS. 

1631.  First  motion. — Seize  the  piece  with  the  right  hand,  below 
and  near  the  left  fore-arm ;  place  the  left  hand  under  the  butt,  the 
heel  of  the  butt  between  the  first  two  fingers. 

Second  motion. — Turn  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  the  lock  plate 
upwards ;  carry  it  to  the  right  shoulder,  the  left  hand  still  holding  tlie 
butt,  the  muzzle  elevated ;  hold  the  piece  in  this  position  and  place 
the  right  hand  upon  the  butt,  as  is  prescribed  No  1628,  and  let  fall  the 
lefl  hand  by  the  side. 

Support  —  Arms. 

ONE  TIME  AND  TWO  MOTIONS. 

1632.  First  motion.— ThQ  same  as  the  first  motion  of  shoulder 
arms,  No.  1629. 

Second  motion. — Turn  the  piece  with  both  hands,  the  barrel  to  the 
front,  carry  it  opposite  and  against  the  left  shoulder,  slip  the  right 
hand  to  the  small  of  the  stock,  place  the  left  fore-arm  under  the  cock 
and  extended  on  the  breast,  and  let  fall  the  right  hand  by  the  side. 

.4rm«— At  Will. 

ONE  TIME  AND  ONE  MOTION. 

1633.  At  this  command,  carry  the  piece  at  pleasure  on  either 
shoulder,  with  one  or  both  hands,  the  muzzle  elevated. 

Shoulder —  Arms. 

ONE  TIME  AND  ONE  MOTION. 

1634.  At  this  coTimand,  retake  quickly  the  position  of  shoulder 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  299 

Manual  of  Arms. 
INSPECTION    OP    ARMS. 

1635, — The  recruits  being  at  ordered  arms,  and  having  the  bay- 
onet in  the  scabbard,  if  the  instructor  wishes  to  cause  an  inspection 
of  arms,  he  will  command  : 

Inspection  —  Arms. 

ONE  TIME  AND  TWO  MOTIONS. 

1636.  First  motion. — Face  to  the  right  once  and  a  half,  on  the  left 
heel,  carrying  the  right  foot  perpendicularly  to  the  rear  of  the  align- 
ment, about  six  inches  from  and  at  right  angles  with  the  left  foot; 
seize  promptly  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  a  little  above  the  middle 
band;  incline  the  muzzle  to  the  rear  without  displacing  the  heel  of 
the  butt,  the  rammer  turned  towards  the  body ;  carry,  at  the  same 
time,  the  right  hand  to  the  bayonet  and  seize  it,  as  prescribed  in  the 
second  motion  of  fix  bayonet ;  draw  the  bayonet  from  the  scabbard, 
carry  and  fix  it  on  the  muzzle. 

Second  motion. — Seize  next  the  rammer,  and  draw  it  as  has  been 
explained  in  loading,  and  let  it  glide  to  the  bottom  of  the  bore ;  face 
promptly  to  the  front,  seize  the  piece  with  the  right  hand,  and  retake 
the  position  of  ordered  arms. 

1637.  The  inspector  inspects,  in  succession,  the  piece  of  each  man 
in  passing  along  the  front  of  the  rank.  Each,  as  the  inspector 
reaches  him,  raises  smartly  his  piece  with  his  right  hand,  seizes  it 
with  the  left,  between  the  tail  band  and  the  lock  plate,  the  lock  to 
the  front,  the  left  hand  at  the  height  of  the  chin,  the  piece  opposite 
to  the  left  eye ;  the  inspector  takes  it  with  his  right  hand  at  the  han- 
dle, and,  after  inspecting  it,  returns  it  to  the  man,  who  receives  it 
back  with  the  right  hand,  and  replaces  it  in  the  position  of  ordered 
arms.  When  the  inspector  shall  have  passed  him,  each  man  will 
retake  the  position  prescribed  at  the  command  inspection  of  arms, 
return  the  rammer  and  resume  the  position  of  ordered  arms. 

1638.  If,  instead  of  inspection  of  arms,  the  instructor  shall  merely 
wish  to  cause  bayonets  to  be  fixed,  he  will  command : 

Fix  —  Bayonet. 


300  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Manual  of  Arms. 

1639.  Take  the  position  indicated  in  that  motion  of  inspection  of 
arms,  No.  1636,  fix  bayonets  as  has  been  explained,  and  immedi- 
ately resume  the  position  of  ordered  arms. 

1640.  If  it  be  the  wish  of  the  instructor,  after  firing,  to  ascertain 
if  the  pieces  have  been  discharged,  he  will  command : 

Spring  —  Rammers. 

1641.  Put  the  rammer  in  the  barrel,  as  has  been  explained  above, 
and  immediately  retake  the  position  of  ordered  arms. 

1642.  The  instructor,  for  the  purpose  stated,  can  take  the  rammer 
by  the  small  end,  and  spring  it  in  the  barrel,  or  cause  each  recruit  to 
make  it  ring  in  the  barrel. 

1643.  Each  recruit,  after  the  instructor  passes  him,  will  return 
rammer,  and  resume  the  position  of  ordered  arms. 

TO   LOAD   IN   FOUR   TIMES. 

1644.  The  object  of  this  lesson  is  to  prepare  the  recruits  to  load  at 
will,  and  to  cause  them  to  distinguish  the  times  which  require  the 
greatest  regularity  and  attention,  such  as  charge  cartridge,  ram 
cartridge  and  prime.    It  will  be  divided  as  follows : 

1645.  The  first  time  will  be  executed  at  the  end  of  the  command ; 
the  three  others  at  the  commands,  two,  three  and /our.  The  instruc- 
tor will  command : 

1.  Load  in  four  times.  2.  Load.* 

One.  Execute  the  times  to  include  charge  cartridge;  Two.  Exe- 
cute the  times  to  include  ram  cartridge ;  Three.  Execute  the  times  to 
include  prime  ;  Four.  Execute  the  time  of  shoulder  arms. 


♦  If  Iho  pritning  attachment  is  used,  the  command  will  be  load  in  three  timeSf 
and  will  be  executed  as  above  provided,  except  that  at  the  command  three,  the 
time  of  shoulder  arms  will  be  executed  flrom  the  position  of  return  rammer,  and 
the  fourth  command  will  be  omitted. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  301 

Miscellaneous. 
TO    LOAD    AT   WILL. 

1646.  The  instructor  will  next  teach  loading  at  will,  which  will  be 
executed  as  loading  in  four  times,  but  continued,  and  without  rest- 
ing on  either  of  the  times.     He  will  command  : 

1.  Load  at  will.  2.  Load. 

1647.  The  instructor  will  habituate  the  recruits,  by  degrees,  to  load 
with  the  greatest  possible  promptitude,  each  without  regulating  him- 
self by  his  neighbor,  and  above  all  without  waiting  for  him. 

MISCELLANEOUS. 


1648.  In  passing  in  review  in  common  time,  when  there  are  more 
than  two  battalions  to  be  reviewed  together,  the  band  of  the  first 
battalion  will  begin  to  play  at  the  command  to  march,  and  at  the 
same  time  the  field  music  of  the  succeeding  battalions  will  beat  the 
time  of  the  step.  When  the  first  battalion  has  passed  the  reviewing 
officer,  and  its  band  has  ceased  to  play,  the  band  of  the  next  suc- 
ceeding battalion  will  commence  to  play,  and  will  wheel  to  the  left 
out  of  the  column,  and  occupy  the  place  which  the  band  of  the  first 
battalion  has  left,  as  prescribed  in  paragraph  393.  The  field  music 
of  the  battalions  will  continue  in  column,  but  will  successively  cease 
beating  when  the  bands  of  the  respective  battalions  commence  to 
play.  When  the  band  ceases  and  follows  its  battalion,  the  field 
music  of  the  battalion  will  again  resume  the  beat  of  the  step,  and 
the  band  will  pass  to  its  position  at  the  head  of  the  battalion.  The 
bands  and  field  music  of  the  remaining  battalions  will  conform  to 
these  requirements. 

1649.  If  there  be  only  field  music  with  the  battalions,  such  music 
will  wheel  out  of  the  column  and  play  opposite  to  the  reviewing 
officer,  according  to  and  follow  the  directions  for  the  music  in  para- 
graph 393. 

1650.  When  several  battalions  are  to  pass  in  review  in  quick  time, 
after  passing  in  common  time,  the  band  of  the  last  battalion,  after 

Military.  26 


302  GENERAL  REGULATIONS 

Miacellaneoua. 

the  battalion  has  passed  the  reviewing  officer,  will  cease  playing  and 
will  pass  to  the  head  of  the  battalion.  If  there  be  only  field  music 
with  the  last  battalion,  it  will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed  for  the 
band. 

1651.  Inspecting  officers,  while  acting  as  such,  at  inspections,  are 
entitled  to  a  review,  provided  they  are  of  the  rank  of  field  officers. 

1652.  When  the  reviewing  personage  is  junior  to  the  officer  in 
command  of  the  i)arade,  the  review  will  take  place  in  every  particu- 
lar as  prescribed  iti  these  regulations,  exce[)ting  that  the  compliment 
of  officers  and  troops  saluting,  trumpets  sounding,  drums  beating 
and  colors  dropping  will  be  omitted ;  the  band,  however,  will  play 
as  prescribed. 

MANUAL    OF    SWORD    OR    SABRE    FOR    OFFICERS. 
POSITION  OF  THE  SWORD  OR  SABRB,  UNDKR  ARMS, 

Tke  carry. 

1653.  The  gripe  is  in  the  right  hand,  which  will  be  supported 
against  the  right  hip,  the  back  of  the  blade  against  the  shoulder, 

TO'  SALUTE  WITH  THE  SWORD  OR  SABRE. 

Three  times  {or pauses). 

1654.  One.  At  the  distance  of  six  paces  from  the  person  to  be 
saluted,  raise  the  sworrl  or  sabre  perpendicularly,  the  point  up,  the 
flat  of  the  blade  opposite  to  the  right  eye,  the  guard  at  the  lieight  of 
the  shoulder,  the  elbow  supported  on  the  body. 

Two.  Drop  the  p(»int  of  the  sword  or  sabre  by  extending  the  arm, 
so  that  the  right  hand  may  be  brought  to  the  side  of  the  right  thigh, 
and  remain  in  that  position  until  the  pcraon  to  whom  the  salute  is 
rendered  shall  be  passed,  or  .shall  have  passed,  six  paces. 

Three.  Raise  the  sword  or  sabre  smartly,  and  place  the  back  of  tlie 
blade  against  the  right  shoulder. 


FOR  THE  MILITARY  FORCES.  303 

Miscellaneous. 
COLOR  SALUTE, 

1655.  In  the  ranks,  the  color  bearer,  whether  at  a  halt  or  in  march, 
will  always  carry  the  heel  of  the  color-lance  supported  at  the  right 
hip,  the  right  hand  generally  placed  on  the  lance  at  the  height  of  the 
shoulder,  to  hold  it  steady.  When  the  color  has  to  render  honors, 
the  color-bearer  will  salute  as  follows : 

At  the  distance  of  six  paces  slip  the  right  hand  along  the  lance  to 
the  height  of  the  eye ;  lower  the  lance  by  straightening  the  arm  to 
its  full  extent,  the  heel  of  the  lance  remaining  at  the  hip,  and  bring 
back  the  lance  to  the  habitual  position  when  the  person  saluted  shall 
be  passed,  or  shall  have  passed,  six  paces. 

OFFICES    OF    COMMANDS    IN    CITIES,    WHEN    VACATED    BY 
REMOVAL, 

1656.  Officers  having  command  in  any  of  the  cities  of  this  state 
shall  be  deemed  to  have  vacated  their  office  by  removing  from  such 
city,  provided  the  whole  of  the  command  of  any  such  officer  was 
located  in  the  same,  except  as  otherwise  provided  by  law. 


[the  end  op  the  general  regulations  for  the  military  forces 
OF  the  state  of  new-york.] 


INDEX. 


A. 

No.  of  Paragraph. 

ABSENCE:                                                                                                   80  to  85 

Leave  of,  who  may  grant, 80 

Consequence  of,  for  twelve  months  from  command, 80 

Le^ve  of,  when  and  for  how  long  granted  by  commandant  of  brigade,  —  81 

Application  for  leave  of,  in  certain  cases  to  whom  to  be  made, 82 

Leave  of,  consent  of  commandant  of  regiment  to,  of  field  or  company 

officers,  when  necessary 83 

Leave  of,  consent  of  commandant  of  company  to,  of  subalterns,  when 

necessary, 63 

Leave  of,  when  to  be  refused, 84 

"     in  case  of,  of  certain  officers,  who  to  assume  command, 82,  68 

•'      on  detached  duty, 85 

ACCOUNTS: 

Not  audited  unless  items  given,  &c., 707 

Vide  AuDiTOBS. 

ADJUTANT: 

Ecsponsibility  of, .... 10,  11 

Call  of, 255 

"     when  to  be  given  at  dress  parade, 860 

Morning  reports  to  be  consolidated  for  the  information  of  Colonel, 259 ' 

Duties  of,  at  inspection, 830,  836 

"     at  dress  parade, 860  to  867 

•'     at  review,  to  cause  camp  color  to  be  placed, 370 

"           "             "           points  to  be  fixed  for  wheeling, 371 

"           "            position  of,  in  passing, 878 

"           "            at  guard  mounting, 899  to  406 

Detail  of  regiment  for  grand  or  brigade  guards  to  be  verified  by, 408 

Not  to  be  interfered  with  by  officers  inferior  in  rank  to  commandant  of 

regiment, v. - - 607 

Duty  of,  in  presenting  regiment  to  commandant  of  a  review, 512 

"      at  parades  for  instruction, 558 

Details  by,  at  camps, 670 

Military.  26* 


306  INDEX. 

ADJUTANT  (Continued):  No.  of  Para^^rnpK 

Passes  at  camps  may  be  signed  by, 572 

Tent  of,  its  position, 5S5 

Certain  duties  of,  at  camps, 618 

In  column  of  manoeuvre  and  en  route, 751 

Adjutants  of  regiments  chiefs  of  regimental  staffs, 775 

ADJUTANT-GENERAL'S  DEPARTMENT  :                                        766  to  775 

1.  Adjutant-General,  precedence  of,  in  staff, 23 

Is  chief  of  staff  of  Commander-in-Chief, 756 

To  accompany  Commander-in-Chief,  &c-, 757 

Is  medium  of  communication  with  Comraander-ln-Chlef, 758 

Duty  to  make  report  annually, 759 

To  report  commutation,  &c, 760 

To  make  return  of  militia  to  President,  annually, 761 

To  prescribe  annual  course  of  instruction, 762 

"When  to  act  as  principal  instructor, - 762 

Bonds  for  arms,  reports,  returns,  proceeding  of  courts,  Ac,  to  be 

sent  to, 763 

To  prepare  and  distribute  blanks, 764 

To  prepare  and  transmit  commissions  and  note  changes  for  different 

causes  in  roster, 765 

To  preserve  record  of  ordnance,  arms,  &c.,  and  to  whom  issued,...  766 

To  require  proper  sureties  before  filing  bond  for  issue  of  arms, 767 

To  keep  record  of  ordnance,  arms,  &c.,  in  arsenals, 768 

In  certain  cases  to  issue  orders  for  return  of  arms  and  prosecution 

of  bonds, 769 

Duty  upon  reception  of  receipts  provided  for  in  •[  22,  Reg., 770 

2.  Ikbpectoks  or  Division,  are  chiefs  of  division  staff,  and  duties  of; 771 

Act  as  Assistant  Adjutants-General, 771 

To  make  inspections  and  returns, 772 

When  to  act  as  Brigade  Inspectors, 774 

Of  Buiqade,  chiefs  of  brigade  staffs,  and  duties  of, 771 

To  act  as  Assistant  Aijutants-General, 771 

To  make  Inspections  and  returns, 772 

To  make  full  returns  to  Adjutant-Gtneral, 773 

Adjutants  of  Reqimbmtb,  are  chiefii  of  regimental  staffs,  and  duties  of,.  775 

AIDS-DE-CAMP : 

Of  Commander-in-Chief, 23 

Paragraph  applicable  to, T+* 

To  draw  swords  in  columns  of  muncKuvre  and  en  route, 751 

Of  Brigadier-General,  position  of,  at  review, 8SS 

Vide  Staff. 

AMMUNITION : 

Cure  of, 59i  W 

Inspection  of, W 


INDEX.  SOT 

AMMUNITION  (  Continued  )  :  No.  of  Paragraph. 

Damage  or  loss  to,  who  to  pay  for, 60 

Ball  cartridges,  precaution  as  to, 61 

Amount  of,  to  be  issued  to  the  troops, 805 

APPEALS:                                                                                                   694  to  701 

From  elections, 694  to  700 

'•                to  be  in -writing, 694 

To  Commander-in-Chief,  from  elections,  when  made, 695,  696,  698 

When  not  allowed  from  elections, 700 

Appeal  from  proceedings  and  sentence  of  court-martial, 701 

AEM3  AND  ACCOUTEEMENTS : 

Attention  paid  to  cleanliness  of, 49 

In  armories,  how  placed, 50 

Commandants  of  companies  as  to,  duty  of, 51,  52 

Cleaning  of, 52,68,  54 

Issued  to  troops,  how  to  be  kept, 54 

Abms:  When  unloaded,  how  used, 54 

With  Maynard  lock,  how  to  use, 55 

Not  to  be  loaded,  when  on  duty,  without  orders, 56 

When  not  to  be  left  loaded, 56 

Not  to  be  loaded,  on  parade,  without  orders  from  commandant,—  57 

Commandants  to  cause  examination  of,  before  parade, 58 

Statement  of  arms  to  be  kept  in  armories  of  regiments,  Ac., 711 

"            '•            "            "    arsenals, 712 

"          how  subscribed, 713 

Not  to  be  loaned  by  officers, 715 

Applications  for,  when  and  how  made, 796 

Loaned  to  other  than  militia,  when  to  be  returned, 797 

AEM8  OF  THE  STATE  OF  NEW-YOEK: 

How  marked  on  drums, 65 

AEMOEIES:  710  to    716 

AEEESTS  AND  CONFINEMENTS:                                                       98  to  110 

Power  of  officers  as  to, 98 

Definition  of  arrest, 99 

How  made,  formal, 100 

When  warranted,  forcible, 101 

Powers  of  commanding  officer  as  to, 102 

When  censure  in  place  of, lOS 

Limits,  when  under, 104 

When  resorted  to,  close,- 104 

Of  medical  officers, 106 

Eeport  of,  to  be  made, 106 

When  prisoners  under,  to  be  released, 107 


308  INDEX. 

ARRESTS  AND  CONFINEMENTS  (  Continued  )  :  ko.  of  Paragraph. 

Position  of  officers  under  arrest  on  a  march, 108 

What  privileges  suspended  by, 109 

Release  of  individuals  under, 110 

ARSENALS  AND  ARMORIES:  710  to  716 

Statement  of  arms  to  be  kept  In. 711  to  713 

Ke  pers  of,  and  officers,  forbid  to  loan  arms,  &c., 714,  715 

"        to  observe  these  regulations, 716 

ARTILLERY : 

Drums,  how  marked, 65 

Knapsacks,  how  marked, 62,  63 

Field  pieces,  care  of, 70,  71 

Composition  of  section  of  light  artillery, 86 

Light,  how  to  encamp, 699  to  601 

Two  pieces,  when  issued  to  section  of  light  artillery, 807 

Campof, 1067  to  1069 

AUDITORS:  703  to  709 

Boards  of,  composition  of, 703 

"         books  of,  to  be  open  to  inspection,  Ac, 704 

"         notice  of  meeting  of, 705 

•'         warrants  issued  by, 706 

No  account  audited  unless  items  given,  &c., 707 

President  of  board  of,  to  transmit  statement  to  Adjutant-General, 708 

Commandants  of  brigade  districts  to  tran.-*mit  reports  to  Adjutant^Qeneral,  709 

B. 
BAGGAGE  TRAINS : 

Care  and  conduct  of, 1298to  1800 

BANDS : 

At  reviews, 1648  to  1653 

Vide  Reviews,  Parade,  Music 

BARRACKS  AND  QUARTERS: 

Duty  of  company  officers  in, 73 

BATTLES: 

Order  of  troops  In, 499 

Dispositions  for,  *c, 1288  to  1264 

BIVOUACS  :  1070  to  1077 

BLANK  FORMS : 

Form  of  guard  report,  vide  p.  78. 

BREVET: 

Commisalous, 17 


INDEX.  309 

BEIGADE  INSPECTORS  :  No.  of  Paragraph. 

Vide  Adjutant-General's  Department,  Inspectors,  Instruction, 
Returns  and  Reports. 

c. 

CAMPS : 

For  Instruction: 661  to    667 

"  "  all  encampments, 561 

♦•  "  site  of, 562 

"  "  preparation  of, 568  to    566 

*'  "  baggage  train  of, 567 

«  «  pitching  tents  at, 568,    569 

•*  "  how  details  made  at, 570 

"  "  regulations  of, 571  to    5S1 

«*  »♦  infantry, 582  to    592 

•*  »»  cavalry, 593  to    598 

«  *♦  artillery, 599  to    601 

«  •*  officers  and  duties  of  the  day  at, 602  to    617 

«  •*  officers  of  guards  at, 618  to    621 

»  "  camp  guards  at, 622  to    654 

"  "  details  for  duty  at, 655  to    667 

«  «  this  article  how  far  applicable  to  garrisons, 667 

,"  "  rosters  to  be  kept  at, 611 

"  «  order  of  troops  at, 499 

«  "  notice  of,  to  be  given  commandant  of  division, 738 

«  ««  Commander-in-Chief  may  order 27 

In  war  service  : 1028  to  1069 

"  "        ofinfantry, 1045  to  1053 

«  «        of  cavalry, 1054  to  1066 

«  «       ofartiUery, 1067  to  1069 

CAMP  AND  GARRISON :  239  to  259 

Duties  in, 239,  259 

Hours  of  service,  roll  calls  and  signals, 240  to  257 

Signals  in, 255 

CAPTAINS : 

Of  companies,  duties  of, 89,40,47,49,50,  52 

Responsible  for  accurate  rolls  of  companies, 40 

Vacancy  in  office  of, 41 

Duties  of,  at  inspection, 886,  887,840,  841 

"     atmusters, 851,  852 

"     at  dress  parade, 860 

CANTONMENTS  :  1078  to  1083 

CARDS : 

Prohibited, 575 


310  INDEX. 

CAVALEY  :                                                                                                                   Ko.  of  Parngrapb. 
Campo^ 1054  to  1066 

CERTIFICATE : 

Of  service  or  exemption, 681  to  6S3 

CIVIL  AUTHORITIES: 

fiubordlnation  to, 5,  6 

Civil  oflflcer  with  proces*, 6 

CHAPLAINS :                                                                                            89  to  92 

Rank  of, 89 

Duties  of, 90 

General  provisions, 91,  92 

COLORS  : 

Reception  of, 517 

Of  artillery  regiments, 713 

Of  infantry  and  rifle  regiments, 719 

Camp, 720 

Color  salute, 1655 

Vide  Standabds  and  Guidons  of  Mounted  Regiments. 

COMMAND : 

Vide  Rank  and  Command,  Succession  in  Command. 

COMMANDER-IN-CHIEF : 

Supervisory  duties  of^ 27 

May  order  encampments,  &c., _.  27 

Staff  of, 28 

To  order  course  of  military  instruction, 628,  624 

COMMANDING  OFFICERS : 

For  what  responsible, 29 

May  require  reports  from  subordinates, C76 

Vide  General  Offioebs. 

COMMISSION: 

Staff,  no  command, 16 

COMMISSART-GKNERAL'S  DEPARTMENT:                                    789  to  807 

Commissary-General,  precedence  of,  In  staff, 28 

Duties  of, 787 

Charged  with  preservation,  issue,  Ac,  of  arms,  &c., 7S8 

Duty  to  issue  anna,  Ac,  and  to  make  monthly  reports  of  all  issues,.  7S9 

To  take  receipts  for  arms,  &c.,  issued, 790 

Wlien  to  transmit  to  Commander-in-Chief  duplicates  of  accounts 

audited  by  Comptroller, 791 

To  transmit  to  Commandor-in-Chief  statements  of  sales  of  old  arms, 

Ac-,  ten  days  after  sale, T91 


INDEX.  311 

COMMISSABY-GENERAL'S  DEPARTMENT  (  Continued  )  :      No.  of  Paragrapi,. 

Duty,  in  certain  cases,  to  prosecute  bonds  for  arms,. 792 

May  employ  counsel  to  prosecute,  and  may,  in  certain  cases,  com- 
promise suit,  &c., T93 

To  take  measures  to  recover  possession  or  value  of  arms  when  no 

bonds  given, 794 

When  to  issue  arms  to  other  than  militia, _ 795 

Applications  for  arms  from  other  than  militia,  made  to  Commander- 
in-Chief,  what  to  specify,  &c., 796 

Arms,  &c.,  issued  to  other  than  militia,  when  to  be  returned,  &c.,—  797 

To  keep  roster  of  officers  for  Quartermaster's  department,  &c., 793 

To  keep  roster  of  commandants  of  divisions,  brigades,  regiments, 

companies,  and  to  note  arms  issued  to  them, 799 

To  require  renewal  of  bond  upon  change  in  command, 800 

To  require  renewal  of  bond,  when,  Ac, 801 

May  require  officers  to  whom  arms  issued  to  report, 802 

May  designate  places  where  tents  shall  be  delivered, 803 

In  case  of  invasion,  when  and  how  to  issue  arms, 8C4 

To  issue  ammunition  under  certain  limitations,  .* 805 

To  see  that  no  issue  or  loan  is  made,  except  as  provided, 806 

COMPANIES : 

Captains  of,  general  remarks, 89 

"           duties  of, 89,40,47,49,50,  52 

"           requisites  in, 40 

"           vacancy  in  office  of, 41 

Duty  of  lieutenants  of, 41,,  42 

Election  of  non-commissioned  officers  of,.. 45 

Officers  of,  to  inspect  the  kitchens, 73 

Commandants  of,  to  make  reports,  «fec., 669,  6T1 

CONTPwIBUTIONS : 

In  money  or  kind,  may  be  levied, 1021 

CONVOYS  AND  THEIK  ESCORTS  : 

Formation  and  conduct  of,  &c., 1263  to  1292 

CORRESPONDENCE : 

Vide  Orders  and  Correspondence. 

COURTS  MARTIAL:                                                                                  111  to  231 

Assembled  by  order  and  when. Ill  to  118 

Order  and  charges  to  be  served  on  accused, 112  to  113 

President  of, 114 

Challenges  and  causes  of  challenge, 115,  116, 125  to  129 

Judge-Advocate,  duties  of, 117  to  119, 122  to  124,  129 

"             "         tobesworn, 180,  135 

How  opened, 131 


312  INDEX. 

COURTS  M AllTIAL  (  Continued  )  :  Ko.  of  Paragraph. 

Marshal,  how  appointed, 120 

Applications  to  put  off,  182 

To  sit  with  open  doors, 138 

Not  to  be  dissolved, IW 

Charges  and  specifications,  by  whom  made, 186  to  142 

"        what  to  state,  &c  , 148,144,  151 

Jurisdiction  of,  over  what  offences, 145  to  147 

"  limitation  of, 148,  149 

Pleas  of  accused  to  charge, 150  to  159 

Pr i V  ilege  of  accused  to  make  statement  of  his  case, 1 60 

Witnesses,  their  examination,  «fec., 161  to  175 

Evidence,  how  and  what  received, 178,179,  183 

Laws  and  regulations  need  not  be  proved, ISO 

Defence, ISl,  182,  184 

Eights  of  Judge-Advocate  and  accused  when  case  closed, 185,  186 

Accuser,  when  not  an  officer,- 1S7 

Address  of  accused, 1S8 

Court  not  to  be  addressed  by  counsel, 189 

Finding  of  the  court,  circumstances  to  be  considered,  Ac,  190  to  194,  198  to  201 

Question  of  guilt  or  innocence,  how  put, 196 

Conviction  and  acquittal, 197 

How  sentence  proposed, 202 

Sentence  and  punishments, 208  to  216 

"        to  be  kept  secret, 216 

♦'        when  to  be  carried  into  effect, 217 

Eeturn  of  proceedings, 217,  218 

Kevision, 219  to  221 

Record  of  proceedings, 222 

Approval  of  proceedings  and  sentence,  and  transmission  to  Adjutant- 
General,  228,  224 

Appeal, 225,  22S  to  280 

Collection  of  fine  imposed  by, 226 

Notice  of  sentence,  how  communicated  to  person  tried, 227 

Proceedings  of  courts  of  inquiry  to  be  transmitted  to  Adjutant-Ooneral,..  231 

Rules  applicable  to  regimental  and  certain  brigade  courts-martial,.  282  to  233 
Manner  of  sitting  at,  vide  p.  153. 

Form  of  recording  proceedings  of, 887 

Allowance  to  officers  attending, 883,  889 


DEFENCE  OF  FORTIFIED  PLACES : 

Instructions  for  the,  1859  to  1870 

DEPOTS :  1027 


INDEX.  313 

DETACHMENT  :  No.  of  Paragraph. 

What  is, 14 

See 1179  to  1185 

DETAILS : 

At  camps  for  instruction, 563,  576 

"                 "          officers  of  the  day,  detailed  at, 602  to  617 

"                 "               *'      of  guards  detailed  at, 618  to  621 

"                 "           for  duty,  classified,  &c, 655  to  657 

DISABILITY  AND  EXPULSIONS  :                                                        77  to  79 

By  disease  or  iuflrmity, 77 

"                 "        certificate  of  surgeon  to  commandant,  of, 77 

"                 "        discharge  because  of, 77 

Expulsion  for  violation  of  company  by-laws, 78 

"        from  companies  to  be  reported, 79 

DISCHARGES :                                                                                          95  to  97 

When  granted, 95 

Ofcommissionedofflcers,  who  may  grant, 96 

Certificates  of, 97 

Of  non-commissioned  oflBcers,  musicians  and  privates,  who  made  by, 686 

DISCIPLINE: 

Military, 1,  2,  3 

DISPATCHES : 

To  whom  intrusted, 1087 

DIVISION  INSPECTOR: 

Vide  Adjutant-Gbnbbal's  Depabtmbht,  Inspectors,  Instkcotion, 
Rbtorns  and  Reports. 

DRESS  PARADE :                                                                                   858  to  869 

Daily, 858,  869 

Signal  for, 359 

Forming, 860 

Music  at, 861 

Commands  at, 362  to  867 

Presence  of  officers  and  men  at, 868 

Posting  music  at, 614 

DRUMS : 

How  marked  and  painted, 65 

DRUM  MAJORS : 

Rank  of, 88 

DUTIES: 

Of  the  soldier, 4 

Oftheiay, 602  to  61T 

Active  and  sedentary, 747,  743 

Military.  27 


314  INDEX. 

**•  5o.  of  Paragnph. 

ELECTIONS:                                                                                            689 to  698 

Not  to  be  held  on,  Ae., 6S9 

Arms  not  to  be  worn  at, 690 

Eeturna  for  commissions,  made  to  Adjutant-General, 691 

Of  ineligible  person,  not  to  bo  approved, 693 

Qualifications  for  eligibility  to  oflSce, 693 

Appcalsfrom, 694  to  700 

ENCAMPMENTS  : 

Vide  Camps  for  iNSTRticrnoK. 

ENGINEER  DEPARTMENT : 

Precedence  of  Engineer-in-Chief  in  staff, 28 

Composition  of, 808 

Duties  of, 809 

Appointments  in,  from  whom  made, 810 

Engineer  laying  out  camp  to  malie  plans,  Ac, 811 

Sappers  and  miners,  under  whose  direction, 812 

Officers  and  men  of,  what  required  to  do, 813 

Superior  oflScer,  from  whom  to  receive  orders, 814 

Duty  of  officer  of,  superintending  work, 815 

Officer  of,  with  force  in  field,  to  make  report, 816 

Chief  of,  or  superior  officer,  may  require  reports, 81T 

Orders  for  engineers,  how  transmitted, 818 

Officers  and  men  of,  to  be  instructed, 819 

Superior  officer  of,  in  brigade  and  regiments,  responsible  for  instruction,.  819 

Men  of,  tobo  selected  with  reference  to  intelligence,  &c., 820 

Tools  and  implements  of  sappers  and  miners,  &c., 821 

Engineer-in-Chief  to  make  report, 829 

"                "     upon  vacating  office, 822 

Position  of  Engineers  at  parades, 502  to  513 

"                  "         in  street  firing, 945  to  947 

ENGINEERS  : 

Vide  Enoinkbb  Departmbitt. 

ESCORTS: 

Of  honor, ...~........ 293  to  298 

Funeral, 801  to  814 

EXEMPTIONS: 

Vide  Oroanisatioit,  Eliotion. 

EXPULSIONS : 

Vide  Dmabilitt  and  Expulsions. 


INDEX.  315 

*•  No. of  Paragraph. 

FIRE: 

"When  Are  breaks  out, - 434 

FLAGS : 

National, 717 

Vide  Colors. 

FLAG  OF  TRUCE: 

FORMS: 

Of  safeguards, 1812 

FORMS  OF  PARADE: 

Parades  of  ceremony, SSft 

Officers  to  have  swords  drawn, 857 

Dress  parade, 858  to  369 

"            officers  to  attend, 3t>3 

"            not  to  be  dispensed  with, 809 

FURLOUGHS:                                                                                            86  to  S3 

Who  may  grant, S6 

Maybe  prohibited,' ■. S6 

Soldiers  on,  not  to  take  arms,  Ssc, S7 

Consequence  of  absence  beyond, S3 

Form  ofi  vide  p.  17. 

FURNITURE : 

Mess,  of  soldiers, _ 74 


G. 

GENERAL  OFFICERS  :                                                                              724  to  738 

In  command  of  divisions  and  brigades, 724 

What  required  of, 725  to  729 

Brigadier-generals  disbanding  companies  to  report  to  Adjutant-General,-  730 
Commandants  of  brigades  to  cause  inspection,  &c.,  before  approving 

organization  of  companies, 781 

In  command,  to  transmit  copies  of  general  orders  to  Adjutant-General, ..  733 

Notice  of  encampments,  «fec.,  to  whom  and  how  given, 733 

GENERAL  POLICE: 

Composition  of,  &c., 1301  to  1307 

GRADATION : 

Vide  Pbkcedence. 

GUARD  MOUNTING:                                                                                398  to  421 

Relief  of  guards, 39S 

Form  of, 393  to  421 


316  INDEX. 

Ko.  or  Paracrftph 

GUARDS:                                                                                                        422  to  454 

Color,  at  inspections,.... - 830,  885 

"      at  reviews, 8T2,  8T4 

To  be  relieved  every  twenty-four  hours, 898 

Sentinels  to  be  relieved  every  two  hours, 422 

Relief  to  be  inspected, 428 

Countersign, 424 

Parole, 428 

Grand,  and  other  outposts, 1182  to  1173 

GUIDONS: 

Of  mounted  regiments, 722 

Pike  pole  or  staff  of, 728 

H. 
HAVERSACKS : 

How  marked  and  worn, 64 

HONORS: 

To  bo  paid  by  the  troops, 260  to  281 

Funeral, 299  to  825 

HOSPITALS : 

Vide  Mkdioal  DEPARTMKirr. 

L 
INFANTRY : 

Camp  of, 1046  to  1068 

INSPECTIONS:                                                                                         826  to  847 

Of  thetrwjps, 826  to  84T 

*•           **      preceded  by  review, 826 

"           **      periodical, 827 

Visits  by  commanding,  company  and  medical  officers, 833 

Form  of, 829  to  843 

Of  hospital,  quarters,  &c., 848  to  846 

Of  cavalry  and  artillery, 847 

Posting  music  at, 518 

Generally, 776  to  778 

INSPECTOR-GENERAL:                                                                         779  to  786 

Precedence  of,  in  staff, . 19 

Duty  to  visit  regimental  districts, 779 

"      Inspect  arsenals,  Ac, 779 

*•      attend  to  organizations, 779 

Commandants  of  regiments  to  ftirnlsh  information  to, 780 

To  report  property  missing,  injured,  &c., 780 


INDEX.  317 

INSPECTOE-GENERAL  (  Continued  )  :  No.  of  Paragraph. 

Duty  to  inspect  camp  equipage,  and  report, 781 

In  annual  report,  to  state  what, 782 

To,  will  be  referred  matters  to  be  examined  at  a  distance, 783 

To  report  upon  qualifications  of  persons  appointed, 783 

"              "     organization  of  companies, 7S3 

May  require  Division  and  Brigade  Inspectors  to  report  to  him, 7S4 

To  cause  troops  to  be  exercised,  and  to  give  instructions,  &c., 7S5 

To  examine  books,  accounts  and  warrants  of  boards  of  auditors,  and  to 

report  thereon, 786 

INSPECTORS:                                                                                         771  to  775 

Of  division,  chiefs  division  staflfe,  and  duties  of, 771 

"         act  as  Assistant  Adjutants-General, 771 

"         to  make  inspections  and  returns, 772 

"         when  to  act  as  Brigade  Inspectors, 774 

Of  brigade,  chiefs  of  brigade  staffs,  and  duties  of, 771 

"         to  act  as  Assistant  Adjutants-General, 771 

"         to  make  inspections  and  returns, 772 

"         to  make  full  returns  to  Adjutant-General, 778 

Division  and  Brigade,  to  report  to  Inspector-General,  when, 784 

Inspecting  officers  when  entitled  to  review, 1651,  1652 

Vide  Adjutant-General's  Department,  Instruction,  Eetcrns  and 
Reports. 

INSTRUCTION:                                                                                          521  to  560 

What  manoeuvres  and  Forms  of  parade  prohibited, 521 

Officers  responsible  for, 522 

Course  of  military,  to  be  ordered  by  Commander-in-Chief, 623  to  526 

Report  of,  to  be  made  by  commandant  of  regiment, 527 

«              "                        ♦*                  brigade, 527 

**              "                       *•                  division, 528 

•*      blanks,  &C.,  to  be  furnished  for, 529 

"      duty  of  Adjutant-General  with  regard  to, 530 

Orders  for,  when  transmitted, 531 

"        to  be  sent  Brigade  Inspector, 582 

Duties  of  commandants  to  whom  orders  for,  are  sent, 583 

Commandant  of  division  to  call  together  officers  of  division  for, 534 

"             brigade             "                    "           brigade    " 585 

"             regiment          "                    "           regiment" 536 

What  may  be  required  of  officers  at  such  meetings  for, 537 

Principal  instructors, 538  to  541 

Substituted  instructors, 539  to  545 

Duties  of  instructor  to  explain,  &c., 544,  545 

Movements  introduced  to  be  executed  slowly,  «&c., 546 

Course  of,  at  encampments,  &c.,  to  be  announced  in  orders, 547 

Officer  ordering  meetings  for,  may  designate  instructors, 54S 

Military,  27* 


318  INDEX. 

INSTRUCTION  (  Continued  ) :  Ko.  of  P«n«n«pii. 

Sappers  and  miners,  how  instructed,  kc, 549 

Staflf  officers  in  what  Instructed,  &c., 549 

Markers  to  be  selected  and  Instructed  by  Lieutenant-Colonel, 660 

Duties  of  Brigade  Inspectors  with  regard  to, 551  to  656 

In  correcting  errors,  care  will  be  taken,  &c., 556 

To  facilitate, 557  to  560 

INTERNAL  ECONOMr  OF  COMPANIES:                                           47  to  76 
Vide  Ammunition,  Armband  Accoctrkmentb,  Captains  ofCompahiis. 

ISSUES : 

How  made,  «kc., 1091 

J. 

JUDGE  ADVOCATE-GENERAL'S  DEPARTMENT :           828  to  .  S4l 

Precedence  of  Judge  Advocate-General  in  staff, 29 

Judge  Advocate,  duties  of, 823 

Who  should  be  appointed, . ..  823 

Duty  of,  when  receives  commission, 824 

To  direct  prosecutions,  «fcc., 825 

To  furnish  accused  with  copy  charges,  Ac., 826 

To  correct  and  arrange  testimony,  kc, 827 

To  counsel  court, 823 

To  admonish  accused,  Ac., 829 

As  law  officer  of  court,  not  to  Intimate  opinion  of; 880 

To  apply  evidence, 881 

To  have  preparation,  &c.,  of  papers, 882 

To  prepare  and  correct  charges  and  specifications, 888 

To  keep  record  of  proceedings  of  court, 834 

To  make  copy  of  proceedings  each  day  of  court, 835 

To  whom  to  transmit  record, -  886 

Form  of  recording  proceedings  of  court-martial,  Ac-, -—  887 

Bills  for  attending  courts-martial  to  be  made  out  and  forwarded  by,  888 

Charges  to  be  allowed  by,  for  time, .-  889 

Division  and  Brigade,  to  make  annual  report, ..  ..  840 

General  to  make  report, -  841 

L. 

LEAVE  ^F  ABSENCE : 
Vide  AusKKOB. 

LIEUTENANTS : 

Duty  of, 89,41,  42 

Vide  Offioers. 

LIQUORS : 

Bale  of,  prohibited, 6»5 


INDEX.  319 

M.  No.  of  Paragraph. 

MAIN  BODY: 

What  is, 15 

MANUAL  OF  AEMS : 

Instruction  to  infantry,  for  arms  with  percussion  caps, 1557  to  1567 

For  light  infantry,  when  long'or  rifle  barrel  musket  is  used, 1568  to  1647 

MANUAL  OF  SWOED  OR  SABRE  : 

For  officers, 1653,  1654 

MARCHES : 

Order  of,  &c., 1207  to  1237 

MEDICAL  DEPARTMENT :                                                                      842  to  858 

Precedence  of  Surgeon-General  in  staff, 28 

Officers  of,  to  be  skilled  in  their  profession, 842 

Subgeon-General,  charged  with  administrative  details  and  oversight  of,  843 

May  require  reports  from  officers  of, 844 

Will  make  reports  to  Commander-in-Chief  when  necessary  or  re- 
quired,   845 

Senior  medical  officer  on  duty  to  be  Medical  Director, 846 

"            «          M         «        to  select  site  for  hospital, 847 

Medical  Director  to  inspect  hospital, 848 

"           "       officers  to  assist, 849 

"           "       surgeons  of  regiments  to  obey,  responsibility,  &c., 850 

Orderly  sergeants  to  make  morning  reports  of  sick, 851 

Surgeon  to  report  cases  of  feigned  sickness,  &c.,- 852 

"       to  be  at  all  times  within  call, 853 

♦*       assistant,  to  accompany,  and  duties, 854 

•*       commanding  officer  may  appoint,  in  absence  of  military, 855 

"                 "              "       may  direct  removal  of  sick, 856 

«       shall  attend,  when, 857 

"       certificate  of  private,  shall  not  excuse  absence, 858 

MILITARY  SECRETARY: 

Ranko^ 28 

MUSIC  : 

At  ftmerals, 816  to  817 

Field,  at  inspections, 831,  835 

"          dress  parade, 3fi0,  361 

«           reviews, 872,874,876,878,881,884,386,  393 

"           guard  mounting, 403,406,  408 

"      in  route  marches, 511 

"      how  posted  on  different  occasions, 518  to  619 

"      in  street  firing, 945  to  947 


320  INDEX. 

MUSTER  ROLLS  :  No.  of  ParagrapK 

How  made, 854 

Copy  to  be  sent  to  Adjutant-General, 855 

MUSTERS:                                                                                               848  to  355 

Will  be  made  by  inspecting  officer, 84S 

Inspecting  officer  may  be  assisted, » 849 

Preceded  by  inspection, 850 

When  preceded  by  review, 850 

Form  of, 851,  852 

Mustering  officer  to  visit  guard  and  hospital, 853 

N. 

NON-COMMISSIONED  OFFICEKS : 

General  observations  on, - 43 

Neglect  of  duty  by, M 

Election  of, 45 

Duty  of,  on  parades  or  in  camp, 46 

To  be  called  together  for  instruction  twice  a  year, 536 

What  may  be  required  of  them  at  such  meetings, 687 

In  correcting  errors,  Ac,  of,  their  authority  not  to  be  impaired, 656 

To  salute  officers, 279,  281 

0. 
OFFICE  : 

No  person  to  be  elected  to,  not  created  by  law, 6S4 

Effect  of  person  holding,  accepting  another, 6SS 

Commandants  of  brigade  not  to  approve  election  to,  of  ineligible  person,.  692 

Qualifications  of  eligibility  to, 693 

OFFICES  VACATED  BY  REMOVAL: 

When  and  how, 702 

See 1656 

OFFICERS : 

Precedence  and  gradation  of, 7  to  9 

Responsibility  of, 11,  12 

Rank  and  command  of, 12  to  «0 

Succession  in  command  of, 21  to  28 

Resignation  of, 24  to  26 

Commanding, 29 

To  return  salutes, 278,280,  281 

Commissions  of,  when  vacated  by  removal, 703 

Not  to  loan  arms  belonging  to  their  commands, 715 

General,  724to  788 


INDEX.  321 

OFFICERS  (  Continued  )  :  No.  of  Paragrarh. 

Staff,  to  draw  swords  and  salute  at  review, 749 

To  salute  with  sword  or  sabre, 1654 

Haying  commands  in  cities,  when  deemed  to  have  vacated  office, 1656 

OFFICERS  OF  THE  DAT: 

To  report  for  orders  to  commanding  oflacer, 426 

To  see  that  officer  of  guard  has  countersign,  &c., 427 

To  visit  guards  day  and  night, 423 

To  make  remarks  on  guard  report, 429 

And  duties  of  the  day, 602  to  617 

Charged  with  order  and  cleanliness  of  camp,  Ac, 610 

OFFICERS  OF  THE  GUARD  :                                                              618  to  G21 

How  detailed, 618 

Duties  of, 619  to  621 

Tide  Guards,  Camp  Guards,  Camps. 

ORDERLIES  :                                                                                         1022  to  1026 

ORDERS  AND  CORRESPONDENCE  :                                                 455  to  483 

Enumeration  of  orders, 455,  456 

General, 457 

Special, 458 

To  be  read  by  officer,  Ac, 459 

Form  of, 460,  461 

How  addressed  and  transmitted, 462  to  467 

Officers  to  acknowledge  receipt  of, 467 

Commanding  officers  to  arrange  for  opening,  &c., 468 

A  file  of,  to  be  kept,  &c., 469 

Not  received  in  regular  succession  to  be  reported, 470 

Orderly  hours, 471 

On  marches,  how  sent,  &c., 472 

To  make  tour,  Ac, 473 

Copies  of,  to  be  sent  to, 474 

"Written  communications  by  commander,  how  made, 475 

Official  communications,  how  signed, 476 

•*                  "              how  addressed  and  transmitted, 477 

"                  "              from  commandants  of  divisions,  &c.,  made  to,..  478 

•*                  "              from  officers  of  regiments,  sent  to, 479 

•*                  "              transmitting  rolls  and  returns, 480 

"                  "              certain,  how  treated, 481  to  4S3 

In  the  field, 1086 

ORDER  BOOKS  : 

What  to  be  entered  in, 484  to  486 


322  INDEX 

No.  of  Pamgrttph. 

ORGANIZATION:                                                                                      675  to  6S8 

Member  of  one  company  not  to  join  another, 677 

"                 "                  "       parade  with  another, 67S 

Person  not  citizen  cannot  parade  or  drill, 679 

Names  of  persons  prohibited  by  law,  &c.,  from  joinlnjj  companies,  &C.,  to 

be  stricken  from  rolls, CSO 

Certiflrate  of  service  not  issued  to  hoaorary  member, 6S1 

Who  considered  member  of, 6S3 

Certificate  of  service  not  to  be  issued  to  certain  persona, 083 

No  election  to  office  not  created  by  law, 6S4 

Transfers  from  one  company  to  another, 6S3 

Discharfes  of  non-commissioned  officers,  Ac, 6S6 

Transfers  of  companies  and  regiments, &S7 

Of  an  army  in  the  field, 1002  to  1020 

P. 

PAEADE:                                                                                                499  to  520 

Forms  of, 856  to  869 

Order  of  troops  at, 499 

"      riflemen  at, 500  to  504 

•*      infantry  at, 600 

"      artillery  at, 601  to  608 

"      sappers  and  miners  at, 602 

•*      fiank  companies  not  doing  duty  as  battalion  companies,  Ac,  605,  606 

CJommanding  officer  may  make  such  disposition,  «fec., 606 

Officers  inferior  to  commander  not  to  interfere  with  Acyutant, 607 

«      ordering,  Ac, 60S 

Companies  to  be  equalized, - --  609 

When  may  be  ordered, - 610 

Position  of  music  at, 511,61810  619 

Battalion  in  line  for  review, 612 

Posting  pioneers  and  engineers, 618  to  619 

•*      colors  and  standards, 618,616,  617 

Signals  and  calls, 620 

Notice  of  annual,  to  be  given  commandant  of  division, 733 

PARTISANS  AND  FLANKERS  :                                                         1194  to  1206 

PAYMASTER'S  DEPARTMENT  :                                                               878,  874 

Precedence  of  Paymaster-General  In  staff, 23 

"When  officers  of,  to  observe  Regulations  of  U.S., 878 

Officers  of,  may  be  required  to  do  duty  In  Quartermaster's  department,  Jbc.,  S74 

PIONEERS  : 

At  inspection, 881 

At  dress  parades, 860 


INDEX.  823 

PIONEERS  (  Continued  ) :  No.  of  Paragraph 

At  reviews, 372,  3T8 

Posting,  directions  for, 513,  519 

At  street  flringa, 945,  946 

POLICE : 

Guard, 1103  to  1122 

POSTS : 

Intrenched, 1IT3  to  1178 

PRECEDENCE  AND  GRADATION :                                                         7  to  9 

Of  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers, T 

Of  commissions  same  grade  and  date, 8 

Question  of,  how  settled, - 9 

PRISONERS  OF  WAR : 

Return  of,  &c^ 1265  to  126T 

Q. 

QUARTERS : 

Head, 10S4 

QUARTERMASTER'S  DEPARTMENT  :                                                 859  to  872 

Precedence  of  Quartermaster-General  in  staff, 23 

Objects  of, 859 

At  encampments,  will  have  charge  of  what, 860 

Quartermaster-General  head  of, 861 

Officers  of,  to  act  under  directions  of  Commissary-General, 862 

"         subject  to  orders  of  commandants,  &c., 8G2 

"         while  serving  with  troops,  who  to  obey, 863 

Regimental  Quartermasters,  certain  duties  of, 864 

Certain  expenses  of,  to  be  paid  by  regiments, 865 

Quartermaster,  moneys  to  be  paid  over  by, 865 

**             regimental,  division  and  brigade,  to  receive  tents,  Ac.,  —  866 

•*             to  examine,  repair,  &c.,  tents,  &c., 867 

**  regimental,  annually,   to  inspect   armories  and  report 

thereon  to  Commissary-General, 868 

"  commandant  of  regiment  may  temporarily  fill  vacancy  in 

office  of, 869 

What  sergeant,  and  when,  to  be  sub-quartermaster  sergean t, 870 

Quartermaster  sergeant  at  camps  of  instruction, T.  871 

"  "       and  sub-quartermaster  sergeant  to  be  instructed 

by  Quartermaster, 872 

R. 

RANK  AND  COMMAND  :                                                                          12  to  20 

When  several  corps  are  together, 12 

Command  of  post,  &c.,  must  be  regularly  relieved, 18 


324  INDEX. 

BANK  AND  COMMAND  (  Continued  )  :  No,  of  Paragraph. 

Sickness  of  officer  commanding  post,  Ac., 13 

Command  of  detachment, 14 

Staff  and  brevet  commission, 16,  17 

Absence  from  command  provided  for, 18,  19 

Command  in  camp  and  field, 20 

Officer  temporarily  in  command, ^ 20 

Vide  Succession  in  Command. 

KECONNOISSANCES :                                                                           1186  to  1198 

REGIMENTS  : 

Definition  of, 30 

Duties  of  commanders  of, 81,  82 

Field  officers,  Ac,  to  take  command  of  parade, 82 

Order  of  companies  in, 88 

«                    "         light  infantry, 34 

Flank  companies, 85 

Composition  oflight  artillery  section, 86 

Articles  to  be  marked, 87 

Bank  of  sergeant  standard  bearers  of, 83 

«•        trumpet-major  of, 88 

"        drum-major  of, 8S 

Commandants  of,  to  make  returns, 663  to  676 

BESIQNATION  OF  0FFICEE3  :                                                            24  to  26 

Acceptance  of, 24 

To  whom  forwarded, 25 

In  time  of  war,  when  take  effect, 26 

BESPONSIBILITY  : 

Of  olBcers  and  non-comml8slone<l  olDoers, 10,  11 

BETURNS  AND  REPORTS  :                                                                 66S  to  676 

Yearly,  to  be  made  by  commandants  of  regiments, 663 

"           "              *•                 •'              companies, 669 

"           "              ♦•      Brigade  Inspectors, 670 

Brigade  Inspectors  to  be  furnished  with,  by  commandants  of  companies,.  671 

"                    "                    "                           •'            regiments, .  678 

Inspecting  officers  to  return  deviations  from  nniform, 678 

Brigade  Inspectors  to  return  number  of  ununiformod  militia, 674 

Clerk  of  Supervisors  to  report  to  Adjutant-General, 675 

Commanding  officer  may  require,  fh)m  subordinates, 676 

BEVIEW:                                                                                                     870  to  897 

Of  battalion  of  Infantry, 870  to  896 

Of  cavalry  and  artillery, 89T 

Bostlng  music  at, 514 


INDEX.  325 

BEVIEW  (  Continued  )  :  No.  of  Paragraph. 

Bands  at, 1648  to  1652 

"When  reviewing  personage  is  junior  to  officer  in  command, 1662 

EOLL  CALLS  :  25T 

ROSTER:                                                                                                      487  to  498 

Wlio  to  keep, 487  to  492 

"What  to  contain, 493 

"Who  furnished  by, 494 

To  be  preserved  and  transmitted, 494 

To  insure  accuracy  of, 495  to  497 

Duty  to  furnish  information  for  making, 498 

See 1092  to  1102 

S. 
SAFEGUARDS  : 

For  what  given,  &c., 1308  to  1312 

SALUTES : 

National, 282  to    294 

Color, 1655 

SAPPERS  AND  MINERS  : 

At  dress  parades, 860 

At  reviews,-.- 8T2,  878 

To  be  instructed  as,  &c., 649 

To  act  as  markers, 650 

SENTINELS  : 

Form  of  relieving, 415  to  417 

Time  of  relieving,... 422 

Not  to  take  order,  &c..  except,  &c  , 436 

Duties  of, 437  to  489,  441  to  652 

To  salute, r 444 

Respect  towards, 440 

Instructions  given  to  be  reported, 453 

Form  of  guard  report,  vide  pp,  78,  79. 

SERGEANTS : 

Grade  of, 7 

"         ordnance, 86 

Rank  of,  standard  bearer, 88 

Calls  of, 255 

First,  to  make  roll  calls  on  company  parades, 257 

•*      morning  reports  of  companies  to  be  signed  by, 259 

"      at  dress  parade, 865,  866 

"      duties  of,  at  guard  mounting, 89P,  406 

At  guard  mounting, 400,  414 

MlIilTARY.  28 


326  INDEX. 

SERGEANTS  (Continued):  No.  of  Paragraph. 

Of  the  guard, 452 

"      rounds, 448,451,  452 

First,  to  repair  to  head-quarters  at  orderly  hours, 471 

♦•      to  keep  rosters  of  company, 490 

•*      "Where  to  tal?e  posts  at  camps  for  instruction, 670 

At  camps  for  instruction,  to  be  detailed  as  orderlies, 632 

'*                  "               duties  of,  of  the  guard  and  police  guard, 645 

First,  to  keep  ro.stcrs  for  service  and  camp, 663 

Orderly,  to  make  morning  reports  of  sick, -  851 

To  be  sub-quartermaster  sergeants, 870 

Quartermaster,  at  camps  for  instruction, 871 

"              and  sub-quartermaster,  to  be  instructed  by  quartermaster,  872 

SIEGES  : 

Instructions  for  Ac, 1313  to  1353 

SIGNALS  : 

And  calls  at  parade,  Ac, 255,  520 

SOLDIERS  : 

Duties  of, 4 

Mess  furniture  of, 74 

Messes,  how  prepared, - - 75 

To  salute  officers, 279  to  231 

SPECIAL  SERVICES  :                                                                            875  to  1000 

STREET  FIRING  :                                                                                      900  to  1000 

To  form  battalion  after, 943 

By  light  infantry, 900  to  944 

Posts  of  music,  engineers,  Ac.,  at, ......^ 945  to  947 

To  reform  column  after, 949  to  954 

To  march  in  column  prepared  for,  or  prepared  to  form  .      are, 955  to  953 

From  column  for,  as  light  infantry  advancing,  to  form  square, 959  to  968 

To  form  square  nrom  column,  as  light  infantry, 964,  965 

"            "             "              of  infantry, 966  to  969 

The  square  in  four  ranks, 970  to  993 

To  inarch  in  square, .-.-. - 974  to  979 

To  fire  in  square, 980  to  997 

Remarks  on, 998  to  1000 

STANDARDS : 

Of  mounted  regiments, 721 

Pike  pole  or  staff  of, 728 

STAFF : 

Of  Commander-in-Chief, 48 

Of  general  offtcers,  where  to  encamp, 6T8 


INDEX.  327 

STAFF  (  Continued  )  :  Ko.  of  Paragraph. 

At  inspections, 882,  833 

At  reviews, 372,376,378,387,  396 

General,  comprises  what, 734 

"       is  composed  of,.. 785 

Theory  of, 736  to  755 

Position  and  duties  of  officers  of, 744  to  755 

SUCCESSION  IN  COMMAND  :  21  to  28 

Officers  succeeding  to  command, 21 

Relieved  or  promoted,  &c., 21 

Supernumerary  or  resigned, 22 

In  temporary  command, 23 

SUPERNUMERARY  ; 

Officer, 22 

SURGEON  GENERAL : 

Precedence  of,  in  staff, ———.-.....-—.--....-„....      28 

Vide  Mbdioal  Department. 

BURGEONS: 

Vide  Medical  Depaetment. 

SUTLER  : 

How  appointed  or  removed, 98 

Regulation  and  control  of, 94 

T. 

TRANSFERS : 

Of  men, 686 

Of  companies  and  regiments, 687 

TROOPS  IN  CAMPAIGN  :  1001  to  1370 

TRUMPET-MAJOR  : 

Rank  of. 33 

u. 

UNIFORM  AND  DRESS  •  1871  to  155« 

V. 

VACANCIES  : 

By  whom  reported  to  Adjutant-General, 26 

w. 

WATCHWORD  : 

Parole  and  countersign, 424,    425 

Sec 1088  to  1090 


APPENDIX. 


REGULATIONS  OF  THE  GOVERNMENT  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES, 
WITH  REGARD  TO  THE  MILITIA  IN  THE  SERVICE  OF  THE 
UNITED    STATES. 

Whenever  volunteer  or  drafted  nailitia  are  called  into  tlie  service 
of  the  United  States,  by  any  officer  authorized  to  make  such  call, 
the  requisition  must  be  made  on  the  Governor  of  the  state  or 
territory  in  which  the  militia  are  to  be  raised,  and  the  number  of 
officers,  non-commissioned  officers,  and  privates  will  be  stated  in  the 
requisition,  according  to  the  organization  prescribed  by  the  law  of  the 
United  States. 

Before  militia  are  received  in  the  service  of  the  United  States,  they 
shall  be  mustered  by  an  Inspector-General,  or  some  other  officer  of 
the  regular  army,  specially  designated  to  muster  them. 

It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  officer  designated  to  muster  and 
inspect  militia,  to  forward  muster-rolls  of  each  company,  and  of  the 
field  and  staff  of  each  regiment,  direct,  to  the  Adjutant-General  of  the 
army,  Washington ;  and  he  will  also  immediately  forward  a  consoli- 
dated return,  by  regiments  and  corps,  of  the  force  received  into  service, 
for  the  information  of  the  War  Department. 

MUSTERING   IN. 

Reference  will  be  made  to  the  particular  act  or  acts  of  congress 
under  which  the  militia  are  called  into  service.  If  there  be  no  such 
act,  then  to  the  act  May  8,  1792,  amended  by  the  acts,  April  18,  1814, 
and  April  20,  1816.  Mustering  officers  will  not  muster  into  service  a 
greater  number  of  officers,  or  of  higher  rank  than  the  law  prescribes. 
No  officers  of  the  general  staff  will  be  mustered  or  received  into  service, 
except  such  general  officers,  with  their  aides-de-camp,  as  may  be 
required  to  complete  the  organization  of  brigades  or  divisions. 

Military.  28* 


330  APPENDIX. 

MUSTERING   OUT. 

The  rolls  for  this  purpose  will  be  compared  with  those  of  the 
first  muster.  All  persons  on  the  first  rolls,  and  absent  at  the  final 
muster,  must  be  acounted  for,  whether  dead,  captured,  discharged,  or 
otherwise  absent ;  and  if  the  mustering  officer,  in  any  particular  case, 
shall  have  cause  to  doubt  the  report  made  to  be  entered  on  the  rolls, 
he  shall  demand  the  oath  of  one  or  more  persons  to  prove  the  fact  to 
his  satisfaction ;  further,  he  shall  take  care  that  not  more  persons  of 
the  several  ranks  be  mubtered  out  of  service  than  were  mustered  in, 
if  there  be  an  excess  over  the  requisition  or  beyond  the  law,  nor 
recognize  additions  or  substitutes,  without  full  satisfaction  that  the 
additions  or  substitutions  were  regularly  made,  and  at  the  time  reported 
on  the  rolls. 

Officers  charged  with  the  duty  of  mustering  militia  will  take 
care  that  the  muster-rolls  contain  all  the  information  that  may  in  any 
way  affect  their  pay ;  the  distance  from  the  places  of  residence  to  the 
place  of  rendezvous  or  organization,  and  the  date  of  arrival,  must  be 
stated  in  each  case ;  the  date  and  place  of  discharge,  and  the  distance 
thence  to  the  place  of  residence ;  all  stoppages  for  articles  furnished  by 
the  government  must  be  noted  on  the  rolls ;  and  in  cases  of  absence 
at  the  time  of  discharge  of  the  company ,  the  cause  of  absence  must  be 
stated.  When  the  necessary  information  cannot  be  obtained,  the 
mustering  officer  will  state  the  reason.  j 

If,  as  has  sometimes  happened,  militia,  at  the  end  of  a  term 
of  service,  shall,  from  the  want  of  a  mustering  officer,  disperse  or  return 
home  without  being  regularly  mustered  out ;  and  if,  with  a  view  to  a 
payment,  a  muster  shall  afterward  be  ordered  by  competent  authority, 
the  officer  sent  for  the  i)urpose  shall  carefully  verify  all  tlie  facta 
aftecting  pay,  by  the  oath  of  one  or  more  of  the  officers  belonging  to 
such  militia,  in  order  that  full  justice  may  be  done. 

In  all  cases  of  muster  for  payment,  whether  final  or  otherwise, 
the  mustering  officer  will  give  his  particular  attention  to  the  state  and 
condition  of  the  public  property :  such  as  quarters,  camp-equipage, 
means  of  transportation,  arms,  accoutrements,  ammunition,  &c., 
which  have  been  in  the  use  or  possession  of  the  militia  to  bo  paid ; 
and  if  any  such  public  property  shall  appear  to  be  damaged,  or  lost, 
beyond  ordinary  wear  or  unavoidable  accident,  such  loss  or  damage 
shall  be  noted  on  the  muster-rolls,  in  order  that  the  injury  or  losa 


APPENDIX.  331 

sustained  by  the  United  States  may  be  stopped  from  the  pay  that  would 
otherwise  be  due  to  the  individual  or  detachment  mustered  for  pay- 
ment. ( See  regulations  of  the  Ordnance  Department. )  This  provision 
shall  be  read  to  all  detachments  of  militia  on  being  mustered  into 
service,  and  as  much  oftener  as  may  be  deemed  necessary. 

Payments  will,  in  all  cases,  be  made  by  the  Paymnsters  of  the 
regular  army." 


ARTICLES  OF  WAR. 

AN    ACT    FOR    ESTABLISHING    RULES    AND     ARTICLES     FOR    THE 
GOVERNMENT    OF    THE    ARMIES    OF    THE    UNITED    STATES.* 

The  folloicing,  the  Articles  of  War,  will  be  observed  by  the  state  troojjs  only 

when  called  into  tJie  service  of  the  United  States. 

Section  1.  Be  it  enacted,  by  the  Senate  and  House  of  Representatives  of 
the  United  States  of  America,  in  Congress  assembled,  That,  from  and  after 
the  passing  of  this  act,  the  following  shall  be  the  rules  and  articles  by 
which  the  armies  of  the  United  States  shall  be  governed : 

Article  1.  Every  officer  now  in  the  army  of  the  United  States  shall, 
in  six  months  from  the  passing  of  this  act,  and  every  officer  who  shall 
hereafter  be  appointed  shall,  before  he  enters  on  the  duties  of  his  office, 
subscribe  these  rules  and  regulations. 

Art  2.  It  is  earnestly  recommended  to  all  officers  and  soldiers 
diligently  to  attend  divine  service ;  and  all  officers  who  shall  behave 
indecently  or  irreverently  at  any  place  of  divine  worship  shall ,  if 
commissioned  officers,  be  brought  before  a  general  court-martial,  there 
to  be  publicly  and  severely  reprimanded  by  the  president ;  if  non- 
commissioned officers  or  soldiers,  every  person  so  offending  shall,  for 
his  first  offence,  forfeit  one-sixth  of  a  dollar,  to  be  deducted  out  of  his 
next  pay  ;  for  the  second  offence,  he  shall  not  only  forfeit  a  like  sum, 
but  be  confined  twenty-four  hours ;  and  for  every  like  offence,  shall 
suffer  and  pay  in  like  manner ;  which  money,  so  forfeited,   shall  be 


♦  These  rules  and  articles,  with  the  exceptions  indicated  by  the  notes  annexed 
to  articles  20,  65  and  87,  remain  unaltered,  and  in  force  at  present. 


332  APPENDIX.  ^ 

applied,  by  the  captain  or  senior  officer  of  the  troop  or  company,  to 
tlie  use  of  the  sick  soldiers  of  the  company  or  troop  to  which  the 
oflfender  belongs. 

Art.  3.  Any  non-commissioned  officer  or  soldier  who  shall  use  any 
profane  oath  or  execration,  shall  incur  the  penalties  expressed  in  the 
foregoing  article ;  and  a  commissioned  officer  shall  forfeit  and  pay,  for 
each  and  every  such  oflfence,  one  dollar,  to  be  aj)plied  as  in  the  pre- 
ceding article. 

Art.  4.  Every  chaplain  commissioned  in  the  army  or  armies  of  the 
United  States,  who  shall  absent  himself  from  the  duties  assigned  him 
( excepting  in  cases  of  sickness  or  leave  of  absence ),  shall,  on  convic- 
tion thereof  before  a  court  martial,  be  fined  not  exceeding  one  month's 
pay,  besides  the  loss  of  his  pay  during  his  absence ;  or  be  discharged, 
as  the  said  court-martial  shall  judge  proper. 

Art.  5.  Any  officer  or  soldier  who  shall  use  contemptuous  or 
disrespectful  words  against  the  President  of  the  United  States ,  against 
the  Vice-President  thereof,  against  the  Congress  of  the  United  States, 
or  against  the  chief  magistrate  or  legislature  of  any  of  the  United  States, 
in  which  he  may  be  quartered,  if  a  commissioned  officer,  shall  be 
cashiered,  or  otherwise  punished,  as  a  court  martial  shall  direct ;  if  a 
non-commissioned  officer  or  soldier,  he  shall  suffer  such  punishment 
as  shall  be  inflicted  on  him  by  the  sentence  of  a  court-martial. 

Art.  6.  Any  officer  or  soldier  who  shall  beliave  himself  with  con- 
tempt or  disrespect  toward  his  Commanding  Officer,  shall  be  punished, 
according  to  the  nature  of  his  offence,  by  the  judgment  of  a  court- 
martial. 

Art.  7.  Any  officer  or  soldier  who  shall  begin,  excite,  cause,  or  join 
in,  any  nmtiny  or  sedition,  in  any  troop  or  company  in  the  service  of 
the  United  States,  or  in  any  party,  post,  detachment,  or  guard,  shall 
suffer  death,  or  such  other  x)unishment  as  by  a  court  martial  shall  be 
inflicted. 

Art.  8.  Any  officer,  non-commissioned  officer,  or  soldier,  who,  being 
present  at  any  mutiny  or  sedition,  does  not  use  his  utmost  endeavor 
to  suppress  the  same,  or  coming  to  the  knowledge  of  any  intended 


APPENDIX.  333 

mutiny,  does  not,  without  delay,  give  information  thereof  to  his 
Commanding  Officer,  sliall  be  punished  by  the  sentence  of  a  court- 
martial  with  death,  or  otherwise,  according  to  the  nature  of  his 
offence. 

Art.  9.  Any  officer  or  soldier  who  shall  strike  his  superior  officer, 
or  draw  or  lift  up  any  weapon,  or  oflfer  any  violence  against  him,  being 
in  the  execution  of  his  office,  on  any  pretence  whatsoever,  or  shall 
disobey  any  lawful  command  of  his  superior  officer,  shall  suffer  death, 
or  such  other  punishment  as  shall  according  to  the  nature  of  his  offence, 
be  inflicted  upon  him  by  the  sentence  of  a  court-martial. 

Art.  10.  Every  non-commissioned  officer  or  soldier,  who  shall  enlist 
himself  in  the  service  of  the  United  States,  shall,  at  the  time  of  his  so 
enlisting,  or  within  six  days  afterward,  have  the  articles  for  the 
government  of  the  armies  of  the  United  States  read  to  him,  and  shall, 
by  the  officer  who  enlisted  him,  or  by  the  Commanding  Officer  of  the 
troop  or  company  into  which  he  was  enlisted,  be  taken  before  the 
next  justice  of  the  peace,  or  chief  magistrate  of  any  city  or  town  cor- 
porate, not  being  an  officer  of  the  army,  or  where  recourse  cannot  be 
had  to  the  civil  magistrate,  before  the  jude  advocate,  and  in  his 
presence  shall  take  the  following  oath  or  affirmation:  "I,  A.  B.,  do 
solemly  swear  or  affirm  (as  the  case  may  be),  that  I  will  bear  true 
allegiance  to  the  United  States  of  America,  and  that  I  will  serve  them 
honestly  and  faithfully  against  all  their  enemies  or  opposers  what- 
soever ;  and  observe  and  obey  the  orders  of  the  President  of  the  United 
States,  and  the  orders  of  the  officers  appointed  over  me,  according  to 
the  rules  and  articles  for  the  government  of  the  armies  of  the  United 
States."  Which  justice,  magistrate,  or  judge  advocate  is  to  give  to  the 
officer  a  certificate,  signifying  that  the  man  enlisted  did  take  the  said 
oath  or  affirmation. 

Art.  11.  After  a  non-commissioned  officer  or  soldier  shall  have  been 
duly  enlisted  and  sworn,  he  shall  not  be  dismissed  the  service  without 
a  discharge  in  writing ;  and  no  discharge  granted  to  him  shall  be  suffi- 
cient which  is  not  signed  by  a  Field  Officer  of  the  regiment  to  which 
he  belongs,  or  Commanding  Officer  where  no  Field  Officer  of  the 
regiment  is  present ;  and  no  discharge  shall  be  given  to  a  non-com- 
missioned officer  or  soldier  before  his  term  of  service  has  expired,  but 


334  APPENDIX. 

by  order  of  the  President,  the  Secretary  of  War,  the  Commanding 
Officer  of  a  department,  or  the  sentence  of  a  general  court-martial, 
nor  shall  a  commissioned  officer  be  discharged  the  service  but  by  order 
of  the  President  of  the  United  States,  or  by  sentence  of  a  general 
court-martial. 

Art,  12.  Every  Colonel,  or  other  officer  commanding  a  regiment, 
troop,  or  company,  and  actually  quartered  with  it,  may  give  furloughs 
to  non-commissioned  officers  or  soldiers,  in  such  numbers,  and  for  so 
long  a  time,  as  he  shall  judge  to  be  most  consistent  with  the  good  of 
the  service ;  and  a  captain,  or  other  inferior  officer,  commanding  a 
troop  or  company,  or  in  any  garrison,  fort,  or  barrack  of  the  United 
States  ( his  field  officer  being  absent ),  may  give  furloughs  to  non-com- 
missioned officers  or  soldiers,  for  a  time  not  exceeding  twenty  days  in 
six  months,  but  not  to  more  than  two  persons  to  be  absent  at  the  same 
time,  excepting  some  extraordinary  occasion  should  require  it. 

Art.  13.  At  every  muster,  the  Commanding  Officer  of  each  regiment, 
troop,  or  company,  there  present,  shall  give  to  the  commissary  of 
musters,  or  other  officer  who  musters  the  said  regimeiit,  troop,  or 
company,  certificates  signed  by  himself,  signifying  how  long  such 
officers,  as  shall  not  appear  at  the  said  muster,  have  been  absent,  and 
the  reason  of  their  absence.  In  like  manner,  the  Commanding  Officer 
of  every  troop  or  company  shall  give  certificates  signifying  the  reasons 
of  the  absence  of  the  non-commissioned  officers  and  private  soldiers ; 
which  reasons  and  time  of  absence  shall  be  inserted  in  the  muster- 
rolls,  opposite  the  names  of  the  respective  absent  officers  and  soldiers. 
The  certificates  shall,  together  with  the  muster-rolls,  be  remitted  by 
the  commissary  of  musters,  or  other  officer  mustering,  to  the  depart- 
ment of  war.  as  speedily  as  the  distance  of  the  place  will  admit. 

Art.  14.  Every  officer  who  shall  be  convicted  before  a  general  court- 
martial,  of  having  signed  a  false  certificate  relating  to  the  absence  of 
either  officer  or  private  soldier,  or  relative  to  his  or  their  pay,  shall  be 
cashiered. 

Art.  15.  Every  officer  who  shall  knowingly  make  a  false  muster 
of  man  or  horso,  and  every  officer  or  commissary  of  musters  who  shall 
willingly  sign,  direct,  or  allow  the  signing  of  muster-rolls  wherein 


APPENDIX.  335 

such  false  muster  is  contained,  sliall,  upon  proof  made  thereof,  by  two 
witnesses,  before  a  general  court-martial,  be  cashiered,  and  shall  be 
thereby  utterly  disabled  to  have  or  hold  any  office  or  employment  iu 
the  service  of  the  United  States. 

Art.  16.  Any  commissary  of  musters,  or  other  officer,  who  shall  be 
convicted  of  having  taken  money,  or  other  thing,  by  way  of  gratifica- 
tion, on  mustering  any  regiment,  troop,  or  company,  or  on  signing 
muster-rolls,  shall  be  displaced  from  his  office,  and  shall  be  thereby 
utterly  disabled  to  have  or  hold  any  office  or  employment  in  the  ser- 
vice of  the  United  States. 

Art.  17.  Any  officer  who  shall  presume  to  muster  a  person  as  a 
soldier  who  is  not  a  soldier,  shall  be  deemed  guilty  of  having  made  a 
false  muster,  and  shall  suffer  accordingly. 

Art.  18.  Every  officer  who  shall  knowingly  make  a  false  return  to 
the  department  of  war,  or  to  any  of  his  superior  officers,  authorized 
to  call  for  such  returns,  of  the  state  of  the  regiment,  troop,  or  company, 
or  garrison,  under  his  command ;  or  of  the  arms,  ammunition,  clothing, 
or  other  stores  thereunto  belonging,  shall,  on  conviction  thereof  before 
a  court-martial,  be  cashiered. 

Art.  19.  The  commanding  officer  of  every  regiment,  troop,  or  inde- 
pendent company,  or  garrison,  of  the  United  States,  shall,  in  the 
beginning  of  every  month,  remit,  through  the  proper  channels,  to  the 
department  of  war,  an  exact  return  of  the  regiment,  troop,  independent 
company,  or  garrison,  under  his  command,  specifying  the  names  of 
the  officers  then  absent  from  their  posts,  with  the  reasons  for  and  the 
time  of  their  absence.  And  any  officer  who  shall  be  convicted  of 
having,  through  neglect  or  design,  omitted  sending  such  returns,  shall 
be  punished,  according  to  the  nature  of  his  crime,  by  the  judgment 
of  a  general  court-martial. 

Art.  20.  All  officers  and  soldiers  who  liave  received  pay,  or  have 
been  duly  enlisted  in  the  service  of  the  United  States,  and  shall  be 
convicted  of  having  deserted  the  same,  shall  suffiir  death,  or  such  other 
punishment  as,  by  sentence  of  a  court-martial,  shall  be  inflicted.* 

*  Modified  by  act  of  29lh  May,  1830. 


336  APPENDIX. 

Art.  21.  Any  non-commissioned  officer  or  soldier  who  shall,  without 
leave  from  his  Commanding  Officer,  absent  himself  from  his  troop, 
company  or  detachment  shall,  upon  being  convicted  thereof,  be 
punished  according  to  the  nature  of  his  oflFence,  at  the  discretion  of  a 
court-martial. 

Art.  22.  No  non-commissioned  officer  or  soldier  shall  enlist  himself 
in  any  other  regiment,  troop,  or  company,  without  a  regular  discharge 
from  the  regiment,  troop,  or  company,  to  which  he  last  served,  on  the 
penalty  of  being  reputed  a  deserter,  and  suflfering  accordingly.  And  in 
case  any  officer  shall  knowingly  receive  and  entertain  such  non-com- 
missioned officer  or  soldier,  or  shall  not,  after  his  being  discovered  to 
be  a  deserter,  immeditaely  confine  him,  and  give  notice  thereof  to  the 
corps  in  which  he  last  served,  the  said  officer  shall,  by  a  court-mar- 
tial, be  cashiered. 

Art.  23.  Any  officer  or  soldier  who  shall  be  convicted  of  having 
advised  or  persuaded  any  other  officer  or  soldier  to  desert  tlie  service 
of  the  United  States,  shall  suffi^r  death,  or  such  other  pimishmnnt  as 
shall  be  inflicted  upon  him  by  the  sentence  of  a  court-martial. 

Art.  24.  No  officer  or  soldier  shall  use  any  reproachful  or  provoking 
speeches  or  gestures  to  another,  upon  pain,  if  an  officer,  of  being  put 
in  arrest ;  if  a  soldier,  confined,  and  of  asking  pardon  of  the  party 
offended,  in  the  presence  of  his  Commanding  Officer. 

Art.  25.  No  officer  or  soldier  shall  send  a  challenge  to  another  officer 
or  soldier,  to  fight  a  duel,  or  accept  a  challenge  if  sent,  upon  pain,  if 
a  commissioned  officer,  of  being  cashiered ;  if  a  non-commissioned 
officer  or  soldier,  of  suffering  corporeal  punishment,  at  the  discretion  of 
a  court-martial. 

Art.  2G.  If  any  commissioned  or  non-commissioned  officer  com- 
manding a  guard  shall  knowingly  or  willingly  suffer  any  person 
whatsoever  to  go  forth  to  fight  a  duel,  he  shall  bo  punished  as  a 
challenger  ;  and  all  seconds,  promoters,  and  carriers  of  challenges,  in 
order  to  duels,  shall  be  deemed  principals  and  be  punished  accordingly. 
And  it  shall  be  the  duty  of  every  officer  commanding  an  army,  regi- 
ment, company,  post,  or  detachment,  who  is  knowing  to  a  challenge 
being  given  or  accepted  by  any  officer,  non-commissioned  officer,  or 


APPENDIX.  337 

soldier,  under  his  command,  or  has  reason  to  believe  the  same  to  be 
the  case,  immediately  to  arrest  and  bring  to  trial  such  offenders. 

Art.  27.  All  officers,  of  what  condition  soever,  have  power  to  part 
and  quell  all  quarrels,  frays,  and  disorders,  though  the  person  con- 
cerned should  belong  to  another  regiment,  troop,  or  company ;  and 
either  to  order  officers  into  arrest,  or  non-commissiond  officers  or 
soldiers  into  confinement,  until  the  proper  superior  officers  shall  be 
acquainted  therewith;  and  whosoever  shall  refuse  to  obey  such  officer 
( though  of  an  inferior  rank },  or  shall  draw  his  sword  upon  him,  shall 
be  punished  at  the  disci«tion  of  a  general  court-martial. 

Art.  28.  Any  officer  or  soldier  who  shall  upbraid  another  for 
refusing  a  challenge,  shall  himself  be  punished  as  a  challenger ;  and 
all  officers  and  soldiers  are  hereby  discharged  from  any  disgi-ace  or 
opinion  of  disadvantage  which  might  arise  from  their  having  refused 
to  accept  of  challenges,  as  they  will  only  have  acted  in  obedience  to 
the  laws,  and  done  their  duty  as  good  soldiers  who  subject  themselves 
to  discipline. 

Art.  29.  No  sutlers  shall  be  permitted  to  sell  any  kind  of  liquors  or 
victuals,  or  to  keep  their  houses  or  shops  open  for  the  entertainment 
of  soldiers,  after  nine  at  night,  or  before  the  beating  of  the  reveille,  or 
upon  Sundays,  during  divine  service  or  sermon,  on  the  penalty  of  being 
dismissed  from  all  future  sutling. 

Art.  30.  All  officers  commanding  in  the  field,  forts,  barracks,  or 
garrisons  of  the  United  States,  are  hereby  required  to  see  that  the 
persons  permitted  to  suttle  shall  supply  the  soldiers  with  good  and 
wholesome  provisions,  or  other  articles,  at  a  reasonable  price,  as  they 
shall  be  answerable  for  their  neglect. 

Art.  31.  No  officer  commanding  in  any  of  the  garrisons,  forts,  or 
barracks  of  the  United  States,  shall  exact  exorbitant  prices  for  houses 
or  stalls  let  out  to  sutlers,  or  connive  at  the  like  exactions  in  others ; 
nor  by  his  own  authority,  and  for  his  private  advantage,  lay  any  duty 
or  imposition  upon,  or  be  interested  in,  the  sale  of  any  victuals,  liquors, 
or  other  necessaries  of  life  brought  into  the  garrison,  fort,  or  barracks, 
for  the  use  of  the  soldiers,  on  the  penalty  of  being  discharged  from  the 
service. 

Military.  29 


338  APPENDIX. 

Art.  32.  Every  officer  commanding  in  quarters,  garrisons,  or  on 
tlie  march,  sliall  keep  good  order,  and,  to  the  utmost  of  his  power, 
redress  all  abuses  or  disorders  which  may  be  committed  by  any  officer 
or  soldier  under  his  command ;  if,  upon  complaint  made  to  him  of 
officers  or  soldiers  beating  or  otherwise  ill-treating  any  person,  or 
disturbing  fairs  or  markets,  or  of  committing  any  kind  of  riots,  to  the 
disquieting  of  the  citizens  of  the  United  States,  he,  the  said  Commander, 
who  shall  refuse  or  omit  to  see  justice  done  to  the  offender  or  offenders, 
and  a  reparation  made  to  the  party  or  parties  injured,  as  far  as 
part  of  the  offender's  pay  shall  enable  him  or  them,  shall,  upon  proof 
thereof,  be  cashiered,  or  otherwise  punished,  as  a  general  court-martial 
shall  direct. 

Abt.  33.  When  any  commissioned  officer  or  soldier  shall  be 
accused  of  a  capital  crime,  or  of  having  used  violence,  or  committed 
any  offence  against  the  person  or  proi>erty  of  any  citizen  of  any  of  the 
United  States,  such  as  is  punishable  by  the  known  laws  of  the  land, 
the  Commanding  Officer  and  officers  of  every  regiment,  troop,  or  com- 
jxiny,  to  which  the  person  or  persons  so  accused  shall  belong  are 
hereby  required,  upon  application  duly  made  by,  or  in  behalf  of  the 
party  or  parties  injured,  to  use  their  utmost  endeavors  to  deliver  over 
such  accused  person  or  persons  to  the  civil  magistrate,  and  likewise 
to  be  aiding  and  assisting  to  the  officers  of  justice  in  apprehending 
and  securing  the  person  or  persons  so  accused,  in  order  to  bring  him 
or  them  to  trial.  If  any  Commanding  Officer  or  officers  shall  willfully 
neglect  or  shall  refuse,  upon  the  application  aforesaid,  to  deliver  over 
such  accused  person  or  persons  to  the  civil  magistrates,  or  to  be  aiding 
and  assisting  to  the  officers  of  justice  in  apprehending  such  person  or 
persons,  the  officer  or  officers  so  offending  shall  be  cashiered. 

Art.  34.  If  any  officer  shall  think  himself  wronged  by  his  Colonel,  or 
the  Commanding  Officer  of  the  regiment,  and  shall,  upon  due  applica- 
tion being  made  to  him,  be  refused  redress,  he  may  complain  to  the 
General  Comanding  in  the  State  or  the  Territory  where  such  regiment 
shall  be  stationed,  in  order  to  obtain  justice;  who  is  hereby  required 
to  examine  into  said  complaint,  and  take  proper  measure  for  redress- 
ing the  wrong  complained  of,  and  transmit,  as  soon  as  possible,  to  the 
department  of  war,  a  true  state  of  such  complaint,  with  the  proceedings 
had  thereon. 


APPENDIX.  339 

Art.  35.  If  any  inferior  officer  or  soldier  shall  think  himself  wronged 
by  his  Captain  or  other  officer,  he  is  to  complain  thereof  to  the  Com- 
manding Officer  of  the  regiment,  who  is  hereby  required  to  summon 
a  regimental  court-martial  for  the  doing  justice  to  tlie  complainant ; 
from  which  regimental  court-martial  either  party  may,  if  he  thinks 
himself  still  aggrieved,  appeal  to  a  general  court-martial.  But  if,  upon 
a  second  hearing,  the  appeal  shall  appear  vexatious  and  groundless, 
the  person  so  appealing  shall  be  punished  at  the  discretion  of  the  said 
court-martial. 

Art.  36.  Any  commissioned  officer,  store-keeper,  or  commissary* 
who  shall  be  convicted  at  a  general  court-martial  of  having  sold  with- 
out a  proper  order  for  that  purpose,  embezzeled,  misapplied,  or  will- 
fully, or  through  neglect,  suffered  any  of  the  provisions,  forage,  arms, 
clothing,  ammunition,  or  other  military  stores  belonging  to  the 
United  States  to  be  spoiled  or  damaged,  shall,  at  his  own  expense, 
make  good  the  loss  or  damage,  and  shall,  moreover,  forfeit  all  his  pay 
and  be  dissmissed  from  the  service. 

Art.  37.  Any  non-commissioned  officer  or  soldier  who  shall  be 
convicted  at  a  regimental  court-martial  of  having  sold,  or  designedly 
or  through  neglect,  wasted  the  ammunition  delivered  out  to  him  to  be 
employed  in  the  service  of  the  United  States,  shall  be  punished  at  the 
discretion  of  such  court 

Art.  38.  Every  non-commissioned  officer  or  soldier  who  shall  be 
convicted  before  a  court-martial  of  having  sold,  lost,  or  spoiled, 
through  neglect,  his  horse,  arms,  clothes,  or  accoutrements,  shall 
undergo  such  weekly  stoppages  ( not  exceeding  the  half  of  his  pay )  as 
such  court-martial  shall  judge  sufficient  for  repairing  the  loss  or 
damage ;  and  shall  suffer  confinement,  or  such  other  corporeal  punish- 
ment as  his  crime  shall  deserve. 

Art.  39.  Every  officer  who  shall  be  convicted  before  a  court-martial 
of  having  embezzled  or  misapplied  any  money  with  which  he  may  have 
been  intrusted,  for  the  payment  of  the  men  under  his  command,  or  for 
enlisting  men  into  the  service,  or  for  other  purposes,  if  a  commissioned 
officer,  shall  be  cashiered,  and  compelled  to  refund  the  money ;  if  a 
non-commissioned  officer,  shall  be  reduced  to  the  ranks,  be  put 


340  APPENDIX. 

under  stoppages  until  the  money  shall  be  made  good,  and  suffer  such 
corporeal  punishment  as  such  court-martial  shall  direct. 

Art.  40.  Every  Captain  of  a  troop  or  company  is  charged  with  the 
arms,  accoutrements,  ammunition,  clothing,  or  other  warlike  stores 
belonging  to  the  troop  or  company  under  his  command,  which  he  is 
to  be  accountable  for  to  his  Colonel  in  case  of  their  being  lost,  spoiled, 
or  damaged,  not  by  unavoidable  accidents,  or  on  actual  service. 

Art.  41.  All  non-commissioned  officers  and  soldiers  who  shall  be 
found  one  mile  from  the  camp  without  leave,  in  writing,  ^om  their 
Commanding  Officer,  shall  suffer  such  punishment  as  shall  be  inflicted 
upon  them  by  the  sentence  of  a  court  martial. 

Art.  42.  No  officer  or  soldier  shall  lie  out  of  his  quarters,  garrison, 
or  camp  without  leave  from  his  superior  officer,  upon  penalty  of  being 
punished  according  to  the  nature  of  his  offence,  by  the  sentence  of  a 
court-martial. 

Art.  43,  Every  non-commissioned  officer  and  soldier  shall  retire  to 
his  quarters  or  tent  at  the  beating  of  the  retreat ;  in  default  of  which 
he  shall  be  punished  according  to  the  nature  of  his  offence. 

Art.  44.  No  officer,  non-commissioned  officer,  or  soldier  shall  fail 
in  rejDairing,  at  the  time  fixed,  to  the  place  of  parade,  of  exercise,  or 
other  rendezvous  appomted  by  his  Commanding  Officer,  if  not  pre- 
vented by  sickness  or  some  other  evident  necessity,  or  shall  go  from 
the  said  place  of  rendezvous  without  leave  from  his  Commanding 
Officer,  before  he  shall  be  regularily  dismissed  or  relieved  on  the 
penalty  of  being  punished,  according  to  the  nature  of  his  offence,  by  the 
sentence  of  a  court-martial. 

Art.  45.  Any  commissioned  officer  who  shall  be  found  drunk  on 
his  guard,  party,  or  other  duty,  shall  be  cashiered.  Any  non-com- 
missioned officer  or  soldier  so  offending  shall  suffer  such  corporeal 
punishment  as  shall  be  inflicted  by  the  sentence  of  a  court-martial. 

Art.  46.  Any  sentinel  who  shall  be  found  sleeping  upon  his  post, 
or  shall  leave  it  before  he  shall  be  regularly  relieved,  shall  suffer  death, 
or  such  other  punishment  as  shall  be  inflicted  by  the  sentence  of  a 
court-martial. 


APPENDIX.  341 

Art.  47,  No  soldier  belonging  to  any  regiment,  troop,  or  company 
shall  hire  another  to  do  his  duty  for  him,  or  be  excused  from  duty 
but  in  cases  of  sickness,  disability,  or  leave  of  absence ;  and  every  such 
soldier  found  guilty  of  hiring  his  duty,  as  also  the  party  hired  to  do 
another's  duty,  shall  be  punished  at  the  discretion  of  a  regimental 
court-martial. 

Art,  48.  And  every  non-commissioned  officer  conniving  at  such 
hiring  of  duty  aforesaid,  shall  be  reduced ;  and  every  commissioned 
officer  knowing  and  allowing  such  ill  practices  in  the  service,  shall  be 
punished  by  the  judgment  of  a  general  court-martial. 

Art.  49,  Any  officer  belonging  to  the  service  of  the  United  States, 
who,  by  discharging  of  firearms,  drawing  of  swords,  beating  of  drums, 
or  by  any  other  means  whatsoever,  shall  occasion  false  alarms  in  camp, 
garrison,  or  quarters,  shall  suffer  death,  or  such  other  punishment  as 
shall  be  ordered  by  the  sentence  of  a  general  court-martial. 

Art.  50.  Any  officer  or  soldier  who  shall,  without  urgent  necessity, 
or  without  the  leave  of  his  superior  officer,  quit  his  guard,  platoon,  or 
division,  shall  be  punished,  according  to  the  nature  of  his  offence,  by 
the  sentence  of  a  court-martial. 

Art.  51.  No  officer  or  soldier  shall  do  violence  to  any  person  who 
brings  provisions  or  other  necessaries  into  the  camp,  garrison,  or 
quarters  of  the  forces  of  the  United  States,  employed  in  any  parts  out 
of  the  said  states,  upon  pain  of  death^  or  such  other  punisliment  as  a 
court-martial  shall  direct. 

Art.  52.  Any  officer  or  soldier  who  shall  misbehave  himself  before 
the  enemy,  run  away  or  shamefully  abandon  any  fort,  post,  or  guard 
which  he  or  they  may  be  commanded  to  defend,  or  speak  words 
inducing  others  to  do  the  like,  or  shall  cast  away  his  arms  or  ammu- 
nition, or  who  shall  quit  his  post  or  colors  to  plunder  and  pillage,  every 
such  offender,  being  duly  convicted  thereof  shall  suffer  death,  or  such 
other  punishment  as  ^hall  be  ordered  by  the  sentence  of  a  general 
court- martiaL 

Art.  53.  Any  person  belonging  to  the  armies  of  the  United  States 
who  shall  make  known  the  watchword  to  any  person  who  is  not  enti- 
tled to  receive  it  according  to  the  rules  and  discipline  of  war,  or  shall 

Military.  29* 


342  APPENDIX. 

presume  to  give  a  parole  or  watchword  diflferent  from  what  he  received, 
shall  suffer  death,  or  such  other  punishment  as  shall  be  ordered  by  the 
sentence  of  a  general  court-martial. 

Art.  54.  All  officers  and  soldiers  are  to  behave  themselves  orderly 
in  quarters  and  on  their  march ;  and  whoever  shall  commit  any  waste 
or  spoil,  either  in  walks  of  trees,  parks,  warrens,  fish-ponds,  houses, 
or  gardens,  corn  fields,  inclosures  of  meadows,  or  shall  maliciously 
destroy  any  property  whatsoever  belonging  to  the  inhabitants  of  the 
United  States,  unless  by  order  of  the  t'aen  Commander-in-Chief  of 
the  armies  of  the  said  States,  shall  ( besides  such  penalties  as  they  aro 
liable  to  by  law )  be  punished,  according  to  the  nature  and  degree  of 
the  offence,  by  the  judgment  of  a  regimental  or  general  court-martial. 

Art.  55.  Whosoever,  belonging  to  the  armies  of  the  United  States 
in  foreign  parts,  shall  force  a  safeguard,  shall  suffer  death. 

Art.  56.  Whosoever  shall  relieve  the  enemy  with  money,  victualg 
or  ammunition,  or  shall  knowingly  harbor  or  protect  an  enemy,  shall 
suffer  death,  or  such  other  punishment  as  shall  be  ordered  by  the 
sentence  of  a  court-martial. 

Art.  57.  Whosoever  shall  be  convicted  of  holding  correspondence 
with,  or  giving  intelligence  to,  the  enemy,  either  directly  or  indirectly, 
shall  suffer  death,  or  such  other  punishment  as  shall  be  ordered  by 
the  sentence  of  a  court-martial. 

Art.  58.  All  public  stores  taken  in  the  enemy's  camp,  towns,  forts 
or  magazines,  whether  of  artillery,  ammunition,  clothing,  forage  or 
provisions,  shall  be  secured  for  the  service  of  the  United  States ;  for 
the  neglect  of  which  the  Commanding  Officer  is  to  be  answerable. 

Art,  59.  If  any  Commander  of  any  garrison,  fortress  or  post  shall 
be  compelled,  by  the  officers  and  soldiers  under  his  command,  to  give 
up  to  the  enemy,  or  to  abandon  it,  the  commissioned  officers,  non- 
commissioned officers  or  soldiers,  who  shall  be  convicted  of  having  so 
offended,  shall  suffer  death,  or  such  other  punishment  as  shall  be 
inflicted  upon  them  by  the  sentence  of  a  court-martial. 

Art.  60.  All  sutlers  and  retainers  to  the  camp,  and  all  x)ersons 
whatsoever,  serving  with  the  armies  of  the  United  States  in  the  field, 


APPENDIX.  343 

though  not  enlisted  soldiers,  are  to  be  subject  to  orders,  according  to 
the  rules  and  discipline  of  war. 

Art.  61.  Officers  having  brevets  or  commissions,  of  a  prior  date  to 
those  of  the  regiment,in  which  they  serve,  may  take  place  in  courts - 
martial,  and  on  detachments,  when  composed  of  different  corps,  accord- 
ing to  the  ranks  given  them  in  their  brevets  or  dates  of  their  former 
commissions ;  but,  in  the  regiment,  troop  or  company  to  which  such 
officers  belong,  they  shall  do  duty  and  take  rank,  both  in  courts- 
martial  and  on  detachments  which  shall  be  composed  of  their  own 
corps,  according  to  the  commissions  by  which  they  are  mustered  in 
the  said  corps. 

Art.  62.  If,  upon  marches,  guards  or  in  quarters,  different  corps  of 
the  army  shall  happen  to  join  or  do  duty  together,  the  officer  highest 
in  rank  of  the  line  of  the  army,  marine  corps  or  militia,  by  commis- 
sion, there  on  duty  or  in  quarters,  shall  command  the  whole,  and 
give  orders  for  what  is  needful  to  the  service,  unless  otherwise 
specially  directed  by  the  President  of  the  United  States,  according  to 
the  nature  of  the  case. 

Art.  63.  The  functions  of  the  engineers  being  generally  confined 
to  the  most  elevated  branch  of  military  science,  they  are  not  to 
assume,  nor  are  they  subject  to  be  ordered  on,  any  duty  beyond  the 
line  of  their  immediate  profession,  except  by  the  special  order  of  the 
President  of  the  United  States ;  but  they  are  to  receive  every  mark 
of  respect  to  which  their  rank  in  the  army  may  entitle  them 
respectively,  and  are  liable  to  be  transferred,  at  the  discretion  of  the 
President,  from  one  corps  to  another,  regard  being  paid  to  rank. 

Art,  64.  General  courts-martial  may  consist  of  any  number  of 
commissioned  officers,  from  five  to  thirteen  inclusively ;  but  they 
shall  not  consist  of  less  than  thirteen,  where  that  number  can  be  con- 
vened without  manifest  injury  to  the  service. 

Art.  65.*  Any  general  officer  commanding  an  army,  or  Colonel 
commanding  a  separate  department,  may  appoint  general  courts-mar- 
tial whenever  necessary.     But  no  sentence  of  a  court-martial  shall  be 

*  Modified  by  act  of  29th  May,  1830. 


344  APPENDIX. 

carried  into  execution  until  after  the  whole  proceedings  shall  have 
been  laid  before  the  officer  ordering  the  same,  or  the  oflScer  com- 
manding the  troops  for  the  time  being ;  neither  shall  any  sentence 
of  a  general  court-martial,  in  the  time  of  peace,  extending  to  the  loss 
of  life,  or  the  dismission  of  a  commissioned  officer,  or  which  shall, 
either  in  time  of  peace  or  war,  respect  a  general  officer,  be  carried 
into  execution  until  after  the  whole  proceedings  shall  have  been 
transmitied  to  the  secretary  of  war,  to  be  laid  before  the  President 
of  the  United  States  for  his  confirmation  or  disapproval,  and  orders 
in  the  case.  All  other  sentences  may  be  confirmed  and  executed  by 
the  officer  ordering  the  court  to  assemble,  or  the  Commanding  Officer 
for  the  time  being,  as  the  case  may  be. 

Art.  6G.  Every  officer  commanding  a  regiment  or  corps  may 
appoint,  for  his  own  regiment  or  corps,  courts-martial,  to  consist  of 
three  commissioned  officers,  for  the  trial  and  punishment  of  offences 
not  capital,  and  decide  upon  their  sentences.  For  the  same  purpose, 
all  officers  commanding  any  of  the  garrisons,  forts,  barracks  or  other 
places  where  the  troops  consist  of  different  corps,  may  assemble 
courts-martial,  to  consist  of  three  commissioned  officers,  and  decide 
upon  their  sentences. 

Art,  67-  No  garrison  or  regimental  court-martial  shall  have  the 
power  to  try  capital  cases  or  commissioned  officers ;  neither  shall 
they  inflict  a  fine  exceeding  one  month's  pay ;  nor  imprison,  nor  put 
to  hard  labor,  any  non-commissioned  officer  or  soldier  for  a  longer 
time  than  one  month. 

Art.  68.  Whenever  it  may  be  found  convenient  and  necessary  to 
the  public  service,  the  officers  of  the  marines  shall  be  associated  with 
the  officers  of  the  land  forces,  for  the  purpose  of  holdmg  courts-mar- 
tial and  trying  offenders  belonging  to  either ;  and,  in  such  cases,  the 
orders  of  the  senior  officer  of  either  corps,  who  may  be  present  and 
duly  authorized,  shall  be  received  and  obeyed. 

Akt.  69.  The  Judge- Advocate,  or  some  person  deputed  by  him,  or 
by  the  General,  or  officer  commanding  the  army,  detachment  or  gar- 
rison, shall  prosecute  in  the  name  of  the  United  States,  but  shall  so 
far  consider  himself  as  counsel  for  the  prisoner,  after  the  said  pri- 
soner shall  have  made  his  plea,  as  to  object  to  any  leading  question 


APPENDIX.  345 

to  any  of  tlie  witnesses,  or  any  question  to  tlie  prisoner,  the  answer 
to  which  might  tend  to  criminate  himself ;  and  administer  to  each 
member  of  the  court,  before  they  proceed  upon  any  trial,  the  follow- 
ing oath,  which  shall  also  be  taken  by  all  members  of  the  regimental 
and  garrison  courts-martial : 

"  You,  A.  B.,  do  swear  that  you  will  well  and  truly  try  and  deter- 
mine, according  to  evidence,  the  matter  now  before  you,  between  the 
United  States  of  America  and  the  prisoner  to  be  tried,  and  that  you 
will  duly  administer  justice,  according  to  the  provisions  of  'An  act 
establishing  rules  and  articles  for  the  government  of  the  armies  of 
the  United  States,'  without  partiality,  favor  or  affection  ;  and  if  any 
doubt  should  arise,  not  explained  by  said  articles,  according  to  your 
conscience,  the  best  of  your  understanding  and  the  custom  of  war  in 
like  cases  ;  and  you  do  further  swear  that  you  will  not  divulge  the 
sentence  of  the  court  until  it  shall  be  published  by  the  proper  autho- 
rity ;  neither  will  you  disclose  or  discover  the  vote  or  opinion  of  any 
particular  member  of  the  court-martial,  unless  required  to  give  evi- 
dence thereof,  as  a  witness,  by  a  court  of  justice,  in  a  due  course  of 
law.     So  help  you  God." 

And  as  soon  as  the  said  oath  shall  have  been  administered  to  the 
respective  members,  the  President  of  the  court  shall  administer  to  the 
Judge- Advocate,  or  person  officiating  as  such,  an  oath  in  the  follow- 
ing words  : 

"You,  A.  B.,  do  swear  that  you  will  not  disclose  or  discover  the 
vote  or  opinion  of  any  particular  member  of  the  court-martial,  unless 
required  to  give  evidence  thereof,  as  a  witness,  by  a  court  of  justice, 
in  due  course  of  law ;  nor  divulge  the  sentence  of  the  court  to  any 
but  the  proper  authority,  until  it  shall  be  duly  disclosed  by  the  same. 
So  help  you  God." 

Art.  70.  When  a  prisoner,  arraigned  before  a  general  court-mar- 
tial, shall,  from  obstinacy  and  deliberate  design,  stand  mute,  or 
answer  foreign  to  the  purpose,  the  court  may  proceed  to  trial  and 
judgment  as  if  the  prisoner  had  regularly  pleaded  not  guilty. 

Art.  71.  When  a  member  shall  be  challenged  by  a  prisoner,  he 
must  state  his  cause  of  challenge,  of  which  the  court  shall,  after  due 
deliberation,  determine  the  relevancy  or  validity,  and  decide  record- 


346  APPENDIX. 

ingly;  and  no  challenge  to  more  tlian  one  member  at  a  time  shall  be 
received  by  the  court. 

Art.  72.  All  the  members  of  a  court-martial  are  to  behave  with 
decency  and  calmness  ;  and  in  giving  their  votes  are  to  begin  with 
the  youngest  in  commission. 

Art.  73.  All  persons  who  ^ve  evidence  before  a  court-martial  are 
to  be  examined  on  oath  or  affirmation,  in  the  following  form  : 

"  You  swear  ( or  affirm,  as  the  case  may  be),  the  evidence  you  shall 
give  in  the  cause  now  in  hearing  shall  be  the  truth,  the  whole  truth, 
and  nothing  but  the  truth.     So  help  you  God." 

Art.  74.  On  the  trials  of  cases  not  capital,  before  courts-martial, 
the  deposition  of  witnesses,  not  in  the  line  or  staff  of  the  army,  may 
be  taken  before  some  justice  of  the  peace,  and  read  in  evidence ;  pro- 
vided the  prosecutor  and  person  accused  are  present  at  the  taking 
the  same,  or  are  duly  notified  thereof. 

Art.  75.  No  officer  shall  be  tried  but  by  a  general  court-martial, 
nor  by  officers  of  an  inferior  rank,  if  it  can  be  avoided.  Nor  shall 
any  proceedings  of  trials  be  carried  on  excepting  between  the  hours 
of  eight  in  the  morning  and  three  in  the  afternoon,  excepting  in  cases 
which,  in  the  opinion  of  the  officer  appointing  the  court-martial, 
require  immediate  example. 

Art.  76.  No  person  whatsoever  shall  use  any  menacing  words,  signs, 
or  gestures,  in  presence  of  a  court-martial,  or  shall  oause  any  disorder 
or  riot,  or  disturb  their  proceedings,  on  the  penalty  of  being  i>unished 
at  the  discretion  of  the  said  court-martial. 

Art.  77.  Whenever  any  officer  shall  be  charged  with  a  crime,  he 
shall  be  arrested  and  confined  in  his  barracks,  quarters  or  tent,  and 
deprived  of  his  sword  by  the  Commanding  Officer.  And  any  officer 
who  shall  leave  his  confinement  before  he  shall  be  set  at  li^rty  by 
his  Commanding  Ofl!icer,  or  by  a  superior  officer,  shall  bo  cashiered. 

Art.  78.  Non-commissioned  officers  and  soldiers,  charged  with 
crimes,  shall  bo  confined  until  tried  by  a  court-martial  or  released 
by  proper  authority. 


APPENDIX.  34V 

Art.  79.  No  officer  or  soldier  wlio  shall  be  put  in  arrest  &hall  con- 
tinue in  confinement  more  than  eight  days,  or  until  such  time  as  » 
court-martial  can  be  assembled. 

Art.  80.  No  officer  commanding  a  guard,  or  provost  marshal,  shall 
refuse  to  receive  or  keep  any  prisoner  committed  to  his  charge  by  an 
officer  belonging  to  the  forces  of  the  United  States;  provided  the 
officer  committing  shall,  at  the  same  time,  deliver  an  account  in  writ- 
ing, signed  by  himself,  of  the  crime  with  which  the  said  prisoner  is 
charged. 

Art.  81.  No  officer  commanding  a  guard,  or  provost  marshal,  shall 
presume  to  release  any  person  committed  to  his  charge  without  proper 
authority  for  so  doing,  nor  shall  he  suflFer  any  person  to  escape,  on  the 
penalty  of  being  punished  for  it  by  the  sentence  of  a  court-martial. 

Art.  82.  Every  officer  or  provost  marshal,  to  whose  charge  pri- 
soners shall  be  committed,  shall,  within  twenty-four  hours  after  such 
commitment,  or  as  soon  as  he  shall  be  relieved  from  his  guard,  make 
report  in  writing,  to  the  Commanding  Officer,  of  their  names,  their 
crimes,  and  the  names  of  the  officers  who  committed  them,  on  the 
penalty  of  being  punished  for  disobedience  or  neglect,  at  the  discre- 
tion of  a  coui't-martial. 

Art.  83.  Any  commissioned  officer,  convicted  before  a  general 
court-martial  of  conduct  unbecoming  an  officer  and  a  gentleman, 
shall  be  dismissed  the  service. 

Art.  84.  In  cases  where  a  court-martial  may  think  it  proper  to 
sentence  a  commissioned  officer  to  be  suspended  from  command,  they 
shall  have  power  also  to  suspend  his  pay  and  emoluments  for  the 
same  time,  according  to  the  nature  and  heinousness  of  the  offence. 

Art.  85.  In  all  cases  where  a  commissioned  officer  is  cashiered  for 
cowardice  or  fraud,  it  shall  be  added,  in  the  sentence,  that  the  crime, 
name,  and  place  of  abode,  and  punishment  of  the  delinquent,  be  pub- 
lished in  the  newspapers  in  and  about  the  camp,  and  of  the  particu- 
lar state  from  which  the  offender  came,  or  where  he  usually  resides  ; 
after  which  it  shall  be  deemed  scandalous  for  an  officer  to  associate 
with  him. 


348  '  APPENDIX. 

Art.  86.  The  Commanding  Officer  of  any  post  or  detachment,  in 
which  there  shall  not  be  a  number  of  officers  adequate  to  form  a  gene- 
ral court-martial,  shall,  in  cases  which  require  the  cognizance  of 
such  a  court,  report  to  the  Commanding  Officer  of  the  department, 
who  shall  order  a  court  to  be  assembled  at  the  nearest  post  or  depart- 
ment, and  the  party  accused,  with  necessary  witnesses,  to  be  trans- 
ported to  the  place  where  the  said  court  shall  be  assembled. 

Aet.  87.*  No  person  shall  be  sentenced  to  suffer  death  but  by  the 
concurrence  of  two-thirds  of  the  members  of  a  general  court-martial, 
nor  except  in  the  cases  herein  expressly  mentioned  ;  nor  shall  more 
than  fifty  lashes  be  inflicted  on  any  offender,  at  the  discretion  of  a  court- 
martial;  and  no  officer,  non-commissioned  officer,  soldier  or  follower 
of  the  army,  shall  be  tried  a  second  time  for  the  same  offence. 

Art.  88.  No  person  shall  be  liable  to  be  tried  and  punished  by  a 
general  court-martial  for  any  offence  which  shall  appear  to  have  been 
committed  more  than  two  years  before  the  issuing  of  the  order  foi 
such  trial,  unless  the  person,  by  reason  of  having  absented  himself, 
or  some  other  manifest  impediment,  shall  not  have  been  amenable  to 
justice  within  that  period. 

Art.  89.  Every  officer  authorized  to  order  a  general  court-martial 
shall  have  power  to  pardon  or  mitigate  any  punishment  ordered  by 
such  court,  except  the  sentence  of  death,  or  of  cashiering  an  officer ; 
which,  in  the  oases  where  he  has  authority  ( by  article  65 )  to  carry 
them  into  execution,  he  may  suspend  until  the  pleasure  of  the  Pre- 
sident of  the  United  States  can  be  known ;  which  suspension,  together 
with  copies  of  the  proceedings  of  the  court-martial,  the  said  officer 
shall  immediately  transmit  to  the  President  for  liis  determination. 
And  the  Colonel  or  Commanding  Officer  of  the  regiment  or  garrison, 
whore  any  regimental  or  garrison  cotirt-martial  shall  be  held,  m«y 
pardon  or  mitigate  any  Dunishment  ordered  by  such  court  to  bo 
inflicted. 


♦  So  much  of  these  rules  and  articles  as  authorizes  the  infliction  of  corporeal 
punlshmont,  by  stripes  or  Inshes,  was  specially  ropeiilod  by  act  of  16lh  May,  1S12. 
By  act  of  2d  March,  ISS."?,  the  repealing  act  was  repealed,  so  far  as  it  applied  to  tho 
crime  of  doserlion,  which,  of  course,  revived  the  punishnient  by  lashes  for  that 
offence. 


APPENDIX.  349 

Art.  90.  Every  Judge- Advocate,  or  person  officiating  as  s.ich,  at 
any  general  court-martial,  shall  transmit,  with  as  much  expedition 
as  the  opportunity  of  time  and  distance  of  place  can  admit,  the  origi- 
nal proceedings  and  sentence  of  such  court-martial  to  the  Secretary 
of  War ;  which  said  original  proceedings  and  sentence  shall  be  care- 
fully kept  and  preserved  in  the  office  of  said  Secretary,  to  the  end 
that  the  persons  entitled  thereto  may  be  enabled,  upon  application  to 
the  said  office,  to  obtain  copies  thereof. 

The  party  tried  by  any  general  court-martial  shall,  upon  demand 
thereof,  made  by  himself,  or  by  any  person  or  persons  in  his  behalf, 
be  entitled  to  a  copy  of  the  sentence  and  proceedings  of  such  court- 
martial. 

Art.  91.  In  cases  where  the  General,  or  Commanding  Officer,  may 
order  a  court  of  iaquiry  to  examine  into  the  nature  of  any  transaction, 
accusation  or  imputation  against  any  officer  or  soldier,  the  said  court 
shall  consist  of  one  or  more  officers,  not  exceeding  three,  and  a  Judge- 
Advocate,  or  other  suitable  person,  as  a  recorder,  to  reduce  the  pro- 
ceedings and  evidence  to  writing ;  all  of  whom  shall  be  sworn  to  the 
faithful  performance  of  their  duty.  The  court  shall  have  the  same 
power  to  summon  witnesses  as  a  court-martial,  and  to  examine  them 
on  oath.  But  they  shall  not  give  their  opinion  on  the  merits  of 
the  case,  except  they  shall  be  thereto  specially  required.  The 
parties  accused  shall  also  be  permitted  to  cross-examine  and  interro- 
gate the  witnesses,  so  as  to  investigate  fully  the  circumstances  in  the 
question. 

Art.  92.  The  proceedings  of  a  court  of  inquiry  must  be  authenti- 
cated by  the  signature  of  the  recorder  and  the  President,  and  deliv- 
ered to  the  Commanding  Officer,  and  the  said  proceedings  may  be 
admitted  as  evidence  by  a  court-martial,  in  cases  not  capital,  or 
extending  to  the  dismission  of  an  officer,  provided  that  the  circum- 
stances are  such  that  oral  testimony  cannot  be  obtained.  But  as 
courts  of  inquiry  may  be  perverted  to  dishonorable  purposes,  and 
may  be  considered  as  engines  of  destruction  to  military  merit,  in  the 
hands  of  weak  and  envious  commandants,  they  are  hereby  prohibited, 
unless  directed  by  the  President  of  the  United  States,  or  demanded 
by  the  accused. 

Military.  20 


350  APPENDIX. 

Art.  93.  The  Judge- Advocate  or  recorder  shall  admmister  to  th« 
members  the  following  oath : 

"  You  shall  well  and  truly  examine  and  inquire,  according  to  your 
evidence,  into  the  matter  now  before  you,  without  partiality,  favor, 
aflfection,  prejudice  or  hope  of  reward.     So  help  you  God." 

After  which  the  President  shall  administer  to  the  Judge- Advocate 
or  recorder  the  following  oath : 

"  You,  A.  B.,  do  swear  that  you  will,  according  to  your  best  abili- 
ties, accurately  and  impartially  record  the  proceedings  of  the  court, 
and  the  evidence  to  be  given  in  the  case  in  hearing.  So  help  you 
God." 

The  witnesses  shall  take  the  same  oath  as  witnesses  sworn  before  a 
court-martial. 

Art.  94.  When  any  commissioned  officer  shall  die  or  be  killed  in 
the  service  of  the  United  States,  the  Major  of  the  regiment,  or  the 
officer  doing  the  Major's  duty  in  his  absence,  or,  in  any  post  or  garri- 
son, the  second  officer  in  command,  or  the  assistant  military  agent, 
shall  immediately  secure  all  his  eflFects  or  equipage,  then  in  camp  or 
quarters,  and  shall  make  an  inventory  thereof,  and  forthwith  trans- 
mit the  same  to  the  office  of  the  Department  of  War,  to  the  end  that 
his  executors  or  administrators  may  receive  the  same. 

Art.  95.  When  any  non-commissioned  officer  or  soldier  shall  die 
or  bo  killed  in  the  service  of  the  United  States,  the  then  Command- 
ing Officer  of  the  troop  or  company  shall,  in  the  presence  of  two 
other  commissioned  officers,  take  an  account  of  what  effiects  he  died 
possessed  of,  above  his  arms  and  accoutrements,  and  transmit  the 
same  to  the  office  of  the  Department  of  War,  which  said  eflfects  aro 
to  be  accounted  for  and  paid  to  the  representatives  of  such  deceased 
non-commissioned  officer  or  soldier.  And  in  case  any  of  the  officers, 
so  authorized  to  take  care  of  the  effects  of  deceased  officers  and  sol- 
diers, should,  before  they  have  accounted  to  their  representatives  for 
the  same,  liavo  occasion  to  leave  the  regiment  or  post,  by  preferment 
or  otherwise,  they  shall,  before  they  be  permitted  to  quit  the  same, 
deposit  in  the  hands  of  the  Commanding  Officer,  or  of  the  assistant 
military  agent,  all  the  effects  of  such  deceased  non-commissioned 


APPENDIX.  361 

officers  and  soldiers,  in  order  that  the  same  may  be  secured  for,  and 
paid  to,  their  respective  representatives. 

Art.  96.  All  officers,  conductors,  gunners,  matrosses,  drivers,  or 
other  persons  whatsoever,  receiving  pay  or  hire  in  the  service  of  the 
artillery  or  corps  of  engineers  of  the  United  States,  shall  he  governed 
by  the  aforesaid  rules  and  articles,  and  shall  be  subject  to  be  tried 
by  courts-martial,  in  like  manner  with  the  officers  and  soldiers  of  the 
other  troops  in  the  service  of  the  United  States. 

Akt.  97.  The  officers  and  soldiers  of  any  troops,  whether  militia  or 
others,  being  mustered  and  in  pay  of  the  United  States,  shall,  at  all 
times  and  in  all  places,  when  joined,  or  acting  in  conjunction  with  the 
regular  forces  of  the  United  States,  be  governed  by  these  rules  and 
articles  of  war,  and  shall  be  subject  to  be  tried  by  courts-martial,  in 
like  manner  with  the  officers  and  soldiers  in  the  regular  forces  ;  save 
only  that  such  courts-martial  shall  be  composed  entirely  of  militia 
officers. 

Art.  98.  All  officers,  serving  by  commission  from  the  authority  of 
any  particular  state,  shall,  on  all  detachments,  courts-martial  or  other 
duty,  wherein  they  may  be  employed  in  conjunction  with  the  regular 
forces  of  the  United  States,  take  rank  next  after  all  officers  of  the  like 
grade  in  said  regular  forces,  notwithstanding  the  commissions  of  such 
militia  or  state  officers  may  be  elder  than  the  commissions  of  the 
officers  of  the  regular  forces  of  the  United  States. 

Art.  99.  All  crimes  not  capital,  and  all  disorders  and  neglects, 
which  officers  and  soldiers  may  be  guilty  of,  to  the  prejudice  of  good 
order  and  military  discipline,  though  not  mentioned  in  the  foregoing 
articles  of  war,  are  to  be  taken  cognizance  of  by  a  general  or  regimen- 
tal court-martial,  according  to  the  nature  and  degree  of  the  oflfence, 
and  be  punished  at  their  discretion. 

Art,  100.  The  President  of  the  United  States  shall  have  power  to 
prescribe  the  uniform  of  the  army. 

Art.  101.  The  foregoing  articles  are  to  be  read  and  published,  once 
in  every  six  months,  to  every  garrison,  regiment,  troop  or  company, 
mustered,  or  to  be  mustered,  in  the  service  of  the  United  States,  and 


852  APPENDIX 

are  to  be  duly  observed  and  obeyed  by  all  officers  and  soldiers  who 
are,  or  shall  be,  in  said  service. 

Sec.  2.  jlnd  be  it  further  enacted^  That,  in  time  of  war,  all  persons, 
not  citizens  of,  or  owing  allegiance  to,  the  United  States  of  America, 
who  shall  be  found  lurking  as  spies  in  or  about  the  fortifications  or 
encampments  of  the  armies  of  the  United  States,  or  any  of  them,  shall 
suffer  death,  according  to  the  law  and  usage  of  nations,  by  sentence 
of  a  general  court-martial. 

Sec.  3.  jlnd  be  it  further  enacted  ^  That  the  rules  and  regulations  by 
which  the  armies  of  the  United  States  have  heretofore  been  governed, 
and  the  resolves  of  Congress,  thereunto  annexed  and  respecting  the 
same,  shall  henceforth  be  void  and  of  no  eflfect,  except  so  far  as  may 
relate  to  any  transactions  under  them  prior  to  the  promulgation  of 
this  act,  at  the  several  posts  and  garrisons  respectively  occupied  by 
any  part  of  the  army  of  the  United  States.  [Approved,  April  10, 
1806.] 


RETURN  TO  the  circulation  desk  of  any 

University  of  California  Library 

or  to  the 

NORTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY     ' 
BIdg.  400,  Richmond  Field  Station 
University  of  California 
Richmond,  CA  94804-4698 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 
2- month  loans  may  be  renewed  by  calling 

(510)642-6753 
1-year  loans  may  be  recharged  by  bringing  books 

to  NRLF 
Renewals    and    recharges    may    be    made    4    days 

prior  to  due  date 

DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 


SEP  1 1  ffl'^ 


I   20,000(4/94) 


YB 


ivil75909 


UBsof 


I . 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  UBRARY 


